Rules for Building and Classing

High Speed Craft

Part 4
Craft Systems and Machinery

January 2023
RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING

HIGH SPEED CRAFT

JANUARY 2023

PART 4
CRAFT SYSTEMS AND MACHINERY

American Bureau of Shipping

Incorporated by Act of Legislature of
the State of New York 1862

© 2023 American Bureau of Shipping. All rights reserved.

ABS Plaza
1701 City Plaza Drive
Spring, TX 77389 USA
 PART 4
Craft Systems and Machinery

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 General..................................................................................................1
Section 1 Classification of Machinery................................................ 3

CHAPTER 2 Prime Movers..................................................................................... 16

Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears........18
Section 2 Gas Turbines................................................................... 28
Section 3 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.................. 32

CHAPTER 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery.........................................33

Section 1 Propulsion Shafting..........................................................39
Section 2 Propellers.........................................................................54
Section 3 Steering Gear.................................................................. 69
Section 4 Waterjets..........................................................................86
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy...................................................88
Section 6 Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft............97
Section 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.................. 99

CHAPTER 4 Pumps and Piping Systems............................................................102

Section 1 General Provisions........................................................ 109
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings.................................118
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks............................150
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks........... 166
Section 5 Internal Combustion Engine Systems............................174
Section 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems................................ 175
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks...................................179

CHAPTER 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems............................................................185

Section 1 All Craft.......................................................................... 188
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over........ 198
Section 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons..............211
Section 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.............. 214

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 ii
 CHAPTER 6 Electrical Installations..................................................................... 217
Section 1 General.......................................................................... 226
Section 2 Shipboard Systems........................................................236
Section 3 Shipboard Installation.................................................... 270
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment............................................. 303
Section 5 Specialized Installations................................................ 348
Section 6 Specialized Craft and Services......................................374
Section 7 Craft Less Than 24 Meters (79 feet) in Length.............. 376

CHAPTER 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation................................377

Section 1 General Provisions........................................................ 384
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control ...........................................395
Section 3 ACCU Notation.............................................................. 405
Section 4 Craft Classed with ABCU Notation................................ 428
Section 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater
Than 24 meters (79 feet)............................................... 429
Section 6 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.............. 433
Section 7 Installation, Tests and Trials ..........................................434
Section 8 Computer-based Systems ............................................ 436
Appendix 1 - Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests
and Evidence of Quality Assurance in 4-7-8/9.3.3
TABLE 2.........................................................................445
Section 9 Equipment......................................................................449

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 iii
 PART 4
CHAPTER 1
General

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 Classification of Machinery................................................................ 3
1 General........................................................................................... 3
3 Certification of Machinery............................................................... 3
3.1 Basic Requirements...........................................................3
3.3 Type Approval Program..................................................... 4
3.5 Non-mass Produced Machinery........................................ 4
3.7 Details of Certification of Some Representative
Products.............................................................................4
3.9 ABS Marking on Finished Components and Equipment....4
5 Shipboard Automatic or Remote Control and Monitoring
Systems.......................................................................................... 5
7 Machinery Plans and Data..............................................................5
7.1 General.............................................................................. 5
7.3 Automation and Remote Control Systems.........................5
7.5 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers.............. 6
7.7 Electrical Systems............................................................. 6
7.9 Fire Safety......................................................................... 7
7.11 Gas Turbines..................................................................... 7
7.13 Diesel Engines...................................................................7
7.15 Lift Devices........................................................................ 7
7.17 Piping Systems.................................................................. 7
7.19 Propellers...........................................................................8
7.21 Reduction Gears................................................................9
7.23 Shafting..............................................................................9
7.25 Steering Gears...................................................................9
7.27 Steering Vanes.................................................................. 9
7.29 Thrusters (Steerable, Athwartship).................................... 9
7.31 Waterjets............................................................................9
7.33 Windlass or Winch........................................................... 10
9 Machinery..................................................................................... 10
11 Machinery Spaces........................................................................ 10
13 Definitions..................................................................................... 10

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 1
 13.1 Category A Machinery Spaces........................................ 10
13.3 Machinery Spaces........................................................... 10
13.5 Oil Fuel Unit..................................................................... 10
13.7 Accommodation Spaces.................................................. 10
13.9 Public Spaces.................................................................. 11
13.11 Service Spaces................................................................ 11
13.13 Cargo Spaces.................................................................. 11
13.15 Special Category Spaces.................................................11
13.17 Sources of Ignition........................................................... 11
13.19 Vital Systems................................................................... 11
13.21 Cargo Craft...................................................................... 12
13.23 Dead Craft Condition....................................................... 12
13.25 Blackout........................................................................... 12
15 Astern Propulsion Power.............................................................. 12
15.1 General............................................................................ 12
17 Inclinations....................................................................................12
19 Dead Craft Start............................................................................13
21 Machinery Equations.................................................................... 13
23 Machinery Space Ventilation........................................................ 13
25 Engineers’ Alarm.......................................................................... 13
27 Automatic Trips.............................................................................13
29 Thrusters and Dynamic Positioning Systems............................... 13
31 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Turbines....................................... 13
33 Sea Trial........................................................................................13
33.1 General............................................................................ 13
33.3 Residual Fuel...................................................................14
35 Units..............................................................................................14
37 Materials Containing Asbestos..................................................... 14
39 Ambient Temperature................................................................... 14

TABLE 1 Machine Installations – Inclinations......................................14

TABLE 2 Ambient Temperatures for Unrestricted Service.................. 14

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 2
 PART 4
CHAPTER 1
General

SECTION 1
Classification of Machinery

1 General
The provisions of Part 1, Chapter 1, “Scope and Conditions of Classification,” are applicable to the
classification of machinery.

3 Certification of Machinery

3.1 Basic Requirements

These Rules define, to varying degrees, the extent of evaluation required for products, machinery,
equipment and their components based on the level of criticality of each of those items. There are three
basic evaluation constituents:

● Design review; prototype testing;

● Survey during construction and testing at the plant of manufacture; and
● Survey during installation onboard the craft and at trials.

Where design review is required by these Rules, a letter will be issued by ABS upon satisfactory review of
the plans to evidence the acceptance of the design. In addition to, or independent of, design review, ABS
may require survey and testing of forgings, castings and component parts at the various manufacturers’
plants as well as survey and testing of the finished product. A certificate or report will be issued upon
satisfactory completion of each survey to evidence acceptance of the forging, casting, component or
finished product. Design review, survey and the issuance of reports or certificates constitute the
certification of machinery.

Based on the intended service and application, some products do not require certification because they are
not directly related to the scope of classification or because normal practices for their construction within
the industry are considered adequate. Such products may be accepted based on the manufacturers’
documentation on design and quality.

In general, surveys during installation onboard the craft and at trials are required for all items of
machinery. This is not considered a part of the product certification process. There may be instances,
however, where letters or certificates issued for items of machinery contain conditions which must be
verified during installation, tests or trials.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 3
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

3.3 Type Approval Program

Products that can be consistently manufactured to the same design and specification may be Type
Approved under the ABS Type Approval Program. The ABS Type Approval Program is a voluntary option
for the demonstration of the compliance of a product with the Rules or other recognized standards. It may
be applied at the request of the designer or manufacturer. The ABS Type Approval Program generally
covers Product Type Approval (1-1-4/11.9.3), but is also applicable for a more expeditious procedure
towards Unit-Certification, as specified in 1-1-4/11.9.2.

See the ABS Type Approval Program in Appendix 1-1-A2. The ABS Type Approval Program and the
indicated references are available for download from the ABS website at http://www.eagle.org.

3.5 Non-mass Produced Machinery

Non-mass produced critical machinery, such as propulsion boilers, slow speed diesel engines, turbines,
steering gears and similar critical items are to be individually unit certified in accordance with the
procedure described in 4-1-1/3.1. However, consideration will be given to granting Type Approval to such
machinery in the category of Recognized Quality System (RQS). The category of Product Quality
Assurance (PQA) will not normally be available for all products, and such limitations will be indicated in
4-1-1/Table 1 through 4-1-1/Table 6 of the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Marine Vessels (MVR). In
each instance where Type Approval is granted, in addition to quality assurance and quality control
assessment of the manufacturing facilities, ABS will require some degree of product-specific survey
during manufacture.

3.7 Details of Certification of Some Representative Products

4-1-1/Tables 1 through 6 of the Marine Vessel Rules provide abbreviated certification requirements of
representative machinery based on the basic requirements of the Rules for machinery. The tables also
provide the applicability of the Type Approval Program for each of these machinery items.

For easy reference, the tables contain six product categories, as follows:

● Prime movers
● Propulsion, maneuvering and mooring machinery
● Electrical and control equipment
● Fire safety equipment
● Boilers, pressure vessels, fired equipment
● Piping system components

3.9 ABS Marking on Finished Components and Equipment (2021)

All finished component/equipment issued with unit certificates are to be permanently marked at an
accessible location for identification and traceability. The identification shall include but not limited to the
model number or part number, serial number and other data that may be necessary to comply with any
other ABS Rule requirements.

At the request of the manufacturer, an ABS Marking may be applied. The marking shall include the ABS
mark (✠) and a unique identification number generated by ABS.

An example of ABS marking: ✠ 123456.

Markings are to be permanently marked (i.e. steel-die-stamped, laser etched, etc.) at an accessible location
by the manufacturer on each finished component or equipment.

ABS Certificates for the components and equipment are to be provided to the responsible party (e.g. owner
or shipyard) and Surveyor at installation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 4
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

5 Shipboard Automatic or Remote Control and Monitoring Systems

Automatic or remote control and monitoring systems associated with propulsion machinery and
monitoring systems of propulsion-machinery space installed onboard classed craft are to comply with the
requirements in Section 4-7-1 and Section 4-7-2 or Section 4-7-4 or Section 4-7-6, as applicable.
Additionally, where requested by the Owner and provided that compliance with Section 4-7-3 or Section
4-7-4 is met, the aforementioned systems will be assigned the optional notations ACCU or ABCU,
respectively. See Section 4-7-1.

7 Machinery Plans and Data

The following plans and data, as applicable for each craft to be built under survey, are to be submitted and
approved before construction is commenced, in accordance with Section 1-1-6. The sizes, dimensions,
welding and other details, make and size of standard approved appliances are to be shown on the plans as
clearly and fully as possible.

7.1 General
Details of dead craft start arrangements (see 4-1-1/19)

Description of all automatic trips that may affect the craft’s propulsion system

7.3 Automation and Remote Control Systems

A list of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic equipment associated with the particular systems, including the
data listed in 4-7-1/7

A list of all major components installed within the particular equipment (i.e., control console, etc.) and the
data as required in 4-7-1/7

Certificates or test reports attesting to the suitability of the particular equipment in compliance with the
environmental criteria set forth in Section 4-7-7 and Section 4-7-9, as applicable. For equipment that have
been already certified by ABS and provided their certification remains valid, the submission of a copy of
pertinent certificate will suffice (see 4-7-9/13.15).

Plans showing the location of control and monitoring stations, controlled equipment and piping/cable runs,
etc.

Arrangements and details of the control consoles and panels, including plan views and elevation details,
installation details and wiring data as listed in 4-7-1/7.5

A list of all cables connecting equipment associated with the systems (see 4-7-1/7.7.2)

A complete operational description of the automatic or remote control and monitoring systems (see
4-7-1/7.3)

A simplified one-line diagram (electrical and piping) of all power and automatic or remote control and
monitoring systems (see 4-7-1/7.3.11)

A schematic diagram of all control, alarm, display and safety systems

For computer-based systems, the following is to be included:

● Overall description and specification of the systems and equipment

● Block diagrams for the computer hardware showing interfacing between the work stations, input/
output (I/O) units, local controllers, traffic controllers, data highways, etc.
● Logic flow chart or ladder diagrams

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 5
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

● Description of the alarm system indicating the ways it is acknowledged, displayed on the monitor or
mimic display board, etc.
● Description of the system redundancy and back-up equipment, if any
● Description of the data communication protocol, including anticipated data process response delays
● Description of the system’s security protocol to prevent unauthorized program changes which may
compromise the integrity of the automatic or remote systems
● Description of the system with regard to the degree of independence or redundancy provided for the
control systems, alarm/display systems and safety systems
● Description of system’s task priorities
● Where applicable, description of UPS (uninterruptible power supply) and their capacities, including
system’s power consumption
● Equipment ratings and environmental parameters

Installation methods (electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic) (see 4-7-9/13)

7.5 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

Arrangements and details of boilers, pressure vessels and heat exchangers required by Part 4, Chapter 4 of
the Marine Vessel Rules

Plans and data for hydraulic and pneumatic power cylinders, as required by 4-4-6/3

7.7 Electrical Systems

One line diagrams for the following electrical systems containing the information specified in 4-6-2/1.1.2.

● Power supply and distribution

● Lighting including navigation lights
● Internal communication
● General emergency alarm
● Fire detection and alarm
● Steering gear control
● Intrinsically-safe equipment
● Emergency generator starting
● Inert gas control, monitoring and alarm
● Semiconductor converters for propulsion

Short-circuit data (see 4-6-6/1.3)

Protective device coordination study (see 4-6-2/1.5)

Electric-plant load analysis (see 4-6-2/1.7)

Booklet of standard wiring practices and details (see 4-6-3/1.1)

General arrangement plan of electrical equipment showing the location of the equipment listed in 4-6-3/1.3

Location of splices and cable boxes together with information of their services

Hazardous area plan (see 4-6-3/1.5)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 6
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

List of all equipment in hazardous areas (see 4-6-3/1.5)

Details of electrical components, as required by 4-6-4/1

7.9 Fire Safety

Arrangement and details of control station for emergency closing of openings and stopping machinery

Details and location of fireman’s outfits

Details of fire extinguishing appliances

Fire control plans (see 4-5-1/1.9)

Plans of the following systems:

● Fire main system

● Foam smothering system
● Fire detection systems
● Fixed gas extinguishing system
● Fixed water spraying system

Other fire extinguishing arrangements

For craft 500 GRT and over, the most severe service condition for the operation of the emergency fire
pump (e.g., lightest draft as shown in Trim and Stability Booklet, etc.)

For craft 500 GRT and over, calculations and pump data demonstrating that the emergency fire pump
system can meet the operational requirements specified in 4-5-2/5.3.3 and 4-5-2/5.3.6 with the proposed
pump location and piping arrangements (e.g., adequate suction lift, discharge pressure, capacity, etc.) at the
most severe service condition

7.11 Gas Turbines

Plans and particulars as required by Section 4-2-3 of the Marine Vessel Rules

Additionally, details of the manufacturer’s proposed automatic safety devices in accordance with 4-2-2/1.7
of these Rules

7.13 Diesel Engines

Plans and particulars as required by Section 4-2-1 of the Marine Vessel Rules

7.15 Lift Devices

Details and material specifications of torque transmitting parts

Design basis stress calculations for the propellers, impellers, shafting, gears, belt drives, couplings, keys,
bearings, and control mechanism (see Section 4-3-6)

7.17 Piping Systems (2023)

Diagrammatic plans, as applicable, of the following piping systems containing the information specified in
4-4-1/3.3:

● Ballast system (Including any Ballast Water Treatment)

● Bilge system (gravity drains, weather deck drains, helideck drains, as applicable)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 7
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

● Cargo systems
● Compressed air systems (including starting air systems and control systems)
● Cooling water systems
● Deck drains and scuppers
● Exhaust gas systems (for boilers, incinerators and engines)
● Exhaust Gas Cleaning System (as applicable, see 6-3-1/9.11 of the Marine Vessel Rules)
● Ventilation
● Crankcase ventilation
● Fire-fighting systems
● Essential fresh water service systems
● Fuel oil filling, transfer and service systems
● Hydraulic power piping systems
● Lubricating oil systems
● Potable water system
● Sanitary system
● Essential Sea water service systems
● Steam system
● Vent, sounding and overflow piping
● Systems conveying toxic liquids, liquids with a flash point below 60°C (140°F), or flammable gases
● All Group I piping systems not covered above unless it is part of an independently manufactured unit
(such as air conditioning or refrigeration) that does not form part of a craft’s piping system

A booklet of standard piping practices and details (see 4-4-1/3.5)

Plans of molded or built-up flexible expansion joints in piping systems over 150 mm (6 in.), including
details of the reinforcement arrangements (see 4-4-1/9.7)

Specifications for plastic pipes and components, including thermal and mechanical properties and chemical
resistance (see 4-4-2/7, 4-4-2/9.11 and 4-4-1/9.7)

Drawings of non-standard valves and fittings showing details of construction, materials and basis for
pressure rating (see 4-4-2/11.1.2 and 4-4-2/13.5)

Valve operating systems for all remote-controlled valves

7.19 Propellers
For all propellers (air or water), a propeller plan giving design data and characteristics of the material

For skewed propellers or propeller blades of unusual design, a detailed stress analysis, as required by
4-3-2/5.5 or 4-3-2/5.7

For controllable pitch propellers, plans of the propeller hub, propeller blade flange and bolts, internal
mechanisms, hydraulic piping control systems, and instrumentation and alarm systems; also strength
calculations for the internal mechanism

Detailed stress calculations and fitting instructions for keyless propeller connections

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 8
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

7.21 Reduction Gears

Arrangements, details and data as required by Section 4-3-1 of the Marine Vessel Rules

7.23 Shafting (2019)

Detailed plans with material specifications of the propulsion shafting, couplings, coupling bolts, propulsion
shafting arrangement, tailshaft bearings and lubrication system, if oil-lubricated

Calculations for flexible couplings and demountable couplings (see 4-2-1/17 and 4-3-1/19.7)

Shaft alignment and vibration calculations, if required by 4-3-1/27

Detailed preloading and stress calculations and fitting instructions for non-fitted coupling bolts (see
4-3-1/19.3)

Thrust plate calculations

7.25 Steering Gears

General arrangements of the main and auxiliary steering gears and steering compartment

Assembly of upper rudder stock, tiller, tie rod, rudder actuators, etc.

Construction details of all torque-transmitting components such as tiller, tiller pin, tiller/rudder stock
interference fit mechanism, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc., including bill of materials, welding procedures
and nondestructive testing, as applicable

Control system incorporating schematic electrical control logic diagram, instrumentation, alarm devices,
etc., and including bill of materials

Design calculations for torque-transmitting components such as tiller, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc.

Details of electrical power supply to power units and to steering gear control, including schematic diagram
of motor controllers, feeder cables and feeder cable electrical protection

Rated torque of main steering gear

Schematic hydraulic piping plan incorporating hydraulic logic diagram and including bill of materials,
typical pipe to pipe joint details, pipe to valve joint details, pipe to equipment joint details, pressure rating
of valves and pipe fittings and pressure relief valve settings

7.27 Steering Vanes

Details and material specifications of torque transmitting parts

Airfoil analysis including vane freestream characteristics (lift and drag characteristics)

Control system arrangements

7.29 Thrusters (Steerable, Athwartship)

Drawings and data as per 4-3-5/1.7 of the Marine Vessel Rules

7.31 Waterjets
Details and material specifications of force transmitting parts

Design basis stress calculations for the impellers, shafting, steering mechanism and reversing mechanism
(see 4-3-4/3)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 9
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

Calculations or test results to substantiate the suitability and strength of the pressure and suction housing
(see 4-3-4/5)

7.33 Windlass or Winch

Arrangements, details and stress calculations for the windlass or winch, drums, brakes, shaft, gears,
coupling bolts, wildcat, sheaves, pulleys and foundation.

Control arrangements

Electric one-line diagram, including power ratings and cable specifications

Piping system diagram, including working pressures, welding details, material specifications and pipe
specifications

9 Machinery
Rotating machinery of 100 kilowatts (135 horsepower) and over is to be in accordance with the
requirements of Part 4, Chapters 1 through 6, as applicable. Machinery of less than 100 kilowatts (135
horsepower) is to be designed, constructed and equipped in accordance with good commercial practice,
and will be accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor
after installation.

11 Machinery Spaces
Machinery spaces are to be arranged so as to provide access to all machinery and controls as necessary for
operation or maintenance.

13 Definitions
For the purpose of machinery installations, electrical installations, periodically unattended machinery
spaces, fire protection, fire detection and fire extinction, the following terms are defined:

13.1 Category A Machinery Spaces

Machinery spaces of Category A are those spaces and trunks to such spaces that contain: internal
combustion machinery used for main propulsion; internal combustion machinery used for purposes other
than main propulsion, where such machinery has an aggregate total power output of not less than 375 kW
(500 HP); oil fired equipment such as an incinerator, waste disposal unit, etc.; or any oil fuel units.

13.3 Machinery Spaces

Machinery spaces are Category A spaces and all other spaces containing propelling machinery, internal
combustion engines, boilers, generators, major electrical equipment, refrigerating, stabilizing, ventilation
and air conditioning machinery, similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.

13.5 Oil Fuel Unit

An oil-fuel unit is any equipment, such as pumps, filters and heaters, used for the preparation and delivery
of fuel oil to oil-fired boilers (including incinerators, internal combustion engines or gas turbines at a
pressure of more than 1.8 bar (1.8 kgf/cm2, 26 psi).

13.7 Accommodation Spaces

Accommodation spaces are those spaces used for public spaces, corridors, lavatories, cabins, offices,
hospitals, cinemas, games and hobbies rooms, barber shops, pantries containing no cooking appliances and
similar spaces.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 10
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

13.9 Public Spaces

Public spaces are those portions of the accommodations which are used for meeting halls, dining rooms,
lounges and similar permanently enclosed spaces.

13.11 Service Spaces

Service spaces are those spaces used for galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers, mail and
specie rooms, storerooms, workshops other than those forming part of the machinery spaces, similar spaces
and trunks to such spaces.

13.13 Cargo Spaces

Cargo spaces are all spaces used for cargo (including cargo oil tanks) and trunks to such spaces.

13.15 Special Category Spaces

Special category spaces are those enclosed spaces above or below the bulkhead deck intended for the
carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such
vehicles can be driven and to which passengers have access.

13.17 Sources of Ignition

Sources of ignition are considered to include a flame, arc, spark and electrical equipment, machinery and
other equipment having hot surfaces with the potential of causing a non-intentional explosion or fire when
exposed to an explosive or flammable atmosphere or material.

13.19 Vital Systems

Vital systems are those systems necessary for the craft’s survivability and safety, including:

i) Systems for fill, transfer and service of fuel oil.

ii) Fire-main systems, including emergency fire pump.
iii) Other required fire-extinguishing and detection systems.
iv) Bilge systems, including emergency bilge suction.
v) Ballast systems.
vi) Steering systems and steering control systems.
vii) Propulsion systems and their necessary auxiliaries (fuel oil, lube oil, cooling water, starting
system, etc.) and control systems.
viii) Systems for transfer and control of cargo.
ix) Craft’s service and emergency electrical generation systems and their auxiliaries (fuel oil, lube oil,
cooling water, starting system, etc.) and control systems.
x) Venting and sounding systems.
xi) Engine room ventilation systems.
xii) Other required ventilation systems.
xiii) Controllable pitch propeller systems, including controls.
xiv) Electrical power and lighting systems.
xv) Systems used for navigation.
xvi) Required communication and alarm systems.
xvii) Hydraulic systems for anchor windlass/winch.
xviii) Systems necessary due to special characteristics or special service of a craft.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 11
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

xix) Any other system identified by ABS as crucial to the survival of the craft or to the protection of
the personnel aboard.

13.21 Cargo Craft

Any craft other than a passenger craft, which is capable of maintaining the main functions of safety
systems of unaffected spaces after damage in any one compartment on board. The notation Cargo Craft
defines a craft that is certified in accordance with the IMO International Code of Safety for High-Speed
Craft.

13.23 Dead Craft Condition

Dead craft condition means a condition under which:

i) The main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliary machinery are not in operation due to the loss of
the main source of electrical power, and
ii) In restoring propulsion, the stored energy for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of
electrical power and other essential auxiliary machinery is assumed to be not available.

13.25 Blackout (1 July 2022)

Blackout situation means the loss of the main and auxiliary machinery installations, including the main
power supply, are out of operation, but the services for bringing them into operation (e.g., compressed air,
starting current from batteries, etc.) are available.

15 Astern Propulsion Power

15.1 General (1 July 2018)

Sufficient power for going astern is to be provided to secure proper control of the craft in all normal
circumstances. The astern power of the main propelling machinery is to be capable of maintaining in free
route astern at least 70% of the ahead rpm corresponding to the maximum continuous ahead power. For
main propulsion systems with reversing gears, controllable pitch propellers or electric propulsion drive,
running astern is not to lead to overload of the propulsion machinery.

Main propulsion systems are to undergo tests to demonstrate the astern response characteristics. The tests
are to be carried out at least over the maneuvering range of the propulsion system and from all control
positions. A test plan is to be provided by the yard and accepted by the surveyor. If specific operational
characteristics have been defined by the manufacturer these shall be included in the test plan. The ability of
the machinery, including the blade pitch control system of controllable pitch propellers, to reverse the
direction of thrust of the propeller in sufficient time, and so to bring the vessel to rest within a reasonable
distance from maximum ahead service speed, is to be demonstrated and recorded during trials.

17 Inclinations (1 July 2022)

Machinery installations are to be designed to enable proper operations under the conditions as shown in
4-1-1/39 TABLE 1.

The equipment manufacturer is to submit:

● Test reports showing operation under maximum angles of inclination, or

● Calculations or simulation, or
● Evidence of satisfactory service experience

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 12
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

19 Dead Craft Start

Means are to be provided to bring the machinery into operation from a “dead craft” condition as defined in
4-1-1/13.23. See 4-6-2/3.1.3 and 4-6-3/3.27 for the required starting arrangements.

21 Machinery Equations
The equations for rotating parts of the machinery in the following sections are based upon strength
considerations only. Their application does not relieve the manufacturer from responsibility for the
presence of dangerous vibrations in the installation at speeds within the operating range. See also 4-3-1/21.

23 Machinery Space Ventilation

Machinery spaces are to be ventilated so as to ensure that when machinery is operating at full power in all
weather conditions, including heavy weather, an adequate supply of air is maintained for operation of the
machinery and safety of the personnel.

25 Engineers’ Alarm
Engineers’ alarms are required on craft of 500 gross tons and over, which are intended for international
voyages. An engineers’ alarm is to be operable from the main propulsion control station. It is to be audible
in the engineers’ accommodations. See 4-6-2/17.3.

27 Automatic Trips
A description of all automatic trips that may affect the craft’s propulsion system is to be submitted for
review.

29 Thrusters and Dynamic Positioning Systems

Compliance with Section 4-3-5 of the Marine Vessel Rules is required as a condition for Class for main
propulsion thrusters and is optional for propulsion-assist thrusters and athwartship thrusters. Dynamic
positioning systems, including their thrusters, are to comply with the ABS Guide for Dynamic Positioning
Systems.

31 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Turbines

When fitted, boilers and pressure vessels are to be designed and constructed in accordance with Part 4,
Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel Rules. Turbines are to comply with Section 4-2-3 and Section 4-2-4 of the
Marine Vessel Rules.

33 Sea Trial

33.1 General
A final underway trial is to be made of all machinery, including the steering gear, anchor windlass and
ground tackle. The entire installation is to be operated in the presence of the Surveyor to demonstrate its
reliability and capability to function satisfactorily under operating conditions and its freedom from harmful
vibrations within the operating range. The ability of the machinery to reverse the direction of thrust of the
propeller from maximum ahead speed and to bring the craft to rest is to be demonstrated on sea trials to the
satisfaction of the Surveyor.

All automatic controls, including trips which may affect the craft’s propulsion system, are to be tested
underway or alongside the pier to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

See also 4-3-3/15.3, 4-2-1/19 and 4-2-1/21.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 13
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

33.3 Residual Fuel

The viscosity of the fuel used on the sea trial will be entered in the classification report.

35 Units
These Rules are written in three systems of units, i.e., SI units, MKS units and US customary units. Each
system is to be used independently of any other system. Unless indicated otherwise, the format
presentation in these Rules of the three systems of units is as follows:

SI units (MKS units, US customary units).

37 Materials Containing Asbestos

Installation of materials which contain asbestos is prohibited.

39 Ambient Temperature
For craft of unrestricted service, ambient temperature, as indicated in 4-1-1/39 TABLE 2, is to be
considered in the selection and installation of machinery, equipment and appliances. For craft of restricted
(see 1-2-2/7) or special service, the ambient temperature appropriate to the special nature is to be
considered.

TABLE 1
Machine Installations – Inclinations (2020)

Angle of Inclination, Degrees (1)

Athwartships Fore & Aft

Installations, Components Static Dynamic Static Dynamic

Main and auxiliary machinery 15 22.5 5 7.5

Safety Equipment

emergency power installations (3) 22.5 22.5 10 10

emergency fire pumps and their drives 22.5 22.5 10 10

Switchgear

electrical and electronic appliances and remote 22.5 (2) 22.5 (2) 10 10
control systems

Notes:

1 Athwartships and fore-aft inclinations occur simultaneously.

2 Switches and controls are to remain in their last set position (no undesired switching operations or operational
changes are to occur).

3 In craft designed for the carriage of liquefied gases and of chemicals, the emergency power installation is to
remain operable with the craft flooded to its permissible athwartships inclination up to a maximum of 30
degrees.

TABLE 2
Ambient Temperatures for Unrestricted Service (1 July 2019)

Air

Installations, Location, Arrangement (1, 2) Temperature Range (°C)

Components

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 14
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Classification of Machinery 4-1-1

Machinery and Enclosed Spaces – General 0 to +45

electrical installations
Components mounted on machinery associated According to specific machinery and
with high temperature installation

In spaces subject to higher temperature (details According to the actual maximum ambient
to be submitted) temperature

In spaces with temperature lower than +45°C According to the actual ambient temperature
(details to be submitted) subject to minimum +40

Open Deck(3) −25 to +45

Water

Coolant Temperature (°C)

Seawater +32

Notes:

1 (2014) Electronic equipment is to be suitable for operations up to 55°C.

2 (2014) For environmentally controlled spaces, see 4-6-1/17.3. For automatic or remote control and monitoring
systems required to meet 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 or 4-9-9/15.7 TABLE 1 of the Marine Vessel Rules, see test 3
of 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9, or test 4-9-9/15.7 TABLE 1 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

3 Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems of equipment for essential services (item (m) of 4-6-1/21.3
TABLE 4 and item (s) of 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 5 when located on the open deck are to be rated at -25°C to
+45°C. However, the ambient temperature above -25°C may be acceptable provided that the selected ambient
temperature is specified in the contract specification or the vessel operation manual.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 15
 PART 4
CHAPTER 2
Prime Movers

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears......................18
1 General......................................................................................... 18
1.1 Construction and Installation........................................... 18
1.3 Piping Systems................................................................ 18
1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers......................... 18
1.7 Torsional Vibration Stresses............................................ 18
1.9 Crankcase Ventilation...................................................... 18
1.11 Warning Notices...............................................................19
1.13 Bedplate...........................................................................19
1.15 Engine Air Intake System................................................ 19
3 Fuel Oil Pumps and Oil Heaters................................................... 19
3.1 Transfer Pumps............................................................... 19
3.3 Booster Pumps (2017).....................................................19
3.5 Heaters............................................................................ 20
5 Fuel Oil Pressure Piping............................................................... 20
7 Fuel Oil Injection System.............................................................. 20
7.1 General............................................................................ 20
7.3 Piping Between Injection Pump and Injectors................. 20
7.5 Piping Between Booster Pump and Injection Pumps...... 21
9 Lubricating Oil Systems................................................................ 21
9.1 General............................................................................ 21
9.3 Low Oil Pressure Alarms, Temperature and Level
Indicators (2017)..............................................................21
9.5 Drain Pipes...................................................................... 21
9.7 Lubricating Oil Pumps (2014).......................................... 21
9.9 Filters............................................................................... 22
9.11 Lubricating-Oil Systems for Reduction Gears..................22
11 Cooling Water Systems................................................................ 23
11.1 General............................................................................ 23
11.3 Sea Suctions....................................................................23
11.5 Strainers.......................................................................... 23
11.7 Circulating Water Pumps (2014)......................................23

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 16
 13 Starting Systems...........................................................................23
13.1 Starting Air Systems (2013).............................................23
13.3 Starting Air Capacity (2013).............................................24
13.5 Starting Air Compressors.................................................24
13.7 Protective Devices for Starting-air Mains.........................25
13.9 Electrical Starting.............................................................25
13.11 Hydraulic Starting............................................................ 25
15 Engine Exhaust Systems..............................................................25
15.1 General............................................................................ 25
15.3 Exhaust System Materials............................................... 26
15.5 Exhaust Gas Temperature............................................... 26
15.7 Exhaust Emission Abatement Systems........................... 26
17 Couplings......................................................................................26
17.1 Flexible Shaft Couplings (2014).......................................26
17.3 Flanged Couplings and Coupling Bolts............................27
19 Testing of Pumps Associated with Engine and Reduction
Gear Operation ............................................................................ 27
19.1 Pumps Hydrostatic Tests................................................. 27
19.3 Capacity Tests................................................................. 27
21 Trial...............................................................................................27

SECTION 2 Gas Turbines...................................................................................... 28

1 General ........................................................................................ 28
1.1 Construction and Installation........................................... 28
1.3 Piping Systems................................................................ 28
1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers......................... 28
1.7 Automatic Safety Devices................................................28
3 Fuel Oil System............................................................................ 29
3.1 General............................................................................ 29
3.3 Pumps, Heater and Strainers.......................................... 29
3.5 Shielding of Fuel Oil Service Piping.................................29
3.7 Fuel Oil Shutoff................................................................ 29
3.9 Drainage of Excess Fuel..................................................29
3.11 Low Flash Point Fuel for Gas Turbines............................29
5 Starting Arrangements..................................................................30
7 Exhaust Systems.......................................................................... 30
9 Turbine Enclosures.......................................................................30
11 Turbines Driving Generators.........................................................31

SECTION 3 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.................................. 32

1 Diesel Engines..............................................................................32
1.1 Sea Suction..................................................................... 32
3 Gas Turbines................................................................................ 32

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 17
 PART 4
CHAPTER 2
Prime Movers

SECTION 1
Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears

1 General

1.1 Construction and Installation (2023)

Internal combustion engines of 100 kW [135 horsepower (hp)] and over and associated reduction gears are
to be constructed in accordance with Part 4, Chapters 2 and 3 of the Marine Vessel Rules and installed in
accordance with the following requirements to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. Engines of less than 100
kW (135 hp) and associated reduction gears are to be constructed and equipped in accordance with good
commercial practice, and will be accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the
satisfaction of the Surveyor after installation.

For engines driving generators, refer to the applicable requirements of 4-6-4/3.17 and 4-6-4/3.19.

Additional requirements for exhaust emission abatement equipment connected to internal combustion
engines or boilers are provided in Part 6, Chapter 3 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

1.3 Piping Systems

In addition to requirements for the specific system in this section, piping systems are to comply with the
applicable requirements in Part 4, Chapter 4.

1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

Pressure vessels and heat exchangers are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Part 4,
Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

1.7 Torsional Vibration Stresses

Refer to 4-3-1/27.

1.9 Crankcase Ventilation

1.9.1 General
Provision is to be made for ventilation of an enclosed crankcase by means of a small breather or
by means of a slight suction not exceeding 25.4 mm (1 in.) of water. Crankcases are not to be
ventilated by a blast of air. Otherwise, the general arrangements and installation are to be such as
to preclude the possibility of free entry of air to the crankcase.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 18
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

1.9.2 Piping Arrangement

Crankcase ventilation piping is not to be directly connected with any other piping system.
Crankcase ventilation pipes from each engine are normally to be led independently to the weather
and fitted with corrosion-resistant flame screens. However, crankcase ventilation pipes from two
or more engines may lead to a common oil mist manifold.

Where a common oil mist manifold is employed, the vent pipes from each engine are to be led
independently to the manifold and fitted with a corrosion-resistant flame screen within the
manifold. The arrangement is not to violate the engine manufacturer’s recommendations for
crankcase ventilation. The common oil mist manifold is to be accessible at all times under normal
conditions and effectively vented to the weather. Where venting of the manifold to the weather is
accomplished by means of a common vent pipe, the location of the manifold is to be as close as
practicable to the weather such that the length of the common vent pipe is no greater than one
deck height. The clear open area of the common vent pipe is not to be less than the aggregate
cross-sectional area of the individual vent pipes entering the manifold. The manifold is also to be
fitted with an appropriate draining arrangement.

1.11 Warning Notices

Suitable warning notices are to be attached in a conspicuous place on each engine and are to caution
against the opening of a hot crankcase for a specified period of time after shutdown based upon the size of
the engine, but not less than 10 minutes in any case. Such notice is also to warn against restarting an
overheated engine until the cause of overheating has been remedied.

1.13 Bedplate
The bedplate or crankcase is to be of rigid construction, oiltight, and provided with a sufficient number of
bolts to secure the same to the craft’s structure. The structural arrangements for supporting and securing
the main engines are to be submitted for approval. Refer to 3-2-5/1.1.3 for structural requirements. For
welded construction, see also Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

1.15 Engine Air Intake System

Engine Air intakes are to be provided with filters to protect against damage from foreign matter.

3 Fuel Oil Pumps and Oil Heaters

3.1 Transfer Pumps

Refer to 4-4-4/3.

3.3 Booster Pumps (2017)

3.3.1 Standby Pump, Single Engine Installation.
An independently driven standby pump is to be provided for each service pump, booster pump and
other pumps serving the same purpose.

The capacity of the pumps, with any one pump out of service, is to be sufficient for continuous
operation at rated power.

3.3.2 Standby Pump, Multiple Engine Installation.

For craft fitted with two or more propulsion engines, the provision of a common standby pump
(for each service pump, booster pump, etc.) capable of serving all engines sufficient for
continuous operation at rated power will suffice rather than providing individual standby pumps
for each engine.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 19
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

3.3.3 Attached Pumps.

For multiple engine installations, engines having service, booster or similar pumps attached to and
driven by the engine may, in lieu of the standby pump, be provided with a complete pump carried
on board as a spare. The spare pump, upon being installed, is to allow the operation of the engine
at rated power.

The spare pump need not be carried, provided that, in the event of the loss of one engine, at least
forty percent of the total rated propulsion power remains.

3.5 Heaters
When fuel oil heaters are required for main engine operation, at least two heaters of approximately equal
size are to be installed. The combined capacity of the heaters is to be not less than required to supply the
main engine(s) at full power.

5 Fuel Oil Pressure Piping

Pipes from booster pumps to injection systems are to be at least standard seamless steel. Pipes conveying
heated oil are to be at least standard seamless or electric-resistance-welded steel. ERW pipe is to be
straight seam and fabricated with no filler metal (e.g., ABS Grade 2 or 3 ERW). Valves and fittings may be
screwed in sizes up to and including 60 mm O.D. (2 in. N.P.S.), but screwed unions are not to be used on
pressure lines in sizes 33 mm O.D. (1 in.) and over. Valves are to be so constructed as to permit packing
under pressure.

7 Fuel Oil Injection System

7.1 General
Strainers are to be provided in the fuel oil injection pump suction line.

For main propulsion engines, the arrangement is to be such that the strainers may be cleaned without
interrupting the fuel supply to the engine. However, where multiple engines are provided, a dedicated
simplex strainer may be fitted for each engine, provided the craft can maintain at least one-half of the
design speed or seven knots, whichever is less, while operating with one engine temporarily out of service
until its strainer can be cleaned.

For auxiliary engines, the arrangement is to be such that the strainers may be cleaned without undue
interruption of power necessary for propulsion. Multiple auxiliary engines, each fitted with a separate
strainer and arranged such that changeover to a standby unit can be accomplished without loss of
propulsion capability, will be acceptable for this purpose.

Where strainers are fitted in parallel to enable cleaning without disrupting the oil supply, means are to be
provided to minimize the possibility of a strainer being opened inadvertently. Strainers are to be provided
with suitable means for venting when being put in operation and being depressurized before being opened.
Strainers are to be so located that in the event of leakage, oil cannot be sprayed on to the exhaust manifold
or surfaces with temperatures in excess of 220°C (428°F).

The injection lines are to be of seamless drawn pipe. Fittings are to be extra heavy. The material used may
be either steel or nonferrous, as approved in connection with the design. Also refer to 4-4-4/3.7.

7.3 Piping Between Injection Pump and Injectors

7.3.1 Injection Piping
All external high pressure fuel delivery lines between the high-pressure fuel pumps and fuel
injectors are to be protected with a jacketed piping system capable of containing fuel from a high-
pressure line failure. A jacketed pipe incorporates an outer pipe into which the high-pressure fuel
pipe is placed, forming a permanent assembly. Metallic hose of an approved type may be accepted

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 20
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

as the outer pipe, where outer piping flexibility is required for the manufacturing process of the
permanent assembly. The jacketed piping system is to include means for collection of leakages
and arrangements are to be provided for an alarm to be given of a fuel line failure.

7.3.2 Fuel oil Return Piping

When the peak to peak pressure pulsation in the fuel oil return piping from the injectors exceeds
20 bar (20.5 kgf/cm2, 285 psi), jacketing of the return pipes is also required.

7.3.3 High Pressure Common Rail System

Where a high pressure common rail system is fitted to an engine, the high pressure common rail is
to be in accordance with Section 4-4-1 of the Marine Vessel Rules for pressure vessels, or a
recognized standard as listed in 4-4-1/1.5 of the Marine Vessel Rules. Alternatively, the design
may be verified by certified burst tests. Components are to be made of steel or cast steel.
Components made of steel, other than cast steel, are to withstand not less than 4 times the
maximum allowable working pressure. The cast steel common rails are to withstand not less than
5 times the maximum allowable working pressure. The use of non-ferrous materials, cast iron and
nodular iron is prohibited. Materials are to comply with Chapter 3 of the ABS Rule for Materials
and Welding (Part 2).

The high pressure common rail system is required to be properly enclosed and provided with
arrangement for leak collection and alarm in case of a failure of high pressure common rail
system, see 4-2-1/7.3.1.

7.5 Piping Between Booster Pump and Injection Pumps

Spray shields are to be fitted around flanged joints, flanged bonnets and any other flanged or threaded
connections in fuel oil piping systems under pressure exceeding 1.8 bar (1.84 kgf/cm2, 26 psi) which are
located above or near units of high temperature, including boilers, steam pipes, exhaust manifolds,
silencers or other equipment required to be insulated by 4-4-4/1.1.2, and to avoid as far as practicable oil
spray or oil leakage into machinery air intakes or other sources of ignition. The number of joints in such
piping systems is to be kept to a minimum.

9 Lubricating Oil Systems

9.1 General
The following requirements are applicable for main and auxiliary diesel engines and for reduction gears
associated with diesel propulsion. See also 4-1-1/17 and 4-4-4/9.

9.3 Low Oil Pressure Alarms, Temperature and Level Indicators (2017)
An alarm device with audible and visual signals for failure of the lubricating oil system is to be fitted for
propulsion and auxiliary engines having a rated power greater than 37 kW (50 hp). Pressure and
temperature indicators are to be installed in lubricating oil systems indicating that the proper circulation is
being maintained.

9.5 Drain Pipes

Lubricating oil drain pipes from the sump to the drain tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends. No
interconnection is to be made between the drain pipes from the crankcases of two or more engines.

9.7 Lubricating Oil Pumps (2014)

In cases where forced lubrication is used for propulsion engines, one independently driven standby pump
is to be provided in addition to the necessary pumps for normal operation. Where the size and design of an
engine is such that lubrication before starting is not necessary and an attached lubricating pump is

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 21
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

normally used, an independently driven standby pump is not required if a complete duplicate of the
attached pump is carried as a spare.

The spare pump need not be provided for multiple-engine installations provided that, in the event of the
loss of one engine, at least forty percent of the total rated propulsion power remains.

9.9 Filters
Oil filters are to be provided. In the case of main propulsion engines which are equipped with full-flow-
type filters, the arrangement is to be such that the strainers may be cleaned without interrupting the oil
supply. However, where multiple engines are provided, a dedicated simplex strainer may be fitted for each
engine provided the craft can maintain at least one-half of the design speed or 7 knots, whichever is less,
while operating with one engine temporarily out of service until its filter can be cleaned.

For auxiliary engines, the arrangement is to be such that the filters may be cleaned without undue
interruption of power necessary for propulsion. Multiple auxiliary engines, each fitted with a separate filter
and arranged such that changeover to a standby unit can be accomplished without loss of propulsion
capability, will be acceptable for this purpose.

The arrangement of the valving is to be such as to avoid release of debris into the lubricating-oil system
upon activation of the relieving mechanism.

Where filters are fitted in parallel to enable cleaning without disrupting the oil supply, means are to be
provided to minimize the possibility of a filter under pressure being opened inadvertently. Filters are to be
provided with suitable means for venting when being put in operation and being depressurized before
being opened. Valves and cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location are to be used for this purpose.
Filters are to be so arranged as to prevent, in the event of leakage, spraying of oil onto the exhaust
manifold and surfaces with temperatures in excess of 220°C (428°F).

9.11 Lubricating-Oil Systems for Reduction Gears

Where a reduction gear is driven by a single engine and a common lubricating-oil system is used for both
the engine and gear, the requirements in 4-2-1/9.1 through 4-2-1/9.9 are applicable.

Where a reduction gear is driven by more than one engine or any other case where a separate lubricating-
oil system is provided for the reduction gear, the following requirements are applicable.

9.11.1 Pumps
Two lubricating-oil pumps are to be provided, at least one of which is to be independently driven.
The capacity of each pump is to be sufficient for continuous operation of the main propulsion
plant at its maximum rated power.

9.11.2 Coolers
One or more lubricating oil coolers with means for controlling the oil temperature is to be
provided together with two separate cooling water pumps, at least one of which is to be
independently driven. The coolers are to have sufficient capacity to maintain the required oil
temperature while the main propulsion plant is operating continuously at its maximum rated
power.

9.11.3 Indicators
Indicators are to be fitted by which the pressure and temperature of the water inlet and oil outlet
may be determined. Gravity tanks are to be fitted with a low level alarm and a sight glass is to be
fitted in the overflow line to the sump. Pressure systems are to be fitted with a low pressure alarm.
Sump and gravity tanks are to be provided with suitable gauges for determining the level of oil
within the tank.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 22
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

9.11.4 Filters
A filter is to be provided in the lubricating-oil piping to each reduction gear. The requirements in
4-2-1/9.9 are applicable.

11 Cooling Water Systems

11.1 General
Means are to be provided to ascertain the temperature of the circulating water at the return from each
engine and to indicate that the proper circulation is being maintained. Drain cocks are to be provided at the
lowest point of all jackets. For relief valves, see 4-4-1/9.15.

11.3 Sea Suctions

At least two independent sea suctions are to be provided for supplying water to the engine jackets or to the
heat exchangers, except that for multihull craft classed with restricted service (see 1-1-2/7), special
consideration may be given. The sea suctions are to be located as to minimize the possibility of blanking
off the cooling water. For multiple engine installations fitted with individual sea suctions for each engine,
two means of supplying cooling water to each engine may be omitted where the craft are fitted with three
or more propulsion units and can maintain half (1/2) design speed with one propulsion shut down.

11.5 Strainers
Where seawater is used for direct cooling of the engines, unless other equivalent arrangements are
specially approved, suitable strainers are to be fitted between the sea valves and the pump suctions. The
strainers are to be either of the duplex type or otherwise arranged so they can be cleaned without
interrupting the cooling water supply.

11.7 Circulating Water Pumps (2014)

There are to be at least two means for supplying cooling water to main and auxiliary engines, compressors,
coolers, reduction gears, etc. One of these means is to be independently driven and may consist of a
connection from a suitable pump of adequate size normally used for other purposes, such as a general
service pump, or in the case of fresh-water circulation one of the craft’s fresh-water pumps. Where, due to
the design of the engine, the connection of an independent pump is impracticable, the independently driven
stand-by pump will not be required if a complete duplicate of the attached pump is carried as a spare.

The spare pump need not be provided for multiple-engine installations provided that, in the event of the
loss of one engine, at least forty percent of the total rated propulsion power remains.

13 Starting Systems

13.1 Starting Air Systems (2013)

The design and construction of all air reservoirs are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements
of Part 4, Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel Rules. The piping system is to be in accordance with the
applicable requirements of Part 4, Chapter 4 of these Rules. The air reservoirs are to be so installed as to
make the drain connections effective under extreme conditions of trim. Compressed air systems are to be
fitted with relief valves and each air reservoir which can be isolated from a relief valve is to be provided
with its own safety valves or equivalent.

All discharge pipes from starting air compressors are to be led directly to the starting air reservoirs, and all
starting pipes from the air reservoirs to main or auxiliary engines are to be entirely separate from the
compressor discharge piping system.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 23
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

13.3 Starting Air Capacity (2013)

Craft having main engines arranged for air starting are to be provided with at least two starting-air
reservoirs of approximately equal size. The total capacity of the starting-air reservoirs is to be sufficient to
provide, without recharging the air reservoirs, at least the number of starts stated below.

If other compressed air systems, such as control air, are supplied from starting air reservoirs, the capacity
of the air reservoirs is to be sufficient for continued operation of these systems after the air necessary for
the required number of consecutive starts has been used.

13.3.1 Diesel Propulsion

The minimum number of consecutive starts (total) required to be provided from the starting-air
reservoirs is to be based upon the arrangement of the engines and shafting systems as indicated in
the following table.

Single Propeller Craft Multiple Propeller Craft

Engine Type One engine coupled Two or more One engine coupled Two or more
to shaft directly or engines coupled to to each shaft engines coupled to
through reduction shaft through clutch directly or through each shaft through
gear and reduction gear reduction gear clutch and
reduction gear

Reversible 12 16 16 16

Non-reversible 6 8 8 8

For arrangements of engine and shafting systems which differ from those indicated in the table,
the capacity of the starting-air reservoirs will be specially considered based on an equivalent
number of starts.

13.3.2 Diesel-electric Propulsion

The minimum number of consecutive starts required to be provided from the starting-air reservoirs
is to be determined from the following equation:

S = 6 + G(G − 1)

where

S = total number of consecutive starts

G = number of engines necessary to maintain sufficient electrical load to permit craft transit at full
seagoing power and maneuvering. The value of G need not exceed 3.

13.5 Starting Air Compressors (1 July 2021)

For craft having internal-combustion engines arranged for air starting, there are to be two or more air
compressors, at least one of which is to be driven independently of the main propulsion unit, and the total
capacity of air compressors driven independently of the main propulsion unit is to be not less than 50% of
the total required.

The total capacity of the air compressors is to be sufficient to supply within one hour the quantity of the air
need to satisfy 4-2-1/13.3 by charging the reservoirs from atmospheric pressure. Where fitted, topping up
compressors may be included in the capacity calculations.

The total capacity, V, required by 4-2-1/13.3 is to be approximately equally divided between the number of
compressors fitted, n, excluding an emergency compressor, where fitted. Where a topping-up compressor

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 24
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

is fitted, the capacity of each remaining air compressor is approximately to be at least (V-capacity of
topping-up air compressor)/(n-1).

The arrangement for dead ship air starting is to be such that the necessary air for the first charge can be
produced onboard without external aid. See 4-1-1/19.

13.7 Protective Devices for Starting-air Mains

In order to protect starting air mains against explosions arising from improper functioning of starting
valves, an isolation non-return valve or equivalent is to be installed at the starting air supply connection to
each engine. Where engine bores exceed 230 mm (91/16 in.), a bursting disc or flame arrester is to be fitted
in way of the starting valve of each cylinder for direct reversing engines having a main starting manifold or
at the supply inlet to the starting-air manifold for non-reversing engines.

The above requirement is applicable to engines where the air is directly injected into the cylinder. It is not
intended to apply to engines utilizing air start motors.

13.9 Electrical Starting

13.9.1 Main Engine
Where the main engine is arranged for electric starting, at least two separate batteries (or separate
sets of batteries) are to be fitted. The arrangement is to be such that the batteries (or sets of
batteries) cannot be connected simultaneously in parallel. Each battery (or set) is to be capable of
starting the main engine when in cold and ready to start conditions. The combined capacity of the
batteries is to be sufficient without recharging to provide within 30 minutes the number of starts of
main engines as required for air starting in 4-2-1/13.3, and if arranged also to supply starting for
auxiliary engines, the number of starts required in 4-2-1/13.9.2. See also 4-2-1/13.9.3.

13.9.2 Auxiliary Engine

Electric starting arrangements for auxiliary engines are to have at least two separate batteries (or
separate sets of batteries) or may be supplied by separate circuits from the main engine batteries
when such are provided. Where one auxiliary engine is arranged for electric starting, one battery
(or set) may be accepted in lieu of two separate batteries (or sets). The capacity of the batteries for
starting the auxiliary engines is to be sufficient for at least three starts for each engine.

13.9.3 Other Requirements

The starting batteries (or set of batteries) are to be used for starting and for engine’s own control
and monitoring purpose only. When the starting batteries are used for engine’s own control and
monitoring purpose, the aggregate capacity of the batteries is to be sufficient for continued
operation of such system in addition to the required number of starting capacity. Provisions are to
be made to continuously maintain the stored energy at all times. See also 4-6-2/5.19 and 4-6-3/3.7.

13.11 Hydraulic Starting

Hydraulic oil accumulators for starting the main propulsion engines are to have sufficient capacity without
recharging for starting the main engines, as required in 4-2-1/13.3.

15 Engine Exhaust Systems

15.1 General (2020)

All engine exhaust systems are to be adequate to carry out the designed function of the machinery and that
safe operation of the craft is not put at risk. The exhaust pipes are to be water-jacketed or effectively
insulated. Exhaust systems are to be so installed that the craft’s structure cannot be damaged by heat from
the systems. Exhaust pipes of several engines or gas turbines are not to be connected together but are to be
run separately to the atmosphere unless arranged to prevent the return of gases to an idle engine or turbine.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 25
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

Exhaust lines which are led overboard near the waterline are to be protected against the possibility of the
water finding its way inboard. As a minimum, the highest point of the line (measured to the bottom of the
pipe) is to be not less than 0 . 02L above the deepest seagoing draft, or to be above the deepest waterline
accounting for trim (see 3-2-2/1.1), whichever is greater. The exhaust opening in the shell shall be above
deepest seagoing draft. Exhaust systems are to be so arranged as to minimize the intake of exhaust gases
into manned spaces, air-conditioning systems, and engine intakes. Exhaust systems are not to discharge
into air-cushion intakes, where provided. The exhaust gas system is to be designed such that the back-
pressure across the piping is within the allowable limits stated by the engine and fired equipment
manufacturer under all expected operating conditions.

15.3 Exhaust System Materials

Materials used in the exhaust system are to be resistant to saltwater corrosion, galvanically compatible to
each other and resistant to exhaust products. Plate flanges will be considered where the specified material
is suitable for exhaust piping pressures and temperatures.

15.5 Exhaust Gas Temperature

Propulsion engines with a power rating exceeding 500 kW/cylinder are to be fitted with means to display
the exhaust as temperature gauge at each cylinder.

15.7 Exhaust Emission Abatement Systems (2023)

Where a vessel is fitted with an exhaust emission abatement system and the optional vessel notations
detailed under 6-3-1/9.3 through 6-3-1/9.9 of the Marine Vessel Rules are not requested, the installed
exhaust emission abatement system is to comply with the minimum requirements prescribed in 6-3-1/
TABLE 1 of the Marine Vessel Rules and is to be verified by an ABS Surveyor during installation. This is
applicable to new construction and existing vessel conversions.

17 Couplings

17.1 Flexible Shaft Couplings (2014)

Details of the various components of flexible couplings for main propulsion machinery and ship’s service
generator sets are to be submitted for approval.

17.1.1 Design
Flexible couplings intended for use in propulsion shafting are to be of approved designs.
Couplings are to be designed for the rated torque, fatigue and avoidance of overheating. Where
elastomeric material is used as a torque-transmitting component, it is to withstand environmental
and service conditions over the design life of the coupling, taking into consideration the full range
of maximum to minimum vibratory torque. Flexible coupling design will be evaluated, based on
submitted engineering analyses.

17.1.2 Torsional Displacement Limiter

Flexible couplings with elastomer or spring type flexible members, whose failure will lead to total
loss of propulsion capability of the craft, such as that used in the line shaft of a single propeller
craft, are to be provided with a torsional displacement limiter. The device is to lock the coupling
or prevent excessive torsional displacement when a pre-determined torsional displacement limit is
exceeded. Operation of the craft under such circumstances may be at reduced power. Warning
notices for such reduced power are to be posted at all propulsion control stations.

17.1.3 Barred Range

Conditions where the allowable vibratory torque or the allowable dissipated power may be
exceeded under the normal operating range of the engine are to be identified and are to be marked
as a barred range in order to avoid continuous operation within this range.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 26
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1

17.1.4 Diesel Generators (2022)

Flexible couplings for diesel generator sets are to be capable of absorbing short time impact torque
due to electrical short-circuit conditions up to 6 (six) times the nominal torque, or the couplings
are to be evaluated for capability to absorb the transient torsional vibration peak torque for each
application.

17.3 Flanged Couplings and Coupling Bolts

Refer to 4-3-1/19.5 for flanged couplings.

Elongation for auxiliary machinery coupling bolts made of steel having an ultimate tensile strength over
690 N/mm2 (70 kgf/mm2, 100,000 psi) will be subject to special consideration. Also refer to 4-3-1/19.1 and
4-3-1/19.1.

19 Testing of Pumps Associated with Engine and Reduction Gear

Operation
Pumps associated with engine and reduction gear operation (oil, water, fuel) utilized with engines having
bores exceeding 300 mm (11.8 in.) are to be provided with certificates issued by the Surveyor. The
following tests are to be conducted to the Surveyor’s satisfaction:

19.1 Pumps Hydrostatic Tests

Independently-driven pumps are to be hydrostatically tested to 4 bar (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi), but not less than
1 . 5P, where P is the maximum working pressure in the part concerned.

19.3 Capacity Tests

Tests of pump capacities are to be conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor with the pump operating at
design conditions. Capacity tests will not be required for individual pumps produced on a production line
basis, provided the Surveyor is satisfied from periodic inspections and the manufacturer’s quality
assurance procedures that the pump capacities are acceptable.

21 Trial
Before final acceptance, the entire installation is to be operated in the presence of the Surveyor to
demonstrate its ability to function satisfactorily under operating conditions and its freedom from harmful
vibration at speeds within the operating range. See also 4-1-1/33.

For conventional propulsion gear units above 1120 kW (1500 HP), a record of gear-tooth contact is to be
made at the trials. To facilitate the survey of extent and uniformity of gear-tooth contact, selected bands of
pinion or gear teeth on each meshing are to be coated beforehand with copper or layout dye. See
7-6-2/1.1.2.

The gear-tooth examination for conventional gear units 1120 kW (1500 HP) and below and all epicyclic
gear units will be subject to special consideration. The gear manufacturer’s recommendations will be
considered.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 27
 PART 4
CHAPTER 2
Prime Movers

SECTION 2
Gas Turbines

1 General

1.1 Construction and Installation

Gas turbines having a rated power of 100 kW (135 hp) and over, intended for propulsion and for auxiliary
services essential for propulsion, maneuvering and safety (see 4-1-1/3.1) of the craft, are to be designed,
constructed, tested, certified and installed in accordance with the requirements of 4-2-3 of the Marine
Vessel Rules and this Section.

Gas turbines having a rated power of less than 100 kW (135 hp) are not required to comply with the
provision of this Section but are to be designed, constructed and equipped in accordance with good
commercial and marine practice. Acceptance of the gas turbines will be based on the manufacturer’s
affidavit, verification of gas turbines nameplate data and subject to a satisfactory performance test after
installation conducted in the presence of the Surveyor.

Gas turbines having a rated power of 100 kW (135 hp) and over, intended for services considered not
essential for propulsion, maneuvering and safety, are not required to be designed, constructed and certified
by ABS in accordance with the provisions of this section. They are to comply with safety features, such as
overspeed protection, etc., as provided in 4-2-3/7 of the Marine Vessel Rules hereunder, as applicable, and
are subject to a satisfactory performance test after installation, conducted in the presence of the Surveyor.

1.3 Piping Systems

Piping systems for gas turbines are to comply with the applicable requirements in Part 4, Chapter 4 of
these Rules in addition to this section.

1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

Pressure vessels and heat exchangers are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Part 4,
Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

1.7 Automatic Safety Devices

Details of the manufacturer’s proposed automatic safety devices to guard against hazardous conditions
arising in the event of malfunction in the turbine installation are to be provided together with the Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 28
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 2 Gas Turbines 4-2-2

3 Fuel Oil System

3.1 General
In addition to 4-2-1, 4-4-4/1, 4-4-4/3 and 4-4-4/7, fuel oil systems for gas turbines are to comply with the
following.

3.3 Pumps, Heater and Strainers

There are to be at least two independent fuel oil service pumps, each of sufficient capacity to supply
turbines at full power and arranged that one may be overhauled while the other is in service.. Oil heaters
are to be similarly installed in multiples.

Oil strainers are to be installed in the suction and discharge lines and are to be either of the duplex type or
other approved filter which is capable of being cleaned without interrupting the oil supply. Where strainers
are fitted in parallel to enable cleaning without disrupting the oil supply, means are to be provided to
minimize the possibility of a strainer under pressure being opened inadvertently. Strainers are to be
provided with suitable means for venting when being put into operation and being depressurized before
being opened. Valves or cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location are to be used for this purpose.

3.5 Shielding of Fuel Oil Service Piping

Piping between the service pump and the combustor is to be effectively jacked or shielded as in 4-2-1/5,
4-2-1/7.3.1 and 4-2-1/7.3.2.

3.7 Fuel Oil Shutoff

3.7.1 Automatic Shutoff
Each gas turbine is to be fitted with a quick closing device which will automatically shut off the
fuel supply upon sensing malfunction on its operation. Refer to 4-2-3/7.7 of the Marine Vessel
Rules for complete list automatic shutdowns.

3.7.2 Hand Trip Gear

Hand trip gear for shutting off the fuel supply in an emergency is also to be fitted. Refer to
4-2-3/7.9 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

3.9 Drainage of Excess Fuel

Provision is to be made to drain all excess fuel oil, particularly fuel which might reach the interior of the
jet pipe or exhaust system after a false start or after stopping, to a safe position so as to avoid a fire hazard.

3.11 Low Flash Point Fuel for Gas Turbines

Fuel with a flash point below 43°C (109°F), but not less than 35°C (95°F), may be permitted for gas
turbine installations, provided the arrangements for storage, distribution and utilization of the fuel are
suitable with regard to the hazard of fire and explosion which the use of such fuel may entail, and the
safety of the craft and persons on board is preserved

The arrangements are to comply with the following provisions:

3.11.1 Storage Tanks

Tanks for the storage of such fuel are to be located outside of any machinery space and at a
distance of not less than 760 mm (30 in.) inboard from the shell and bottom plating and from
decks and bulkheads. A lesser distance may be specially considered where the craft’s
arrangements do not permit such an installation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 29
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 2 Gas Turbines 4-2-2

3.11.2 Overpressure
Arrangements are to be provided to prevent overpressure in any fuel tank or in any part of the oil
fuel system, including the filling pipes. Any relief valves and air or overflow pipes are to
discharge to a safe position and are to terminate with approved flame arrestors.

3.11.3 Ventilation
The spaces in which fuel tanks are located are to be mechanically ventilated, using exhaust fans
and providing not less than six air changes per hour. The fans are to be such as to avoid the
possibility of ignition of flammable gas-air mixtures. Suitable wire mesh guards are to be fitted
over inlet and outlet ventilation openings. The outlets for such exhausts are to be discharged to a
safe position. ‘No Smoking’ signs are to be posted at the entrances to such spaces.

3.11.4 Electrical Distribution

Earthed electrical distribution systems are not to be used, with the exception of earthed
intrinsically safe circuits.

3.11.5 Electrical Equipment

Suitable certified safe type electrical equipment is to be used in all spaces where fuel leakage
could occur, including the ventilation system. Only electrical equipment and fittings essential for
operational purposes are to be fitted in such spaces.

3.11.6 Vapor Detection

A fixed vapor detection system is to be installed in each space through which fuel lines pass, with
alarms provided at the continuously manned control station.

3.11.7 Leakage
Every fuel tank is, where necessary, to be provided with “savealls” or gutters which would catch
any fuel which may leak from such a tank.

3.11.8 Fueling Arrangements

Craft-to-shore fuel connections are to be of a closed type and are to be provided with suitable
earthing arrangements to be used during bunkering operations. ‘No Smoking’ and ‘No Naked
Lights’ signs are to be posted in the vicinity of the bunkering station.

3.11.9 Fire Detection

Each space containing a non-integral fuel tank is to be fitted with fire-detection and fixed fire
extinguishing systems complying with 4-5-1/13.

5 Starting Arrangements
Staring arrangements for gas turbines installations are to be capable of providing an equivalent number of
starts as that required in 4-2-1/13

7 Exhaust Systems
Exhaust gas systems are to be in accordance with 4-2-1/15 as well as in accordance with the turbine
manufacturer’s recommendations. Gas turbine exhausts are to be located and arranged so that hot exhaust
gases are directed away from walkways and other areas to which personnel have access.

9 Turbine Enclosures
Where an acoustic enclosure is fitted which completely surrounds the gas turbine and the high-pressure oil
pipes, a fire detection and extinguishing system is to be provided for the acoustic enclosure.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 30
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 2 Gas Turbines 4-2-2

11 Turbines Driving Generators

Gas turbines driving generators are also to comply with 4-2-3 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 31
 PART 4
CHAPTER 2
Prime Movers

SECTION 3
Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length

1 Diesel Engines
Diesel engines are to meet the requirements of Section 4-2-1, as applicable except that:

1.1 Sea Suction

At least two independent sea suctions are to be provided for supplying water to the engine jackets or to the
heat exchangers, except that for multihull craft classed with restricted service (see 1-1-2/7), special
consideration may be given. The sea suctions are to be located as to minimize the possibility of blanking
off the cooling water. For multiple engine installations fitted with individual sea suctions for each engine,
two means of supplying cooling water to each engine may be omitted where the craft are fitted with two or
more propulsion units and can maintain half (1/2) design speed with one propulsion shut down.

3 Gas Turbines
Gas turbines are to meet the requirements of Section 4-2-2, as applicable

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 32
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 Propulsion Shafting...........................................................................39
1 General......................................................................................... 39
1.1 Definitions (2014).............................................................39
3 Plans and Data to be Submitted................................................... 39
5 Materials and Testing....................................................................40
5.1 Material............................................................................ 40
5.3 Material Tests...................................................................40
5.5 Inspection........................................................................ 40
5.7 Weldability....................................................................... 41
7 Design and Construction ............................................................. 41
7.1 Shaft Diameters............................................................... 41
7.3 Hollow Shafts...................................................................43
9 Key ...............................................................................................43
11 Tail Shaft Liners............................................................................ 44
11.1 Thickness at Bearings..................................................... 44
11.3 Thickness Between Bearings.......................................... 44
11.5 Continuous Fitted Liners..................................................44
11.7 Fit Between Bearings.......................................................44
11.9 Material and Fit................................................................ 44
11.11 Glass Reinforced Plastic Coating.................................... 44
11.13 Stainless Steel Cladding..................................................45
13 Tail Shaft Bearings........................................................................45
13.1 Water Lubricated Bearings.............................................. 45
13.3 Oil Lubricated Bearings................................................... 45
15 Tail Shaft Propeller End Design.................................................... 46
15.1 Keyed...............................................................................46
15.3 Keyless............................................................................ 46
17 Flexible Couplings........................................................................ 46
19 Solid Couplings.............................................................................46
19.1 Fitted Bolts.......................................................................46
19.3 Non-fitted Bolts................................................................ 47

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 33
 19.5 Flanges............................................................................ 47
19.7 Locking Arrangement (2014)........................................... 47
19.9 Demountable Couplings.................................................. 47
21 Cardan Shaft.................................................................................48
23 Sealing arrangements...................................................................48
23.1 Stern Tube Seal............................................................... 48
23.3 Propeller End Seal...........................................................48
25 Watertight Bulkhead Penetrations for Shafting............................. 48
27 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibration.................................... 48
27.1 General............................................................................ 48
27.3 Craft 61 m (200 ft) in Length and Over............................ 49
27.5 Craft Below 61 m (200 ft) in Length................................. 49
29 Circulating Currents (2014)...........................................................49
31 Inspection, Testing and Certification............................................. 49
31.1 General............................................................................ 49
31.3 Material Testing................................................................49
31.5 Propulsion Shafts and Associated Parts..........................49
31.7 Flexible Couplings, Clutches, Cardan Shafts, etc............50
33 Installation and Trials....................................................................50
33.1 Shaft Alignment............................................................... 50
33.3 Sea Trial...........................................................................50
35 Line Cutters.................................................................................. 50
35.1 Notation........................................................................... 50
35.3 Definitions........................................................................ 50
35.5 Plans and Data to be Submitted...................................... 50
35.7 Materials.......................................................................... 51
35.9 Cutter Requirements and Design.................................... 51
35.11 Strengthening for Navigation in Ice..................................52
35.13 Type Testing.....................................................................52
35.15 Surveys............................................................................53

TABLE 1 Shaft Design Factor K for Line Shafts, Thrust Shafts,

and Oil Distribution Shafts....................................................42
TABLE 2 Shaft Design Factor K for Tail Shafts and Stern Tube
Shafts (See Note 1)..............................................................42

SECTION 2 Propellers........................................................................................... 54
1 General ........................................................................................ 54
1.1 Application....................................................................... 54
1.3 Definitions........................................................................ 54
1.5 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted.............................56
3 Materials ...................................................................................... 57
3.1 Normally Used Propeller Materials.................................. 57
3.3 Stud Materials..................................................................57

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 34
 3.5 Material Testing................................................................57
5 Design ..........................................................................................57
5.1 Blade Thickness – Fixed Pitch Propeller......................... 57
5.3 Blade Thickness – Controllable-pitch Propellers............. 59
5.5 Blade Thickness – Highly Skewed Fixed-pitch
Propellers.........................................................................60
5.7 Blades of Unusual Design............................................... 61
5.9 Blade-root Fillets..............................................................62
5.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Pitch Actuation System.. 62
5.13 Propeller Fitting................................................................63
5.15 Retrofitting Existing Craft with Propeller Boss Cap Fins..67
7 Certification ..................................................................................67
7.1 Material Tests...................................................................67
7.3 Inspection and Certification............................................. 67
9 Installation, Tests and Trial .......................................................... 67
9.1 Keyed Propellers............................................................. 67
9.3 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Fit of Studs and Nuts......68
9.5 Protection Against Corrosion........................................... 68
9.7 Circulating Currents......................................................... 68
9.9 Keyed and Keyless Propellers – Contact Area Check
and Securing....................................................................68
9.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Hydrostatic Tests............ 68
9.13 Sea Trial...........................................................................68

TABLE 1 Propeller Materials............................................................... 57

TABLE 2 Material Constants............................................................... 66
TABLE 3 Estimated Propeller Thrust, T.............................................. 66

FIGURE 1 Maximum Skew Angle..........................................................55

FIGURE 2 Rake and Rake Angle.......................................................... 55
FIGURE 3 Theoretical Contact Surface Between Hub and Shaft..........65

SECTION 3 Steering Gear..................................................................................... 69

1 General......................................................................................... 69
1.1 Application....................................................................... 69
1.3 Definitions........................................................................ 69
1.5 Plans and Data................................................................ 70
1.7 Power Operation..............................................................70
1.9 Main Steering Gear..........................................................71
1.11 Auxiliary Steering Gear....................................................71
1.13 Steering Gear Compartment Unit Location......................71
3 Materials....................................................................................... 71
3.1 General............................................................................ 71
3.3 Material Testing................................................................72

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 35
 5 Design...........................................................................................72
5.1 Power Gear Stops........................................................... 72
5.3 Mechanical Components................................................. 72
5.4 Steering Gear Torque...................................................... 72
5.5 Tiller................................................................................. 73
5.7 Pin....................................................................................75
5.9 Tie Rod (Jockey Bar)....................................................... 75
5.11 Rudder Actuators.............................................................75
5.13 Mechanical Steering Gear............................................... 76
7 Hydraulic System..........................................................................76
7.1 Pipes, Valves and Fittings................................................76
7.3 Relief Valves.................................................................... 76
7.5 Filtration........................................................................... 77
7.7 Single Failure...................................................................77
7.9 Reservoir and Storage Tank............................................ 77
9 Power Units.................................................................................. 77
9.1 Prototype Test..................................................................77
9.3 Production Unit Test.........................................................77
11 Steering Gear Control System......................................................78
11.1 Locations of Control.........................................................78
11.3 General............................................................................ 78
11.5 Control System Power Supply......................................... 79
11.7 Communication................................................................80
11.9 Instrumentation and Alarms.............................................80
11.11 Operating Instructions......................................................83
13 Electrical Power Supply................................................................ 83
15 Testing and Trials..........................................................................83
15.1 Testing of Piping System................................................. 83
15.3 Trials................................................................................ 83

SECTION 4 Waterjets............................................................................................. 86
1 General......................................................................................... 86
3 Design...........................................................................................86
5 Housings.......................................................................................87
7 Reversing Mechanisms................................................................ 87
9 Impeller Bearings..........................................................................87

SECTION 5 Propulsion Redundancy....................................................................88

1 General ........................................................................................ 88
1.1 Application....................................................................... 88
1.3 Objective..........................................................................88
1.5 Definitions........................................................................ 88
1.7 Plans and Data to be Submitted...................................... 89

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 36
 3 Classification Notations................................................................ 89
5 Single Failure Concept................................................................. 92
5.1 Single Failure Criteria...................................................... 92
7 Propulsion and Steering Capability...............................................92
7.1 Craft Without + in Class Notation.....................................92
7.3 Craft with + in Class Notation.......................................... 93
9 System Design..............................................................................93
9.1 Propulsion Machinery and Propulsors............................. 93
9.3 System Segregation........................................................ 93
9.5 Steering Systems.............................................................94
9.7 Auxiliary Service Systems............................................... 94
9.9 Electrical Distribution Systems........................................ 94
9.11 Control and Monitoring Systems......................................95
9.13 Communication Systems................................................. 95
11 Fire Precautions............................................................................95
13 Operating Manual......................................................................... 96
15 Test and Trial................................................................................ 96
15.1 Fault Simulation Test....................................................... 96
15.3 Communication System Test........................................... 96
17 Survey After Construction.............................................................96

FIGURE 1 Arrangements of Propulsion Redundancy........................... 91

SECTION 6 Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft......................... 97

1 General ........................................................................................ 97
1.1 Application....................................................................... 97
1.3 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted.............................97
3 Materials ...................................................................................... 97
3.1 General............................................................................ 97
3.3 Material Testing................................................................97
5 Design ..........................................................................................97
5.1 General............................................................................ 97

SECTION 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.................................. 99

1 General......................................................................................... 99
3 Shafting and Gears.......................................................................99
3.1 Outboard Engines............................................................99
3.3 Inboard/Outboard Installations.........................................99
3.5 Inboard Installations.........................................................99
3.7 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibrations................... 100
3.9 Materials........................................................................ 100
5 Propellers....................................................................................100
7 Steering Gears............................................................................100

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 37
 7.1 General.......................................................................... 100
7.3 Materials........................................................................ 100
7.5 System Arrangements................................................... 100
7.7 Mechanical Steering Gears........................................... 101
9 Inboard/Outboard and Outboard Installations.............................101
9.1 General.......................................................................... 101
9.3 Instrumentation.............................................................. 101
9.5 Communications............................................................ 101
9.7 Certification....................................................................101
9.9 Installation, Tests and Trials...........................................101
11 Waterjets.....................................................................................101

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 38
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 1
Propulsion Shafting

1 General
The construction of the propellers and propulsion shafting is to be carried out in accordance with the
following requirements and to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

1.1 Definitions (2014)

For the purposes of using shaft diameter formulas in this section, the following definitions apply.

1.1.1 Tail Shaft

Tail Shaft is the part of the propulsion shaft aft of the forward end of the propeller end bearing.

1.1.2 Stern Tube Shaft

Stern Tube Shaft or Tube Shaft is the part of the propulsion shaft passing through the stern tube
from the forward end of the propeller end bearing to the in-board shaft seal.

1.1.3 Line Shaft

Line Shaft is the part of the propulsion shaft in-board of the vessel.

1.1.4 Thrust Shaft

Thrust Shaft is that part of the propulsion shaft which transmits thrust to the thrust bearing.

1.1.5 Oil Distribution Shaft

Oil Distribution Shaft is a hollow propulsion shaft where the bore and radial holes are used for
distribution of hydraulic oil in controllable pitch propeller installations.

3 Plans and Data to be Submitted (1 July 2022)

Plans and specifications are to be submitted in accordance with 4-1-1/7.23, as indicated in the following:

Detailed plans together with material specifications of the propulsion shafting, couplings, coupling bolts,
propulsion shafting arrangement, tail shaft bearings and lubrication system, if oil-lubricated, are to be
submitted. Bearing lubricant oil type [e.g., mineral or enviornmentally acceptable lubricant (EAL)] and
pertninent specifications (i.e., viscosity grade, etc) are to be included. Calculations are to be included for
flexible couplings and demountable couplings. See 4-2-1/17 and 4-3-1/19.9. See also 4-3-1/27.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 39
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

5 Materials and Testing

5.1 Material
Materials for propulsion shafts, couplings and coupling bolts, keys and clutches are to be of forged steel or
rolled bars, as appropriate, in accordance with Section 2-3-7 and Section 2-3-8 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2) or other specifications as may be specially approved with a specific design.
Where materials other than those specified in the Rules are proposed, full details of chemical composition,
heat treatment and mechanical properties, as appropriate, are to be submitted for approval.

5.1.1 Ultimate Tensile Strength

In general, the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of steel used for propulsion shafting is
to be between 400 N/mm2 (40.7 kgf/mm2, 58,000 psi) and 930 N/mm2 (95.0 kgf/mm2, 135,000
psi).

5.1.2 Elongation
Carbon Steel with elongation (Lo /d = 4) of less than 16% or (Lo /d = 5) of less than 15% is not
to be used for any shafting component, with the exception that material for non-fitted alloy steel
coupling bolts manufactured to a recognized standard may have elongation (Lo /d = 4) of not less
than 10% or (Lo /d = 5) of not less than 9%.

Alloy steels with elongation less than (Lo /d = 4) 16% or (Lo /d = 5) 15% may be applied subject
to approval.

5.3 Material Tests

5.3.1 General (2016)
Materials for all torque-transmitting parts, including shafts, clutches, couplings, coupling bolts and
keys are to be tested in the presence of the Surveyor. The materials are to meet the specifications
of 2-3-7/1, 2-3-7/5, 2-3-7/7, or 2-3-8/1 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) or
other specifications approved in connection with the design.

5.3.2 Alternative Test Requirements

5.3.2(a) Materials for Shafting, Couplings and Coupling Bolts Transmitting 373 kW (500 HP) or Less
(1 July 2021)
Materials for shafting, couplings and coupling bolts transmitting 373 kW (500 HP) or less will be
accepted based on the manufacturer’s certified mill tests and hardness check witnessed by the
Surveyor.

5.3.2(b) Coupling Bolts (1 July 2021)

Bolts manufactured to a recognized standard and used as coupling bolts will not require material
testing.

5.3.2(c) Certification Under Quality Assurance Assessment (1 July 2021)

For couplings and clutches certified under quality assurance assessment as provided for under
4-3-1/27.7, material tests required by 4-3-2/5.3.1 need not be witnessed by the Surveyor; such
tests may be conducted by the coupling manufacturer whose certified material test reports will be
accepted instead.

5.5 Inspection
Shafting and couplings are to be surface-examined at the manufacturer. Tail shafts in the finished machine
condition are to be subjected to a nondestructive examination such as magnetic particle, dye penetrant or
other nondestructive methods and are to be free of linear discontinuities greater than 3.2 mm (1/8 in.),
except that in the following locations, the shafts are to be free of all linear discontinuities:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 40
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

5.5.1 Tapered Tail Shafts

The forward one-third length of the taper, including the forward end of any keyway and an equal
length of the parallel part of the shaft immediately forward of the taper.

5.5.2 Flanged Tail Shafts

The flange fillet area.

5.7 Weldability
Steel used for tail shafts is to have carbon content in accordance with 2-3-7/1.1.2 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2).

7 Design and Construction

7.1 Shaft Diameters

The least diameter of propulsion shafting is to be determined by the following equation:

D = 100K3 H/R c1 / U + c2

where

c1 = 560 (41.95, 3.695) for single screw craft 45.7 m (150 ft) in length and over and multiple
screw craft 61 m (200 ft) in length and over.
= 416.4 (31.22, 2.75) for single screw craft below 45.7 m (150 ft) and multiple screw craft
below 61 m (200 ft).
c2 = 160 (16.3, 23180)
D = greater of the required solid shaft diameter as required by 4-3-1/7 or 4-3-1/27 (reflective of
static and dynamic stresses), except hollow shaft; mm (in.)
K = shaft design factor (see 4-3-1/7.1 TABLE 1 and 4-3-1/7.1 TABLE 2)
H = power at rated speed, kW (PS, HP), [1 PS = 0.735 kW, 1 HP = 0.746 kW]
R = rpm at rated speed
U = minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the material, in N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi). For
calculation purposes, U is not to be taken as more than the following:
= 415 N/mm2 (42.2 kgf/mm2, 60,000 psi) for carbon, and alloy steel tail shafts fitted with salt-
water lubricated bearings and non-continuous shaft liners.
= 600 N/mm2 (61.2 kgf/mm2, 87,000 psi) for carbon, alloy and austenitic stainless steel tail
shafts fitted with oil lubricated bearings or with continuous shaft liners or equivalent.
= 930 N/mm2 (95.0 kgf/mm2, 135,000 psi) for other shaft sections and for tail shafts
manufactured of age-hardened martensitic stainless steels, higher-strength austenitic stainless
steels such as ASTM Type XM-19, XM-21, or XM-28, or other high strength alloy materials.

Note:

In general, the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of steel used for propulsion shafting is to be between 400 N/mm2
(40.7 kgf/mm2, 58,000 psi) and 930 N/mm2 (95.0 kgf/mm2, 135,000 psi). See also 4-3-1/5.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 41
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

TABLE 1
Shaft Design Factor K for Line Shafts, Thrust Shafts, and Oil Distribution
Shafts

Design Features (1)

In way of
Axial
On Both Bearings
Radial Holes, Sides of used as
Integral Shrink Fit Transverse Longitudinal Thrust Thrust Straight
Flange Coupling Keyways (2) Holes (3) Slots (4) Collars Bearings Sections

Turbine

Electric Drives

Diesel Drives 0.95 0.95 1.045 1.045 1.14 1.045 1.045 0.95
through slip
couplings (electric
or hydraulic)

All Other Diesel 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0
Drives

Notes:

1 Geometric features other than those listed will be specially considered

2 After a length of not less than 0.2D from the end of the keyway, the shaft diameter may be reduced to the diameter
calculated for straight sections.

Fillet radii in the transverse section of the bottom of the keyway are to be not less than 0.0125D

3 Diameter of bore not more than 0.3D

4 Length of the slot not more than 1.4D, width of the slot not more than 0.2D, whereby D is calculated with k = 1 . 0

TABLE 2
Shaft Design Factor K for Tail Shafts and Stern Tube Shafts (See Note 1)

Propeller Attachment Method (2)

Propulsion Keyless Attachment

Type Stern Tube Configuration Keyed (3) by Shrink Fit (4) Flanged (5) Stern Tube Shafts (7, 8)

All Oil-lubricated bearings 1.26 1.22 1.22 1.15

All Water-lubricated bearings 1.26 1.22 1.22 1.15

with continuous shaft liners
or equivalent

All Water-lubricated bearings 1.29 1.25 1.25 1.18

with non-continuous shaft
liners(6)

Notes:

1 The tail shaft diameter may be reduced to the stern tube shaft diameter forward of the bearing supporting the
propeller, and the stern tube shaft diameter reduced to the line shaft diameter inboard of the forward stern tube
seal.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 42
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

2 Other attachments are subject to special consideration.

3 Fillet radii in the transverse section at the bottom of the keyway are not to be less than 0.0125D.

4 See also 4-3-1/15.

5 The fillet radius in the base of the flange for the tail shaft supporting the propeller is to be at least 0.125D.
Special consideration will be given to fillets of multiple radii design. The fillet radius is to be accessible for
nondestructive examination during tail shaft surveys. See 7-5-1/3 and Section 7-5-2 of the ABS Rules for
Survey After Construction (Part 7). For other fillet radii, see 4-3-1/19.5.

6 For Great Lakes service, K factor corresponding to continuous liner configuration may be used.

7 K factor applies to shafting between the forward edge of the propeller-end bearing and the inboard stern tube
seal.

8 Where keyed couplings are fitted on stern tube shaft, the shaft diameters are to be increased by 10% in way of
the coupling. See Note 2 of 4-3-1/7.1 TABLE 1.

7.3 Hollow Shafts

For hollow shafts where the bore exceeds 40% of the outside diameter, the minimum shaft diameter is not
to be less than that given by the following equation:

3 4
Do = D 1/ 1 − Di /Do

where

Do = required outside diameter, in mm (in.)

D = solid shaft diameter required by 4-3-1/7, as applicable, in mm (in.)

Di = actual shaft bore, in mm (in.)

9 Key
In general, the key material is to be of equal or higher strength than the shaft material. The effective area of
the key in shear is to be not less than A, given below. The effective area is to be the gross area subtracted
by materials removed by saw cuts, set screw holes, chamfer, etc., and is to exclude the portion of the key in
way of spooning of the key way.

D3 YS
A= 5 . 1rm · YK

where

A = shear area of key, mm2 (in2)

D = line shaft diameter, mm (in.), as determined by 4-3-1/7.1

rm = shaft radius at mid-length of the key, mm (in.)

YS = specified yield strength of shaft material, N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)

YK = specified yield strength of key material, N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 43
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

11 Tail Shaft Liners

11.1 Thickness at Bearings

11.1.1 Bronze Liner
The thickness of bronze liners to be fitted to tail shafts or tube shafts is not to be less than that
given by the following equation:

t = T/25 + 5 . 1   mm

t = T/25 + 0 . 2   in .

where

t = thickness of liner, in mm (in.)

T = required diameter of tail shaft, in mm (in.)

11.1.2 Stainless Steel Liner

The thickness of stainless steel liners to be fitted to tail shafts or tube is not to be less than one-half
that required for bronze liners or 6.5 mm (0.25 inches), whichever is greater.

11.3 Thickness Between Bearings

The thickness of a continuous bronze liner between bearings is to be not less than three-fourths of the
thickness, t, determined by the foregoing equation.

11.5 Continuous Fitted Liners

Continuous fitted liners are to be in one piece or, if made of two or more lengths, the joining of the
separate pieces is to be done by an approved method of fusion through not less than two-thirds the
thickness of the liner or by an approved rubber seal.

11.7 Fit Between Bearings

If the liner does not fit the shaft tightly between the bearing portions, the space between the shaft and liner
is to be filled by pressure with an insoluble, non-corrosive compound.

11.9 Material and Fit (1 July 2021)

Fitted liners are to be of a high-grade composition, bronze or other approved alloy, free from porosity and
other defects. All liners are to be carefully shrunk or forced upon the shaft by pressure and they are not to
be secured by pins.

11.11 Glass Reinforced Plastic Coating (2019)

Glass reinforced plastic coatings may be fitted on propulsion shafting when applied by a trained
technician, utilizing a procedure that complies with a nationally recognized standard, such as ASTM
D5162, to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. Such coatings are to consist of at least four plies of cross-woven
glass tape impregnated with resin, or an equivalent process. Prior to coating, the shaft is to be cleaned with
a suitable solvent and grit-blasted. The shaft is to be examined prior to coating and the first layer is to be
applied in the presence of the Surveyor. Subsequent to coating, the finished shaft is to be subjected to a
spark test or equivalent to verify freedom from porosity to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. In all cases
where reinforced plastic coatings are employed, effective means are to be provided to prevent water having
access to the shaft. Provisions are to be made for overlapping and adequately bonding the coating to fitted
or clad liners. The end of the liner is to be stepped and tapered as required to protect the end of the
wrapping.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 44
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

11.13 Stainless Steel Cladding

Stainless steel cladding of shafts is to be carried out in accordance with an approved procedure. See
Section 7-A1-11, “Repair and Cladding of Shafts” of the Rules for Survey After Construction (Part 7).

13 Tail Shaft Bearings

13.1 Water Lubricated Bearings

13.1.1 Wood Bearings (resinous, dense hardwoods)
The length of the bearing next to and supporting the propeller is to be not less than four times the
required tail shaft diameter.

13.1.2 Synthetic Bearings (rubber, reinforced resins, plastic materials) (2021)

The length of the bearing next to and supporting the propeller is to be not less than four times the
required tail shaft diameter.

For a bearing design substantiated by experimental tests to the satisfaction of ABS, consideration
may be given to a bearing length of less than four times, but not less than two times, the required
tail shaft diameter. Synthetic materials for application as water-lubricated stern tube bearings are
to be of approved type.

13.3 Oil Lubricated Bearings

13.3.1 White Metal Lined
The length of white-metal lined, oil-lubricated propeller-end bearings fitted with an approved oil-
seal gland is to be on the order of two times the required tail shaft diameter. The length of the
bearing may be less, provided the nominal bearing pressure is not more than 0.80 N/mm2 (0.0815
kgf/mm2, 116 psi) as determined by static bearing reaction calculation taking into account shaft
and propeller weight which is deemed to be exerted solely on the aft bearing, divided by the
projected area of the shaft. The minimum length, however, is not to be less than 1.5 times the
actual diameter.

13.3.2 Synthetic Bearings (rubber, reinforced resins, plastic, etc.) (2021)

The length of synthetic rubber, reinforced resin or plastic oil-lubricated propeller end bearings
fitted with an approved oil-seal gland is to be on the order of two times the required tail shaft
diameter. The length of the bearing may be less, provided the nominal bearing pressure is not
more than 0.60 N/mm2 (0.0611 kgf/mm2, 87 psi), as determined by static bearing reaction
calculation taking into account shaft and propeller weight which is deemed to be exerted solely on
the aft bearing, divided by the projected area of the shaft. The minimum length, however, is not to
be less than 1.5 times the actual diameter. Where the material has demonstrated satisfactory testing
and operating experience, consideration may be given to increased bearing pressure. Synthetic
materials for application as oil-lubricated stern tube bearings are to be of approved type.

13.3.3 Enviornmentally Acceptable Lubricants (EALs) (1 July 2022)

Environmentally acceptable lubricants (EALs) are biodegradable lubricants with minimal adverse
impact on the marine environment. EALs that are susceptible to hydrolysis from acid due to
chemical reaction with water which may cause corrosion in a stern tube system and degrade the
elastomer materials of the shaft seals. The designer is to submit supporting documentation
showing that EAL specifications are compatible with the shaft seal elastomer materials as
confirmed by the stern tube seal manufacturer.
Commentary:
When EALs are used, it is recommended that they are of a higher viscosity grade than their equivalent mineral oil
(e.g., a mineral oil of grade “100” or 100 cst would be equivalent to an EAL of, “150” or 150 cst).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 45
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

End of Commentary

15 Tail Shaft Propeller End Design

Tail shafts are to be provided with an accurate taper fit in the propeller hub, particular attention being given
to the fit at the large end of the taper.

15.1 Keyed
The key is to fit tightly in the keyway and be of sufficient size to transmit the full torque of the shaft, but it
is not to extend into the liner counterbore on the forward side of the hub. The forward end of the keyway is
to be so cut in the shaft as to give a gradual rise from the bottom of the keyway to the surface of the shaft.
Ample fillets are to be provided in the corners of the keyway and, in general, stress concentrations are to
be reduced as far as practicable.

15.3 Keyless
Where propellers are fitted without keys, detailed stress calculations and fitting instructions are to be
submitted for review. See 4-3-2/5.13.2.

17 Flexible Couplings
See 4-2-1/17.1.

19 Solid Couplings

19.1 Fitted Bolts

The minimum diameter of fitted shaft coupling bolts is to be determined by the following equation.

db = 0 . 64 D3 U + c /NBUb   mm(in . )

where

db = diameter of bolts at joints, in mm (in.)

D = minimum required shaft diameter designed considering the largest combined torque (static and
dynamic), acting at the shaft in vicinity of the respective coupling flanges; mm (in), see 4-3-1/27,
but not less than the minimum required line shaft diameter, as per 4-3-1/7, in mm (in.)
U = minimum specific tensile strength of shaft material, in N/mm2, (kgf/mm2, psi)

c = 160 (16.3, 23180)

N = number of bolts fitted in one coupling

B = bolt circle diameter, in mm (in.)

Ub = minimum specific tensile strength of bolt material, in N/mm2, (kgf/mm2, psi). To be not less than U.
Ub, is to be taken not more than 1.7U or 1000 N/mm2 (102 kgf/mm2, 145,000 psi), whichever is
less, for calculation purposes.

Notes:
1 The bolts are to be assembled with an interference fit.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 46
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

2 The use of other materials will be subject to special consideration based on submitted engineering analyses.

19.3 Non-fitted Bolts

The diameter of pre-stressed, non-fitted coupling bolts will be considered upon the submittal of detailed
preloading and stress calculations and fitting instructions. The tensile stress on the bolt due to pre-stressing
and astern pull is not to exceed 90% of the minimum specified yield strength of the bolt material. In
addition, the bearing stress on any member such as the shaft, bolt, threads or nut is not to exceed 90% of
the minimum specified yield strength of the material for that member.

19.3.1 Power Transmitted by Prestress Only

Where bolts are under pure tension, the factor of safety against slip under the worst of the
operating conditions, including mean transmitted torque plus vibratory torque due to torsional
loads, is to be at least as follows:

i) Inaccessible couplings (external to the hull or not readily accessible) 2.8

ii) Accessible couplings (internal to the hull) 2.0
19.3.2 Power Transmitted by Combination Prestress and Shear
Where the power is transmitted by a combination of fitted bolts and pre-stressed, non-fitted bolts,
the components are to meet the following criteria:

19.3.2(a) Fitted Bolts.

The shear stress under the maximum torque corresponding to the worst loaded condition is to be
not more than 50% of the minimum specified tensile yield strength of the bolt material.

19.3.2(b) Non-Fitted Bolts.

The factor of safety against slip under the maximum torque corresponding to the worst loaded
condition and the specified bolt tension is to be at least 1.6 for inaccessible couplings and 1.1 for
accessible couplings.

19.3.3 Dowels Used for Transmitting Power

Dowels connecting the tail shaft flange to the controllable pitch propeller hub, utilized with non-
fitted bolts to transmit power, are considered equivalent to fitted coupling bolts and are to comply
with 4-3-1/19.1 and, if applicable, 4-3-1/19.3.2(a). The dowels are to be accurately fitted and
effectively secured against axial movement. The coupling is to be satisfactory for astern condition.

19.5 Flanges
The thickness of coupling flanges is not to be less than the minimum required diameter of the coupling
bolts or 0.2 times D (as defined in 4-3-1/7), whichever is greater. The fillet radius at the base of an integral
flange is not to be less than 0.08 times the actual shaft diameter. Consideration of a recognized shaft
coupling standard will be given to fillets of multiple radii design. In general, the surface finish for fillet
radii is not to be rougher than 1.6 μmeters (63 μin) RMS. For the fillet radius for tail shaft to propeller
coupling flange, see Note 4 in 4-3-1/7.1 TABLE 2.

19.7 Locking Arrangement (2014)

After assembly, all coupling bolts and associated nuts are to be fitted with locking arrangement.

19.9 Demountable Couplings

Couplings are to be made of steel or other approved ductile material. The strength of demountable
couplings and keys is to be equivalent to that of the shaft. Couplings are to be accurately fitted to the shaft.
Where necessary, provisions for resisting thrust loading are to be provided.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 47
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

Hydraulic and other shrink fit couplings will be specially considered upon submittal of detailed preloading
and stress calculations and fitting instructions. In general, the torsional holding capacity is to be at least 2.8
times the transmitted mean torque plus vibratory torque due to torsionals for inaccessible couplings
(external to the hull or not readily accessible) and at least 2.0 times for accessible couplings (internal to the
hull). The preload stress is not to exceed 70% of the minimum specified yield strength.

21 Cardan Shaft
Cardan shafts are to be designed in accordance with the equation for propulsion shaft in 4-3-1/7.1, and
flanges and bolts are to be in accordance with 4-3-1/19.1, 4-3-1/19.3 and 4-3-1/19.5. The design of splines,
yokes and cross-members are to be evaluated based on engineering analyses which are to be submitted for
review. Where applicable, the cardan shaft assembly is to contain provisions for bearing thrust or pull from
the propeller.

23 Sealing arrangements (1 July 2021)

23.1 Stern Tube Seal

The seal arrangement which serves as the primary boundary providing an interface between the shaft and
the sea is to be approved type that has been through design assessment and testing. Test reports in
accordance with test procedures established by the manufacturer showing that the design serves the
intended function and/or records of satisfactory service history in marine applications are basis for Product
Design Assessment/Type approval.

23.3 Propeller End Seal

Effective means are to be provided to prevent sea water having access to the shaft at the part between the
after end of the liner and the propeller hub and between the shaft and the propeller, where applicable. See
typical sealing arrangements in 4-3-2/5 FIGURE 2 of the Marine Vessel Rules. See also 4-3-3/9.5 of the
Marine Vessel Rules.

25 Watertight Bulkhead Penetrations for Shafting (1 July 2021)

Where a propulsion shaft penetrates a watertight bulkhead, arrangements are to be made to maintain the
watertight integrity of the bulkhead.A bulkhead seal is to be installed whenever the shaft passes through a
watertight bulkhead. The bulkhead seal is to provide a liquid tight seal in both sides of the bulkhead for
both shaft rotations (ahead and reverse). Bulkhead seals are to be suitable for the rated shaft speed, radial
and axial motions due to shaft rotation and vibrations.Bulkhead seals are to be of approved type that have
been through design assessment and testing. Test reports in accordance with test procedures established by
the manufacturer showing that the design serves the intended function and/or records of satisfactory
service history in marine applications are basis for Product Design Assessment/Type approval.

27 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibration

27.1 General
Propulsion shafting is to be aligned with the location and spacing of the shaft bearings, being such as to
give acceptable bearing reactions and shaft bending moments and also acceptable amplitudes of vibration
for all conditions of craft loading and operation.

The designer or the builder is to evaluate the propulsion shafting system, taking into consideration any
forces or factors which may affect the reliability of the propulsion shafting system, including weight of the
propeller and shafts, hydrodynamic forces acting on the propeller, number of propeller blades in relation to
diesel engine cylinders, misalignment forces, thermal expansion, flexibility of engine and thrust bearing
foundations, engine induced vibrations, gear tooth loadings, flexible couplings, effect of power take-off

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 48
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

arrangements from the propulsion shafting system driving auxiliaries, etc., as applicable, as well as any
limits for vibrations and loadings specified by the equipment manufacturers.

27.3 Craft 61 m (200 ft) in Length and Over

27.3.1 Shaft Alignment Calculations
The requirements in 4-3-2/7.3 of the Marine Vessel Rules are to be complied with.

27.3.2 Torsional Vibrations

The requirements in 4-3-2/7.5.1 of the Marine Vessel Rules are to be complied with.

27.3.3 Axial Vibrations

The requirements in 4-3-2/7.7 of the Marine Vessel Rules are to be complied with.

27.3.4 Lateral (Whirling) Vibrations

The requirements in 4-3-2/7.9 of the Marine Vessel Rules are to be complied with.

27.3.5 Cast Resin Chocks

Resin chocks and their installation are to comply with the requirements in 4-3-2/11.1.3 of the
Marine Vessel Rules.

27.5 Craft Below 61 m (200 ft) in Length

27.5.1 Torsional Vibration
For craft fitted with an unusual propulsion arrangement or without vibration dampers, a torsional
vibration analysis of the propulsion system showing compliance with 4-3-2/7.5.1 of the Marine
Vessel Rules is to be submitted. This is not required for craft under 20 m (65 ft) in length or where
the installation is essentially the same as previous designs which have been proven satisfactory.

29 Circulating Currents (2014)

Where means are provided to prevent circulating currents from passing between the propeller, shaft and the
hull, a warning notice plate is to be provided in a visible place cautioning against the removal of such
protection.

31 Inspection, Testing and Certification (1 July 2021)

31.1 General
Shafting components are to be inspected, tested and certified by a Surveyor at the plant of the
manufacturer in accordance with the following requirements.

31.3 Material Testing

For testing of shafting component materials see 4-3-1/5.3.

31.5 Propulsion Shafts and Associated Parts

31.5.1 Power Transmitting Parts
All propulsion shafts and associated parts, such as coupling bolts, are to be visually examined for
surface flaws, out of roundness, straightness, and dimensional tolerances. The Surveyor in case of
doubts may require additional non-destructive testing. See 4-3-1/5.5 for tail shaft requirements.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 49
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

31.5.2 Liners
Shaft liners are to prove tight under hydrostatic test of 1.0 bar (1 kgf/cm2, 15 psi). After assembly,
the fit of the liner to the shaft is to be checked for freedom from voids. Any void in way of
bearings is to be dealt with as in 4-3-1/11.9

31.7 Flexible Couplings, Clutches, Cardan Shafts, etc.

Manufactured torque transmitting parts, such as flexible couplings, clutches (independent of the gear
assembly), cardan shafts, etc. are to be inspected, tested, and certified by a Surveyor at the plant of
manufacture. Alternatively, these parts may be certified under Type Approval Program (see 1-1-4/7.7 of
the ABS Rules for Conditions of Classification (Part 1)).

33 Installation and Trials (1 July 2021)

33.1 Shaft Alignment

The shaft alignment is to be carried out in the presence of a Surveyor. The alignment is to be verified in the
afloat condition with superstructure in place and major welding work completed and is to be to the
satisfaction of the attending Surveyor. Please refer to 4-3-2/11.1.2 of the Marine Vessel Rules for specific
requirements as applicable.

33.3 Sea Trial

The shafting installation is to be tested during sea trials under various maneuvering conditions. It is to be
free from dangerous vibration and to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

35 Line Cutters (2020)

35.1 Notation
Line cutters reduce the risk of propeller entanglement and shaft seal damage caused by line intrusion.
Where requested by the Owner, the class notation Line Cutter may be assigned to a craft with line cutters,
provided the following requirements are complied with.

35.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this section, the following definitions apply:

Scissors Type Rotating blades attached to the shaft (shaft mounted) or propeller hub (propeller mounted) and
passing over fixed blades and shear lines like a scissor.

Disc Type A sharp edged disc that rotates with the propeller or shaft.

Shaver Type Cutters that work continuously by shaving the line caught by the propeller.

35.5 Plans and Data to be Submitted

The following plans and data are to be submitted for review:

● Shafting arrangement
● Line cutter specifications including shaft RPM cutting range
● Engineering analyses
● Line cutter plans and construction drawings
● Maintenance Manual
● Service history, if available
● Propeller end shaft seal arrangement

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 50
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

● Material specifications
● Type test procedure and reports
● Type Approval Certificate

35.7 Materials
35.7.1 General
Materials for line cutters are to be stainless steel in accordance with Section 2-3-7 and Section
2-3-8 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2). Other materials may be specially
approved on a case-by-case basis. Where materials other than those specified in the Rules are
proposed, full details of chemical composition, heat treatment, and mechanical properties, as
appropriate, are to be submitted for approval.

Bolts are to be manufactured to a recognized standard.

35.9 Cutter Requirements and Design (1 July 2021)

The following design requirements are to be complied with and relevant drawing(s) and data are to be
submitted for review and approval prior to commencement of the initial surveys as specified in
4-3-1/35.15.1 of these Rules.

35.9.1 Cutter Styles

The following designs may be considered for this notation:

● Scissor Type
● Disk Type
● Shaver Type
35.9.2 Scissor Type
Scissor cutters are acceptable on vessels that utilize azimuth thrusters, fixed pitch propellers, or
controllable pitch propellers. They are to be mounted on the propeller hub for shaft sizes larger
than 12 inches in diameter. For vessels with shafts smaller than 12 inches in diameter, the cutters
are to be mounted to the shaft. In some cases, transmission spacers may be required to allow for
the added thickness of the spur mounting plate.

The cutter blades are to be machined sharp on both ends with a “U” shaped retainer design to
prevent lines from slipping out between cutters while the propeller is spinning in either the
forward or reverse direction. The gap between cutter blades is not to be larger than 0.010 inches at
all times.

35.9.3 Disk Type

The use of disk type line cutters is permitted on vessels with shaft smaller than 6.5 inches in
diameter. The cutter disk is to be held in place using grub screws to prevent axial movement.

35.9.4 Shaver Type

Shaver cutters are acceptable for cutting line on vessels that utilize fixed pitch propellers or
controllable pitch propellers and are not to be used on vessels with fiberglass hulls unless strength
calculations and plans for a special setup are submitted to ABS for review.

Note:

Shaver type line cutters are only capable of cutting line when the vessel is moving in the forward direction.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 51
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

35.9.5 Rope and Line Cutters of Unusual Design

Line cutters of unusual design will be subject to special consideration based on submittal of stress
analyses and other supporting details. These are to include, but are not limited to, the following:

● Stress analysis, including description of the methodology used for the analysis
● Fatigue assessment
● Allowable stress and fatigue criteria
● Procedure for testing of the cutter

For the analysis, the ahead condition is to be based on propulsion machinery’s maximum rating
and full ahead speed. The astern condition is to be based on the maximum available astern power
of the propulsion machinery (the astern power of the main propelling machinery is to be capable
of 70% of the ahead RPM corresponding to the maximum continuous ahead power, as required in
4-1-1/15.1) and is to include crash astern operation.

35.9.6 Propeller-end Seal and Protection Against Corrosion

Craft fitted with line cutters are to maintain proper protection of the shaft against corrosion and
propeller-end sealing requirements in accordance with 4-3-2/9.5 of these Rules.

35.9.7 Shaft Diameter

A shaft diameter range for each line cutter is to be preliminarily stated by the manufacturer.

35.9.8 Non-fitted Bolts

The tensile stress of the bolt due to pre-stressing and astern pull is not to exceed 90% of the
minimum specified yield strength of the bolt material. In addition, the bearing stress on any
member such as the flange, bolt head, threads, or nut is not to exceed 90% of the minimum
specified yield strength of the material of that member.

Bolts are be provided with means to prevent loosening in service.

35.9.9 Torsional Vibrations

The torsional vibration stress in the propulsion shafting system with the line cutter installed is not
to exceed the allowable vibratory stress, see 4-3-1/27.3.2.

35.9.10 Fiberglass Vessels

Installation on fiberglass vessels are subject to special consideration. In which case strength
calculations are to be submitted to ABS for review.

35.9.11 Dynamic Balancing

All rotating components of the line cutters are to be dynamically balanced at their maximum
designed shaft speed.

35.11 Strengthening for Navigation in Ice

For vessels to be assigned with Ice Class notations, line cutters are to be designed in accordance with
Section 6-1-3 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

35.13 Type Testing

Each type and size of line cutter is to be type tested at the manufacturer’s works or other acceptable
location.

i) The type test for line cutters is to be developed by the manufacturer and test procedures are to be
submitted to ABS for review.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 52
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1

ii) Blade sharpness, material hardness, surface finish, and dimension checks are to be performed in
the presence of the Surveyor.
iii) Testing of line cutters is to be carried out in a test rig that provides access for the Surveyor to
observe the line being cut.
iv) The rig shaft diameter and the line cutter’s largest suitable shaft diameter are to be of equal size.
v) Line cutters are required to cut through a standard fishing net and a mooring line with the same
diameter as would be used on the vessel or 89 mm (3.5 in.), whichever is less.
vi) Shaft vibration characteristics are to be measured and recorded in order to identify possible sub-
synchronous vibrations and resonances.
vii) After this test, the line cutters are to be inspected. The blades are not to have permanent
deformation or defect.

35.15 Surveys
35.15.1 Initial Survey
The installation is to be examined to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor in accordance with
the approved plans.

35.15.2 Survey After Construction

Refer to Section 7-9-32 of the Rules for Survey After Construction (Part 7).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 53
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 2
Propellers

1 General

1.1 Application
This section applies to propellers intended for propulsion. It covers fixed pitch and controllable pitch
propellers. Propellers for thrusters used for maneuvering and dynamic positioning are covered in Section
4-3-5. Performance of propellers, in respect to developing the designed output, is to be demonstrated
during sea trials.

For planing and semi-planing craft, the propellers need not be designed and constructed in accordance with
these requirements, provided they do not exceed 1.5 m (60 in.) in diameter and are part of a manufacturer’s
standard product line. In such instances, neither the Surveyor’s attendance for the material testing and
inspection nor the design review will be required.

1.3 Definitions
For purpose of this section, the following definitions apply.

1.3.1 Skew Angle

Skew Angle (θ ) of a propeller is the angle measured from ray ‘A’ passing through the tip of blade
at mid-chord line to ray ‘B’ tangent to the mid-chord line on the projected blade outline. See
4-3-2/1.3.4 FIGURE 1.

1.3.2 Highly Skewed Propeller

A Highly Skewed Propeller is one whose skew angle is more than 25°.

1.3.3 Propeller Rake

1.3.3(a) Rake
Rake is the distance at the blade tip between the generating line and the line perpendicular to the
propeller axis that meets the generating line at the propeller axis. See 4-3-2/1.3.4 FIGURE 2.

1.3.3(b) Rake Angle (ϕ).

Rake Angle of a propeller is the angle measured from the plane perpendicular to shaft centerline to
the tangent to the generating line at a specified radius (0.6 × radius for the purpose of this
section). See 4-3-2/1.3.4 FIGURE 2.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 54
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

1.3.4 Wide Tipped Blade Propeller (2014)

A propeller blade is to be considered as a wide tipped blade if the maximum expanded blade cord
length occurs at or above 0.8R, with R being the distance measured from the centerline of the
propeller hub.

FIGURE 1
Maximum Skew Angle

FIGURE 2
Rake and Rake Angle

1.3.5 Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) (2021)

A PBCF is an energy saving device with post-swirl fins installed onto the boss cap of the
propeller, rotating with the propeller and enhancing propeller efficiency.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 55
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

1.5 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted

1.5.1 Fixed Pitch Propeller of Conventional Design
Material

Design characteristics of propeller

Dimensions and tolerances

Propeller plan

Blade thickness calculations

1.5.2 Controllable Pitch Propeller of Conventional Design

As per 4-3-2/1.5.1

Hub and hub to tail shaft flange attachment bolts

Propeller blade flange and bolts

Internal mechanism

Hydraulic piping control system

Instrumentation and alarm system

Strength calculations for internal mechanism

1.5.3 Highly Skewed Propeller and Other Unconventional Designs

In addition to the foregoing, where propeller blade designs are of the types for which these Rules
do not provide simplified blade thickness calculations, such as

● Highly skewed propellers with θ > 50°;

● High skewed propellers made of other than type 4 materials with 50° ≥ θ > 25°;
● Controllable pitch propellers with θ > 25°;

propeller load and stress analyses demonstrating adequacy of blade strength are to be submitted.

1.5.4 Keyless Propeller

Where propellers are to be fitted to the shaft without keys, stress calculations for hub stresses and
holding capacity, along with fitting instructions, are to be submitted.

1.5.5 Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) (2021)

Where propeller boss cap fins are fitted to propellers, detailed drawings of the arrangement
including, but, not limited to the following:

i) Assembly drawing including material specifications

ii) Cap
iii) Vane or Fin blade
iv) Stress calculations including fatigue

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 56
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

3 Materials

3.1 Normally Used Propeller Materials (2021)

4-3-2/3.1 TABLE 1 shows the properties of materials normally used for propellers. See 2-3-14/3 and
Section 2-3-15 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) for full details of the materials. The
material of the PBCF device is to be similar to that of the propeller. Consideration may be given to other
equivalent material that is also galvanically compatible to the propeller.

Where an alternative material specification is proposed, detailed chemical composition and mechanical
properties similar to those in Section 2-3-14 and Section 2-3-15 of the ABS Rules for Materials and
Welding (Part 2) are to be submitted for approval. The f and w values of such materials to be used in the
equations hereunder will be specially considered upon submittal of complete material specifications
including corrosion fatigue data to 108 cycles.

TABLE 1
Propeller Materials

Elongation, %

Tensile Strength Yield Strength Gauge Length

2 2 2 2 2 2
Type Material N/mm kgf/mm lb/in N/mm kgf/mm lb/in 4d 5d

2 Manganese bronze 450 46 65,000 175 18 25,000 20 18

3 Nickel-manganese 515 53 75,000 220 22.5 32,000 18 16

bronze

4 Nickel-aluminum 590 60 86,000 245 25 36,000 16 15

bronze

5 Manganese-nickel- 630 64 91,000 275 28 40,000 20 18

aluminum bronze

CF-3 Stainless steel 485 49 70,000 205 21 30,000 35 32

3.3 Stud Materials

The material of the studs securing detachable blades to the hub is to be of at least Grade 2 forged steel or
equally satisfactory material; see 2-3-7/7.7 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) for
specifications of Grade 2 forged steel.

3.5 Material Testing

Materials of propellers cast in one piece and materials of blades, hub, studs and other load-bearing parts of
controllable pitch propellers are to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor. For requirements of material
testing, see 2-3-14/3 and Section 2-3-15 and 2-3-7/7 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

5 Design

5.1 Blade Thickness – Fixed Pitch Propeller

The thickness of the propeller blades of conventional design (θ ≤ 25°) is not to be less than that
determined by the following equations:

AH Cs BK
t0 . 25 = K1 CnCRN ± Cn 4C

6.0
A = 1.0 + P0 . 70 + 4 . 3P0 . 25

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 57
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

4300wa R 2 D 3
B= N 100 20

C = 1 + 1 . 5P0 . 25 Wf − B

where (units of measures are given in SI (MKS, and US) units, respectively):

a = expanded blade area divided by disc area

as = area of expanded cylindrical section at 0.25 radius; mm2 (in2)
Cn = section modulus coefficient at the 0.25 radius. Cn is to be determined by the following
equation.
I0
Cn =
UfWT2

If the calculated Cn value exceeds 0.10, the required thickness is to be computed with Cn =
0.10. For craft below 61 m (200 ft) in length, the required thickness may be computed with the
assumed value Cn = 0.10.
Cs = section area coefficient at 0.25 radius and is to be determined by the following equation. For
craft below 61 m (200 ft) in length, the required thickness may be computed with the assumed
value Cs = 0.69.
as
Cs = WT

The values of Cs and Cn, computed as stipulated above, are to be indicated on the propeller drawing.

D = propeller diameter; m (ft)

f, w = material constants from the following table:

Material type SI and MKS units US units

(see 4-3-3/3.1)
F w F w

2 2.10 8.3 68 0.30

3 2.13 8.0 69 0.29

4 2.62 7.5 85 0.27

5 2.37 7.5 77 0.27

Cast Steel 2.10 8.30 68 0.30

CF-3 2.10 7.75 68 0.28

Note:

The f and w values of materials not covered will be specially considered upon submittal of complete material
specifications including corrosion fatigue data to 108 cycles.

H = power at rated speed; kW (PS, hp)

I0 = moment of inertia of expanded cylindrical section at 0.25 radius about a straight line through
the center of gravity parallel to the pitch line or to the nose-tail line; mm4 (in4)
K = rake of propeller blade, in mm (in.) (positive for aft rake and negative for forward rake)
K1 = coefficient as given below

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 58
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

SI MKS US
K1 337 289 13

N = number of blades
P0 . 25 = pitch at one-quarter radius divided by propeller diameter, corresponding to the design ahead
condition
P0 . 70 = pitch at seven-tenths radius divided by propeller diameter, corresponding to the design
ahead condition
R = rpm at rated speed
t0 . 25 = minimum required thickness at the thickest part of the blade section at one quarter radius;
mm (in.)
T = maximum designed thickness of blade section at 0.25 radius from propeller drawing; mm
(in.)
Uf = maximum nominal distance from the moment of inertia axis to points of the face boundary
(tension side) of the section; mm (in.)
W = expanded width of a cylindrical section at 0.25 radius; mm (in.)

5.3 Blade Thickness – Controllable-pitch Propellers

The thickness of the controllable pitch propeller blade of conventional design (θ ≤ 25°) is not to be less
than determined by the following equation:

AH Cs BK
t0 . 35 = K2 CnCRN ± Cn 6 . 3C

6.0
A = 1.0 + P0 . 70 + 3P0 . 35

4900wa R 2 D 3
B= N 100 20

C = 1 + 0 . 6P0 . 35 Wf − B

where the symbols used in these formulas are the same as those in 4-3-2/5.1, except as modified below:

as = area of expanded cylindrical section at 0.35 radius; mm2 (in2)

Cn = section modulus coefficient at the 0.35 radius and is to be determined by the following
equation:
I0
Cn =
UfWT2

If the Cn value exceeds 0.10, the required thickness is to be computed with Cn = 0.10. For craft
below 61 m (200 ft) in length, the required thickness may be computed with the assumed value
Cn = 0.10.
Cs = section area coefficient at 0.35 radius and is to be determined by the following equation:
as
Cs = WT

For craft below 61 m (200 ft) in length, the required thickness may be computed with the
assumed value Cs = 0.69.

The values of Cs and Cn, computed as stipulated above, are to be indicated on the propeller drawing.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 59
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

I0 = moment of inertia of expanded cylindrical section at 0.35 radius about a straight line through
the center of gravity parallel to the pitch line or to the nose-tail line; mm4 (in4)
K2 = coefficient as given below

SI MKS US

K2 271 232 10.4

P0 . 35 = pitch at 0.35 radius divided by D

T = maximum designed thickness of blade section at 0.35 radius from propeller drawing; mm
(in.)
t0 . 35 = required minimum thickness of the thickest part of the blade section at 0.35 radius; mm
(in.)
W = expanded width of a cylindrical section at 0.35 radius; mm (in.)

5.5 Blade Thickness – Highly Skewed Fixed-pitch Propellers

5.5.1 Propeller Blades with Skew Angle θ; Where 25°< θ ≤ 50° (2015)
The provisions of 4-3-2/5.5.1 are applicable to fixed pitch propellers having a skew angle over 25°
but not exceeding 50°, and made of Type 4 material only. For propellers of other materials, see
4-3-3/5.5.2. Where skew angle is greater than 50°, see 4-3-2/5.5.2.

5.5.1(a) Blade Thickness at 0.25 Radius m.

The maximum thickness at 0.25 radius is to be not less than the thickness required in 4-3-3/5.1 for
fixed pitch-propellers multiplied by the factor m as given below:

m = 1 + 0 . 0065 θ − 25

5.5.1(b) Blade Thickness at 0.6 Radius.

The maximum thickness of the blade section at 0.6 radius is to be not less than that obtained from
the following equations:

2C0 . 9 HDΓ 0.5

t0 . 6 = K3 · 1 + C0 . 9 1 + C0 . 6 RP0 . 6Y

Γ= 1+ θ − 25
θ ϕ2 + 0 . 16ϕ · θ · P0 . 9 + 100

where:

C0 . 6 = expanded chord length at the 0.6 radius divided by propeller diameter

C0 . 9 = expanded chord length at the 0.9 radius divided by propeller diameter
K3 = coefficient as given below:

SI MKS US

K3 12.6 6.58 1.19

P0 . 6 = pitch at the 0.6 radius divided by propeller diameter

P0 . 9 = pitch at the 0.9 radius divided by propeller diameter
t0 . 6 = required thickness of the blade section at 0.6 radius; mm (in.)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 60
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

Y = minimum specified yield strength of type 4 propeller material; N/mm2 (kgf/mm2,

psi). See 4-3-2/3.1 TABLE 1.
θ = skew angle in degrees (see 4-3-2/1.3.1)
ϕ = rake angle in degrees [see 4-3-2/1.3.3(b)] at 0.6 radius, positive for aft rake

H , D, and R are as defined in 4-3-2/5.1.

5.5.1(c) Blade Thickness Between 0.6 and 0.9 Radii.

The maximum thickness at any radius between 0.6 and 0.9 radii is to be not less than that obtained
from the following equation:

tx = 3 . 3D + 2 . 5(1 – x)(t0 . 6 – 3 . 3D) mm; or

tx = 0 . 04D + 2 . 5(1 – x)(t0 . 6 – 0 . 04D) in.

where

tx = required minimum thickness of the thickest part of the blade section at radius ratio x.
t0 . 6 = thickness of blade section at the 0.6 radius, as required by 4-3-2/5.5.1(b)
x = ratio of the radius under consideration to D/2; 0.6 < x ≤ 0.9
5.5.1(d) Trailing Edge Thickness at 0.9 Radius.
The edge thickness at 0.9 radius measured at 5% of chord length from the trailing edge is to be not
less than 30% of the maximum blade thickness required by 4-3-2/5.5.1(c) above at that radius.

5.5.2 Propeller of Other Than Type 4 Materials with Skew Angle θ; Where 25° < θ ≤ 50°
Propellers made of materials other than Type 4 and with skew angle 25° < θ ≤ 50° are subject to
special consideration. Design analyses, as indicated in 4-3-2/5.7, are to be submitted.

5.5.3 Propeller Blades with Skew Angle θ > 50°

Propellers with the maximum skew angle exceeding 50° will be subject to special consideration.
Design analyses, as indicated in 4-3-2/5.7, are to be submitted.

5.7 Blades of Unusual Design (2021)

Propellers of unusual design, such as those indicated in 4-3-2/5.5.2 and 4-3-2/5.5.3, controllable pitch
propeller of skewed design (θ > 25°), skewed propeller (θ > 25°) with wide-tip blades, cycloidal
propellers, controllable pitch propellers with wide-tip blades, rim driven blades, etc., are subject to special
consideration based on submittal of propeller load and stress analyses. The analyses are to include, but be
not limited to the following:

● Description of method to determine blade loading;

● Description of method selected for stress analysis;
● Ahead condition is to be based on propulsion machinery’s maximum rating and full ahead speed;
● Astern condition is to be based on the maximum available astern power of the propulsion machinery
(the astern power of the main propelling machinery is to be capable of 70% of the ahead rpm
corresponding to the maximum continuous ahead power, as required in 4-1-1/15.1; and is to include
crash astern operation;
● Fatigue assessment; and
● Allowable stress and fatigue criteria.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 61
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

5.9 Blade-root Fillets

Fillets at the root of the blades are not to be considered in the determination of blade thickness.

5.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Pitch Actuation System

5.11.1 Blade Flange and Mechanisms
The strength of the propeller blade flange and pitch changing mechanism of controllable-pitch
propellers subjected to the forces from propulsion torque is to be at least 1.5 times that of the
blade atdesign pitch conditions.

5.11.2 Stud Bolt Area

The sectional area of the stud bolts at the bottom of the thread, s, is to be determined by the
following equations.

SI units MKS units US units

s 2
0 . 056Wkft0 2
0 . 0018Wkft0
. 35 . 35
rn   mm2 rn   in2

k 621 63 . 3 90, 000

U + 207 U + 21 . 1 U + 30, 000

where

s = area of one stud at bottom of thread

n = number of studs on driving side of blade
r = radius of pitch circle of the studs; mm (in.)
k = material correction factor for stud materials better than ABS Gr. 2 forged steel
U = ultimate tensile strength of the stud material; N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)

See 4-3-2/5.1 for f and 4-3-2/5.3 for W and t0 . 35.

5.11.3 Blade Pitch Control

5.11.3(a) Bridge Control.
Where the navigation bridge is provided with direct control of propulsion machinery, it is to be
fitted with means to control the pitch of the propeller.

5.11.3(b) Duplication of Power Unit.

At least two hydraulic power pump units for the pitch actuating system are to be provided and
arranged so that the transfer between pump units can be readily effected. For propulsion
machinery spaces intended for unattended operation (ACCU, ABCU notation), automatic start of
the standby pump unit is to be provided.

The emergency pitch actuating system [as required by 4-3-2/5.11.3(c).iii] may be accepted as one
of the required hydraulic power pump units, provided it is no less effective.

5.11.3(c) Emergency Provisions.

To safeguard the propulsion and maneuvering capability of the craft in the event of any single
failure in either the remote pitch control system or the pitch actuating system external to the
propeller shaft and oil transfer device (also known as oil distribution box), the following are to be
provided:

i) Manual control of pitch at or near the pitch-actuating control valve (usually the
directional valve or similar).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 62
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

ii) The pitch is to remain in the last ordered position until the emergency pitch actuating
system is brought into operation.
iii) An emergency pitch actuating system. This system is to be independent of the normal
system up to the oil transfer device, provided with its own oil reservoir and able to change
the pitch from full ahead to full astern.
5.11.3(d) Integral Oil Systems.
Where the pitch actuating hydraulic system is integral with the reduction gear lubricating oil
system and/or clutch hydraulic system, the piping is to be arranged such that any failure in the
pitch actuating system will not leave the other system(s) non-operational.

5.11.3(e) Provisions for Testing.

Means are to be provided in the pitch actuating system to simulate system behavior in the event of
loss of system pressure. Hydraulic pump units driven by main propulsion machinery are to be
fitted with a suitable by-pass for this purpose.

5.11.3(f) Multiple Propellers.

For craft fitted with more than one controllable pitch propeller, each of which is independent of
the other, only one emergency pitch actuating system [as required by 4-3-2/5.11.3(c)iii)] need be
fitted, provided it is arranged such that it can be used to provide emergency pitch-changing for all
propellers.

5.11.3(g) Hydraulic Piping.

Hydraulic piping is to meet the requirements of Section 4-4-6.

5.11.4 Instrumentation
All controllable pitch propeller systems are to be provided with instrumentation as provided
below:

5.11.4(a) Pitch Indicators.

A pitch indicator is to be fitted on the navigation bridge. In addition, each station capable of
controlling the propeller pitch is to be fitted with a pitch indicator.

5.11.4(b) Monitoring.
Individual visual and audible alarms are to be provided at the engine room control station to
indicate hydraulic oil low pressure and high temperature and hydraulic tank low level. A high
hydraulic oil pressure alarm is to be fitted if required by the proposed system design and, if fitted,
is to be set below the relief valve setting.

For craft assigned with ACCU or ABCU notations, see 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1 and 4-7-3/23
TABLE 2 for monitoring on the navigation bridge and in the centralized control station,
respectively.

5.13 Propeller Fitting

5.13.1 Keyed Fitting
For shape of the keyway in the shaft and size of the key, see 4-3-2/9.

5.13.2 Keyless Fitting

5.13.2(a) Design Criteria.
The factor of safety against slip of the propeller hub on tail shaft taper at 35°C (95°F) is to be at
least 2.8 under the action of maximum continuous ahead rated torque plus torque due to torsional
vibrations. For oil injection method of fit, the coefficient of friction is to be taken no greater than
0.13 for bronze/steel propeller hubs on steel shafts. The maximum equivalent uniaxial stress (von

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 63
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

Mises-Hencky criteria) in the hub at 0°C (32°F) is not to exceed 70% of the minimum specified
yield stress or 0.2% proof stress of the propeller material.

Stress calculations and fitting instructions are to be submitted (see4-3-2/1.5.4 ) and are to include
at least the following:

● Theoretical contact surface area;

● The maximum permissible pull-up length at 0°C (32°F) as limited by the maximum
permissible uniaxial stress specified above;
● The minimum pull-up length and contact pressure at 35°C (95°F) to attain a safety factor
against slip of 2.8;
● The proposed pull-up length and contact pressure at fitting temperature; and
● The rated propeller ahead thrust.
5.13.2(b) Nomenclature.
The symbols used are defined as follows.

A = 100% of contact surface area between propeller hub and shaft taper; mm2 (in2). Oil
grooves may be ignored. The propeller hub forward and aft counterbore lengths (ℓ1
and ℓ2 in 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) FIGURE 3) and the forward and aft inner edge radii (r1 and r2
in 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) FIGURE 3), if any, are to be excluded.
B = dimensionless constant based on μ, θ, and S
c = coefficient, dependent on the type of propulsion drive: 1.0 for drives such as turbine,
geared diesel, electric, and direct diesel with elastic coupling; and 1.2 for direct diesel
drive. This value may have to be increased for cases where extremely high pulsating
torque is expected in service.
Db = mean outer diameter of propeller hub corresponding to Ds; mm (in.) Db is to be
calculated as the mean of Dbm, Dbf and Dba, outer diameters of hub corresponding to
Ds, the forward point of contact and the aft point of contact, respectively, see
4-3-2/5.13.2(b) FIGURE 3.
Dba + Dbm + Dbf
Db =
3

Dbm = mean outer diameter of propeller boss, in mm (in.), at the axial position corresponding
to Ds, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) FIGURE 3.
Ds = diameter of shaft at mid-point of the taper in axial direction; mm (in.), taking into
account the exclusion of forward and aft counterbore length and the forward and aft
edge radii, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) FIGURE 3.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 64
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

FIGURE 3
Theoretical Contact Surface Between Hub and Shaft

Eb = modulus of elasticity of hub material, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) TABLE 2

Es = modulus of elasticity of shaft material, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) TABLE 2
Fv = shear force at propeller/shaft interface; N, (kgf, lbf)
H = power at rated speed; kW (PS, hp)
K = ratio of Db to Ds, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) FIGURE 3.
P = mean propeller pitch; mm (in.)
Pmin = minimum required mating surface pressure at 35°C (95°F); N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
Pt = minimum required mating surface pressure at temperature t; N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
Pmax = maximum permissible mating surface pressure at 0°C; N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
Q = rated torque corresponding to H and R; N-mm (kgf-mm, lbf-in)
R = rpm at rated speed
S = factor of safety against slippage at 35°C (95°F)
T = rated propeller thrust; N (kgf, lbf)
tref = 35°C (95°F)
v = craft speed at rated power; knots (knots)
αb = coefficient of linear expansion of propeller hub material; mm/mm°C (in/in°F); see
4-3-2/5.13.2(b) TABLE 2
αs = coefficient of linear expansion of shaft material; mm/mm°C (in/in°F); see
4-3-2/5.13.2(b) TABLE 2
δmin = minimum pull-up length at 35°C (95°F); mm (in.)
δt = minimum pull-up length at temperature t; mm (in.)
δmax = maximum permissible pull-up length at 0°C (32°F); mm (in.)
θ = half taper of shaft; e.g. if taper =1/15, θ =1/30
σy = yield stress or 0.2% proof stress of propeller material; N/mm2, ( kgf/mm2, psi)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 65
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

μ = coefficient of friction between mating surfaces; to be taken as 0.13 for fitting

methods using oil injection and hubs of bronze of steel
νb = Poisson’s ration of hub material, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) TABLE 2
νs = Poisson’s ratio of shaft material, see 4-3-2/5.13.2(b) TABLE 2

TABLE 2
Material Constants

Modulus of Elasticity Coefficient of Expansion

Poisson’s
2 2
Material N/mm kgf/mm psi Ratio mm/mm°C in/in°F

Cast and forged steel 20.6 × 104 2.1 × 104 29.8 × 106 0.29 12.0 × 10−6 6.67 × 10−6

Bronzes, Types 1 & 2 10.8 × 104 1.1 × 104 15.6 × 106 0.33 17.5 × 10−6 9.72 × 10−6

Bronzes, Types 3 & 4 11.8 × 104 1.2 × 104 17.1 × 106 0.33 17.5 × 10−6 9.72 × 10−6

5.13.2(c) Equations.
The taper on the tail shaft cone is not to exceed 1/15. Although the equations given below are for
ahead operation, they may be considered to provide an adequate safety margin for astern operation
also.

The minimum mating surface pressure at 35°C (95°F), Pmin, is to be:

ST Fv 2
Pmin = AB −Sθ + μ2 + B T   N/mm2(kgf /mm2, psi)

The rated propeller thrust, T, submitted by the designer is to be used in these calculations. In the
event that this is not submitted, one of the equations in 4-3-2/5.13.2(c) TABLE 3 may be used,
subject to whichever yields the larger value of Pmin.

TABLE 3
Estimated Propeller Thrust, T

SI units (N) MKS units (kgf) US units (lbf)

1762 H
v   or 132 H
v   or 295 H
v   or

57 . 4 × 106 · PR
H
4 . 3 × 106 · PR
H
0 . 38 × 106 · PR
H

The shear force at interface, Fv, is given by

2cQ
Fv = D2   N(kgf, lbf)

Constant B is given by:

B = μ2 – S2θ2

The corresponding [i.e., at 35°C (95°F)] minimum pull-up length, δmin, is:

D 1 K2 + 1
δmin = Pmin 2θs Eb K2 − 1 + vb + 1
Es 1 − vs   mm(in . )

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 66
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

Db
K= Ds

The minimum pull-up length, δt, at temperature, t, where t < 35°C (95°F), is:

Ds
δt = δmin + 2θ αb − αs tref − t   mm(in . )

The corresponding minimum surface pressure, Pt, is:

δt
Pt = Pmin δ   N/mm2(kgf /mm2, psi)
min

The maximum permissible mating surface pressure, Pmax, at 0°C (32°F) is:

0 . 7σy K2 − 1
Pmax =   N/mm2(kgf /mm2, psi)
3K4 + 1

and the corresponding maximum permissible pull-up length, δmax, is:

Pmax
δmax = Pmin δmin   mm(in . )

5.15 Retrofitting Existing Craft with Propeller Boss Cap Fins (2021)
The influence from the change in propeller mass and polar moment of inertia due to the installation of the
PBCF device is to be considered insofar as the effects on vessel’s shaft alignment and vibration
characteristics are concerned. An evaluation is to be conducted when there is a change of 4% or more in
the propeller mass or in the polar moment of inertia of the propeller (including boss cap, hub, etc.) of a
conventional propulsion shafting arrangement.

7 Certification

7.1 Material Tests

Propeller materials are to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor. See 4-3-2/3.5.

7.3 Inspection and Certification (2021)

Finished propellers are to be inspected and certified at the manufacturer’s plant by a Surveyor. The blade
forms, pitch, blade thickness, diameters, etc. are to be checked for conformance with approved plans. The
entire surface of the finished propeller is to be examined visually and by liquid penetrant method. See
2-3-14/3.21 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2). All finished propellers are to be
statically balanced in the presence of the Surveyor. As far as practicable, reference is to be made to the
provisions of ISO 484 for these purposes. Also, please see 7-A1-10 of the ABS Rules for Survey after
Construction for additional requirements for Survey.

The surfaces of stainless steel propellers are to be suitably protected from the corrosive effect of the
industrial environment until fitted on the craft. See 2-3-15/3 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding
(Part 2).

9 Installation, Tests and Trial

9.1 Keyed Propellers

The sides of the key are to have a true fit in the keyways of the propeller hub and the shaft. See also
4-3-1/15 for tail shaft propeller-end design.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 67
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2

9.3 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Fit of Studs and Nuts

Studs, nuts and bolts are to have tight-fitting threads and are to be provided with effective means of
locking. Effective sealing arrangements are to be provided in way of the bolt or stud holes against sea
water ingress or oil leakage. Bolts, nuts and studs are to be of corrosion resistant materials or adequately
protected from corrosion.

9.5 Protection Against Corrosion

The exposed steel of the shaft is to be protected from the action of the water by filling all spaces between
cap, hub and shaft with a suitable material. The propeller assembly is to be sealed at the forward end with a
well-fitted soft-rubber packing ring. When the rubber ring is fitted in an external gland, the hub
counterbore is to be filled with suitable material, and clearances between shaft liner and hub counterbore
are to be kept to a minimum. When the rubber ring is fitted internally, ample clearance is to be provided
between liner and hub. The rubber ring is to be sufficiently oversized to squeeze into the clearance space
provided; and, where necessary, a filler piece is to be fitted in way of the propeller-hub keyway to provide
a flat unbroken seating for the rubber ring.

9.7 Circulating Currents

Where means are provided to prevent circulating currents from passing between the propeller, shaft and the
hull, a warning notice plate is to be provided in a visible place cautioning against the removal of such
protection.

9.9 Keyed and Keyless Propellers – Contact Area Check and Securing
The propeller hub to tail shaft taper contact area is to be checked in the presence of a Surveyor. In general,
the actual contact area is to be not less than 70% of the theoretical contact area. Non-contact bands
extending circumferentially around the propeller hub or over the full length of the hub are not acceptable.
Installation is to be in accordance with the procedure referred to in 4-3-2/5.13.2(a) and final pull-up travel
is to be recorded. After final pull-up, propellers are to be secured by a nut on the after end of the tail shaft.
The nut is to be secured to the tail shaft against loosening. See also 4-3-1/15

9.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Hydrostatic Tests

The completed piping system of the controllable pitch propeller hydraulic system is to be hydrostatically
tested at a pressure equal to 1.5 times the design pressure in the presence of a Surveyor. Relief-valve
operation is to be verified.

9.13 Sea Trial

The designed performance of the propeller at rated speed is to be demonstrated during sea trial. For
controllable pitch propellers, the blade pitch control functions, from full ahead through full astern, are to be
demonstrated. The emergency provisions in 4-3-2/5.11.3(c) are also to be demonstrated.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 68
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 3
Steering Gear

1 General

1.1 Application
These requirements apply to craft which have rule-required upper rudder stock diameter less than 230 mm
(9 in.). Where the rule-required upper rudder stock diameter is 230 mm (9 in.) or above, the Marine Vessel
Rules are to be applied.

Where a rudder is not fitted and steering is achieved by change of setting of the propulsion units, such as
the use of cycloidal, azimuthing or similar type propulsion systems, Section 4-3-5 in Part 4 of the Marine
Vessel Rules is to be applied.

1.3 Definitions
1.3.1 Main Steering Gear
Main steering gear is the machinery, rudder actuators, power units, ancillary equipment and the
means of applying torque to the rudder stock (e.g., tiller or quadrant) necessary for effecting
movement of the rudder for the purpose of steering the craft.

1.3.2 Auxiliary Steering Gear

Auxiliary steering gear is the equipment other than any part of the main steering gear necessary to
steer the craft in the event of failure of the main steering gear, but not including the tiller, quadrant
or components serving the same purpose.

1.3.3 Control System

Steering gear control system is the equipment by which orders are transmitted from the navigation
bridge to the steering gear power actuating system. Steering gear control systems comprise
transmitters, receivers, hydraulic control pumps and their associated motors, motor controllers,
piping and cables required to control the steering gear power actuating system. For the purpose of
these Rules, steering wheels, steering levers, and rudder angle feedback linkages are not
considered to be part of the control system.

1.3.4 Power Units

A steering gear power unit is:

i) In the case of electric steering gears, an electric motor and its associated electrical
equipment,

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 69
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

ii) In the case of electro-hydraulic steering gears, an electric motor and its associated
electrical equipment and connected pump(s), and
iii) In the case of other hydraulic steering gears, a driving engine and connected pump(s).
1.3.5 Power Actuating System
Power actuating system is the hydraulic equipment provided for supplying power to turn the
rudder stock, comprising a power unit or units together with the associated pipes and fittings and a
rudder actuator. The power actuating systems may share common mechanical components (i.e.,
tiller, quadrant, rudder stock, or components serving the same purpose).

1.3.6 Rudder Actuator

Rudder actuator is the component which directly converts hydraulic pressure into mechanical
action to move the rudder.

1.3.7 Maximum Working Pressure

Maximum working pressure is the expected pressure in the system when the steering gear is
operated to comply with4-3-3/1.9.

1.5 Plans and Data

Plans and data of the steering gear system to be submitted are as follows:

1.5.1 Plans
General arrangements of the main and auxiliary steering gears, and of the steering gear
compartment.

Assembly of upper rudder stock, tiller, tie rod, rudder actuators, etc., as applicable.

Construction details of all torque-transmitting components of steering gear, such as tiller, tiller pin,
tiller/rudder stock interference fit mechanism, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc., including bill of
materials, welding procedures, nondestructive testing, as applicable.

Schematic hydraulic piping diagram, incorporating hydraulic logic diagram, and including bill of
materials, typical pipe to pipe joint details, pipe to valve joint details, pipe to equipment joint
details, pressure rating of valves and pipe fittings and pressure relief valve settings.

Steering gear control system incorporating schematic electrical control logic diagram,
instrumentation, alarm devices, etc., and including bill of materials.

Electrical power supply to power units and to steering gear control, including schematic diagram
of motor controllers, feeder cables, feeder cable electrical protection.

1.5.2 Data
Rated torque of main steering gear.

Calculations of torque-transmitting components such as tiller, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc.

1.7 Power Operation

The main steering gear is to be power-operated by one or more power units if the rule-required upper
rudder stock diameter is 120 mm (4.7 in.) or greater.

Notwithstanding the above, the performance requirements stated in 4-3-3/1.9 and 4-3-3/1.11 are to be used
to determine if it is necessary for the main and auxiliary steering gears to be power-operated.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 70
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

1.9 Main Steering Gear

The main steering gear is to be capable of putting the rudder from 35° on one side to 35° on the other side
with the craft running ahead at maximum continuous shaft rpm and at the summer load waterline; and
under the same conditions, the travel time from 35° on either side to 30° on the other side is not to be more
than 28 seconds. For controllable pitch propellers, the propeller pitch is to be at the maximum design pitch
approved for the above maximum continuous ahead rated rpm.

1.11 Auxiliary Steering Gear

The auxiliary steering gear is to be capable of putting the rudder from 15° on one side to 15° on the other
side in not more than 60 seconds with the craft running ahead at half speed, or seven knots, whichever is
greater.

The auxiliary steering gear is to be so arranged that the failure of the main steering gear will not render it
inoperative. Likewise, failure of the auxiliary steering gear is not to affect the main steering gear.

An auxiliary steering gear is not required under the following conditions.

1.11.1
When the main steering gear comprises two or more power units, and is so arranged that after a
single failure in its piping system or in one of the power units, the defect can be isolated so that
the steering capability can be maintained or regained; and provided that

1.11.1(a)
For passenger craft, the main steering gear is capable of operating the rudder, as required in
4-3-3/1.9, while any one of the power units is out of operation; and

1.11.1(b)
For cargo craft, the main steering gear is to be capable of operating the rudder, as required by
4-3-3/1.9, while all the power units are in operation.

1.11.2
When the main steering gear is non-power-operated such as an orbitrol system, or consists solely
of mechanical components such as sheaves, blocks, wires, chains, etc.

1.13 Steering Gear Compartment Unit Location

The main and the auxiliary steering gears are to be protected from weather. The power units may be
located either within or outside of the compartment containing the rudder actuators. In the event of loss of
hydraulic fluid and of the need to restore the operation of the main or the auxiliary steering gear, the
steering gear compartment is to be provided with handrails and gratings or other non-slip surfaces to
promote suitable working conditions.

In the event of control system failure, or the need to operate the main or the auxiliary steering gear from
within the steering compartment or from positions other than the navigation bridge, craft of 500 gross tons
and above are to be provided with a means to indicate the position of the rudder at these positions where
emergency steering is to be conducted.

3 Materials

3.1 General
All steering gear components transmitting a force to the rudder and pressure retaining components of the
hydraulic rudder actuator are to be of steel or other approved ductile material. The use of gray cast iron or
other material having an elongation less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.) is not acceptable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 71
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

3.3 Material Testing

Except as modified below, materials for the parts and components mentioned in 4-3-3/3.1 are to be tested
in the presence of the Surveyor in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2).

Material tests for steering gear coupling bolts and torque transmitting keys need not be witnessed by the
Surveyor.

Material tests for commercially supplied tie-rod nuts need not be witnessed by the Surveyor, provided the
nuts are in compliance with the approved steering gear drawings and are appropriately marked and
identified in accordance with a recognized industry standard. Mill test reports for the tie-rod nuts are to be
made available to the Surveyor upon request. For all non-standard tie-rod nuts, material testing is required
to be performed in the presence of the Surveyor.

Material tests for forged, welded or seamless steel parts (including the internal components) and all non-
ferrous parts of rudder actuators that are under 150 mm (6 in.) in internal diameter need not be carried out
in the presence of the Surveyor. Such parts are to comply with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the above
referenced Part 2, or such other appropriate material specifications as may be approved in connection with
a particular design, and will be accepted on the basis of presentation of mill certificates to the Surveyor for
verification.

5 Design

5.1 Power Gear Stops

Power-operated steering gears are to be provided with arrangements, such as limit switches, for stopping
the steering gear before the structural rudder stops (see 3-2-8/1.7) or positive mechanical stops within the
steering gear are reached. These arrangements are to be synchronized with the rudder stock or position of
the steering gear itself rather than with the steering-gear control system.

5.3 Mechanical Components

All steering gear parts transmitting force to or from the rudder, such as tillers, quadrants, rams, pins, tie
rods and keys, are to be proportioned to have strength equivalent to that of the rule-required upper rudder
stock diameter.

5.4 Steering Gear Torque

5.4.1 Minimum Required Rated Torque
The rated torque of the steering gear is not to be less than the expected torque, as defined in
3-2-8/1.5.

5.4.2 Maximum Allowable Torque

The transmitted torque, Tmax, of the steering gear is not to be greater than the maximum allowable
torque, Tar, based on the actual rudder stock diameter.

5.4.2(a) Transmitted torque.

The transmitted torque, Tmax, is to be based on the relief valve setting and to be determined in
accordance with the following equations:

For ram type actuator:

Tmax = P · N · A · L2 /(C · cos2θ)   kN − m(tf − m, Ltf − ft)

For rotary vane type actuator:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 72
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

Tmax = P · N · A · L2 /C   kN − m(tf − m, Ltf − ft)

For linked cylinder type actuator:

Tmax = P · N · A · L2cosθ/C   kN − m(tf − m, Ltf − ft)

where

P = steering gear relief valve setting pressure, bar (kgf/cm2, psi)

N = number of active pistons or vanes
A = area of piston or vane, mm2 (cm2, in2)
L2 = torque arm, equal the distance from the point of application of the force on the arm to
the center of the rudder stock at 0 deg of the rudder angle, m (ft)
C = factor, 10000 (1000, 2240)
θ = maximum permissible rudder angle (normally 35 degrees)
5.4.2(b) Maximum allowable torque for rudder stock.
The maximum allowable torque “Tar” for the actual rudder stock diameter is to be determined in
accordance with the following equation:

Tar = 2 . 0(Dr /Nu)3 /Ks   kN − m(tf − m, Ltf − ft)

where

Ks = material factor for rudder stock (see 3-2-8/1.3)

Dr = actual rudder stock diameter at minimum point below the tiller or the rotor, mm (in.)
Nu = factor, 42.0 (89.9, 2.39)

5.5 Tiller
Tillers are to comply with the following requirements. All terms in the formulae are to have consistent
units.

5.5.1
Depth of the tiller hub is not to be less than the rule-required upper rudder stock diameter.

5.5.2
Thickness of the tiller hub is not to be less than one third of the rule-required upper rudder stock
diameter.

5.5.3
Notwithstanding 4-3-3/5.5.2 above, the polar section modulus of the tiller hub is not to be less
than:
K
0 . 196S3 Kℎ
s

where

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 73
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

S = rule-required upper rudder stock diameter.

Ks = material factor of the rudder stock (see 3-2-8/1.3)
Kℎ = material factor of the hub (see 3-2-8/1.3)

5.5.4
The shear area of the tiller key is not to be less than:

0 . 196S3 Kk
r · Ks

where

r = mean radius of the rudder stock in way of the key

Kk = material factor of the key (see 3-2-8/1.3)

Other symbols are defined above.

5.5.5
Bearing stress of the tiller and rudder stock keyways are not to be more than 0.9 times the material
yield stress.

5.5.6 (2016)
If the tiller is shrink-fitted to the rudder stock, preloading and stress calculations and fitting
instructions are to be submitted. The calculated torsional holding capacity is to be at least two
times the transmitted torque based on the steering gear relief valve setting. Preload stress is not to
exceed 90% of the minimum yield strength. Maximum equivalent Von-Mises Stress is not to
exceed minimum yield strength considering all loads including preload stress and two times
transmitted torque.

5.5.7
Section modulus of the tiller arm at any point within its length is not to be less than:

0 . 167S3 L2 − L1 Kt
L2 · Ks

where

L2 = distance from the point of application of the force on the tiller to the center of rudder
stock
L1 = distance between the section of the tiller arm under consideration and the center of the
rudder stock
Kt = material factor of the tiller or quadrant arm (see 3-2-8/1.3)

Other symbols are defined above.

5.5.8
Split or semi-circular tiller or quadrant hubs assembled by bolting are to have bolts on each side
having a total cross-sectional area not less than that given below (use a consistent system of units):

0 . 196S3 Kb
L3 · Ks

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 74
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

where

L3 = distance between the center of the bolts and the center of the rudder stock
Kb = material factor of bolt (see 3-2-8/1.3)

Other symbols are as defined above.

The thickness of the bolting flange is not to be less than the minimum required diameter of the
bolt.

5.5.9
Where the tiller is of welded construction, weld design and weld sizes are to be proportioned such
that they are commensurate with the strength of the tiller.

5.7 Pin
Shear area of the tiller pin is not to be less than:

0 . 196S3 Kp
L2 · Ks

where

Kp = material factor of the pin (see 3-2-8/1.3)

Other symbols are defined above.

5.9 Tie Rod (Jockey Bar)

The buckling strength of the tie rod is not to be less than:

0 . 113S3UR
L2

where

UR = ultimate tensile strength of the rudder stock

Other symbols are defined above.

5.11 Rudder Actuators

5.11.1 General
Rudder actuators are to meet the requirements in 4-3-3/3 for materials and material tests and
2-4-2/1 for welding. They are also to meet the requirements for pressure vessels in the Marine
Vessel Rules, specifically 4-4-1-A1/3.1 (for malleable cast iron, use y = 0.5), 4-4-1-A1/5 and
4-4-1-A1/7 (in association with S, as defined below) for design and 4-4-1-A1/21 for hydrostatic
tests. The maximum allowable stress, S, is not to exceed the lower of the following:
U Y
A           or           B

where

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 75
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

U = minimum specified tensile strength of material at room temperature

Y = minimum specified yield point or yield strength
A, B = factors as given in the following table.

Factor Rolled or Forged Steel Cast Steel Nodular Cast Iron

A 3.5 4 5

B 1.7 2 3

5.11.2 Oil Seals

Oil seals between non-moving parts forming the external boundary are to be of the pressure seal
type. Oil seals between moving parts forming the external pressure boundary are to be fitted in
duplicate so that the failure of one seal does not render the actuator inoperative. Alternative seal
arrangement may be acceptable, provided equivalent protection against leakage can be ensured.

5.13 Mechanical Steering Gear

Where mechanical steering systems are permitted, the following are applicable.

5.13.1 Steering Chains and Wire Ropes

Steering chains and wire rope are to be tested as required by Section 2-2-1 and Section 2-2-2 of
the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2), respectively.

5.13.2 Sheaves
Sheaves are to be of ample size and so placed as to provide a fair lead to the quadrant and avoid
acute angles. Parts subjected to shock are not to be of cast iron. Guards are to be placed around the
sheaves to protect against injury. For sheaves intended for use with ropes, the radius of the
grooves is to be equal to that of the rope plus 0.8 mm (1/32 in.), and the sheave diameter is to be
determined on the basis of wire rope flexibility. For 6 × 37 wire rope, the sheave diameter is to be
not less than 18 times that of the rope. For wire ropes of lesser flexibility, the sheave diameter is to
be increased accordingly. Sheave diameters for chain are to be not less than 30 times the chain
diameter.

5.13.3 Buffers
Steering gears other than the hydraulic type are to be designed with suitable buffer arrangement to
relieve the gear from shocks to the rudder.

7 Hydraulic System

7.1 Pipes, Valves and Fittings

Pipes, valves and fittings are to meet the requirements of 4-4-6/1, as applicable. The design pressure of
piping components subject to internal hydraulic pressure is to be at least 1.25 times the maximum working
pressure of the system. Arrangements for bleeding air from the hydraulic system are to be provided, where
necessary.

7.3 Relief Valves

Relief valves are to be provided for the protection of the hydraulic system at any part which can be isolated
and in which pressure can be generated from the power source or from external forces. Each relief valve is
to be capable of relieving not less than 110% of the full flow of the pump(s) which can discharge through
it. With this flow condition, the maximum pressure rise is not to exceed 10% of the relief valve setting,
taking into consideration increase in oil viscosity for extreme ambient conditions.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 76
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

The relief valve setting is to be at least 1.25 times the maximum working pressure (see 4-3-3/1.3.7), but is
not to exceed the maximum design pressure (see 4-3-3/7.1).

7.5 Filtration
A means is to be provided to maintain cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid.

7.7 Single Failure

Where multiple power units are provided and an auxiliary steering gear is not fitted, the steering gear
hydraulic system is to be designed so that after a single failure in its piping system, one of the power units,
or mechanical connection to the power units, the defect can be isolated so that the integrity of the
remaining part of the system will not be impaired and the steering capability can be maintained or
regained. For this purpose, the piping system associated with each power unit is to be independent of that
of the other units as far as practicable and connections are to be made only where necessary. Isolation
valves are to be fitted, as necessary, to allow any single failure in the piping system to be isolated and the
steering gear to be operated with the remaining intact part of the system. Isolation valves are to be fitted at
the pipe connections to rudder actuators. Where a non-duplicated rudder actuator is employed, the isolation
valves are to be mounted directly on the actuator. Piping systems are to be so arranged that transfer
between power units can be readily affected.

7.9 Reservoir and Storage Tank

All open-loop hydraulic systems are to be provided with an oil reservoir of suitable capacity. In addition,
for craft of 500 gross tons and above, a fixed storage tank having sufficient capacity to recharge at least
one hydraulic power system including the reservoir is to be provided. The tank is to be permanently
connected by piping in such a manner that the system can be readily recharged from a position within the
steering gear compartment.

9 Power Units
If the rule required upper rudder stock diameter is 120 mm (4.7 in.) or greater, power units are to be tested
and certified in accordance with the following requirements. If the rule-required upper rudder stock
diameter is less than 120 mm (4.7 in.), and if the craft is 500 gross tons or greater, power units are to be
tested and certified in accordance with 4-3-3/9.3 only. For craft less than 500 gross tons, power units may
be accepted based on manufacturer’s guarantee for suitability for the intended purpose and subject to
satisfactory functional tests after installation.

9.1 Prototype Test

A prototype of each new design power unit pump is to be shop-tested for a duration of not less than 100
hours. The testing is to be carried out in accordance with an approved agenda and is to include the
following as a minimum.

9.1.1
The pump and stroke control (or directional control valve) is to be operated continuously from full
flow and relief valve pressure in one direction through idle to full flow and relief valve pressure in
the opposite direction.

9.1.2
Pump suction conditions are to simulate lowest anticipated suction head. The power unit is to be
checked for abnormal heating, excessive vibration or other irregularities. Following the test, the
power unit pump is to be disassembled and inspected in the presence of a Surveyor.

9.3 Production Unit Test

Each power unit pump is to meet the hydrostatic and capacity tests in accordance with 4-4-2/1, as
applicable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 77
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

11 Steering Gear Control System

11.1 Locations of Control

11.1.1 Main Steering Gear
The main steering gear is to be provided with control from the navigation bridge and local control
from within the steering gear compartment. However, if the power unit is located in a space other
than the steering compartment, the local control is to be provided in that space instead of the
steering compartment. For the purpose of local control from the steering gear compartment (or the
space containing the power unit), a means is to be provided in the steering compartment (or the
space containing the power unit) to disconnect any control system from the navigation bridge.
Such means for disconnecting are to be operable by a single person without the need for tools.

11.1.2 Auxiliary Steering Gear

The auxiliary steering gear is to be operable from a space in which the operation of the auxiliary
steering gear can be effectively carried out, or from within the steering compartment. However, if
power operated, it is to be provided with control from the navigation bridge also.

11.1.3 Duplicate Power Units

Where duplicate (or more) power units are provided and an auxiliary steering gear is not fitted,
two independent systems of control are to be provided. Each of these systems is to meet the
requirements of the control system of the main steering gear (See 4-3-3/11.1.1). Where the control
system consists of a hydraulic telemotor, a second independent system need not be fitted.

11.1.4 Manual Means

If the steering gear is operated by manual means only, such as by means of a steering wheel
through a mechanical or a non-power-operated hydraulic system, only the requirements of
4-3-3/11.7 and 4-3-3/11.9.1 are applicable.

11.3 General
11.3.1 Main and Auxiliary Steering Gears
Control systems of the main and the auxiliary steering gears are to be independent of each other in
all respects. The independent control systems are to meet the following requirements.

11.3.1(a) Redundancy. (2020)

Steering gear controls are to be located in the navigation bridge and steering gear compartment or
the space containing the power unit, as applicable. These control systems are to be independent in
all respects and are to provide on the navigation bridge all necessary apparatus and arrangements
for the starting and stopping of steering gear motors and the rapid transfer of steering power and
control between units.

The control cables and piping are to be separated throughout their length as widely as is
practicable.

Wires, terminals and the components for duplicated steering gear control systems installed in
units, control boxes, switchboards or bridge consoles are to be separated throughout their length as
widely as is practicable. Where physical separation is not practicable, separation may be achieved
by means of a fire retardant plate.

11.3.1(b) Duplication.
All electric components of the steering gear control system are to be duplicated. This does not
require duplication of a steering wheel or steering lever.

11.3.1(c) Steering Mode Selector Switch.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 78
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

If a joint steering mode selector switch (uniaxial switch) is employed for both steering gear
control systems, the connections for the circuits of the control systems are to be divided
accordingly and separated from each other by an isolating plate or by air gap.

11.3.1(d) Follow-up Amplifier.

In the case of double follow-up control, the amplifiers are to be designed and fed so as to be
electrically and mechanically separated. In the case of non-follow-up control and follow-up
control, the follow-up amplifiers are to be protected selectively.

11.3.1(e) Additional Control Systems.

Control circuits for additional control systems (e.g., steering lever or autopilot) are to be designed
for all-pole disconnection.

11.3.1(f) Feed-back Units and Limit Switches.

The feed-back units and limit switches, if any, for the steering gear control systems are to be
separated electrically and mechanically connected to the rudder stock or actuator separately.

11.3.1(g) Hydraulic Control Components.

Hydraulic system components in the power actuating or hydraulic servo systems controlling the
power systems of the steering gear, (e.g., solenoid valves, magnetic valves) are to be considered as
part of the steering gear control system and shall be duplicated and separated.

Hydraulic system components in the steering gear control system that are part of a power unit may
be regarded as being duplicated and separated when there are two or more separate power units
provided and the piping to each power unit can be isolated.

11.3.2 Duplicate Power Units

If the main steering gear consists of duplicated (or more) power units and an auxiliary steering is
not fitted, the two independent means of control are to comply with the requirements of
4-3-3/11.3.1.

11.3.3 Single Power Units

If the main steering gear consists of a single power unit and the auxiliary steering gear is not
power operated, only one control system for the main steering gear need be provided.

11.3.4 Computer-based Systems

Steering control systems that are computer-based systems are to comply with Section 4-9-3 of the
Marine Vessel Rules and are to be considered Category III.

11.3.5 System Response Under Failure (2021)

The failures (as listed, but not limited to items in 4-3-3/11.9) likely to cause uncontrolled
movements of rudder are to be clearly identified. In the event of detection of such failure, the
rudder is to stop in the current position without manual intervention or is to return to the midship/
neutral position. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis methodology may be used to identify the
failures. For hydraulic locking failure, refer also to 4-3-3/11.9.8 and 4-3-3/11.11.

11.5 Control System Power Supply

Electrical power for the steering gear control system is to be derived from the motor controller of the
power unit that it is controlling, or from the main switchboard at a point adjacent to the supply to the
power unit.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 79
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

11.7 Communication
A means of communication is to be provided between the navigation bridge and all other locations where
steering can be effected, such as the steering gear compartment, the space where the power units are
located and the space where auxiliary steering gear is to be operated, as applicable.

11.9 Instrumentation and Alarms

The following instruments and alarms are to be provided. The audible and visual alarms are to have
provisions for testing.

11.9.1 Rudder Position Indicator

The angular position of the rudder is to be indicated on the navigational bridge and all other
locations where steering can be effected, such as the steering gear compartment, the space where
the power units are located and the space where auxiliary steering gear is to be operated, as
applicable. The rudder angle indication is to be independent of the steering gear control system.

11.9.2 Autopilot
Where autopilot is fitted, a visual and audible alarm is to be provided on the navigation bridge to
indicate its failure.

Where a power unit is provided and steering is controlled from navigation bridge, the following are
applicable:

11.9.3 Motor Alarm

A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and the engine room control
station to indicate an overload condition of the steering gear power unit motor. Where three phase
electrical power is used, a visual audible alarm is to be installed which indicates failure of any one
of the supply phases. The operation of these alarms is not to interrupt the circuit.

11.9.4 Motor Running Indicators

Indicators for running indication of motors are to be installed on the navigation bridge and the
engine room control station.

11.9.5 Power Failure

A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and engine room control station
to indicate a power failure to any one of the steering gear power units.

11.9.6 Control Power Failure

A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and the engine room control
station to indicate an electrical power failure in any steering gear control circuit or remote control
circuit.

In addition, hydraulic power operated steering gear is to be provided with the following:

11.9.7 Low Oil Level Alarm (1 July 2017)

A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and engine room control station
to indicate a low oil level in any power unit reservoir. The operation of this alarm is not to
interrupt the power supply circuit.

11.9.8 Hydraulic Locking (2023)

Hydraulic locking includes all situations where two hydraulic systems (usually identical) oppose
each other in such a way that it may lead to loss of steering. It can either be caused by pressure in
the two hydraulic systems working against each other or by hydraulic "by-pass" meaning that the
systems puncture each other and cause pressure drop on both sides or make it impossible to build
up pressure. Hydraulic locking may occur where a piping system is arranged such that

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 80
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

malfunctions (for example, in directional valves or in the valve control) can cause power units to
work in a closed circuit against each other rather than in parallel delivering fluid to the rudder
actuator, thus resulting in loss of steering.

Where the arrangement is such that a single failure may cause hydraulic locking and loss of
steering, an audible and visual hydraulic locking alarm which identifies the failed system or
component is to be provided on the navigation bridge. The alarm is to be activated upon steering
gear failure if:

● Position of the variable displacement pump control system does not correspond to the given
order, or
● Incorrect position of the 3-way full flow valve or similar in the constant delivery pump system
is detected.

Alternatively, an independent steering failure alarm for follow-up control systems complying with
the following requirements may be provided in lieu of a hydraulic locking alarm.

Where an independent steering failure alarm is installed for follow-up control systems it is to
comply with the following:

11.9.8(a)
The steering failure alarm system is to actuate an audible and visible alarm in the wheelhouse
when the actual position of the rudder differs by more than 5 degrees from the rudder position
ordered by the follow-up control systems for more than:

● 30 seconds for ordered rudder position changes of 70 degrees;

● 6.5 seconds for ordered rudder position changes of 5 degrees; and

The time period calculated by the following formula for ordered rudder positions changes between
5 degrees and 70 degrees:

t = (R/2 . 76) + 4 . 64

where:

t = maximum time delay in seconds

R = ordered rudder change in degrees
11.9.8(b)
The steering failure alarm system must be separate from, and independent of, each steering gear
control system, except for input received from the steering wheel shaft.

11.9.8(c)
Each steering failure alarm system is to be supplied by a circuit that:

i) Is independent of other steering gear system and steering alarm circuits.

ii) Is fed from the emergency power source through the emergency distribution panel in the
wheelhouse, if installed; and
iii) Has no overcurrent protection except short circuit protection
11.9.9 Autopilot Override
11.9.9(a)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 81
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

Steering gear systems provided with an autopilot system are to have a device at the primary
steering station to completely disconnect the autopilot control to permit change over to manual
operation of the steering gear control system. A display is to be provided at the steering station to
ensure that the helmsman can readily and clearly recognize which mode of steering control
(autopilot or manual) is in operation.

11.9.9(b) (2020)
In addition to the changeover device as in 4-3-3/11.9.9(a), for primary steering stations, where
fitted with an automatic autopilot override to change over from autopilot control to manual
operation, the following are to be provided.

An audible and visual alarm is to be provided at the primary steering station in the event that:

i) The automatic autopilot override fails to respond when the manual helm order is 5
degrees of rudder angle or greater, and
ii) It is immediately activated upon automatic autopilot override actuation.

The alarm is to be separate and distinct from other bridge alarms, and is to continue to sound until
it is acknowledged.

The following instrumentation and alarms are to be provided.

11.9.10 Loop Failures

A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge to indicate a loop failure.

Note:

Monitoring is to be provided for short circuit, broken connections and earth faults for command and feedback
loops. Monitoring for loop failures is not required, when a steering failure alarm system is provided. See
4-3-3/11.9.8(a), (b) and (c).

11.9.11 Computer-based System Failures

For steering control systems that are computer-based systems, a visual and audible alarm is to be
given on the navigation bridge to indicate a computer-based system failure.

Note:

Monitoring is to be provided for data communication errors, computer hardware failures and software failure. See
also Section 4-9-3 of the Marine Vessel Rules. Monitoring for computer-based system failures is not required,
when a steering failure alarm system is provided. See 4-3-3/11.9.8(a), (b) and (c).

11.9.12 Earth Fault (1 July 2017)

A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge to indicate an earth fault on AC
and DC circuits

11.9.13 Deviation (1 July 2017)

Where arrangements discussed in 4-3-3/11.9.8, 4-3-3/11.9.9, 4-3-3/11.9.10 and 4-3-3/11.9.11 can
lead to reduced or erroneous system performance of the commanded change in rudder angle, a
deviation alarm visible and audible at the navigating bridge shall be initiated if the rudder’s actual
position does not reach the set point within acceptable time limits for the closed loop control
systems (e.g., follow-up control, computer based systems, and autopilot). Deviation alarm may be
caused by mechanical, hydraulic or electrical failures. See 4-3-3/11.9.8, 4-3-3/11.9.9,
4-3-3/11.9.10 and 4-3-3/11.9.11 for acceptable time limits or angle deviations, as applicable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 82
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

11.11 Operating Instructions

Appropriate operating instructions with a block diagram showing the change-over procedures for steering
control systems and steering gear power units are to be permanently posted at a conspicuous location on
the navigation bridge and in or near the steering gear compartment. Where system failure alarms in
4-3-3/11.9.8 are provided, appropriate instructions are to be permanently posted on the navigation bridge to
shut down the failed system.

13 Electrical Power Supply

Electrical power circuits are to meet the requirements of 4-6-2/11 and 4-6-2/5.3.5.

15 Testing and Trials

15.1 Testing of Piping System

The following tests are to be performed in the presence of the Surveyor.

15.1.1 Shop Tests

After fabrication, each component of the steering gear piping system, including the power units,
hydraulic cylinders and piping, is to be hydrostatically tested at the plant of manufacture to 1.5
times the relief valve setting.

15.1.2 Installation Tests

After installation in the craft, the complete piping system, including power units, hydraulic
cylinders and piping, is to be subjected to a hydrostatic test equal to 1.1 times the relief valve
setting, including a check of the relief valve operation.

15.3 Trials
The steering gear is to be tried out on the trial trip in order to demonstrate to the Surveyor’s satisfaction
that the requirements of the Rules have been met. The trial is to include the operation of the following:

15.3.1 ( 2017 )
The main steering gear, including demonstration of the performance requirements of 4-3-3/1.9 or
with the rudder fully submerged. Where full rudder submergence cannot be obtained in ballast
conditions, steering gear trials are to be conducted at a displacement as close as reasonably
possible to full-load displacement as required by Section 6.1.2 of ISO 19019:2005 on the
conditions that either:

i) The rudder is fully submerged (zero speed waterline) and the craft is in an acceptable trim
condition.
ii) The rudder load and torque at the specified trial loading condition have been predicted
(based on the system pressure measurement) and extrapolated to the full load condition
using the following method to predict the equivalent torque and actuator pressure at the
deepest seagoing draft:

QF = QTα

AF VF 2
α = 1 . 25 AT VT

where

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 83
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

α = extrapolation factor
QF = rudder stock moment for the deepest service draft and maximum service speed
condition
QT = rudder stock moment for the trial condition
AF = total immersed projected area of the movable part of the rudder in the deepest
seagoing condition
AT = total immersed projected area of the movable part of the rudder in the trial
condition
VF = contractual design speed of the craft corresponding to the maximum continuous
revolutions of the main engine at the deepest seagoing draft
VT = measured speed of the craft (considering current) in the trial condition

Where the rudder actuator system pressure is shown to have a linear relationship to the
rudder stock torque, the above equation can be taken as:

PF = PTα

where

PF = estimated steering actuator hydraulic pressure in the deepest seagoing draft

condition
PT = maximum measured actuator hydraulic pressure in the trial condition

Where constant volume fixed displacement pumps are utilized, the requirements can be
deemed satisfied if the estimated steering actuator hydraulic pressure at the deepest draft
is less than the specified maximum working pressure of the rudder actuator. Where a
variable delivery pump is utilized, pump data should be supplied and interpreted to
estimate the delivered flow rate that corresponds to the deepest seagoing draft in order to
calculate the steering time and allow it to be compared to the required time.

Where AT is greater than 0 . 95AF, there is no need for extrapolation methods to be

applied.
iii) Alternatively the designer or builder may use computational fluid dynamic (CFD) studies
or experimental investigations to predict the rudder stock moment at the full sea going
draft condition and service speed. These calculations or experimental investigations are to
be to the satisfaction of ABS.

In any case for the main steering gear trial, the speed of the craft corresponding to the number of
maximum continuous revolution of main engine and maximum design pitch applies.

15.3.2
The auxiliary steering gear, if required, including demonstration to the performance requirements
of 4-3-3/1.11 and transfer between main and auxiliary steering gear.

15.3.3
The power units, including transfer between power units.

15.3.4
The emergency power supply required by 4-6-2/5.3.5.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 84
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3

15.3.5
The steering gear controls, including transfer of control and local control.

15.3.6
The means of communications, as required by 4-3-3/11.7.

15.3.7
The alarms and indicators required by 4-3-3/11.9 (test may be done at dockside).

15.3.8
The storage and recharging system contained in 4-3-3/7.9 (test may be done at dockside).

15.3.9
The isolating of one power actuating system and checking for regaining steering capability are
required by 4-3-3/7.7, if applicable (test may be done at dockside).

15.3.10
Where the steering gear is designed to avoid hydraulic locking, this feature is to be demonstrated.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 85
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 4
Waterjets

1 General (1 July 2020)

The provisions of this section apply to all propulsion waterjets, steerable as well as non-steerable. Where
waterjets are steerable, the requirements in 4-3-4/1.10 of the Marine Vessel Rules are also applicable.

Full details are to be submitted for the force transmitting parts of waterjet units, including material
specifications. For craft over 24 m (79 ft), the units are to be manufactured under Surveys. Mill certificates
are to be provided for the components of the steering section. The material tests for the impellers, shafts
and couplings are to be witnessed by the Surveyor. Hydraulic cylinders are to be manufactured and
inspected in accordance with the requirements of 4-4-6/3. The use of galvanically dissimilar metallic
materials is to be considered in the waterjet design.

3 Design
Design basis stress calculations for the impellers, shafting, steering mechanism and reversing mechanism
are to be submitted to substantiate the suitability and strength of component parts for the intended service.
For the purpose of design review, the stress calculations are to cover the “worst case” condition for each
component. The factor of safety for the above components is not to be less than 2.0 when determined by
the following equation:

1 Ss Sa
FS = U + E

nor less than 4.0 when determined by the following equation:

U
FS = Ss

where

FS = factor of safety
Ss = steady stress of low cycle alternating stress

Sa = alternating stress

U = ultimate tensile strength of material

E = corrected fatigue strength of material (based on 108 cycles)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 86
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 4 Waterjets 4-3-4

5 Housings
Calculations or test results to substantiate the suitability and strength of the pressure and suction housing
are to be submitted for review. The condition with the inlet of the suction blocked is also to be considered.
A factor of safety of not less than four based on the ultimate tensile strength of the material (or two based
on the yield strength) is to be maintained at each point in the housing. Housing are to be hydrostatically
tested to 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or to 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi), whichever is greater.

7 Reversing Mechanisms
Astern thrust is to be provided in sufficient amounts to secure proper control of the craft in all normal
circumstances. The reversing mechanism is to provide for reversing at full power.

9 Impeller Bearings
Antifriction bearings are to have a B10 life of at least 80,000 hours.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 87
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 5
Propulsion Redundancy

1 General

1.1 Application
The requirements in this Section apply to craft equipped with propulsion and steering systems designed to
provide enhanced reliability and availability through functional redundancy. Application of the
requirements of this Section is optional. When a craft is designed, built and surveyed in accordance with
this Section, and when found satisfactory, a classification notation, as specified in 4-3-5/3, as appropriate,
may be granted.

It is a prerequisite that the craft is also to be classed to either ✠ACCU or ✠ABCU notation, in
accordance with Part 4, Chapter 7.

1.3 Objective
The objective of this Section is to provide requirements which reduce the risk to personnel, the craft, other
vessels or structures, the environment and the economic consequences due to a single failure causing loss
of propulsion or steering capability. This is achieved through varying degrees of redundancy based upon
the craft’s Classification Notations, as described in 4-3-5/3.

The requirements in this Section are intended so that, following a single failure, the craft is capable of
either:

i) Maintaining course and maneuverability at reduced speeds without intervention by other vessels,
or
ii) Maintaining position under adverse weather conditions, as described in 4-3-5/7.1, to avoid
uncontrolled drift, and navigating back to safe harbor when weather conditions are suitable.

In addition, this Section addresses aspects which would reduce the detrimental effects to the propulsion
systems due to a localized fire in the machinery spaces.

1.5 Definitions
For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions are applicable:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 88
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

1.5.1 Auxiliary Services System

All support systems (e.g., fuel oil system, lubricating oil system, cooling water system,
compressed air and hydraulic systems, etc.) which are required to run propulsion machinery and
propulsors.

1.5.2 Propulsion Machinery Space

Any space containing machinery or equipment forming part of the propulsion systems.

1.5.3 Propulsion Machine

A device (e.g., diesel engine, turbine, electrical motor, etc.) which develops mechanical energy to
drive a propulsor.

1.5.4 Propulsion System

A system designed to provide thrust to a craft, consisting of one or more propulsion machines, one
or more propulsors, all necessary auxiliaries and associated control, alarm and safety systems.

1.5.5 Propulsor
A device (e.g., propeller, waterjet) which imparts force to a column of water in order to propel a
craft, together with any equipment necessary to transmit the power from the propulsion machinery
to the device (e.g., shafting, gearing, etc.).

1.5.6 Steering System

A system designed to control the direction of movement of a craft, including the rudder, steering
gear, etc.

1.7 Plans and Data to be Submitted

In addition to the plans and data required by the Rules, the following are to be submitted:

i) Results of computations showing that, upon any single failure in the propulsion and steering
systems, the craft is able to meet the capability requirements of 4-3-5/7.1, if applicable, with
details of the computational methods used. Alternatively, the results of model testing are
acceptable as evidence.
ii) A Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) or equivalent. The integrity of the propulsion
systems, steering systems and auxiliary service systems is to be verified by means of a Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) or equivalent method and is to show that a single failure will
not compromise the criteria as specified in 4-3-5/7.
iii) A Testing Plan to cover the means whereby verification of the redundancy arrangements will be
accomplished.
iv) A general arrangement detailing locations of all machinery and equipment necessary for the
correct functioning of the propulsion and steering systems, including the routing of all associated
power, control and communication cables. (Required for R1-S and R2-S only).
v) Operating Manual, as required in 4-3-5/13.

3 Classification Notations
Where requested by the Owner, propulsion and steering installations which are found to comply with the
requirements specified in this Section and which have been constructed and installed under survey by the
Surveyor may be assigned with the following class notations, as appropriate.

i) R1     A craft fitted with multiple propulsion machines but only a single propulsor and steering
system will be assigned the class notation R1.
ii) R2     A craft fitted with multiple propulsion machines and also multiple propulsors and steering
systems (hence, multiple propulsion systems) will be assigned the class notation R2.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 89
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

iii) R1-S A craft fitted with only a single propulsor but having the propulsion machines arranged in
separate spaces such that a fire or flood in one space would not affect the propulsion machine(s) in
the other space(s) will be assigned the class notation R1-S.
iv) R2-S A craft fitted with multiple propulsors (hence, multiple propulsion systems) which has the
propulsion machines and propulsors, and associated steering systems arranged in separate spaces
(propulsion machinery space and steering gear flat) such that a fire or flood in one space would
not affect the propulsion machine(s) and propulsor(s), and associated steering systems in the other
space(s) will be assigned the class notation R2-S.

Example arrangements for each of the above notations are shown in 4-3-5/3 FIGURE 1.
v) + (Plus Symbol)The mark + will be affixed to the end of any of the above class notations (e.g.,
R1+, R2-S+) to denote that the craft’s propulsion capability is such that, upon a single failure,
propulsive power can be maintained or immediately restored to the extent necessary to withstand
adverse weather conditions without drifting, in accordance with 4-3-5/7.3. The lack of the mark +
after the class notation indicates that the craft is not intended to withstand the adverse weather
conditions in 4-3-5/7.3, but can maintain course and maneuverability at a reduced speed under
normal expected weather conditions, in accordance with 4-3-5/7.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 90
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

FIGURE 1
Arrangements of Propulsion Redundancy

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 91
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

5 Single Failure Concept

The degree of redundancy required to meet the objectives of this Section is based upon a single failure
concept. The concept accepts that failures may occur but that only one such failure is likely at any time.
The final consequence of any single failure is not to compromise the propulsion and steering capability
required in 4-3-5/7, unless otherwise specified.

5.1 Single Failure Criteria

5.1.1 R1 Notation
For R1, the single failure criterion is applied to the propulsion machines, its auxiliary service
systems and its control systems. This notation does not consider failure of the propulsor or rudder,
or total loss of the propulsion machinery space or steering gear flat due to fire or flood.

5.1.2 R2 Notation
For R2, the single failure criterion is applied to the propulsion machines, propulsors, auxiliary
service systems, control systems and steering systems. This notation does not consider total loss of
the propulsion machinery space or steering gear flat due to fire or flood.

5.1.3 R1-S Notation

For R1-S, the single failure criterion is applied as for R1, but a fire or flood in one of the
propulsion machinery spaces is also considered.

5.1.4 R2-S Notation

For R2-S, the single failure criterion is applied as for R2, but a fire or flood in one of the
propulsion machinery spaces or steering gear flats is also considered.

7 Propulsion and Steering Capability

7.1 Craft Without + in Class Notation (2021)

Upon a single failure, the propulsion system is to be continuously maintained or restored within two (2)
minutes, as in the case when an alternate standby type of propulsion is provided, (e.g., electric motor,
diesel engine, waterjet propulsion, etc.), such that the craft is capable of advancing at a speed of at least
one-half its design speed or seven knots, whichever is less, for at least 36 hours when the craft is fully
loaded. Adequate steering capability is also to be maintained at this speed.

Notes:
A craft in open seas may be operating with reduced operating redundant systems for efficiency (e.g., single generator online
vs. two generators online). Propulsion restoration in two minutes is not as critical in open seas. Propulsion restoration that
requires more than two minutes can be considered with provided details and testing to document the time required as
described in item (i) below. The same craft operating with readily available redundant systems, such as in a busy waterway,
should be readily able to comply with the two-minute propulsion restoration requirement.
i Certain propulsion systems may require additional time (beyond the two minutes stated above) for the restoration
of the propulsion and steering, since their control systems incorporate additional safety checks for safe restart of
the propulsion engines. Justification for longer restoration time, which may be supported by actual testing, is to be
submitted by the designer/shipyard for consideration by ABS.
ii If retractable thrusters are used as the alternate means of propulsion, and propulsion cannot be restored within two
minutes (due to the time associated with the deployment of the retractable thrusters to operating position), then a
comment is to be placed in the vessel record. This comment is to state that the Notation is only valid when the
retractable thrusters are maintained in the deployed position while the craft is operating, such that propulsion can
be restored within two minutes. However, if system checking by idling before loading engines after a blackout
during one generator operation is necessary, the propulsion restoration may exceed two minutes, provided the
propulsion can be restored as per the engine manufacturer’s specification.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 92
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

7.3 Craft with + in Class Notation (2021)

In addition to 4-3-5/7.1 above, upon a single failure, the propulsion and steering system is to be
continuously maintained or immediately restored within two (2) minutes or the specified time such that the
craft is capable of maneuvering into an orientation of least resistance to the weather, and once in that
orientation, maintaining position such that the craft will not drift for at least 36 hours. This may be
achieved by using all available propulsion and steering systems including thrusters, if provided. This is to
be possible in all weather conditions up to a wind speed of 17 m/s (33 knots) and significant wave height
of 4.5 m (15 ft) with 7.3 seconds mean period, both of which are acting concurrently in the same direction.
The severest loading condition for craft’s maneuverability is also to be considered for compliance with this
weather criterion. Compliance with these capability requirements is to be verified by computational
simulations, and the detailed results are to be submitted for approval. The estimated optimum capability is
to be documented in the operating manual, as required in 4-3-5/13.

9 System Design

9.1 Propulsion Machinery and Propulsors

At least two independent propulsion machines are to be provided. As appropriate, a single failure in any
one propulsion machine or auxiliary service system is not to result in propulsion performance inferior to
that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.

9.1.1 R1 Notation
For R1 notation, the propulsion machines and auxiliary service systems may be located in the
same propulsion machinery space and the propulsion machines may drive a single propulsor.

9.1.2 R2 Notation
For R2 notation, at least two propulsors are to be provided such that a single failure of one will
not result in propulsion performance inferior to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as
applicable. The propulsion machines and auxiliary service systems may, however, be located in
the same propulsion machinery space.

9.1.3 R1-S Notation

For R1-S notation, the propulsion machines and auxiliary service systems are to be separated in
such a way that total loss of any one propulsion machinery space (due to fire or flood) will not
result in propulsion performance inferior to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.
The propulsion machines may, however, drive a single propulsor, and the main propulsion gear or
main power transmitting gear is to be located outside the propulsion machinery spaces separated
by a bulkhead meeting the criteria per 4-3-5/9.3.

9.1.4 R2-S Notation

For R2-S notation, at least two propulsors are to be provided, and the propulsion systems are to be
installed in separate spaces such that a single failure in one propulsor or a total loss of any one
propulsion machinery space (due to fire or flood) will not result in propulsion performance
inferior to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.

9.3 System Segregation

Where failure is deemed to include loss of a complete propulsion machinery space due to fire or flooding
(R1-S and R2-S notations), redundant components and systems are to be separated by watertight
bulkheads with an A-60 fire classification.

Service access doors which comply with 3-2-9/9.1 of the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Marine
Vessels, may be provided between the segregated propulsion machinery spaces. A means of clear
indication of open/closed status of the doors is to be provided in the bridge and at the centralized control
station. Unless specially approved by the flag Administration, these service access doors are not to be

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 93
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

accounted for as the means of escape from the machinery space Category A required by the requirements
of Chapter 4.7 of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, as amended.

9.5 Steering Systems

An independent steering system is to be provided for each propulsor. Regardless of the type and the size of
craft, each steering system is to meet the requirements of Chapter 4.7 of the International Code of Safety
for High-Speed Craft.

The rudder design is to be such that the craft can turn in either direction with one propulsion machine or
one steering system inoperable.

For R2-S notation, the steering systems are to be separated such that a fire or flood in one steering
compartment will not affect the steering system(s) in the other compartment(s), and performance in
accordance with 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable, is maintained.

For R2 and R2-S notations, in the event of steering system failure, means are to be provided to secure
rudders in the amidships position.

9.7 Auxiliary Service Systems (1 July 2021)

At least two independent auxiliary service systems, including fuel oil service tanks, are to be provided and
arranged such that a single failure excluding failure of fixed piping will not result in propulsion
performance inferior to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable. Moreover, a single failure of
rotating equipment (e.g. pumps, ventilation fans) in the vital auxiliary service systems is not to result in a
failure of any propulsion machine. In order to meet this requirement, it will be necessary to either cross-
connect the auxiliary service systems and size the rotating equipment (pumps, ventilation fans) to be
capable of supplying two or more propulsion machines simultaneously, or provide duplicate rotating
equipment (pumps, ventilation fans) in each auxiliary system in case one fails. For all other components,
excluding failure of fixed piping, redundancy is required to maintain propulsion capacity as per 4-3-5/7.1
or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.

For R2 notation(s), where there are multiple engine installations driving two (2) or more independent
shafts with OEM attached pumps feeding vital auxiliary machinery services (fuel, lube oil, cooling water,
etc.), the failure of the attached pump is not to degrade the craft propulsion capability beyond what is
permitted in 4-3-5/7, (half design speed or 7 knots, whichever is less.) A spare pump is required to be
carried.

With the exception of the fuel oil service tank venting system, interconnections between auxiliary service
systems will be considered, provided that the same are fitted with means (i.e., valves) to disconnect or
isolate the systems from each other.

For R1-S and R2-S notations, the above-mentioned independent auxiliary service systems are to be
segregated in the separate propulsion machinery spaces. With the exception of fuel oil service tank venting
systems, interconnections of auxiliary service systems will be acceptable, provided that the required
disconnection or isolation means are fitted at both sides of the bulkhead separating the propulsion
machinery spaces. Position status of the disconnection or isolation means is to be provided at the
navigation bridge and the centralized control station. Penetrations in the bulkhead separating the
propulsion machinery spaces and steering gear flats (as in the case of R2-S notation) are not to
compromise the fire and watertight integrity of the bulkhead.

9.9 Electrical Distribution Systems

Electrical power generation and distribution systems are to be arranged such that following a single failure
in the systems, the electrical power supply is maintained or immediately restored to the extent that the
requirements in 4-3-5/7 are met.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 94
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

Where the craft’s essential equipment is fed from one main switchboard, the bus bars are to be divided into
at least two sections. Where the sections are normally connected, detection of a short circuit on the bus
bars is to result in automatic separation. The circuits supplying equipment essential to the operation of the
propulsion and steering systems are to be divided between the sections such that a loss of one section will
not result in performance inferior to that defined in 4-3-5/7. A fully redundant power management system
is to be provided so that each section of the switchboard can function independently.

For R1-S and R2-S notations, the craft service power generators, their auxiliary systems, the switchboard
sections and the power management systems are to be located in at least two machinery spaces separated
by watertight bulkheads with an A-60 fire classification. The power distribution is to be so arranged that a
fire or flooding of one machinery space is not to result in propulsion capability inferior to that defined in
4-3-5/7. Where an interconnection is provided between the separate propulsion machinery spaces, a
disconnection or isolation means are to be provided at both sides of the bulkhead separating the propulsion
machinery spaces. Position status of the disconnection or isolation means is to be provided at the
navigation bridge and the centralized control station. Fire or flooding of one machinery space is not to
result in propulsion capability inferior to that defined in 4-3-5/7. The power cables from the service
generator(s) in one propulsion machinery space are not to pass through the other propulsion machinery
space containing the remaining service generator(s).

Additionally, for R1-S and R2-S notations, subject to approval by the Administration, the requirements
for self-contained emergency source of power may be considered satisfied without an additional
emergency source of electrical power, provided that:

i) All generating sets and other required sources of emergency source of power are designed to
function at full rated power when upright and when inclined up to a maximum angle of heel in the
intact and damaged condition, as determined in accordance with Part 3, Chapter 3. In no case need
the equipment be designed to operate when inclined more than 22.5° about the longitudinal axis
and/or when inclined 10° about the transverse axis of the craft.
ii) The generator set(s) installed in each machinery space is of sufficient capacity to meet the
requirements of 4-6-2/3 and 4-6-2/5.
iii) The arrangements required in each machinery space are equivalent to those required by
4-6-2/5.5.2, 4-6-2/5.9 and 4-6-2/5.15, so that a source of electrical power is available at all times
for the services required by 4-6-2/5.

9.11 Control and Monitoring Systems

The control systems are to be operable both independently and in combination from the bridge or the
centralized control station. The mode of operation is to be clearly indicated at each position from which the
propulsion machinery may be controlled.

It is to be possible to locally control the propulsion machinery and the propulsor.

For R1-S and R2-S notations, the control and monitoring system for the propulsor (e.g., controllable pitch
propeller control), including all associated cabling, is to be duplicated in each space, and fire or flooding of
one space is not to adversely affect operation of the propulsor from the other space.

9.13 Communication Systems

The requirements of 4-6-2/5.15 are to be complied with for all installed propulsion control positions.

For R1-S and R2-S notations, the communications cables to each control position are not to be routed
through the same machinery space.

11 Fire Precautions
The requirements of this section apply to Category A machinery spaces only.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 95
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5

For R1 and R2 notations, the following requirements are to be complied with in order to minimize the risk
of common damage due to a localized fire in the machinery space.

i) Each auxiliary services system is to be grouped and separated as far as practicable.

ii) Electrical cables supplying power to redundant equipment are to exit the switchboard and be
routed to the equipment, as far apart as practicable.

13 Operating Manual
An operating manual, which is consistent with the information and criteria upon which the classification is
based, is to be placed aboard the craft for the guidance of the operating personnel. The operating manual is
to give clear guidance to the craft’s crew about the craft’s redundancy features and how they may be
effectively and speedily put into service in the event that the craft’s normal propulsion capability is lost.
The operating manual is to include the following, as a minimum:

i) Craft’s name and ABS ID number

ii) Simplified diagram and descriptions of the propulsion systems in normal condition
iii) Simplified diagram and descriptions of the propulsion redundancy features
iv) Reduced propulsion capability in terms of estimated worst sea-states which the craft may
withstand without drifting (for craft with + in the Class Notation)
v) Test results for the craft’s maneuverability at reduced speed (for craft without + in the Class
Notation).
vi) Step-by-step instructions for the use of the redundancy features
vii) Description of the communication systems
viii) Detailed instructions for local propulsion machinery control

The operating manual is to be submitted for review by ABS solely to verify the presence of the above
information, which is to be consistent with the design information and limitations considered in the craft’s
classification. ABS is not responsible for the operation of the craft.

Any modifications made to the existing propulsion systems are to be approved by ABS. The operating
manual is to be updated accordingly and submitted to ABS for review.

15 Test and Trial

During the sea trial, the propulsion and steering capability are to be tested in accordance with an approved
test program to verify compliance with this Section.

15.1 Fault Simulation Test

Simulation tests for the redundancy arrangements are to be carried out to verify that, upon any single
failure, either the propulsion and steering systems remain operational, or the back-up propulsion and
steering systems may be speedily brought into service.

15.3 Communication System Test

The effectiveness of the communication systems, as required in 4-3-5/9.13 above, is to be tested to verify
that local control of the propulsion systems may be carried out satisfactorily.

17 Survey After Construction

The surveys after construction are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements as contained in the
ABS Rules for Surveys After Construction (Part 7).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 96
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 6
Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft

1 General

1.1 Application
Provisions of this Section apply to all air cushion craft

1.3 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted

Full details are to be submitted for all components that directly provide thrust and lift including all
machinery items and any associated air propellers, ducts, vanes, scoops and nozzles.

3 Materials

3.1 General
The design of propulsion and lift devices is to pay due regard to the effects of allowable corrosion,
electrolytic action between different metals, erosion or cavitation which may result from operation in
environments in which they are subjected to spray, debris, salt, sand, icing, etc.

3.3 Material Testing

3.3.1 Testing by a Surveyor
The materials of the shafts, impellers, and couplings are to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor
for verification of their compliance with the applicable requirements of Chapter 3 of the ABS
Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2), or such other appropriate material specifications as may
be approved in connection with a particular design.

5 Design

5.1 General
5.1.1 Arrangements
Propulsion and lift arrangements may be provided by separate devices, or be integrated into a
single propulsion and lift device. Propulsion devices are those which directly provide the
propulsive thrust. Appropriate arrangements are to be made to ensure that:

i) Ingestion of debris or foreign matter is minimized:

ii) The possibility of injury to personnel from shafting or rotating parts is minimized; and

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 97
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 6 Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft 4-3-6

iii) Where necessary, inspection and removal of debris can be carried out safely in service.
5.1.2 Calculations
Design basis stress calculations for propulsion and lift devices are to be submitted to substantiate
the suitability and strength of the components for the intended service and compliance with a
recognized standard or code of practice.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 98
 PART 4
CHAPTER 3
Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery

SECTION 7
Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length

1 General
This Section is applicable to all craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length. 4-3-1 are applicable except as
modified herein.

3 Shafting and Gears

3.1 Outboard Engines

Outboard gasoline engines are to be built to an international or national standard acceptable to ABS or
have at least two years of service in the marine industry. The installation is to be in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3 Inboard/Outboard Installations

3.3.1 Inboard/Outboard Propulsion Systems
Inboard/outboard propulsion systems (gearing, transmission, etc.) are to be rated for the maximum
rating and RPM of the associated prime mover. The installation is to be in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.3.2 Gears for Inboard and Inboard/Outboard Propulsion Systems

Gears for inboard and inboard/outboard propulsion systems are to be designed and built for
installation in a marine environment and rated to the maximum rating and RPM of the associated
prime mover. The gears are to be built to a standard acceptable to ABS or have at least two years
of service in the marine industry. The installation is to be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.

3.5 Inboard Installations

Propulsion shafting installations are to comply with one of the following:

● 4-3-1/7, or
● American Boat and Yacht Council (ABYC), Section P-6.5 using a design coefficient (Cd) of at least
15, or
● Another National or International Standard acceptable to ABS, or

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 99
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-3-7

● Submission of a fatigue analysis showing that the proposed shafting size has a safety factor of at least
two (2).

3.7 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibrations

Section 4-3-1 is not applicable to craft under 24 meters (79 feet) in length.

3.9 Materials
Torque transmitting components are not required to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor. Material
certificates are to be provided for these items.

5 Propellers
Propellers for craft under 24 meters (79 feet) in length are to be part of a manufacturer’s standard product
line and are not required to have a Surveyor’s attendance or material testing and inspection.

7 Steering Gears

7.1 General
Hydraulic and electrical power operated steering gears and orbitrol systems are to comply with Section
4-3-3, except as modified below:

● Rudder actuators will be accepted based on Manufacturer’s Certification

● Hydraulic power units will be accepted based on Manufacturer’s Certification

or

Alternatively, the following ISO standards, as applicable, may be substituted for the requirements of this
Section:

● ISO 8847 Small Craft – Steering Gear – Wire Rope and Pulley Systems
● ISO 8848 Small Craft – Remote Steering System
● ISO 9775 Small Craft – Remote Steering Systems for Single Outboard Motors of 15 kW to 40 kW
Power
● ISO 10592 Small Craft – Hydraulic Steering Systems

7.3 Materials
Materials are to meet the requirements of 4-3-3/3.1, but are not required to be tested in accordance with
4-3-3/3.3.

7.5 System Arrangements

Steering systems are to meet the requirements of 4-3-3/7.7 and 4-3-3/11.3.1, except when the craft can
meet one of the following requirements to the satisfaction of the Technical Office and Surveyor:

● For craft fitted with multiple propulsion units and the steering system disabled and/or locked in a
neutral position, steering can be effected by varying the speed and direction of the propulsion units.
The propulsion units are to be spaced as widely as practical and be capable of steering the craft in the
worst anticipated operational conditions.
● When using mechanical steering systems, sufficient supplies are carried so as to be capable of
temporarily repairing the steering system in a timely manner until permanent repairs can be affected at
the nearest port of refuge.
● The steering can be effected manually under the worst anticipated operational conditions (i.e.
physically turning the rudder, outboard motor, etc.).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 100
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-3-7

7.7 Mechanical Steering Gears

Where mechanical steering systems are permitted, the following are applicable.

7.7.1 Steering Chains and Wire Ropes

Steering chains and wire rope are to be tested, as required by of the ABS Rules for Materials and
Welding (Part 2).

7.7.2 Sheaves
Sheaves are to be of ample size and so placed as to provide a fair lead to the quadrant and avoid
acute angles. Parts subjected to shock are not to be of cast iron. Guards are to be placed around the
sheaves to protect against injury. For sheaves intended for use with ropes, the radius of the
grooves is to be equal to that of the rope plus 0.8 mm (1/32 in.), and the sheave diameter is to be
determined on the basis of wire rope flexibility. For 6 ´ 37 wire rope, the sheave diameter is to be
not less than 18 times that of the rope. For wire ropes of lesser flexibility, the sheave diameter is to
be increased accordingly. Sheave diameters for chain are to be not less than 30 times the chain
diameter.

7.7.3 Buffers
Steering gears other than hydraulic type are to be designed with suitable buffer arrangement to
relieve the gear from shocks to the rudder.

9 Inboard/Outboard and Outboard Installations

9.1 General
Steering installations for Inboard/Outboard and Outboard installations are to be in accordance
manufacturer’s recommendations as well as the applicable requirements of this Section. Steering
components which are provided as part of the Inboard/Outboard or Outboard installation are not required
to be certified under 4-3-3/5.

9.3 Instrumentation
Instrumentation is to be in accordance with 4-3-3/11.9, as applicable, except that a rudder angle indicator is
not required for that craft for which the rudder or outboard motor is in a direct line of sight from the
navigation bridge and the steering angle can be determined visually.

9.5 Communications
A means of communication is not required for craft which have a direct line of sight between the main
steering control station and the location of the steering gear.

9.7 Certification
Steering gears are not required to be certified under 4-3-3/3, 4-3-3/9.1, 4-3-3/9.3, and 4-3-3/15.1.1

9.9 Installation, Tests and Trials

Steering gear operation is to be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Surveyor in accordance with
4-3-3/11.11, 4-3-3/15.1.2 and 4-3-3/15.3.

11 Waterjets
Waterjets will be accepted based on manufacturer’s certification.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 101
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General Provisions.......................................................................... 109
1 Construction and Installation...................................................... 109
1.1 General Requirements...................................................109
1.3 Piping Groups................................................................ 109
3 Plans and Data to be Submitted................................................. 110
3.1 Plans.............................................................................. 110
3.3 All Piping Systems......................................................... 110
3.5 Booklet of Standard Details........................................... 110
5 Material Tests and Inspection..................................................... 110
5.1 Specifications and Purchase Orders..............................110
5.3 Special Materials............................................................110
7 Definitions................................................................................... 110
7.1 Piping/Piping Systems................................................... 110
7.3 Joints..............................................................................110
7.5 Fittings........................................................................... 110
7.7 Positive Closing Valves.................................................. 110
7.9 Recognized Standard of Construction............................111
7.11 Standard or Extra-Heavy Pipe........................................111
9 General Installation Details......................................................... 111
9.1 Protection....................................................................... 111
9.3 Pipes Near Switchboards............................................... 111
9.5 Expansion or Contraction Stresses................................ 111
9.7 Molded Expansion Joints............................................... 112
9.9 Bulkhead, Deck or Tank Top Penetrations (2013)..........112
9.11 Collision-Bulkhead Penetrations (2014).........................113
9.13 Sluice Valves and Cocks................................................113
9.15 Relief Valves.................................................................. 113
9.17 Instruments.................................................................... 114
9.19 Flexible Hoses............................................................... 114
9.21 Control of Static Electricity............................................. 117
9.23 Leakage Containment....................................................117

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 102
 9.25 Piping on Aluminum Craft.............................................. 117
9.27 Craft Subject to Damage Stability.................................. 117

SECTION 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings................................................. 118

1 Pumps ........................................................................................118
1.1 General.......................................................................... 118
1.3 Hydrostatic Test............................................................. 118
1.5 Capacity Test................................................................. 119
1.7 Relief Valve Capacity Test..............................................119
3 Pressure Tests ........................................................................... 119
3.1 General.......................................................................... 119
3.3 Fuel-oil Service System................................................. 119
3.5 Fuel-oil Suction and Transfer Lines............................... 119
3.7 Starting-air Piping.......................................................... 119
3.9 Hydraulic Power Piping..................................................119
3.11 All Piping........................................................................ 119
3.13 Specific Systems............................................................119
3.15 Hydrostatic Tests of Shell Valves...................................120
3.17 Pneumatic Tests in Lieu of Hydrostatic Tests (1 July
2012)..............................................................................120
5 Metallic Pipes..............................................................................120
5.1 Test and Inspection of Group I Piping............................120
5.3 Steel Pipe...................................................................... 120
5.5 Aluminum Pipe...............................................................121
5.7 Copper Pipe...................................................................121
5.9 Brass Pipe..................................................................... 122
5.11 Design............................................................................122
5.13 Working Pressure and Thickness – Alternative
Consideration.................................................................123
7 Plastic Pipes .............................................................................. 124
7.1 General.......................................................................... 124
7.3 Plans and Data to be Submitted.................................... 124
7.5 Design............................................................................125
7.7 Installation of Plastic Pipes............................................ 128
7.9 Manufacturing of Plastic Pipes...................................... 130
7.11 Plastic Pipe Bonding Procedure Qualification............... 130
7.13 Tests by the Manufacturer – Fire Endurance Testing
of Plastic Piping in the Dry Condition (For Level 1
and Level 2)................................................................... 131
7.15 Test by Manufacturer –Fire Endurance Testing of
Water-Filled Plastic Piping (For Level 3)........................132
7.17 Tests by Manufacturer – Flame Spread.........................134
7.19 Testing By Manufacturer – General............................... 135
7.21 Testing Onboard After Installation..................................135

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 103
 7.23 Acceptance of Flag State Requirements....................... 136
9 Material of Valves and Fittings....................................................140
9.1 General.......................................................................... 140
9.3 Forged or Cast Steel......................................................140
9.5 Cast Iron........................................................................ 140
9.7 Ductile (Nodular) Iron.....................................................141
9.9 Brass and Bronze.......................................................... 141
9.11 Plastic............................................................................ 141
11 Valves ........................................................................................ 141
11.1 General.......................................................................... 141
11.3 Construction...................................................................141
11.5 Hydrostatic Test and Identification................................. 142
13 Pipe Fittings ............................................................................... 142
13.1 General.......................................................................... 142
13.3 Hydrostatic Test and Identification................................. 142
13.5 Non-standard Fittings.................................................... 143
13.7 Mechanical Joints.......................................................... 143
15 Welded Non-standard Valves and Fittings..................................143
17 Flanges ...................................................................................... 143
17.1 General.......................................................................... 143
17.3 Group I Piping Flanges.................................................. 143
17.5 Group II Piping Flanges................................................. 143
17.7 Group II Plastic Piping Flanges..................................... 143
19 Sea Inlets and Overboard Discharges........................................144
19.1 Installation......................................................................144
19.3 Valve Connections to Shell (2015).................................144
19.5 Materials........................................................................ 144
19.7 Shell Reinforcement...................................................... 144
19.9 Common Overboard Discharge..................................... 144
21 Machinery and Pumping Systems.............................................. 144
21.1 Valves Required.............................................................144
21.3 Sea Chests.................................................................... 145
23 Scuppers and Drains.................................................................. 145
23.1 General.......................................................................... 145
23.3 Protection from Sea Water Entry................................... 146
23.5 Gravity Drains from Superstructures or Deckhouses.... 148
23.7 Craft Receiving Subdivision Loadlines.......................... 148
25 Cooler Installations External to the Hull......................................148
25.1 General.......................................................................... 148
25.3 Integral Keel Cooler Installations................................... 149
25.5 Non-integral Keel Cooler Installations........................... 149

TABLE 1 Allowable Stress Values S for Steel Piping N/mm2 (kgf/

mm2, psi)............................................................................ 123

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 104
 TABLE 2 Fire Endurance Requirements Matrix for Plastic Pipes......136
TABLE 3 Standards for Plastic Pipes - Typical Requirements for
All Systems ....................................................................... 139
TABLE 4 Standards for Plastic Pipes - Additional
RequirementsDepending on Service and/or Location of
Piping ................................................................................ 140

FIGURE 1 Fire Endurance Test Burner Assembly...............................133

FIGURE 2 Fire Endurance Test Stand With Mounted Sample............ 133
FIGURE 3 Overboard Discharges – Valve Requirements .................. 147

SECTION 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks............................................150

1 General Arrangement of Bilge Systems .................................... 150
3 Bilge Pumps................................................................................150
3.1 Number of Pumps..........................................................150
3.3 Capacity.........................................................................151
3.5 Centrifugal Pumps......................................................... 151
3.7 Independent Power Bilge Pumps.................................. 151
5 Bilge and Ballast Piping.............................................................. 151
5.1 General.......................................................................... 151
5.3 Installation......................................................................152
5.5 Manifolds, Cocks and Valves.........................................152
5.7 Strainers........................................................................ 152
5.9 Size of Bilge Suctions.................................................... 153
5.11 Gravity Drains................................................................ 154
5.13 Ballast Water Treatment Systems................................. 154
7 Emergency Bilge Suctions for Main Machinery Spaces (2016)..154
9 Vent Pipes...................................................................................154
9.1 General.......................................................................... 154
9.3 Height and Wall Thickness............................................ 155
9.5 Size................................................................................155
9.7 Location......................................................................... 155
9.9 Vent Outlets................................................................... 156
11 Overflow Pipes............................................................................161
11.1 General Requirements...................................................161
11.3 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid
Tanks............................................................................. 161
11.5 Overflow Common Header............................................ 161
11.7 Fuel Oil Overflow (2018)................................................162
13 Sounding.....................................................................................162
13.1 General.......................................................................... 162
13.3 Sounding Pipes..............................................................162
13.5 Gauge Glasses.............................................................. 164
13.7 Level Indicating Systems and Devices.......................... 164

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 105
 15 Oil Pollution Prevention Measures..............................................164
15.1 General.......................................................................... 164
15.3 Oily Water Filtering or Separating Equipment................164
15.5 Sludge Tank................................................................... 164
15.7 Sludge Piping System....................................................164
15.8 Integrated Bilge Water treatment System (IBTS), If
Installed......................................................................... 165

FIGURE 1 Example of Normal Position (2014)................................... 159

FIGURE 2 Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing
Upward (2014)................................................................... 160
FIGURE 3 Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing
Downward (2014)...............................................................160
FIGURE 4 Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing
Sideways (2014)................................................................ 161

SECTION 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks..........................166

1 Fuel Oil Piping Systems..............................................................166
1.1 General Arrangement.................................................... 166
1.3 Piping, Valves and Fittings.............................................168
1.5 Oil Heating Arrangements............................................. 168
1.7 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid
Tanks............................................................................. 169
1.9 Fuel Oil Purifiers............................................................ 169
3 Fuel Oil Transfer and Filling........................................................169
3.1 General.......................................................................... 169
3.3 Pipes in Oil Tanks.......................................................... 169
3.5 Control Valves or Cocks................................................ 169
3.7 Valves on Oil Tanks (2016)............................................ 169
3.9 Remote Shutdown of Pumps......................................... 170
3.11 Oil Drain Tanks.............................................................. 170
5 Fuel Oil Service and Injection Systems...................................... 170
7 Low Flash Point Fuels................................................................ 171
7.1 General.......................................................................... 171
7.3 Fuel Heating.................................................................. 171
7.5 Fuel Oil Tank Vents........................................................171
9 Lubricating Oil Systems.............................................................. 171
9.1 General.......................................................................... 171
9.3 Sight Flow Glasses........................................................ 171
9.5 Internal Combustion Engines.........................................171
9.7 Reduction Gears............................................................172
9.9 Electrical Machinery.......................................................172
9.11 Hose Reels.................................................................... 172
11 Additional Measures for Oil Pollution Prevention .......................172

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 106
 11.1 General.......................................................................... 172
11.3 Tank Protection Requirements.......................................172
11.5 Class Notation – POT(2018)..........................................173

FIGURE 1 Acceptable Fuel Oil Tanks Arrangements Inside

Category A Machinery Spaces (2013)............................... 167

SECTION 5 Internal Combustion Engine Systems........................................... 174

1 Fuel Oil System.......................................................................... 174
3 Lubricating Oil System................................................................174
5 Cooling Water System................................................................ 174
7 Exhaust Piping............................................................................174
9 Starting-air Systems................................................................... 174

SECTION 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems................................................ 175

1 Hydraulic Systems...................................................................... 175
1.1 General.......................................................................... 175
1.3 Valves............................................................................ 175
1.5 Piping.............................................................................175
1.7 Pipe Fittings................................................................... 175
1.9 Accumulators and Fluid Power Cylinders (2018)...........176
1.11 Design Pressure............................................................ 176
1.13 Segregation of High Pressure Hydraulic Units.............. 176
3 Fluid Power Cylinders ................................................................176
3.1 General.......................................................................... 176
3.3 Non-compliance with a Recognized Standard...............177
3.5 Materials........................................................................ 177
3.7 Rudder Actuators...........................................................177
3.9 Cylinders below Pressures or Temperatures
Indicated in 4-4-6/3.1..................................................... 177
3.11 Exemptions (2013).........................................................177
5 Pneumatic Systems ................................................................... 178
5.1 Application..................................................................... 178
5.3 Pneumatic System Components................................... 178
5.5 Pneumatic System Requirements................................. 178

SECTION 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks................................................... 179

1 Fixed Oxygen-Acetylene Installations ........................................179
1.1 Application..................................................................... 179
1.3 Gas Storage...................................................................179
1.5 Piping System Components.......................................... 180
1.7 Testing........................................................................... 181
3 Fuel Storage and Refueling Systems for Helicopter Facilities....181

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 107
 3.1 Fuels with Flash Point Above 60°C (140°F).................. 181
3.3 Fuels with Flash Point at or Below 60°C (140°F) –
Installations on an Open Deck.......................................181
3.5 Fuels with Flash Points at or Below 60°C (140°F) –
Installation within Enclosed Spaces...............................182
5 Liquefied Petroleum Gases........................................................ 183
5.1 General.......................................................................... 183
5.3 Storage Cylinders.......................................................... 184
5.5 Installation and Testing.................................................. 184
7 Fast Supply Craft........................................................................ 184
9 Liquid Mud Cargo Tanks ............................................................ 184

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 108
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 1
General Provisions

1 Construction and Installation

1.1 General Requirements

All craft are to be provided with the necessary pumps and piping systems for safe and efficient operation in
the service for which they are intended. Materials and workmanship are to be in accordance with good
marine practice and to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. The arrangements and details are to comply with
the following requirements which are applicable to all oceangoing craft but which may be modified for
craft classed for limited service.

1.3 Piping Groups

To distinguish between detail requirements for the various systems, the shipboard piping systems are
divided into two groups.

Group I, in general, includes all piping intended for working pressures or temperatures in various services,
as follows:

Service Pressure bar (kgf/cm2, psi) Temperature °C (°F)

Vapor and Gas over 10.3 (10.5, 150) over 343 (650)

Water over 15.5 (15.8, 225) over 177 (350)

Lubricating Oil over 15.5 (15.8, 225) over 204 (400)

Fuel Oil over 10.3 (10.5, 150) over 66 (150)

Hydraulic Fluid over 15.5 (15.8, 225) over 204 (400)

Group II includes all piping intended for working pressures and temperatures below those stipulated under
Group I. Group II also includes open-ended lines such as drains, overflows, engine exhausts, boiler escape
pipes, and vents, regardless of the working pressures or temperatures.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 109
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

3 Plans and Data to be Submitted

3.1 Plans
Before proceeding with the work, plans in accordance with 4-1-1/7 are to be submitted, showing clearly
the diagrammatic details or arrangement of the equipment.

3.3 All Piping Systems

The plans are to consist of a diagrammatic drawing of each system accompanied by lists of material giving
size, wall thickness, maximum working pressure and material of all pipes and the type, size, pressure
rating and material of valves and fittings.

3.5 Booklet of Standard Details

A booklet of standard piping practices and details, including such items as bulkhead, deck and shell
penetrations, welding details including dimensions, pipe joining details, etc., is to be submitted. Pipe
welding details are to comply with Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

5 Material Tests and Inspection

5.1 Specifications and Purchase Orders

The appropriate material to be used for the various pipes, valves and fittings is indicated in this section.
The material is to be made in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2), except that tests of material for valves, fittings, fluid power cylinders and
Group II piping need not be witnessed by the Surveyor. Where electric resistance welding is used, the
requirements of Chapter 4 of the above referenced Part 2 are also applicable. Copies in duplicate of the
purchase orders for material requiring test and inspection at the mills or place of manufacture are to be
forwarded to ABS for the information of the Surveyor.

5.3 Special Materials

If it is desired to use special alloys or other materials not covered by the Rules, the use of such materials
will be specially considered for approval.

7 Definitions

7.1 Piping/Piping Systems

The terms Piping and Piping Systems include the pipe, fittings, system joints, method of joining and any
internal or external liners, coverings and coatings required to comply with the performance criteria. For
example, if the basic material needs a fire protective coating to comply with the fire endurance
requirements, then the piping should be manufactured and tested with both the basic material and coating
attached, and details are to be submitted to ABS for approval.

7.3 Joints
The term Joint refers to the method of connecting pipes by adhesive bonding, brazing, welding, bolted
flanging, threading, etc.

7.5 Fittings
The term Fittings refers to bends, elbows, fabricated branch pieces, etc.

7.7 Positive Closing Valves

Positive Closing Valves are valves that are capable of maintaining a set position under all operating
conditions.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 110
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

7.9 Recognized Standard of Construction

Recognized Standards of Construction are published construction standards from organizations, such as but
not limited to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Society of Testing and
Materials (ASTM), Department of Transportation (DOT), Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS), German
Design Standard (DIN), British Standard Code of Practice (BSI), which are recognized by ABS as being
acceptable standards for a specific purpose or service. Each standard is to be used independently and in a
consistent manner.

7.11 Standard or Extra-Heavy Pipe

Pipe thickness referred to as Standard or Extra-Heavy are the equivalent of American National Standards
Institute Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe up to a maximum wall thickness of 9.5 mm (0.375 in.) and
12.5 mm (0.5 in.), respectively.

9 General Installation Details

9.1 Protection
Pipes, valves and operating rods are to be effectively secured and adequately protected from mechanical
damage. These protective arrangements are to be fitted so that they may be removed to enable examination
of the pipes, valves and operating rods.

9.3 Pipes Near Switchboards

The leading of pipes in the vicinity of switchboards is to be avoided as far as possible. When such leads are
necessary, care is to be taken to fit no flanges or joints over or near the switchboards unless provision is
made to prevent any leakage from damaging the equipment.

9.5 Expansion or Contraction Stresses

Provision is to be made to take care of expansion or contraction stresses in pipes due to temperature
changes or working of the hull. Suitable provisions include, but are not limited to, piping bends, elbows,
offsets, changes in direction of the pipe routing or expansion joints. Slip joints of an approved type may be
used in systems and locations where possible leakage will not be hazardous

Where expansion joints are used, the following requirements apply:

● Pipe support. Adjoining pipes are to be suitably supported so that the expansion joints do not carry
any significant pipe weight.
● Alignment. Expansion joints are not to be used to make up for piping misalignment errors.
Misalignment of an expansion joint reduces the rated movements and can induce severe stresses into
the joint material, thus causing reduced service life. Alignment is to be within tolerances specified by
the expansion joint manufacturer.
● Anchoring. Expansion joints are to be installed as close as possible to an anchor point. Where an
anchoring system is not used, control rods may be installed on the expansion joint to prevent excessive
movements from occurring due to pressure thrust of the line.
● Mechanical damage. Where necessary, expansion joints are to be protected against mechanical
damage.
● Accessible location. Expansion joints are to be installed in accessible locations to permit regular
inspection and/or periodic servicing.
● Mating flange. Mating flanges are to be clean and usually of the flat faced type. When attaching
beaded end flange expansion joints to raised face flanges, the use of a ring gasket is permitted. Rubber
expansion joints with beaded end flange are not to be installed next to wafer type check or butterfly
valves. Serious damage to the rubber flange bead can result due to lack of flange surface and/or bolt
connection.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 111
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

9.7 Molded Expansion Joints

Molded expansion joints may be Type Approved. See 1-1-A2/1.

9.7.1 Circulating Water Systems

Molded expansion fittings of reinforced rubber or other suitable materials may be used in
circulating water piping systems in machinery spaces. Such fittings are to be oil-resistant. The
maximum working pressure is not to be greater than 25% of the hydrostatic bursting pressure of
the fitting as determined by a prototype test. Manufacturer’s name and the month and year of
manufacture are to be embossed or otherwise permanently marked on the outside edge of one of
the flanges or other easily examined area of all flexible expansion joints intended for use in piping
systems over 150 mm (6 in.). Plans of the molded or built-up flexible expansion joints in piping
systems over 150 mm (6 in.), including details of the internal reinforcement arrangements, are to
be submitted for approval.

9.7.2 Oil Systems

Where molded expansion joints of composite construction utilizing metallic material, such as steel
or stainless steel or equivalent material, with rubberized coatings inside and/or outside or similar
arrangements are proposed for use in oil piping systems (fuel, lubricating, or hydraulic oil), the
following requirements apply:

9.7.2(a)
Expansion joint ratings for temperature, pressure, movements and selection of materials are to be
suitable for the intended service.

9.7.2(b)
The maximum allowable working pressure of the system is not to be greater than 25% of the
hydrostatic bursting pressure determined by a burst test of a prototype expansion joint. Results of
the burst test are to be submitted.

9.7.2(c)
The expansion joints are to pass the fire-resistant test specified in 4-4-1/9.7.3, below.

9.7.2(d)
The expansion joints are to be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name and the month
and year of manufacture.

9.7.3 Fire-Resistant Test

In order for a molded expansion joint of composite construction utilizing metallic material, as
referenced in 4-4-1/9.7.2, to be considered fire-resistant, a prototype of the molded expansion joint
is to be subjected to a fire test for at least 30 minutes at a temperature of not less than 800°C
(1472°F) while water at the maximum service pressure is circulated inside. The temperature of the
water at the outlets is not to be less than 80°C (176°F) during the test. The tested molded
expansion joint is to be complete with end fittings and no leakage is to be recorded during or after
the test. In lieu of maximum service pressure, the fire test may be conducted with the circulating
water at a pressure of at least 5 bar (5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 lb/in2), and with a subsequent pressure test
to twice the design pressure.

9.9 Bulkhead, Deck or Tank Top Penetrations (2013)

9.9.1 Watertight Integrity
Where it is necessary for pipes to penetrate watertight bulkheads, decks or tank tops, the
penetrations are to be made by methods which will maintain the watertight integrity. For this
purpose, bolted connections are to have bolts threaded into the plating from one side; through
bolts are not to be used. Welded connections are either to be welded on both sides or to have full
penetration welds from one side.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 112
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

9.9.2 Firetight Integrity

Where pipes penetrate bulkheads, decks or tank-tops which are required to be firetight or
smoketight, the penetrations are to be made by approved methods which will maintain the same
degree of firetight or smoketight integrity.

9.11 Collision-Bulkhead Penetrations (2014)

9.11.1 Allowed Penetrations
A collision bulkhead may be penetrated only as follows:

i) Except as provided in 4-4-1/9.11.1.ii, the collision bulkhead may be pierced below the
bulkhead deck by not more than one pipe for dealing with fluid in the forepeak tank,
provided that the pipe is fitted with a screwdown or butterfly valve capable of being
operated from above the bulkhead deck; the valve chest being secured to the collision
bulkhead inside the forepeak.
ii) If the forepeak is divided to hold two kinds of liquids, the collision bulkhead may be
pierced below the margin line by two pipes, each of which is fitted as required by
4-4-1/9.11.1.i, provided there is no practical alternative to the fitting of such a second pipe
and that, having regard to the additional subdivision provided in the forepeak, the safety
of the craft is maintained.
iii) The valve in 4-4-1/9.11.1.i. may be fitted of on the after side of the collision bulkhead
provided that the valve is readily accessible under all service conditions and the space in
which they are located is not a cargo space. Local operation of the valve is acceptable.
9.11.2 Penetrations Details
Piping penetrating collision bulkheads is to comply with the following requirements:

i) Cast iron is not to be used for these valves. The use of nodular iron, also known as ductile
iron or spheroidal-graphite iron, will be accepted, provided the material has an elongation
not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.).
ii) Tanks forward of the collision bulkhead are not to be arranged for the carriage of oil or
other liquid substances that are flammable.

9.13 Sluice Valves and Cocks

No valve or cock for sluicing purposes is to be fitted on a collision bulkhead. Sluice valves or cocks may
be fitted only on other watertight bulkheads, where they are accessible for examination at all times. The
control rods are to be operable from the bulkhead deck and are to be provided with an indicator to show
whether the valve or cock is open or closed. The control rods are also to be properly protected from injury
and their weight is not to be supported by the valve or cock.

9.15 Relief Valves

All systems which may be exposed to pressures greater than that for which they are designed are to be
safeguarded by suitable relief valves or the equivalent. Pressure containers such as evaporators, heaters,
etc., which may be isolated from a protective device in the line are to have such devices either directly on
the shell or between the shell and the isolation valve.

9.15.1 Exceptions
In pumping systems such as oil piping and fire main, where relief valves are ordinarily required at
the pump, such valves need not be fitted when the system is served only by centrifugal pumps so
designed that the pressure delivered cannot exceed that for which the piping is designed.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 113
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

9.17 Instruments
9.17.1 Temperature
Thermometers and other temperature sensing devices registering through pressure boundaries are
to be provided with instrument wells to allow for instrument removal without impairing the
integrity of the pressurized system.

9.17.2 Pressure
Pressure sensing devices are to be provided with valve arrangements to allow for instrument
isolation and removal without impairing the pressurized system’s integrity.

9.17.3 Tanks
Pressure, temperature and level sensing devices installed on tanks at locations where they are
subjected to a static head of liquid are to be fitted with valves or arranged such that they may be
removed without emptying the tank.

9.19 Flexible Hoses

9.19.1 Definition (1 July 2022)
A flexible hose assembly is a short length of metallic or non-metallic hose normally with
prefabricated end fittings ready for installation. Flexible hose assemblies for essential services or
containing either flammable or toxic media are not to exceed 1.5 m in length.

9.19.2 Scope
The requirements 4-4-1/9.19 apply to flexible hoses of metallic or non-metallic material intended
for a permanent connection between a fixed piping system and items of machinery. The
requirements may also be applied to temporary connected flexible hoses or hoses of portable
equipment.

Flexible hose assemblies as defined in 4-4-1/9.19.1 are acceptable for use in oil fuel, lubricating,
hydraulic and thermal oil systems, fresh water and sea water cooling systems, compressed air
systems, bilge and ballast systems. The flexible hoses are acceptable for steam systems with
pressure below 7 bar (7.1 kgf/cm2, 101.5 psi) and temperature below 150°C (302°F), where they
comply with 4-4-1/9.19.

Flexible hoses are not acceptable in high pressure fuel oil injection systems.

These requirements for flexible hose assemblies are not applicable to hoses intended to be used in
fixed fire extinguishing systems.

9.19.3 Design and Construction

9.19.3(a) Hose Material.
Flexible hoses are to be designed and constructed in accordance with recognized National or
International standards acceptable to ABS. Flexible hoses constructed of rubber or plastics
materials and intended for use in bilge, ballast, compressed air, oil fuel, lubricating, hydraulic and
thermal oil systems are to incorporate a single or double closely woven integral wire braid or other
suitable material reinforcement. Where rubber or plastics materials hoses are to be used in oil
supply lines to burners, the hoses are to have external wire braid protection in addition to the
integral reinforcement. Flexible hoses for use in steam systems are to be of metallic construction.

9.19.3(b) Hose End Fittings (2017).

Flexible hoses are to be complete with approved end fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s
specification. Flanged end connections are to comply with 4-4-2/17 and threaded end connections
with 4-4-2/13.1, as applicable and each type of hose/fitting combination is to be subject to
prototype testing to the same standard as that required by the hose with particular reference to
pressure and impulse tests.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 114
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

The use of hose clamps and similar types of end attachments is not acceptable for flexible hoses in
piping systems for steam, flammable media, starting air or for sea water, where failure may result
in flooding. In other piping systems, the use of hose clamps may be accepted where the working
pressure is less than 5 bar (5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 psi) and provided there are at least two stainless steel
hose clamps at each end connection. The hose clamps are to be at least 12 mm (0.5 in.) wide and
are not to be dependent upon spring tension to remain fastened.

9.19.3(c) Fire Resistance (1 July 2017).

Flexible hose assemblies constructed of non-metallic materials intended for installation in piping
systems for flammable media and sea water systems where failure may result in flooding, are to be
of a fire-resistant type*, except in cases where such hoses are installed on open decks having no
fire risk, and not used for fuel oil lines. Fire resistance is to be demonstrated by testing to ISO
15540 and ISO 15541.

Note: *The installation of a shutoff valve immediately upstream of a sea water hose does not satisfy the
requirement for fire resistant type hose.
9.19.3(d) Hose Application.
Flexible hose assemblies are to be selected for the intended location and application taking into
consideration ambient conditions, compatibility with fluids under working pressure and
temperature conditions consistent with the manufacturer’s instructions and other relevant
requirements of this Section.

Flexible hose assemblies intended for installation in piping systems where pressure pulses and/or
high levels of vibration are expected to occur in service, are to be designed for the maximum
expected impulse peak pressure and forces due to vibration. The tests required by 4-4-1/9.19.5 are
to take into consideration the maximum anticipated in-service pressures, vibration frequencies and
forces due to installation.

9.19.4 Installation
In general, flexible hoses are to be limited to a length necessary to provide for relative movement
between fixed and flexibly mounted items of machinery, equipment or systems.

Flexible hose assemblies are not to be installed where they may be subjected to torsion
deformation (twisting) under normal operating conditions.

The number of flexible hoses, in piping systems is to be kept to minimum and is to be limited for
the purpose stated in 4-4-1/9.19.2.

Where flexible hoses are intended to be used in piping systems conveying flammable fluids that
are in close proximity of heated surfaces the risk of ignition due to failure of the hose assembly
and subsequent release of fluids is to be mitigated as far as practicable by the use of screens or
other similar protection.

Flexible hoses are to be installed in clearly visible and readily accessible locations (i.e., the hose is
to be located such that inspection can be accomplished without the need to remove any bolted
inspection plate or similar obstruction. A mirror or other means may be used for inspection where
space is limited).

The installation of flexible hose assemblies is to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and use limitations with particular attention to the following:

● Orientation
● End connection support (where necessary)
● Avoidance of hose contact that could cause rubbing and abrasion

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 115
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

● Minimum bend radii

9.19.5 Tests
9.19.5(a) Test Procedures. (1 July 2022)
Acceptance of flexible hose assemblies is subject to satisfactory prototype testing. Prototype test
programmes for flexible hose assembles are to be submitted by the manufacturer and are to be
sufficiently detailed to demonstrate performance in accordance with the specified standards.

The tests are, as applicable, to be carried out on different nominal diameters of hose type complete
with end fittings for pressure, burst, impulse resistance and fire resistance in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant standard. The following standards are to be used as applicable.

● ISO 6802 – Rubber and plastics hoses and hose assemblies – Hydraulic pressure impulse test
without flexing.
● ISO 6803 – Rubber and plastics hoses and hose assemblies – Hydraulic pressure impulse test
with flexing.
● ISO 15540 – Ships and marine technology – Fire resistance of hose assemblies – Test
methods.
● ISO 15541 – Ships and marine technology – Fire resistance of hose assemblies –
Requirements for test bench.
● ISO 10380 – Pipework – Corrugated metal hoses and hose assemblies.

Other standards may be accepted where agreed.

Prototype tests are to be carried out for each size of hose assembly. However, for ranges with more
than 3 different diameters, the prototype tests are to be carried out for at least:

i) The smallest diameter,

ii) The largest diameter,
iii) Intermediate diameters selected based on the principle that prototype tests carried out for
a hose assembly with a diameter D are considered valid only for the diameters ranging
between 0.5D and 2D.

For fire resistance tests the specimens are to be selected in accordance with ISO 15540.

9.19.5(b) Burst test.

All flexible hose assemblies are to be satisfactorily prototype burst tested to an international
standard to demonstrate they are able to withstand a pressure not less than four (4) times its design
pressure without indication of failure or leakage.

Note:

The international standards (e.g., EN or SAE for burst testing of non-metallic hoses) require the pressure to be
increased until burst without any holding period at 4 x MWP.

9.19.6 Marking
Flexible hoses are to be permanently marked by the manufacturer with the following details:

● Hose manufacturer’s name or trademark

● Date of manufacture (month/year)
● Designation type reference
● Nominal diameter
● Pressure rating

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 116
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General Provisions 4-4-1

● Temperature rating

Where a flexible hose assembly is made up of items from different manufacturers, the components
are to be clearly identified and traceable to evidence of prototype testing.

9.21 Control of Static Electricity

Cargo tanks and cargo piping systems carrying flammable liquids and piping systems that are routed
through hazardous areas are to be suitably grounded either by welding or bolting the tanks, pipes or their
supports directly to the hull of the craft or through the use of bonding straps. In general, the resistance
between ground points along the length, across joints, and from pipe to ground is not to exceed 1 megohm.
Where bonding straps are used, they are to be clearly visible, protected from mechanical damage and of a
type not affected by corrosive product and paint. Bonding straps are required for cargo tanks and piping
systems which are not permanently connected to the hull, including independent cargo tanks, cargo tanks
and piping systems which are electrically separated from the hull, and pipe connections arranged for
removal of spool pieces. The foregoing is not applicable to tank containers.

Components of alarms and level indicating devices located within cargo tanks are to be designed to
account for conductivity.

9.23 Leakage Containment

For areas where leakage may be expected, such as oil burners, purifiers, oil drains, valves under day tanks,
etc., means of containing the leakage are to be provided. Where drain pipes are fitted for collected
leakages, they are to be led to a suitable oil drain tank not forming part of an overflow system.

9.25 Piping on Aluminum Craft

On a craft with an aluminum hull, the use of steel, cooper or other non-aluminum pipes, valves and fittings
will require special attention to avoid galvanic corrosion with dissimilar metals. Piping runs of materials
not compatible with aluminum are to be isolated from the hull by suitable isolating brackets of insulating
material. Where non-aluminum pipes pass through decks, bulkheads, tank tops and shell plating, they are
to be isolated from the craft’s structure with suitable insulation.

9.27 Craft Subject to Damage Stability

Progressive Flooding detail is to be submitted for review. The details and arrangements should indicate all
piping passing within the assumed extent of damaged area required for damage stability calculations
together with potential progressive flooding location from those pipes.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 117
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 2
Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings

1 Pumps

1.1 General
For self-propelled vessels 500 gross tons and above, the following pumps are to meet the test requirements
of 4-4-2/1.3 and 4-4-2/1.5:

● Fire pump, including the emergency fire pump

● Other fire fighting service pumps, such as, pumps for fixed water-based systems, or equivalent, local
application fire-fighting systems, sprinkler systems, deck foam systems, etc.
● Bilge pump
● Ballast pump
● Hydraulic pumps for steering gears, anchor windlasses and variable pitch propellers
● Pumps associated with inert gas systems, i.e.

Fuel oil pumps for boilers/inert gas generators

Cooling water pumps for flue gas scrubber

The tests are to be carried out at the manufacturer's plant in the presence of the Surveyor. The capacity test
will not be required nor will the hydrostatic test need to be witnessed by the Surveyor for individual pumps
assembled on a production line basis, provided the Surveyor is satisfied from periodic inspections and the
manufacturer's quality assurance procedures that the pump capacities are acceptable and that hydrostatic
testing is being performed. See 4-1-1/3. For pumps associated with reciprocating internal combustion
engines and reduction gears, see 4-2-1/19.

1.3 Hydrostatic Test

All pumps are to be hydrostatically tested to 1 . 5P, but not less than 3.9 bar (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi), where P is
the maximum working pressure of the part concerned. When the suction and discharge sides of the pump
are tested independently, the pump suction is to be tested to 1.5 times Ps, but not less than 3.9 bar (4
kgf/cm2, 57 psi), where Ps is the maximum pressure available from the system at the suction inlet. For
steering gear pumps, also see 4-3-3/15.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 118
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

1.5 Capacity Test

Pump capacities are to be checked with the pump operating at design conditions (rated speed and pressure
head). For centrifugal pumps, the pump characteristic (head capacity) design curve is to be verified to the
satisfaction of the Surveyor.

1.7 Relief Valve Capacity Test

For positive displacement pumps with an integrated relief valve, the valve’s setting and full flow capacity
corresponding to the pump maximum rating is to be verified. The operational test for relief valve capacity
may be waived if previous satisfactory tests have been carried out on similar pumps.

3 Pressure Tests

3.1 General
In addition to the testing and inspection of materials, as required in Chapter 3 of the Rules for Materials
and Welding (Part 2), the following tests on the fabricated piping are to be witnessed by the Surveyor after
bending and the attachment of flanges.

Small bore pipes and tubes of less than 15 mm outside diameter may be exempted from the required
hydrostatic tests.

3.3 Fuel-oil Service System

Pressure lines are to be tested before installation to 1.5 times the design pressure of the system, but not less
than 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi).

3.5 Fuel-oil Suction and Transfer Lines

Transfer systems and fuel-oil suction lines are to be tested before installation to 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2,50
psi).

3.7 Starting-air Piping

Piping in starting-air systems is to be tested, preferably before installation, to 1.5 times the design pressure
of the system.

3.9 Hydraulic Power Piping

After fabrication, the hydraulic power piping system or each piping component is to be tested to 1.5 times
the design pressure. For steering gear piping test, see 4-3-3/15. For controllable pitch propeller system
piping, a test, including a check of the relief valve operation, is to be performed in the presence of the
Surveyor after installation.

3.11 All Piping

After installation, all piping is to be tested under working conditions.

Where it is not possible to carry out the required hydrostatic tests for all segments of pipes and integral
fittings before installation, the remaining segments, including the closing seams, may be so tested after
installation. Or, where it is intended to carry out all the required hydrostatic tests after installation, such
tests may be conducted in conjunction with those required by this paragraph. In both these respects, testing
procedures are to be submitted to the Surveyor for acceptance.

3.13 Specific Systems

3.13.1 Gas and Liquid Fuel Systems and Heating Coils in Tanks
The following piping systems are to be hydrostatically tested in the presence of the Surveyor to
1 . 5P, but not less than 4 bar (4.1 kgf/cm2, 58 psi), after installation:

i) Gas and liquid fuel systems

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 119
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

ii) Heating coils in tanks

3.15 Hydrostatic Tests of Shell Valves (1 July 2021)

All valves intended for installation on the side shell at or below the load waterline, including those atthe
sea chests, are to be hydrostatically tested before installation.

The valve housing of each valve is to be subjected to a pressure of not to be less than test pressure of 5 bar
(5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 psi). No leakage is permitted and holding time as follows:

● 15 seconds for sizes up to 50 mm (2 inch)

● 60 seconds for sizes 65 mm - 150 mm (2.5 inch - 6 inch)
● 120 seconds for sizes 200 mm - 300 mm (8 inch - 12 inch)
● 300 seconds for sizes 350 mm (14 inch) and larger

The valve assembly is to be subjected to a hydrostatic seat leakage test in accordance with a national or
international standard accepted by the Surveyor. The test is to be performed with closed valve with the
other end open to atmosphere. The pressure is to be applied independently on each side. Test pressure is
not to be less than 5 bar (5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 psi). Holding time is 5 minutes for all sizes.

3.15.1 Materials (1 July 2021)

Materials entered into the construction of a shell valve are to be in accordance with the provisions
of 4-4-2/9, 4-4-2/19.5 & 4-4-2/21.1 and will be accepted on the basis of the manufacturer's
certified material test reports.

3.17 Pneumatic Tests in Lieu of Hydrostatic Tests (1 July 2012)

In general, a pneumatic test in lieu of a hydrostatic test is not permitted. Where it is impracticable to carry
out the required hydrostatic test, a pneumatic test may be considered. In such cases, the procedure for
carrying out the pneumatic test, having regard to safety of personnel, is to be submitted to the applicable
ABS Assistant Chief Surveyor for special consideration.

5 Metallic Pipes (2019)

While references are made to material specifications in the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2),
equivalent materials complying with a national or international standard will be considered for acceptance.

5.1 Test and Inspection of Group I Piping

Pipes intended for use in Group I piping systems are to be tested in the presence of and inspected by the
Surveyor in accordance with Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) or such other
appropriate material specification as may be approved in connection with a particular design. See 4-4-6/1.5
for pipe used in hydraulic systems.

5.3 Steel Pipe

5.3.1 Seamless Pipe (2019)
Seamless-drawn steel pipe may be used for all purposes. Consideration is to be given to the
possibility of graphite formation in carbon steel at temperatures above 425°C (797°F).

5.3.2 Welded Pipe

Electric resistance welded steel pipe may be used for temperatures up to 343°C (650°F).

Consideration will be given to the use of electric-resistance-welded (ERW) pipe for use above
343°C (650°F) where the material is shown to be suitable for the intended service (i.e. in a non-
corrosive environment, where design temperature is below the lowest graphitization temperature
specified for the material, etc.). Furnace butt-welded pipe up to and including 115 mm O.D. (4 in.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 120
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

NPS) may be used for Group II piping for temperatures up to 232°C (450°F) but is not to be used
for flammable or combustible fluids.

5.3.3 Stainless Steels (2019)

For sea water piping systems in which sea water may be retained within the piping system in a
stagnant or low flow condition (i.e., less than 1 m/sec), there is a potential for chloride pitting and
the following grades are not to be used for the piping or piping components:

● 304 and 304L stainless steels

● 316 and 316L stainless steels with a molybdenum content of less than 2.5%

Other stainless grades when used are to be confirmed suitable for the application by the
manufacturer.

Where the water spray system will be maintained in a dry condition and the system will only be
exposed to seawater during actual operations of the water spray, 316 and 316L stainless steels with
a molybdenum content of less than 2.5% may be used provided there are provisions to
immediately flush the system with fresh water and then dry the internal portions of the system
piping and components. The requirement for flushing and drying of the system and the procedures
to carry out these efforts are to be clearly posted.

5.5 Aluminum Pipe

5.5.1 (1 July 2018)
Piping containing flammable fluids is to be constructed of steel or other materials approved by
ABS. Other equivalent material with a melting point above 930°C (1706°F), and with an
elongation above 12% may be accepted.

Aluminum and aluminum alloys which are characterized by low melting points, below 930°C
(1706°F), are considered heat sensitive materials and are not to be used to convey flammable
fluids, except for such piping as arranged inside cargo tanks or heat exchangers or as otherwise
permitted for engine turbine and gearbox installations, see 4-2-1/7.7 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

Aluminum pipe is also not to be used for bilge piping within the machinery space or for fire
fighting systems. The above is applicable to all craft unless as modified below. See also 4-4-3/5.3,
4-4-4/3.7 and 4-5-1/3.1.

5.5.2
For cargo craft under 500 Gross Tons (ITC) aluminum pipe may be used in Fuel Oil, Lubrication
Oil, Hydraulic oil, Bilge and other flammable or combustible liquids provided all pipe is of marine
grade aluminum and has a minimum wall thickness of extra heavy construction (Schedule 80).
Welded or flanged joints complying with a recognized standard are permitted, but threaded joints
in aluminum piping are not to be used.

5.5.3
Aluminum pipe may be used for all other services on craft constructed of aluminum or fiber-
reinforced plastic, including vents and sounding pipes from oil tanks.

5.7 Copper Pipe

Seamless-drawn and welded copper pipe, unless otherwise prohibited, may be used for all purposes where
the temperature does not exceed 208°C (406°F) and within the limitations specified in the material
specification.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 121
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

5.9 Brass Pipe

Seamless-drawn brass pipe, unless otherwise prohibited, may be used where the temperature does not
exceed 208°C (406°F).

5.11 Design
5.11.1 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and Minimum Thickness
The maximum allowable working pressure and the minimum thickness of pipes are to be determined by
the following equations, with due consideration being given to the reduction in thickness at the outer radius
of bent pipes:
KS t − C
W= D−M t−C
WD
t= KS + MW +C

where

W = maximum allowable working pressure, in bar, kgf/cm2 (psi). See Note 1.

t = minimum thickness of pipe, in mm (in.). See Note 5.
K = 20 (200, 2)
D = actual external diameter of pipe in mm (in.)
S = maximum allowable fiber stress, in N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi) from 4-4-2/5.13 TABLE 1. See Note 2.
M = factor from4-4-2/5.13 TABLE 1
C = allowance for threading, grooving or mechanical strength
= 1.65 mm (0.065 in.) for plain-end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing up to 115 mm O.D. (4 in. NPS). See
Note 3.
= 0.00 mm (0.000 in.) for plain-end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing up to 115 mm O.D. (4 in. NPS) used for
hydraulic piping systems. See Note 3.
= 0.00 mm (0.000 in.) for plain-end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing 115 mm O.D. (4 in. NPS) and larger.
See Note 3.
= 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) for all threaded pipe 17 mm O.D. (3/8 in.) and smaller
= depth of thread ℎ, for all threaded pipe over 17 mm O.D. (3/8 in.). See Note 4.
= depth of groove for grooved pipe
= 0.00 mm (0.000 in.) for plain-end nonferrous pipe or tubing. See Note 3.

Notes:

1 The value of W used in the equations is to be not less than 8.6 bar (8.8 kgf/cm2, 125 psi), except that for
suction and other low-pressure piping of nonferrous material, the actual working pressure may be applied if a
suitable addendum is provided against erosion and outside damage. However, in no case is the value of W to
be less than 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) for use in the equations.

2 Values of S for other materials are not to exceed the stress permitted by ASME B31.1 Code for Pressure
Piping, Power Piping.

3 Plain-end pipe or tubing includes those joined by any method in which the wall thickness is not reduced.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 122
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

4 The depth of thread, ℎ, may be determined by the equation ℎ = 0 . 8/n where n is the number of threads per
inch, or in metric units by the equation ℎ = 0 . 8n where n is the number of mm per thread.

5 If pipe is ordered by its nominal wall thickness, the manufacturing tolerance on wall thickness is to be taken
into account.

5.11.2 Pipe Bending

Pipe bending is to be in accordance with 2-3-12/25 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding
(Part 2). Alternatively, bending in accordance with a recognized standard (e.g. ASME B31.1-
Section 129.1 and 129.3) or other approved specification to a radius that will result in a surface
free of cracks and substantially free of buckles may be acceptable.

5.13 Working Pressure and Thickness – Alternative Consideration

Consideration will be given to the maximum allowable working pressure and the minimum thickness of
piping determined from criteria of applicable recognized standards.

TABLE 1
Allowable Stress Values S for Steel Piping N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi) (2019)

Service Temperature—Degrees C (F)

—29°C (—20°F)
Part 2, Chapter 3,
to
Section 12/Paragraph
334°C (650°F) 372°C (700°F) 399°C (750°F) 427°C (800°F)
No. and (Grade)
Nominal Composition Tensile Strength M = 0.8 M = 0.8 M = 0.8 M = 0.8

2-3-12/5.1 (Gr. 1) 310 46.9 46.6

Elec. res. Carbon Steel (31.5, 45000) (4.78, 6800) (4.75, 6500)

2-3-12/5.1 (Gr. 2) 330 70.3 68.3 62.8 53.1

Elec. res. Carbon Steel (33.7, 48000) (7.17, 10200) (6.96, 9900) (6.40, 9100) (5.41, 7700)
  330 82.8 80.6 73.7 62.1
Seamless Carbon Steel (33.7, 48000) (8.44, 12000) (8.22, 11700) (7.52, 10700) (6.33, 9000)

2-3-12/5.1 (Gr. 3) 415 88.3 84.1 75.8 63.4

Elec. res. Carbon Steel (42, 60000) (9.0, 12800) (8.58, 12200) (7.73, 11000) (6.47, 9200)
  415 103.5 99.2 89.6 74.4
Seamless Carbon Steel (42, 60000) (10.55, 15000) (10.12, 14400) (9.14, 13000) (7.59, 10800)

2-3-12/5.3 (Gr. 4) 330 82.8 80.7 73.7 62.1

Carbon Steel (33.7, 48000) (8.44, 12000) (8.23, 11700) (7.52, 10700) (6.33, 9000)

2-3-12/5.3 (Gr. 5) 415 103.5 99.2 89.6 74.4

Carbon Steel (42, 60000) (10.55, 15000) (10.12, 14400) (9.14, 13000) (7.59, 10800)

Notes:

1 Intermediate values of S may be determined by interpolation.

2 For grades of piping other than those given in 4-4-2/5.13 TABLE 1, S values are not to exceed those permitted
by ASME B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping. See 4-4-2/5.11.

3 See 4-4-2/5.3.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 123
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7 Plastic Pipes

7.1 General (2020)

Notes:

The provisions of this section with date (2020) apply to:

● piping systems with application date for type approval certification on or after 1 January 2020
● piping systems intended to be installed on ships contracted for construction on or after 1 July 2021

Pipes and piping components made of thermoplastic or thermosetting plastic materials, with or without
reinforcement, may be used in piping systems referred to in 4-4-2/7.23 TABLE 2 subject to compliance
with the following requirements. For the purpose of these Rules “plastic” means both thermoplastic and
thermosetting plastic materials, with or without reinforcement, such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and fiber
reinforced plastics (FRP). Plastic includes synthetic rubber and materials of similar thermo/mechanical
properties.

Piping systems intended for non-essential services are to meet only the requirements of recognized
standards and 4-4-2/7.5.2, 4-4-2/7.5.8, 4-4-2/7.7 and 4-4-2/7.9.

7.3 Plans and Data to be Submitted

Rigid plastic pipes are to be in accordance with a recognized national or international standard acceptable
to ABS. Specification for the plastic pipe, including thermal and mechanical properties and chemical
resistance, is to be submitted for review together with the spacing of the pipe supports.

The following information for the plastic pipes, fittings and joints is to be submitted for approval.

7.3.1 General Information

i) Pipe and fitting dimensions
ii) Maximum internal and external working pressure
iii) Working temperature range
iv) Intended services and installation locations
v) Level of fire endurance
vi) Electrically conductive
vii) Intended fluids
viii) Limits on flow rates
ix) Serviceable life
x) Installation instructions
xi) Details of marking
7.3.2 Drawings and Supporting Documentation
i) Certificates and reports for relevant tests previously carried out.
ii) Details of relevant standards.
iii) All relevant design drawings, catalogues, data sheets, calculations and functional
descriptions.
iv) Fully detailed sectional assembly drawings showing pipe, fittings and pipe connections.
7.3.3 Materials
i) Resin type.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 124
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

ii) Catalyst and accelerator types and concentration employed in the case of reinforced
polyester resin pipes or hardeners where epoxide resins are employed.
iii) A statement of all reinforcements employed where the reference number does not identify
the mass per unit area or the tex number of a roving used in a filament winding process,
these are to be detailed.
iv) Full information regarding the type of gel-coat or thermoplastic liner employed during
construction, as appropriate.
v) Cure/post-cure conditions. The cure and post-cure temperatures and times employ for
given resin/reinforcement ratio.
vi) Winding angle and orientation.

7.5 Design
7.5.1 Internal Pressure
A pipe is to be designed for an internal pressure not less than the design pressure of the system in
which it will be used. The maximum internal pressure, Pint, for a pipe is to be the lesser of the
following:
Pstℎ
Pint = 4
Pltℎ
Pint = 2.5

where

Pstℎ = short-term hydrostatic test failure pressure

Pltℎ = long-term hydrostatic test failure pressure (> 100,000 hours)

The hydrostatic tests are to be carried out under the following standard conditions:

• Atmospheric pressure =   1 bar (1 kgf/cm2, 14.5 psi)

• Relative humidity =   30%

• Fluid temperature =   25°C (77°F)

The hydrostatic test failure pressure may be verified experimentally or determined by a

combination of testing and calculation methods, which are to be submitted to ABS for approval.

7.5.2 External Pressure (2020)

External pressure is to be considered for any installation which may be subject to vacuum
conditions inside the pipe or a head of liquid on the outside of the pipe. A pipe is to be designed
for an external pressure not less than the sum of the pressure imposed by the maximum potential
head of liquid outside the pipe plus full vacuum, 1 bar (1 kgf/cm2, 14.5 psi), inside the pipe. The
maximum external pressure for a pipe is to be determined by dividing the collapse test pressure by
a safety factor of 3.

The collapse test pressure may be verified experimentally or determined by a combination of

testing and calculation methods, which are to be submitted to ABS for approval.

The requirements of 4-4-2/7.5.2 apply also to any pipe installation required to remain operational
in case of flooding damage (Regulation II-1/8-1 of SOLAS 1974 Convention, as amended), or to

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 125
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

any pipe that would allow progressive flooding to other compartments through damaged piping or
through open ended pipes in the compartments.

7.5.3 Wall Thickness (2020)

Notwithstanding the requirements of 4-4-2/7.5.1 or 4-4-2/7.5.2 as applicable, the pipe or pipe
layer minimum wall thickness is to follow recognized standards. In the absence of standards for
pipes not subject to external pressure, the requirements of 4-4-2/7.5.2 are to be met.

7.5.4 Axial Strength

7.5.4(a) The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight and other dynamic and
sustained loads is not to exceed the allowable stress in the longitudinal direction. Forces due to
thermal expansion, contraction and external loads, where applicable, are to be considered when
determining longitudinal stresses in the system.

7.5.4(b) In the case of fiber reinforced plastic pipes, the sum of the longitudinal stresses is not to
exceed one-half of the nominal circumferential stress derived from the maximum internal pressure
determined according to 4-4-2/7.5, unless the allowable longitudinal stress is verified
experimentally or by a combination of testing and calculation methods.

7.5.5 Temperature (2020)

The maximum allowable working temperature of a pipe is to be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, but in each case, it is to be at least 20°C (36°F) lower than the
minimum heat distortion temperature of the pipe material determined according to ISO 75 method
A or equivalent (e.g. ASTMD648). The minimum heat distortion temperature is not to be less than
80°C (176°F).

Where low temperature services are considered, special attention is to be given with respect to
material properties.

7.5.6 Impact Resistance (2019)

Plastic pipes and joints are to have a minimum resistance to impact in accordance with a
recognized national or international standard such as ASTM D2444 or equivalent. ASTM D6110,
ASTM F2231, ISO14692-2, Clause 6.4.3 or other equivalent standards as appropriate for the resin
type. ASTM D256 may also be considered, provided the average minimum required impact
resistance is 961 J/m of width (18 ft-lbf/in of width) as per Test Method E or a value acceptable to
the Surveyor.

7.5.7 Fire Endurance - Design and Testing (2020)

4-4-2/7.23 TABLE 2 specifies fire endurance requirements for pipes based upon system and
location. Pipes and their associated fittings whose functions or integrity are essential to the safety
of the vessel are to meet the indicated fire endurance requirements which are described below.

The requirements in 4-6-3/5.11 apply also to plastic piping required by SOLAS II-2, Reg.21.4 to
remain operational after a fire casualty. For Safe Return to Port purposes (SOLAS II-2, Reg.21.4),
plastic piping can be considered to remain operational after a fire casualty if the plastic pipes and
fittings have been tested to L1 standard.

i) Level 1 will ensure the integrity of a system during a full scale hydrocarbon fire and is
particularly applicable to systems where the loss of integrity may result in the outflow of
flammable liquids and worsen the fire situation. Piping having passed the fire endurance
test specified in 4-4-2/7.13 for a duration of a minimum of one hour without loss of
integrity in the dry condition is considered to meet the Level 1 fire endurance standard
(L1). Level 1W – Piping systems similar to Level 1 systems except these systems do not
carry flammable fluid or any gas and a maximum 5% flow loss in the system after

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 126
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

exposure is acceptable. The flow loss must be taken into account when dimensioning the
system.
ii) Level 2 intends to ensure the availability of systems essential to the safe operation of the
ship, after a fire of short duration, allowing the system to be restored after the fire has
been extinguished. Piping having passed the fire endurance test specified in 4-4-2/7.13 for
a duration of a minimum of 30 minutes without loss of integrity in the dry condition is
considered to meet the Level 2 fire endurance standard (L2). Level 2W – Piping systems
similar to Level 2 systems except a maximum 5% flow loss in the system after exposure
is acceptable. The flow loss must be taken into account when dimensioning the system.
iii) Level 3 is considered to provide the fire endurance necessary for a water filled piping
system to survive a local fire of short duration. The system's functions are capable of
being restored after the fire has been extinguished. Piping having passed the fire
endurance test specified in 4-4-2/7.15 for a duration of a minimum of 30 minutes without
loss of integrity in the wet condition is considered to meet the Level 3 fire endurance
standard (L3).

Where a fire protective coating of pipes and fittings is necessary to achieve the fire endurance
standard required, the following requirements apply.

i) Pipes are generally to be delivered from the manufacturer with the protective coating
applied, with on-site application limited to that necessary for installation purposes (i.e.,
joints). See 4-4-2/7.7.7 regarding the application of the fire protection coating on joints.
ii) The fire protection properties of the coating are not to be diminished when exposed to salt
water, oil or bilge slops. It is to be demonstrated that the coating is resistant to products
likely to come in contact with the piping.
iii) In considering fire protection coatings, such characteristics as thermal expansion,
resistance against vibrations and elasticity are to be taken into account.
iv) The fire protection coatings are to have sufficient resistance to impact to retain their
integrity.
v) Random samples of pipe are to be tested to determine the adhesion qualities of the
coating to the pipe.
7.5.8 Flame Spread
7.5.8(a) Plastic Pipes. (2020)
All pipes, except those fitted on open decks and within tanks, cofferdams, void spaces, pipe
tunnels and ducts if separated from accommodation, permanent manned areas and escape ways by
means of an A class bulkhead, are to have low flame spread characteristics. The test procedures in
4-4-2/7.17 in accordance with IMO Resolution A.753(18)Guidelines for the application of plastic
pipes on ships,as amended by Resolution MSC.399(95), are to be used for determining the flame
spread characteristics. Piping materials giving average values for all of the flame spread criteria
not exceeding the values listed in Resolution A.753(18), as amended by Resolution MSC.399(95),
are considered to meet the requirements for low flame spread.

Alternatively, flame spread testing in accordance with ASTM D635 may be used in lieu of the
IMO flame spread test provided such testing is acceptable to the Administration.

Under the procedure of ASTM D635 a maximum burning rate of 60 mm/min applies. In case of
adoption of other national equivalent standards, the relevant acceptance criteria are to be defined.

7.5.8(b) Multi-core Metallic Tubes Sheathed by Plastic Materials (2016). The multi-core tubes in
“bundles” made of stainless steel or copper tubes covered by an outer sheath of plastic material are
to comply with the flammability test criteria of IEC 60332-3-22 or 60332-3-21, for Category A or
A F/R, respectively. Alternatively, the tube bundles complying with at least the flammability test

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 127
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

criteria of IEC 60332-1-2 or a test procedure equivalent thereto are acceptable provided they are
installed in compliance with approved fire stop arrangements.

7.5.9 Electrical Conductivity

7.5.9(a) Piping conveying fluids with a conductivity of less than 1000 pico siemens per meter is to
be electrically conductive.

7.5.9(b) Regardless of the fluid being conveyed, plastic piping is to be electrically conductive if
the piping passes through a hazardous area.

7.5.9(c) Where electrically conductive piping is required, the resistance per unit length of the
pipes and fittings is not to exceed 1 × 105 Ohm/m (3 × 104 Ohm/ft). See also 4-4-2/7.7.4.

7.5.9(d) If the pipes and fittings are not homogeneously conductive, the conductive layers are to
be protected against the possibility of spark damage to the pipe wall.

7.5.10 Marking
Plastic pipes and other components are to be permanently marked with identification in
accordance with a recognized standard. Identification is to include pressure ratings, the design
standard that the pipe or fitting is manufactured in accordance with, the material with which the
pipe or fitting is made, and the date of fabrication.

7.7 Installation of Plastic Pipes

7.7.1 Supports
7.7.1(a) (2015) Selection and spacing of pipe supports in shipboard systems are to be determined
as a function of allowable stresses and maximum deflection criteria. Support spacing is not to be
greater than the pipe manufacturer's recommended spacing. The selection and spacing of pipe
supports are to take into account pipe dimensions, length of the piping, mechanical and physical
properties of the pipe material, mass of pipe and contained fluid, external pressure, operating
temperature, thermal expansion effects, loads due to external forces, thrust forces, water hammer
and vibrations to which the system may be subjected. Combinations of these loads are to be
checked.

7.7.1(b) Each support is to evenly distribute the load of the pipe and its contents over the full
width of the support. Measures are to be taken to minimize wear of the pipes where they contact
the supports.

7.7.1(c) Heavy components in the piping system such as valves and expansion joints are to be
independently supported.

7.7.1(d) The supports are to allow for relative movement between the pipes and the ship's
structure, having due regard to the difference in the coefficients of thermal expansion and
deformations of the ship's hull and its structure.

7.7.1(e) When calculating the thermal expansion, the system working temperature and the
temperature at which assembling is performed are to be taken into account.

7.7.2 External Loads

When installing the piping, allowance is to be made for temporary point loads, where applicable.
Such allowances are to include at least the force exerted by a load (person) of 980 N (100 kgf, 220
lbf) at mid-span on any pipe more than 100 mm (4 in.) nominal diameter.

Pipes are to be protected from mechanical damage where necessary.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 128
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.7.3 Plastic Pipe Connections

7.7.3(a) The strength of fittings and joints is not to be less than that of the piping they connect.

7.7.3(b) Pipes may be joined using adhesive-bonded, welded, flanged or other joints.

7.7.3(c) Tightening of flanged or mechanically coupled joints is to be performed in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.

7.7.3(d) Adhesives, when used for joint assembly, are to be suitable for providing a permanent
seal between the pipes and fittings throughout the temperature and pressure range of the intended
application.

Joining techniques are to be in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. Personnel

performing these tasks are to be qualified to the satisfaction of ABS, and each bonding procedure
is to be qualified before shipboard piping installation commences. Requirements for joint bonding
procedures are in 4-4-2/7.11.

7.7.4 Electrical Conductivity

Where electrically conductive pipe is required by 4-4-2/7.5.9, installation of the pipe is to be in
accordance with the following:

7.7.4(a) The resistance to earth (ground) from any point in the system is not to exceed 1 meg-ohm.
The resistance is to be checked in the presence of the Surveyor.

7.7.4(b) Pipes and fittings with conductive layers are to be protected against a possibility of spark
damage caused by a different conductivity of the conductive layers.

7.7.4(c) Where used, earthing wires or bonding straps are to be accessible for inspection. The
Surveyor is to verify that they are in visible locations.

7.7.5 Shell Connections

Where plastic pipes are permitted in systems connected to the shell of the vessel, the valves and
the pipe connection to the shell are to be metallic. The side shell valves are to be arranged for
remote control from outside the space in which the valves are located. For further details of the
shell valve installation, their connections and material, refer to 4-4-2/19.

7.7.6 Bulkhead and Deck Penetrations

7.7.6(a) The integrity of watertight bulkheads and decks is to be maintained where plastic pipes
pass through them.

7.7.6(b) Where plastic pipes pass through “A”or “B” class divisions, arrangements are to be made
to ensure that the fire endurance is not impaired. These arrangements are to be tested in
accordance with IMO Resolution. A 754 (18), Recommendation on Fire Resistance Tests for “A”,
“B” and “F” Class Divisions, as amended.

7.7.6(c) If the bulkhead or deck is also a fire division and destruction by fire of plastic pipes may
cause inflow of liquid from tank, a metallic shut-off valve operable from above the bulkhead deck
is to be fitted at the bulkhead or deck.

7.7.7 Application of Fire Protection Coatings

Fire protection coatings are to be applied on the joints, where necessary for meeting the required
fire endurance criteria in 4-4-2/7.5.7, after performing hydrostatic pressure tests of the piping
system (see 4-4-2/7.19). The fire protection coatings are to be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, using a procedure approved in each particular case.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 129
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.9 Manufacturing of Plastic Pipes

The manufacturer is to have a quality system and be certified in accordance with 1-1-A2/5.3 and 1-1-
A2/5.5 or ISO 9001 (or equivalent). The quality system is to consist of elements necessary to ensure that
pipes and components are produced with consistent and uniform mechanical and physical properties in
accordance with recognized standards and including testing to demonstrate the compliance of plastic pipes,
fittings and joints with 4-4-2/7.5.1 through 4-4-2/7.5.8 and 4-4-2/7.19, as applicable.

Where the manufacturer does not have a certified quality system in accordance with 1-1-A2/5.3 and 1-1-
A2/5.5 or ISO 9001 (or equivalent), the tests in with 4-4-2/7.5.1 through 4-4-2/7.5.8 and 4-4-2/7.19, as
applicable, will be required using samples from each batch of pipes being supplied for use aboard the
vessel and are to be carried out in the presence of the Surveyor.

Each length of pipe and each fitting is to be tested at the manufacturer’s production facility to a hydrostatic
pressure not less than 1.5 times the maximum allowable internal pressure of the pipe in 4-4-2/7.5.1.
Alternatively, for pipes and fittings not employing hand layup techniques, the hydrostatic pressure test may
be carried out in accordance with the hydrostatic testing requirements stipulated in the recognized national
or international standard to which the pipe or fittings are manufactured, provided that there is an effective
quality system in place.

Depending upon the intended application, ABS reserves the right to require the hydrostatic pressure testing
of each pipe and/or fitting.

If the facility does not have a certified quality system in accordance with 1-1-A2/5.3, 1-1-A2/5.5 or ISO
9001 (or equivalent), then the production testing must be witnessed by the Surveyor.

The manufacturer is to provide documentation certifying that all piping and piping components supplied
are in compliance with the requirements of this Section.

7.11 Plastic Pipe Bonding Procedure Qualification

7.11.1 Procedure Qualification Requirements
7.11.1(a) To qualify joint bonding procedures, the tests and examinations specified herein are to be
successfully completed. The procedure for making bonds is to include the following:

i) Materials used
ii) Tools and fixtures
iii) Environmental requirements
iv) Joint preparation requirements
v) Cure temperature
vi) Dimensional requirements and tolerances
vii) Test acceptance criteria for the completed assembly

7.11.1(b) Any change in the bonding procedure which will affect the physical and mechanical
properties of the joint will require the procedure to be requalified.

7.11.2 Procedure Qualification Testing

7.11.2(a) A test assembly is to be fabricated in accordance with the procedure to be qualified and
it is to consist of at least one pipe-to-pipe joint and one pipe-to-fitting joint. When the test
assembly has been cured, it is to be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure at a safety factor of 2.5
times the design pressure of the test assembly, for not less than one hour. No leakage or separation
of joints is to be allowed. The test is to be conducted so that the joint is loaded in both longitudinal
and circumferential direction.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 130
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.11.2(b) Selection of the pipes used for test assembly is to be in accordance with the following:

i) When the largest size to be joined is 200 mm (8 in.) nominal outside diameter or smaller,
the test assembly is to be the largest pipe size to be joined.
ii) When the largest size to be joined is greater than 200 mm (8 in.) nominal outside
diameter, the size of the test assembly is to be either 200 mm (8 in.) or 25% of the largest
piping size to be joined, whichever is greater.

7.11.2(c) When conducting performance qualifications, each bonder and each bonding operator
are to make up test assemblies, the size and number of which are to be as required above.

7.13 Tests by the Manufacturer – Fire Endurance Testing of Plastic Piping in the Dry
Condition (For Level 1 and Level 2)
7.13.1 Test Method
7.13.1(a) The specimen is to be subjected to a furnace test with fast temperature increase similar
to that likely to occur in a fully developed liquid hydrocarbon fire. The time/temperature is to be
as follows:

At the end of 5 minutes 945°C (1733°F)

At the end of 10 minutes 1033°C (1891°F)

At the end of 15 minutes 1071°C (1960°F)

At the end of 30 minutes 1098°C (2008°F)

At the end of 60 minutes 1100°C (2012°F)

7.13.1(b) The accuracy of the furnace control is to be as follows:

i) During the first 10 minutes of the test, variation in the area under the curve of mean
furnace temperature is to be within ±15% of the area under the standard curve.
ii) During the first 30 minutes of the test, variation in the area under the curve of mean
furnace temperature is to be within ±10% of the area under the standard curve.
iii) For any period after the first 30 minutes of the test, variation in the area under the curve
of mean furnace temperature is to be within ±5% of the area under the standard curve.
iv) At any time after the first 10 minutes of the test, the difference in the mean furnace
temperature from the standard curve is to be within ±100°C (±180°F).

7.13.1(c) The locations where the temperatures are measured, the number of temperature
measurements and the measurement techniques are to be approved by ABS.

7.13.2 Test Specimen

7.13.2(a) The test specimen is to be prepared with the joints and fittings intended for use in the
proposed application.

7.13.2(b) The number of specimens is to be sufficient to test typical joints and fittings including
joints between non-metal and metal pipes and metal fittings to be used.

7.13.2(c) The ends of the specimen are to be closed. One of the ends is to allow pressurized
nitrogen to be connected. The pipe ends and closures may be outside the furnace.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 131
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.13.2(d) The general orientation of the specimen is to be horizontal and it is to be supported by

one fixed support with the remaining supports allowing free movement. The free length between
supports is not to be less than 8 times the pipe diameter.

7.13.2(e) Most materials will require a thermal insulation to pass this test. The test procedure is to
include the insulation and its covering.

7.13.2(f) If the insulation contains, or is liable to absorb moisture, the specimen is not to be tested
until the insulation has reached an air dry-condition, defined as equilibrium with an ambient
atmosphere of 50% relative humidity at 20 ± 5°C (68 ± 9°F). Accelerated conditioning is
permissible provided the method does not alter the properties of the component material. Special
samples are to be used for moisture content determination and conditioned with the test specimen.
These samples are to be so constructed as to represent the loss of water vapor from the specimen
having similar thickness and exposed faces.

7.13.3 Test Condition

A nitrogen pressure inside the test specimen is to be maintained automatically at 0.7 ± 0.1 bar (0.7
± 0.1 kgf/cm2, 10 ± 1.5 psi) during the test. Means are to be provided to record the pressure inside
the pipe and the nitrogen flow into and out of the specimen in order to indicate leakage.

7.13.4 Acceptance Criteria

7.13.4(a) During the test, no nitrogen leakage from the sample is to occur.

7.13.4(b) (2015) After termination of the furnace test, the test specimen together with fire
protective coating, if any, is to be allowed to cool in still air to ambient temperature and then
tested to the maximum allowable pressure of the pipes as defined in 4-4-2/7.5.1 and 4-4-2/7.5.2.
The pressure is to be held for a minimum of 15 minutes. Pipes without leakage qualify as Level 1
or 2 depending on the test duration. Pipes with negligible leakage (i.e., not exceeding 5% flow
loss) qualify as Level 1W or Level 2W depending on the test duration. Where practicable, the
hydrostatic test is to be conducted on bare pipe (i.e., coverings and insulation removed) so that any
leakage will be apparent.

7.13.4(c) Alternative test methods and/or test procedures considered to be at least equivalent
including open pit testing method, may be accepted in cases where the pipes are too large for the
test furnace.

7.15 Test by Manufacturer –Fire Endurance Testing of Water-Filled Plastic Piping (For Level
3)
7.15.1 Test Method
7.15.1(a) A propane multiple burner test with a fast temperature increase is to be used.

7.15.1(b) For piping up to and including 152 mm (6 in.) O.D., the fire source is to consist of two
rows of 5 burners as shown in 4-4-2/7.15.1 FIGURE 1. A constant heat flux averaging 113.6
kW/m2 (36,000 BTU/hr-ft2) ± 10% is to be maintained 12.5 ± 1 cm (5 ± 0.4 in.) above the
centerline of the burner array. This flux corresponds to a pre-mix flame of propane with a fuel
flow rate of 5 kg/hr (11 lb/hr) for a total heat release of 65 kW (3700 BTU/min.). The gas
consumption is to be measured with an accuracy of at least ±3% in order to maintain a constant
heat flux. Propane with a minimum purity of 95% is to be used.

7.15.1(c) For piping greater than 152 mm (6 in.) O.D., one additional row of burners is to be
included for each 51 mm (2 in.) increase in pipe diameter. A constant heat flux averaging 113.6
kW/m2 (36,000 BTU/hr-ft2) ± 10% is still to be maintained at the 12.5 ± 1 cm (5 ± 0.4 in.) height
above the centerline of the burner array. The fuel flow is to be increased as required to maintain
the designated heat flux.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 132
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.15.1(d) The burners are to be type “Sievert No. 2942” or equivalent which produces an air
mixed flame. The inner diameter of the burner heads is to be 29 mm (1.14 in.). See 4-4-2/7.15.1
FIGURE 1. The burner heads are to be mounted in the same plane and supplied with gas from a
manifold. If necessary, each burner is to be equipped with a valve in order to adjust the flame
height.

7.15.1(e) The height of the burner stand is also to be adjustable. It is to be mounted centrally
below the test pipe with the rows of burners parallel to the pipe's axis. The distance between the
burner heads and the pipe is to be maintained at 12.5 ±1 cm (5 ±0.4 in.) during the test. The free
length of the pipe between its supports is to be 0.8 ±0.05 m (31.5 ±2 in.). See 4-4-2/7.15.1
FIGURE 2.

FIGURE 1
Fire Endurance Test Burner Assembly

FIGURE 2
Fire Endurance Test Stand With Mounted Sample

7.15.2 Test Specimen

7.15.2(a) Each pipe is to have a length of approximately 1.5 m (5 ft).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 133
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.15.2(b) The test pipe is to be prepared with permanent joints and fittings intended to be used.
Only valves and straight joints versus elbows and bends are to be tested as the adhesive in the joint
is the primary point of failure.

7.15.2(c) The number of pipe specimens is to be sufficient to test all typical joints and fittings.

7.15.2(d) The ends of each pipe specimen are to be closed. One of the ends is to allow pressurized
water to be connected.

7.15.2(e) If the insulation contains, or is liable to absorb, moisture the specimen is not to be tested
until the insulation has reached an air dry-condition, defined as equilibrium with an ambient
atmosphere of 50% relative humidity at 20 ± 5°C (68 ± 9°F). Accelerated conditioning is
permissible provided the method does not alter the properties of the component material. Special
samples are to be used for moisture content determination and conditioned with the test specimen.
These samples are to be so constructed as to represent the loss of water vapor from the specimen
having similar thickness and exposed faces.

7.15.2(f) The pipe samples are to rest freely in a horizontal position on two V-shaped supports.
The friction between pipe and supports is to be minimized. The supports may consist of two
stands, as shown in 4-4-2/7.15.1 FIGURE 2.

7.15.2(g) A relief valve is to be connected to one of the end closures of each specimen.

7.15.3 Test Conditions

7.15.3(a) The test is to be carried out in a sheltered test site in order to prevent any draft
influencing the test.

7.15.3(b) Each pipe specimen is to be completely filled with deaerated water to exclude air
bubbles.

7.15.3(c) The water temperature is not to be less than 15°C (59°F) at the start and is to be
measured continuously during the test. The water is to be stagnant and the pressure maintained at
3 ± 0.5 bar (3.1 ± 0.5 kgf/cm2, 43.5 ± 7.25 psi) during the test.

7.15.4 Acceptance Criteria

7.15.4(a) During the test, no leakage from the sample(s) is to occur except that slight weeping
through the pipe wall may be accepted.

7.15.4(b) After termination of the burner test, the test specimen together with fire protective
coating, if any, is to be allowed to cool to ambient temperature and then tested to the maximum
allowable pressure of the pipes as defined in 4-4-2/7.5.1 and 4-4-2/7.5.2. The pressure is to be
held for a minimum of 15 minutes without significant leakage [i.e., not exceeding 0.2 1/min. (0.05
gpm)]. Where practicable, the hydrostatic test is to be conducted on bare pipe (i.e., coverings and
insulation removed) so that any leakage will be apparent.

7.17 Tests by Manufacturer – Flame Spread

7.17.1 Test Method (2020)
Flame spread of plastic piping is to be determined by IMO Resolution A.653(16)
Recommendation on Improved Fire Test Procedures for Surface Flammability of Bulkhead,
Ceiling, and Deck Finish Materials and Resolution A.753(18) Guidelines for the application of
plastic pipes on ships, as amended by Resolution MSC.399(95) as follows.

7.17.1(a) (2020)
Tests are to be made for each pipe material and to take into account differences in wall thickness.
When conducting testing of plastic piping, testing need not be conducted on every pipe size.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 134
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

Testing is to be conducted on pipe sizes with the maximum and minimum wall thicknesses
intended to be used. This will qualify all piping sizes for a specific piping material provided that
the wall thickness falls within the tested range.

7.17.1(b) (2020)
For homogenous thermoplastic pipes, the test specimens may be produced as flat plates in the
required wall thickness(es).

7.17.1(c) (2020)
The test sample is to be fabricated by cutting pipes lengthwise into individual sections and then
assembling the sections into a test sample as representative as possible of a flat surface. A test
sample is to consist of at least two sections. All cuts are to be made normal to the pipe wall. The
test sample is to be 800 mm ± 5 mm long for tests to 2010 FTP Code, annex 1, part 5. The test
sample is to be 75 mm ± 1 mm square for tests to 2010 FTP Code, annex 1, part 2.

7.17.1(d) The number of sections that must be assembled together to form a test sample is to be
that which corresponds to the nearest integral number of sections which makes up a test sample
with an equivalent linearized surface width between 155 mm (6 in.) and 180 mm (7 in.). The
surface width is defined as the measured sum of the outer circumference of the assembled pipe
sections that are exposed to the flux from the radiant panel.

7.17.1(e) The assembled test sample is to have no gaps between individual sections.

7.17.1(f) The assembled test sample is to be constructed in such a way that the edges of two
adjacent sections coincide with the centerline of the test holder.

7.17.1(g) The individual test sections are to be attached to the backing calcium silicate board using
wire (No. 18 recommended) inserted at 50 mm (2 in.) intervals through the board and tightened by
twisting at the back.

7.17.1(h) The individual pipe sections are to be mounted so that the highest point of the exposed
surface is in the same plane as the exposed flat surface of a normal surface.

7.17.1(i) The space between the concave unexposed surface of the test sample and the surface of
the calcium silicate backing board is to be left void.

7.17.1(j) The void space between the top of the exposed test surface and the bottom edge of the
sample holder frame is to be filled with a high temperature insulating wool if the width of the pipe
segments extend under the side edges of the sample holding frame.

7.19 Testing By Manufacturer – General

Testing is to demonstrate the compliance of plastic pipes, fittings and joints for which approval, in
accordance with this section, is requested. These tests are to be in compliance with the requirements of
relevant standards as per 4-4-2/7.23 TABLE 3 and 4-4-2/7.23 TABLE 4.

7.21 Testing Onboard After Installation

Piping systems are to be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure of not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

For piping required to be electrically conductive, earthing is to be checked and random resistance testing is
to be conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 135
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

7.23 Acceptance of Flag State Requirements

For a craft intended for service in domestic waters, ABS will consider the recognized published standards
of the Flag Administration in lieu of the requirements of 4-4-2/7.

TABLE 2
Fire Endurance Requirements Matrix for Plastic Pipes (2020)

LOCATION

PIPING SYSTEMS A B C D E F G H I J K

CARGO (Flammable cargoes with flash point ≤ 60°C (140°F)

1 Cargo lines NA NA L1 NA NA 0 NA 0 (10) 0 NA L1 (2)

2 Crude oil washing lines NA NA L1 NA NA 0 NA 0 (10) 0 NA L1 (2)

3 Vent lines NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA 0 (10) 0 NA X

INERT GAS

4 Water seal effluent line NA NA 0 (1) NA NA 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1) NA 0

5 Scrubber effluent line 0 (1) 0 (1) NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 (1) NA 0

6 Main line 0 0 L1 NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA L1 (6)

7 Distribution lines NA NA L1 NA NA 0 NA NA 0 NA L1 (2)

FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (flash point > 60°C (140°F)

8 Cargo lines X X L1 X X NA 0 0 (10) 0 NA L1

(3)

9 Fuel oil X X L1 X X NA 0 0 0 L1 L1
(3)

10 Lubricating oil X X L1 X X NA NA NA 0 L1 L1

11 Hydraulic oil X X L1 X X 0 0 0 0 L1 L1

SEA WATER (See Note 1)

12 Bilge main and branches L1 (7) L1 (7) L1 X X NA 0 0 0 NA L1

13 Fire main and water spray L1 L1 L1 X NA NA NA 0 0 X L1

14 Foam system L1W L1W L1W NA NA NA NA NA 0 L1W L1W

15 Sprinkler system L1W L1W L3 X NA NA NA 0 0 L3 L3

16 Ballast L3 L3 L3 L3 X 0 (10) 0 0 0 L2W L2W

17 Cooling water, essential services L3 L3 NA NA NA NA NA 0 0 NA L2W

18 Tank cleaning services, fixed NA NA L3 NA NA 0 NA 0 0 NA L3 (2)

machines

19 Non-essential systems 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0

FRESH WATER

20 Cooling water, essential services L3 L3 NA NA NA NA 0 0 0 L3 L3

21 Condensate return L3 L3 L3 0 0 NA NA NA 0 0 0

22 Non-essential systems 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0

SANITARY/DRAINS/SCUPPERS

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 136
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

LOCATION

PIPING SYSTEMS A B C D E F G H I J K

23 Deck drains (internal) L1W L1W NA L1W 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0

(4) (4) (4)

24 Sanitary drains (internal) 0 0 NA 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0

(1, 8) (1, 8) (1, 8) (1, 8) (1, 8) (1, 8)
25 Scuppers and discharges 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(overboard)

VENTS/SOUNDING

26 Water tanks/dry spaces 0 0 0 0 0 0(10) 0 0 0 0 0

27 Oil tanks (flashpoint 60°C X X X X X X (3) 0 0 (10) 0 X X

(140°F))

MISCELLANEOUS

28 Control air L1 (5) L1 (5) L1 (5) L1 (5) L1 (5) NA 0 0 0 L1 (5) L1 (5)

29 Service air (non-essential) 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0

30 Brine 0 0 NA 0 0 NA NA NA 0 0 0
(9) (9) (9) (9)
31 Auxiliary low pressure steam L2W L2W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (9)
(pressure ≤ 7 bar (7 kgf/cm2, 100
psi))

32 Central vacuum cleaners NA NA NA 0 NA NA NA NA 0 0 0

(1) (1) (1)
33 Exhaust gas cleaning system L3 L3 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA L3 NA
(11)
effluent line
NA

34 Urea Transfer/ Supply System L1(12) L1(12) NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 L3(11) 0

(SCR installations) NA

Locations (See definitions below) Abbreviations

A Category A machinery spaces L1 Fire endurance test in dry conditions, 60 minutes, in

accordance with 4-4-2/7.13
B Other machinery spaces

C Cargo pump rooms L2 Fire endurance test in dry conditions, 30 minutes, in

accordance with 4-4-2/7.13
D Ro/Ro cargo holds

E Other dry cargo holds L3 Fire endurance test in wet conditions, 30 minutes, in
accordance with 4-4-2/7.15
F Cargo tanks

G Fuel oil tanks 0 No fire endurance test required

H Ballast water tanks NA Not applicable (Plastic pipe is not permitted)

I Cofferdams, void spaces, pipe tunnels and ducts X Metallic materials meeting the requirements of
4-4-2/5
J Accommodation, service and control spaces

K Open decks

Notes:

1 Where non-metallic piping is used, remotely controlled valves are to be provided at the ship's side. These
valves are to be controlled from outside the space.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 137
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

2 Remote closing valves are to be provided at the cargo tanks.

3 When cargo tanks contain flammable liquids with a flash point greater than 60°C (140°F), “0” may replace
“NA” or “X”.

4 (2015) For drains serving only the space concerned, “0” may replace “L1W”.

5 When controlling functions are not required by statutory requirements, “0” may replace “L1”.

6 For pipe between machinery space and deck water seal, “0” may replace “L1”.

7 For passenger vessels, “X” is to replace “L1”.

8 Scuppers serving open decks in positions 1 and 2, as defined in Regulation 13 of the International Convention
on Load Lines, 1966, are to be “X” throughout unless fitted at the upper end with the means of closing capable
of being operated from a position above the freeboard deck in order to prevent downflooding.

9 For essential services, such as fuel oil tank heating and ship's whistle, “X” is to replace “0”.

10 For tankers where compliance with paragraph 3(f) of Regulation 13F of Annex I of MARPOL 73/78 is
required, “NA” is to replace “0”.

11 L3 in service spaces, NA in accommodation and control spaces.

12 Type Approved plastic piping without fire endurance test (0) is acceptable downstream of the tank valve,
provided this valve is metal seated and arranged as fail-to-closed or with quick closing from a safe position
outside the space in the event of fire.

13 For Passenger Ships subject to SOLAS II-2, Reg.21.4 (Safe return to Port), plastic pipes for services required
to remain operative in the part of the ship not affected by the casualty thresholds, such as systems intended to
support safe areas, are to be considered essential services. In accordance with MSC Circular MSC.1/Circ.1369,
interpretation 12, for Safe Return to Port purposes, plastic piping can be considered to remain operational after
a fire casualty if the plastic pipes and fittings have been tested to L1 standard.

Location Definition
A - Machinery spaces of category Machinery spaces of category A as defined in SOLAS 1974, as amended, regulation
II-2/3.19
B - Other machinery spaces and Spaces, other than category A machinery spaces and cargo pump rooms, containing
pump room propulsion machinery, boilers, steam and internal combustion engines, generators and
major electrical machinery, pumps, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing,
ventilation and air-conditioning machinery, and similar spaces, and trunks to such
spaces
C - Cargo pump room Spaces containing cargo pumps and entrances and trunks to such spaces
D - Ro-ro cargo holds Ro-ro cargo holds are ro-ro cargo spaces and special category spaces as defined in
SOLAS 1974, as amended, regulation II-2/3.14 and 3.18

E - Other dry cargo hold All spaces other than ro-ro cargo holds used for non-liquid cargo and trunks to such
spaces

F - Cargo tank All spaces used for liquid cargo and trunks to such spaces

G - Fuel oil tank All spaces used for fuel oil (excluding cargo tanks) and trunks to such spaces.

H - Ballast water tank All spaces used for ballast water and trunks to such space

I - Cofferdams, voids spaces, pipe Cofferdams and voids are those empty spaces between two bulkheads separating two
tunnel and ducts adjacent compartments

J - Accommodation, service and Accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations as defined in SOLAS
control space 1974, as amended, regulation II-2/3.10, 3.12, 3.22.

K - Open decks Open deck spaces as defined in SOLAS 1974, as amended, regulation II-2/26.2.2(5)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 138
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

TABLE 3
Standards for Plastic Pipes - Typical Requirements for All Systems

Test Typical Standard Notes

1 Internal pressure (1) 4-4-2/7.5.1 Top, Middle, Bottom (of each

ASTM D 1599, pressure range)
ASTM D 2992 Tests are to be carried out on pipe
ISO 15493 or equivalent spools made of different pipe sizes,
fittings and pipe connections.

2 External pressure (1) 4-4-2/7.5.2 As above, for straight pipes only.

ISO 15493 or equivalent

3 Axial strength (1) 4-4-2/7.5.4 As above.

4 Load deformation ASTM D 2412 or equivalent Top, Middle, Bottom (of each
pressure range)

5 Temperature limitations (1) 4-4-2/7.5.5 Each type of resin

ISO 75 Method A GRP piping
system:
HDT test on each type of resin acc. to
ISO 75 method A.
Thermoplastic piping systems:
ISO 75 Method AISO 306 Plastics –
Thermoplastic materials –
Determination of Vicat softening
temperature (VST)
VICAT test according to ISO 2507
Polyesters with an HDT below 80°C
should not be used.

6 Impact resistance (1) 4-4-2/7.5.6 Representative sample of each type of

ISO 9854: 1994, ISO 9653: 1991 ISO construction
15493
ASTM D 2444, or equivalent

7 Ageing Manufacturer's standard Each type of construction

ISO 9142:1990

8 Fatigue Manufacturer’s standard or service Each type of construction

experience.

9 Fluid absorption ISO 8361:1991

(2)
10 Material compatibility ASTM C581
Manufacturer’s standard

Notes:

1 Where the manufacturer does not have a certified quality system, test to be witnessed by the Surveyor. See
4-4-2/7.9.

2 If deemed applicable by the Flag Administration.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 139
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

TABLE 4
Standards for Plastic Pipes - Additional RequirementsDepending on Service
and/or Location of Piping

Test Typical Standard Notes

(1,2)
1 Fire endurance 4-4-2/7.5.7 Representative samples of each type
of construction and type of pipe
connection.

2 Flame spread (1,2) 4-4-2/7.5.8 Representative samples of each type

of construction.

3 Smoke generation (2) IMO Fire Test Procedures Code Representative samples of each type
of construction.

4 Toxicity (2) IMO Fire Test Procedures Code Representative samples of each type
of construction.

5 Electrical conductivity (1,2) 4-4-2/7.5.9 Representative samples of each type

ASTM F1173-95 or ASTM D 257, of construction
NS 6126/ 11.2 or equivalent

Notes:

1 Where the manufacturer does not have a certified quality system, test to be witnessed by the Surveyor. See
4-4-2/7.9.

2 If deemed applicable by the Flag Administration.

Note: Test items 1, 2 and 5 in 4-4-2/7.23 TABLE 4 are optional. However, if not carried out, the range of approved
applications for the pipes will be limited accordingly (see 4-4-2/7.23 TABLE 2).

9 Material of Valves and Fittings

9.1 General
The physical characteristics of such material are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) or other such appropriate material
specifications as may be approved in connection with a particular design for the stresses and temperatures
to which they may be exposed. Manufacturers are to make physical tests of each melt and, upon request,
are to submit the results of such tests to ABS.

9.3 Forged or Cast Steel

In any system, forged or cast steel may be used in the construction of valves and fittings for all pressures
and temperatures. Consideration is to be given to the possibility of graphite formation in the following
steels: Carbon steel above 425°C (800°F); carbon-molybdenum steel above 468°C (875°F); chrome-
molybdenum steel (with chromium under 0.60%) above 524°C (975°F).

9.5 Cast Iron

For temperatures not exceeding 232°C (450°F), cast iron of the physical characteristics specified in
Section 2-3-6 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) may be used in the construction of
valves and fittings, except in locations for which it is specifically prohibited elsewhere in the Rules.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 140
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

9.7 Ductile (Nodular) Iron

Nodular-iron applications for valves will be specially considered when the material has an elongation of
not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.) and where the temperature does not exceed 343°C (650°F). See Section
2-3-5 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

9.9 Brass and Bronze

Brass or bronze having the physical characteristics as specified in Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2) may be used in the construction of valves and fittings intended for
temperatures up to 208°C (406°F). For temperatures greater than 208°C, (406°F) but not in excess of 288
C (550°F), high-temperature bronze is to be used and the chemical and physical characteristics are to be
submitted for approval.

Valves, fittings and flanges of nonferrous material may be attached to nonferrous pipe by an approved
soldering method. For pressures up to 6.9 bar (7 kgf/cm2, 100 psi) and temperatures not exceeding 93°C
(200°F), ordinary solder may be used, but for higher pressures and temperatures, the method and the
quality of solder to be used will be considered for each case.

9.11 Plastic
Rigid plastic compounds for valves and fittings in plastic piping systems will be considered for Group II
piping systems. The design pressure and temperature together with the physical characteristics of the
material verifying compliance with the requirements of 4-4-2/7 are to be submitted in all cases.

11 Valves

11.1 General
11.1.1 Standard Valves
Valves constructed and tested in accordance with a recognized standard may be used subject to
compliance with 4-4-2/11.5.

11.1.2 Non-Standard Valves

All other valves not certified by the manufacturer as being in accordance with a recognized
standard may be accepted based on evidence verifying their suitability for the intended service.
Acceptable evidence includes testing or analysis demonstrating adequacy including both structural
and material capability aspects. Drawings of such valves showing details of construction and
materials are to be submitted for review, as well as basis for valve pressure rating, such as design
calculations or appropriate burst test data.

11.3 Construction
All valves are to close with a right hand (clockwise) motion of the handwheel when facing the end of the
stem and are to be either of the rising-stem type or fitted with an indicator to show whether the valve is
open or closed.

All valves of Group I piping systems having nominal diameters exceeding 50 mm (2 in.) are to have
bolted, pressure seal, or breech lock bonnets and flanged or welding ends. Welding ends are to be the butt
weld type except that socket weld ends may be used for valves having nominal diameters of 80 mm (3 in.)
or less up to and including 39.2 bar (40.0 kgf/cm2) pressure rating class (ASME 600 Class), and for valves
having nominal diameters of 65 mm (2.5 in.) or less up to and including 98.1 bar (100 kgf/cm2) pressure
rating class (ASME 1500 Class).

All cast iron valves are to have bolted bonnets or are to be of the union bonnet type. For cast iron valves of
union bonnet type, the bonnet ring is to be of steel, bronze, or malleable iron.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 141
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

Stems, discs or disc faces, seats, and other wearing parts of valves are to be of corrosion resistant materials
suitable for intended service.

Valves are to be designed for the maximum pressure to which they will be subjected. The design pressure
is to be at least 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi). Valves used in open systems, such as vent and drain lines, (for
example, level gauge and drain cocks) may be designed for a pressure below 3.4 bar (3.5 kg/cm2, 50 psi)
subject to the requirements of 4-4-2/11.1. Large fabricated ballast manifolds which connect lines exceeding
200 mm (8 in.) nominal pipe size may be used when the maximum pressure to which they will be
subjected does not exceed 1.7 bar (1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi).

All valves for Group I piping systems and valves intended for use in oil lines are to be constructed so that
the stem is positively restrained from being screwed out of the body (bonnet). Plug valves, butterfly valves,
and valves employing resilient material will be subject to special consideration. Valve operating systems
for all valves which cannot be manually operated are to be submitted for approval.

11.5 Hydrostatic Test and Identification

All valves are to be subjected by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to that stipulated
by the American National Standards Institute or other recognized standard. They are to bear the trademark
of the manufacturer legibly stamped or cast on the exterior of the valve and the primary pressure rating at
which the manufacturer identifies the valve as meeting the requirements of the standards.

13 Pipe Fittings

13.1 General
All fittings in Group I piping are to have flanged or welded ends in sizes over 89 mm O.D. (3 in. N.P.S.).
Screwed fittings may be used in Group I piping systems provided the temperature does not exceed 496°C
(925°F) and the pressure does not exceed the maximum pressure indicated below for the pipe size.

Pipe Size Maximum Pressure

mm O.D. (in N.P.S.) bar (kgf/cm2, psi)

above 89 (3) not permitted in Group I piping service

above 60 (2) through 89 (3) 27.6 (28.10, 400)

above 33 (1) through 60 (2) 41.4 (42.20, 600)

above 27 (0.75) through 33 (1) 82.8 (84.40, 1200)

27 (0.75) and smaller 103 (105.50, 1500)

Flared, flareless, and compression fittings may be used for tube sizes not exceeding 60 mm O.D. (2 in.
NPS) in Group I piping. In Group II piping, screwed fittings, flared, flareless, and compression tube
fittings will be accepted without size limitations. Flared fittings are to be used for flammable fluid systems
except that both flared and flareless fittings of the non-bite type may be used when the tubing system is of
steel or nickel-copper or copper-nickel alloys. Only flared fittings are to be used when tubing for
flammable fluid systems is of copper or copper- zinc alloys. See 4-4-6/1.7 for hydraulic systems.

13.3 Hydrostatic Test and Identification

All fittings are to be subjected by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to that
stipulated by the American National Standards Institute or other recognized standard. They are to bear the
trademark of the manufacturer legibly stamped or cast on the exterior of the fitting and also the primary
pressure rating at which the manufacturer guarantees the fitting to meet the requirements of the standards.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 142
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

13.5 Non-standard Fittings

Fittings which are not certified by the manufacturer as being in accordance with a recognized standard may
be accepted based on evidence verifying their suitability for the intended service. Acceptable evidence
include testing or analysis demonstrating adequacy including both structural and material capability
aspects. Drawings of such fittings showing details of construction, material and design calculations or test
results are to be submitted for review.

13.7 Mechanical Joints

The installation of mechanical pipe joints, as covered by 4-4-2/13.1 and 4-4-2/13.5, is to be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s assembly instructions. Where special tools and gauges are required for installation
of the joints, these are to be specified and supplied as necessary by the manufacturer. These special tools
are to be kept onboard.

15 Welded Non-standard Valves and Fittings

Non-Standard steel valves and fittings fabricated by means of fusion welding are to comply also with the
requirements of Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2). However, after a
manufacturer's procedure in the fabrication of equipment of this kind has been demonstrated by tests to the
satisfaction of a Surveyor to the Bureau, subsequent tests on the product need not be witnessed, but the
manufacturer's guarantee that the Rules are complied with will be accepted as for other valves and fittings
which conform to standards of the American National Standards Institute or other recognized standards.

17 Flanges

17.1 General
Flanges are to be designed and fabricated in accordance with a recognized standard. Slip-on flanges from
flat plate may be substituted for hubbed slip-on flanges in Group II piping systems.

17.3 Group I Piping Flanges

In Group I piping, flanges may be attached to the pipes by any of the following methods appropriate for
the material involved:

17.3.1 Steel Pipe

Over 60 mm O.D. (2 in. NPS) steel pipes are to be expanded into steel flanges, or they may be
screwed into the flanges and seal-welded. They may in all cases be attached by fusion welding in
compliance with the requirements of 2-4-2/9. Smaller pipes may be screwed without seal-welding
but oil lines are, in addition, to be expanded into the flanges in order to insure uniformly tight
threads.

17.3.2 Nonferrous Pipe

In Group I, nonferrous pipes are to be brazed to composition metallic or steel flanges, and in sizes
of 60 mm O.D. (2 in. NPS) and under they may be screwed.

17.5 Group II Piping Flanges

Similar attachments are also to be used in Group II piping. However, modifications are permitted for
welded flanges as noted in 2-4-2/9.5 and 2-4-2/9.7 and screwed flanges of suitable material may be used in
all sizes.

17.7 Group II Plastic Piping Flanges

Rigid plastic compounds for flanges in plastic piping systems will be considered for Group II piping
systems. The design pressure and temperature together with the physical characteristics of the material are
to be submitted in all cases.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 143
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

19 Sea Inlets and Overboard Discharges

19.1 Installation
Piping connections bolted to the shell plating are to have the bolt heads countersunk on the outside and the
bolts threaded through the plating. Where a reinforcing ring of sufficient thickness is welded to the inside
of the shell, studs may be used. For compensation in way of holes in the shell plating, see 3-2-5/1.17.

Threaded connections outboard of the shell valves are not considered an acceptable method of connection
pipe to the shell unless the following is met;

For cargo craft under 500 gross tons, screwed connections may be permitted where all pipes and fittings
forming part of the discharge connection, as required by 4-4-2/19 and 4-4-2/23, are constructed of
corrosion resistant materials, and its thickness after threading is no less effective than Extra Heavy. Where
screwed connections are used, appropriate polymer coating is to be used on the connection to isolate any
dissimilar metals.

19.3 Valve Connections to Shell (2015)

Wafer type valves are not to be used for any connections to the craft’s shell unless specially approved. Lug
type butterfly valves used as shell valves are to have a separate set of bolts on each end of the valve so that
the inboard end may be disconnected with the valve closed to maintain its watertight integrity.

Where a distance piece is fitted between the shell and the shell valves, the pipe is to be as short as possible
and of wall thickness not less than that specified in 4-4-2/23.3.4(a).

19.5 Materials
All shell fittings and valves required by 4-4-2/21 and 4-4-2/23 are to be of steel, bronze or other approved
ductile material. Valves of ordinary cast iron or similar material are not acceptable. The use of nodular
iron, also known as ductile iron or spheroidal-graphite iron, will be accepted provided the material has an
elongation not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.). All pipes to which this subsection refers are to be of steel or
other equivalent material, subject to special approval.

19.7 Shell Reinforcement

Overboard discharges are to have spigots extending through the shell plate and doubling plate where fitted
but need not project beyond the outside surface of the vessel.

19.9 Common Overboard Discharge

In general, various types of systems which discharge overboard are not to be interconnected without
special approval; that is closed pumping systems, deck scuppers, gravity drains, etc. are not to have a
common overboard discharge.

21 Machinery and Pumping Systems

21.1 Valves Required

Positive closing valves are to be fitted at the shell in inlet and discharge piping. The controls are to be
readily accessible and are to be provided with indicators showing whether the valves are open or closed. In
order to be considered readily accessible, the controls, during normal operating conditions, are to be:

i) Located in a space normally entered without using tools,

ii) Clear of or protected from obstructions, moving equipment and hot surfaces that prevent operation
or servicing, and
iii) Within operator's reach.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 144
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used for connection to the shell where the
failure of the material in the event of a fire would give rise to danger of flooding.

For cargo craft less than 500 Gross ton constructed of aluminum and FRP, pipes, valves and fittings which
are required to be ‘not readily rendered ineffective by heat” may be accepted provided the solidus melting
point of the material is greater than or equal to that of the material forming the bottom shell plating.

21.3 Sea Chests

The location of sea chests is to be such as to minimize the probability of blanking off the suction and
arranged so that the valves may be operated from the floors or gratings. Power-operated sea valves are to
be arranged for manual operation in the event of a failure of the power supply.

21.3.1 Strainer Plates

Sea chests are to be fitted with strainer plates at the vessel's side. The strainers are to have a clear
area of at least 1.5 times the area of the sea valves. Efficient means are to he provided for clearing
the strainers.

23 Scuppers and Drains

23.1 General
23.1.1 Application
These requirements apply to gravity drain systems from watertight and non-watertight spaces
located either above or below the freeboard deck.

23.1.2 Definitions
23.1.2(a) Gravity drain system. A gravity drain system is a piping system in which flow is
accomplished solely by the difference between the height of the inlet end and the outlet end. For
the purposes of the Rules, gravity drain systems include those which discharge both inside and
outside the vessel.

23.1.2(b) Gravity discharge. A gravity discharge is an overboard drain from a watertight space
such as spaces below freeboard deck or within enclosed superstructures or deckhouses. Back-
flooding through a gravity discharge would affect the reserve buoyancy of the vessel.

23.1.2(c) Inboard end. The inboard end of an overboard gravity discharge pipe is that part of the
pipe at which the discharge originates. The inboard end to be considered for these requirements is
the lowest inboard end where water would enter the vessel if back-flooding would occur.

23.1.2(d) Scupper. A scupper is an overboard drain from a non-watertight space or deck area.
Back-flooding through a scupper would not affect the reserve buoyancy of the vessel.

23.1.3 Basic Principles

Enclosed watertight spaces (spaces below freeboard deck or within enclosed superstructures or
deckhouses) are to be provided with means of draining. This may be achieved by connection to
the bilge system or by gravity drains. In general, a gravity drain is permitted wherever the position
of the space allows liquid to be discharged by gravity through an appropriate opening in the
boundary of the space. Unless specifically stated (see 4-4-2/23.5.1(b) or the below paragraph), the
discharge can be directed overboard or inboard. Where directed overboard, means are to be
provided to prevent entry of sea water through the opening in accordance with 4-4-2/23.3. Where
directed inboard, suitable arrangements are to be provided to collect and dispose of the drainage.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 145
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

Non-watertight spaces (open superstructures or deckhouses) and open decks, where liquid can
accumulate, are also to be provided with means of draining. In general, a gravity drain is permitted
for all non-watertight spaces. All such drains are to be directed overboard.

Gravity drains are to be capable of draining the space when the vessel is on even keel and either
upright or listed 5 degrees on either side.

23.3 Protection from Sea Water Entry

23.3.1 Overboard Gravity Discharges – Normally Open
23.3.1(a) General. Discharges led through the shell, either from spaces below the freeboard deck
or from within superstructures and deckhouses on the freeboard deck fitted with doors complying
with the requirements of 3-2-9/7, are to be fitted with efficient and accessible means for
preventing water from passing inboard.

Normally, each separate discharge is to have one automatic non-return valve with a positive means
of closing it from a position above the freeboard deck except as below. Alternatively, one
automatic non-return valve and one positive closing valve controlled from above the freeboard
deck may be accepted.

Where the vertical distance from the summer load waterline to the inboard end of the discharge
pipe exceeds 0 . 01L, the discharge may have two automatic non-return valves without positive
means of closing, provided that the inboard valve is always accessible for examination under
service conditions. The inboard valve is to be above the tropical load waterline. If this is not
practicable, then, provided a locally controlled stop valve is interposed between the two non-
return valves, the inboard valve need not be fitted above the tropical load waterline.

Where the vertical distance from the summer load waterline to the inboard end of the discharge
pipe exceeds 0 . 02L, a single automatic non-return valve without positive means of closing may
be accepted, provided it is located above the tropical load waterline (or, where assigned, timber
tropical load waterline). If this is impracticable, a locally operated positive closing valve may be
provided below the single non-return valve, in which case, the non-return valve need not be
located above the specified tropical load waterline.

L is defined in 3-1-1/3. The means for operating the positive-action valve is to be readily
accessible and provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is open or closed.

23.3.1(b) Manned Machinery Space. Where sanitary discharges and scuppers lead overboard
through the shell in way of manned machinery spaces, the fitting to the shell of a locally operated
positive closing valve, together with a non-return valve inboard, is acceptable.

See 4-4-2/23.3.1 FIGURE 3 for the acceptable arrangement of scuppers, inlets and discharges.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 146
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

FIGURE 3
Overboard Discharges – Valve Requirements

23.3.2 Overboard Gravity Discharges – Normally Closed

For overboard discharges which are closed at sea, such as gravity drains from topside ballast
tanks, a single screw down valve operated from above the freeboard deck is acceptable.

23.3.3 Scuppers and Discharges below the Freeboard Deck – Shell Penetration
Scuppers and discharge pipes originating at any level and penetrating the shell either more than
450 mm (17.5 in.) below the freeboard deck or less than 600 mm (23.5 in.) above the summer load
waterline are to be provided with a non-return valve at the shell. This valve, unless required
above, may be omitted if the length of piping up to the freeboard deck has a wall thickness at least
equal to the thickness of the shell plating or extra-heavy pipe, whichever is less.

23.3.4 Required Minimum Wall Thicknesses for Pipes

For pipes in the gravity drain systems covered by 4-4-2/23.3, the wall thickness of steel piping are
not be less than given below:

23.3.4(a) Piping where substantial thickness is required. For scupper and discharge pipes between
hull plating and the closeable or non-return valve, where substantial thickness is required:

i) External diameter of pipes equal to or less than 80 mm (3.15 in.): thickness not less than
7.0 mm (0.276 in.)
ii) External diameter of pipes 180 mm (7.1 in.): thickness not less than 10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
iii) External diameter of pipes equal to or more than 220 mm (8.7 in.): thickness not less than
12.5 mm (0.5 in.)

Intermediate sizes are to be determined by linear interpolation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 147
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

23.3.4(b) Piping where substantial thickness is not required. For scupper and discharge pipes
inboard of a closeable or non-return valve, where substantial thickness is not required:

i) External diameter of pipes equal to or less than 155 mm (6.1 in.): thickness not less than
4.5 mm (0.177 in.)
ii) External diameter of pipes equal to or more than 230 mm (9.1 in.): thickness not less than
6.0 mm (0.236 in.)

Intermediate sizes are to be determined by linear interpolation.

23.5 Gravity Drains from Superstructures or Deckhouses

23.5.1 Enclosed Cargo Spaces
Drainage of enclosed cargo spaces situated on the bulkhead deck or the freeboard deck is to be
provided with the following:

23.5.1(a) Where the summer freeboard is such that the deck edge of the space being drained is not
immersed when the vessel heels five degrees, the drainage is to be by means of a sufficient
number of gravity drains of suitable size discharging directly overboard, in accordance with
4-4-2/23.3.

23.5.1(b) Where the summer freeboard is such that the deck edge of the space being drained is
immersed when the vessel heels five degrees, the drainage of the enclosed cargo spaces is to be
led to a suitable space, or spaces, of adequate capacity, having a high water level alarm and
provided with suitable arrangements for discharge overboard. In addition, the system is to be
designed such that:

i) The number, size and disposition of the drain pipes are to prevent unreasonable
accumulation of free water;
ii) The pumping arrangements are to take into account the requirements for any fixed,
pressurized, water spraying, fire extinguishing system;
iii) Water contaminated with oil or other dangerous substances is not drained to machinery
spaces or other spaces where sources of ignition may be present; and
iv) Where the enclosed cargo space is protected by a fixed gas fire extinguishing system, the
drain pipes are fitted with means to prevent the escape of the smothering gas.
23.5.2 Open Superstructures and Deckhouses
Scuppers leading from superstructures or deckhouses not fitted with doors complying with the
requirements of 3-2-9/7 are to be led overboard.

23.7 Craft Receiving Subdivision Loadlines

For craft receiving subdivision loadlines, the bulkhead deck is to apply to provisions given in 4-4-2/23.3
when it is higher than the freeboard deck.

25 Cooler Installations External to the Hull

25.1 General (2019)

The inlet and discharge connections of external cooler installations are to be in accordance with 4-4-2/19.1
through 4-4-2/19.5 and 4-4-2/21.1 except that wafer type valves will be acceptable. If a flexible hose or
joint is fitted, it should be fire rated when located within the Category A machinery space and located
inboard of the isolation valve.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 148
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2

25.3 Integral Keel Cooler Installations

The positive closing valves required by 4-4-2/25.1 need not be provided if the keel (skin) cooler
installation is integral with the hull. To be considered integral with the hull, the installation is to be
constructed such that channels are welded to the hull with the hull structure forming part of the channel,
the channel material is to be at least the same thickness and quality as that required for the hull and the
forward end of the cooler is to be faired to the hull with a slope of not greater than 4 to 1.

If positive closing valves are not required at the shell, all flexible hoses or joints are to be positioned above
the deepest load waterline or be provided with an isolation valve.

25.5 Non-integral Keel Cooler Installations

Where non-integral keel coolers are used, if the shell penetrations are not fully welded, the penetration is to
be encased in a watertight enclosure.

Non-integral keel coolers are to be suitably protected against damage from debris and grounding by
recessing the unit into the hull or by the placement of protective guards.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 149
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 3
Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks

1 General Arrangement of Bilge Systems

A pumping system is to be provided in all craft capable of pumping from and draining any compartment
when the craft is on an even keel and either upright or listed five degrees. For this purpose, wing suctions
will often be necessary, except in narrow compartments at the ends of the craft. Arrangements are to be
made whereby water in the compartment will drain to the suction pipes. Efficient means are to be provided
for draining water from all tank tops and other watertight flats. Peak tanks and comparatively small
compartments, such as chain lockers, echo sounder spaces, and decks over peak tanks, etc., may be drained
by ejectors or hand pumps. Where ejectors are used for this purpose, the overboard discharge arrangements
are to comply with 4-4-2/23.

3 Bilge Pumps

3.1 Number of Pumps

3.1.1 Monohull Craft
3.1.1(a) 24 m (79 ft) or Greater.
Each monohull craft 24 m (79 ft) in length or greater is to be provided with two power-driven
bilge pumps, one of which may be attached to the propulsion unit.

3.1.1(b) Under 24 m (79 ft).

Each monohull crafter under 24 m (79 ft) in length is to be provided with at least one fixed power-
driven pump, which may be an attached unit, and one portable hand pump.

3.1.2 Multihull Craft

3.1.2(a) 24 m (79 ft) or Greater.
On multihull craft 24 m (79 ft) in length or greater, each hull is to be provided with at least two
power-driven bilge pumps, unless a bilge pump in one hull is capable of pumping bilge in the
other hull. At least one bilge pump in each hull is to be an independently-driven pump

3.1.2(b) Under 24 m.
On multihull craft under 24 m (79 ft) in length, each hull is to be provided with at least one fixed
power-driven bilge pump, which may be an attached unit, unless the system is arranged such that a
single fixed power-driven bilge pump is capable of taking suction from either hull. In this case,
one portable and pump is also to be provided.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 150
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

3.1.3 Alternative Arrangement-Submersible Pumps

As an alternative to 4-4-3/3.1.1 and 4-4-3/3.1.2, an arrangement utilizing submersible pumps may
be utilized. In bilge pumping arrangements where a bilge main is not provided, then, with the
exception of spaces forward of public spaces and crew accommodations, at least one fixed
submersible pump is to be provided for each space. In addition, at least one portable pump is to be
provided and be supplied from the emergency supply, if electric, for use on individual spaces.

3.3 Capacity
The capacity of each pump is to be in accordance with the following:

Craft Length Minimum Capacity per Pump

Below 24 m (79 ft) 5.5 m3/hr (25 gpm)

(hand pump 5 gpm, 1.13 m3/hr)

24 m (79 ft) or greater but below 30.5 m (100 ft) 11.36 m3/hr (50 gpm)

30.5 m (100 ft) or greater but below 45.7 m (150 ft) 14.33 m3/hr (66.6 gpm)

45.7 m (150 ft) and greater Q = 5.66d2/103 m3/hr

Q = 16.1d2 gpm

Q = pump capacity
d = required diameter of main bilge line suction, mm (in.). See 4-4-3/5.9.

When more than two pumps are connected to the bilge system, their arrangement and aggregate capacity
are not to be less effective.

The total capacity, Qt, of fixed submersible bilge pumps for each hull is not to be less than 2.4 times the
pump capacity, Q, determined in the above.

The capacity, Qn, of each submersible pump is not to be less than:

Qt
Qn = N−1
m3/hr (gpm), with a minimum capacity of 8 m3/hr (35 gpm)

3.5 Centrifugal Pumps

Where centrifugal pumps are installed, suitable means for priming are to be provided.

3.7 Independent Power Bilge Pumps

Sanitary, ballast and general service pumps may be accepted as independent power bilge pumps, provided
they are of the required capacity and are fitted with the necessary control valves required by 4-4-3/5.1 for
pumping bilges.

5 Bilge and Ballast Piping

5.1 General
The arrangement of the bilge and ballast pumping systems is to be such as to prevent the possibility of
water or oil passing into the cargo and machinery spaces, or from one compartment to another, whether
from the sea, water ballast or oil tanks. The bilge and ballast mains are to have separate control valves at
the pumps.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 151
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

5.3 Installation
Bilge or ballast pipes, where permitted to pass through compartments intended for the carriage of oil, are to
be of either steel or wrought iron. Where the craft’s hull is constructed of aluminum or FRP, aluminum
pipe may be used provided it is extra heavy.

Where bilge pipes in way of deep tanks are not led through a watertight or oil-tight tunnel, the bilge lines
are to be of steel and extra heavy. Similarly, where ballast pipes in way of deep tanks other than ballast
tanks are not led through a watertight or oil-tight tunnel, the ballast lines are to be of steel and extra heavy.
Where the craft’s hull is constructed of aluminum or FRP, aluminum pipe may be used provided it is extra
heavy. For both bilge and ballast piping, the number of joints is to be kept to a minimum and to be arc
welded or extra heavy flanged. The piping within a deep tank is to be installed to take care of expansion. A
non-return valve is to be fitted at the open end of bilge pipes.

5.5 Manifolds, Cocks and Valves

5.5.1 General
All manifolds, cocks and valves in connection with the bilge pumping arrangement are to be in
positions which are accessible at all times under ordinary circumstances. All valves in the
machinery space controlling the bilge suctions from the various compartments are to be of the
stop-check type. If valves are fitted at the open ends of pipes, they are to be of the non-return type.

5.5.2 Common-main-type Bilge Systems

A common-main bilge system normally consists of one or more main lines installed along the
length of the craft fitted with branch bilge suction connections to various compartments. Where
only one fore-and-aft bilge main is installed, the bilge main is to be located inboard of 20% of the
molded beam of the craft, measured inboard from the side of the ship perpendicular to the
centerline at the level of the summer load line. If there is at least one bilge main on each side of
the craft, then those bilge mains may be installed within 20% of the molded beam, measured
inboard from the side of the ship perpendicular to the centerline at the level of the summer load
line, provided they are fitted with branch lines and control valves arranged such that it is possible
to effectively pump out each compartment using the main(s) on either side of the craft.

For all common-main-type bilge systems, the control valves required in the branches from the
bilge main are to be accessible at all times and are to be of the stop-check type with an approved
type of remote operator. Remote operators may be located in a manned machinery space, or from
an accessible position above the freeboard deck or from underdeck walkways. Remote operators
may be of the hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or reach-rod type.

5.5.3 Controls for Ballast Tank Valves

Ballast tank valves are to be arranged so they will remain closed at all times, except when
ballasting. For this purpose, manual screw thread operated valves, positive holding arrangements
for butterfly type valves or other equivalent arrangements may be used. Where installed, remote
controlled valves are to be arranged so they will close and remain closed upon loss of control
power, or will remain in their last position and are provided with a readily accessible manual
means of operation in case of loss of power to the valve control system. Remote control of bilge
and ballast valves is to be clearly marked at the control station and means are to be provided to
indicate whether the valve is open or closed.

5.7 Strainers (2020)

Bilge lines in machinery spaces other than emergency suctions are to be fitted with strainers, easily
accessible from the floor plates, and are to have straight tail pipes to the bilges. The open ends of the bilge
lines in holds and other compartments are to be fitted with suitable strainers having an open area of not less
than three (3) times the area of the suction pipe.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 152
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

5.9 Size of Bilge Suctions

The least internal diameter of bilge suction pipes is to be that of the nearest commercial size within 6 mm
(0.25 in.) of the diameter determined by the following equations:

5.9.1 Main Line

For the diameter of main bilge line suctions and direct bilge suctions to the pumps:

d = 25 + 1 . 68 L B + D     mm

d = 1 + L B + D /2500     in .

5.9.2 Branch Lines

For the equivalent diameter of the combined branch suctions to a compartment:

d = 25 + 2 . 16 c B + D     mm

d = 1 + c B + D /1500     in .

where

d = internal diameter of pipe, in mm (in)

L = length of craft, as defined in 3-1-1/3, in m (ft)
B = breadth of craft, as defined in 3-1-1/5, in m (ft)
c = length of compartment, in m (ft)
D = molded depth to bulkhead or freeboard deck, in m (ft), except that for the main line in a
craft having an enclosed cargo space on the bulkhead or freeboard deck which is
internally drained in accordance with 4-4-2/23.5.1(b) and which extends for the full
length of the craft, D is to be measured to the next deck above the bulkhead or
freeboard deck. Where the enclosed cargo spaces cover a lesser length, D is to be taken
as a molded depth to the bulkhead or freeboard deck plus ℓℎ/L, where ℓ and ℎ are
aggregate length and height, respectively, of the enclosed cargo spaces.
5.9.3 Main Line Reduction
Where engine room bilge pumps are fitted primarily for drainage within the engine room, L may
be reduced by the combined length of the cargo tanks or cargo holds. In such cases, the cross
sectional area of the bilge main is not to be less than twice the required cross sectional area of the
engine room branch lines.

5.9.4 Alternate Size Requirements

For craft below 30.5 m (150 ft) in length, the bilge pipe sizes may be in accordance with the
following in lieu of 4-4-3/5.9.1.

Craft Length Minimum Pipe Size (I.D.)

Below 24 m (79 ft) 25 mm (1 in.)

24 m (79 ft) or greater but below 30.5 m (100 ft) 38 mm (1.25 in.)

30.5 m (100 ft) or greater by below 45.7 m (150 ft) 38 mm (1.5 in.)

5.9.5 Size Limits

For craft of 45.7 m (150 ft) in length or greater, no main suction piping is to be less than 63 mm
(2.5 in.) internal diameter. No branch piping need be more than 100 mm (4 in.) I.D., nor is it to be
less than 25 mm (1 in.) I.D.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 153
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

5.9.6 Bilge Common-main

The diameter of each common-main bilge line may be determined by the equation for bilge
branches given in 4-4-3/5.9.2 using the combined compartment length upstream of the point
where the diameter is being determined. In case of double hull construction with full depth wing
tanks served by a ballast system, where the beam of the craft is not representative of the breadth of
the compartment, B may be appropriately modified to the breath of the compartment. However, no
common-main bilge pipe needs to be more than the diameter for the bilge main given in
4-4-3/5.9.1.

5.11 Gravity Drains

Gravity drains that penetrate the main machinery space watertight bulkheads below the freeboard deck and
terminate within the main machinery space are to be fitted with a valve operable from above the freeboard
deck or with quick-acting, self-closing valves. The valve should preferably be located in the main
machinery space. When gravity drains from other spaces are terminated in cargo holds, the cargo hold
bilge well is to be fitted with a high level alarm. Gravity drains which terminate in spaces which are
protected by fixed gas extinguishing systems are to be fitted with means to prevent the escape of
extinguishing medium.

5.13 Ballast Water Treatment Systems (1 July 2022)

Where a ballast water treatment system is to be installed, it is to comply with the requirements in the ABS
Guide for Ballast Water Treatment, as applicable, and the same is to be verified by the ABS Surveyor.

When a system is installed during new construction, the craft is to also comply with the ABS Guide for
Ballast Water Exchange if used as a contingency measure during situations when the ballast water
treatment system needs repairs, is out of service, or unavailable. The use of ballast water exchange as a
contingency measure is subject to approval from the flag Administration or the Port State Authority. The
ballast water management plan is to include instructions for the Master to seek permission from the port
being visited prior to commencing ballast exchange as a contingency measure in case of inoperability of
the ballast water treatment system.

7 Emergency Bilge Suctions for Main Machinery Spaces (2016)

An emergency bilge suction is to be fitted in each machinery space containing a propulsion prime mover.
The emergency bilge suction is to be led straight to the largest independently driven pump in the main
machinery space, other than the required bilge pumps. Where this pump is not suitable, the second largest
suitable pump in the main machinery space may be used for this service, provided that the selected pump is
not one of the required bilge pumps and its capacity is not less than that of the required bilge pump.

The area of the emergency bilge suction pipe is to be equal to the full suction inlet of the pump selected.
The emergency bilge line is to be provided with a suction stop-check valve, which is to be so located as to
enable rapid operation, and a suitable overboard discharge line. For the emergency bilge inlet, the distance
between the open end of the suction inlet and the tank top is to be adequate to allow a full flow of water.
The hand wheel of emergency bilge suction valve is to be position not less than 460 mm (18 in.) above the
floor plates.

9 Vent Pipes

9.1 General
Except for comparatively small compartments that are not fitted with a fixed means of drainage, vent pipes
are to be fitted to all tanks, cofferdams, voids, tunnels and compartments which are not fitted with other
ventilation arrangements. In all craft, the structural arrangement in double- bottom and other tanks is to be
such as to permit the free passage of air and gases from all parts of the tanks to the vent pipes. Each tank is
to be fitted with at least one vent pipe which is to be located at the highest part of the tank. Vent pipes are

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 154
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

to be arranged to provide adequate drainage under normal conditions. No shutoff valve or closing device
that can prevent the venting from a tank is to be installed in vent piping.

9.3 Height and Wall Thickness

9.3.1 Vents Exposed to Weather
Vent pipes on decks exposed to the weather are to have the following heights:

i) 760 mm (30 in.) for those on the freeboard deck; and

ii) 450 mm (17.5 in.) for those on the superstructure deck.

The height is to be measured from the deck to the point where water may have access below.
Where these heights may interfere with the working of the craft, a lower height may be accepted,
provided that ABS is satisfied that the closing arrangements and other circumstances justify a
lower height.

Vent pipes for tanks containing fuels with a flash point below 60°C (140°F) are to extend 2.4 m (8
ft) above the weather deck or other effective arrangements which have been approved are to be
provided. Where fuel oil with a flash point below 43°C (109°F) is permitted to be carried for
consumption by gas turbines, the vents are to terminate with approved flame arresters.

The wall thicknesses of vent pipes where exposed to the weather are to be not less than that
specified below. For vent pipes located on the fore deck, as defined in 3-2-11/9.7.1, the strength
and wall thickness requirements are to also comply with 3-2-11/9.7.2 and 3-2-11/9.7.3:

Nominal Size, d Min. Wall Thickness

d ≤ 65 mm (2.5 in.) 6.0 mm (0.24 in.)

65 mm (2.5 in.) < d < 150 mm (6 in.) by interpolation (1)

d ≥ 150 mm (6 in.) 8.5 mm (0.33 in.)

Note:

1 6 + 0 . 029(d – 65) mm or 0 . 24 + 0 . 026(d – 2 . 5) in.

9.3.2 Vents not Exposed to Weather

Vent pipes not exposed to the weather need not comply with the height and wall thickness required
by 4-4-3/9.3.1.

9.5 Size
Vent pipes are to have a minimum internal diameter not less than 38 mm (1.5 in.) and not less than the
internal diameter of the fill line. Where tanks are to be filled by pump pressure, the aggregate area of the
vents in the tank is to be at least 125% of the effective area of the filling line, except that when overflows
are fitted, the area of the overflow is to be at least 125% of the effective area of the filling line and the
vents need not exceed the above minimum size.

Notwithstanding the above, the pump capacity and pressure head are to be considered in the sizing of vents
and overflows. When high capacity and/or high head pumps are used, calculations demonstrating the
adequacy of the vent and overflows are to be submitted.

9.7 Location
Vents for compartments required for subdivision (such as double bottom or wing spaces) are to be led
above the freeboard or bulkhead deck. In addition, vents for ballast tanks, fuel oil tanks, cargo tanks,
thermal oil tanks and those cofferdams adjacent to cargo oil tanks are to be led to the weather. Vents for

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 155
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

other tanks may terminate within the machinery space, provided that the open ends are situated to prevent
the possibility of overflowing on electric equipment, engines or heated surfaces.

For craft of 500 gross tons and above, vent pipes for fuel oil service tanks, fuel oil settling tanks and
lubricating oil tanks which directly serve the engines are to be located and arranged and/or suitably
protected from mechanical damage in order to minimize the possibility of being broken and allowing the
ingress of seawater splashes or rainwater into the above mentioned tanks.

9.9 Vent Outlets

All vent and overflow pipes on the open deck are to terminate by way of return bends.

9.9.1 Protection of Vent Outlets (1 July 2021)

9.9.1(a) Protection for Fuel Tank (1 July 2021)
Vent outlets from fuel oil tanks are to be fitted with corrosion-resistant flame screens having a
clear area through the mesh of not less than the required area of the vent pipe. Either a single
screen of corrosion-resistant wire of at least 12 by 12 meshes per linear cm (30 by 30 mesh per
linear inch), or two screens of at least 8 by 8 meshes per linear cm (20 by 20 mesh per linear inch)
spaced not less than 13 mm (0.5 inch) nor more than 38 mm (1.5 inch) apart are acceptable.

Note: Mesh count is defined as a number of openings in a linear cm (inch) counted from the center of any wire
to the center of a parallel wire.
9.9.1(b) Protection for Lubricating Oil Tanks (1 July 2021)
Vents for lubricating oil tanks directly serving propulsion and generator engines, where terminated
on weather deck are to be so located and arranged that in the event of a broken vent pipe, this will
not directly lead to the risk of ingress of sea water splashes or rain water.

9.9.1(c) Protection for Potable Water Tanks (1 July 2021)

Suitable corrosion resistant protective screens shall be fitted to the air vent pipe outlets serving
potable water tanks in order to prevent possible admission of foreign objects and/or insects.

9.9.2 Vent Closure

All vents terminating in the weather are to be fitted with return bends (gooseneck), or equivalent,
and the vent outlet is to be provided with an automatic means of closure type i.e., close
automatically upon submergence (e.g., ball float or equivalent), complying with 4-4-3/9.9.3.

9.9.3 Vent Outlet Closing Devices

9.9.3(a) General.
Where vent outlets required by 4-4-3/9.9.2 are to be fitted with automatic closing devices, they are
to comply with the following:

9.9.3(b) Design.
i) Vent outlet automatic closing devices are to be so designed that they will withstand both
ambient and working conditions, and be suitable for use at inclinations up to and
including ±40°.
ii) Vent outlet automatic closing devices are to be constructed to allow inspection of the
closure and the inside of the casing as well as changing the seals.
iii) Efficient ball or float seating arrangements are to be provided for the closures. Bars, cage
or other devices are to be provided to prevent the ball or float from contacting the inner
chamber in its normal state and made in such a way that the ball or float is not damaged
when subjected to water impact due to a tank being overfilled.
iv) Vent outlet automatic closing devices are to be self-draining.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 156
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

v) The clear area through a vent outlet closing device in the open position is to be at least
equal to the area of the inlet.
vi) An automatic closing device is to:

● Prevent the free entry of water into the tanks,

● Allow the passage of air or liquid to prevent excessive pressure or vacuum
developing in the tank.
vii) In the case of vent outlet closing devices of the float type, suitable guides are to be
provided to ensure unobstructed operation under all working conditions of heel and trim.
[see 4-4-3/9.9.3(b).i.]
viii) The maximum allowable tolerances for wall thickness of floats should not exceed ±10%
of thickness.
ix) (2017) The inner and outer chambers of an automatic air pipe head is to be of a minimum
thickness of 6 mm (0.24 inch). Where side covers are provided and their function is
integral to providing functions of the closing device as outlined in 4-4-3/9.9.3(b).vi, they
are to have a minimum wall thickness of 6 mm (0.24 inch). If the air pipe head can meet
the tightness test in 4-4-3/9.9.3(d).i without the side covers attached, then the side covers
are not considered to be integral to the closing device, in which case a wall less than 6
mm (0.24 inch) may be acceptable for side covers.
9.9.3(c) Materials.
i) Casings of vent outlet closing devices are to be of approved metallic materials adequately
protected against corrosion.
ii) For galvanized steel air pipe heads, the zinc coating is to be applied by the hot method
and the thickness is to be 70 to 100 micrometers (2.756 to 3.937 mil).
iii) For areas of the head susceptible to erosion (e.g., those parts directly subjected to ballast
water impact when the tank is being pressed up, for example the inner chamber area
above the air pipe, plus an overlap of 10° or more to either side) an additional harder
coating should be applied. This is to be an aluminum bearing epoxy, or other equivalent
coating, applied over the zinc.
iv) Closures and seats made of non-metallic materials are to be compatible with the media
intended to be carried in the tank and to seawater, and suitable for operating at ambient
temperatures between –25°C and 85°C (–13°F and 185°F).
9.9.3(d) Type Testing. (1 July 2022)
i) Testing of Vent Outlet Automatic Closing Devices. Each type and size of vent outlet
automatic closing device is to be surveyed and type tested at the manufacturer’s works or
other acceptable location.

The minimum test requirements for a vent outlet automatic closing device are to include
the determination of the flow characteristics of the vent outlet closing device, the
measurement of the pressure drop versus the rate of volume flow using water and with
any intended flame or insect screens in place and also tightness tests during immersion/
emerging in water, whereby the automatic closing device is to be subjected to a series of
tightness tests involving not less than two (2) immersion cycles under each of the
following conditions:

● The automatic closing device is to be submerged slightly below the water surface at a
velocity of approximately 4 m/min. (13.12 ft/min) and then returned to the original
position immediately. The quantity of leakage is to be recorded.
● The automatic closing device is to be submerged to a point slightly below the surface
of the water. The submerging velocity is to be approximately 8 m/min and the air

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 157
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

pipe vent head is to remain submerged for not less than 5 minutes. The quantity of
leakage is to be recorded.
● (2014) Each of the above tightness tests are to be carried out in the normal position as
well as at an inclination of 40 degrees under the strictest conditions for the device. In
cases where such strictest conditions are not clear, tests shall be carried out at an
inclination of 40 degrees with the device opening facing in three different directions:
upward, downward, sideways (left or right). See 4-4-3/Figures 1 to 4.

The maximum allowable leakage per cycle is not to exceed 2 ml/mm (1.312 × 10-2 gal/
inch) of nominal diameter of inlet pipe during any individual test.
ii) Reverse Flow Test. The air pipe head is to allow the passage of air to prevent excessive
vacuum developing in the tank.
a) Reverse flow test
i) A reverse flow test shall be performed. A vacuum pump or another
suitable device shall be connected to the opening of the air pipe leading
to the tank. The flow velocity shall be applied gradually at a constant
rate until the float gets sucked and blocks the flow. Each type and size of
vent outlet automatic closing device is to be surveyed and type tested at
the manufacturer’s works or other acceptable location; and
ii) The velocity at the point of blocking shall be recorded. 80% of the value
recorded will be stated in the certificate.
b) Alternative to the reverse flow test
i) For pipe heads of 400 mm nominal diameter and above, as an alternative
to the reverse flow test, a numerical simulation test based on
computational fluid dynamics (CFD), to be carried out in conjunction
with limited representative testing to establish the validity of the CFD
modelling and results, may be accepted;
ii) CFD predictions for air pipe heads can be validated against the available
actual reverse flow test results of same size and type of air pipe heads;
iii) The accuracy of the CFD modelling and the major assumptions used for
the calculation are to be documented;
iv) Mesh convergence studies are to be carried out and documented; and
v) The requirement as per the preceding a.ii) applies.
iii) Testing of Non-Metallic Floats. Impact and compression loading tests are to be carried out
on the floats before and after pre-conditioning as follows:
Test Temperature °C (°F): –25°C (–13°F) 20°C (68°F) 85°C (185°F)

Test Conditions

Dry Yes Yes Yes

After immersing in water Yes Yes Yes

After immersing in fuel oil NA Yes NA

Immersion in water and fuel oil is to be for at least 48 hours.

a) Impact Test. The test may be conducted on a pendulum type testing machine. The
floats are to be subjected to 5 impacts of 2.5 N-m (1.844 lbf-ft) each and are not
to suffer permanent deformation, cracking or surface deterioration at this impact
loading.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 158
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

Subsequently the floats are to be subjected to 5 impacts of 25 N-m (18.44 lbf-ft)

each. At this impact energy level some localized surface damage at the impact
point may occur. No permanent deformation or cracking of the floats is to appear.
b) Compression Loading Test. Compression tests are to be conducted with the floats
mounted on a supporting ring of a diameter and bearing area corresponding to
those of the float seating with which it is intended that float shall be used. For
ball type float, loads are to be applied through a concave cap of the same internal
radius as the test float and bearing on an area of the same diameter as the seating.
For a disc type float, loads are to be applied through a disc of equal diameter as
the float.

A load of 3430 N (350 kgf, 770 lbf) is to be applied over one minute and
maintained for 60 minutes. The deflection is to be measured at intervals of 10
minutes after attachment of the full load.

The record of deflection against time is to show no continuing increase in

deflection and, after release of the load, there is to be no permanent deflection.
iv) Testing of Metallic Floats. The above described impact tests are to be carried out at room
temperature and in the dry condition.

FIGURE 1
Example of Normal Position (2014)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 159
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

FIGURE 2
Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing Upward (2014)

FIGURE 3
Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing Downward (2014)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 160
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

FIGURE 4
Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing Sideways (2014)

11 Overflow Pipes

11.1 General Requirements

Overflow pipes discharging through the craft’s side are to be located as far above the deepest load line as
practicable and are to be provided with nonreturn valves located on the craft’s side. Where the overflow
does not extend above the freeboard deck, there is to be provided, in addition, an efficient and accessible
means for preventing water from passing inboard. Such means may consist of another nonreturn valve
located in an accessible position above the deepest load line.

Where it is impracticable to locate the inner valve in an accessible position, one nonreturn valve with
positive means for closing from an accessible position above the freeboard or bulkhead deck will be
acceptable, provided there are suitable arrangements to insure the valve not being closed by unauthorized
persons and provided a notice is posted in a conspicuous place at the operating station to the effect that the
valve is never to be closed, except as may be required in an emergency.

11.3 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid Tanks

Overflow pipes from combustible and flammable liquid tanks are to lead to an overflow tank or to a
storage tank with sufficient excess capacity (normally 5 minutes at transfer pump capacity) to
accommodate the overflow. An alarm device is to be provided to give warning when the liquid reaches a
predetermined level in the overflow tank. If a sight flow glass is also provided in the overflow pipe, then
such sight glasses are to be fitted only in vertical sections of overflow pipes and be in readily visible
positions.

For craft in which the overflow of fluid from tanks containing combustible and flammable liquids is
accomplished via overflow through the tanks vent, there is to spill containment provided at the outlet of the
vent with a minimum capacity of 1/2 barrel (0.079 m3, 21 gal.) for each vent.

11.5 Overflow Common Header

Where overflows from the tanks in more than one watertight subdivision are connected to a common
header below the freeboard or bulkhead deck, the arrangement is to be such as to prevent fore-and-aft
flooding of one watertight bulkhead subdivision from another in the event of damage.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 161
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

11.7 Fuel Oil Overflow (2018)

Where a common vent/overflow header is provided for fuel oil storage and day tanks, the vent/overflow
header need not be fitted with a separate vent pipe leading directly to atmosphere. The individual tanks and
the common vent/overflow header may be vented through the overflow tank vent line to atmosphere,
provided the common vent/overflow header arrangement has the following features/conditions:

i) Each vent/overflow line from the tank to the common header, the vent/overflow common headers
and the vent line from the overflow tank to the atmosphere are to be sized in order to provide a
venting area of at least 125% of the effective fill line area of the shore filling line or onboard
transfer line, whichever is greater. Fuel oil tank scantlings are to consider the height of the
overflow tank vent.
ii) Each storage tank is/are to be fitted with a high level alarm and a high-high level alarm. Both level
alarms are to provide visual and audible indication of the alarm condition at a manned station
(such as wheel house, engine control room or an equivalent station) from where filling/transfer
operation is controlled.
iii) The drop lines from the common headers to the overflow tank are to terminate above the
maximum liquid level in the overflow tank (i.e., above the alarm point where the liquid reaches a
predetermined level in the overflow tank to give the high level warning).
iv) The venting arrangement of the overflow tank is to permit the free passage of air from the
individual tanks, the vent/overflow headers and the overflow tank vent to atmosphere under all
conditions
v) The storage tanks are not to be filled by using a cascade filling arrangement (i.e., tanks are not to
be filled by overflowing from one to another).
vi) The fueling station(s) is/are to be manned at all times during bunkering and/or fuel oil transfer
operations.
vii) In lieu of items i) through vi); the overflow line common header may be vented to the atmosphere
in accordance with 4-4-3/9.5, in addition to the overflow tank being fitted with a dedicated vent
pipe.

13 Sounding

13.1 General
All tanks are to be fitted with a suitable means of determining the level of the liquid therein. Such means
may be sounding pipes, gauge glasses or other approved level indicating systems or devices.

All compartments, including cofferdams and pipe tunnels, which are not readily accessible are to be fitted
with sounding pipes if the compartment is adjacent to the sea or has pipes carrying liquids passing through
it.

13.3 Sounding Pipes

Sounding pipes are not to be less than 38 mm (1.5 in.) inside diameter. They are to be led as straight as
possible from the lowest part of the tank or compartment to the bulkhead deck or to a position which is
always accessible. If sounding pipes terminate below the freeboard deck, they are to be provided with
means for closing in the following manner:

13.3.1 Oil Tanks (2019)

Quick-acting, self-closing valves are required.

13.3.2 Other Tanks (2019)

A screw cap secured to the pipe with a chain or a valve is required.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 162
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

Provision is to be made to prevent damaging the craft’s plating by the striking of the sounding rod.
In general, sounding pipes are not to pass through bilge wells, but if this is not practicable, the
pipe is to be at least extra-heavy in the bilge well. Sounding pipes for combustible or flammable
fluids are not to terminate in accommodation spaces.

13.3.3 Small Spaces (1 July 2019)

Sounding arrangements may be exempted for small, normally inaccessible void compartments,
such as echo sounder and speed log compartments located within fore peak tank, as follows:

i) A means to drain the compartment is to be provided.

ii) Appropriate placards are to be posted to provide an adequate procedure for safely opening
the compartment.
iii) Where access is provided, a quick closure valve is to be fitted to indicate flooding .
iv) Flooding of the compartment shall be considered when assessing intact and damage
stability .
v) The volume of the compartment shall not exceed 10 m3 .
13.3.4 Ignition of Spillage (2019)
13.3.4(a) Fuel Oil Tanks.
Sounding pipes for fuel oil tanks are not to terminate in any space where the risk of ignition of
spillage may exist. In particular, they are not to terminate in machinery spaces or in close
proximity to internal combustion engines, generators, electric equipment or surfaces with
temperatures in excess of 220°C (428°F) in other spaces. Where it is impracticable to do
otherwise, sounding pipes from fuel oil tanks may terminate in machinery spaces, provided the
following are met:

i) The sounding pipes terminate in locations remote from ignition hazards or effective
precautions such as shielding are taken to prevent fuel oil spillage from coming into
contact with a source of ignition; and
ii) The terminations of sounding pipes are fitted with quick-acting, self-closing valves and
with a small diameter self-closing test cock or equivalent located below the valve,
provided for the purpose of ascertaining that fuel oil is not present in the sounding pipe
before the valve is opened. Provisions are to be made so as to prevent spillage of fuel oil
through the test cock from creating an ignition hazard; and
iii) An approved level gauge is provided. However, short sounding pipes may be used for oil
tanks other than double bottom tanks without the additional closed level gauge, provided
an overflow system is fitted, see 4-4-3/11. The oil level gauge may also be omitted for
craft less than 500 gross tons.
13.3.4(b) Lubricating Oil Tanks.
Sounding pipes from lubricating oil tanks may terminate in machinery spaces provided that the
following are met:

i) The sounding pipes are to terminate in locations remote from the ignition hazards, or
effective precautions, such as shielding, are taken to prevent oil spillage from coming into
contact with a source of ignition.
ii) The termination of sounding pipes is fitted with a quick-acting self-closing valve.
Alternatively, for lubricating oil tanks that cannot be filled by a pump, the sounding pipes
may be fitted with an appropriate means of closure such as a shut-off valve or a screw cap
attached by chain to the pipe.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 163
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

13.5 Gauge Glasses

Tanks may be fitted with gauge glasses, provided the gauge glasses are fitted with a valve at each end and
adequately protected from mechanical damage.

Gauge glasses for tanks containing flammable or combustible liquids are to be of the flat glass type having
approved self-closing valves at each end. For hydraulic oil tanks located in spaces other than category A
machinery spaces, cylindrical gauge glasses with approved self-closing valves at each end will be
acceptable, provided such spaces do not contain internal combustion engines, generators, major electrical
equipment or piping having a surface temperature in excess of 220°C (428°F).

Gauge glasses for tanks integral with the shell which are located below the deepest load waterline are to be
of the flat glass type and have approved self-closing valves at each end.

Isolation valves are to be fitted to allow for gauges removal without emptying the tank, see 4-4-1/9.17.3.

13.7 Level Indicating Systems and Devices (1 July 2019)

Where a level indicating device or system is provided for determining the level in a tank containing
flammable or combustible liquid, failure of the device/system is not to result in the release of the contents
of the tank through the device. Level switches, which penetrate below the tank top, may be used, provided
they are contained in a steel enclosure or other enclosures not being capable of being destroyed by fire.
However, level switches are not to be used in place of required level indicating devices. If an overflow is
not fitted, means are also to be provided to prevent overfilling of the tank in the event of malfunction of the
indicating device/system.

15 Oil Pollution Prevention Measures

15.1 General (2020)

Means are to be provided to process oil contaminated with water from machinery space bilges prior to
discharging it overboard. In general, the discharge criteria of MARPOL 73/78, ANNEX I, Regulation 15
are to be complied with.

15.3 Oily Water Filtering or Separating Equipment

An oily water filtering equipment capable of processing oily mixtures to produce an effluent with oil
content not exceeding 15 parts per millions (PPM) and complying with IMO Resolution MEPC.107(49) is
to be provided to allow oily waters from the bilges to be processed prior to discharging them overboard.

15.5 Sludge Tank

A tank or tanks of adequate capacity is to be provided to receive oily residues such as those resulting from
the oily water filtering.

The sludge tank is to be so designed as to facilitate cleaning.

15.7 Sludge Piping System

15.7.1 Sludge Pump
The sludge tank is to be provided with a designated pump of a suitable type, capacity and
discharge head for the discharge of the tank content to shore reception facilities.

15.7.2 Standard Discharge Connection (2020)

To enable the discharge of sludge to shore reception facilities, the sludge piping is to be provided
with a standard discharge connection in accordance with MARPOL Annex 1Reg. 13.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 164
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3

15.7.3 Sludge Piping (2018)

There are to be no discharge connections from the sludge piping system to the bilge system,
except that:

● The sludge tank discharge piping and bilge-water piping may be connected to a common
piping leading to the standard discharge connection referred to in 4-4-3/15.7.2 provided the
connection of both systems does not allow the transfer of sludge to the bilge system.
● The sludge tank may be fitted with drains, with manually operated self-closing valves and
arrangements for subsequent visual monitoring of the settled water, that lead to an oily bilge
water holding tank or bilge well, or an alternative arrangement, provided such arrangement
does not connect directly to the bilge discharge piping system.

Piping to and from sludge tanks is to have no direct connection overboard other than the standard
discharge connection referred to in in 4-4-3/15.7.2 TABLE 1.

15.8 Integrated Bilge Water treatment System (IBTS), If Installed (1 July 2019)
MARPOL MEPC.1/Circ.642 as amended by MEPC.1/Circ.676 and MEPC.1/Circ.760 issued revised
guidelines for handling oily wastes in machinery spaces of ships incorporating an Integrated Bilge Water
Treatment System (IBTS). Drains piped directly from clean drains to a clean drain tank may then be
pumped directly overboard through the discharge arrangement, independent from the system for oily bilge
water or oil. "Clean drains" mean internal drains such as those resulting from the leakage of and
condensate from equipment used for seawater, fresh water, steam, air conditioning, etc., which are NOT
normally contaminated by oil. Clean drains may include:

i) Main Engine Air Cooler Air

ii) Cooling fresh water or sea water
iii) Steam drains, boiler water drains
Note: any open drain in the engine room falls under the definition of oily bilge water from engine rooms. This
water must be disposed ashore or via an oily water separator. No arrangement is to allow any open water
drain to be led or connected to the clean water drain system, including the clean water drain tank.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 165
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 4
Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks

1 Fuel Oil Piping Systems

1.1 General Arrangement

1.1.1 Tanks
1.1.1(a) Structural Tanks. (1 July 2019)
As far as practicable, fuel oil tanks are to be part of the craft’s structure and located outside of
Category A machinery spaces. Where fuel oil tanks, other than double bottom tanks, are
necessarily located adjacent to or within a Category A machinery space, the arrangements are to
reduce the area of the tank boundary common with the machinery space of category A to not more
than two sides and to comply with the following:

i) Fuel tanks having boundaries common with machinery spaces of category A are not to
contain fuel oils having a flash point of 60°C (140°F) or less.
ii) At least one of their vertical sides is to be contiguous to the machinery space boundaries.
The arrangements in 4-4-4/1.1.1(a).iii FIGURE 1 are acceptable for structural tanks
provided the requirements of 4-4-4/11 are complied with. (The side shell is not being
included in contiguous boundary of the category A machinery space.)
iii) The bottom of the fuel oil tank is not to be so exposed that it will be in direct contact with
flame should there be a fire in a Category A machinery space. The fuel tank is to extend
to the double bottom. For craft below 500 GT where double bottoms are not fitted, the
bottom of the tank is to extend to the bottom shell plate. Alternatively, the bottom of the
fuel oil tank is to be fitted with a cofferdam. The cofferdam is to be fitted with suitable
drainage arrangements to prevent accumulation of oil in the event of oil leakage from the
tank.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 166
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

FIGURE 1
Acceptable Fuel Oil Tanks Arrangements Inside Category A
Machinery Spaces (2013)

1.1.1(b) Free Standing Tanks (2021)

Free standing tanks are completely self-supporting and do not form part of the ship's structure. In
general, the use of free standing fuel oil tanks is to be avoided. Where permitted, they are to be
fixed and kept to a minimum and their construction and installation are to be as follows:

The fuel oil tanks are to be placed in an oil tight spill tray of ample size (e.g., large enough to
cover leakage points such as manholes, drain valves, gauge glasses, etc.), which drains to a
suitable drain tank.

The fuel oil tanks are not to be located in areas where spillages or leakages on heated surfaces can
constitute a hazard. In particular, they are not to be located over boilers.

i) The fuel tanks are to be of approved metal construction.

ii) Atmospheric Tanks
a) For tanks over 1510 liters (400 gallons), the design head shall be not less than
hydrostatic load at the tank vent outlet or 4 feet above the tank top, whichever is
greater, and the design safety factor is to be four on the ultimate strength of the
material used.
b) The plate thickness is not to be less than 5 mm (0.2 in.) for the tanks with
capacity more than 570 liters (150 gallons). For the tanks with capacity 570 liters
(150 gallons) or less, the minimum allowable plate thickness may be reduced to 3
mm (0.12 in.).
c) The tanks are to be pressure tested to 1.5 times the design head, but no case less
than 0.35 bar (5 psi).
iii) Pressurized Tanks. Pressurized tanks are to be designed, constructed and tested in
accordance with a recognized Pressure Vessel Code or Standard.
iv) The tank design is to also consider the stresses due to external nozzle loads and dynamic
loads arising out of the ship motion. These stresses are to be within the allowable limits
specified under 4-4-4/1.1.1(b)ii) and 4-4-4/1.1.1(b)iii) above.
v) Special attention is to be given to the mounting, securing arrangement, and electrical
bonding of the tanks.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 167
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

1.1.2 Spillage
No fuel oil tank is to be situated where spillage or leakage therefrom can constitute a hazard by
falling on heated surfaces or electrical equipment. Precautions are to be taken to prevent any oil
that may escape under pressure during inspection or maintenance of any pump, filter or heater
from coming into contact with a source of ignition as defined in 4-1-1/13.17.

To prevent the ignition of fuel oil, all hot surfaces likely to reach a temperature above 220°C
(428°F) during service are to be insulated with non-combustible, and preferably non-oil-absorbent
materials. Such insulation materials, if not impervious to oil, are to be encased in oil-tight steel
sheathing or equivalent. The insulation assembly is to be well-installed and supported having
regard to its possible deterioration due to vibration.

1.1.3 Service and Settling Tanks (2020)

At least two fuel oil service tanks or two groups of fuel oil service tanks for each type of fuel used
onboard necessary for propulsion and vital systems, or equivalent arrangements, are to be
provided. Each service tank or, where separate groups of tanks are arranged for use, each group of
service tanks is to have a capacity of at least eight hours at the rating of the propulsion plant to
obtain one half of the craft’s maximum design speed or 15 knots, whichever is greater, and the
normal operating load at sea of the generator plant. The capacity of the service tanks will be
specially considered for craft with operational limitations.

A service tank is a fuel tank which contains only fuel of a quality ready for use, that is, fuel of a
grade and quality that meets the specification required by the equipment manufacturer and is fitted
with fuel oil piping arranged so that the tank can provide a readily available source of fuel oil to
the propulsion and generator engines. A service tank is to be declared as such and is not to be used
for any other purpose.

Use of a settling tank with or without purifiers or use of purifiers alone, and one service tank is not
acceptable as an equivalent arrangement to providing two service tanks.

Foe examples of acceptable arrangements, please refer to the latest revision of the IACS UR SC
123.

1.1.4 Craft Over 500 Gross Tons

Tanks containing fuel oil having a flash point above 60°C (140°F) are to be separated from
passenger, crew, and baggage compartments by an impervious and continuous boundary between
the tanks and the accommodation spaces and any welds in the boundary are to be full penetration
welds. In accommodation spaces, any access manholes into the tanks are to be arranged through
cofferdam spaces. Fuel oil is not to be carried forward of public spaces and crew accommodation.

1.3 Piping, Valves and Fittings

Fuel oil pipes, valves and fittings are to be of steel or other approved materials. See 4-4-2/5.

1.5 Oil Heating Arrangements

1.5.1 Oil Heaters
Where heaters are provided in fuel oil systems, they are to be fitted with a temperature control and
either a high temperature alarm or a low flow alarm, except where the maximum temperature of
the heating medium does not exceed 220°C (428°F).

Where electric heaters are fitted, they are to be arranged to de-energize automatically when the oil
level falls to a predetermined height to ensure that the heating elements are permanently
submerged during operation. In addition, a safety temperature switch with a manual reset
independent from the automatic control sensor is to be provided to cut off the electric power
supply in order to avoid a surface temperature of 220°C (428°F) or above.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 168
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

1.5.2 Tanks
Unless specially approved otherwise, fuel oil in storage tanks is not to be heated to temperatures
within 10°C (18°F) below flash point of the fuel oil.

Where heating arrangements are provided for settling and service tanks, the control and alarm
requirements of 4-4-4/1.5.1 are applicable.

1.5.3 Piping Arrangement

As far as practicable, all parts of the oil fuel system containing heated oil under pressure
exceeding 1.8 bar (1.8 kgf/cm2, 26 psi) are not to be placed in a concealed position such that
defects and leakage cannot readily be observed. The machinery spaces in way of each parts of the
oil fuel system are to be adequately illuminated.

1.7 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid Tanks

For overflow pipes from combustible and flammable liquid tanks, see 4-4-3/11

1.9 Fuel Oil Purifiers (2020)

As far as practicable, fuel oil purifiers for heated oil are to be placed in a separate room or rooms reserved
for the purifiers and their heaters. When fuel oil purifiers for heated oil are not located in a separate room,
special consideration will be given with regard to location and containment of possible leakage and
shielding.

3 Fuel Oil Transfer and Filling

3.1 General
Where fuel oil transfer arrangements are furnished, two transfer pumps are to be provided and one of them
is to be independent of the main engine. The fuel oil pumping arrangements are to be distinct from the
other pumping systems as far as practicable, and the means provided for preventing dangerous
interconnection in service are to be thoroughly effective. Where service fuel oil tanks are filled
automatically or by remote control, means are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.

3.3 Pipes in Oil Tanks

Oil pipes and other pipes, where passing through oil tanks, are to be of wrought iron or steel, except that
other materials may be considered where it is demonstrated that the material is suitable for the intended
service. All packing is to be of a composition not affected by oil.

3.5 Control Valves or Cocks

Valves or cocks controlling the various suctions are to be located close to the bulkhead where the suctions
enter the machinery spaces and, wherever practicable, directly over the gutterway in way of deep and
settling tanks. Pumps, strainers, etc., requiring occasional examination are to have drip pans.

3.7 Valves on Oil Tanks (2016)

Where pipe lines emanate from fuel oil tanks at such a level that they will be subjected to a static head of
oil from the tank, they are to be fitted with positive closing valves. The valves are to be secured at the tank.
A short length of Extra Strong pipe connecting the valve to the tank is also acceptable. Where the fuel oil
piping passes through adjacent tanks, the valve required above may be located where the pipe run exits the
adjacent tank(s), provided the piping in the adjacent tanks is extra-heavy and has all welded connections.
However, if the adjacent tank is a fuel oil tank, the pipe run within the fuel oil tank is to be at least standard
thickness.

If the valves are installed on the outside of the tank, they are not to be of cast iron. The use of nodular iron,
also known as ductile iron or spheroidal-graphite iron, may be used, provided the material has an
elongation not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.). Arrangements are to be provided for closing them at the

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 169
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

valve and for tanks having a capacity of 500 liters (132 US gal.) or greater, from a readily accessible and
safe location outside of the compartment in which the valve is located.

If the positive closing valve required above is situated in a shaft tunnel or pipe tunnel or similar space,
arrangements for closing may be effected by means of an additional valve on the pipe or pipes outside of
the tunnel or similar space. If such an additional valve is fitted in the machinery space, it is to be operated
from a position outside of this space.

If the valves are located inside of the tank, they may be of cast iron and arranged for remote control only,
but additional valves for local control are to be located in the machinery space.

Where independent filling lines are fitted, they are to enter at or near the top of the tank, but if this is
impracticable, they are to be fitted with non-return valves at the tank.

The valves required above may be remotely operated by reach rods or by electric, hydraulic or pneumatic
means. The source of power to operate these valves is to be located outside of the space in which the
valves are located. The positioning of the valve by either local or remote means is not to interfere with the
ability of the other means to close the valve. This remote means of closure is to override all other means of
valve control. The use of an electric, hydraulic or pneumatic system is not acceptable to directly keep the
valve in the open position.

Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used in the construction of the valves or the
closure mechanism, unless adequately protected to ensure effective closure facility in the event of fire. If
electric cables are utilized, they are to be fire-resistant, meeting the requirements of IEC 60331. See
4-6-4/13.1.3. Hydraulic systems are to be in accordance with 4-4-6/1 for both Class I and II piping
systems. For a pneumatic system, the air supply may be from a source from within the space, provided a
separate receiver complying with the following is located outside of the space:

i) Sufficient capacity to close all connected valves twice.

ii) Fitted with low air pressure alarm.
iii) Air supply line is fitted with a non-return valve adjacent to the receiver.

For cargo craft under 500 gross tons and constructed of aluminum and FRP, pipes, valves and fittings
which are required to be “not readily rendered ineffective by heat” may be accepted if the solidus melting
point of the material is greater than or equal to that of the material forming the bottom shell plating.

3.9 Remote Shutdown of Pumps

Machinery driving fuel oil transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps are to be fitted
with remote shutdowns complying with 4-5-1/5.3.

3.11 Oil Drain Tanks

Drain tanks, where fitted, for waste oil, fuel oil overflows, drains, all oil drip pans, fuel injection piping,
etc., are to have air and sounding pipes. Non-return valves are to be fitted in drain lines entering the drain
tanks, except where backflow would not present a hazard. Suitable means are to be provided for pumping
out these drain tanks.

Oil tanks not forming a part of the craft’s structure, where permitted by 4-4-4/1.1.1, are to have suitable
drip pans with adequate means of drainage, in accordance with 4-4-1/9.23.

5 Fuel Oil Service and Injection Systems

Fuel oil service and injection systems for internal-combustion engines are to be in accordance with
4-2-1/3, 4-2-1/5 and 4-2-1/7.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 170
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

7 Low Flash Point Fuels

7.1 General
Fuel oils with a flash point of 60°C (140°F) closed-cup or below may be accepted for the following:

7.1.1
Craft classed for restrictive service within areas having a climate ensuring that ambient
temperatures of spaces where such fuel oil is stored will not rise within 10°C (18°F) below its
flash point may use fuel oil with flash point of 60°C (140°F) or below, but not less than 43°C
(110°F).

7.1.2
For emergency generators, fuel oil with a flash point of not less than 43°C (110°F) may be used.
See 4-6-2/5.5.2.

7.1.3
For gas turbines, subject to compliance with the requirements of Section 4-2-2.

Tanks containing low-flash point fuel oil are to be separated from passenger, crew, and baggage
compartments by vapor-proof enclosures or cofferdams which are suitably ventilated and drained. Low-
flash point fuel oil is not to be carried forward of public spaces and crew accommodation.

7.3 Fuel Heating

For oil heating arrangements, see 4-4-4/1.5.

7.5 Fuel Oil Tank Vents

Vent pipes are to extend at least 2.4 m (8 ft) above the weather deck or other effective arrangements which
have been approved are to be provided.

9 Lubricating Oil Systems

9.1 General (1 July 2018)

The lubricating systems are to be so arranged that they will function satisfactorily under the conditions
specified in 4-1-1/17. Consideration is to be given to all acceptable fill levels in the lube oil sumps and
tanks for compliance with this requirement.

The lubricating-oil piping is to be entirely separated from other piping systems. In addition, the
requirements of 4-4-4/1.1.2, 4-4-4/1.3 and 4-4-4/1.5 are applicable.

The requirements in 4-4-4/3.7 are also applicable for lubricating-oil tanks. However, arrangements for
remotely closing the valve from a position outside of the compartment need not be provided if inadvertent
valve closure could result in damage to the running machinery due to lack of lubricating oil. Where the
machinery is arranged for automatic shutdown upon loss of lubricating oil, the valve required by 4-4-4/3.7
is to be provided with means to close it from a readily accessible and safe location outside of the
compartment in which the valve is located.

9.3 Sight Flow Glasses

Sight flow glasses may be used in lubricating systems, provided they are fire-resistant.

9.5 Internal Combustion Engines

For internal combustion engines, see also 4-2-1/9.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 171
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

9.7 Reduction Gears

For reduction gears, see also 4-2-1/9.11.

9.9 Electrical Machinery

For electrical machinery, see also 4-6-3/3.3, 4-6-3/3.5 and 4-6-4/3.15.

9.11 Hose Reels

Where hose reels are used for filling the engine or reduction gear sumps with oil, a self-closing valve is to
be provided at the end of the filling hose to prevent spillage. Suitable arrangements are to be provided to
properly drain and store the hose and reel when not in use. Hoses are to be approved for oil service and in
accordance with the requirements for burst pressure, fire resistance, reinforcement and end fittings in
4-4-1/9.19.

11 Additional Measures for Oil Pollution Prevention

11.1 General
11.1.1 Application
The provisions of 4-4-4/11 provide the arrangement of fuel oil tanks for compliance with
MARPOL 73/78, as amended. They are to be applied in addition to the requirements of 4-4-4/1
and 4-4-4/3 and are applicable to all types of craft classed with ABS.

11.1.2 Submission of Plans

Plans showing compliance with the applicable requirements in 4-4-4/11.3 are to be submitted for
review.

11.3 Tank Protection Requirements

11.3.1 General (2014)
The requirements in this section apply to craft having an aggregate fuel oil capacity of 600 m3
(21,190 ft 3) and above. However, the requirements need not be applied to individual fuel oil tanks
with a capacity not greater than 30 m3 (1060 ft3), provided that the aggregate capacity of such
excluded tanks is not greater than 600 m3 (21,190 ft3). Further, individual fuel oil tanks are not to
have capacity greater than 2,500 m3 (88,290 ft3).

Fuel oil tanks of any volume are not to be used for ballast water.

Fuel oil tank means a tank in which fuel oil is carried, but excludes those tanks which would not
contain fuel oil in normal operation, such as overflow tanks. Fuel oil capacity means the volume
of a tank in cubic meters (cubic feet) at 98% tank filling.

Fuel oil means any oil used as fuel oil connection with the propulsion and auxiliary machinery of
the craft in which such oil is carried.

11.3.2 Protective Location of Tanks

The protective locations for the tanks specified in 4-4-4/11.3.1 above are to be as follows:

11.3.2(a) Deterministic Approach.

All applicable tanks are to be located away from the craft's bottom or side shell plating for a
distance as specified in i), ii) or iii). Small suction wells may extend below fuel oil tanks bottoms,
if they are as small as possible and the distance between the craft’s bottom plate and the suction
well bottom is not reduced by more than half of the distance required by i).

i) For craft having an aggregate oil fuel capacity of 600 m3 (21,190 ft 3) and above, all tanks
are to be arranged above craft’s molded line of bottom shell plating at least of the distance
ℎ as specified below:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 172
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4

ℎ = B/20 m or

ℎ = 2 . 0 m (6.6 ft), whichever is smaller

where B is the breadth of the craft, as defined in 3-1-1/5, in m (ft).

ℎ is in no case to be less than 0.76 m (2.5 ft).

ii) For craft having an aggregate oil fuel capacity greater than or equal to 600 m3 (21190 ft3)
but less than 5000 m3 (176570 ft3), tanks are to be arranged inboard of the molded line of
side plating not less than the distance w as specified below:

w = 0 . 4 + 2 . 4C/20000 m

w = 1 . 31 + 7 . 87C/706290 ft

where

C = craft’s total volume of oil fuel in m3 (ft3) at 98% tank filling;

w = at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft)

for individual tanks smaller than 500 m3 (17,657 ft3) w is to be at least 0.76 m (2.5 ft)

iii) For craft having an aggregate oil fuel capacity of 5000 m3 (176570 ft3) and above, tanks
are to be arranged inboard of the molded line of side plating not less than the distance w
as specified below:

w = 0 . 5 + C/20000 m

w = 1 . 64 + C/706290 ft or

w = 2.0 m

w = 6 . 6 ft, whichever is smaller

where C is the craft’s total volume of oil fuel in m3 (ft3) at 98% tank filling.

The minimum value of w = 1 . 0 m (3.3 ft).

11.3.2(b) Probabilistic Approach.
As an alternative to the deterministic approach of 4-4-4/11.3.2(a), arrangements complying with
the accidental oil fuel outflow performance standard of Regulation 12A, Annex I, MARPOL
73/78, as amended, would be acceptable.

11.5 Class Notation – POT(2018)

In addition to the requirements for fuel oil tank protection as specified in 4-4-4/11.3.1 utilizing the
deterministic approach of 4-4-4/11.3.2(a), where lubricating oil tanks with a capacity greater than 30 m3
(1060 ft3) (other than tanks for lubricating oil under main engines) are also arranged in the same manner as
required by the deterministic approach [4-4-4/11.3.2(a)] for fuel oil tanks, craft are to be eligible for the
optional Class notation, POT – Protection of Fuel and Lubricating Oil Tanks. Further, the following
exemptions are applicable to lubrication oil tanks:

i) In application of equation in 4-4-4/11.3.2(a).ii or 4-4-4/11.3.2(a).iii, total volume of lubricating oil

tanks need not be accounted for C (craft’s total volume of oil fuel in m3 (ft3) at 98% tank filling).
ii) Tanks used as main engine lubricating oil drain tanks need not be located in a protected location
away from the craft’s side or bottom plates.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 173
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 5
Internal Combustion Engine Systems

1 Fuel Oil System

Fuel oil systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/3.

3 Lubricating Oil System

Lubricating oil systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/9.

5 Cooling Water System

Cooling water systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/11.

7 Exhaust Piping
Exhaust piping for internal combustion engines is to comply with 4-2-1/15.

9 Starting-air Systems
Starting-air systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/13.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 174
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 6
Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems

1 Hydraulic Systems

1.1 General
The arrangements for Group I hydraulic piping systems are to be in accordance with the requirements of
this section, except that hydraulic systems which form part of a unit which is independently manufactured
and assembled and which does not form part of the craft’s piping system (such as a crane) are not covered
by this section.

Plans clearly showing the arrangements and details are to be submitted for review.

Hydraulic pumps, actuators, motors and accessories are to be suitable for the intended duty, compatible
with the working fluid and are to be designed to operate safely at fullpower conditions. In general, the
hydraulic fluid is to be non-flammable or have a flash point above 157°C (315°F).

The requirements for fuel oil tanks contained in 4-4-4/1.1.2 and 4-4-4/1.3 are applicable to tanks
containing hydraulic fluid. See also 4-3-3/7 and 4-3-2/5.11.3.

1.3 Valves
1.3.1 General
In general, valves are to comply with the requirements of 4-4-2/9 and 4-4-2/11.

1.3.2 Relief Values

Relief valves are to be provided for the protection of the hydraulic system. Each relief valve is to
be capable of relieving not less than full pump flow with a maximum pressure rise of not more
than 10% of the relief valve setting.

1.5 Piping
Piping is to meet the requirements of 4-4-1/5 and 4-4-2/5, except that mill tests need not be witnessed by
the Surveyor. In such cases, mill certificates are to be provided which verify the chemical and mechanical
properties for the pipe.

1.7 Pipe Fittings

Fittings and flanges are to meet the requirements of 4-4-2/9, 4-4-2/13 and 4-4-2/17, except as follows:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 175
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems 4-4-6

1.7.1 Split Flanges

Split flanges are not to be used in steering gear systems, certified thruster systems, nor in systems
which are vital to the propulsion or safety of the craft. Split flanges may be considered for use in
other systems. Where split flanges are permitted, they are not to be used to join sections of piping,
but may be used for connections to machinery, provided the materials and construction are
suitable for the system design pressure.

1.7.2 Straight-Thread “O”-Ring Connection

Straight-thread “O”-ring type connections may be used for connections to equipment such as
pumps, valves, cylinders, accumulators, gauges and hoses. Such connections are not to be used for
joining sections of pipe.

1.7.3 Tapered Threaded Connection

Tapered threaded connections up to and including 89 mm O.D. (3 in. NPS) may be used without
limitation for connections to equipment such as pumps, valves, cylinders, accumulators, gauges
and hoses. Tapered threaded connections are not to be used in steering gear systems, controllable
pitch propeller systems, and other systems associated with propulsion or propulsion control,
except where permitted by 4-4-2/13.1. Such connections are not to be used for joining sections of
pipe, except where permitted by 4-4-2/13.1.

1.9 Accumulators and Fluid Power Cylinders (2018)

Accumulators are to meet the requirements of 4-6-7/3 of the Marine Vessel Rules. Each accumulator which
may be isolated is to be protected by suitable relief valves. Where a gas charging system is used, a relief
valve is to be provided on the gas side of the accumulator.

Fluid Power Cylinders are to meet the requirements of 4-4-6/3.

1.11 Design Pressure

The pressure used for determining the strength and design of piping and components is not to be less than
the relief valve setting.

1.13 Segregation of High Pressure Hydraulic Units

Hydraulic units with working pressures above 15.5 bar (15.8 kgf/cm2, 225 psi) installed within a
machinery space are to be placed in separate room or rooms or shielded as necessary to prevent any oil or
oil mist that may escape under pressure from coming into contact with surfaces with temperatures in
excess of 220°C (428°F), electrical equipment or other sources of ignition. For the purpose of this
requirement, a hydraulic unit includes the power pack and all components of the hydraulic piping system.

3 Fluid Power Cylinders

3.1 General
Fluid power cylinders subject to pressures or temperatures greater than those indicated below are to be
designed, constructed and tested in accordance with a recognized standard for fluid power cylinders.

● Hydraulic fluid – flammable: 7 bar (7.1 kgf/cm2, 101.5 psi) or 60°C (140°F)
● Hydraulic fluid – non-flammable: 16 bar (16.3 kgf/cm2, 232 psi) or 200°C (392°F)
● Air: 16 bar (16.3 kgf/cm2, 232 psi) or 200°C (392°F)

Acceptance will be based on the manufacturer’s certification of compliance and on verification of

permanent identification on each cylinder bearing the manufacturer's name or trademark, standard of
compliance and maximum allowable working pressure and temperature.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 176
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems 4-4-6

3.3 Non-compliance with a Recognized Standard

Cylinders subject to pressures or temperatures higher than those indicated above which are not constructed
to a recognized standard may be accepted based on the following:

i) Regardless of diameter, the design of the cylinder is to be shown to comply with one of the
following:

● A recognized pressure vessel code,

● Section 4-4-1 of the Marine Vessel Rules. For instance, the cylinder is to have a wall thickness
not less than that given by equation 2 of 4-4-1-A1/3.1, and the cylinder ends are to meet the
requirements of flat heads in 4-4-1-A1/5.7, or
● Verification through burst tests. Steel cylinders (other than cast steel) are to withstand not less
than 4 times the maximum allowable working pressure, while cast steel, cast iron and nodular
iron cylinders are to withstand not less than 5 times the maximum allowable working
pressure.

Documentation in this regard is to be submitted for review.

ii) Each individual unit is to be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the maximum allowable working
pressure (2 times, for cast iron and nodular iron cylinders) by the manufacturer. A test certificate is
to be submitted.
iii) Each cylinder is to be affixed with a permanent nameplate or marking bearing the manufacturer’s
name or trademark and the maximum allowable working pressure and temperature.

3.5 Materials
i) The materials of the cylinders are to comply with the requirements of the standard or code to
which they are designed and constructed. Where the design is verified though burst tests, the
materials of the cylinder are to comply with 4-4-1/3 of the Marine Vessel Rules or other acceptable
standards.
ii) Ordinary cast iron having an elongation of less than 12% is not to be used for cylinders expected
to be subjected to shock loading.
iii) Copies of certified mill test reports are to be made available to the Surveyor upon request.

3.7 Rudder Actuators

Rudder actuators are to be in accordance with the requirements of 4-3-3/5.11.

3.9 Cylinders below Pressures or Temperatures Indicated in 4-4-6/3.1

Cylinders subject to pressures and temperatures at or below those indicated in 4-4-6/3.1 may be used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s rating and verification of suitable for the intended service.

3.11 Exemptions (2013)

Fluid power cylinders that do not form part of the craft’s piping systems, machinery or equipment covered
in Part 4 of these Rules are exempt from the requirements of 4-4-6/3. However, those fluid power cylinders
which are integrated into piping systems associated with optional classification notations are to comply
with the requirements of 4-4-6/3 and the applicable requirements specified in the pertinent ABS Rules and
Guides.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 177
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems 4-4-6

5 Pneumatic Systems

5.1 Application
Requirements of 4-4-6/5 apply to shipboard pneumatic systems for control and actuation services.
Requirements for starting air systems are in 4-2-1/13. Pneumatic systems fitted in self-contained
equipment not associated with propulsion and maneuvering of the craft and completely assembled by the
equipment manufacturer need not comply with this subsection. Such pneumatic systems, however, are to
comply with the accepted practice of the industry

5.3 Pneumatic System Components

5.3.1 Air Reservoirs
The design and construction of all air receivers are to be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Part 4, Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

5.3.2 Pipe Fittings and Joints

The piping system and its components are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Part 4, Chapter 4 of these Rules.

5.5 Pneumatic System Requirements

5.5.1 Pneumatic Air Source
Compressed air for general pneumatic control and actuation services may be drawn from engine
starting air reservoirs. In which case, the aggregate capacity of the starting air reservoirs is to be
sufficient for continued operation of these services after the air necessary for the required number
of engine starts (as specified in 4-2-1/13.3.1) has been used.

For propulsion remote control purposes, pneumatic air is to be available from at least two air
compressors. The starting air system, where consisting of two air compressors, may be used for
this purpose. The required air pressure is to be automatically maintained. Pneumatic air supplies to
safety and control systems may be derived from the same source but are to be by means of
separate lines

5.5.2 Air Quality

5.5.2(a) General. Provisions are to be made to minimize the entry of oil or water into the
compressed air system. Suitable separation and drainage arrangements are to be provided before
the air enters the reservoirs.

5.5.2(b) Safety and Control Air Systems. For requirements regarding the quality of the air supplied
to safety and control air systems, see 4-7-1/11.7.

5.5.3 Overpressure Protection

Means are to be provided to prevent overpressure in any part of the pneumatic system. This
includes the water jackets or casings of the air compressors and coolers which may be subjected to
dangerous over-pressure due to leakage into them from the air pressure parts.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 178
 PART 4
CHAPTER 4
Pumps and Piping Systems

SECTION 7
Other Piping Systems and Tanks

1 Fixed Oxygen-Acetylene Installations

1.1 Application
Provisions of 4-4-7/1.3 apply to fixed oxygen-acetylene installations that have two or more cylinders of
oxygen and acetylene, respectively. Spare cylinders of gases need not be counted for this purpose.
Provisions of 4-4-7/1.5 and 4-4-7/1.7, as applicable, are to be complied with for fixed installations
regardless of the number of cylinders.

1.3 Gas Storage

1.3.1 Storage of Gas Cylinders
1.3.1(a) Storage room.
The gas cylinders are to be stored in rooms dedicated for this purpose only. A separate room is to
be provided for each gas. The rooms are to be on or above the upper-most continuous deck and are
to be constructed of steel. Access to the rooms is to be from the open deck and the door is to open
outwards. The boundaries between the rooms and other enclosed spaces are to be gastight.
Suitable drainage of the storage room is to be provided.

1.3.1(b) Open area.

Where no storage room is provided, the gas cylinders may be placed in an open storage area. In
such cases, they are to be provided with weather protection (particularly from heavy seas and heat)
and effectively protected from mechanical damage. Suitable drainage of the open storage area is to
be provided.

1.3.1(c) Piping passing through storage room or area.

Piping systems containing flammable fluids are not to run through the storage room or open
storage area.

1.3.2 Ventilation of Storage Room (2018)

Acetylene cylinder storage rooms are to be fitted with ventilation systems capable of providing at
least six air changes per hour based on the gross volume of the room. The ventilation system of
each gas cylinder storage room is to be independent of ventilation systems of all other spaces. The
space within 3 m (10 ft) from the power ventilation exhaust, or 1 m (3 ft) from the natural
ventilation exhaust is to be considered a hazardous area. The fan is to be of a non-sparking

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 179
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks 4-4-7

construction. See 4-6-3/9.7. Small storage spaces provided with sufficiently large openings for
natural ventilation need not be fitted with mechanical ventilation.

1.3.3 Electrical Installation in Storage Room (2020)

Electrical equipment installed within the acetylene storage room, including the ventilation fan
motor, is to be of a certified safe type. Electrical equipment installed within the storage room may
be any of the types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be ISO/IEC 80079-20-1 group IIC class T2.

In explosive gas atmospheres containing acetylene, equipment protection by flameproof

(explosion proof) enclosures “Ex d” for external mounting, where constructed of copper or copper
alloys is to be:

i) Coated with tin, nickel, or other coating; or

ii) Alternatively the maximum copper content of the alloy is to be limited to 60%.

Flameproof entry devices are not considered an enclosure surface requiring coating or copper
content restriction.

1.5 Piping System Components

1.5.1 Pipe and Fittings
1.5.1(a) General.
In general, all oxygen and acetylene pipes, pipe fittings, pipe joints and valves are to be in
accordance with the provisions of Section 4-4-2 for Group I piping systems, except as modified
below. Further, only high pressure oxygen and acetylene piping is to be certified as Group I
piping, see 4-4-1/5.1 for the materials testing.

1.5.1(b) Piping Materials.

Materials for acetylene on the high-pressure side between the cylinders and the regulator are to be
steel. Copper or copper alloys containing more than 65% copper are not to be used in acetylene
piping (high or low pressure). Materials for oxygen on the high-pressure side are to be steel or
copper. All pipes, both high- and low-pressure sides, are to be seamless.

1.5.1(c) Design Pressure.

Pipes, pipe fittings and valves on the oxygen high-pressure side are to be designed for not less
than 207 bar (211 kgf/cm2, 3000 psi). Pipes used on the low-pressure side are to be at least of
standard wall thickness.

1.5.1(d) Pipe joints.

All pipe joints outside of the storage room or open storage area are to be welded.

1.5.1(e) Flexible Hoses.

Flexible hoses used to connect oxygen or acetylene gas cylinders to a fixed piping system or
manifold are to comply with an acceptable standard and be suitable for the intended pressure and
service. Further, the internal surface of a hose used to connect an acetylene tank is to be of a
material that is resistant to acetone and dimethylformamide decomposition*.

Where a flexible hose is connected from an oxygen cylinder to the piping system or manifold
directly (i.e., no intervening pressure regulator), the internal liner of the oxygen hose is to be of a
material that has an autoignition temperature of not less than 400°C (752°F) in oxygen*.

Note: *Criteria based on ISO 14113:1997 Gas welding equipment – rubber and plastic hoses assembled for
compressed or liquefied gases up to a maximum design pressure of 450 bar.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 180
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks 4-4-7

1.5.2 Pressure Relief Devices

Pressure relief devices are to be provided in the gas piping if the maximum design pressure of the
piping system can be exceeded. These devices are to be set to discharge at not more than the
maximum design pressure of the piping system to a location in the weather, remote from sources
of vapor ignition or openings to spaces or tanks. The area within 3 m (10 ft) of the pressure relief
device discharge outlet is to be regarded as a hazardous area. The pressure relief devices may be
either a relief valve or a rupture disc.

1.5.3 System Arrangements

Where two or more gas cylinders are connected to a manifold, high pressure piping between each
gas cylinder and the manifold is to be fitted with a non-return valve. The piping is not to run
through unventilated spaces or accommodation spaces. Outlet stations are to be fitted with shut-off
valves. Outlet stations are to be provided with suitable protective devices to prevent back flow of
gas and the passage of flame into the supply lines.

1.5.4 Gas Cylinders (2018)

Gas cylinders are to be designed, constructed and certified in accordance with the provisions of
4-4-1/1.11.4 of the Marine Vessel Rules. Each cylinder is to be fitted with a suitable pressure relief
device such as a fusible plug or a rupture disc.

The area within 3 m (10 ft) of the pressure relief device discharge outlet from an acetylene gas
cylinder is to be regarded as a hazardous area.

1.7 Testing
Piping on the oxygen high-pressure side is to be tested before installation to at least 207 bar (211 kgf/cm2,
3000 psi) and the piping on the acetylene high-pressure side is to be tested in accordance with Section
4-4-2.

The entire system is to be leak-tested with nitrogen or a suitable inert gas after installation. Care is to be
taken to cleanse the piping with suitable medium to remove oil, grease and dirt and to blow-through with
oil-free nitrogen or other suitable medium before putting the system in service. The system is to be
operationally tested in the presence of the Surveyor under working conditions after installation.

3 Fuel Storage and Refueling Systems for Helicopter Facilities

3.1 Fuels with Flash Point Above 60°C (140°F)

When fixed helicopter fuel storage and pumping systems are provided and the flash point of the fuel is
above 60°C (140°F), closed cup test, the installation is to comply with 4-4-4/1, 4-4-4/3 and 4-4-7/3.3.5.

3.3 Fuels with Flash Point at or Below 60°C (140°F) – Installations on an Open Deck
3.3.1 General
The designated fuel storage and refueling areas are to be suitably isolated from areas which
contain a source of vapor ignition, escape routes and embarkation stations, and are not to be
located on landing areas. The storage and refueling areas are to be permanently marked as an area
where smoking and open flames are not permitted.

3.3.2 Tanks (2021)

Independendt fixed fuel storage tanks are to be of approved metal construction and meet
4-4-4/1.1.1(b)ii) through v), as applicable. Mounting, securing arrangements and electrical
bonding of the storage tank and refueling system are to be approved.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 181
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks 4-4-7

3.3.3 Vents and Sounding

Fuel storage tank venting and sounding arrangements are to comply with 4-4-3/9.5, 4-4-3/9.7,
4-4-4/7.5 and 4-4-3/13.

3.3.4 Tank Valves

Fuel storage tank outlet valves are to be provided with a means of remote closure. Means are also
to be provided for remote shutdown of the refueling pumps.

3.3.5 Spill Containment (2015)

To contain spillage and retain fire extinguishing agents, a coaming of at least 150 mm (6 in.) in
height is to be provided. The coaming is to surround the fuel storage area, which consists of the
fuel tank, associated piping and any pumping unit adjacent to the storage tank. Where the
pumping unit or any other unit such as dispenser/coalescer unit is remote from the tank, a separate
coaming is to be provided around each unit.

Drainage is to be provided for the area enclosed by the coaming, complying with the following:

i) The area within the coaming is to be sloped toward the drain line.
ii) Drainage from the area within the coaming is to be led through a valve designed for
selective output (e.g., 3-way valve) either to a holding tank complying with 4-4-7/3.3.2
and 4-4-7/3.3.3 above or directly overboard. No other valves may be fitted in the drain
line.
iii) The cross sectional area of the drain line from the fuel tank coaming is to be at least twice
that of the fuel storage tank outlet connection.

Fuel tank coamings not provided with drainage arrangements in accordance with the above are to
be sized to contain the full volume of the fuel storage tank plus 150 mm (6 in.) of foam.

3.3.6 Electrical Equipment (2020)

All electrical equipment installed within 3 meters (10 ft) of either the tank vent outlet or the
pumping/refueling equipment is to be of a certified safe type. Electrical equipment installed may
be any of the types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be ISO/IEC 80079-20-1 group IIA class T3.

3.5 Fuels with Flash Points at or Below 60°C (140°F) – Installation within Enclosed
Spaces
3.5.1 Independent Tanks
Fuel storage tanks and their venting and sounding arrangements are to comply with 4-4-7/3.3.2
and 4-4-7/3.3.3. The valving arrangements on the tanks are to comply with 4-4-4/3.7.

3.5.2 Integral Tanks

The venting and sounding arrangements for integral tanks are to comply with 4-4-7/3.3.3.
Overflow and valving arrangements are to comply with 4-4-3/11 and 4-4-4/3.7, respectively.
Cofferdams meeting the requirements of 5C-2-1/5.3 of the Marine Vessel Rules are to be provided
to separate fuel tanks from the spaces mentioned therein.

3.5.3 Access Arrangements

The access to the fuel storage and refueling compartment is to be from the open deck by means of
a trunk, if necessary. The compartment is to be bounded by gas tight bulkheads/decks and there is
to be no direct access from any other compartment to the fuel storage and refueling compartment
or access trunk.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 182
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks 4-4-7

3.5.4 Electrical Equipment (2020)

Electrical equipment installed in the refueling pump room and the space in which an independent
helicopter fuel tank storage is located is to be of a certified safe type. All electrical equipment
installed within three (3) meters (10 ft) of the tank vent outlet is to be of a certified safe type.
Electrical equipment installed may be any of the types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be
ISO/IEC 80079-20-1 group IIA class T3.

3.5.5 Pumps
Fuel pumps for helicopter refueling are to comply with 4-4-7/1 and are to be provided with remote
shut-down.

3.5.6 Piping
Helicopter refueling piping systems are to comply with 4-4-7/3.1.

3.5.7 Bilge/Drainage System

Provision is to be made for drainage of the refueling pump room and cofferdams. A separate bilge
pump, ejector or a bilge suction from a refueling pump may be provided for this purpose. The
arrangements are to be in accordance with 4-4-7/5.1.

3.5.8 Ventilation
Systems for the refueling pump room and the space in which an independent helicopter fuel tank
is located are comply with the below

3.5.8(a) System and Arrangement.

Refueling pump rooms are to have a mechanical extraction ventilating system and ducting, in
accordance with 4-4-7/3.5.8(a).i, 4-4-7/3.5.8(a).ii, 4-4-7/3.5.8(a).iii, and 4-4-7/3.5.8(a).iv below.

i) Lower Intake. Lower (main) intakes are to be located at the lowest floor level. The
number of air changes through the main intake with the damper in item ii) closed is to be
at least twenty changes per hour based on the gross volume of the pump room.
ii) Emergency Intake. An emergency intake is to be provided at approximately 2 m (6.5 ft)
above the lowest floor with damper capable of being opened or closed from the exposed
main deck and lowest floor level so that it can be used when the lower intakes are not
available. The air changes in that condition is to be at least fifteen changes per hour.
iii) Dampers. Where the ratio of areas of the upper emergency intake and lower main intakes
is such that the required number of respective air changes in items i) and ii) above can be
obtained, the dampers may not be required.
iv) Floor Plate. Floors are to be open grating type to allow the free flow of air. See
5C-1-1/5.25 and 5C-2-1/5.23 of the Marine Vessel Rules.
3.5.8(b) Fan Motors and Fans.
Fan motors are to be located outside of the pump room and outside of the ventilation ducts. Fans
are to be of nonsparking construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7. Provision is to be made for
immediate shutdown of the fan motors upon release of the fire extinguishing medium.

5 Liquefied Petroleum Gases

5.1 General
Liquefied petroleum gas may be used for cooking and heating on all craft except passenger craft. Liquefied
petroleum gas systems are to be of the vapor withdrawal type only. Cylinders designed to admit the liquid
phase of the gas into any other part of the system are prohibited. All component parts of the system, except
cylinders, appliances and low pressure tubing, shall be designed to withstand a pressure of 34 bar (35
kgf/cm2, 500 psi) without rupture.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 183
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks 4-4-7

5.3 Storage Cylinders

Cylinders for the storage of liquefied petroleum gases are to be designed and constructed in accordance
with a recognized pressure vessel standard.

5.5 Installation and Testing (2020)

Where liquefied petroleum gases are used, the installation and testing is to comply with a recognized
standard. Gas bottles are to be stored on the open deck or in a well ventilated space which opens only to
the open deck.

7 Fast Supply Craft

Where it is intended to carry limited amounts of hazardous and noxious liquid substances in bulk on fast
support craft, the arrangement is to comply with Part 5, Chapter 2 of the Rules for Building and Classing
Marine Vessels, as applicable.

9 Liquid Mud Cargo Tanks

Liquid mud cargo tanks are to be provided with vent pipes complying with 4-4-3/9. In order to prevent
overpressure or underpressure in the event of overflow into the vent pipe or clogging of the flame screen in
the case of oil based mud, vents for liquid mud tanks are to also be provided with a suitable burst disc(s)
rated below the mud tank design pressure. Spare burst discs are to be carried on board so that damage burst
disc can be replaced. Suitable means of gauging the mud tanks such as a tank ullage method or level
indicating devices may be fitted in lieu of sounding pipe per 4-4-3/13.3.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 184
 PART 4
CHAPTER 5
Fire Extinguishing Systems

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 All Craft............................................................................................. 188
1 General....................................................................................... 188
1.1 Classification Requirements.......................................... 188
1.3 Governmental Authority................................................. 188
1.5 Automated Propulsion Machinery Spaces.....................188
1.7 Plans and Specifications................................................188
1.9 Fire Control Plans.......................................................... 188
1.11 Additional Fixed Fire Fighting Systems......................... 189
3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants and Hoses..............................189
3.1 Materials........................................................................ 189
3.3 Fire Pumps.................................................................... 189
3.5 Fire Main........................................................................189
3.7 Hydrants........................................................................ 190
3.9 Hoses.............................................................................190
3.11 Nozzles.......................................................................... 191
5 Means for Closing of Openings, Stopping of Machinery and
Oil Containment.......................................................................... 191
5.1 Ventilation Fans and Openings......................................191
5.3 Other Auxiliaries............................................................ 191
5.5 Oil Tank Suction Pipes...................................................191
7 Helicopter Facilities ....................................................................192
7.1 Application..................................................................... 192
7.3 Provisions for Helicopter Deck.......................................192
7.4 Provisions for Helicopter Landing Areas........................193
7.5 Engineering Specification for Helidecks and
Helicopter Landing Areas.............................................. 193
7.6 Provisions for Enclosed Helicopter Facilities................. 194
7.7 Operation Manual.......................................................... 194
9 Tanks for Low Flashpoint Fuel for Gas Turbines........................ 195
11 Portable Extinguishers................................................................195
13 Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm Systems .................................. 195
13.1 General.......................................................................... 195

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 185
 13.2 Machinery Space........................................................... 195
13.3 Accommodation and Service Spaces............................ 195
15 Paint and Flammable Liquid Lockers .........................................195
15.1 Lockers of 4 m2 (43 ft2) or More Floor Area and
Lockers with Access to Accommodation Spaces.......... 195
15.3 Lockers of Less Than 4 m2 (43 ft2) Floor Area
Having no Access to Accommodation Spaces.............. 196
17 Spaces Containing Dangerous Goods ...................................... 196

TABLE 1 Classification of Portable and Semi-portable

Extinguishers......................................................................196
TABLE 2 Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers.........................196

SECTION 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over........................198

1 Fire Safety Measures..................................................................198
3 Size of Fire Main.........................................................................198
5 Main and Emergency Fire Pumps ............................................. 198
5.1 Main Fire Pumps............................................................198
5.3 Emergency Fire Pumps................................................. 199
7 International Shore Connection.................................................. 200
9 Machinery Spaces...................................................................... 201
9.1 Fixed Local Application Firefighting Systems................ 201
11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems...............................................202
11.1 Gas Smothering.............................................................202
11.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems (2013)....................................204
11.4 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (2017)........... 204
11.5 Foam..............................................................................206
11.7 Fixed Water Spraying Systems......................................207
13 Fireman’s Outfit.......................................................................... 207
15 Emergency Escape Breathing Devices (EEBDs)....................... 207
15.1 Accommodation Spaces................................................ 207
15.3 Machinery Spaces......................................................... 207
17 Portable Fire Extinguishers ........................................................208
19 Portable Foam Applicator Units ................................................. 208
19.1 Specification.................................................................. 208
19.3 System Performance..................................................... 208
21 Sample Extraction Smoke Detection Systems........................... 209
23 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in way of Cargo
Spaces........................................................................................209
23.1 Cargo Craft of 2000 Gross Tons and Over.................... 209
23.3 Exceptions..................................................................... 209
23.5 Controls......................................................................... 209
25 Ro-Ro Cargo Spaces..................................................................209
25.1 Fire Detection................................................................ 209

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 186
 25.3 Fire Extinguishing Arrangements...................................209
25.5 Portable Fire Extinguishers............................................210
25.7 Ro-Ro Spaces Carrying Motor Vehicles with Fuel in
Their Tanks.................................................................... 210
27 Cargo Spaces Carrying Vehicles with Fuel in Their Tanks
(Other Than Ro-Ro Spaces) ......................................................210
29 Release of Smoke from Machinery Space ................................ 210

TABLE 1 Minimum Steel Pipe Wall Thickness for CO2 Medium

Distribution Piping (2013)...................................................203
TABLE 2 Minimum Number of Required EEBDs...............................208

FIGURE 1 International Shore Connection..........................................201

SECTION 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons............................. 211

1 Fire Pumps, Fire Mains, Fire Hydrants and Fire Fighter's
Outfits..........................................................................................211
1.1 Number of Pumps.......................................................... 211
1.3 Capacity.........................................................................212
3 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems ..............................................212
3.1 Fixed Systems............................................................... 212
3.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems............................................... 212
5 Portable Extinguishers................................................................213
7 Axe..............................................................................................213

SECTION 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.............................. 214

1 General....................................................................................... 214
3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants, and Hoses.............................214
3.1 Number of Pumps..........................................................214
3.3 Pump Capacity and Pressure........................................ 214
3.5 Materials........................................................................ 214
3.7 Hydrants........................................................................ 214
3.9 Hoses and Nozzles........................................................214
5 Portable Fire Extinguishers.........................................................215
7 Machinery Spaces...................................................................... 216
9 Accommodation and Service Spaces......................................... 216
11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems...............................................216

TABLE 1 Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers ........................215

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 187
 PART 4
CHAPTER 5
Fire Extinguishing Systems

SECTION 1
All Craft

1 General

1.1 Classification Requirements

The following are the minimum classification requirements for high-speed cargo craft which do not
proceed, in the course of their voyage, more than 8 hours, at operational speed, from a place of refuge.
Cargo craft which proceed more than 8 hours from a place of refuge are to comply with the applicable
requirements of the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Marine Vessels.

1.3 Governmental Authority

Attention is directed to the appropriate governmental authority. In each case, there may be additional
requirements depending on the gross tonnage, length, type and intended service of the craft, as well as
other particulars and details. Consideration will be given to fire extinguishing systems which comply with
the published requirements of the governmental authority of the country in which the craft is to be
registered.

1.5 Automated Propulsion Machinery Spaces

Where automatic controls for propulsion machinery spaces are installed and it is intended that the
propulsion machinery spaces are either not continuously manned at sea or only one person is required on
watch, the requirements of Part 4, Chapter 7 are to be met.

1.7 Plans and Specifications

The plans together with supporting data and particulars listed in 4-1-1/7 are to be submitted for review.

1.9 Fire Control Plans

1.9.1 Required Information
Fire control plans are to be general arrangement plans showing for each deck the provision,
location, controls and particulars, as applicable, of fixed fire detection, alarm and extinguishing
systems, portable fire fighting appliances and equipment, controls for shutdowns of the ventilation
system, fuel oil pumps and valves, along with details of the means provided for the closing of
openings, and locations of accesses to critical spaces (such as fire control stations, Category A
machinery spaces, etc.). For craft where structural fire protection is required by the Rules,
locations and type of fire retarding bulkheads are to be specified on the plan.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 188
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

1.9.2 Plan Location

The fire control plans are to be conspicuously posted in the craft for the guidance of the crew.

1.11 Additional Fixed Fire Fighting Systems

Where a fixed fire extinguishing system not required by Sections 4-5-2, 4-5-3 or 4-5-4 is installed, such
system is to meet the applicable requirements of 4-5-2/11 and is to be submitted for approval.

3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants and Hoses

3.1 Materials
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used for fire mains unless adequately protected.
In order to be considered not “readily rendered ineffective by heat”, a component is to be certified as
having passed an applicable, recognized fire test, or the material is to have a melting temperature higher
than the test temperature specified in an applicable fire test.

For cargo craft less than 500 gross tons constructed of aluminum and FRP, pipes, valves and fittings which
are required to be "not readily rendered ineffective by heat" may be accepted provided the solidus melting
point of the material is greater than or equal to that of the material forming the bottom shell plating

3.3 Fire Pumps

3.3.1 Number of Pumps
All craft are to have at least two fire pumps. Refer to 4-5-2/5 for craft of 500 gross tons or over, or
4-5-3/1 for craft under 500 gross tons. Refer to 4-5-4/3 for craft under 24 m (79 ft) in length.

3.3.2 Type of Pumps

Sanitary, ballast, bilge or general service pumps may be accepted as fire pumps, provided that they
are not normally used for pumping oil. If the pumps are subject to occasional duty for the transfer
or pumping of fuel oil, changeover arrangements that prevent operation for firefighting when
configured for fuel transfer are to be fitted.

3.3.3 Pressure
Power-driven fire pumps are to have sufficient pressure to produce 12 m (40 ft) jet throw through
any two adjacent hydrants located in accordance with 4-5-1/3.7.1. Also refer to 4-5-2/5.1 or
4-5-3/1.

3.3.4 Relief Valves

In conjunction with all fire pumps, relief valves are to be provided if the pumps are capable of
developing a pressure exceeding the design pressure of the water service pipes, hydrants and
hoses. These valves are to be so placed and adjusted as to prevent excessive pressure in any part of
the fire main system. In general, the relief valve is to be set to relieve at no greater than 1.7 bar
(1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi) in excess of the pump pressure necessary to maintain the requirements of
4-5-1/3.3.3.

3.5 Fire Main

3.5.1 Size
Refer to 4-5-2/3 for craft of 500 gross tons and over. For craft under 500 gross tons, the diameter
of the fire main and water service pipes is to be sufficient for the effective distribution of the
maximum required discharge from the pump(s). Refer to 4-5-3/1, 4-5-3/1.3 TABLE 1 and
4-5-4/3.3.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 189
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

3.5.2 Cocks or Valve

A valve is to be fitted to serve each fire hose so that any fire hose may be removed while the fire
pumps are at work.

3.5.3 Cold Weather Protection

Fire main systems are to be provided with drains, circulation loops or other means for cold
weather protection.

3.7 Hydrants
3.7.1 Number and Position of Hydrants
The number and position of the hydrants are to be such that at least two jets of water not
emanating from the same hydrant, one of which is to be from a single length of hose, may reach
any part of the craft normally accessible to the passengers or crew while the craft is being
navigated. In addition, the arrangements are to be such that at least two jets of water can reach any
part of any cargo space when empty.

3.7.2 Materials
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not be used for fire protection systems unless
adequately protected. See 4-5-1/3.1.

3.7.3 Installation
The pipes and hydrants are to be so placed that the fire hoses may be easily coupled to them. In
craft where deck cargo may be carried, the positions of the hydrants are to be such that they are
always readily accessible and the pipes are to be arranged to avoid risk of damage by such cargo.

3.9 Hoses
3.9.1 General
Fire hoses are to be of a type certified by a competent independent testing laboratory as being
constructed of nonperishable material to a recognized standard. The hoses are to be sufficient in
length to project a jet of water to any of the spaces in which they may be required to be used.

Fire hoses are to have a length of at least 10 m (33 ft), but not more than:

● 15 m (50 ft) in machinery spaces;

● 20 m (66 ft) in other spaces and open decks; and
● 25 m (82 ft) for open deck on craft with a maximum breath in excess of 30 m (98 ft)

Each hose is to have a nozzle and the necessary couplings. Fire hoses, together with any necessary
fittings and tools, are to be kept ready for use in conspicuous positions near the hydrants.

3.9.2 Diameter
For craft less than 500 gross tons, hoses are not to have a diameter greater than 38 mm (1.5 in.).
Hoses for craft under 20 m (65 ft) in length may be of a good commercial grade having a diameter
of not less than 16 mm (5/8 in.), and are to be have a minimum test pressure of 10.3 bar (10.5
kgf/cm2, 150 psi) and a minimum burst pressure of 31.0 bar (31.6 kgf/cm2, 450 psi).

3.9.3 Number of Fire Hoses

In craft of 1,000 gross tonnage and upwards, the number of fire hoses to be provided is to be at
least one for each 30 m (100 ft) length of the craft and one spare, but in no case less than five in
all. This number does not include any hoses required in any engine or boiler room.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 190
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

In craft of less than 1,000 gross tonnage, the number of fire hoses to be provided is to be at least
one for each 30 m (100 ft) length of the craft and one spare. However, the number of hoses is to be
in no case less than three.

Unless one hose and nozzle is provided for each hydrant in the craft, there are to be complete
interchangeability of hose couplings and nozzles.

3.11 Nozzles
3.11.1 Size
Standard nozzle sizes are to be 12 mm (0.5 in.), 16 mm (0.625 in.) and 19 mm (0.75 in.), or as
near thereto as possible. Larger diameter nozzles may be permitted subject to compliance with
4-5-1/3.3.3. For accommodation and service spaces, a nozzle size greater than 12 mm (0.5 in.)
need not be used. For machinery spaces and exterior locations, the nozzle size is to be such as to
obtain the maximum discharge possible from two jets at the pressure mentioned in 4-5-1/3.3.3
from the smallest pump; however, a nozzle size greater than 19 mm (0.75 in.) need not be used.

3.11.2 Type
All nozzles are to be of an approved dual-purpose type (i.e., spray and jet type) incorporating a
shut-off. Fire hose nozzles of plastic type material such as polycarbonate may be accepted subject
to review of their capacity and serviceability as marine use fire hose nozzles.

5 Means for Closing of Openings, Stopping of Machinery and Oil

Containment

5.1 Ventilation Fans and Openings

Means are to be provided for stopping ventilation fans serving machinery and cargo spaces, and for closing
all doorways, ventilators and other openings to such spaces. These means are to be capable of being
operated from outside such spaces in case of fire. See 4-6-2/19.1.1.

5.3 Other Auxiliaries

Machinery driving forced- and induced-draft fans, oil-fuel transfer pumps, oil-fuel unit pumps and other
similar fuel pumps, fired equipment such as an incinerator, lubricating oil service pumps, thermal oil
circulating pumps and oil separators (purifiers) are to be fitted with remote shutdowns situated outside of
the spaces concerned so that they may be stopped in the event of a fire arising in the space. This need not
apply to oily water separators. See 4-6-2/19.1.2.

In addition to the remote shutdowns required above, a means to shut down the equipment is to be provided
within the space itself.

5.5 Oil Tank Suction Pipes

Except for small independent tanks having a capacity of less than 500 liters (132 gal.), every oil-suction
pipe from a storage, settling, daily service tank or lube oil tank situated above the double bottom is to be
fitted with a valve capable of being closed in the event of a fire from outside of the space where such tanks
are located. In the special case of deep tanks situated in any shaft or pipe tunnel, control may be effected
by means of an additional valve on the pipe line outside of the tunnel. See 4-4-4/3.7.

Where inadvertent valve closure could result in damage to the running machinery due to lack of lubricating
oil, a valve is to be fitted on the lubricating oil tank, but remote control of the valve from outside of the
space is not required. See 4-4-4/1.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 191
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

7 Helicopter Facilities

7.1 Application (1 July 2020)

For each helicopter deck and helipcopter landing areas on board a craft designated for helicopter
operations, fire fighting system and equipment complying with 4-5-1/7.3 through 4-5-1/7.6 as applicable,
are to be provided.

Helicopter deck (helideck) is a purpose-built helicopter landing area, on a craft including all structure, fire
fighting appliances and other equipment necessary for the safe operation of helicopters, but not those areas
for occasional or emergency helicopter operations (e.g., circle H marked on hatch covers for drop-off/
pickup of pilot). Helicopter facility is a helideck including any refueling and hangar facility.

Helicopter landing area is an area on a craft designated for occasional or emergency landing of helicopters
but not designed for routine helicopter operations.

D-value means the largest dimension of the helicopter used for assessment of the helideck when its rotors
are turning. It establishes the required area of foam application.

7.3 Provisions for Helicopter Deck

7.3.1 Hose Reels (1 July 2020)
At least two hose reels fitted with a foam-making branch pipe and non-collapsible hose sufficient
to reach any part of the helideck are to be provided.

7.3.2 Portable Extinguishers

The helicopter deck is to be protected by at least two dry powder extinguishers of a total capacity
of not less than 45 kg (100 lb).

7.3.3 Back-up System

A back-up fire fighting system is to be provided consisting of CO2 extinguishers of a total capacity
of not less than 18 kg (40 lb) or equivalent, one of these extinguishers being equipped so as to
enable it to reach the engine area of any helicopter using the helicopter deck. The back-up system
is to be located so that the equipment would not be vulnerable to the same damage as the dry
powder extinguisher required by 4-5-1/7.3.2.

7.3.4 Fixed Foam System (1 July 2020)

The foam system is to contain at least two fixed foam monitors or deck integrated foam nozzles.
The minimum foam system discharge rate is to be determined by multiplying the D-value area by
6 l/min/m2. The minimum foam system discharge rate for deck integrated foam nozzle systems is
to be determined by multiplying the overall helideck area by 6 l/min/m2. Each monitor is to be
capable of supplying at least 50% of the minimum foam system discharge rate, but not less than
500 l/min. The minimum discharge rate of each hose reel is to be at least 400 l/min. The quantity
of foam concentrate is to be adequate to allow operation of all connected discharge devices for at
least 5 min. The operation of the foam system is not to interfere with the simultaneous operation
of the fire main.

7.3.5 Fireman’s Outfits

In addition to the fireman’s outfits required in 4-5-2/15, two additional sets of fireman’s outfits are
to be provided and stored near the helicopter deck.

7.3.6 Other Equipment

The following equipment is to be provided near the helicopter deck and is to be stored in a manner
that provides for immediate use and protection from the elements:

● Adjustable wrench

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 192
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

● Fire resistant blanket

● Bolt cutters with arm length of 60 cm (24 in.) or more
● Grab hook or salving hook
● Heavy duty hack saw, complete with six spare blades
● Ladder
● Lifeline of 5 mm (3/16 in.) diameter × 15 m (50 ft) length
● Side cutting pliers
● Set of assorted screw drivers
● Harness knife complete with sheath

7.4 Provisions for Helicopter Landing Areas (1 July 2020)

At least two portable foam applicators or two hose reel foam stations are to be provided, each capable of
discharging a minimum foam solution discharge rate, in accordance with the following table.

Category Helicopter overall length (D-value) Minimum foam solution discharge

rate (l/min)

H1 up to but not including 15 m 250

H2 from 15 m up to but not including 24 m 500

H3 from 24 m up to but not including 35 m 800

The quantity of foam concentrate is to be adequate to allow operation of all connected discharge devices
for at least 10 min.

In addition, the requirements in 4-5-1/7.5 are also to be complied with, as applicable.

7.5 Engineering Specification for Helidecks and Helicopter Landing Areas (1 July 2020)
7.5.1
The system is to be capable of manual release and may be arranged for automatic release.

7.5.2
Where foam monitors are installed, the distance from the monitor to the farthest extremity of the
protected area is to be not more than 75% of the monitor throw in still air conditions.

7.5.3
Manual release stations capable of starting necessary pumps and opening required valves,
including the fire main system, if used for water supply, are to be located at each monitor and hose
reel. In addition, a central manual release station is to be provided at a protected location. The
foam system is to be designed to discharge foam with nominal flow and at design pressure from
any connected discharge devices within 30 s of activation.

7.5.4
Activation of any manual release station is to initiate the flow of foam solution to all connected
hose reels, monitors, and deck integrated foam nozzles.

7.5.5
The system and its components are to be designed to withstand ambient temperature changes,
vibration, humidity, shock impact and corrosion normally encountered on the open deck, and are
to be manufactured and tested to the satisfaction of the Administration.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 193
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

7.5.6
A minimum nozzle throw of at least 15 m is to be provided with all hose reels and monitors
discharging foam simultaneously. The discharge pressure, flow rate and discharge pattern of deck
integrated foam nozzles are to be to the satisfaction of the Administration, based on tests that
demonstrate the nozzle's capability to extinguish fires involving the largest size helicopter for
which the helideck is designed.

7.5.7
Monitors, foam-making branch pipes, deck integrated foam nozzles and couplings are to be
constructed of brass, bronze or stainless steel. Piping, fittings and related components, except
gaskets, are to be designed to withstand exposure to temperatures up to 925ºC.

7.5.8
The foam concentrate is to be demonstrated effective for extinguishing aviation fuel spill fires and
is to conform to performance standards not inferior to those acceptable to the International Civil
Aviation Organization. Where the foam storage tank is on the exposed deck, freeze protected foam
concentrates is to be used, if appropriate, for the area of operation.

7.5.9
Any foam system equipment installed within the take-off and approach obstacle-free sector is not
to exceed a height of 0.25 m. Any foam system equipment installed in the limited obstacle sector
is not to exceed the height permitted for objects in this area.

7.5.10
All manual release stations, monitor foam stations, hose reel foam stations, hose reels and
monitors are to be provided with a means of access that does not require travel across the helideck
or helicopter landing area.

7.5.11
Oscillating monitors, if used, are to be pre-set to discharge foam in a spray pattern and have a
means of disengaging the oscillating mechanism to allow rapid conversion to manual operation.

7.5.12
If a foam monitor with flow rate up to 1,000 l/min is installed, it is to be equipped with an air-
aspirating nozzle. If a deck integrated nozzle system is installed, then the additionally installed
hose reel is to be equipped with an air-aspirating handline nozzle (foam branch pipes). Use of non-
air-aspirating foam nozzles (on both monitors and the additional hose reel) is permitted only
where foam monitors with a flow rate above 1,000 l/min are installed. If only portable foam
applicators or hose reel stations are provided, these are to be equipped with an air-aspirating
handline nozzle (foam branch pipes).

7.6 Provisions for Enclosed Helicopter Facilities

Hangars, refueling and maintenance facilities are to be treated as machinery space of category A with
regard to structural fire protection, fixed fire-extinguishing system and fire detection system requirements.
See 4-5-2/11 and 4-5-1/13.

7.7 Operation Manual

Each helicopter facility is to have an operation manual, including a description and a checklist of safety
precautions, procedures and equipment requirements. This manual may be part of the craft’s emergency
response procedures.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 194
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

9 Tanks for Low Flashpoint Fuel for Gas Turbines

Where fuel with a flash point below 43°C (109°F) is permitted by 4-2-2/3.11 for gas turbines, each space
containing a non-integral tank for the low flash point fuel is to be fitted with a Fixed Fire Detection and
Alarm System complying with 4-5-1/13.1 and a Fixed Fire Extinguishing System complying with
4-5-2/11.

11 Portable Extinguishers
Portable extinguishers are to be provided in the quantities and locations indicated in 4-5-1/17 TABLE 1
and 4-5-1/17 TABLE 2.

13 Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

13.1 General
Where required, Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm Systems are to comply with Regulations 7.7.1 and 7.7.2
of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft and Chapter 9 of the International Code for Fire
Safety Systems.

13.2 Machinery Space

A Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm System complying with 4-5-1/13.1 are to be provided for any
machinery space containing an internal combustion engine, gas turbine, oil filling station, or switchboards
of aggregate capacity exceeding 750 kW (1000 hp)

13.3 Accommodation and Service Spaces

A Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm System complying with 4-5-1/13.1 is to be provided for all
accommodation and service spaces

15 Paint and Flammable Liquid Lockers

Paint and flammable liquid lockers or any similar service spaces used for the storage of flammable liquids
(such as solvents, adhesives, lubricants etc.) are to be protected by a fire extinguishing arrangement
enabling the crew to extinguish a fire without entering the space. Unless required or permitted otherwise
by the flag Administration, one of the following systems is to be provided:

15.1 Lockers of 4 m2 (43 ft2) or More Floor Area and Lockers with Access to
Accommodation Spaces
Paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers of floor area 4 m2 (43 ft2) or more and also such lockers of any
floor area with access to accommodation spaces are to be provided with one of the fixed fire extinguishing
systems specified below:

i) CO2 system, designed for 40 % of the gross volume of the space.

ii) Dry powder system, designed for at least 0.5 kg/m3 (0.03 lb/ft3).
iii) Water spraying system, designed for 5 liters/m2/minute (0.12 gpm/ft2). The water spraying system
may be connected to the craft’s fire main system, in which case, the fire pump capacity is to be
sufficient for simultaneous operation of the fire main system, as required in 4-5-2/5.1, and the
water spray system. Precautions are to be taken to prevent the nozzles from being clogged by
impurities in the water or corrosion of piping, nozzles, valves and pump.
iv) Systems or arrangements other than those referenced above may be also considered, provided they
are not less effective.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 195
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

15.3 Lockers of Less Than 4 m2 (43 ft2) Floor Area Having no Access to Accommodation
Spaces
For paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers of floor area less than 4 m2 (43 ft2) having no access to
accommodation spaces, portable fire extinguisher(s) sized in accordance with 4-5-1/15.1.i and which can
be discharged through a port in the boundary of the lockers may be accepted. The required portable fire
extinguishers are to be stowed adjacent to the port. Alternatively, a port or hose connection may be
provided for this purpose to facilitate the use of water from the fire main.

17 Spaces Containing Dangerous Goods

Craft intending to carry dangerous goods are to comply with the applicable requirements of Chapter 7 Part
D of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft.

TABLE 1
Classification of Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers (1 July 2019)

Fire extinguishers are designated by type as follows: A, for fires in combustible materials such as wood; B, for fires in
flammable liquids and greases; C, for fires in electrical equipment.

Fire extinguishers are designated by size where size II is the smallest and size V is the largest. Size II is a hand portable
extinguisher, and sizes III, IV, and V are semi-portable extinguishers.

Type Size Water liters Foam liters Carbon Dry Chemical Wet Chemical,
(US gallons) (US gallons) Dioxide kg (lb.) liters
kg (lb.) (U.S. gallons)

A II 9 (2.5) 9 (2.5) – 5 (11) (2) 9 (2.5)

B II – 9 (2.5) 5 (11) 5 (11) –

B III – 45 (12) 15.8 (35) 9.0 (20) –

B IV – 76 (20) 22.5 (50) 22.5 (50) –

(1) (1)
B V – 152 (40) 45 (100) 22.5 (50) –

C II – – 5 (11) 5 (11) –

C III – – 15.8 (35) 9.0 (20) –

C IV – – 22.5 (50) 13.5 (30) –

F or K II – – – – 9 (2.5)

Notes:

1 For outside use, double the quantity of agent that must be carried.

2 Must be specifically approved as type A, B, or C extinguisher.

TABLE 2
Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers

Space Classification Quantity and Location (5)

Safety Areas

Communicating corridors A-II 1 in each main corridor not more than 46 m (150 ft) apart. (May be
located in stairways.)

Pilothouse C-II 2 in vicinity of exit. See Notes 4 and 6.

Radio room C-II 1 in vicinity of exit. See Note 4.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 196
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1

Space Classification Quantity and Location (5)

Accommodations

Sleeping Accommodations A-II 1 in each sleeping accommodation space. (Where occupied by

more than four persons.)

Service Spaces

Galleys B-II or C-II 1 for each 230 m2 (2500 ft2) or fraction thereof for hazards
involved.

Storerooms A-II 1 for each 230 m2 (2500 ft2) or fraction thereof located in vicinity
of exits, either inside or outside of spaces. See Note 4.

Workshops A-II 1 outside the space in vicinity of exit. See Note 4.

Machinery Spaces

Internal combustion or gas turbine B-II 1 for each 746 kW (1000 hp), but not less than 2 nor more than 6.
engines See Note 1.

and B-III 1 required. See Note 3.

Electric motors or generators of the C-II 1 for each motor or generator unit. See Note 2.
open type

Notes:

1 When installation is on weather deck or open to atmosphere at all times, one B-II for every three engines is
allowable.

2 Small electrical appliances, such as fans, etc., are not to be counted or used as basis for determining number of
extinguishers required.

3 Not required on craft of less than 500 gross tons.

4 Vicinity is intended to mean within 1 m (3 ft).

5 For craft of 1000 gross tons and above, at least five extinguishers are to be provided for accommodation
spaces, service spaces, spaces where the craft’s radio, main navigation equipment or emergency source of
power is located, and locations where the fire recording or fire control equipment is located.

6 For cargo ships less than 500 gross tons, “C-I” portable extinguishers may be used.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 197
 PART 4
CHAPTER 5
Fire Extinguishing Systems

SECTION 2
Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over

1 Fire Safety Measures

The applicable requirements of Section 3-4-1 are to be complied with.

3 Size of Fire Main

The diameter of the fire main and water service pipes is to be sufficient for the effective distribution of the
maximum required discharge from two fire pumps operating simultaneously, except that the diameter need
only be sufficient for the discharge of 140 m3/hr (616 gpm).

5 Main and Emergency Fire Pumps

5.1 Main Fire Pumps

5.1.1 Number of Pumps
For craft of 1000 gross tons and above, the pumps are to be independently power-driven. For craft
less than 1000 gross tons, only one of the pumps need be independently power-driven and one of
the pumps may be attached to the propulsion unit.

5.1.2 Total Pump Capacity

The fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.1.1 are to be capable of delivering for firefighting purposes a
quantity of water, at the appropriate pressure prescribed, not less than four-thirds of the quantity
required under 4-4-3/3.3 to be dealt with by each of the independent bilge pumps when employed
on bilge pumping, using in all cases L = length of craft, as defined in 3-1-1/3, except that the total
required capacity of the fire pumps need not exceed 180 m3/hr (792 gpm).

5.1.3 Individual Pump Capacity

Each of the fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.1.1 is to have a capacity of not less than 40% of the
total required capacity, but not less than 25 m3/hr (110 gpm), and in any event is to be capable of
delivering at least the two required jets of water. These pumps are to be capable of supplying the
water under the required conditions. Where more pumps than required are installed, their capacity
will be subject to special consideration.

5.1.4 Pressure
For craft 1000 gross tons and over with the two power-driven pumps simultaneously delivering
through the nozzles specified in 4-5-1/3.11 the quantity of water specified in 4-5-1/3.5.1 through

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 198
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

any adjacent hydrants, a pressure of 2.5 bar (2.6 kgf/cm2, 37 psi) is to be maintained at all
hydrants.

For craft less than 1000 gross tons, the power-driven fire pumps are to have sufficient pressure to
produce 12 m (40 ft) jet throw through any two adjacent hydrants located in accordance with
4-5-1/3.5.1.

5.1.5 Arrangement
Unless an emergency fire pump complying with 4-5-2/5.3 is provided, the two main fire pumps,
including their power source, fuel supply, electric cables, and lighting and ventilation for the
spaces in which they are located, are to be in separate compartments so that a fire in any one
compartment will not render both main pumps inoperable. Only one common boundary is allowed
between the compartments, in which case, the single common boundary is to be at least to A-0
standard.

No direct access is allowed between the compartments except that where this is impracticable, an
access meeting the requirements in 4-5-2/5.1.6 may be considered.

5.1.6 Alternative Arrangement

Where it is impracticable to do otherwise, a direct access between the compartments containing
the main fire pumps may be considered, provided:

i) A watertight door capable of being operated locally from both sides of the bulkhead, and
from a safe and accessible location outside of these spaces is provided. The means for the
latter operation is expected to be available in the event of fire in these spaces; or
ii) An air lock consisting of two gastight steel doors. The doors are to be self-closing without
any hold back arrangements.
iii) In addition to the arrangements specified in 4-5-2/5.1.6.i or 4-5-2/5.1.6.ii above, a second
protected means of access is to be provided to the space containing the fire pumps.
5.1.7 Isolation
Isolating valves and other arrangements, as necessary, are to be provided so that if a fire pump and
its associated piping within its compartment are rendered inoperable, the fire main can be
pressurized with a fire pump located in another compartment.

5.3 Emergency Fire Pumps

5.3.1 When Required
If a fire in any one compartment could put all main pumps out of action (see 4-5-2/5.1.2), an
independently power-driven and self-priming emergency fire pump complying with this paragraph
is to be provided.

5.3.2 Arrangement
An emergency fire pump system, including power source, fuel supply, electric cables, and
lighting, as well as lighting and ventilation for the emergency fire pump space, is to be in a
separate compartment than the main fire pumps so that a fire in any one compartment will not
render both the main and the emergency firepumps inoperable.

No direct access is permitted between the main machinery space and the spaces containing the
emergency fire pump and its source of power. Where this is impracticable, access between the
space containing the emergency fire pump and the main machinery space, in accordance with
4-5-2/5.1.6, may be considered

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 199
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

The space containing the emergency fire pump is not to be contiguous to the boundaries of
machinery spaces of Category A or the spaces containing the main fire pumps. Where this is
impracticable, the common bulkhead between the two spaces is to be constructed to A-60
standard. The insulation is to extend at least 450 mm (18 in.) outside of the area of the joint
bulkheads and decks.

5.3.3 Capacity
The emergency fire pump is to be capable of supplying at least two jets of water required by
4-5-1/3.5.1, using the available hydrants, hoses and nozzles, and is to have a capacity of at least
40% of the total capacity of the fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.1.2 or 25 m3/hr (110 gpm),
whichever is greater.

When the pump is delivering the quantity of water, as above, the pressure at the hydrant is to be
not less than the pressure given in 4-5-2/5.1.4.

In addition, the emergency fire pump is also to be capable of simultaneously supplying the amount
of water needed for any fixed extinguishing system protecting the space containing the main
pumps.

5.3.4 Starting
Internal combustion engines larger than 15 kW (20 hp) are to be provided with power starting
systems having a capacity sufficient for at least six starts within 30 minutes, including at least two
within the first ten minutes. For engines of 15 kW (20 hp) and smaller, manual means of starting is
sufficient.

Any internal combustion engine driving an emergency fire pump is to be capable of readily being
started in its cold condition down to a temperature of 0°C (32°F). If this is impracticable or if
lower temperatures are likely to be encountered, consideration is to be given to the provision and
maintenance of heating arrangements.

5.3.5 Fuel Supply

Any service fuel tank is to contain sufficient fuel to enable the pump to run on full load for at least
three hours and sufficient reserves of fuel are to be available outside of the main machinery space
to enable the pump to be run on full load for an additional 15 hours.

5.3.6 Suction
The total suction head and the net positive suction head of the pump is to be such that the
requirements of 4-5-2/5.3.3 and 4-5-2/5.1.4 will be satisfied under all conditions of list, trim, roll
and pitch likely to be encountered in service. The sea valve is to be operable from a position near
the pump or locked in the open position (provided possible flooding can be detected).

7 International Shore Connection

At least one international shore connection, as shown in 4-5-2/7 FIGURE 1, is to be provided and kept
aboard the craft with gasket, bolts and eight washers. Facilities are to be available enabling such a
connection to be used on either side of the craft.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 200
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

FIGURE 1
International Shore Connection

9 Machinery Spaces
Category A machinery spaces are to be protected by a fixed fire extinguishing system complying with
4-5-2/11.

9.1 Fixed Local Application Firefighting Systems (2022)

For cargo craft of 2000 gross tonnage and above, the machinery spaces of category A above 500 m3
(17,657 ft3) in volume, in addition to the fixed fire extinguishing system required in 4-5-2/11, are to be
protected by an approved type of fixed water-based or equivalent local application firefighting system
complying with the provisions of the IMO Guidelines for the Approval of Fixed Water-based Local
Application Firefighting System for Use in Category A Machinery Spaces, MSC/Circ. 1387. In the case of
periodically unattended machinery spaces, the fire fighting system is to have both automatic and manual
release capabilities. In case of continuously manned machinery spaces, the fire fighting system is only
required to have a manual release capability. The fixed local application fire fighting systems are to protect
areas such as the following without the necessity of engine shutdown, personnel evacuation or sealing the
spaces:

i) The fire hazard portion of internal combustion machinery;

ii) The fire hazard portions of incinerators; and
iii) Boiler front
iv) Purifiers for heated fuel oil. See 4-4-4/1.9

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 201
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

Activation of any local application system shall give a visual and distinct audible alarm in the protected
space and at continuously manned stations. The alarm is to indicate the specific system activated. The
system alarm requirements described within this paragraph are in addition to, and not a substitute for, the
detection and fire alarm system required elsewhere in this Section and Section 4-5-3. A bridge alarm is to
be provided with a visual notification when the system has been deactivated or placed in manual mode.

Paragraph 3.3.4 of MSC.1/Circ.1387 indicates that external power for fixed local application fire-fighting
systems need only be supplied by the main power source. However, the fixed local application fire fighting
systems may be powered from the emergency power source unless instructed otherwise by the flag
Administration. See also 4-6-2/5.5.4.

11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems

11.1 Gas Smothering

11.1.1 Storage (2021)
Where the gas smothering medium is stored outside of the protected space, the storeroom is to be
situated in a safe and readily accessible position and is to be effectively ventilated by a ventilation
system independent of all other spaces.

Spaces for storage of cylinders or tanks for extinguishing gas are not to be used for other purposes.
These spaces are not to be located forward of the forward collision bulkhead, when fitted. Access
to these spaces is to be possible from the open deck. Spaces situated below the deck are to be
located no more than one deck below the open deck.

Spaces where entrance from the open deck is not provided or which are located below deck are to
be fitted with mechanical ventilation. The exhaust duct (suction) is to be lead to the bottom of the
space. Such spaces are to be ventilated with at least six air changes per hour.

Fire-extinguishing media protecting the cargo holds (see 4-5-2/25) may be stored in a room
located forward of the cargo holds, but aft of the collision bulkhead, provided that both the local
manual release mechanism and remote control(s) for the release of the media are fitted, and the
latter is of robust construction or so protected as to remain operable in case of fire in the protected
spaces. The remote controls are to be placed in the accommodation area in order to facilitate their
ready accessibility by the crew. The capability to release different quantities of fire-extinguishing
media into different cargo holds so protected is to be included in the remote release arrangement..

Where the CO2 system discharge piping is also used for the sample extraction smoke detection
system piping, see Chapter 10 of the International Code for Fire Safety Systems (FSS Code), as
amended), for the location of the indicating unit.

For spaces containing storage cylinders, space temperature is to be maintained so that it does not
exceed 55°C (131°F).

11.1.2 Design (2021)

Containers and associated pressure components are to be designed based upon an ambient
temperature of 55°C (131°F). Also, for high pressure CO2 cylinders, please see 4-7-3/3.1.11 of the
Marine Vessel Rules.

For CO2 fire extinguishing systems, the wall thickness of steel piping is to be suitable for the
pressure and not less than the thickness identified in 4-5-2/11.1.2 TABLE 1. Column A is for
piping from storage containers to distribution station, and column B is for piping from distribution
station to nozzles. For other fixed gas fire extinguishing systems, calculations showing compliance
with 4-4-2/5.11 are to be submitted for approval.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 202
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

Where the fire-extinguishing medium is used as the power source for the pre-discharge alarm, the
piping to the alarm is to comply with Column B of 4-5-2/11.1.2 TABLE 1.

TABLE 1
Minimum Steel Pipe Wall Thickness for CO2 Medium Distribution Piping
(2013)

Nominal size, OD mm A mm B mm Nominal size, OD in. A in. B in.

mm in.
1
15 21.3 2.8 2.6 /2 0.840 0.110 0.102
3
20 26.9 2.8 2.6 /4 1.050 0.110 0.102

25 33.7 4.0 3.2 1 1.315 0.157 0.126

32 42.4 4.0 3.2 11/4 1.660 0.157 0.126

1
40 48.3 4.0 3.2 1 /2 1.9 0.157 0.126

50 60.3 4.5 3.6 2 2.375 0.177 0.142

1
65 76.1 5.0 3.6 2 /2 2.875 0.197 0.142

80 88.9 5.5 4.0 3 3.5 0.220 0.157

90 101.6 6.3 4.0 31/2 4.0 0.248 0.157

100 114.3 7.1 4.5 4 4.5 0.28 0.177

125 139.7 8.0 5.0 5 5.563 0.315 0.197

150 139.7 8.8 5.6 6 6.625 0.346 0.22

Notes:

1 The above minimum thicknesses are derived from those thicknesses available in ISO 4200 Series 1
(OD), JIS (N.P.S.), or ASTM (N.P.S.). Diameter and thickness according to other recognized
standards will be accepted.

2 For threaded pipes, where approved, the thickness is to be measured to the bottom of the thread.

3 The internal surface of pipes outside of the engine room is to be galvanized.

4 For larger diameters the minimum wall thickness will be subject to special consideration by ABS.

5 In general, the minimum thickness is the nominal wall thickness and no allowance need be made for
negative tolerance or reduction in thickness due to bending.

The pressure rating of pipe connections such as flanges from the distribution aftermost valve to
discharge nozzles is to be not less than the maximum pressure developed during the discharge of
CO2 into protected spaces.

The relief valve of a CO2 fire extinguishing system is to discharge outside of the CO2 container
storage compartment. In addition, in piping sections where valve arrangements introduce sections
of closed piping, such sections are to be fitted with a pressure relief valve and the outlet of the
valve is to be led to open deck.

Gray cast iron piping components are not to be used for fixed gas fire extinguishing systems. All
discharge piping, fittings and nozzles in the protected spaces are to be constructed of materials
having a melting temperature which exceeds 925°C (1697°F). The piping and associated
equipment are to be adequately supported.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 203
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

Threaded joints in CO2 systems are to be allowed only inside protected spaces and in CO2 cylinder
rooms.

11.1.3 Alarm
( 2017 ) Means are to be provided for automatically giving audible and visual warning of the
release of fire extinguishing gas into any space to which personnel normally have access. The
audible alarms are to be located so as to be audible throughout the protected space with all
machinery operating, and the alarms are to be distinguished from other audible alarms by
adjustment of sound pressure or sound patterns. The alarm is to operate for at least a 20 second
period before the gas is released. Alarms may be pneumatically (by the extinguishing medium or
by air) or electrically operated.

11.1.3(a) Electric.
If electrically operated, the alarms are to be supplied with power from the main and an emergency
source of electrical power.

11.1.3(b) Pneumatic.
If pneumatically operated by air, the air supply is to be dry and clean and the supply reservoir is to
be automatically kept charged at all times and is to be fitted with a low pressure alarm. The air
supply may be taken from the starting air receivers. Any stop valve fitted in the air supply line is
to be locked or sealed in the open position. Any electrical components associated with the
pneumatic system are to be powered from the main and an emergency source of electrical power.

11.1.3(c) Uninterruptible Power Supply (2013).

For fire extinguishing systems that protect the machinery space containing the main source of
power, instead of the power supply arrangements required above for electrically operated alarms
and electrical components associated with pneumatic alarms, an uninterruptible power supply
which is supplied with power from the emergency switchboard is to be provided.

11.1.4 Controls
Except as otherwise permitted herein, two independent manual control arrangements are to be
provided, one of them being positioned at the storage location and the other in a readily accessible
position outside the protected space.

11.1.5 Air Reservoirs (2019)

The volume of starting air receivers converted to free air volume is to be added to the gross
volume of the machinery space when calculating the necessary quantity of the extinguishing
medium. Alternatively, a discharge pipe from the safety relief valves or other pressure relief
devices may be fitted and led directly to the open air.

11.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems (2013)

In addition to the applicable requirements of 4-7-3/3.3 of the Marine Vessel Rules, Fixed Carbon Dioxide
Fire Extinguishing System is to be in accordance with the requirements of 7.7.3.3.2-7.7.3.3.16 and 7.7.3.4
of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft and Chapter 5 of the International Code for Fire
Safety Systems

11.4 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (2017)

Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systems equivalent to those specified in 4-5-2/11.1 through 4-5-2/11.3 are to
be submitted for approval, based on the guidelines specified in the IMO MSC/Circ. 848 as amended by
MSC/Circ. 1267 and this subsection.

Fire extinguishing systems using Halon 1211, 1301, and 2402 and perfluorocarbons are prohibited. The
use of a fire-extinguishing medium, which either by itself or under expected conditions of use gives off
toxic gases, liquids and other substances in such quantities as to endanger persons, is not permitted.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 204
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

11.4.1 Fire Suppression Agent

The agent is to be recognized as a fire extinguishing medium by NFPA Standard 2001 or other
recognized national standard. The minimum extinguishing concentration for net volume total
flooding of the protected space at the lowest expected operating temperature, but not greater than
0°C (32°F), is to be determined by an acceptable cup burner test. The minimum design
concentration is to be at least 30% above the minimum extinguishing concentration and is to be
verified by full-scale test (see 4-5-2/11.4.2).

The fire extinguishing agent is to be acceptable for use in occupied spaces by U.S. EPA or other
recognized national organization. The concentrations for cardiac sensitization NOAEL (No
Observed Adverse Effect Level), LOAEL (Lowest Observed Adverse Effect Level) and ALC
(Approximate Lethal Concentration) are to be submitted.

11.4.2 Fire Tests

The system is to pass the fire tests in the Appendix of the IMO MSC/Circ. 848 as amended by
MSC/Circ. 1267. The testing is to include the system components.

The system is to pass an additional fire test (number 1 in the Appendix of MSC/Circ. 848) with
the agent storage cylinder at the lowest expected operating temperature, but not greater than 0°C
(32°F).

11.4.3 System Components

The system is to be suitable for use in a marine environment. Major components (valves, nozzles,
etc.) are to be made of brass or stainless steel, piping is to be corrosion resistant (stainless steel or
galvanized) and the material is to have a melting point of not less than 927°C (1700°F).

The system and its components are to be designed, manufactured and installed in accordance with
recognized national standards.

Containers and associated pressure components are to be designed based upon an ambient
temperature of 55°C (131°F).

Minimum wall thickness for distribution piping is to be in accordance with 4-5-2/11.1.2 TABLE 1
(Columns A or B, as applicable).

11.4.4 System Installation

11.4.4(a) Storage.
As far as practicable, the fire suppression agent is to be stored outside the protected space in a
dedicated storeroom. The storeroom is to be in accordance with 4-5-2/11.1.1, except that when
mechanical ventilation is provided, the location of the exhaust duct (suction) is dependent on the
density of the agent relative to air.

When allowed by the flag Administration, the fire suppression agent may be stored inside the
protected space. In addition to the related instructions from the flag Administration, the
installation is to be in accordance with paragraph 11 of IMO MSC/Circ. 848 as amended by MSC/
Circ. 1267.

In the case of new installation in existing units, the storage of the fire suppression agent within a
low fire risk space with a net volume at least two (2) times greater than the net volume of the
protected space may be specially considered, based on the type of agent and the possible hazards
for the personnel within the space.

11.4.4(b) Alarm. (2019)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 205
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

An audible and visual predischarge alarm in accordance with 4-5-2/11.1.3 and paragraph 6 of IMO
MSC/Circ. 848 as amended by MSC/Circ. 1267 is to be provided inside the protected space in
which personnel normally work or to which they have access.

11.4.4(c) Controls.
Except as otherwise permitted herein two independent manual control arrangements are to be
provided, one of them being positioned at the storage location and the other in a readily accessible
position outside of the protected space.

Automatic actuation is not permitted when the protected space is normally manned or interferes
with the safety navigation of the craft. If the protected space is normally unmanned and may be
entered occasionally for brief periods such as for repairs, maintenance or other purpose, automatic
actuation may be allowed in addition to manual actuation, provided that the following conditions
are met:

i) The egress from the protected space is horizontal. Exit doors from the spaces are to be
outward-swinging self-closing doors (i.e., opening in the direction of escape routes)
which can be opened from the inside, including when the doors are locked from the
outside.
ii) Notices that the space is protected by an automatic activation system are prominently
posted at the entrance to the space.
iii) A switch is provided near the entrance to disable the automatic release feature of the
system.

The switch is to have an indicator of its status such as red pilot light to indicate when the
switch is activated (automatic release feature disabled). A sign is to be posted near the
switch indicating that the automatic release feature is to be disabled when the space is
occupied and that the automatic actuation is to be enabled when leaving the space. The
sign is to also indicate that the manual release of the system remains enabled and the
space is to be vacated immediately when the release alarm sounds.
iv) When the automatic release feature is disabled, all other controls, alarms, etc., are to
remain activated.
v) An indicator at the control console is provided to indicate when the automatic release
feature has been disabled.
vi) The medium release warning alarm is to operate for the length of time needed to evacuate
the space, but in no case less than 30 seconds for space exceeding 6000 ft3 (170 m3) and
20 seconds for spaces 6000 ft3 (170 m3) or less before the medium is released.
vii) The automatic release of a clean agent fire extinguishing system is to be approved by the
craft’s flag Administration.
11.4.4(d) Nozzles.
The nozzle type, maximum nozzle spacing, maximum height and minimum nozzle pressure are to
be within the limits to provide fire extinction as tested and verified in the appropriate fire test (see
4-5-2/11.4.2).

11.5 Foam
11.5.1 Fixed High Expansion Foam Systems
In addition to the applicable requirements of the Rules, fixed, high expansion foam systems are to
be in accordance with Chapter 6.2.1 and Chapter 6.2.2 of the International Code for Fire Safety
Systems.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 206
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

Fixed foam fire-extinguishing systems using inside air are to be designed, constructed and tested
in accordance with the requirements identified in MSC.1/Circ. 1271, Guidelines for the Approval
of High-Expansion Foam Systems Using Inside Air for the Protection of Machinery Spaces and
Cargo Pump-Rooms.

Foam concentrates are to be of an approved type.*

Note: *Reference is made to the International Maritime Organization MSC/Circular 670 “Guidelines for the
Performance and Testing Criteria, and Surveys of High-Expansion Foam Concentrates for Fixed Fire-
Extinguishing Systems.”
11.5.2 Fixed Low Expansion Foam Systems
Low expansion foam systems may be fitted in addition to the required fixed fire extinguishing
system. In addition to the applicable requirements of the Rules, fixed low expansion foam systems
are to be in accordance with Chapter 6.2.1 and Chapter 6.2.3 of the International Code for Fire
Safety Systems. Foam concentrates are to be of an approved type.**

Note: **Reference is made to the International Maritime Organization MSC/Circular 582 “Guidelines for the
Performance and Testing Criteria, and Surveys of Low-Expansion Foam Concentrates for Fixed Fire-
Extinguishing Systems.”

11.7 Fixed Water Spraying Systems

In addition to the requirements of the Rules, fixed water spraying systems are to be in accordance with
Chapter 7 of the International Code for Fire Safety Systems.

13 Fireman’s Outfit (1 July 2021)

At least two complete fireman’s outfits are to be carried onboard the craft.

Each outfit is to consist of an approved breathing apparatus, a lifeline, a safety lamp, an axe, non-
conducting boots and gloves, a rigid helmet and protective clothing.

Two (2) spare charges are to be provided for each required breathing apparatus. All air cylinders for
breathing apparatus are to be interchangeable.

A minimum of two two-way portable radiotelephone apparatus for each fire party for fire-fighter's
communication are to be carried on board. Those two-way portable radiotelephone apparatus are to be of
certified safe type suitable for use in zone 1 hazardous areas, as defined in IEC Publication 60079. The
minimum requirements in respect to the apparatus group and temperature class are to be consistent with
the most restrictive requirements for the hazardous area zone on board which is accessible to the fire party.

The fireman’s outfits and equipment are to be stored so as to be easily accessible and ready for use and are
to be stored in widely separate positions.

15 Emergency Escape Breathing Devices (EEBDs)

15.1 Accommodation Spaces

All ships are to carry at least two emergency escape breathing devices and one spare device within
accommodation spaces.

15.3 Machinery Spaces

On all craft, within the machinery spaces, emergency escape breathing devices are to be situated ready for
use at easily visible places, which can be reached quickly and easily at any time in the event of fire. The
location of emergency escape breathing devices is to take into account the layout of the machinery space
and the number of persons normally working in the spaces. (See the Guidelines for the performance,

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 207
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

location, use and care of emergency escape breathing devices, MSC/Circ. 849 and 1081). The number and
locations of EEBDs are to be indicated in the fire control plan required in 4-5-1/1.9.

A summary of the MSC/Circ. 1081 requirements are shown in 4-5-2/15.3 TABLE 2. This applies to
machinery spaces where crew are normally employed or may be present on a routine basis.

TABLE 2
Minimum Number of Required EEBDs

A. In machinery spaces for category A containing internal combustion machinery used for main propulsion (1) :

a) One (1) EEBD in the engine control room, if located within the machinery space
b) One (1) EEBD in workshop areas. If there is, however, a direct access to an escape way from the workshop, an
EEBD is not required; and
c) One (1) EEBD on each deck or platform level near the escape ladder constituting the second means of escape
from the machinery space (the other means being an enclosed escape trunk or watertight door at the lower level
of the space).
B. In machinery spaces of category A other than those containing internal combustion machinery used for main
propulsion,

One (1) EEBD should, as a minimum, be provided on each deck or platform level near the escape ladder constituting the
second means of escape from the space (the other means being an enclosed escape trunk or watertight door at the lower
level of the space).

C. In other machinery spaces

The number and location of EEBDs are to be determined by the Flag Administration.

Note:

1 Alternatively, a different number or location may be determined by the Flag Administration taking into
consideration the layout and dimensions or the normal manning of the space.

17 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Spare charges are to be provided for 100% of the first ten (10) extinguishers and 50% of the remaining fire
extinguishers capable of being recharged on board. Not more than sixty (60) total spare charges are
required. Instructions for recharging are to be carried on board.

For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, additional portable fire extinguishers of the
same quantity, type, capacity and number, as determined above, are to be provided in lieu of spare charges.

19 Portable Foam Applicator Units

Each Category A machinery space is to be provided with at least one portable foam applicator unit.

19.1 Specification
A portable foam applicator unit is to consist of a foam nozzle/branch pipe, either of a self-inducing type or
in combination with a separate inductor, capable of being connected to the fire main by a fire hose,
together with a portable tank containing at least 20 l (5.3 US gal.) of foam concentrate and at least one
spare tank of foam concentrate of the same capacity.

19.3 System Performance (2020)

i) The nozzle/branch pipe and inductor is to be capable of producing effective foam suitable for
extinguishing an oil fire, at a foam solution flow rate of at least 200 l/min (52.8 gpm) at the
nominal pressure in the fire main.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 208
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

ii) The foam concentrate shall be approved by ABS based on guidelines in the Guidelines for the
Performance and Testing Criteria and Surveys of Low-expansion Foam Concentrates for Fixed
Fire-extinguishing Systems (MSC/Circ.1312 and Corr.1).
iii) The values of the foam expansion and drainage time of the foam produced by the portable foam
applicator unit is not to differ more than ±10% of that determined in 4-5-2/19.3.ii).
iv) The portable foam applicator unit is to be designed to withstand clogging, ambient temperature
changes, vibration, humidity, shock, impact and corrosion normally encountered on ships.

21 Sample Extraction Smoke Detection Systems

Any required fixed sample extraction smoke detection system is to meet the requirements in Chapter 10 of
the International Code for Fire Safety Systems.

23 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in way of Cargo Spaces

23.1 Cargo Craft of 2000 Gross Tons and Over

Except for cargo spaces covered by 4-5-2/25 and 4-5-2/27, cargo spaces of cargo craft of 2000 gross tons
and above are to be provided with approved fixed fire extinguishing systems.

23.3 Exceptions
A fixed system need not be fitted in the case of cargo holds fitted with steel hatch covers, and where all
ventilators and other openings leading to the holds can be effectively closed, and the craft is constructed
and intended solely for carrying ore, coal, grain, unseasoned timber or noncombustible cargoes.

23.5 Controls
As an alternative to providing the controls required by 4-5-2/11.1.4, a single manual means may be
provided at the storage location.

25 Ro-Ro Cargo Spaces

25.1 Fire Detection

An approved automatic fire detection and fire alarm system complying with 4-5-1/13 and the following is
to be provided. Manual call points are to be provided to activate the fire alarm from the navigation bridge
and the passageways having entrances to the ro-ro spaces. The fire alarm indicator/control panel is to be
located on the bridge or at the fire control station, if provided. When the indicator/control panel is located
at the fire control station, an additional alarm is to be provided on the navigation bridge.

25.3 Fire Extinguishing Arrangements

Ro-ro cargo spaces capable of being sealed are to be fitted with an approved fixed gas fire extinguishing
system. If a carbon dioxide system is fitted, the quantity of gas available is to be at least sufficient to give a
minimum volume of free gas equal to 45% of the gross volume of the largest such cargo space which is
capable of being sealed, and the arrangements are to be such as to ensure that at least two thirds of the gas
required for the relevant spaces is introduced within 10 minutes.

In lieu of the above, a fixed high expansion foam system or water spray system may be fitted subject to
special consideration. Ro-ro spaces not capable of being sealed are to be fitted with a fixed pressure water-
spraying system. The water-spraying system, drainage and pumping arrangements will be subject to
special consideration.

As an alternative to providing the controls required by 4-5-2/11.1.4, a single manual means may be
provided at the storage location.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 209
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2

25.5 Portable Fire Extinguishers

At least one approved portable extinguisher is to be located at each cargo space access.

25.7 Ro-Ro Spaces Carrying Motor Vehicles with Fuel in Their Tanks
25.7.1
Each ro-ro cargo space intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their
own propulsion is to meet the requirements of 4-6-6/1.5.

25.7.2
Gravity drainage systems are not to be led to machinery spaces or other spaces where sources of
ignition are present.

25.7.3
In addition, each space is to be provided with at least three water fog applicators and one portable
foam applicator unit complying with the provisions of 4-5-2/19, provided that at least two such
units are available on the craft for use in such ro-ro cargo spaces.

25.7.4
Portable fire extinguishers suitable for fighting oil fires are to be provided at each vehicle deck
level in all spaces where vehicles are carried. Extinguishers are to be located not more than 20 m
(65 ft) apart on both sides of the craft. Portable extinguishers required under 4-5-2/25.5 may be
credited in meeting this requirement.

27 Cargo Spaces Carrying Vehicles with Fuel in Their Tanks (Other

Than Ro-Ro Spaces)
Cargo spaces, other than ro-ro spaces, intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks
for their own propulsion are to comply with 4-5-2/25 with the following exceptions:

i) A sample extraction smoke detection system complying with the provisions of 4-5-2/21 may be
permitted in lieu of 4-5-2/25.1, and
ii) The provisions of 4-5-2/25.7.3 and 4-5-2/25.7.4 may be omitted

29 Release of Smoke from Machinery Space

Suitable arrangements are to be made to permit the release of smoke, in the event of fire, from the
machinery space of Category A. The normal ventilation may be acceptable for this purpose. The means of
control is to be provided for permitting the release of smoke and such control is to be located outside the
space concerned so that they will not be rendered inaccessible in the event of fire in the space they serve.
See also 4-6-3/5.17.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 210
 PART 4
CHAPTER 5
Fire Extinguishing Systems

SECTION 3
Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons

1 Fire Pumps, Fire Mains, Fire Hydrants and Fire Fighter's Outfits
(2020)

1.1 Number of Pumps (2020)

All craft are to have at least two fire pumps.

On craft having a gross tonnage exceeding 150 tons, at least one of the fire pumps is to be an independent
power driven pump. The second fire pump may be driven by the main engine.

On crafts having a gross tonnage of 150 tons and below, at least one of the fire pumps is to be power
driven, and may be driven by the main engine. The second fire pump may be a hand operated pump.

1.1.1 Capacity (2020)

i) The total capacities of the main fire pumps for crafts of under 500 gross tonnage are to be
in compliance with SOLAS Ch. II-2/10.2.2.4.1. The capacity of each individual fire pump
is to meet SOLAS Ch. II-2/10-2.2.4.2 but in any case is not to be less than 25 m3/hour.
Each fire pump shall, in any event, be capable of delivering at least the two required jets
of water.
ii) The pressure head of the main fire pump is to be so chosen that the requirements of
SOLAS Ch. II-2/10.2.1.6 are met. Alternately, on crafts of more than 150 gross tonnage
when using a portable fire pump the pressure and quantity of water delivered by the pump
is to be sufficient to produce a jet of water, at any nozzle, of not less than 12 m in length.
iii) On crafts of less than 150 gross tonnage the jet of water will be specially considered.
iv) On crafts above 150 gross tonnage an additional power driven fire pump is to be provided
in a position outside the space containing the main fire pump.
v) On crafts less than 150 gross tonnage this pump can be hand-operated. The additional
pump is to have sufficient capacity and pressure to provide a 6 m jet throw with a nozzle
of not less than 9 mm diameter. The jet throw is to be capable of being directed to any
part of the craft.
1.1.2 Fire Mains and Hydrants (1 July 2021)
i) The fire main is to have a diameter of sufficient size to maintain a steady distribution and
pressure.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 211
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons 4-5-3

ii) A sufficient number of fire hydrants are to be provided and so located that at least one jet
of water can reach any normally accessible part of craft.
iii) At least one hydrant is to be provided in the machinery space.
iv) Not less than three (3) fire hoses of at least 15 m in length, complete with coupling and
nozzles, are to be provided.
v) Fire hoses for vessels over 20 m (65 ft) in length are to be at least 38 mm (1.5 in.) in
diameter. Fire hoses for vessels under 20 m (65 ft) in length may be of a good commercial
grade having a diameter of not less than 16 mm (5/8 in.), and are to have a minimum test
pressure of 10.3 bar (10.5 kgf/cm2, 150 psi) and a minimum burst pressure of 31.0 bar
(31.6 kgf/cm2, 450 psi).
vi) The nozzles are to be of dual purpose (spray/jet) type with 12 mm jet and integral shut-
off.
vii) The jet is to be reduced to 10 mm and shut-off omitted for crafts with hand-operated fire
pumps.
1.1.3 Fire Fighter's Outfits (2020)
i) Crafts above 150 gross tonnage are to be provided with at least two (2) complete sets of
fire-fighter’s outfits stored in separate locations. crafts of 150 gross tonnage and below
are to be provided with at least one (1) complete set of fire fighter’s outfit.
ii) The fire fighter’s outfits are to be as required for crafts of 500 gross tonnage and above
(ref. SOLAS Ch. II-2/10.10)

1.3 Capacity
The capacity of each power-driven fire pump is to be in accordance with the 4-5-3/1.3 TABLE 1. Hand
pumps, where permitted, are to have a minimum capacity of 1.1 m3/hr (5 gpm).

3 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems

3.1 Fixed Systems

For all craft, fixed fire extinguishing systems are to be fitted in the machinery spaces when propulsion and
auxiliary engines with a total aggregate power of 750 kW (1000 bhp) or greater are installed (see
4-1-1/13.1) and in any machinery space in which an oil fuel unit for heated fuel oil is installed, regardless
of the total aggregate power. Also see 4-5-2/11.

3.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems

Where a fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system is installed, the system is to comply with the
requirements of 4-5-2/11.1 and 4-5-2/11.3, except that storage arrangements may be in accordance with the
following.

3.3.1 Storage
Generally, the cylinders are to be located outside of the protected space in a room which is situated
in a safe and readily accessible location. The access doors to the storage space are to open
outwards. The storage room is to be gastight and effectively ventilated. The ventilation system is
to be independent of the protected space. Any entrance to the storage room is to be independent of
the protected space, except that where this is impracticable due to space limitations, the following
requirements may be considered:

i) The door between the storage location and the protected space is to be self-closing with
no hold-back arrangements.
ii) The space where cylinders are stored is to be adequately ventilated by a system which is
independent of the protected space.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 212
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons 4-5-3

iii) Means are to be provided to prevent unauthorized release of gas, such as containment
behind a break glass.
iv) There is to be provision to vent the bottles to the atmosphere in order to prevent a hazard
to personnel occupying the storage area.
v) An additional entrance to the storage location, independent of the protected space, is
provided.

5 Portable Extinguishers (2020)

i) Each powder or carbon dioxide extinguisher is to have a capacity of at least 5 kg and each foam
extinguisher shall have a capacity of at least 9 L.
ii) Not less than three (3) portable fire extinguishers are to be provided in the accommodation and
service spaces.
iii) Not less than two (2) portable fire extinguishers, suitable for extinguishing oil fires, are to be
provided in spaces containing any oil fuel installation.
iv) In machinery spaces containing internal combustion machinery, one (1) portable fire extinguisher
is to be provided for every 375 kW of engine power, however, the total number is not to be less
than two (2) and need not to exceed six (6).

7 Axe
One fire axe is to be provided on each craft.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 213
 PART 4
CHAPTER 5
Fire Extinguishing Systems

SECTION 4
Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length

1 General
Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in length are to comply with the following and the requirements of
4-5-1/1, 4-5-1/9, and 4-5-1/15.

3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants, and Hoses

3.1 Number of Pumps

All craft are to have at least two fire pumps. Only one of the pumps need be independently power-driven,
and one of the pumps may be attached to the propulsion unit. For craft less than 24 m (79 ft) in length, one
power-driven pump, which may be an attached unit, and one hand operated fire pump may be provided.

3.3 Pump Capacity and Pressure

Power driven pumps are to have a capacity of at least 5.5 m3/hr (25 gpm). Hand pumps, where permitted
are to have a minimum capacity of at least 1.1 m3/hr (5 gpm). The pumps are to have sufficient pressure
such that they are capable of directing an effective stream of water to any part of the craft through any
single hydrant.

3.5 Materials
Piping for the fire main is to meet the requirements of 4-4-2/5.

3.7 Hydrants
The number and position of the hydrants are to be such that at least one jet of water may reach any part of
the craft with a single hose.

3.9 Hoses and Nozzles

Hoses may be of a good commercial grade having a diameter of not less than 16 mm (5/8 in.) and are to
have a minimum test pressure of 10.3 bar (10.5 kgf/cm2 150 psi) and a minimum burst pressure of 31.0 bar
(31.6 kgf/cm2, 450 psi).

One fire hose with the couplings and nozzle is to be provided for each hydrant and for each portable hand
pump. Additionally, at least one spare hose is to be kept onboard.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 214
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-5-4

Nozzles are to be the dual-purpose type (with spray and jet capability) and may be of commercial grade
with a rating at least equal to the hose.

5 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Portable extinguishers are to be provided in the quantities and locations indicated in 4-5-4/5 TABLE 1. See
4-5-1/17 TABLE 2 for classification.

TABLE 1
Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers

Space Classification Quantity and Location

Safety Areas

Communicating corridors A-II 1 in each main corridor

(May be located in stairways)

Pilothouse C-II 1 in vicinity of exit. See Note 3.

Accommodations

Sleeping accommodations A-II 1 in each slopping accommodation space. (Where

occupied by more than 4 persons)

Service Spaces

Galley B-II or C-II 1 for each galley

Storerooms A-II 1 for each located in vicinity of exits, either inside or

outside of spaces. See Note 3.

Workshops A-II 1 outside the space in vicinity of exit. See Note 3.

Machinery Spaces/Machinery Compartments

Internal combustion or gas turbine engines B-II 1 for each 746 kW (1000 hp), but not less than 2 nor
in an engine room (5) more than 6. See Note 1 and Note 4

Internal combustion or gas turbine engines B-II 1 for each engine propulsion engine, but not less than
in an engine compartment (6) 2

Outboard engines B-II 1 required

Electric motors or generators of the open C-II 1 for each motor generator unit. See Note 2.
type

Notes

1 When installation is on weather deck or open to atmosphere at all times, one B-II for every three engines is
allowable.

2 Small electrical appliances, such as fans, etc., are not to be counted or used as bases for determining number of
extinguishers required.

3 Vicinity is intended to mean within 1 m (3 ft).

4 For engine rooms, at least one fire extinguisher is to be located outside the machinery spaces in vicinity of the
entrance to the space.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 215
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-5-4

5 An engine room is defined as an enclosed space which contains the propulsion or generating machinery fitted
with a door and having sufficient size so that a person can safely enter the space with all equipment in
operation.

6 An engine compartment is defined as an enclosed space which contains the propulsion or generating
machinery of sufficient size for the equipment only and is typically not accessed while the craft is in operation.

7 Machinery Spaces
Engine Rooms (as defined in 4-5-4/5 TABLE 1, Note 5) and Engine Compartments (as defined in 4-5-4/5
TABLE 1, Note 6), with propulsion and auxiliary engines having a total aggregate power of 750 kW
(1000 bhp) or greater are installed are to be fitted with a fixed fire extinguishing system complying with
4-5-2/11.

Automatic release may be approved for small, unattended engine rooms fitted with a Medium Release
Warning System complying with 4-5-2/11.1.3. Also, warning signs are to be provided, indicating that the
space is protected by an automatic fire extinguishing system.

The storage containers may be located inside the protected space, provided the controls for the release of
the medium are located in a readily accessible location outside protected space. Furthermore, the point
where the controls enter the protected space to the location of the storage containers is as short as practical.

Engine Rooms (as defined in 4-5-4/5 TABLE 1, Note 5) and Engine Compartments (as defined in 4-5-4/5
TABLE 1, Note 6) are to be fitted with a fire detection system complying with 4-5-1/13

9 Accommodation and Service Spaces

A fire detection and alarm system complying with 4-5-1/13 is to be provided for accommodation and
service spaces where the sum of the length of the spaces is greater than 5 meters (16.5 feet) or where
sleeping accommodations are provided, regardless of length of the spaces.

11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems

In addition to 4-5-2/11, other extinguishing systems may be approved, provided they are shown to be no
less effective than approved gas systems.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 216
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General..............................................................................................226
1 Applications................................................................................ 226
3 Definitions................................................................................... 226
3.1 Cascade Protection (2014)............................................ 226
3.3 Earth (2014)...................................................................226
3.5 Earthed Distribution System.......................................... 226
3.7 Essential Services......................................................... 227
3.9 Explosion-proof (Flameproof) Equipment...................... 227
3.11 Hazardous Area (Hazardous Location)......................... 227
3.13 High Voltage (2014)....................................................... 227
3.15 Hull-return System......................................................... 227
3.17 Increased Safety............................................................227
3.19 Inhomogeneous Field (2014).........................................227
3.21 Intrinsically-safe............................................................. 227
3.23 Low Voltage (2016)........................................................228
3.25 Minimum Comfortable Condition of Habitability (2014). 228
3.27 Nominal Voltage (2014)................................................. 228
3.29 Non-periodic Duty Rating...............................................228
3.31 Non-sparking Fan.......................................................... 228
3.33 Overvoltage Category (2014)........................................ 228
3.35 Overvoltage Withstand Test (2014)............................... 228
3.37 Periodic Duty Rating...................................................... 228
3.39 Pollution Degree (2014).................................................229
3.41 Portable Apparatus........................................................ 229
3.43 Pressurized Equipment..................................................229
3.45 Semi-enclosed Space....................................................229
3.47 Separate Circuit............................................................. 229
3.49 Short Circuit................................................................... 229
3.51 Short-time Rating...........................................................229
5 Plans and Data to Be Submitted.................................................229
7 Standard Distribution System (2014)..........................................229

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 217
 9 Voltage and Frequency Variations.............................................. 230
11 Materials..................................................................................... 230
13 Insulation Material.......................................................................230
13.1 Class A Insulation.......................................................... 230
13.3 Class B Insulation.......................................................... 230
13.5 Class E Insulation.......................................................... 230
13.7 Class F Insulation.......................................................... 230
13.9 Class H Insulation..........................................................230
13.11 Insulation for Temperature Above 180°C (356°F)..........230
15 Degree of Protection for Enclosure ............................................231
17 Temperature Ratings.................................................................. 231
17.1 General (2014)...............................................................231
17.3 Reduced Ambient Temperature..................................... 231
19 Clearances and Creepage Distances......................................... 232
21 Service Trial................................................................................232
21.1 Electrical Installation for Ship Services..........................232
21.3 Communication Facilities...............................................232

TABLE 1 Voltage and Frequency Variations [See 4-6-1/9] ...............232

TABLE 2 Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment (First IP
Numeral)............................................................................ 233
TABLE 3 Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment (Second
IP Numeral) (2016).............................................................233
TABLE 4 Primary Essential Services ............................................... 234
TABLE 5 Secondary Essential Services ...........................................235

SECTION 2 Shipboard Systems......................................................................... 236

1 Plans and Data to be Submitted................................................. 236
1.1 Wiring.............................................................................236
1.3 Short-circuit Data (2016)................................................237
1.5 Protective Device Coordination..................................... 237
1.7 Load Analysis................................................................ 237
3 Ship Service Main Source of Power........................................... 238
3.1 Power Supply by Generators.........................................238
3.3 Generator Driven by Propulsion Unit............................. 239
3.5 Sizing of AC Generator..................................................240
5 Emergency Source of Power...................................................... 240
5.1 General.......................................................................... 240
5.2 Alternative to Emergency Source of Power................... 242
5.3 Emergency Services......................................................242
5.5 Power Supply.................................................................244
5.7 Transitional Source of Power.........................................245
5.9 Emergency Switchboard................................................245
5.11 Arrangements for Periodic Testing.................................246

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 218
 5.13 Craft Intended to Carry Passengers.............................. 246
5.15 Starting Arrangements for Emergency Generator Sets. 246
5.16 Use of Emergency Generator in Port (for Craft 500
GT and Over).................................................................247
5.17 Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines248
5.19 Craft Less than 500 GT Having Electrical Plants of
75 kW and Above.......................................................... 249
5.21 Requirements by the Governmental Authority...............250
7 Distribution System.....................................................................250
7.1 Ship Service Distribution System...................................250
7.3 Hull Return System........................................................252
7.5 Earthed Distribution Systems........................................ 252
7.7 External or Shore Power Supply Connection................ 252
7.9 Harmonics (1 July 2017)................................................253
9 Circuit Protection System........................................................... 253
9.1 System Design...............................................................253
9.3 Protection for Generators.............................................. 255
9.5 Protection for Alternating-current (AC) Generators....... 256
9.7 Protection for Direct Current (DC) Generators.............. 257
9.9 Protection for Accumulator Batteries............................. 257
9.11 Protection for External or Shore Power Supply............. 258
9.13 Protection for Motor Branch Circuits..............................258
9.15 Protection for Transformer Circuits................................ 259
9.17 Protection for Meters, Pilot Lamps and Control Circuits 260
9.18 Harmonic Distortion for Ship Electrical Distribution
System including Harmonic Filters(1 July 2017)............260
9.19 Protection of Harmonic Filter Circuits Associated with
Electric Propulsion (1 July 2017)................................... 261
11 System for Steering Gear........................................................... 261
11.1 Power Supply Feeder (1 July 2016).............................. 261
11.3 Protection for Steering Gear Circuit...............................262
11.5 Emergency Power Supply............................................. 262
11.7 Controls, Instrumentation, and Alarms.......................... 262
13 Lighting and Navigation Light Systems.......................................262
13.1 Lighting System............................................................. 262
13.3 Navigation Light System (2017).....................................263
15 Interior Communication Systems................................................264
15.1 Navigation Bridge.......................................................... 264
15.3 Main Propulsion Control Stations.................................. 264
15.5 Voice Communications.................................................. 264
15.7 Emergency and Interior-communication Switchboard... 265
15.9 Public Address System15.9 Public Address System.....265
17 Manually Operated Alarms......................................................... 266
17.1 General Emergency Alarm System............................... 266

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 219
 17.3 Engineers’ Alarm........................................................... 267
17.5 Refrigerated Space Alarm............................................. 267
17.7 Elevator..........................................................................267
19 Fire Protection and Fire Detection Systems............................... 267
19.1 Emergency Stop............................................................ 267
19.3 Fire Detection and Alarm System.................................. 268
21 Special Requirements for Non-metallic Craft..............................268
21.1 Bonding of Metal Parts.................................................. 268
21.3 Pressure Refueling Points............................................. 268
21.5 Metallic Pipes.................................................................268
21.7 Primary Conductors for Lightning Discharge................. 268
21.9 Secondary Conductors.................................................. 268
21.11 Electrical Resistance and Cross Section of Bonding
Path............................................................................... 268
21.13 Lightning Protection System.......................................... 269
21.15 Earthing System............................................................ 269
21.17 Equipment Earthing....................................................... 269

TABLE 1 Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines

[See 4-6-2/5.17] ................................................................ 249

FIGURE 1 Cofferdam with Extension Beyond the Boundaries of

the Space Containing the Emergency Source .................. 241
FIGURE 2 Cofferdam without Extension Beyond the Boundaries of
the Space Containing the Emergency Source .................. 241
FIGURE 3 Boundary Insulated to A-60 with the Insulation
Extending Beyond the Boundaries of the Space
Containing the Emergency Source ................................... 242

SECTION 3 Shipboard Installation..................................................................... 270

1 Plans and Data to be Submitted................................................. 270
1.1 Booklet of Standard Details (2014)................................270
1.3 Arrangement of Electrical Equipment............................ 270
1.5 Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas..................... 271
1.7 Maintenance Schedule of Batteries............................... 271
1.9 Cable Transit Seal Register........................................... 271
3 Equipment Installation and Arrangement....................................272
3.1 General Consideration...................................................272
3.3 Generators.....................................................................273
3.4 Installations subject to Surveyor Satisfaction................ 273
3.5 Ship Service Motors.......................................................274
3.7 Accumulator Batteries....................................................274
3.9 Switchboard (2015)........................................................278
3.11 Distribution Boards........................................................ 278

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 220
 3.13 Motor Controllers and Control Centers.......................... 279
3.15 Resistors for Control Apparatus.....................................279
3.17 Lighting Fixtures............................................................ 279
3.19 Heating Equipment........................................................ 279
3.21 Magnetic Compasses.................................................... 279
3.23 Portable Equipment and Outlets....................................280
3.25 Receptacles and Plugs of Different Ratings (2015).......280
3.27 Installation Requirements for Recovery from Dead
Craft Condition...............................................................280
3.29 Services Required to be Operable Under a Fire
Condition........................................................................280
3.31 High Fire Risk Areas......................................................280
5 Cable Installation........................................................................ 281
5.1 General Considerations................................................. 281
5.3 Insulation Resistance for New Installation..................... 283
5.5 Protection for Electric-magnetic Induction..................... 283
5.7 Joints and Sealing......................................................... 283
5.9 Support, Fixing and Bending......................................... 284
5.11 Cable Run in Bunches................................................... 285
5.13 Deck and Bulkhead Penetrations (1 July 2013).............286
5.15 Mechanical Protection................................................... 287
5.17 Emergency and Essential Feeders................................287
5.19 Mineral Insulated Cables............................................... 288
5.21 Fiber Optic Cables......................................................... 288
5.23 Battery Room.................................................................289
5.25 Paneling and Dome Fixtures......................................... 289
5.27 Sheathing and Structural Insulation...............................289
5.29 Splicing of Electrical Cables.......................................... 289
5.31 Splicing of Fiber Optic Cables....................................... 290
5.33 Cable Junction Box........................................................290
5.35 Installation of Cable Connectors....................................290
6 Busbar Trunking System Installation.......................................... 291
6.1 Component Requirements.............................................291
6.3 System Requirements................................................... 291
6.5 Tests.............................................................................. 292
7 Earthing...................................................................................... 292
7.1 General.......................................................................... 292
7.3 Permanent Equipment................................................... 293
7.5 Connections...................................................................293
7.7 Portable Cords...............................................................293
7.9 Cable Metallic Covering.................................................293
7.11 Lightning Earth Conductors........................................... 293
9 Equipment and Installation in Hazardous Areas.........................293
9.1 General Considerations................................................. 293

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 221
 9.3 Certified-safe Type and Pressurized Equipment and
Systems......................................................................... 295
9.5 Paint Stores................................................................... 296
9.7 Non-sparking Fans........................................................ 297

TABLE 1 Minimum Degree of Protection [See 4-6-3/3.1.1]...............299

TABLE 2 Minimum Bending Radii of Cables [See 4-6-3/5.9.2] ........ 301
TABLE 3 Size of Earth-continuity Conductors and Earthing
Connections [See4-6-3/7.5] .............................................. 301

FIGURE 1 Example of Area Affected by Local Fixed Pressure

Water-sprayingWater-mist Fire Extinguishing System in
Machinery Spaces (2014).................................................. 273
FIGURE 2 Cables Within High Fire Risk Areas .................................. 288

SECTION 4 Machinery and Equipment.............................................................. 303

1 Plans and Data to Be Submitted ................................................303
1.1 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Over........................ 303
1.3 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Below...................... 303
1.5 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc.......303
1.7 Semiconductor Converters for Adjustable Speed
Motor Drives.................................................................. 303
3 Rotating Machines...................................................................... 304
3.1 General.......................................................................... 304
3.3 Testing and Inspection................................................... 305
3.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement..............................305
3.7 Overload and Overcurrent Capability............................ 305
3.9 Dielectric Strength of Insulation..................................... 306
3.11 Temperature Ratings..................................................... 306
3.13 Construction and Assemblies........................................ 307
3.15 Lubrication..................................................................... 308
3.17 Turbines for Generators.................................................308
3.19 Diesel Engines for Generators.......................................309
3.21 Alternating-current (AC) Generators.............................. 311
3.23 Direct-current (DC) Generators..................................... 312
5 Accumulator Batteries.................................................................313
5.1 General.......................................................................... 313
5.3 Construction and Assembly........................................... 314
5.5 Engine-starting Battery.................................................. 314
5.7 VRLA and AGM Batteries Used for Engine Starting......314
7 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc....................314
7.1 General.......................................................................... 314
7.3 Testing and Inspection................................................... 315
7.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement..............................316

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 222
 7.7 Dielectric Strength of Insulation..................................... 316
7.9 Construction and Assembly........................................... 316
7.11 Bus Bars, Wiring and Contacts......................................317
7.13 Control and Protective Devices..................................... 319
7.15 Switchboards................................................................. 320
7.17 Motor Controllers and Control Centers.......................... 320
7.19 Battery Systems and Uninterruptible Power Systems
(UPS)............................................................................. 321
9 Transformers...............................................................................323
9.1 General.......................................................................... 323
9.3 Temperature Rise (2014)............................................... 323
9.5 Construction and Assembly........................................... 323
9.7 Testing........................................................................... 324
10 Semiconductor Converters for Adjustable Speed Motor
Drives (2014).............................................................................. 324
10.1 Application..................................................................... 324
10.3 Standards of Compliance.............................................. 324
10.5 Design, Construction and Assembly Requirements...... 325
10.7 Inspection and Testing................................................... 329
10.9 Integration Requirements.............................................. 332
11 Other Electric and Electronics Devices.......................................333
11.1 Circuit Breakers............................................................. 333
11.3 Fuses............................................................................. 333
11.5 Semiconductor Converters............................................ 333
11.7 Cable Junction Boxes.................................................... 334
13 Cables and Wires....................................................................... 334
13.1 Cable Construction........................................................ 334
13.3 Portable and Flexing Electric Cables.............................336
13.5 Mineral-insulated Metal-sheathed Cable....................... 336
13.7 Cable Connectors.......................................................... 336

TABLE 1 Factory Test Schedule for Generators and Motors ≥ 100

kW (135 hp) [See 4-6-4/3.3.1(a)] ...................................... 337
TABLE 2 Dielectric Strength Test for Rotating Machines [See
4-6-4/3.9]............................................................................338
TABLE 3 Limits of Temperature Rise for Air-Cooled Rotating
Machines [See 4-6-4/3.11.1] (2015)...................................339
TABLE 4 Nameplates........................................................................ 341
TABLE 5 Factory Testing Schedule for Switchboards, Chargers,
Motor Control Centers, and Controllers [See
4-6-4/7.3.1] (2016)............................................................. 341
TABLE 6 Clearance and Creepage Distance for Switchboards,
Distribution Boards, Chargers, MotorControl Centers
and Controllers (1) [See 4-6-4/7.11.6] (2018).......................342

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 223
 TABLE 7 Equipment and Instrumentation for Switchboard [See
4-6-4/7.15.4] (2018)........................................................... 342
TABLE 8 Temperature Rise for Transformers (1, 2) (2014)..................344
TABLE 9 Types of Cable Insulation [See 4-6-4/13.1.4] (2013)..........344
TABLE 10 Maximum Current Carrying Capacity for insulated
copper wires and Cables (2014)........................................ 345
TABLE 11 Additional Services Requiring Electrical Equipment to
be Designed, Constructed and Tested to the
Requirements in 4-6-4[See 4-6-4/1, 4-6-4/3.1.1,
4-6-4/3.3.1, 4-6-4/7.1.1 and 4-6-4/7.3.1]............................ 347

FIGURE 1 Limiting Curves for Loading 4-stroke Diesel Engines

Step by Step from No-load to Rated Power as Function
of the Brake Mean Effective Pressure ...............................310

SECTION 5 Specialized Installations................................................................. 348

1 High Voltage Systems.................................................................348
1.1 General.......................................................................... 348
1.3 System Design...............................................................350
1.5 Circuit Breakers and Switches - Auxiliary Circuit
Power Supply Systems..................................................351
1.7 Circuit Protection........................................................... 351
1.9 Equipment Installation and Arrangement.......................352
1.11 Machinery and Equipment............................................. 354
1.13 Design Operating Philosophy (2014).............................359
1.15 Preliminary Operations Manual (2014).......................... 360
3 Electric Propulsion System ........................................................ 361
3.1 General.......................................................................... 361
3.3 System Design...............................................................362
3.5 Propulsion Power Supply Systems (2014).................... 363
3.7 Circuit Protection (2016)................................................ 364
3.9 Protection for Earth Leakage......................................... 365
3.11 Electric Propulsion Control............................................ 365
3.13 Instrumentation at the Control Station........................... 366
3.15 Equipment Installation and Arrangement (2014)........... 367
3.17 Machinery and Equipment (2014)..................................367
3.19 Dock and Sea Trials (2014)........................................... 370
5 Three-wire Dual-voltage DC System.......................................... 371
5.1 Three-wire DC Ship's Generators..................................371
5.3 Neutral Earthing.............................................................371
5.5 Size of Neutral Conductor..............................................371
7 Electrical Plants of Less Than 75 kW......................................... 371
7.1 General.......................................................................... 371
7.3 Standard Details............................................................ 371
7.5 Calculations of Short-circuit Currents............................ 372

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 224
 7.7 Lightning Protection....................................................... 372
7.9 Temperature Ratings..................................................... 372
7.11 Generators.....................................................................372
7.13 Emergency Source of Power......................................... 372
7.15 Cable Construction........................................................ 373
7.17 Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Panels..............373
7.19 Navigation Lights........................................................... 373
9 Energy Storage Systems............................................................ 373
9.1 Lithium-ion Batteries...................................................... 373
9.3 Supercapacitors.............................................................373

TABLE 1 High Voltage Equipment Locations and Minimum

Degree of Protection (2014)...............................................358

SECTION 6 Specialized Craft and Services.......................................................374

1 Installations in Special-Category Spaces................................... 374
1.1 Application..................................................................... 374
1.3 Ventilation System......................................................... 374
1.5 Location and Type of Equipment................................... 375

SECTION 7 Craft Less Than 24 Meters (79 feet) in Length.............................. 376

1 General....................................................................................... 376
3 Interior Communication Systems and Manually Operated
Alarms.........................................................................................376
5 Battery Starting Systems............................................................ 376

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 225
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 1
General

1 Applications
Electrical apparatus and wiring systems are to be constructed and installed to the satisfaction of the
Surveyor, in accordance with the following requirements which are applicable to all ocean-going craft, but
which may be modified for craft classed for limited service. The following detailed rules are minimum
requirements for classification purposes. Consideration will be given, however, to arrangements or details
which can be shown to comply with other recognized standards, provided they are not less effective.

For craft having an aggregate generator capacity not exceeding 75 kW, the requirements contained in
4-6-5/7 are to be complied with. Where generators are not arranged for parallel operation, the capacity of
the largest generator may be taken as the ‘aggregate generator capacity’. Electrical installations in
machinery spaces with gasoline engines will be specially considered.

For craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in length, the requirements contained in Section 4-6-7 are to be
complied with.

For passenger craft, see Section 5-1-1.

3 Definitions
The following definitions apply for the purpose of this Section.

3.1 Cascade Protection (2014)

The application of protective devices in which the device nearest to the source of power has short-circuit
ratings equal to or in excess of the maximum prospective short-circuit current, while devices in succeeding
steps further from the source have lower short-circuit ratings.

3.3 Earth (2014)

A large conducting body, such as the metal hull of the ship, used as an arbitrary zero of potential.

3.5 Earthed Distribution System

A system in which one pole of a single phase system or the neutral point of a three phase system is earthed,
but the earthing connection does not normally carry current.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 226
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

3.7 Essential Services

Essential services are those considered necessary for:

● Continuous operation to maintain propulsion and steering (primary essential services);

● Non-continuous operation to maintain propulsion and steering and a minimum level of safety for the
craft’s navigation and systems, including safety for dangerous cargoes to be carried (secondary
essential services); and
● Emergency services as described in 4-6-2/5.3 (each service is either primary essential or secondary
essential depending upon its nature).

Examples of primary essential services and secondary essential services are as listed in 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE
4 and 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 5, respectively.

3.9 Explosion-proof (Flameproof) Equipment

Explosion-proof equipment is equipment:

3.9.1
Having an enclosure capable of:

i) Withstanding an explosion within it of a specified flammable gas or vapor, and

ii) Preventing the ignition of the specified flammable gas or vapor in the atmosphere
surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes or explosions of the gas or vapor within, and
3.9.2 (2016)
Operates at such an external temperature that a surrounding flammable atmosphere will not be
ignited. Where explosion-proof equipment is required by these Rules, equipment certified as being
flameproof, as defined in IEC Publication 60079 series or other recognized standard may be
accepted.

3.11 Hazardous Area (Hazardous Location)

An area where flammable or explosive vapor, gas, or dust may normally be expected to accumulate.

3.13 High Voltage (2014)

High Voltage in these Rules refers to voltages above 1000 V up to and including 15 kV AC.

3.15 Hull-return System

A system in which insulated conductors are provided for connection to one pole or phase of the supply, the
hull of the craft or other permanently earthed structure being used for effecting connections to the other
pole or phase.

3.17 Increased Safety

Type of protection applied to electrical apparatus that does not produce arcs or sparks in normal service, in
which additional measures are applied so as to give increased security against the possibility of excessive
temperatures and of the occurrence of arc and sparks. See IEC Publication 600797.

3.19 Inhomogeneous Field (2014)

An electric field which does not have a constant voltage gradient between electrodes.

3.21 Intrinsically-safe
A circuit or part of a circuit is intrinsically safe when any spark or any thermal effect produced in the test
conditions prescribed in a recognized standard (such as IEC Publication 60079-11) is incapable of causing
ignition of the prescribed explosive gas atmosphere.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 227
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

3.21.1 Category “ia” (2016)

Apparatus which is incapable of causing ignition in normal operation, or with a single fault, or
with any combination of two faults applied, with the following safety factors:

In normal operation: 1.5

With one fault: 1.5

With two faults: 1.0

Above safety factors are applied to the current, voltage, or their combination, as specified in 5.2 of
IEC Publication 60079-11.

3.23 Low Voltage (2016)

Low Voltage in these Rules refers to voltages up to and including 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC.

3.25 Minimum Comfortable Condition of Habitability (2014)

A condition in which at least services such as cooking, heating, domestic refrigeration, mechanical
ventilation, sanitary and fresh water are adequately provided.

3.27 Nominal Voltage (2014)

Nominal Voltage ( Un ) – The nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently
designating its voltage class (as 120/240 V, 480/277 V, 600 V). The actual voltage at which a circuit
operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.

Uo (as relates to cable voltage rating) – The rated power frequency voltage between conductor and earth or
metallic screen for which the cable is designed.

3.29 Non-periodic Duty Rating

A rating at which the machine is operated continuously or intermittently with varying load and speed
within the permissible operating range. The load and speed variations include the overloads applied
frequently, which may greatly exceed the full load rating of the machine.

3.31 Non-sparking Fan

A fan consisting of a combination of impeller and housing which are unlikely to produce sparks by static
electricity or by entry of foreign objects in both normal and abnormal conditions.

3.33 Overvoltage Category (2014)

Overvoltage Category (of a circuit or within an electrical system)– Conventional number based on limiting
the values of prospective transient overvoltages occurring in a circuit and depending on the means
employed to influence the overvoltages.

3.35 Overvoltage Withstand Test (2014)

Overvoltage Withstand Test (layer test) – Test intended to verify the power-frequency withstand strength
along the winding under test and between its phase (strength between turns and between layers in the
windings).

3.37 Periodic Duty Rating

A rating at which the machine is operated repeatedly on a cycle of sequential loading with starting, electric
braking, no-load running, rest and de-energized periods, where applicable. The time for the duration of
operating cycle (duty cycle) is to be 10 minutes and the ratio (i.e., cyclic duration factor) between the
period of loading (including starting and electric braking) and the duty cycle is to be one of the values of
15%, 25%, 40% or 60%.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 228
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

3.39 Pollution Degree (2014)

Pollution Degree (of environmental conditions) – A conventional number based on the amount of
conductive or hygroscopic dust, ionized gas or salt, and on the relative humidity and its frequency of
occurrence resulting in hygroscopic absorption or condensation of moisture leading to reduction in
dielectric strength and/or surface resistivity of the insulating materials of devices and components.

3.41 Portable Apparatus

Portable apparatus is any apparatus served by a flexible cord.

3.43 Pressurized Equipment

Equipment having an enclosure in which positive pressure is maintained to prevent against the ingress of
external atmosphere and complying with the requirements in 4-6-3/9.3.3.

3.45 Semi-enclosed Space

A space limited by decks and/or bulkheads in such a manner that the natural conditions of ventilation in
the space are notably different from those obtained on open deck.

3.47 Separate Circuit

A circuit which is independently protected by a circuit protection device at the final sub-circuit and is
dedicated to a single load.

3.49 Short Circuit

A short circuit is an abnormal connection through a negligible impedance, whether made accidentally or
intentionally, between two points of different potential in a circuit.

3.51 Short-time Rating

A rating at which the machine is operated for a limited period, which is less than that required to reach the
steady temperature condition, followed by a rest and de-energized period of sufficient duration to re-
establish the machine temperature within 2°C (3.6°F) of the coolant.

5 Plans and Data to Be Submitted

See 4-6-2/1, 4-6-3/1, 4-6-4/1 and 4-6-5/3.3.

7 Standard Distribution System (2014)

The following are recognized as standard systems of distribution. Distribution systems differing from these
will be specially considered.

● Two-wire direct current

● Three-wire direct current
● Two-wire single-phase alternating
● Three-wire three-phase alternating current*
● Four-wire three-phase alternating current with solidly earthed neutral but not with hull return
Note: *Three-wire single-phase AC may be used in conjunction with this system for lighting.

However, the electrical distribution voltages throughout the craft are not to exceed:

● 500 V for power cooking heating and other permanently connected equipment; and
● 250 V for lighting, internal communications and receptacle outlets.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 229
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

Subject to the acceptance by the Administration, high voltage systems as outlined in 4-6-5/1 may be
acceptable for propulsion systems.

9 Voltage and Frequency Variations

Electrical appliances supplied from the main or emergency systems, are to be so designed and
manufactured that they are capable of being operated satisfactorily under the normally occurring variations
in voltage and frequency. Unless otherwise stated in national or international standards, the variations from
the rated value may be taken from the 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 1. Any special system, such as electronic
circuits, which cannot operate satisfactorily within the limit shown in 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 1, is not to be
supplied directly from the system but by alternative means, such as through a stabilized supply.

For generators, see 4-6-4/3.17.1, 4-6-4/3.19.1, and 4-6-4/3.21.2.

11 Materials
All electrical equipment is to be constructed of durable and flame-retardant materials. Materials are to be
resistant to corrosion, moisture, high and low temperatures, and are to have other qualities necessary to
prevent deterioration in the ambient conditions that the equipment may be expected to encounter.

13 Insulation Material
For the purposes of these requirements, insulating material is designated as follows.

13.1 Class A Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as cotton, silk and paper when suitably impregnated or coated
or when immersed in a dielectric liquid such as oil. Other materials or combinations of materials may be
included in this class if by experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at
105°C (221°F).

13.3 Class B Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as mica, glass fiber, etc., with suitable bonding substances.
Other materials or combinations of materials, not necessarily inorganic, may be included in this class if by
experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at 130°C (266°F).

13.5 Class E Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials which by experience or accepted tests can be shown to be capable
of operation at 120°C (248°F) (materials possessing a degree of thermal stability allowing them to be
operated at a temperature 15°C (27°F) higher than Class A materials).

13.7 Class F Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as mica, glass fiber, etc., with suitable bonding substances.
Other materials or combinations of materials, not necessarily inorganic, may be included in this class if by
experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at 155°C (311°F).

13.9 Class H Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as silicone elastomer, mica, glass fiber, etc., with suitable
bonding substances such as appropriate silicone resins. Other materials or combinations of materials may
be included in this class if by experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at
180°C (356°F).

13.11 Insulation for Temperature Above 180°C (356°F)

Materials or combination of materials which by experience or accepted tests can be shown to be capable of
satisfactory operation at temperature over 180°C (356°F) will also be considered. Supporting background

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 230
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

experience or report of tests conducted in accordance with a recognized standard ascertaining their
suitability for the intended application and temperature operation are to be submitted for review.

15 Degree of Protection for Enclosure

The designation to indicate the degree of protection consists of the characteristic letters IP followed by two
numerals (the “characteristic numerals”) indicating conformity with conditions stated in 4-6-1/21.3
TABLE 2 and 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 3. The test and inspection for determining the degree of protection may
be carried out in accordance with IEC Publication 60529 by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests
will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS. The type of enclosure required for
protection of equipment is to be suitable for the intended location. See 4-6-3/3.1.1 for selection of a
protective enclosure for electrical equipment based on location condition. Equipment in compliance with
recognized national standards will also be considered. For high voltage equipment see 4-6-5/1 TABLE 1.

17 Temperature Ratings

17.1 General (2014)

For purposes of rating of equipment a maximum ambient air temperature of 45°C (113°F) is to be
assumed.

Where ambient temperatures in excess of 45°C (113°F) are expected the rating of equipment is to be based
on the actual maximum ambient air temperature.

The use of lower ambient temperatures may be considered provided the total rated temperature of the
equipment is not exceeded and where the lower values can be demonstrated. The use of a value for
ambient temperature less than 40°C (104°F) is only permitted in spaces that are environmentally
controlled.

17.3 Reduced Ambient Temperature

17.3.1 Environmentally Controlled Spaces
Where electrical equipment is installed within environmentally-controlled spaces, the ambient
temperature for which the equipment is to be rated may be reduced from 45°C and maintained at a
value not less than 35°C, provided:

i) The equipment is not to be used for emergency services.

ii) Temperature control is achieved by at least two independent cooling systems so arranged
that in the event of loss of one cooling system for any reason, the remaining system(s) is
capable of satisfactorily maintaining the design temperature. The cooling equipment is to
be rated for a 45°C ambient temperature.
iii) The equipment is to be able to initially start to work safely at a 45°C ambient temperature
until such a time that the lesser ambient temperature may be achieved.
iv) Audible and visual alarms are provided, at a continually-manned control station, to
indicate any malfunction of the cooling systems.
17.3.2 Rating of Cables
In accepting a lesser ambient temperature than 45°C, it is to be ensured that electrical cables for
their entire length are adequately rated for the maximum ambient temperature to which they are
exposed along their length.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 231
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

17.3.3 Ambient Temperature Control Equipment

The equipment used for cooling and maintaining the lesser ambient temperature is to be classified
as a secondary essential service, in accordance with 4-6-1/3.7, and the capability of cooling is to
be witnessed by the Surveyor at sea trial.

19 Clearances and Creepage Distances

The distances between live parts of different potential and between live parts and the case or other earthed
metal, whether across surfaces or in air, are to be adequate for working voltage having regard to the nature
of the insulating material and the conditions of service. See 4-6-4/7.11.6 and 4-6-5/1.1.3 for additional
requirements for switchboard and high voltage systems.

21 Service Trial

21.1 Electrical Installation for Ship Services

All auxiliary apparatus is to be tried under working conditions. Each generator is to be run for a time
sufficient to show satisfactory operation, and parallel operation with all possible combinations is to be
demonstrated. Each auxiliary motor necessary to the operation of the craft is to be run for a time sufficient
to show satisfactory performance at such load as can readily be obtained. All main switches and circuit
breakers are to be operated, but not necessarily at full load. The operation of the lighting system, heaters,
etc., is to be satisfactorily demonstrated. The entire installation is to operate to the satisfaction of the
Surveyor, and the drop in voltage on any part of the installation is not to exceed 6%. See 4-6-3/5.1.3.

21.3 Communication Facilities

Satisfactory operation of the interior communications system required by 4-6-2/15 is to be demonstrated to
the Surveyor during sea trials. Particular attention is to be given to demonstrating that the voice
communication systems required by 4-6-2/15 provide the capability of carrying on a conversation while
the craft is being navigated.

TABLE 1
Voltage and Frequency Variations [See 4-6-1/9]

Voltage and Frequency Variations

for AC Distribution Systems

Quantity in Operation Permanent Variation Transient Variation

(Recovery Time)

Frequency ±5% ±10% (5 s)

Voltage +6%, -10% ±20% (1.5 s)

Voltage Variations for DC Distribution Systems

(such as systems supplied by DC generators or rectifiers)

Parameters Variations

Voltage tolerance (continuous) ±10%

Voltage cyclic variation deviation 5%

Voltage ripple (AC r.m.s over steady DC voltage) 10%

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 232
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

Voltage Variations for Battery Systems

Type of System Variations

Components connected to the battery during charging (see Note) +30%, –25%

Components not connected to the battery during charging +20%, –25%

Note: Different voltage variations as determined by the charging/discharging characteristics, including the ripple
voltage from the charging device, may be considered.

TABLE 2
Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment (First IP Numeral)

First IP Short Description Definition

Numeral

0 Non-protected No special protection

1 Protected against solid objects A large surface of the body, such as a hand (but no protection against
greater than 50 mm (2 in.) deliberate access). Solid object exceeding 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter.

2 Protected against solid objects Fingers or similar objects not exceeding 80 mm (3.15 in.) in length.
greater than 50 mm (2 in.) Solid objects exceeding 12 mm (0.5 in.) in diameter.

3 Protected against solid objects Tools, wires, etc. of diameter or thickness greater than 2.5 mm (0.1 in.).
greater than 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Solid objects exceeding 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) in diameter

4 Protected against solid objects Wires or strips of thickness greater than 1 mm (0.04 in.). Solid objects
greater than 1 mm (0.04 in.) exceeding 1 mm (0.04 in.) in diameter.

5 Dust protected Ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust does not enter in
sufficient quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of the
equipment

6 Dust-tight No ingress of dust

[Designation]

The degree of protection is designated as shown in the following examples:

When it is required to indicate the degree of protection by only one characteristic numeral which shows either
degree of protection against foreign bodies and electrical shock or against liquid, the omitted numeral is to be
replaced by the letter X.

Examples:

1 IP56 The first characteristic numeral of “5”

The second characteristic numeral of “6”.

2 IPX5 Degree of protection against only liquid.

3 IP2X Degree of protection against only foreign bodies and electrical shock.

TABLE 3
Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment (Second IP Numeral) (2016)

Second IP Short Description Definition

Numeral

0 Non-protected No special protection.

1 Protected against dripping water Dripping water (vertically falling drops) is to have no harmful effect.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 233
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

Second IP Short Description Definition

Numeral

2 Protected against dripping water Vertically dripping water is to have no harmful effect when the enclosure
when tilted up to 15°. is tilted at any angle up to 15° from its normal position.

3 Protected against spraying water Water falling as spray at an angle up to 60° from the vertical is to have
no harmful effect.

4 Protected against splashing water Water splashed against the enclosure from any direction is to have no
harmful effect.

5 Protected against water jets Water projected by a nozzle against the enclosure from any direction is
to have no harmful effect.

6 Protected against heavy seas Water from heavy seas or water projected in powerful jets is not to enter
the enclosure in harmful quantities.

7 Protected against the effects of Ingress of water in a harmful quantity is not to be possible when the
immersion enclosure is immersed in water under defined conditions of pressure and
time.

8 Protected against submersion The equipment is suitable for continuous submersion in water under
conditions which are to be specified by the manufacturer.
Note: Normally, this will mean that the equipment is hermetically sealed.
However, with certain types of equipment, it can mean that water can
enter, but only in such a manner that it produces no harmful effects.

9 (2016) Protected against high pressure and Water projected at high pressure and high temperature against the
temperature water jets enclosure from any direction shall not have harmful effects

See Designation and examples in 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 2.

TABLE 4
Primary Essential Services (1 July 2019)

(a) Steering gears

(b) Pumps for controllable pitch propellers

(c) Scavenging air blower, fuel oil supply pumps, fuel valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil pumps and cooling water
pumps for main and auxiliary engines, turbines and shafting necessary for propulsion.

(d) Ventilation necessary to maintain propulsion

(e) Forced draft fans, feed water pumps, water circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and condensate pumps for steam
plants on steam turbine ships, and also for auxiliary boilers on craft where steam is used for equipment supplying
primary essential services

(f) Oil burning installations for auxiliary boilers where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential
services

(g) Low duty gas compressor and other boil-off gas treatment facilities supporting boil-off gas usage as fuel to main
propulsion or electric power generation machinery.

(h) Electrical equipment for electric propulsion plant with lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps

(i) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying primary essential equipment

(j) Hydraulic pumps supplying primary essential equipment

(k) Viscosity control equipment for heavy fuel oil

(l) Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems of equipment for primary essential services.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 234
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 1 General 4-6-1

(m) Fire pumps and other fire extinguishing medium pumps.

(n) Navigation lights, aids and signals.

(o) Internal safety communication equipment.

(p) Lighting system.

TABLE 5
Secondary Essential Services (2022)

(a) Windlass

(b) Fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment

(c) Lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treatment equipment

(d) Pre-heaters for heavy fuel oil

(e) Starting air and control air compressors

(f) Bilge, ballast and heeling pumps

(g) Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms

(h) Services considered necessary to maintain dangerous spaces in a safe condition (inert gas system of an oil carrier,
ventilation for Ro-Ro cargo spaces, etc.)

(i) Fire detection and alarm system

(j) Electrical equipment for watertight and fire-tight closing appliances

(k) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying secondary essential equipment

(l) Hydraulic pumps supplying secondary essential equipment

(m) Control, monitoring and safety systems for cargo containment systems

(n) Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems of equipment for secondary essential services.

(o) Ambient temperature control equipment required by 4-6-1/17.3

(p) Watertight Doors (see 3-2-5/1.3, 3-2-9 and 3-2-10)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 235
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 2
Shipboard Systems

1 Plans and Data to be Submitted

1.1 Wiring
1.1.1 Systems
One line diagrams for the following electrical systems are to be submitted for review.

● Power Supply and Distribution

● Lighting including Navigation Light
● Internal Communication
● General Emergency Alarm
● Fire Detection and Alarm
● Steering Gear Control
● Intrinsically-safe Equipment
● Emergency Generator Starting
● Inert Gas Control, Monitoring, and Alarm
1.1.2 Data for Wiring Systems
The one line diagrams are to show the circuit designation, type and size of cables, cable grouping
and banking, trip setting and rating of the circuit protection devices, the location of electrical
equipment accompanied by list of components, complete feeder list, rated load current for each
branch circuit. The one line diagram for power supply and distribution systems is to indicate the
following component details.

Note:

For craft having a length of 61 m (200 ft) and over, a voltage drop calculation for the longest run of each cable size
is to be included.

• Generator: kW rating, voltage, rated current, frequency, number of phases, power factor

• Batteries: type, voltage, capacity, conductor protection (when required)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 236
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

• Motors: kW rating, remote stops (when required)

• Transformers: kVA rating, rated voltage and current on primary and secondary side, connection method

The one line diagram for power supply and distribution systems is also to include a list of
sequential start of motors and equipment having emergency tripping or preferential tripping
features.

1.3 Short-circuit Data (2016)

In order to establish that the protective devices on the main and emergency switchboards have sufficient
short-circuit breaking and making capacities, data are to be submitted giving the maximum calculated
short-circuit current in symmetrical rms and asymmetrical peak values available at the main bus bars
together with the maximum allowable breaking and making capacities of the protective device. Similar
calculations are to be made at other points in the distribution system, where necessary, to determine the
adequacy of the interrupting capacities of the protective devices.

Reference may be made to IEC Publication 61363-1 Electrical Installations of Ships and Mobile and Fixed
Offshore Units – Part 1: Procedures for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Three-Phase A.C.

1.5 Protective Device Coordination

A protective device coordination study is to be submitted for review. This protective device coordination
study is to consist of an organized time-current study of all of the protective devices in series from the
utilization equipment to the source for all circuit protection devices having different setting or time-current
characteristics for long-time delay tripping, short-time delay tripping and instantaneous tripping, where
applicable. Where an over-current relay is provided in series and adjacent to the circuit protection device,
the operating and time-current characteristics of the relay are to be considered for coordination. See
4-6-2/9.1.5.

1.7 Load Analysis (2019)

An electric-plant load analysis is to be submitted for review. The electric-plant load analysis is to cover all
operating conditions of the craft, such as normal sea going, cargo handling (loading/unloading), harbor
in/out, emergency,and dynamic positioning operations.

The analyses are to include:

● The simultaneous operation of loads on the emergency switchboard as per 4-6-2/5.3. Where the
emergency generator capacity is less than the sum of all of the nameplate rated loads, which can be
simultaneously connected to the emergency switchboard, then the analysis is to be supported by a
justification for each reduced or non-simultaneous load used.
● High/low voltage ship service transformers or converters, where applicable per 4-6-2/7.1.6showing
they have sufficient capacity to support the connected loads
● Identifying the loads to be tripped to ensure continuity of supply per 4-6-2/3.3.2.iv, 4-6-2/3.1.6(a),
4-6-2/9.3.3.
● Where DPS-2 or DPS-3 notation is requested, the load analysis is to include a detailed analysis for all
dynamic positioning modes and including during and following a single bus section failure in its
different configuration (open or closed bus).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 237
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

3 Ship Service Main Source of Power

3.1 Power Supply by Generators

3.1.1 Number of Generators
Craft using electricity for craft’s service power or lights are to be provided with at least two
electric generators for the craft service electrical demand.

3.1.2 Capacity of Generators (2019)

The capacity of the generating sets is to be such that in the event of any one generating set being
stopped, it will still be possible without recourse to the emergency source of power to supply those
services necessary to provide normal operational conditions of propulsion and safety, preservation
of the cargo and minimum comfortable conditions of habitability, which are to include at least
adequate services for cooking, heating, domestic refrigeration, mechanical ventilation, sanitary
and fresh water. See also 4-6-2/3.1.6. In addition, the generating sets are to be such that with any
one generator or its primary source of power out of operation, the remaining generating sets are
capable of providing the electrical services necessary to start the main propulsion plant in
conjunction with other machinery, as appropriate, from a dead craft condition within thirty
minutes, as defined in 4-1-1/13.23. See also 4-6-2/3.1.3.

3.1.3 Starting from Dead Craft Condition (2019)

In restoring the propulsion from a dead craft condition (see 4-1-1/13.23), no stored energy is to be
assumed available for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power and other
essential auxiliaries. It is assumed that means are available to start the emergency generator at all
times.

The emergency source of electrical power may be used to restore the propulsion, provided its
capacity either alone or combined with that of any other available source of electrical power is
sufficient to provide at the same time those services required to be supplied by 4-6-2/5.3.2 to
4-6-2/5.3.3.

The emergency source of electrical power and other means needed to restore the propulsion are to
have a capacity such that the necessary propulsion starting energy is available within 30 minutes
from a dead craft condition, as defined in 4-1-1/13.23. Emergency generator-stored starting energy
is not to be directly used for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power
and/or other essential auxiliaries (emergency generator excluded).

See also 4-6-2/3.1.6 and 4-6-4/7.15.2, below.

3.1.4 Power Supplied by Propulsion Generator

For craft propelled by electric power and having two or more constant voltage propulsion
generators, the ship’s service electric power may be derived from this source and additional ship’s
service generators need not be fitted, provided that with one propulsion generator out of service, a
speed of seven knots or one-half of the design speed, whichever is the lesser, can be maintained.
See 4-6-5/3.17.4 and 4-6-5/3.17.5.

3.1.5 Fuel Capacity for Generator Prime Mover

Where the fuel for any ship’s service generator prime mover differs from the fuel for the main
propulsion plant, adequate fuel capacity for that ship’s service generator prime mover with
adequate margins is to be provided for the longest anticipated run of the craft between fueling
ports.

3.1.6 System Arrangement

3.1.6(a) General.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 238
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

For craft of 500 GT and above where the main source of electrical power is necessary for
propulsion and steering and the safety of the craft, the system is to be so arranged that the
electrical supply to equipment necessary for these services is maintained or is capable of being
restored in the case of loss of any one of the generators in service in accordance with the provision
in 4-6-2/3.1.6(b) or 4-6-2/3.1.6(c).

Load shedding of nonessential services and, where necessary, secondary essential services (see
4-6-1/3.7) or other arrangements as may be necessary are to be provided to protect the generators
against the sustained overload. For main bus bar subdivision, see 4-6-4/7.15.2.

3.1.6(b) Single Generator Operation.

Where the electrical power is normally supplied by a single generator, provision is to be made
upon loss of power for automatic starting and connecting to the main switchboard of a stand-by
generator(s) of sufficient capacity with automatic restarting of the essential auxiliaries in
sequential operation, if necessary to permit propulsion and steering and to ensure the safety of the
craft. Starting and connection to the main switchboard of the standby generator is to be preferably
within 30 seconds after loss of the electrical power supply, but in no case in more than 45 seconds.

3.1.6(c) Multiple Generator Operation.

Where the electrical power is normally supplied by more than one generator set simultaneously in
parallel operation, the system is to be so arranged that in the event of the loss of any one of the
generators in service, the electrical supply to equipment necessary for propulsion and steering and
to ensure the safety of the craft will be maintained by the remaining generator(s) in service.

3.3 Generator Driven by Propulsion Unit

3.3.1 Constant Speed Drive
A generator driven by a main propulsion unit (shaft generator) capable of operating continuously
at a constant speed (e.g., a system where the craft speed and direction are controlled only by
propeller pitch) may be considered to be one of the generators required by 4-6-2/3.1.1, provided
that the arrangements stated in to below are complied with:

i) The generator and the generating systems are capable of maintaining the voltage and
frequency variation within the limits specified in 4-6-4/3.21.2 and 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 1
under all weather conditions during sailing or maneuvering and also while the craft is
stopped.
ii) The rated capacity of the generator and the generating systems is safeguarded during all
operations given under and is such that the services required by 4-6-2/3.1.2 can be
maintained upon loss of any generator in service.
iii) An arrangement is made for starting a standby generator and connecting it to the
switchboard, in accordance with 4-6-2/3.1.6.
3.3.2 Variable Speed Drive
Shaft generator installations not capable of operating continuously at a constant speed may be
used for normal operational and habitable conditions of the craft, provided that the arrangements
stated in i) to v) below are complied with. This type of generator will not be counted as one of the
generators required by 4-6-2/3.1.2.

i) In addition to this type of generator, generators of sufficient and adequate rating are
provided, which constitute the main source of electrical power required by 4-6-2/3.1.2.
ii) When the frequency variations at the main bus bar exceed the following limits due to the
speed variation of the propulsion machinery which drives the generator, arrangements are
made to comply with 4-6-2/3.1.6.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 239
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

Permanent frequency variation: ±5.5%

Transient frequency variation: ±11% (5 sec)

iii) The generators and the generating systems are capable of maintaining the voltage and
frequency variation within the limits specified in 4-6-4/3.21.2 and 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 1.
iv) Where load-shedding arrangements are provided, they are fitted in accordance with
4-6-2/9.3.3.
v) Where the propulsion machinery is capable of being operated from the navigation bridge,
means are provided or procedures are in place to ensure that power supply to essential
services is maintained during maneuvering conditions in order to avoid a blackout
situation.

3.5 Sizing of AC Generator

In selecting the capacity of an alternating-current generating plant, particular attention is to be given to the
starting current of motors forming part of the system. Under the normal seagoing condition of the craft
with one generator held in reserve as a standby, the remaining generator sets, operating in parallel and
initially carrying the minimum load necessary for operating the craft, are to have sufficient capacity with
respect to the largest idle motor on the craft so that the motor can be started and the voltage drop
occasioned by its starting current will not cause any already running motor to stall or control equipment to
drop out.

5 Emergency Source of Power

5.1 General
A self-contained emergency source of electrical power is to be provided.

5.1.1 Location (2018)

The emergency source of electrical power, its associated transforming equipment, if any,
transitional source of emergency power, the emergency switchboard, the emergency lighting
switchboard and the fuel oil tank for the emergency generator prime mover are to be located above
the uppermost continuous deck outside of the machinery casing, and are to be readily accessible
from the open deck. They are not to be located forward of the collision bulkhead.

The emergency electrical power space is to contain only machinery and equipment supporting the
normal operation of the emergency power source.

5.1.2 Separation
5.1.2(a) Machinery Space of Category A.
The location of the emergency source of electrical power, its associated transforming equipment,
if any, and the emergency switchboard, and the transitional source of emergency power (if
required) is to be such that a fire or other casualty in the space containing the main source of
electrical power, its associated transforming equipment, if any, and the main switchboard, or in
any machinery space of category A will not interfere with the supply, control and distribution of
emergency electrical power. As far as practicable, the space containing the emergency source of
electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the transitional source of emergency
electrical power and the emergency switchboard, including trunks to such spaces, are not to be
contiguous to the boundaries of machinery spaces of category A or those spaces containing the
main source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any, and the main
switchboard.

5.1.2(b) Machinery Space Other Than Category A.

Spaces containing emergency sources of power are to be separated from machinery spaces (as
defined in 4-1-1/13.3), other than Category A machinery spaces, by a boundary insulated to a level

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 240
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

of not less than A-15 for bulkheads and decks and A-0 for the overhead from any such space
(including trunks to such spaces). Where the emergency source of power is a generator, the above
is not intended to preclude the location of the emergency generator in the same space as its prime
mover, regardless of size.

5.1.2(c) Alternative Arrangement. (2019)

The following alternative arrangements may be considered in lieu of 4-6-2/5.1.2(a):

i) Separation by a cofferdam having dimensions as required for ready access and extending
at least 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the boundaries of the space containing the self-contained
emergency source of power and its associated equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(a). See
4-6-2/5.1.2(c).i FIGURE 1 below. Except for cables feeding services located in the
machinery space, flame retardant cables for emergency services are not to be installed in
such cofferdams unless the cofferdam is insulated to A-60 or fire resistant type cables
(rated minimum of 60 minutes of fire resistance) are to be used for the emergency
services. See 4-6-3/5.17.2 and 4-6-3/5.17.3.

FIGURE 1
Cofferdam with Extension Beyond the Boundaries of
the Space Containing the Emergency Source

ii) Separation by a cofferdam having dimensions as required for ready access between
category A machinery space and the space containing the self-contained emergency
source of power and its associated equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(a) without extension
beyond the boundaries. Any contiguous lines between these spaces at the corner of the
cofferdam are to be insulated to A-60 for a length of 450 mm (18 in.) at the category A
machinery space side. See 4-6-2/5.1.2(c).ii FIGURE 2 below.

FIGURE 2
Cofferdam without Extension Beyond the Boundaries of
the Space Containing the Emergency Source

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 241
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

iii) The contiguous boundaries insulated to A-60 with the insulation extending at least 450
mm (18 in.) beyond the boundary of the space containing the self-contained emergency
source of power and its associated equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(a). See
4-6-2/5.1.2(c).iii FIGURE 3 below.

The arrangements indicated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(c).iii FIGURE 3 below can be considered only

when it can be shown that the arrangements are in compliance with the requirements of
the flag administration.

FIGURE 3
Boundary Insulated to A-60 with the Insulation
Extending Beyond the Boundaries of the Space
Containing the Emergency Source

5.2 Alternative to Emergency Source of Power

Where the main source of electrical power is located in two or more compartments which are not
contiguous, each of which has its own self-contained systems, including power distribution and control
systems, completely independent of each other and such that a fire or other casualty in any one of the
spaces will not affect the power distribution from the others, or to the services required by 4-6-2/5.3, the
requirements of 4-6-2/5.1, 4-6-2/5.1.1, and 4-6-2/5.5.4 may be considered satisfied without an additional
emergency source of electrical power, provided that:

i) There is at least one generating set, meeting the requirements of 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 and each of
sufficient capacity to meet the requirements of 4-6-2/5.3, in each of at least two non-contiguous
spaces;
ii) The arrangements required by i) in each such space are equivalent to those required by
4-6-2/5.5.2, 4-6-2/5.9 and 4-6-2/5.15 so that a source of electrical power is available at all times to
the services required by 4-6-2/5, and
iii) The generator sets referred to in i) and their self-contained systems are installed in accordance
with 4-6-2/5.1.1

5.3 Emergency Services

i) The electrical power available from the emergency source is to be sufficient to supply all those
services that are essential for safety in an emergency, due regard being paid to such services as
may have to be operated simultaneously. Where the sum of the loads on the emergency generator
switchboard exceeds the power available, an analysis demonstrating that the power required to
operate the services simultaneously is to be produced. The analysis is to be submitted for review
in support of the sizing of the emergency generator.
ii) The emergency source of electrical power is to be capable, having regard to starting currents and
the transitory nature of certain loads, of supplying simultaneously at least the services listed in
4-6-2/5.3.1 through 4-6-2/5.3.6 for the period specified.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 242
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

5.3.1 For a Period of 12 Hours, Emergency Lighting:

i) At the stowage positions of life-saving appliances;
ii) At all escape routes such as alleyways, stairways, exits from accommodation and service
spaces, embarkation points, etc.;
iii) In the public spaces, if any;
iv) In the machinery spaces and main emergency generating spaces, including their control
positions;
v) In control stations;
vi) At the stowage positions for fireman’s outfits, and
vii) At the steering gear.
5.3.2 For a Period of 12 Hours:
i) The navigation lights and other lights required by the International Regulation for
Preventing Collisions at Sea in force;
ii) Electrical internal communication equipment for announcements during evacuation;
iii) Fire-detection and general alarm system and manual fire alarms, and
iv) Remote control devices of fire-extinguishing systems, if electrical.
v) The navigational equipment as required by Chapter 13 of the IMO International Code of
Safety for High-Speed Craft. Where such provision is unreasonable or impracticable, the
Administration may waive this requirement for craft of less than 5,000 GT.
5.3.3 For a Period of 4 Hours of Intermittent Operation:
i) The daylight signaling lamps, if they have no independent supply from their own
accumulator battery, and
ii) The craft’s whistle, if electrically driven.
5.3.4 For a Period of 12 Hours:
i) Navigational equipment;
ii) Essential electrically powered instruments and controls for propulsion machinery, if
alternate sources of power are not available for such device;
iii) One of fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.3 if dependent upon the emergency generator for
its source of power;
iv) The sprinkler pump and drencher pump, if fitted;
v) The emergency bilge pump and all the equipment essential for the operation of
electrically powered remote controlled bilge valves; and
vi) Craft radio facilities and other loads as set out in 14.13.2 of the IMO International Code
of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
5.3.5 For a Period of 10 Minutes:
Power drives for directional controls devices including those required to direct thrust forward and
astern.

5.3.6 Craft on Short Duration Voyages

In a craft engaged regularly in voyages of short duration where an adequate standard of safety is
attained, a lesser period than the 12 hour period specified in 4-6-2/5.3.1, 4-6-2/5.3.2, and
4-6-2/5.3.4.iii, but not less than 5 hours may be accepted.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 243
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

5.5 Power Supply

5.5.1 General
The emergency source of electrical power may be either a generator or an accumulator battery, in
accordance with 4-6-2/5.5.2 or 4-6-2/5.5.3, below:

5.5.2 Generator (2014)

Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, it is to be:

5.5.2(a)
driven by a prime mover with an independent supply of fuel having a flashpoint (closed cup test)
of not less than 43°C (110°F)*, and

* Fuel with a lower flashpoint, but not lower than 35°C, may be used in gas turbines only subject
to compliance with the provisions specified in 4-2-2/3.11.

5.5.2(b)
i) Started automatically upon failure of the main source of electrical power supply and
connected automatically to the emergency switchboard – then, those services referred to
in4-6-2/5.7 are to be connected automatically to the emergency generator as quickly as is
safe and practicable, subject to a maximum of 45 seconds, or
ii) Provided with a transitional source of emergency electrical power, as specified in
4-6-2/5.7, unless an emergency generator is provided capable both of supplying the
services referred to in 4-6-2/5.7 of being automatically started and supplying the required
load as quickly as is safe and practicable, subject to a maximum of 45 seconds, and
5.5.2(c)
An adequate fuel capacity for the emergency generator prime mover is to be provided.

Where it is intended to use fuel with a flash point of less than 60°C (140°F) then details of the
precautions used to address the associated hazardous area issues are to be submitted to ABS for
review (see also 4-4-4/7).

5.5.3 Accumulator Battery

Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, it is to be capable of:

5.5.3(a)
carrying the emergency electrical load without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the
battery throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage;

5.5.3(b)
automatically connecting to the emergency switchboard in the event of failure of the main source
of electrical power; and

5.5.3(c)
immediately supplying at least those services specified in 4-6-2/5.7.

5.5.4 Emergency Generator for Non-emergency Services

Provided that suitable measures are taken for safeguarding independent emergency operation
under all circumstances, the emergency generator may be used, exceptionally, and for short
periods, to supply non-emergency circuits during the blackout situation (see 4-1-1/13.25) dead
craft condition (see 4-1-1/13.23), and routine use for testing (see 4-6-2/5.11). The generator is to
be safeguarded against overload by automatically shedding such non-emergency services so that
supply to the required emergency loads is always available. See also 4-6-2/5.9.5.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 244
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

For use of the emergency generator in port, see 4-6-2/5.16.

5.5.5 Lithium-Ion Batteries (1 July 2022)

Where the emergency source of electrical power is lithium-ion batteries, it is to comply with the
requirements given in the ABS Requirements for Use of Lithium-ion Batteries in the Marine and
Offshore Industries. [see 2/1.9 of that document]

5.7 Transitional Source of Power

The transitional source of emergency electrical power where required by 4-6-2/5.5.2(b).ii is to consist of an
accumulator battery which is to operate without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery
throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage and be of sufficient
capacity and is to be so arranged as to supply automatically in the event of failure of either the main or the
emergency source of electrical power for half an hour at least the following services if they depend upon
an electrical source for their operation:

5.7.1 For a Period of 30 Minutes:

The loads specified in 4-6-2/5.3.1, 4-6-2/5.3.2 and 4-6-2/5.3.3 and

5.7.2 With Respect to the Watertight Doors:

i) Power to operate the watertight doors, but not necessarily simultaneously, unless an
independent temporary source of stored energy is provided. The power source should
have sufficient capacity to operate each door at least three times (i.e., closed-open-closed)
against an adverse list of 15°, and
ii) Power to the control, indication and alarm circuits for the watertight doors for half an
hour.

For the transitional phase of loads as per 4-6-2/5.7.1 above, such loads may not be connected to
the transitional source of power provided that:

● The services are fitted with an independent supply for the period specified from an
accumulator battery suitably located for use in an emergency.
● The emergency lighting, in respect of the machinery space and accommodation and service
spaces are provided by permanently fixed, individual, automatically charged, relay operated
accumulator lamps.

5.9 Emergency Switchboard

5.9.1 General
The emergency switchboard is to be installed as near as is practicable to the emergency source of
electrical power.

5.9.2 Emergency Switchboard for Generator

Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, the emergency switchboard is to
be located in the same space unless the operation of the emergency switchboard would thereby be
impaired.

5.9.3 Accumulator Battery

No accumulator battery fitted in accordance with 4-6-2/5.5.3 or 4-6-2/5.7 is to be installed in the
same space as the emergency switchboard. An indicator is to be mounted on the main switchboard
or in the machinery control room to indicate when these batteries are being discharged.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 245
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

5.9.4 Interconnector Feeder Between Emergency and Main Switchboards (2014)

The emergency switchboard is to be supplied during normal operation from the main switchboard
by an interconnector feeder which is to be protected at the main switchboard against overload and
short circuit. The interconnector feeder is to be disconnected automatically at the emergency
switchboard upon failure of the main source of electrical power. Where the system is arranged for
feedback operation, the interconnector feeder is also to be protected at the emergency switchboard
against short circuit. In addition, the circuit protection device at the emergency switchboard on the
interconnector feeder is to trip to prevent overloading of the emergency generator.

In designs where the main switchboard voltage is different from that of the emergency
switchboard the power to the emergency switchboard is to be supplied from the main ship service
switchboard.

As far as practicable, the circuit coordination is to be arranged such that the outgoing circuits from
the main ship service switchboard will coordinate with the transformer circuit breakers to prevent
the supply to the emergency switchboard from being unavailable due to a fault on one of the other
outgoing circuits from the main ship service switchboard.

Note:

For the purpose of this Rule, the main ship service switchboard is a switchboard which is connected to the
secondary of the step-down transformer producing the required voltage.

5.9.5 Disconnection of Non-emergency Circuits

For ready availability of the emergency source of electrical power, arrangements are to be made,
where necessary, to disconnect automatically non-emergency circuits from the emergency
switchboard so that electrical power is to be available automatically to the emergency circuits.

5.11 Arrangements for Periodic Testing

Provision is to be made to enable the periodic testing of the complete emergency system and is to include
the testing of automatic starting arrangements.

5.13 Craft Intended to Carry Passengers

See Section 5-1-1.

5.15 Starting Arrangements for Emergency Generator Sets

5.15.1 Cold Conditions
Emergency generating sets are to be capable of being readily started in their cold condition at a
temperature of 0°C (32°F). If this is impracticable or if lower temperatures are likely to be
encountered, heating arrangements are to be provided for ready starting of the generating sets.

5.15.2 Number of Starts

Each emergency generator that is arranged to be automatically started is to be equipped with
approved starting devices with a stored energy capability of at least three consecutive starts.
Unless a second independent means of starting is provided, the source of stored energy is to be
protected to preclude critical depletion by the automatic starting system, i.e., the automatic starting
system is only allowable for consumption of the stored energy source to a level that would still
provide the capability for starting the emergency generator upon intervention by personnel. In
addition, a second source of energy is to be provided for an additional three starts within 30
minutes unless manual starting can be demonstrated to the Surveyor to be effective.

5.15.3 Charging of Stored Energy

The stored energy is to be maintained at all times, as follows:

5.15.3(a) (2020)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 246
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

Electrical and/or hydraulic starting systems are to be maintained from the emergency switchboard.

5.15.3(b)
Compressed air starting systems may be maintained by the main or auxiliary compressed air
receivers through a suitable non-return valve or by an emergency air compressor which, if
electrically driven, is supplied from the emergency switchboard.

5.15.3(c)
All of these starting, charging and energy storing devices are to be located in the emergency
generator space. These devices are not to be used for any purpose other than the operation of the
emergency generating set. This does not preclude the supply to the air receiver of the emergency
generating set from the main or auxiliary compressed air system through the non-return valve
fitted in the emergency generator space.

5.15.4 Manual Starting

Where automatic starting is not required, as per 4-6-2/5.5.2(b).ii, manual (hand) starting is
permissible, such as manual cranking, inertia starters, manually charged hydraulic accumulators or
power charge cartridges, where they can be demonstrated to the Surveyor as being effective.

When manual (hand) starting is not practicable, the requirements of 4-6-2/5.15.2 and 4-6-2/5.15.3
are to be complied with, except that starting may be manually initiated.

5.16 Use of Emergency Generator in Port (for Craft 500 GT and Over)
Unless instructed otherwise by the Flag Administration, the emergency generator may be used during lay
time in port for supplying power to the craft, provided the following requirements are complied with.

5.16.1 Arrangements for the Prime Mover

5.16.1(a) Fuel oil tank.
The fuel oil tank for the prime mover is to be appropriately sized and provided with a level alarm,
which is to be set to alarm at a level where there is still sufficient fuel oil capacity for the
emergency services for the period of time required by 4-6-2/5.3.

5.16.1(b) Rating.
The prime mover is to be rated for continuous service.

5.16.1(c) Filters.
The prime mover is to be fitted with fuel oil and lubricating oil filters, in accordance with
4-2-1/7.1 and 4-2-1/9.9, respectively.

5.16.1(d) Monitoring.
The prime mover is to be fitted with alarms, displays and automatic shutdown arrangements, as
required in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 7, except that for fuel oil tank low-level alarm, 4-6-2/5.16.1(a) above
is to apply instead. The displays and alarms are to be provided in the centralized control station.
Monitoring at the engineers’ quarters is to be provided as required in 4-7-3/21.5.

5.16.1(e) Fire detection.

The emergency generator room is to be fitted with fire detectors. Where the emergency generator
is located in a space separated from the emergency switchboard, fire detectors are to be located in
each space. The fire detection and alarm system is to be in compliance with 4-5-1/13 and may be a
part of another system.

5.16.2 System Arrangements

5.16.2(a) Independence.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 247
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

The power supply circuits, including control and monitoring circuits, for the use of the emergency
generator in port are to be so arranged and protected that any electrical fault, except for the
emergency generator and the emergency switchboard, will not affect the operation of the main and
emergency services.

5.16.2(b) Changeover arrangement.

Means are to be provided to readily change over to emergency operation.

5.16.2(c) Overload prevention.

The generator is to be safeguarded against overload by automatically shedding such other loads so
that the supply to the required emergency loads is always available.

5.16.3 Operational Instruction

Operational instructions, such as that on fuel oil tank level, harbor/seagoing mode changeover
arrangements, etc., are to be provided onboard. Before the craft is underway, all valves, switches,
etc., are to be in the positions for their intended mode of operation of the emergency generator and
the emergency switchboard. Such instructions are to be distinctly posted at the emergency
generator room. Planned maintenance is to be carried out only while in port.

5.17 Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines

5.17.1 Information to be Submitted
Information demonstrating compliance with these requirements is to be submitted for review. The
information is to include instructions to test the alarm and safety systems.

5.17.2 Alarms and Safeguards

5.17.2(a)
Alarms and safeguards are to be fitted in accordance with 4-6-2/5.17.2(f) TABLE 1.

5.17.2(b)
The safety and alarm systems are to be designed to ‘fail safe’. The characteristics of the ‘fail safe’
operation are to be evaluated on the basis not only of the system and its associated machinery, but
also the complete installation, as well as the ship.

5.17.2(c)
Regardless of the engine output, if shutdowns additional to those specified in 4-6-2/5.17.2(f)
TABLE 1 are provided, except for the overspeed shutdown, they are to be automatically
overridden when the engine is in automatic or remote control mode during navigation.

5.17.2(d)
The alarm system is to function in accordance with 4-7-1/9.7.1 through 4-7-1/9.7.7, with
additional requirements that grouped alarms are to be arranged on the bridge.

5.17.2(e)
In addition to the fuel oil control from outside the space, a local means of engine shutdown is to be
provided.

5.17.2(f)
Local indications of at least those parameters listed in 4-6-2/5.17.2(f) TABLE 1 are to be provided
within the same space as the diesel engines and are to remain operational in the event of failure of
the alarm and safety systems.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 248
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

TABLE 1
Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines
[See 4-6-2/5.17]

Systems Monitored Parameters A Auto Notes

Shut [A = Alarm; x = apply]
Down

Fuel oil A1 Leakage from pressure pipes x

Lubricating oil B1 Temperature – high x For engines having a power of

220 kW or more.
B2 Lubricating oil pressure – low x

B3 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x For engines having a power of

concentration – high; or 2250 kW (3000 hp) and above or
Bearing temperature – high; or having a cylinder bore of more
Alternative arrangements than 300 mm (11.8 in.).
See 4-2-1/7.2 of the Marine
Vessel Rules.

Cooling C1 Pressure or flow – low x For engines having a power of

medium 220 kW or more.

C2 Temperature – high x

Engine D1 Overspeed activated x x For engines having a power of

220 kW or more.

5.19 Craft Less than 500 GT Having Electrical Plants of 75 kW and Above
5.19.1 General
This requirement is intended for craft less than 500 GT having electrical plants of an aggregate
capacity of 75 kW and above. The emergency source of electrical power is to be self-contained
and readily available. 4-6-2/5.1.1, 4-6-2/5.1.2, 4-6-2/5.5 through 4-6-2/5.13 and 4-6-2/5.21 are
also applicable. Where the source of electrical power is a battery, see 4-6-3/3.7 for the installation.
For emergency lighting, a relay-controlled, battery-operated lantern is acceptable.

5.19.2 Capacity
The emergency source of electrical power is to be capable of supplying simultaneously at least the
following services for the period as specified herein:

5.19.3 For a Period of 6 Hours, Emergency Lighting:

i) At the stowage positions of life-saving appliances;
ii) At all escape routes such as alleyways, stairways, exits from accommodation and service
spaces, embarkation points, etc.;
iii) In the public spaces, if any;
iv) In the machinery spaces and main emergency generating spaces, including their control
positions;
v) In control stations;
vi) At the stowage positions for fireman’s outfits, and
vii) At the steering gear.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 249
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

5.19.4 For a Period of 6 Hours:

i) The navigation lights and other lights required by the International Regulation for
Preventing Collisions at Sea in force;
ii) Craft radio facilities and other loads as set out in 14.13.2 of the IMO International Code
of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
iii) Electrical internal communication equipment for announcements during evacuation.

5.21 Requirements by the Governmental Authority

Attention is directed to the requirements of the governmental authority of the country whose flag the craft
flies for the emergency services and the accumulator batteries required in various types of craft.

7 Distribution System

7.1 Ship Service Distribution System

7.1.1 General
Current-carrying parts with potential to earth are to be protected against accidental contact.

For recognized standard distribution systems, see 4-6-1/7. Separate feeders are to be provided for
essential and emergency services.

7.1.2 Method of Distribution

The output of the ship’s service generators may be supplied to the current consumers by way of
either branch system, meshed network system or ring main system. The cables of a ring-main or
other looped circuit (e.g., interconnecting section boards in a continuous circuit) are to be formed
of conductors having sufficient current-carrying and short-circuit capacity for any possible load
and supply configuration.

7.1.3 Through-feed Arrangements

The size of feeder conductors is to be uniform for the total length, but may be reduced beyond any
intermediate section board and distribution board, provided that the reduced size section of the
feeder is protected by an overload device.

7.1.4 Motor Control Center

Feeder cables from the main switchboard or any section board to the motor control centers are to
have a continuous current-carrying capacity not less than 100% of the sum of the nameplate
ratings of all of the motors supplied. Feeder cables of lesser current capacity are permitted, where
the design is such that connected consumers are not operated simultaneously, under any operating
mode.

7.1.5 Motor Branch Circuit

A separate circuit is to be provided for each fixed motor having a full-load current rating of
6 amperes or more, and the conductors are to have a carrying capacity of not less than 100% of the
motor full-load current rating. No branch circuit is to have conductors less than 1.5 mm2 wire.
Circuit-disconnecting devices are to be provided for each motor branch circuit and to be in
accordance with 4-6-3/3.13.2 and 4-6-4/7.17.2.

7.1.6 Power Supply Through Transformers and Converters

7.1.6(a) Continuity of Supply (2014).
Where transformers and/or converters form a part of the craft’s electrical system supplying
essential services and services necessary for minimum comfortable conditions of habitability, the
number and capacity of the transformers and/or converters are to be such that with any one
transformer or converter or any one single phase of a transformer out of service, the remaining

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 250
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

transformers and/or converters or remaining phases of the transformer are capable of supplying
power to these loads under normal seagoing conditions.

See 4-6-5/1.3.6 for the additional requirements applicable for high voltage transformers.

7.1.6(b) Arrangements. (2020)

Each required transformer is to be located in a separate enclosure or equivalent, and is to be served
by separate circuits on the primary and secondary sides. When installed in the same space, the
transformers are to be adequately separated to suitably protect and preclude damage by fire or
other incident at one of the transformers.

Each of the secondary circuits is to be provided with a multipole isolating switch. This multipole
isolating switch is not to be installed on the transformer casing or its vicinity, to preclude its
damage by fire or other incident at the transformer. A circuit breaker provided in the secondary
circuit, in accordance with 4-6-2/9.15.1, will be acceptable in lieu of a multipole isolating switch.

7.1.6(c) Transformers and Converters for Battery Charger.

Where batteries connected to a single battery charger are the sole means of supplying DC power to
equipment for essential services, as defined in 4-6-1/3.7, failure of the single battery charger under
normal operating conditions should not result in total loss of these services once the batteries are
depleted. In order to ensure continuity of the power supply to such equipment, one of the
following arrangements is to be provided:

i) Duplicate battery chargers; or

ii) A single battery charger and a transformer/rectifier (or switching converter) which is
independent of the battery charger, provided with a change-over switch; or
iii) Duplicate transformer/rectifier (or switching converter) units within a single battery
charger, provided with a change-over switch.

The above requirements are not applicable for the following:

● The equipment for the essential services which contains a single transformer/ rectifier with a
single AC power supply feeder to such equipment.
● The services which are not used continuously, such as battery chargers for engine starting
batteries, etc.
7.1.6(d) Automatic Bus Transfer (2020)
Where an Automatic Bus Transfer (ABT) is provided between the secondary side of the
transformers and the load center panel connected directly without a multipole isolating switch or
protective device, the ABT may be considered as the multipole isolating switch if it is provided
with manual transfer operation lockable in either position. Details of the ABT is to be submitted
for reference upon request.

7.1.7 Ventilation System

Ventilation fans for cargo space are to have feeders separate from those for accommodations. See
also 4-6-2/19.1.1 and 4-6-3/3.7.3.

7.1.8 Heating Appliances

Each heater is to be connected to a separate final subcircuit. However, a group of up to 10 heaters
whose total current does not exceed 16 A may be connected to a single final subcircuit.

7.1.9 Circuits for Bunker or Cargo Space

All lighting and power circuits terminating in a bunker or cargo space are to be provided with a
multiple pole switch outside of the space for disconnecting such circuits.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 251
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

7.1.10 Transformer Cable Sizing (2019)

Cables provided for primary and secondary circuits of transformers are to have current carrying
capacities not less than the rated primary and secondary currents, respectively.

7.1.11 Generator Cable Sizing (2019)

Generator cable is to have a current carrying capacity of not less than the rated current or the rated
continuous overload current of the generator.

7.3 Hull Return System

7.3.1 General (2023)
For metallic hull craft, the hull return system is not to be used for power, heating or lighting,
except that the following systems may be used for all types of non-metallic hull craft:

i) Impressed current cathodic protection systems;

ii) Limited and locally earthed systems, provided that any possible resulting current does not
flow directly through hazardous areas; or
iii) Insulation level monitoring devices, provided the circulation current does not exceed 30
mA under all possible conditions.

Current-carrying parts with potential to earth are to be protected against accidental contact.

For non-metallic hull craft, the earthing system is to be arranged in accordance with the provisions
of 4-6-2/21.15.

7.3.2 Final Subcircuits and Earth Wires

Where the hull return system is used, all final subcircuits (i.e., all circuits fitted after the last
protective device) are to consist of two insulated wires, the hull return being achieved by
connecting to the hull one of the bus bars of the distribution board from which they originate. The
earth wires are to be in accessible locations to permit their ready examination and to enable their
disconnection for testing of insulation.

7.5 Earthed Distribution Systems

System earthing is to be effected by means independent of any earthing arrangements of the non-current-
carrying parts. Means of disconnection is to be provided in the neutral earthing connection of each
generator so that the generator may be disconnected for maintenance. In distribution systems with neutral
earthed or for generators intended to be run with neutrals interconnected, the machines are to be designed
to avoid circulating currents exceeding the prescribed value. Transformer neutral is not to be earthed unless
all corresponding generator neutrals are disconnected from the system (e.g. during shore supply).

7.7 External or Shore Power Supply Connection

7.7.1 General
Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity from a source on shore or other
external source, a termination point is to be provided on the craft for the reception of the flexible
cable from the external source. Fixed cables of adequate rating are to be provided between the
termination point and the main or emergency switchboard. Means for disconnecting the external
or shore power supply are to be provided at the receiving switchboard. See 4-6-2/9.11 for the
protection of external or shore power supply circuit.

7.7.2 Earthing Terminal

An earth terminal is to be provided for connecting the hull to an external earth.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 252
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

7.7.3 Indicators
The external supply connection or shore connection is to be provided with a pilot lamp and a
voltmeter (and frequency meter for AC) at main or emergency switchboard to show energized
status of the cable.

7.7.4 Polarity or Phase Sequence

Means are to be provided for checking the polarity (for DC) or the phase sequence (for three-
phase AC) of the incoming supply in relation to the craft’s system.

7.7.5 Information Plate

An information plate is to be provided at or near the connection box giving full information on the
system of supply and the nominal voltage (and frequency if AC) of the craft’s system and the
recommended procedure for carrying out the connection.

7.7.6 Securing of Trailing Cable

Provision is to be made for securing the trailing cable to a framework to absorb stress on the
electrical terminals by catenary tension of the cable.

7.9 Harmonics (1 July 2017)

The total harmonic distortion (THD) in the voltage waveform in the distribution systems is not to exceed
8% and any single order harmonics not to exceed 5%. Other higher values may be accepted provided the
distribution equipment and consumers are designed to operate at the higher limits. This relaxation on THD
limits is to be documented (harmonic distortion calculation report) and made available on board as a
reference for the surveyor at each periodical survey. Where higher values of harmonic distortion are
expected, any other possible effects, such as additional heat losses in machines, network resonances, errors
in control and monitoring systems are to be considered. See also 4-6-2/9.18 and 4-6-2/9.19.

9 Circuit Protection System

9.1 System Design

9.1.1 General
Electrical installations are to be protected against accidental overload and short circuit, except

i) As permitted by 4-6-2/11.3,
ii) Where it is impracticable to do so, such as engine starting battery circuit, and
iii) Where by design, the installation is incapable of developing overload, in which case it
may be protected against short circuit only.

The protection is to be by automatic protective devices for:

i) Continued supply to remaining essential circuits in the event of a fault, and

ii) Minimizing the possibility of damage to the system and fire.

Three-phase, three-wire alternating current circuits are to be protected by a triple-pole circuit

breaker with three overload trips or by a triple-pole switch with a fuse in each phase. All branch
circuits are to be protected at distribution boards only, and any reduction in conductor sizes is to
be protected. Dual-voltage systems having an earthed neutral are not to have fuses in the neutral
conductor, but a circuit breaker which simultaneously opens all conductors may be installed, when
desired. In no case is the dual-voltage system to extend beyond the last distribution board.

9.1.2 Protection Against Short-circuit

9.1.2(a) Protective Devices.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 253
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

Protection against short-circuit is to be provided for each non-earthed conductor by means of

circuit breakers or fuses.

9.1.2(b) Rated Short-circuit Breaking Capacity.

The rated short-circuit breaking capacity of every protective device is not to be less than the
maximum available fault current at that point. For alternating current (AC), the rated short-circuit
breaking capacity is not to be less than the root mean square (rms) value of the AC component of
the prospective short-circuit current at the point of application. The circuit breaker is to be able to
break any current having an AC component not exceeding its rated breaking capacity, whatever
the inherent direct current (DC) component may be at the beginning of the interruption.

9.1.2(c) Rated Short-circuit Making Capacity.

The rated short-circuit making capacity of every switching device is to be adequate for maximum
peak value of the prospective short-circuit current at the point of installation. The circuit breaker is
to be able to make the current corresponding to its making capacity without opening within a time
corresponding to the maximum time delay required.

9.1.3 Protection Against Overload

9.1.3(a) Circuit Breakers.
Circuit breakers or other mechanical switching devices for overload protection are to have a
tripping characteristic (overload-trip time) adequate for the overload capacity of all elements in
the system to be protected and for any discrimination requirements.

9.1.3(b) Fuses.
A fuse of greater than 320 amperes is not to be used for overload protection.

9.1.3(c) Rating.
Fuse ratings and rating (or settings, if adjustable) of time-delay trip elements of circuit breakers
are not to exceed the rated current capacity of the conductor to be protected as listed in 4-6-4/13.7
TABLE 10, except as otherwise permitted for generator motor, and transformer circuit protection
in 4-6-2/9.3, 4-6-2/9.13 and 4-6-2/9.15. If the standard ratings or settings of overload devices do
not correspond to the rating or the setting allowed for conductors, the next higher standard rating
or setting may be used, provided that it does not exceed 150% of the allowable current carrying
capacity of the conductor, where permitted by the Standard to which the feeder cables have been
constructed. Except as otherwise permitted for motor and transformer branch-circuit protection,
adjustable-trip circuit breakers of the time-delay or instantaneous type are to be set to operate at
not more than 150% of the rated capacity of the conductor to be protected.

9.1.3(d) Indication.
The rating or setting of the overload protective device for each circuit is to be permanently
indicated at the location of the protective device.

9.1.4 Back-up Protection

9.1.4(a) Back-up Fuse Arrangements.
Circuit breakers having breaking and/or making capacities less than the prospective short-circuit
current at the point of application will be permitted, provided that such circuit breakers are
backed-up by fuses which have sufficient short-circuit capacity for that application. The fuse is to
be specifically designed for back-up combinations with the circuit breaker, and the maximum fault
rating for the combination is to be provided.

9.1.4(b) Cascade Protection.

Cascade protection may be permitted, subject to special consideration. Such special consideration
is not intended for new construction craft, however may be granted when modifications are
performed to existing craft. The cascade protection is to be arranged such that the combination of

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 254
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

circuit protective devices has sufficient short-circuit breaking capacity at the point of application
[see 4-6-2/9.1.2(b)]. All circuit protective devices are to comply with the requirements for making
capacity [see 4-6-2/9.1.2(c)]. Cascade protection is not to be used for circuits of primary essential
services. Where cascade protection is used for circuits of secondary essential services, such
services are to be duplicated, provided with means of automatic transfer and the automatic transfer
is to alarm at a manned location. Cascade protection may be used for circuits of non-essential
services.

9.1.5 Coordinated Tripping

Coordinated tripping is to be provided between generator, bus tie, bus feeder and feeder protective
devices. See also 4-6-2/9.3.2 and 4-6-2/9.7.1. Except for cascade system (backup protection) in
4-6-2/9.1.4, the coordinated tripping is also to be provided between feeder and branch-circuit
protective devices for essential services. Continuity of service to essential circuits under short-
circuit conditions is to be achieved by discrimination of the protective devices, as follows:

9.1.5(a)
The tripping characteristics of protective devices in series is to be coordinated.

9.1.5(b)
Only the protective device nearest to the fault is to open the circuit, except for the cascade system
(back-up protection), as specified in 4-6-2/9.1.4(a).

9.1.5(c)
The protective devices are to be capable of carrying, without opening, a current not less than the
short-circuit current at the point of application for a time corresponding to the opening of the
breaker, increased by the time delay required for discrimination.

9.3 Protection for Generators

9.3.1 General
Generators of less than 25 kW not arranged for parallel operation may be protected by fuses. Any
generators arranged for parallel operation and all generators of 25 kW and over are to be protected
by a trip-free circuit breaker whose trip settings are not to exceed the thermal withstand capacity
of the generator. The long-time over-current protection is not to exceed 15% above either the full-
load rating of continuous rated machines or the overload rating of special-rated machines. The
shutting down of the prime mover is to cause the tripping of the ship service generator circuit
breaker.

9.3.2 Trip Setting for Coordination

The instantaneous and short-time overcurrent trips of the generators are to be set at the lowest
values of current and time which will coordinate with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers.
See also 4-6-2/9.1.5, 4-6-2/9.5.1, and 4-6-2/9.5.2(a).

9.3.3 Load-shedding Arrangements

9.3.3(a) Provision for Load Shedding Arrangements.
In order to safeguard continuity of the electrical power supply, automatic load-shedding
arrangements or other equivalent arrangements are to be provided:

i) Where only one generating set is normally used to supply power for propulsion and
steering of the craft, and a possibility exists that due to the switching on of additional
loads, whether manually or automatically initiated, the total load exceeds the rated
generator capacity of the running generator, or
ii) Where electrical power is normally supplied by more than one generator set
simultaneously in parallel operation for propulsion and steering of the craft, upon the

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 255
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

failure of one of the parallel running generators, the total connected load exceeds the total
capacity of the remaining generator(s).
9.3.3(b) Services not Allowed for Shedding.
Automatic load-shedding arrangements or other equivalent arrangements are not to automatically
disconnect the following services. See 4-6-1/3.7 for the definition of essential services.

i) Primary essential services that, when disconnected, will cause immediate disruption to
propulsion and maneuvering of the craft,
ii) Emergency services as listed in 4-6-2/5.3, and
iii) Secondary essential services that, when disconnected, will:

● cause immediate disruption of systems required for safety and navigation of the craft,
such as:

Lighting systems,

Navigation lights, aids and signals,

Internal communication systems required by 4-6-2/15, etc.

● prevent services necessary for safety from being immediately reconnected when the
power supply is restored to its normal operating conditions, such as:

Fire pumps, and other fire extinguishing medium pumps,

Bilge pumps,

Ventilation fans for engine and boiler rooms

9.3.4 Emergency Generator
The emergency generator is also to comply with 4-6-2/9.1, 4-6-3/9.3, 4-6-2/9.5 and 4-6-2/9.7,
where applicable. See also 4-6-2/5.9.

9.5 Protection for Alternating-current (AC) Generators

9.5.1 Short-time Delay Trip
Short-time delay trips are to be provided with circuit breakers for AC generators. See also
4-6-2/9.3.2. The current setting of the short time delay trip is to be less than the steady state short-
circuit current of the generator.

For generators with a capacity of less than 200 kW having prime movers such as diesel engines or
gas turbines which operate independently of the electrical system, consideration may be given to
omission of short-time delay trips if instantaneous trips and long time overcurrent protection (see
4-6-2/9.3.1) are provided. When the short time delay trips are omitted, the thermal withstand
capacity of the generator is to be greater than the steady state short-circuit current of the generator,
until activation of the tripping system.

9.5.2 Parallel Operation

Where AC generators are arranged for parallel operation with other AC generators, the following
protective devices are to be provided.

9.5.2(a) Instantaneous Trip (2016).

Instantaneous trips are to be installed and set in excess of the maximum short-circuit contribution
of the individual generator where three or more generators are arranged for parallel operation.
Alternative suitable protection, such as generator differential protection, which will trip the

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 256
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

generator circuit breaker in the event of a fault in the generator or in the supply cable between the
generator and its circuit breaker, would also be acceptable. See also 4-6-2/9.3.2.

9.5.2(b) Reverse Power Protection .

time-delayed reverse active power protection or other devices which provide adequate protection
is to be provided. The setting of protective devices is to be in the range of 2% to 6% of the rated
power for turbines and in the range of 8% to 15% of the rated power for diesel engines. A setting
of less than 8% of the rated power of diesel engines may be allowed with a suitable time delay
recommended by the diesel engine manufacturer. A fall of 50% in the applied voltage is not to
render the reverse power protection inoperative, although it may alter the setting to open the
breaker within the above range.

9.5.2(c) Undervoltage Protection.

Means are to be provided to prevent the generator circuit breaker from closing if the generator is
not generating and to open the same when the generator voltage collapses.

In the case of an undervoltage release provided for this purpose, the operation is to be
instantaneous when preventing closure of the breaker, but is to be delayed for discrimination
purposes when tripping a breaker.

9.7 Protection for Direct Current (DC) Generators

9.7.1 Instantaneous Trip
DC generator circuit breakers are to be provided with an instantaneous trip set below the generator
maximum short-circuit current and are to coordinate with the trip settings of feeder circuit
breakers supplied by the generator.

9.7.2 Parallel Operation

9.7.2(a) Reverse Current Protection.
DC generators arranged for parallel operation with other DC generators or with an accumulator
battery are to be provided with instantaneous or short-time delayed reverse current protection. The
setting of the protection devices is to be within the power range specified by 4-6-2/9.5.2(a). When
an equalizer connection is provided, the reverse current device is to be connected on the pole
opposite to the equalizer connection where the series compound winding for the generator is
connected. Reverse current protection is to be adequate to deal effectively with reverse current
conditions emanating from the distribution system (e.g., electric driven cargo winches).

9.7.2(b) Generator Ammeter Shunts.

Generator ammeter shunts are to be so located that the ammeters indicate total generator current.

9.7.2(c) Undervoltage Protection.

Requirements for AC generator in 4-6-2/9.5.2(c) are also applicable to DC generator.

9.9 Protection for Accumulator Batteries (2019)

Accumulator (storage) batteries, other than engine starting batteries, are to be protected against overload
and short circuits by devices placed as near as practicable to the batteries, but outside of the battery rooms,
lockers or boxes, except that the emergency batteries supplying essential services are to have short circuit
protection only. Fuses may be used for the protection of emergency lighting storage batteries instead of
circuit breakers up to and including 320 amperes rating. The charging equipment, except converters, for all
batteries with a voltage of more than 20% of the line voltage is to be provided with reverse current
protection.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 257
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

Where equipment or DC distribution panel is fed from two feeders or sources of DC battery power
connected in parallel from separate battery charger systems, the batteries are to be protected from reverse
power by means of:

● Manual change over switch as applicable

● Automatic change over from one source to the other provided in the equipment as required
● Power diodes in the feeder circuit
● Diode relay switching units

9.11 Protection for External or Shore Power Supply

9.11.1 General
Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity from a source on shore or other
external source, permanently fixed cables from the external supply or shore connection box to the
main or emergency switchboard are to be protected by fuses or circuit breakers located at the
connection box.

9.11.2 Interlocking Arrangement

Where the generator is not arranged for parallel operation with the external or shore power supply,
an interlocking arrangement is to be provided for the circuit breakers or disconnecting devices
between the generator and the external or shore power supply in order to safeguard from
connecting unlike power sources to the same bus.

9.13 Protection for Motor Branch Circuits

9.13.1 General
Trip elements of circuit breaker for starting and for short-circuit protection are to be in accordance
with 4-6-2/9.13.2 or 4-6-2/9.13.3, except that circuit breakers having only instantaneous trips may
be provided as part of the motor control center. Where circuit breakers having only instantaneous
trips are provided, the motor running protective device is to open all conductors, and the motor
controller is to be capable of opening the circuit without damage to itself resulting from a current
up to the setting of the circuit breaker. Circuit-disconnecting devices are to be provided for each
motor branch circuit and to be in accordance with 4-6-3/3.13.2 and 4-6-4/7.17.2.

9.13.2 Direct-current Motor Branch Circuits

The maximum fuse rating or the setting of the time-delay trip element is to be 150% of the full-
load rating of the motor served. If that rating or setting is not available, the next higher available
rating or setting may be used.

9.13.3 Alternating-current Motor Branch Circuits

The maximum fuse rating or setting of the trip element is to be the value stated below. If that
rating or setting is not available, the next higher available rating or setting may be used.

Type of Motor Rating or Setting in % Motor Full-load Current

Squirrel-cage and Synchronous Full-voltage, Reactor 250

or Resistor-starting

Autotransformer Starting 200

Wound Rotor 150

When fuses are used to protect polyphase motor circuits, it is to be arranged to protect against
single-phasing.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 258
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

The setting of magnetic instantaneous trips for short-circuit protection only is to exceed the
transient current inrush of the motor, and to be the standard value nearest to, but not less than, 10
times full-load motor current.

9.13.4 Motor Running Protection

Running protection is to be provided for all motors having a power rating exceeding 0.5 kW,
except that such protection is not to be provided for steering gear motors (see 4-6-2/11.3). The
running protection is to be set between 100% and 125% of the motor rated current.

For athwartship thrusters having only instantaneous trips, a motor overload alarm in the
wheelhouse is acceptable in lieu of the motor running protection.

9.13.5 Undervoltage Protection and Undervoltage Release (2022)

Undervoltage protection is to be provided for motors having power rating exceeding 0.5 kW (0.7
hp) to prevent undesired restarting upon restoration of the normal voltage, after a stoppage due to
a low voltage condition or voltage failure condition.

Undervoltage release is to be provided for the following motors unless the automatic restart upon
restoration of the normal voltage will cause hazardous conditions:

i) Primary essential services (see 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 4).

ii) Only those secondary essential services (see 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 5) necessary for safety,
such as:

● Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms where they may prevent the normal
operation of the propulsion machinery (See Note 1 below)
iii) Where the design of the consumers listed in 4-6-2/9.13.5 i) and ii) are demonstrated to
show that the operation of such consumers is not immediately essential to maintain the
vessel’s propulsion, steering and a minimum level of safety, undervoltage protection in
lieu of undervoltage release may be acceptable.

Special attention is to be paid to the starting currents due to a group of motors with undervoltage
release controllers being restarted automatically upon restoration of the normal voltage. Means
such as sequential starting is to be provided to limit excessive starting current, where necessary.

Note:
1 Undervoltage protection is to be provided for ventilation fans for engine and boiler room, which are
supplied by an emergency source of power for the purpose of removing smoke from the space after a fire
has been extinguished

9.15 Protection for Transformer Circuits

9.15.1 Setting of Overcurrent Device
Each power and lighting transformer feeder is to be protected by an overcurrent device rated or set
at a value not more than 125% of rated primary current. When a transformer is provided with an
overcurrent device in the secondary circuit rated or set at not more than 125% of rated secondary
current, the feeder overcurrent device may be rated or set at a value less than 250% of the rated
primary current.

9.15.2 Parallel Operation

When the transformers are arranged for parallel operation, means are to be provided to disconnect
the transformer from the secondary circuit. Where power can be fed into secondary windings,
short-circuit protection (i.e., short-time delay trips) is to be provided in the secondary connections.
In addition, when the disconnecting device in primary side of the transformer is opened due to any

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 259
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

reason (e.g., the short-circuit protection, overload protection, or manual operation for opening),
the disconnecting device in the secondary side of the transformer is to be arranged to open the
circuit automatically.

9.17 Protection for Meters, Pilot Lamps and Control Circuits

Indicating and measuring devices are to be protected by means of fuses or current limiting devices. For
devices such as voltage regulators where interruption of the circuit may have serious consequences, fuses
are not to be used. If fuses are not used, means are to be provided to prevent fire in the unprotected part of
installation. Fuses are to be placed as near as possible to the tapping from the supply.

9.18 Harmonic Distortion for Ship Electrical Distribution System including Harmonic
Filters(1 July 2017)
9.18.1 Monitoring
Where the electrical distribution system on board a ship includes harmonic filters, such ships are
to be fitted with facilities to continuously monitor the levels of harmonic distortion experienced on
the main busbar as well as alerting the crew should the level of harmonic distortion exceed the
acceptable limits. Where the engine room is provided with automation systems, this reading is to
be logged electronically, otherwise it is to be recorded in the engine log book for future inspection
by the surveyor. However, harmonic filters installed for single application frequency drives such
as pump motors may be excluded from the requirements of this section.

9.18.2 Measurement
As a minimum, harmonic distortion levels of main busbar on board such existing ships are to be
measured annually under seagoing conditions as close to the periodical machinery survey as
possible so as to give a clear representation of the condition of the entire plant to the surveyor.
Harmonic distortion readings are to be carried out when the greatest amount of distortion is
indicated by the measuring equipment. An entry showing which equipment was running and/or
filters in service is to be recorded in the log so this can be replicated for the next periodical survey.
Harmonic distortion levels are also to be measured following any modification to the ship’s
electrical distribution system or associated consumers by suitably trained ship’s personnel or from
a qualified outside source. Records of all the above measurements are to be made available to the
surveyor at each periodical survey in accordance with Part 7 of the Rules.

9.18.3 Validation of Calculated Harmonic

Where the electrical distribution system on board a ship includes harmonic filters the system
integrator of the distribution system is to show, by calculation, the effect of a failure of a harmonic
filter on the level of harmonic distortion experienced.

The system integrator of the distribution system is to provide the ship owner with guidance
documenting permitted modes of operation of the electrical distribution system while maintaining
harmonic distortion levels within acceptable limits during normal operation as well as following
the failure of any combination of harmonic filters.

The calculation results and validity of the guidance provided are to be verified by the Surveyor
during sea trials.

9.18.4 Filter Protection Alarm

Arrangements are to be provided to alert the crew in the event of activation of the protection of a
harmonic filter circuit.

A harmonic filter is to be arranged as a three phase unit with individual protection of each phase.
The activation of the protection arrangement in a single phase is to result in automatic
disconnection of the complete filter. Additionally, there is to be installed a current unbalance

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 260
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

detection system independent of the overcurrent protection alerting the crew in case of current
unbalance.

Consideration is to be given to additional protection for the individual capacitor element as e.g.
relief valve or overpressure disconnector in order to protect against damage from rupturing. This
consideration is to take into account the type of capacitors used

9.19 Protection of Harmonic Filter Circuits Associated with Electric Propulsion (1 July
2017)
Notwithstanding the requirements of 4-6-2/9.18 above, Harmonic filters circuits shall be protected against
overload and short-circuit. An alarm is to be initiated in a continuously manned location in the event of an
activation of overload or short-circuit protection.

In cases where multiple harmonic filter circuits are used in series or in parallel, current imbalance between
the different filter circuits is to be continuously monitored. The total rms current into each phase of a
passive harmonic filter circuit is also to be monitored. Detection of a current imbalance shall be alarmed in
a continuously manned location. If the current imbalance exceeds the ratings of the individual filter circuit
components, the appropriate circuits shall automatically trip and be prevented from interacting with other
parts of the electrical network.

Harmonic filters that contain capacitors are to have means of monitoring and of providing advance
warning of capacitor(s) deterioration. Harmonic filters containing oil filled capacitors are to be provided
with suitable means of monitoring oil temperature or capacitor internal pressure. Refer to 4-5-2/9.5 for
additional requirements. Detection of capacitor(s) deterioration shall be alarmed locally at the equipment
and in a continuously manned location. Power to the harmonic filter circuit containing the deteriorated
capacitor(s) shall be automatically disconnected and the capacitor discharged safely upon detection of
deterioration.

In cases where provisions for automatic/manual switching and/or disconnection of harmonic filter circuits
are provided, there are to be provisions to prevent transient voltages in the system and to automatically
discharge the capacitors in the harmonic filter circuits before they can be put back on-line.

Capacitors used in harmonic filters/capacitor banks are to be prevented from producing a leading system
power factor which could potentially lead to generator(s) becoming self-excited. In cases where a leading
power factor condition approaches the point of the generator(s) becoming self-excited, the appropriate
capacitive circuits shall be automatically disconnected and prevented from interacting with the rest of the
electrical network.

11 System for Steering Gear

11.1 Power Supply Feeder (1 July 2016)

Each electric or electro-hydraulic steering gear is to be served by at least two exclusive circuits fed directly
from the main switchboard. However, one of the circuits may be supplied through the emergency
switchboard.

For craft fitted with alternative propulsion and steering arrangements, such as azimuthing propulsors,
where the propulsion power exceeds 2,500 kW per thruster unit, see 4-3-5/5.12.1 of the Marine Vessel
Rules.

An auxiliary electric or electro-hydraulic steering gear associated with a main electric or electro-hydraulic
steering gear may be connected to one of the circuits supplying this main steering gear. The circuits
supplying an electric or electro-hydraulic steering gear are to have adequate rating for supplying all
motors, control system and instrumentation which are normally connected to them and operated
simultaneously. The circuits are to be separated throughout their length as widely as is practicable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 261
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

11.3 Protection for Steering Gear Circuit

11.3.1 Short Circuit Protection
Each steering gear feeder is to be provided with short-circuit protection which is to be located at
the main or emergency switchboard. Long term overcurrent protection is not to be provided for
steering gear motors.

11.3.1(a) Direct Current (DC) Motors.

For DC motors, the feeder circuit breaker is to be set to trip instantaneously at not less than 300%
and not more than 375% of the rated full-load current of the steering-gear motor, except that the
feeder circuit breaker on the emergency switchboard may be set to trip at not less than 200%.

11.3.1(b) Alternating Current (AC) Motors.

For AC motors, the protection against excess current, including starting current, if provided, is to
be for not less than twice the full load current of the motor or circuit so protected, and is to be
arranged to permit the passage of the appropriate starting currents.

11.3.1(c) Fuses as Motor-feeder Protection.

The use of fuses instead of circuit breakers for steering gear motor feeder short-circuit protection
is not permitted.

11.3.1(d) Control System Power Supply Circuit.

The power supply circuit for steering gear control system is to be provided with short circuit
protection only. See also 4-3-3/11.5.

11.3.2 Undervoltage Release

Power unit motor controllers and other automatic motor controllers are to be fitted with
undervoltage release.

11.5 Emergency Power Supply

Where the rudder stock is required by 3-2-8/7.1 to be over 230 mm (9 in.) diameter using Ks = 1 . 0 in way
of the tiller, excluding strengthening for navigation in ice, an alternative power supply, sufficient at least to
supply the steering gear power unit and also its associated control system and rudder angle indicator, is to
be provided automatically within 45 seconds either from the emergency source of electrical power or from
an independent source of power located in the steering gear compartment. The steering gear power unit
under alternative power supply is to be capable of moving the rudder from 15 degrees on one side to 15
degrees on the other side in not more than 60 seconds with the craft at the summer draft while running at
one half the maximum speed ahead or 7 knots, whichever is the greater. The alternative power supply is to
have a capacity for at least 10 minutes of continuous operation. See 4-6-2/5.3.5.

11.7 Controls, Instrumentation, and Alarms

See 4-3-3/11.

13 Lighting and Navigation Light Systems

13.1 Lighting System

13.1.1 Main Lighting System
A main electric lighting system is to provide illumination throughout those parts of the craft
normally accessible to and used by passengers or crew. It is to be supplied from the main source of
electrical power.

13.1.2 System Arrangement

13.1.2(a) Main Lighting System.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 262
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

The arrangement of the main electric lighting system is to be such that a fire or other casualty in
spaces containing the main source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any,
the main switchboard and the main lighting switchboard will not render the emergency electric
lighting system required by 4-6-2/5.3.2 of this Section or 5C-7-5/13.5.3 of the Marine Vessel Rules
inoperative.

13.1.2(b) Emergency Lighting System.

The arrangement of the emergency electric lighting system is to be such that a fire or other
casualty in spaces containing the emergency source of electrical power, associated transforming
equipment, if any, the emergency switchboard and the emergency lighting switchboard will not
render the main electric lighting system required by 4-6-2/13.1.1 inoperative.

13.1.3 Lighting Circuits

13.1.3(a) Machinery Space and Accommodation Spaces .
In spaces such as:

● Public spaces
● Category A machinery spaces
● Galleys
● Corridors
● Stairways leading to boat-decks, including stairtowers and escape trunks

there is to be more than one final sub-circuit for lighting, one of which may be supplied from the
emergency switchboard in such a way that failure of any one circuit does not leave these spaces in
darkness.

13.1.3(b) Cargo Spaces.

Fixed lighting circuits in cargo spaces are to be controlled by multipole-linked switches situated
outside of the cargo spaces. Means are to be provided on the multipole linked switches to indicate
the live status of circuits.

13.1.4 Protection for Lighting Circuits

Lighting circuits are to be protected against overload and short-circuit. Overload protective
devices are to be rated or set at not more than 30 amperes. The connected load is not to exceed the
lesser of the rated current carrying capacity of the conductor or 80% of the overload protective
device rating or setting. The control switches are to be rated for the load controlled.

13.3 Navigation Light System (2017)

13.3.1 Feeder (1 July 2021)
Navigation lights (mast head, side and stern lights) are to be fed by their own exclusive
distribution board located on the bridge. The distribution board is to be supplied from the main as
well as from the emergency source of power (see 4-6-2/5.3.2). A means to transfer between the
two power sources is to be fitted on the bridge. Automatic switch over to alternative source of
power is permitted.

13.3.2 Branch Circuit

Each navigation light is to have its own branch circuit, and each branch circuit is to be fitted with
a protective device.

13.3.3 Duplicate Lamp

Each navigation light is to be fitted with duplicate lamps.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 263
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

13.3.4 Control and Indication Panel (1 July 2022)

A control and indication panel for the navigation lights is to be provided on the navigation bridge.
The panel is to be fitted with the following functions:

i) A means to disconnect each navigation light.

ii) An indicator for each navigation light.
iii) Automatic visual and audible warning in the event of failure of a navigation light. If a
visual signal device is connected in series with the navigation light, the failure of this
device is not to cause the extinction of the navigation light. The audible device is to be
connected to a separate power supply so that the audible alarm may still be activated in
the event of power or circuit failure to the navigation lights.

Note: A separate source of power supply to the audible device required by 4-6-2/13.3.4 is not
necessary where the audible device is integral with the indicator panel which also contains a
visual alarm.

15 Interior Communication Systems

15.1 Navigation Bridge

15.1.1 General
At least two independent means are to be provided for communicating orders from the navigation
bridge to the position in the machinery space or in the control room from which the speed and
direction of thrust of the propellers are normally controlled. Appropriate means of communication
are to be provided to any other positions from which the main propulsion machinery may be
controlled. See 4-6-2/5.3.2 for power supply.

15.1.2 Engine Order Telegraph

One of the communicating means between the navigation bridge and the main propulsion control
position is to be an engine room telegraph which provides visual indication of the orders and
responses both in the machinery space and on the navigation bridge. Final sub-circuit for power
supply to this system is to be independent of other electrical systems and control, monitoring and
alarm systems. See 4-6-2/5.3.2 for power supply. Communication network and power supply
circuit for this may be combined with the engine order telegraph system specified in 4-6-2/15.3.
For craft less than 500 GT, an engine order telegraph need not be provided if the propulsion plant
is controlled entirely from the navigation bridge with no means of normal engine control from the
engine room.

15.3 Main Propulsion Control Stations

A common talking means of voice communication and calling or engine order telegraph repeater is to be
provided between the main propulsion control station and local control positions for main propulsion
engines and controllable pitch propellers. Voice communication systems are to provide the capability of
carrying on a conversation while the craft is being navigated. Final sub-circuit for power supply to these
are to be independent of other electrical systems and the control, monitoring and alarm systems.
Communication network and power supply circuit for the voice communication system may be combined
with the system required in 4-6-2/15.5.

15.5 Voice Communications

15.5.1 Propulsion and Steering Control Stations
A common talking means of voice communication and calling is to be provided between the
navigation bridge, main propulsion control station and the steering gear compartment so that the
simultaneous talking among these spaces is possible at all times and the calling to these spaces is
always possible even if the line is busy.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 264
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

15.5.2 Elevator
Where an elevator is installed, a telephone is to be permanently installed in all cars and connected
to a continuously manned area. The telephone may be sound powered, battery operated or
electrically powered from the emergency source of power.

15.5.3 Independence of Power Supply Circuit

Final sub-circuit for power supply to these voice communication systems is to be independent of
other electrical systems and control, monitoring and alarm systems. See 4-6-2/5.3.2 for power
supply.

15.7 Emergency and Interior-communication Switchboard

Emergency and interior-communication switchboards, when fitted, are to comply with the applicable parts
of 4-6-4/7, and attention is directed to the requirements of the governmental authority whose flag the craft
flies.

15.9 Public Address System15.9 Public Address System

Craft with the keel laid or in similar stage of construction on or after 1 July 1998 are to meet the following
requirements. A public address system is to be provided complying with subparagraphs 4-6-2/15.9.1
through 4-6-2/15.9.3, as follows:

15.9.1 (2022)
The system is to be a loud speaker installation enabling the broadcast of messages to all spaces
where crew members or passengers, or both, are normally present, and to muster stations. The
system is to provide for the broadcast of messages from the navigation bridge and other places
onboard, as may be required by ABS, with an override function so that all emergency messages
may be broadcast if any loudspeaker in the spaces concerned has been turned off, its volume has
been turned down or the public address system is in use for other purposes.

Note: "Spaces where crew members or passengers or both are normally present" include all accommodation
spaces. With respect to spaces where a public address system may not be required, these may be spaces
such as under deck passageways, including passageways in the car hold between an accommodation
space and an engine-room, bosun's lockers and pump-rooms

The system is to be installed with acoustic marginal conditions and is not to require any action
from the addressee. The system is to be protected against unauthorized use.

15.9.2 (2023)
With the craft underway in normal conditions, the minimum sound pressure levels for
broadcasting emergency announcements shall be: in interior spaces, 75 dB(A) and at least 20
dB(A) above the corresponding speech interference level; in exterior spaces, 80 dB(A) and at least
15 dB(A) above the corresponding speech interference level, which is to be maintained without
action from addressees.

15.9.3
The system is to be connected to the emergency source of power.

For passenger craft, see Section 5-1-1.

15.9.4 (2013)
Where a single system serves for both public address and general emergency alarm functions, the
system is to be arranged so that a single failure is not to cause the loss of both systems and is to
minimize the effect of a single failure. The major system components, such as power supply unit,
amplifier, alarm tone generator, etc., are to be duplicated. Power supply is to comply with
4-6-2/17.1.2(b) and 4-6-2/17.1.2(c).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 265
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

For cargo craft, the coverage provided by the arrangement of the system loops and speakers is to
be such that after a single failure, the announcements and alarms are still audible in all spaces.
Duplication of system loops and speakers in each room or space is not required provided the
announcements and alarms are still audible in all spaces.

For passenger craft, a single system serving for both public address and general emergency alarm
functions would still be required to have at least two loops sufficiently separated throughout their
length with two separate and independent amplifiers. See 5C-7-5/13.15.ii of the Marine Vessel
Rules.

17 Manually Operated Alarms

17.1 General Emergency Alarm System

17.1.1 General
Each craft over 100 GT is to be fitted with a general emergency alarm system, complying with the
requirements of 4-6-2/17.1.2, to summon crew to muster stations and initiate the actions included
in the muster list. The system is to be supplemented by either a public address system, in
accordance with 4-6-2/15.9, or other suitable means of communication. Any entertainment sound
system is to be automatically turned off when the general emergency alarm is activated. For
passenger craft, see also 5C-7-5/13.13 and 5C-7-5/13.15 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

17.1.2 System Requirements

17.1.2(a)
The general emergency alarm system is to be capable of sounding the general emergency alarm
signal consisting of seven or more short blasts followed by one long blast on the ship’s whistle or
siren and additionally on an electrically operated bell or klaxon or other equivalent warning
system, which is to be powered from the craft’s main supply and the emergency source of
electrical power required by 4-6-2/5.

17.1.2(b) (2017)
There are to be not less than two sources of power supply for the electrical equipment used in the
operation of the General Emergency Alarm System, one of which is to be from the emergency
switchboard and the other from the main switchboard. The supply is to be provided by separate
feeders reserved solely for that purpose. Such feeders are to run to an automatic change-over
switch situated in, without passing through any other distributing switchboard, or adjacent to, the
main general emergency alarm control panel.

17.1.2(c) (2017)
An alarm is to be provided in a normally manned control station to indicate when there is a loss of
power in any one of the feeders required by 4-6-2/17.1.2(b).

17.1.2(d)
As an alternative to two feeders as described in 4-6-2/17.1.2(b), a battery may be considered as
one of the required sources, provided the battery has the capacity of at least 30 minutes of
continuous operation for alarming and 18 hours in standby. A low voltage alarm for the battery
and the battery charger output is to be provided. The battery charger is to be supplied from the
emergency switchboard.

17.1.2(e) (2022)
The system is to be capable of operation from the navigation bridge and, except for ship’s whistle,
also from other strategic points. The system is to be audible throughout all of the accommodation
and normal crew working spaces. The alarm is to continue to function after it has been triggered

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 266
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

until it is manually turned off or is temporarily interrupted by a message on the public address
system.

Note: "Normal crew working spaces" includes spaces where routine maintenance tasks or local control of
machinery operated at sea are undertaken.
17.1.2(f) (2023)
The minimum sound pressure levels for the emergency alarm tone in interior and exterior spaces
and 1 m (3.3 ft) from the source are to be 80 dB and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels
existing during normal equipment operation with the craft underway in moderate weather.

17.1.2(g)
The sound pressure levels at the sleeping position in cabins and in cabin bathrooms are to be at
least 75 dB (A) and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels. (Refer to Code on Alarms and
Indicators adopted by IMO Resolution A.830 (19).)

17.3 Engineers’ Alarm

On craft of 500 gross tons and over, an engineers’ alarm operable from the centralized propulsion
machinery control station in the engine room or at the propulsion machinery local control position, as
appropriate, is to be provided. It is to be audible in each engineer’s cabin, and its sound pressure level is to
comply with 4-6-2/17.1.2. See 4-6-2/5.3.3 for power supply.

17.5 Refrigerated Space Alarm

Fan and diffuser rooms serving subfreezing compartments are to be provided with a device capable of
activating an audible and visual alarm in a manned control center and operable from within the latter space
for the protection of personnel. See 4-6-2/5.3.3 for power supply.

17.7 Elevator
A device which will activate an audible and visual alarm in a manned control center is to be provided in all
cars. Such alarm system is to be independent of power and control systems of the elevator. See
4-6-2/5.3.3(e) for power supply.

19 Fire Protection and Fire Detection Systems

19.1 Emergency Stop (2021)

Wiring break monitoring device is to be provided for normally de-energized (i.e., normally open circuits)
emergency shutdown systems. The arrangement of the emergency shutdown system is to be such that no
single failure will cause loss of duplicated essential equipment such as fuel and luricating oil pumps which
may cause loss of main power generation or main propulsion.

19.1.1 Ventilation System (2013)

19.1.1(a) General.
All electrical ventilation systems are to be provided with means for stopping the motors in case of
fire or other emergency. These requirements do not apply to closed re-circulating systems within a
single space. For passenger craft, the ventilation fans of each zone in the accommodation spaces
are to be capable of being independently controlled from a continuously manned control station
See also 4-6-6/1.3.6 and 4-5-1/5.1.

19.1.1(b) Propulsion Machinery Space Ventilation.

Machinery-space ventilation is to be provided with means for stopping the ventilation fans. The
means for stopping the power ventilation serving machinery spaces is to be entirely separate from
the means for stopping the ventilation of spaces in 4-6-2/19.1.1(c) and 4-6-2/19.1.1(d).

19.1.1(c) Machinery Spaces other than Propulsion Machinery Spaces.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 267
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

Power ventilation systems serving these spaces are to be fitted with means for stopping the
ventilation fan motors in the event of fire. The means for stopping the power ventilation serving
these spaces is to be entirely separate from the means for stopping the ventilation of spaces in
4-6-2/19.1.1(b) and 4-6-2/19.1.1(d). See 4-5-1/5.1.

19.1.1(d) Accommodation Spaces, Service Spaces, Control Stations and Other Spaces. (2020)
The means for stopping all other power ventilation systems including the small/independent
ventilation fans in accommodation spaces is to be located in a centralized fire-fighting location or
navigation bridge, or in an accessible position leading to, but outside of, the space ventilated.

19.1.2 Other Auxiliaries

See 4-4-4/3.9 and 4-5-1/5.3 for emergency tripping and emergency stop for other auxiliaries, such
as forced and induced draft fans, fuel oil units, lubricating oil service pumps, thermal oil
circulating pumps and oil separators (purifiers).

19.3 Fire Detection and Alarm System

See 4-5-1/13, 4-5-2/25.1, and 4-7-3/21.7.

21 Special Requirements for Non-metallic Craft

The following is applicable to non-metallic craft:

21.1 Bonding of Metal Parts

In order to minimize the risk of fire, structural damage, electrical shock and radio interference due to
lighting strike or electrostatic discharge, all metal parts of the craft should be bonded together, in so far as
possible in consideration of galvanic corrosion between dissimilar metals, to form a continuous electrical
system, suitable for the earth return of electrical equipment and to connect the craft to the water when
waterborne. The bonding of isolated components inside the structure is not generally necessary, except in
fuel tanks.

21.3 Pressure Refueling Points (2023)

Each pressure refueling point should be provided with a means of bonding the fueling equipment to the
craft's earthing system.

21.5 Metallic Pipes

Metallic pipes capable of generating electrostatic discharges, due to the flow of liquids and gases should be
bonded so as to be electrically continuous throughout their length and should be adequately earthed.

21.7 Primary Conductors for Lightning Discharge (2023)

Primary conductors provided for lightning discharge currents should have a minimum cross-section of
70 mm2 in copper or equivalent surge-carrying capacity in aluminum.

21.9 Secondary Conductors

Secondary conductors provided for the equalization of static discharges, bonding of equipment, etc., but
not for carrying lighting discharges should have a minimum cross section of 6.5 mm2 copper or equivalent
surge current carrying capacity in aluminum.

21.11 Electrical Resistance and Cross Section of Bonding Path (2023)

The electrical resistance between bonded objects and the basic structure should not exceed 0.02 Ohms
except where it can be demonstrated that a higher resistance will not cause a hazard. The bonding path
should have sufficient cross-sectional area to carry the maximum current likely to be imposed on it without
excessive voltage drop.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 268
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2

21.13 Lightning Protection System (2023)

A lightning protection system consisting of a copper spike, a conductor of a minimum cross-section per
4-6-2/21.7 above and an earthing plate of not less than 0.25 m2 is to be installed. The spike is to project at
least 300 mm above the uppermost part of the craft, the conductor is to run clear of metal objects and as
straight as practicable, and the earthing plate is to be located so that it is immersed under all conditions of
heel. Metallic rudders may be used as the earthing plate.

A lightning protection system which is designed and installed in accordance with a recognized national
standard will be also considered.

21.15 Earthing System (2023)

A main earth terminal is to be installed to facilitate an integrated earth bonding system for equipment
earthing and earthed distribution systems. The main earth terminal is to be connected to an earthing plate
fixed to the keel below the light waterline and in a location that is fully immersed under all conditions of
heel. The earthing plate is to be of copper or other conducting material compatible with seawater and is to
have a surface area of not less than 0.25 m2.

The earthing plate for the lightning conductor is to be additional to and separate from the earthing plate
used for the power system earthing or earth bonding systems. The earthing plate of the main electrical
earth and the earthing plate for lightning conductor are to be electrically bonded together.

21.17 Equipment Earthing (2023)

All electrical enclosures, fittings, and similar equipment are to be permanently earthed to the generator
frame and engine bedplate or to the nearest earth point with equipment earthing conductors that are at least
as large as the conductors supplying the equipment.

For essential services, supplementary protective equipotential bonding is to be provided for installations in
locations where particular risk may exist due to unintentional simultaneous access to exposed-conductive-
parts of fixed equipment and extraneous-conductive parts.

On non-essential services where the voltage between simultaneously accessible conductive parts exceeds
50 VAC or 120 VDC an automatic disconnection protective device with sensitivity of 30 mA maximum for
final circuits and an operating time not exceeding 40 ms is to be fitted.

Notes:
1 An automatic disconnection protective device can be a residual current device (RCD) or a device with similar
characteristics.
2 Simultaneously accessible means equipment within arm’s reach. See IEC 61140 Par 5.2.5.
3 Equipotential bonding is essentially an electric connection that keeps the potential of several exposed and
extraneous conducting elements close to same. An earthed equipotential zone is where exposed conductive parts
and extraneous conducting parts have nearly the same potential by bonding. The intent is to ensure that the
potential difference between accessible exposed conductive parts does not occur under fault conditions.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 269
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 3
Shipboard Installation

1 Plans and Data to be Submitted

1.1 Booklet of Standard Details (2014)

A booklet of the standard wiring practices and details including such items as cable supports, earthing
details, bulkhead and deck penetrations, cable joints and sealing, cable splicing, watertight and explosion-
proof connections to equipment, earthing and bonding connections, etc., as applicable, is to be submitted.
Where cable penetration methods for A- or B-class decks or bulkheads are shown, an evidence of approval
by an Administration signatory to 1974 SOLAS as amended is also to be submitted.

For high voltage systems see installation requirements given in 4-6-5/1.9.3.

For high voltage cables the minimum cable bending radii and securing arrangements, taking the relevant
recommendations of the cable manufacturer into consideration, are to be included. Cable tray segregation
(HV to HV and HV to LV arrangements) are also to be included.

1.3 Arrangement of Electrical Equipment (2019)

A general arrangement plan showing the location of at least the following electrical equipment is to be
submitted for review.

● Generator, Essential Motor, and Transformer

● Battery
● Switchboard, Battery Charger, and Motor Controller
● Emergency Lighting Fixture
● General Emergency Alarm Device and Alarm Actuator
● Detector, Manual Call Point and Alarm Panel for Fire Detection and Alarm System
● Certified-safe Type Equipment

Where cable splices, cable connectors, or cable junction boxes are provided, locations of the splices, cable
connectors, and cable junction boxes together with the information of their services are also to be
submitted for review.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 270
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

1.5 Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas

1.5.1 Hazardous Area Plan (2021)
Hazardous area plan is to show the delineation of hazardous areas. The plan is to include general
arrangement of the vessel with plan and section views of each deck, space, tanks and process
equipment of interest, the recognized standard used for the development of hazardous area, Class
or Group, Temperature Class and extent of associated hazardous area delineation (e.g. Division 1,
2 or Zone 0, 1 or 2). In addition, spaces held at over-pressure/ under-pressure, sources of release,
ventilation openings, airlocks, bulkheads, structures, etc. are to be indicated. Other conditions
which may affect the extent of zones are also to be indicated.

1.5.2 Hazardous Area Equipment Booklet (2021)

When the selection of the equipment has been finalized, a booklet identifying all equipment in the
hazardous areas and the particulars of the equipment is to be submitted for review and to
be maintained on board for future reference. The booklet is to include a list of all electrical
equipment/instruments in the hazardous areas along with evidence of certification. The list is also
to include electrical equipment in spaces which may become hazardous upon loss of
pressurization and any associated safe-area apparatus (such as zener safety barriers) required for
the protection of the intrinsically safe type equipment.

The hazardous area equipment list is to include the following particulars of the equipment:

i) description of equipment,
ii) manufacturer’s name and model,
iii) location and hazardous area classification of the location,
iv) method of protection (flameproof, intrinsically safe, etc.),
v) rating (flammable gas group and temperature class),
vi) name of testing laboratory and certificate number,
vii) design ambient temperature,
viii) ingress protection (IP rating), etc.

The booklet is also to include evidence of certification for each equipment indicated in the list of
equipment in the hazardous area.

For intrinsically-safe systems, the booklet is also to include wiring plans, installation instructions
with any restrictions imposed by the certification agency.

Details of installation for echo sounder, speed log and impressed current cathodic protection
system are to be included in the booklet where located in these areas.

Also. see 4-6-3/9.1.4.

1.7 Maintenance Schedule of Batteries

Maintenance Schedule of batteries for essential and emergency services. See 4-6-3/3.7.5.

1.9 Cable Transit Seal Register (1 July 2021)

A Cable Transit Seal Systems Register (Register) is to be provided by the shipbuilder for all watertight
cable transits fitted to the vessel. See 4-6-3/5.13.1.

Note: Refer to IACS UR Z28.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 271
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

3 Equipment Installation and Arrangement

3.1 General Consideration

3.1.1 Equipment Location
3.1.1(a) General. Electrical equipment is to be so placed or protected as to minimize the
probability of mechanical injury or damage from the accumulation of dust, oil vapors, steam or
dripping liquids. Equipment liable to generate arc is to be ventilated or placed in a compartment
ventilated to avoid accumulation of flammable gases, acid fumes and oil vapors. See 4-6-3/9.7.3
TABLE 1 for required degree of protection for various locations.

3.1.1(b) Equipment in Areas Protected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-Spraying or Local Water-
mist Fire Extinguishing Systems in Machinery Spaces (2014). Electrical and electronic equipment
within areas affected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Water-mist Fire Extinguishing
Systems are to be suitable for use in the affected area. See 4-6-3/3.1.1(b) FIGURE 1. Where
enclosures have a degree of protection lower than IP44, evidence of suitability for use in these
areas is to be submitted to ABS taking into account:

i) The actual Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing
system being used and its installation arrangements, and
ii) The equipment design and layout, e.g., position of inlet ventilation openings, filters,
baffles, etc. to prevent or restrict the ingress of water mist/spray into the equipment. The
cooling airflow for the equipment is to be maintained.
Note:

Additional precautions may be required to be taken with respect to:

a. Tracking as the result of water entering the equipment

b. Potential damage as the result of residual salts from sea water systems

c. High voltage installations

d. Personnel protection against electric shock

Equipment may require maintenance after being subjected to water mist/spray.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 272
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

FIGURE 1
Example of Area Affected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or
LocalWater-mist Fire Extinguishing System in Machinery Spaces (2014)

3.1.2 Protection from Bilge Water

All generators, motors and electric couplings are to be so arranged that they cannot be damaged by
bilge water; and, if necessary, a watertight coaming is to be provided to form a well around the
base of such equipment with provision for removing water from the well.

3.1.3 Accessibility
The design and arrangement of electrical apparatus is to provide accessibility to parts requiring
inspection or adjustment. Armature and field coils, rotors and revolving fields are to be removable
and where air ducts are used, there are to be means of access.

3.3 Generators
All generators are to be located with their shafts in a fore-and-aft direction on the vessel and are to operate
satisfactorily in accordance with the inclination requirements of 4-1-1/17. Where it is not practicable to
mount the generators with the armature shafts in the fore-and-aft direction, their lubrication will require
special consideration. Provision is to be made to prevent oil or oil vapor from passing into the machine
windings.

3.4 Installations subject to Surveyor Satisfaction (2020)

In general, equipment is to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer installation instructions, as
applicable.

Location of electrical equipment is to account for access for operation, maintenance, repair, inspection and
proper ergonomics of the equipment for operation and maintenance. (Guidance notes of the Application of
Ergonomics to Marine Systems, Publication no. 86, provides guidance for proper installations).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 273
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

In general, bulkhead mounted equipment should not be installed in passageways and stairwells. If installed,
the equipment so arranged as to not to impede the egress for personnel or danger to personnel transiting the
area subject to motions of the vessel.

Bulkhead mounted equipment in passageways are not to reduce the required passageway width as required
by SOLAS, as applicable.

Splices or junction boxes located behind joiner bulkheads are to be provided with hinged or removable
access covers for accessibility and inspection.

Location of splices or junction boxes located above drop down ceiling panels are to have nameplates by
the closest removable panels indicating the location of equipment.

Where cable entrance to equipment needs to be from the top or side, the enclosure cable penetrations are
not to reduce the required degree of protection of the enclosure.

Location requirements for optional Class notations, as applicable.

Located as not to interfere or require removal within structural WERP and BERP areas.

Electrical receptacles and switches in dry accommodation areas should not be located immediately
adjacent to routinely used exterior doors allowing rain, sleet, snow or splashing sea water entering the
space and damage to equipment, or be provided with a higher degree of protection.

3.5 Ship Service Motors

3.5.1 General
Motors for use in the machinery space above the floor plate or spaces where subject to mechanical
injury, or dripping of oil or water are to have an enclosure of at least IP22 protection in accordance
with 4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 1. However where they are protected by drip covers, they may have an
enclosure of the lower protection grade than IP22. The motors having a protection enclosure of
IP22 or lower are to be installed at a location high enough to avoid bilge water. Motors below the
level of the floor plates are to have an enclosure of at least IP44 protection. Where motors
intended for service at sea are not mounted with the rotor shafts in the fore-and-aft direction, the
type of bearing and lubrication will require special consideration.

3.5.2 Pump Motors

Motors for operating plunger and close-coupled pumps are to have the driving end entirely
enclosed or designed to prevent leakage from entering the motor.

3.5.3 Motors on Weather Decks

Motors for use on weather decks are to have an enclosure of at least IP56 protection or are to be
enclosed in watertight housings.

3.5.4 Motors Below Decks

Motors below decks are to be installed at a location as dry as practicable and away from steam,
water, and oil piping.

3.7 Accumulator Batteries

3.7.1 General
The following requirements are applicable to permanently installed power, control and monitoring
storage batteries of acid or alkaline types. Batteries are to be so arranged that the trays are
accessible and provided with not less than 254 mm (10 in.) headroom. Where a relief valve is
provided for discharging excessive gas due to overcharge, arrangements are to be made for
releasing the gas to the weather deck away from any source of ignition.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 274
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

3.7.2 Battery Installation and Arrangements

3.7.2(a) Large Batteries (2020)
Large storage batteries, those connected to a charging device with an output of more than 2 kW,
are to be installed in a room assigned to the battery only, but may be installed in a deck locker if
such a room is not available. No electrical equipment is to be installed in the battery rooms unless
essential for the operational purposes and certified safe for battery room atmosphere. Electrical
equipment installed in battery rooms may be any of the types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be
ISO/IEC 80079-20-1 group IIC class T1.

3.7.2(b) Moderate-size Batteries (1 July 2022)

Batteries of moderate size, those connected to a charging device with a power output of 0.2 kW up
to and including 2 kW, may be installed in the battery room or may be installed in battery lockers
or deck boxes in the emergency generator room, machinery space or other suitable location.
Cranking batteries are to be located as closely as possible to the engine or engines served.
Batteries are to be protected from mechanical damage, dripping water and condensation where
necessary. In general, batteries are to be installed away from sources of ignition.

Where engine starting batteries are installed in open racks, the arrangement is to provide for
personnel protection from the batteries where an operator is stationed to start the engine, either for
testing or normal operations. This may be accomplished by the arrangement of the space or by
provision of a partition between the battery racks and the engine starting location.

Notes:
In order for the space considered "well ventilated" in the context of battery installation, the following requirements
are to be met:
i A detailed calculation showing adequate ventilation for the space should be submitted to the ABS
technical office for review and approval.
ii The ventilation system would be considered adequate if the calculation indicates a liberated hydrogen
gas concentration not exceeding 1 percent by volume of the proposed space. Please refer to IEC
standards 62485-2 or 60079-10.
iii The calculation is to represent worst case scenario assuming all batteries are releasing gases at the same
time.
iv The ventilation system is to be arranged to ensure adequate air movement in the general battery areas to
diffuse generation of hydrogen gas and to assure that pockets of trapped hydrogen gas do not occur
particularly at the top of the space (or ceiling).

3.7.2(c) Small Batteries

Small batteries are to be installed in a battery box and may be located as desired, except they are
not to be located in sleeping quarters unless hermetically sealed.

3.7.2(d) Low-hydrogen-emission Battery Installations

A low hydrogen emission battery installation with a battery charger having a charging rate of a
large or moderate battery size installation may be treated as a moderate or small battery
installation, respectively, if the following are met:

i) Calculations under the worst case charging conditions are submitted that demonstrate that
the low-hydrogen-emission battery installation does not emit more hydrogen under
similar charging conditions than a bank of standard lead acid batteries supplied by a 2 kW
charger for a moderate battery installation or 0.2 kW charger for a small battery
installation, and
ii) A warning notice is placed to notify maintenance personnel that additional batteries are
not to be installed, and batteries are only to be replaced by other batteries of the same or
lower hydrogen emission rate.
3.7.2(e) Battery trays and battery locker shelves (2020)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 275
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

Trays or shelves for batteries are to be chocked with wood strips or equivalent to prevent
movement and each tray is to be fitted with nonabsorbent insulating supports on the bottom and
with similar spacer blocks at the sides or with equivalent provision to secure air-circulation space
all around each tray.

3.7.2(f) Identification of Battery Types.

Lead-acid batteries and alkaline batteries, when placed in the same battery compartment, are to be
effectively identified as to type and segregated.

3.7.3 Ventilation
3.7.3(a) Battery Rooms (2020)
Battery rooms are to be ventilated to avoid accumulation of flammable gas. Natural ventilation
may be employed for moderate and small battery installations if ducts are run directly from the top
of the battery room to the open air above.

If natural ventilation is impractical, mechanical exhaust ventilation is to be provided with fan

intake at the top of the room. Fans are to be of non-sparking construction in accordance with
4-6-3/9.7 and capable of completely changing the air in the battery room in not more than two
minutes. Alternatively, a lesser ventilation rate may be considered, provided that satisfactory
calculations are submitted substantiating that adequate ventilation is available to maintain the
flammable gases within the battery room to a level below the lower explosive limit (L.E.L.) at the
maximum battery charging current. Where the ventilation rate is based on low hydrogen emission
type batteries, a warning notice to this effect is to be provided in a visible place in the battery
room. Openings for air inlet are to be provided near the floor. The battery chargers are to be
interlocked with the power ventilation system to prevent charging and release of gas when the fan
is not running.

3.7.3(b) Battery Lockers. Battery lockers are to be ventilated, if practicable, similarly to battery
rooms by a duct led from the top of the locker to the open air or to an exhaust ventilation duct.
Louvers or equivalent are to be provided near the bottom for entrance of air.

3.7.3(c) Deck Boxes (1 July 2022)

Deck boxes are to be provided with a duct from the top of the box, terminating in a goose neck,
mushroom head or equivalent to prevent entrance of water and the ducting is to be extended 1.3 m
(4 feet) above the box. Holes for air inlet are to be provided on at least two opposite sides of the
box. The entire deck boxes, including openings for ventilation, is to be weathertight to prevent
entrance of spray or rain.

A minimum of 25 mm (1 inch) of air circulation space is to be provided around and in between the
batteries.

3.7.3(d) Small Battery Boxes. Boxes for small batteries require no ventilation other than openings
near the top to permit escape of gas.

3.7.4 Protection from Corrosion (2020)

The interiors of battery rooms, including the structural parts and shelves therein, as well as
ventilation inlets and outlets are to be painted with corrosion-resistant paint. Shelves in battery
rooms or lockers for acid batteries are to have a watertight lining of sheet lead not less than 1.6
mm (1/16 in.) on all sides. For alkaline batteries the shelves are to be similarly lined with steel not
less than 0.8 mm (1/32 in.) thick. Alternatively, a battery room may be fitted with a watertight
corrosion resistant material or lead pan, steel for alkaline batteries, over the entire deck, carried up
not less than 152 mm (6 in.) on all sides. Details of manufactured corrosive resistant materials are
to be provided upon request. Deck boxes are to be lined in accordance with the above alternative
method. Boxes for small batteries are to be lined to a depth of 76 mm (3 in.) consistent with the
methods described above.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 276
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

3.7.5 Maintenance of Batteries

3.7.5(a) Maintenance Schedule of batteries (1 July 2016). Where batteries are fitted for use for
essential and emergency services, a maintenance schedule of such batteries is to be provided and
maintained.

The schedule is to include all batteries used for essential and emergency services, including
system batteries installed in battery rooms, battery lockers and deck boxes as well as batteries
installed within vendor supplied equipment. Examples of batteries included with equipment are:

● Computer equipment and programmable logic controllers (PLC) used in computer based
systems and programmable electronic systems, when used for essential or emergency services.
● Navigation equipment, such as the equipment required by chapter 13 and 14 of the
International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft.

The schedule is to be submitted for review,during their plan approval or the new building survey,
and is to include at least the following information regarding the batteries.

● Type and manufacturer’s type designation

● Voltage and ampere-hour rating
● Location
● Equipment and/or system(s) served
● Maintenance/replacement cycle dates
● Date(s) of last maintenance and/or replacement
● For replacement batteries in storage, the date of manufacture and shelf life (see note below)
Note:

Shelf life is the duration of storage under specified conditions at the end of which a battery retains the ability to
give a specified performance.

3.7.5(b) Procedure of maintenance. Procedures are to be put in place to show that, where batteries
are replaced, they are to be of an equivalent performance type. Details of the schedule, procedures,
and the maintenance records are to be included in the ship’s safety management system and
integrated into the ship’s operational maintenance routine, as appropriate, which are to be verified
by the Surveyor.

3.7.6 Replacement of Batteries (1 July 2022)

Where a vented type battery (See Note 1) replaces a valve-regulated, sealed type battery (See Note
2), the requirements in 4-6-3/3.7.2 and 4-6-3/3.7.3 are to be complied with on the basis of the
charging capacity.

Where a valve-regulated, sealed type battery (See Note 2) replaces a vented type battery (See Note
1) used for engine starting, the battery charging requirements are to be verified with the battery
manufacturer and the requirements in 4-6-4/5.7 applied.

Notes:
1 A vented battery is one in which the cells have a cover provided with an opening through which products
of electrolysis and evaporation are allowed to escape freely from the cells to atmosphere.
2 A valve-regulated battery is one in which cells are closed but have an arrangement (valve) which allows
the escape of gas if the internal pressure exceeds a predetermined value.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 277
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

3.9 Switchboard (2015)

Switchboards are to be so arranged as to give easy access as may be needed to apparatus and equipment,
without danger to personnel. Switchboards are to be located in a dry place so as to provide a clear working
space of at least 900 mm (35 in.) at the front of the switchboard and a clearance of at least 600 mm (24 in.)
at the rear which may be reduced to 457 mm (18 in.) in way of stiffeners or frames except that, for
switchboards which are enclosed at the rear and are fully serviceable from the front, clearance at the rear
will not be required unless necessary for cooling. Switchboards are to be secured to a solid foundation.
They are to be self-supported, or be braced to the bulkhead or the deck above. In case, the last method is
used, means of bracing is to be flexible to allow deflection of the deck without buckling the assembly
structure.

3.11 Distribution Boards

3.11.1 Location and Protection
Distribution boards are to be located in accessible positions and not in such space as bunkers,
storerooms, cargo holds or compartments allotted alternately to passengers or cargo. Distribution
boards may be located behind panels/linings within accommodation spaces, including stairway
enclosures, without the need to categorize the space to a fire integrity standard, provided no
provision is made for storage. Distribution boards are to have approved noncombustible, non-
hygroscopic enclosures. Metal enclosures and all exposed metal parts in nonmetallic enclosures
are to be earthed to the craft’s structure. All cases are to be of adequate mechanical strength.

3.11.2 Switchboard-type Distribution boards

Distribution boards of the switchboard type, unless installed in machinery spaces or in
compartments assigned exclusively to electric equipment and accessible only to authorized
personnel, are to be completely enclosed or protected against accidental contact and unauthorized
operation.

3.11.3 Safety-type Panels

If the method of operation demands the handling of switches by persons unfamiliar with electrical
equipment, the distribution board is to be of the safety type; this type of distribution board is to be
used for controlling branch lighting circuits. Dead front type panels are to be used where voltage
to earth is in excess of 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms between conductors.

3.11.4 Lighting Distribution Boards (2021)

To prevent the simultaneous loss of main and emergency lighting distribution boards due to
localized fire or other casualty, these distribution boards are to be installed as widely apart as
practicable in the machinery spaces.

For spaces other than the machinery space (e.g. accommodation space, ro-ro cargo spaces, etc.),
are to have these lighting distribution boards installed at locations which are separated by a
boundary wall. For the navigation bridge, the main and emergency lighting distribution boards are
not to be installed in the same compartment of the navigation console or panel

Cables emanating from the main or emergency lighting switchboard to the main or emergency
lighting distribution board respectively are also to be installed as widely apart as practicable. See
also 4-6-2/13.1.2.

The emergency lights in the engine room enclosed escape route are not to be fed from the engine
room lighting distribution boards, if located in the engine room. This requirement may not be
waived based on the use of fire resistant cables.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 278
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

3.13 Motor Controllers and Control Centers

3.13.1 Location and Installation
Motor control centers are to be located in a dry place. Clear working space is to be provided
around motor control centers to enable doors to be fully opened and equipment removed for
maintenance and replacement. Motor control centers are to be secured to a solid foundation, be
self-supported, or be braced to the bulkhead.

3.13.2 Disconnecting Arrangements

3.13.2(a) Device. Means are to be provided for disconnecting the motor and controller from all
supply conductors, except that a manually operated switch or circuit breaker may serve as both
controller and disconnecting means (see 4-6-4/7.17.2).

3.13.2(b) Location. The disconnecting device may be in the same enclosure with the controller, or
may be in a separate enclosure, and is to be externally operated. Except for remotely controlled
fire extinguishing purpose motors, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker on the power-
distribution board or switchboard may serve as the disconnect device if in the same compartment
with the controller.

3.13.2(c) Locking Means. If the disconnecting device is not within sight of both motor and
controller, or if it is more than 15.25 m (50 ft) from either, it is to be arranged for locking in the
open position. For remotely controlled fire extinguishing purpose motors, the locking means are to
be provided at the feeder circuit breaker for such motors.

3.13.2(d) Identification Plate. The disconnect switch, if not adjacent to the controller, is to be
provided with an identification plate.

3.13.2(e) Open and Close Indications. The disconnect device is to indicate by a position of the
handle, or otherwise, whether it is open or closed.

3.13.3 Indicating-light Circuits

Where indicating-light circuits are employed, their potential is to be limited to 150 volts if the
opening of the foregoing disconnecting devices does not de-energize the indicating circuit.

3.15 Resistors for Control Apparatus

The resistor is to be protected against corrosion either by rust-proofing or embedding in a protective
material. Resistors are to be located in well-ventilated compartments and are to be mounted with ample
clearances, about 305 mm (12 in.) to prevent excessive heating of adjacent vessel's structure or dangerous
overheating of unprotected combustible material. The arrangement of the electrical equipment and wiring
located within these spaces is to be such as to prevent their exposure to ambient temperatures in excess of
that for which they have been designed.

3.17 Lighting Fixtures

Lighting fixtures are to be so arranged as to prevent temperature rises which could damage the cables and
wiring, and to prevent surrounding material from becoming excessively hot.

3.19 Heating Equipment

Electric radiators, if used, are to be fixed in position and be so constructed as to reduce fire risks to a
minimum. Electric radiators of the exposed-element type are not to be used.

3.21 Magnetic Compasses

Precautions are to be taken in connection with apparatus and wiring in the vicinity of the magnetic
compass to prevent disturbance of the needle from external magnetic fields.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 279
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

3.23 Portable Equipment and Outlets

Portable equipment are not to be used in cargo oil pump rooms or other hazardous areas nor are portable
lights to be used for berth lights in passenger accommodations or crew's quarters.

3.25 Receptacles and Plugs of Different Ratings (2015)

Receptacles and plugs of different electrical ratings are not to be interchangeable. In cases where it is
necessary to use 230 volts portable equipment, the receptacles for their attachment are to be of a type
which will not permit attaching 115 volts equipment.

3.27 Installation Requirements for Recovery from Dead Craft Condition (2019)
Means are to be provided to ensure that machinery can be brought into operation from the dead craft
condition without external aid. See 4-1-1/19.

Where the emergency source of power is an emergency generator which complies with 4-6-2/5.15 and
4-6-2/3.1.3, this emergency generator may be used for restoring operation of the main propulsion plant,
boilers and auxiliary machinery.

Where there is no emergency generator installed, the arrangements for bringing main and auxiliary
machinery into operation are to be such that the initial charge of starting air or initial electrical power and
any power supplies for engine operation can be developed onboard ship without external aid. If for this
purpose an emergency air compressor or an electric generator is required, these units are to be powered by
a hand-starting oil engine or a hand-operated compressor.

The arrangements for bringing the main and auxiliary machinery into operation are to have a capacity such
that the starting energy and any power supplies for propulsion engine operation are available within 30
minutes from a dead craft condition.

3.29 Services Required to be Operable Under a Fire Condition

For the purpose of 4-6-3/5.17.2, services required to be operable under a fire condition include, but not
limited thereto, are the following:

i) Fire and general alarm system

ii) Fire extinguishing system including fire extinguishing medium release alarms
iii) Emergency Fire Pump
iv) Fire detection system
v) Control and power systems for all power operated fire doors and their status indicating systems
vi) Control and power systems for all power operated watertight doors and their status indicating
systems
vii) Emergency lighting
viii) Public address system
ix) Remote emergency stop/shutdown arrangement for systems which may support the propagation of
fire and/or explosion
x) For passenger vessels, see 5C-7-5/13.7.2(b) of the Marine Vessel Rules.

3.31 High Fire Risk Areas (2022)

For the purpose of 4-6-3/3.17, the examples of the high fire risk areas are the following:

i) Machinery spaces as defined by 4-1-1/13.1 and 4-1-1/13.3,except spaces having little or no fire
risk such as machinery spaces which do not contain machinery having a pressure lubrication
system and where storage of combustibles is prohibited (e.g., ventilation and air-conditioning

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 280
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

rooms, windlass room, steering gear room, stabilizer equipment room, electrical propulsion motor
room, rooms containing section switchboards and purely electrical equipment other than oil-filled
electrical transformers (above 10 kVA), shaft alleys and pipe tunnels, and spaces for pumps and
refrigeration machinery not handling or using flammable liquids).
ii) Spaces containing fuel treatment equipment and other highly flammable substances
iii) Galleys and pantries containing cooking appliances, saunas, paint lockers and store rooms having
areas of 4 m2 or more, spaces for the storage of flammable liquids, and workshops other than those
forming part of the machinery spaces.
iv) Laundry containing drying equipment
v) For passenger vessels, see 5C-7-5/13.7.2(c) of the Marine Vessel Rules.

5 Cable Installation

5.1 General Considerations

5.1.1 Continuity of Cabling (2019)
Electric cables are to be installed in continuous lengths between terminations at equipment or in
cable junction boxes. See 4-6-3/5.33. However, approved splices and cable connectors will be
permitted at interfaces of new construction modules, when necessary to extend existing circuits for
a vessel undergoing repair or alteration, and in certain cases to provide for cables of exceptional
length (See 4-6-3/5.29 and 4-6-3/5.35, respectively).

5.1.2 Choice of Cables

The rated operating temperature of the insulating material is to be at least 10°C (18°F) higher than
the maximum ambient temperature likely to exist, or to be produced, in the space where the cable
is installed.

5.1.3 Cable Voltage Drop for New Installation

The cross-sectional area of conductors are to be so determined that the drop in voltage from the
main or emergency switchboard bus-bars to any and every point of the installation when the
conductors are carrying the maximum current under normal steady conditions of service, will not
exceed 6% of the nominal voltage. For supplies from batteries with a voltage not exceeding 55 V
this figure may be increased to 10%.

The above values are applicable under normal steady conditions. Under special conditions of short
duration, such as motor starting, higher voltage drops may be accepted provided the installation is
capable of withstanding the effects of these higher voltage drops.

5.1.4 Restricted Location of Cabling (2015)

Cables and wiring are to be installed and supported in such a manner as to avoid chafing or other
damage. Cables are to be located with a view to avoiding, as far as practicable, spaces where
excessive heat and gases may be encountered, also spaces where they may be exposed to damage,
such as exposed sides of deckhouses. Cables are not to be installed in the bilge or tanktop area
unless protected from bilge water. Cables are not to be installed in water tanks, oil tanks, cargo
tanks, ballast tanks or any liquid tanks except to supply equipment and instrumentations
specifically designed for such locations and whose functions require it to be installed in the tank.

5.1.5 Means of Drainage from Cable Enclosures

Where cables are installed in a cable draw box and horizontal pipes or the equivalent used for
cable protection, means of drainage are to be provided.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 281
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

5.1.6 High Voltage Cables

Cables serving systems above 1 kV are not to be bunched with cables serving systems of 1 kV and
below.

5.1.7 Paint on Cables

Where paint or any other coating is systematically and intentionally applied on the electric cables,
it is to be established that the mechanical and fire performance properties of the cable are not
adversely affected.

In this regard:

i) Fire retardant property is to be confirmed to be in compliance with 4-6-4/13.1.2.

ii) It is to be confirmed that the paint and the solvent used will not cause damages to the
cable sheath, e.g., cracking.

Overspray on cables or painted exterior cables are not subject to the requirements of this section.

5.1.8 Cable Installation above High Voltage Switchgear and Control-gear

Where a pressure relief flap is provided for high voltage switchgear and high voltage control-gear,
the cables are not to be installed near and above this equipment in order to prevent the damage of
cables from the flare/flame released from the relief flap upon occurrence of short circuit in this
equipment.

5.1.9 Ultraviolet (UV) Light Protection for Wiring Insulation within Fluorescent Light Fixtures
(2014)
Where the supply cable’s outer sheathing or covering is removed once the cable enters a
fluorescent light fixture to facilitate routing and/or connection, the insulation on the individual
conductors is to be protected against the possible detrimental effects of UV light exposure by one
of the following:

i) The insulation is to be manufactured with additives that protect the insulation from UV
light damage and a test report is to be submitted to ABS.
ii) Adequate shielding arrangements are to be provided inside the fixture for the entire length
of the exposed insulation within the fixture.
iii) UV protective sleeves are to be installed on the full length of the exposed conductors
inside the fixture during the installation.
5.1.10 Protection of Cables in Tanks (2020)
Where cables are installed in liquid tanks, the following arrangements are to be complied with:

i) Cables are to be installed in steel pipes with at least extra-heavy wall thickness with all
joints welded and with corrosion-resistant coating.
ii) Cable gland with gastight packing is to be provided for the cable at both ends of the cable
conduit pipe.
iii) Cable inside of the vertical cable conduit pipe is to be suitably supported (e.g., by sand-
filling or by strapping to a support-wire). Alternatively, the cable inside of the vertical
conduit pipe may be accepted without provided support if the mechanical strength of the
cable is sufficient to prevent cable damage due to the cable weight within the conduit pipe
under continuous mechanical load. Supporting documentation is to be submitted to verify
the mechanical strength of the cable with respect to the cable weight inside of the conduit.
iv) For cables terminating inside the tank, special type cable may be considered without
protection provided supporting documents are appropriately reviewed.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 282
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

5.3 Insulation Resistance for New Installation

Each power and each light circuit is to have an insulation resistance between conductors and between each
conductor and earth of not less than the following values.

Up to 5 amperes load 2 meg ohms

10 amperes load 1 meg ohm

25 amperes load 400,000 ohms

50 amperes load 250,000 ohms

100 amperes load 100,000 ohms

200 amperes load 50,000 ohms

Over 200 amperes load 25,000 ohms

If the above values are not obtained, any or all appliances connected to the circuit may be disconnected for
this test.

5.5 Protection for Electric-magnetic Induction

5.5.1 Multiple Conductor Cables
All phase conductors of alternating-current cables are to be contained within the same sheath in
order to avoid overheating due to induction by use of multiple conductor cables.

5.5.2 Single Conductor Cables

AC installations are to be carried out, as far as possible, in twin or multi-conductor cables.
However, when it is necessary to use single conductor cables in circuits rated in excess of 20 A,
the following arrangements are to be complied with:

5.5.2(a) Cables are supported on non-fragile insulators;

5.5.2(b) There are to be no magnetic materials between cables of a group; and

5.5.2(c) Where single conductor cables are run in bunches, each group of cables is to comprise
360 electrical degrees. To this end, in three-phase circuits, single conductor cable runs of 30 m
(100 ft) or longer and having a cross-sectional area of 185 mm2 (365,005 circ. mils) or more are to
be transposed throughout the length at intervals not exceeding 15 m (50 ft) in order to equalize to
some degree the impedance of the three phase circuits. Alternatively, such cables may be installed
in trefoil formation.

See 4-6-4/13.1.5 for armor.

5.5.3 Non-shielded Signal Cables

Except for fiber optic cables, non-shielded signal cables for automation and control systems
essential for the safe operation of the vessel which may be affected by electro-magnetic
interference are not to be run in the same bunch with power or lighting cables.

5.7 Joints and Sealing

Cables not having a moisture-resistant insulation are to be sealed against the admission of moisture by
methods such as taping in combination with insulating compound or sealing devices. Cables are to be
installed in such a manner that stresses on the cable are not transmitted to the conductors. Terminations and
joints in all conductors are to be so made as to retain the original electrical, flame retarding and, where
necessary, fire resisting properties of the cable. Terminal boxes are to be secured in place and the moisture-
resistant jacket is to extend through the cable clamp. Enclosures for outlets, switches, and similar fittings
are to be flame and moisture-resistant and of adequate mechanical strength and rigidity to protect the

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 283
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

contents and to prevent distortion under all likely conditions of service. See also 4-6-3/5.17.1 and
4-6-3/5.29

5.9 Support, Fixing and Bending

5.9.1 Support and Fixing
5.9.1(a) Where cables are fixed by means of clips, saddles or straps they are to have a surface area
so large and shaped such that the cables remain tight without their coverings being damaged.
Metal clips may be screwed directly to deck or bulkhead except on watertight bulkheads.

5.9.1(b) The distances between supports are to be suitably chosen according to the type of cable
and the probability of vibration, and are not to exceed 400 mm (16 in.); for a horizontal cable run
where the cables are laid on cable supports in the form of tray plates, separate support brackets or
hanger ladders, the spacing between the fixing points may be up to 900 mm (36 in.), provided that
there are supports with maximum spacing as specified above. This exemption does not apply to
cable runs along weather decks, when the cable run is arranged so that the cables can be subjected
to forces by water washing over the deck.

Note: When designing a cable support system for single-core cables consideration is also to be given to the
effects of electrodynamic forces developing on the occurrence of a short-circuit.

The above-given distances between cable supports are not necessarily adequate for these cables.
Further, other recognized standards for cable support and fixing will be considered.

5.9.1(c) The supports and the corresponding accessories, are to be robust and are to be of
corrosion-resistant material or suitably treated before erection to resist corrosion.

5.9.1(d) Cable clips or straps made from an approved material other than metal (such as
polyamide, PVC) may be used.

5.9.1(e) When cables are fixed by means of clips or straps referred in Item 4-6-3/5.9.1(d) above
and these cables are not laid on top of horizontal cable trays or cable supports, suitable metal cable
clips or saddles are to be added at regular distances not exceeding2 m (6.5 ft) in order to prevent
the release of cables during a fire. This also applies to the fixing of non-metallic conduits or pipes.

Note:

Item 4-6-3/5.9.1(e) does not necessarily apply in the case of cable runs with only one or a few cables with small
diameters for the connection of a lighting fitting, alarm transducer, etc.

5.9.1(f) Non-metallic clips, saddles or straps are to be flame retardant in accordance with IEC
Publication 60092-101.

5.9.2 Bending Radius

For bending radius requirements, see 4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 2.

5.9.3 Plastic Cable Trays and Protective Casings

5.9.3(a) Installations. Cable trays and protective casings made of plastic materials are to be
supplemented by metallic fixing and straps such that, in the event of a fire, they and the cables
affixed are prevented from falling and causing an injury to personnel and/or an obstruction to any
escape route. See 4-6-3/5.9.1(e). Cable trays and protective casings made of plastic materials are
to be flame retardant (see Appendix 4-8-4-A1 of the Marine Vessel Rules). Where plastic cable
trays and protective casings are used on open deck, they are additionally to be protected against
UV light by such as anti-UV coating or equivalent.

Note:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 284
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

“Plastic” means both thermoplastic and thermosetting plastic materials with or without reinforcement, such as
PVC and fiber reinforced plastics (FRP). “Protective casing” means a closed cover in the form of a pipe or other
closed ducts of non-circular shape.

5.9.3(b) Safe Working Load. The load on the cable trays and protective casings is to be within the
Safe Working Load (SWL). The support spacing is to be not greater than the manufacturer’s
recommendation nor in excess of the spacing at the SWL test (see Appendix 4-8-4-A1 of the
Marine Vessel Rules). In general, the spacing is not to exceed 2 meters.

Notes:

The selection and spacing of cable tray and protective casing supports are to take into account:

● Dimensions of the cable trays and the protective casings;

● Mechanical and physical properties of their material;
● Mass of the cable trays/protective casings;
● Loads due to weight of cables, external forces, thrust forces and vibrations;
● Maximum accelerations to which the system may be subjected;
● Combination of loads.

5.9.3(c) Cable occupation ratio in protective casing. The sum of the total cross-sectional area of
all cables on the basis of their external diameter is not to exceed 40% of the internal cross-
sectional area of the protective casing. This does not apply to a single cable in a protective casing.

5.9.3(d) Hazardous areas . Cable trays and protective casings passing through hazardous areas are
to be electrically conductive (see Appendix 4-8-4-A1 of the Marine Vessel Rules).

5.9.3(e) Type Testing . Cable trays and protective casings made of plastic materials are to be type
tested in accordance with Appendix 4-8-4-A1 of the Marine Vessel Rules. Alternate test
procedures for impact resistance test, safe working load test, flame retardant test, smoke and
toxicity tests and/or resistivity test from an international or national standard may be considered
instead of the test specified in Appendix 4-8-4-A1 of the Marine Vessel Rules. The type test
reports ares to be submitted for review.

5.11 Cable Run in Bunches

5.11.1 Reduction of Current Rating
Where cables which may be expected to operate simultaneously are laid close together in a cable
bunch in such a way that there is an absence of free air circulation around them the following
reduction factor is to be applied to the current rating obtained from 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10:

Number of Cables in One Bunch Reduction Factor

one to six 1.0

seven to twelve 0.85

Bunches of more than twelve cables will be subject to special consideration based on the type and
service of the various cables in the bunch.

5.11.2 Clearance and Segregation

A clearance is to be maintained between any two cable bunches of at least the diameter of the
largest cable in either bunch. Otherwise, for the purpose of determining the number of cables in
the bunch the total number of cables on both sides of the clearance will be used.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 285
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

5.11.3 Cable of Lower Conductor Temperature

The current rating of each cable in a bunch is to be determined based on the lowest conductor
temperature rating of any cable in the bunch.

5.13 Deck and Bulkhead Penetrations (1 July 2013)

5.13.1 General
Where cables pass through watertight, firetight, or smoke-tight bulkheads or decks, the
penetrations are to be made through the use of approved stuffing tubes, transit devices or pourable
materials installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation procedures to maintain the
watertight integrity or fire-rating of the bulkheads or decks. These devices or pourable materials
are not to damage the cable physically or through chemical action or through heat build-up, and
are to be examined and tested as specified in 3-7-1/3.5.7 TABLE 1 and 4-6-3/5.13.4.

Where cable conduit pipe or equivalent is carried through decks or bulkheads, arrangements are to
be made to maintain the integrity of the water or gas tightness of the structure.

5.13.1(a) New Construction (1 July 2021)

A Cable Transit Seal Systems Register (Register) is to be provided by the shipbuilder for all
watertight cable transits fitted to the vessel. The Register can be in either a hard copy or digitized
media. It is to include a marking / identification system, documentation referencing manufacturer
manual(s) for each type of cable transit installed, the Type Approval certification for each type of
transit system, applicable installation drawings, and a recording of each installed transit
documenting the as built condition after final inspection in the shipyard. It is to include sections to
record any inspection, modification, repair and maintenance.

The Register is to be reviewed by the attending Surveyor to confirm it contains a list of the
watertight cable transits, applicable cable transit information and sections to maintain in-service
maintenance and survey records.

For manned vessels, the Register is to be held on board the vessel. For unmanned vessels, if a
suitable storage location does not exist on board, the Register may be held ashore. The Register is
to be readily available to the attending Surveyor.

5.13.1(b) Vessels in Service (1 July 2021)

The owner or operator is to maintain the Register to record any disruption (repair, modification or
opening out and closing) to a cable transit or to record the installation of a new cable transit.

Note: Refer to IACS UR Z28, UR Z23 and UR Z17.

5.13.2 Non-watertight Penetrations
When cables pass through non-watertight bulkheads where the bearing surface is less than 6.4 mm
(0.25 in.), the holes are to be fitted with bushings having rounded edges and a bearing surface for
the cable of at least 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) in length. Where cables pass through deck beams or similar
structural parts, all burrs are to be removed in way of the holes and care is to be taken to eliminate
sharp edges.

5.13.3 Collision Bulkhead

Cables are not to pass through a collision bulkhead.

5.13.4 Watertight and Fire-rated Deck and Bulkhead Cable Penetrations

During installation of deck and bulkhead watertight and fire-rated cable penetrations, the attending
Surveyor is to confirm that the installer is familiar with and has access to the manufacturer’s
installation procedures for stuffing tubes, transit devices or pourable materials.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 286
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

After installation, all watertight and fire-rated cable penetrations are to be visually examined.
Watertight cable penetrations are to be tested as required by 3-7-1/3.5.7 TABLE 1.

5.15 Mechanical Protection

5.15.1 Metallic Armor
Electric cables installed in locations liable to damage during normal operation of the vessel are to
be provided with braided metallic armor and otherwise suitably protected from mechanical injury
as appropriate for the location. See also 4-6-3/9.1.3 for cables in hazardous areas.

5.15.2 Conduit Pipe or Structural Shapes

Where cables are installed in locations in way of cargo ports, hatches, tank tops, open decks
subject to seas, and where passing through decks, are to be protected by substantial metal shields,
structural shapes, pipe or other equivalent means. All such coverings are to be of sufficient
strength to provide effective protection to the cables. When expansion bends are fitted they are to
be accessible for maintenance. Where cables are installed in metal piping or in a metal conduit
system, such piping and systems are to be earthed and are to be mechanically and electrically
continuous across all joints.

5.17 Emergency and Essential Feeders

5.17.1 Location (2013)
As far as practicable, cables and wiring for emergency and essential services, including those
listed in 4-6-3/3.29, except for Emergency Fire Pumps (see 4-6-3/5.17.3), are not to pass through
high fire risk areas (see 4-6-3/3.31).

These cables and wiring are also to be run in such a manner as to preclude their being rendered
unserviceable by heating of the bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent space.

5.17.2 Services Necessary Under a Fire Condition (2013)

Where cables for services required to be operable under a fire condition (see 4-6-3/3.29), except
for the Emergency Fire Pump (see 4-6-3/5.17.3 ), including their power supplies pass through high
fire risk areas (see 4-6-3/3.31) other than those which they serve, they are to be so arranged that a
fire in any of these areas does not affect the operation of the service in any other area. This may be
achieved by any of the following measures:

5.17.2(a) Fire resistant cables in accordance with 4-6-4/13.1.3 are installed and run continuous to
keep the fire integrity within the high fire risk area. See 4-6-3/5.17.2(a) FIGURE 2.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 287
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

FIGURE 2
Cables Within High Fire Risk Areas

5.17.2(b) At least two loops/radial distributions run as widely apart as is practicable and so
arranged that in the event of damage by fire at least one of the loops/radial distributions remains
operational.

5.17.2(c) Systems that are self-monitoring, fail safe or duplicated with cable runs separated as
widely as practicable, may be exempted from the requirements in 4-6-3/5.17.2(a) and
4-6-3/5.17.2(b).

5.17.3 Electrical Cables For The Emergency Fire Pump (2013)

The electrical cables to the emergency fire pump are not to pass through the machinery spaces
containing the main fire pumps and their sources of power and prime movers. They are to be of a
fire resistant type, in accordance with 4-6-4/13.1.3, where they pass through other high fire risk
areas.

5.17.4 Requirements by the Governmental Authority

Attention is directed to the requirements of the governmental authority of the country, whose flag
the vessel flies, for the installation of emergency circuits required in various types of vessels.

5.19 Mineral Insulated Cables

At all points where mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable terminates, an approved seal is to be provided
immediately after stripping to prevent entrance of moisture into the mineral insulation. In addition, the
conductors extending beyond the sheath are to be insulated with an approved insulating material. When
mineral-insulated cable is connected to boxes or equipment, the fittings are to be approved for the
conditions of service. The connections are to be in accordance with the manufacturers installation
recommendation.

5.21 Fiber Optic Cables

The installation of fiber optic cables is to be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to
prevent sharp bends where the fiber optic cables enter the equipment enclosure. Consideration is to be
given to the use of angled stuffing tubes. The cables are to be installed so as to avoid abrading, crushing,
twisting, kinking or pulling around sharp edges.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 288
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

5.23 Battery Room

Where cables enter battery rooms, the holes are to be bushed as required for watertight bulkheads in
4-6-3/5.13. All connections within battery rooms are to be resistant to the electrolyte. Cables are to be
sealed to resist the entrance of electrolyte by spray or creepage. The size of the connecting cable is to be
based on current-carrying capacities given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10 and the starting rate of charge or
maximum discharge rate, whichever is the greater, is to be taken into consideration in determining the
cable size.

5.25 Paneling and Dome Fixtures

Cables may be installed behind paneling, provided all connections are accessible and the location of
concealed connection boxes is indicated. Where a cable strip molding is used for cable installation on the
incombustible paneling, it is to be of incombustible material. Dome fixtures are to be installed so that they
are vented or they are to be fitted with fire-resistant material in such a manner as to protect the insulated
wiring leading to the lamps and any exposed woodwork from excessive temperature.

5.27 Sheathing and Structural Insulation

Cables may be installed behind sheathing, but they are not to be installed behind nor imbedded in
structural insulation; they are to pass through such insulation at right angles and are to be protected by a
continuous pipe with a stuffing tube at one end. For deck penetrations this stuffing tube is to be at the
upper end of the pipe and for bulkhead penetrations it is to be on the uninsulated side of the bulkhead. For
refrigerated-space insulation the pipe is to be of phenolic or similar heat-insulating material joined to the
bulkhead stuffing tube or a section of such material is to be inserted between the bulkhead stuffing tube
and the metallic pipe.

5.29 Splicing of Electrical Cables

5.29.1 Basis of Approval (2020)
Replacement insulation is to be fire resistant or flame retardant and is to be equivalent in electrical
and thermal properties to the original insulation. The replacement jacket is to be at least equivalent
to the original impervious sheath and is to assure a watertight splice. Splices are to be made using
an approved splice kit which contains the following:

● Connector of correct size and number

● Replacement insulation
● Replacement jacket
● Instructions for use

In addition, prior to approval of a splicing kit, it will be required that completed splices be tested
for fire resistance, watertightness, dielectric strength, etc. to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. This
requirement may be modified for splice kits which have had such tests conducted and reported on
by an independent agency acceptable to ABS.

5.29.2 Installation
All splices are to be made after the cable is in place and are to be accessible for inspection. The
conductor splice is to be made using a pressure type butt connector by use of a one-cycle
compression tool. See 4-6-3/9.1.3 for splices in hazardous area.

5.29.3 Protection
Splices may be located in protected enclosures or in open wireways. Armored cables having
splices will not be required to have the armor replaced provided that the remaining armor has been
earthed in compliance with 4-6-3/7.9 or provided the armor is made electrically continuous.
Splices are to be so located such that stresses (as from the weight of the cable) are not carried by
the splice.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 289
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

5.31 Splicing of Fiber Optic Cables

Splicing of fiber optic cables is to be made by means of approved mechanical or fusion methods.

5.33 Cable Junction Box

Except for propulsion cables, junction boxes may be used in the installation of electric cables aboard the
vessel provided the plans required by 4-6-3/1.3 for junction boxes are submitted and the following
requirements are complied with.

5.33.1
The design and construction of the junction boxes are to comply with 4-6-4/11.7 as well as
4-6-3/5.33.2 below.

5.33.2
The junction boxes are to be suitable for the environment in which they are installed (i.e.,
explosion-proof in hazardous areas, watertight or weathertight on deck, etc.).

5.33.3
Separate junction boxes are to be used for feeders and circuits of each of the following rated
voltage levels:

5.33.3(a) Rated voltage levels not exceeding those specified in 4-6-3/7.1.i.

5.33.3(b) Rated voltage levels exceeding those in 4-6-3/5.33.3(a) up to and including 1 kV. A
physical barrier is to be used within the junction box to separate distribution systems of different
rated voltages, such as 480 V, 600 V and 750 V.

5.33.3(c)
Rated voltage levels exceeding 1 kV. Separate junction boxes are to be used for each of the rated
voltage levels exceeding 1 kV.

Each junction box and the compartment in the junction box separated by a physical barrier are to
be appropriately identified as regards the rated voltage of the feeders and circuits it contains. A
physical barrier may be used in lieu of two separate junction boxes for circuits having rated
voltage levels corresponding to those in either 4-6-3/5.33.3(a) or 4-6-3/5.33.3(b).

5.33.4
The junction boxes for emergency feeders and circuits are to be separate from those used for
normal ship service feeders and circuits.

5.33.5
Cables are to be supported, as necessary, within junction boxes so as not to put stress (as from the
weight of the cable) on the cable contact mountings. The connections are to be provided with
locking type connections.

In addition to the above, the applicable requirements in 4-6-3/5 and 4-6-4/13 regarding cable
installation and application details are to be complied with.

5.35 Installation of Cable Connectors (2019)

Cable connectors may be employed to connect cables, provided they are of approved design. See
4-6-4/13.7. Cable connectors are not to be used in essential services or for high voltage cables having a
rated voltage exceeding 1 kV. Where permitted, the following installation details are to be complied with:

i) Cable connectors are to be suitable for the locations of installation in accordance with the
designated IP degree for the configuration of connector and cable combined.
ii) Cable connectors are not to be installed in bilge space nor in hazardous area.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 290
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

iii) Cable connectors are to be arranged after the cables are in place and are to be in locations
accessible for inspection.
iv) Cable connector is to be arranged at a location where the prospected short circuit current at the
circuit does not exceed the short circuit current capacity of the connector.
v) Armored cables are to have their armoring made electrically continuous at the connector or the
cable armor is appropriately earthed.
vi) Cable connectors are to be rated for the voltage, current, and short circuit current expected in the
system at the connection points.
vii) Cables arranged for connection with cable connector are to be well-supported and fastened so that
conductor contacts are not subjected to undue stress

6 Busbar Trunking System Installation (1 July 2021)

6.1 Component Requirements

6.1.1 Ambient Temperatures
Temperatures are to be considered in the range from 0 to 45 °C.

6.1.2 Protection Against Foreign Bodies and Water

Systems are to be designed to comply with the following minimum degrees of protection:

i) Dry spaces, IP 54
ii) Wet spaces, IP 56
6.1.3 Mechanical Design
The system is to be designed to withstand a vibration level of 1 mm amplitude in the frequency
range of 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz and of 0.7g acceleration in the frequency range of 13.2 Hz to 10.0 Hz

The arrangement is to be suitable for automatic draining where condensation is possible.

The enclosure of the system is to be designed to be sufficiently robust, or alternatively additionally

protected, to withstand normal mechanical forces which may be expected on board ships.

6.1.4 Fire Protection, Bulkhead and Deck Penetrations

The complete system is to comply with the fire test requirements as specified in IEC 60332-1-1 &
IEC 60332-1-2. Bulkhead and deck penetrations are to conform to categories laid down by
SOLAS and are not to impair the mechanical, watertight and/or fire integrity of the bulkheads or
decks through which they pass.

The internal arrangements of the ducts are to have the same fire integrity arrangements as the
divisions which they pierce.

6.3 System Requirements

6.3.1 Installation Configuration
Redundant essential consumers are to be supplied by separate systems. The installation is to be
such that a failure in one system does not impair the operation of the redundant one.

Where a system is arranged below the uppermost continuous deck, the vessel’s maneuverability as
well as the safety of the crew and passengers are not not be impaired in the event of one or more
watertight compartments outside the engine room being flooded.

Main and emergency supplies are not to be installed in a common duct.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 291
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

The system is to be fitted with means for separation to enable maintenance works and the
segregation of damaged parts.

Where systems are led through fire sections, the separation units should be installed on the supply
side.

6.3.2 Protection Devices

The propagation of electric arcs along the busbars should be prevented by arc barriers or other
suitable means, such as, in the case of systems with uninsulated busbars, the use of current
limiting circuit breakers.

6.5 Tests
6.5.1 Type Testing
The following tests are to be carried out, as a minimum, on a typical and representative sample:

i) Temperature rise test in accordance with IEC 61439-6

ii) Short-circuit strength test in accordance with IEC 61439-6
iii) Verification of resistance and reactance in accordance with IEC 61439-6
iv) Verification of structural strength in accordance with IEC 61439-6
v) Insulation resistance test for main and auxiliary circuits in accordance with 4-7-9/Table 9,
item no.7
vi) High-voltage test for main and auxiliary circuits in accordance with 4-7-9/Table 9, item
no.8
vii) Vibration test in accordance with 4-7-9/Table 9, item no.5
viii) Bulkhead and deck penetrations tests in accordance with IMO Res. MSC.307(88)
ix) Fire test in accordance with IEC 60332-1-1 & 60332-1-2
x) Verification of protection degree in accordance with IEC 60529
xi) EMC tests in accordance with 4-7-9/Table 9, item no. 11 to 18, where electronic devices
form part of the system
6.5.2 Onboard Survey
The installation of the system is to be to the satisfaction of the Surveyor and according to
documentation and installation requirements.

7 Earthing

7.1 General
Exposed metal parts of electrical machines or equipment which are not intended to be live but which are
liable under fault conditions to become live are to be earthed unless the machines or equipment are:

i) Supplied at a voltage not exceeding 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms between conductors; auto-
transformers are not to be used for the purpose of achieving this voltage; or
ii) Supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250 V AC rms by safety isolating transformers supplying only
one consuming device; or
iii) Constructed in accordance with the principle of double insulation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 292
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

7.3 Permanent Equipment (2023)

The metal frames or cases of all permanently installed generators, motors, controllers, instruments and
similar equipment are to be permanently earthed through a metallic contact with the vessel's structure.
Alternatively, they are to be connected to the hull by a separate conductor in accordance with 4-6-3/7.5.
Where outlets, switches and similar fittings are of non-metallic construction, all exposed metal parts is to
be earthed.

For equipment earthing on non-metallic hull craft, see 4-6-2/21.15 and 4-6-2/21.17.

7.5 Connections
7.5.1 General
All earthing conductors are to be of copper or other corrosion resistant material and is to be
protected against damage. The nominal cross-sectional area of every copper earthing conductor is
to be not less than that required by 4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 3.

7.5.2 Earthed Distribution System

Earthing conductors in earthed distribution system are to comply with 4-6-3/7.5.1, except that the
earthing conductor in line C4 of 4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 3 is to be A /2.

7.5.3 Connection to Hull Structure

All connection of an earth-continuity conductor or earthing lead to the vessel's structure is to be
made in an accessible position and is secured by a screw of brass or other corrosion-resistant
material having cross sectional area equivalent to the earth-continuity conductor or earthing lead
but not less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter. The earth connection screw is to be used for this
purpose only. See 4-4-1/9.21 for control of static electricity.

7.7 Portable Cords

Receptacle outlets operating at 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms or more are to have an earthing pole.

7.9 Cable Metallic Covering

All metal sheaths, armor of cable and mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable are to be electrically
continuous and are to be earthed to the metal hull at each end of the run, except that final sub-circuits may
be earthed at the supply end only. All metallic coverings of power and lighting cables passing through
hazardous areas or connected to equipment in such an area are to be earthed at least at each end. See also
4-7-7/3.1.

7.11 Lightning Earth Conductors

Each wooden mast or topmast is to be fitted with lightning earth conductors. They need not be fitted to
steel masts. See 4-6-2/21 for non-metallic craft.

9 Equipment and Installation in Hazardous Areas

9.1 General Considerations

9.1.1 General (2015)
Electrical equipment and wiring are not to be installed in hazardous areas unless essential for
operational purposes. Generally electrical equipment certified for use in hazardous areas in
accordance with the IEC 60079 series is considered suitable for use in temperatures from -20°C to
40°C (-4°F to 104°F). Account is to be taken of the temperature at the point of installation when
selecting electrical equipment for installation in hazardous areas.

9.1.1(a) Electrical Equipment Types. (2020)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 293
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

Only certified safe electrical equipment of the following types complying with IEC Publication
60079 series, or other recognized standards is to be considered for installation in hazardous areas.

● Intrinsically safe type (Ex i). IEC 60079-11

● Flameproof type (explosion-proof) (Ex d). IEC 60079-1
● Increased safety type (Ex e). IEC 60079-7
● Pressurized or purged type (Ex p). IEC 60079-2.
Note: Automatic shutdown may be required in compliance with IEC Publication 60079-2, when values of
over-pressure and/or protective gas flow fall below minimum prescribed values)
● Encapsulated type (Ex m, IEC 60079-18)
● Sand (powder) filled type (Ex q, IEC 60079-5.
Note: The humidity found in a normal marine environment may change the properties of the filling
material)
● Oil-immersed type (Ex o, IEC 60079-6; only when required by the application and permitted
by the appropriate authority)
● Special protection type (Ex s, IEC 60079-33)
● Protection type “n” (Ex n, IEC 60079-15; tested specially for zone 2; type of protection
applied to electrical equipment such that, in normal operation and in certain specified
abnormal conditions, it is not capable of igniting a surrounding explosive atmosphere.
Additionally, the requirements of the equipment standard are intended to ensure that a fault
capable of causing ignition is not likely to occur)
● Protection by enclosure (Ex t, IEC 60079-31, for flammable dust)
● Simple electrical apparatus and components of simple construction with well-defined
electrical parameters and which is compatible with the intrinsic safety of the circuit in which
it is used (e.g., passive components such as switches, junction boxes, resistors and simple
semiconductor devices; sources of stored energy consisting of single components in simple
circuits with welldefined parameters, for example capacitors or inductors, whose values shall
be considered when determining the overall safety of the system; sources of generated energy,
for example thermocouples and photocells, which do not generate more than 1.5 V, 100 mA
and 25 mW. Refer to IEC Publications 60079-11 and 60079-14)
● Other types of protection, selected in accordance with the requirements of IEC Publications
60092-502 and 60079-14, may be considered

Consideration is to be given to the flammability group and the temperature class of the equipment
for suitability for the intended hazardous area, see ISO/IEC 80079-20-1.

Where equipment is required to be of a certified safe type, evidence is to be furnished that the
equipment has been certified by an appropriate authority to confirm its safety with regard to
explosion hazard when used in the relevant explosive atmosphere.

Verification of Ex certified equipment suitability is to include checking that special conditions for
safe use given in the Ex certificates are complied with.

9.1.1(b) Fans. Fans used for the ventilation of the hazardous areas are to be of non-sparking
construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7.

9.1.2 Lighting Circuits

All switches and protective devices for lighting fixtures in hazardous areas are to interrupt all
poles or phases and are to be located in a non-hazardous area. However, a switch may be located

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 294
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

in a hazardous area if the switch is of a certified safe type for the hazardous location in which it is
to be installed.On solidly grounded distribution systems, the switches need not to open the
grounded conductor. The switches and protective devices for lighting fixtures are to be suitably
labeled for identification purposes.

9.1.3 Cables Installation

Cables in hazardous areas are to be armored or mineral-insulated metal-sheathed, except for cables
of intrinsically safe circuits subject to the requirements of 4-6-3/5.15. Where cables pass through
hazardous area boundaries, they are to be run through gastight fittings. No splices are allowed in
hazardous areas, except in intrinsically-safe circuits.

9.1.4 Permanent Warning Plates

Permanent warning plates are to be installed in the vicinity of hazardous areas in which electrical
equipment is installed, such as pump room, to advise personnel carrying out maintenance, repair
or surveys of availability of the booklet/list of equipment in hazardous areas referenced in
4-6-3/1.5, if required for their use.

9.3 Certified-safe Type and Pressurized Equipment and Systems

9.3.1 Installation Approval
Electrical equipment in hazardous areas is to be of a type suitable for such locations. Where
permitted by the Rules, electrical equipment of certified safe type, such as explosion-proof type
and intrinsically-safe electrical instruments, circuitry and devices, will be approved for installation
provided such equipment has been type-tested and certified by a competent independent testing
laboratory as explosion-proof or intrinsically-safe and provided that there is no departure in the
production equipment from the design so tested and approved.

9.3.2 Intrinsically-safe System

9.3.2(a) Installation of Cables and Wiring. Installations with intrinsically safe circuits are to be
erected in such a way that their intrinsic safety is not adversely affected by external electric or
magnetic fields under normal operating condition and any fault conditions, such as a single-phase
short circuit or earth fault in non-intrinsically safe circuits, etc.

9.3.2(b) Separation and Mechanical Protection. The installation of the cables is to be arranged as
follows:

i) Cables in both hazardous and non-hazardous areas are to meet one of the following
requirements:

● Intrinsically safe circuit cables are to be installed a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) from

all non-intrinsically safe circuit cables, or
● Intrinsically safe circuit cables are to be so placed as to protect against the risk of
mechanical damage by use of a mechanical barrier, or
● Intrinsically safe or non-intrinsically safe circuit cables are to be armored, metal
sheathed or screened.
ii) Conductors of intrinsically safe circuits and non-intrinsically safe circuits are not to be
carried in the same cable.
iii) Cables of intrinsically safe circuits and non-intrinsically safe circuits are not to be in the
same bundle, duct or conduit pipe.
iv) Each unused core in a multi-core cable is to be adequately insulated from earth and from
each other at both ends by the use of suitable terminations.
9.3.2(c) (2020)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 295
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

For separation distances of different (separate) intrinsically safe circuits in terminal boxes, the
requirements in IEC 60079-14 , and IEC 60079-11, Clause 6.21, are to be complied with.

9.3.2(d) (2020)
The segregation between the intrinsically safe wiring terminals and between bare conducting parts
of connection facilities are to comply with IEC 60079.

9.3.2(e) Sub-compartment. When intrinsically safe components are located by necessity within
enclosures that contain non-intrinsically safe systems, such as control consoles and motor starters,
such components are to be effectively isolated in a sub-compartment by earthed metallic or
nonmetallic insulating barriers having a cover or panel secured by bolts, locks, Allen-screws, or
other approved methods. The intrinsic safety in the sub-compartment is not to be adversely
affected by external electric or magnetic fields under normal operating condition and any fault
conditions in non-intrinsically safe circuits.

9.3.2(f) Termination Arrangements. Where it is impracticable to arrange the terminals of

intrinsically safe circuit in the sub-compartment, they are to be separated from those for non-
intrinsically safe circuits by either of the following methods. Other National or International
recognized Standards will also be accepted.

i) When separation is accomplished by distance, then the clearance between terminals is to

be at least 50 mm, or
ii) When separation is accomplished by use of an insulating partition or earthed metal
partition, the partitions are to extend to within 1.5 mm of the walls of the enclosure, or
alternatively provide a minimum measurement of 50 mm between the terminals when
taken in any direction around the partition.

9.3.2(g) Identification Plate. The terminals and sub-compartment for intrinsically safe circuit and
components are to have a nameplate indicating that the equipment within is intrinsically safe and
that unauthorized modification or repairs are prohibited.

9.3.2(h) Replacement. Unless specifically approved, replacement equipment for intrinsically-safe

circuits is to be identical to the original equipment.

9.3.3 Pressurized Equipment

Pressurized equipment is to consist of separately ventilated enclosures supplied with positive-
pressure ventilation from a closed-loop system or from a source outside the hazardous areas, and
provision is to be made such that the equipment cannot be energized until the enclosure has been
purged with a minimum of ten air changes and required pressure is obtained. Ventilating pipes are
to have a minimum wall thickness of 3 mm (0.12 in. or 11 gage). In the case of loss of
pressurization, power is to be automatically removed from the equipment, unless this would result
in a condition more hazardous than that created by failure to de-energize the equipment. In this
case, in lieu of removal of power, an audible and visual alarm is to be provided at a normally
manned control station.

Pressurized equipment in compliance with IEC Pub. 60079-2, NFPA 496 or other recognized
standard will also be acceptable.

9.5 Paint Stores

9.5.1 General (2020)
Electrical equipment in paint stores and in ventilation ducts serving such spaces as permitted in
4-6-3/9.1.1 is to comply with the requirements for group IIB class T3 in ISO/IEC 80079-20-1.

The following type of equipment will be acceptable for such spaces.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 296
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

i) Intrinsically-safe defined by 4-6-1/3.21

ii) Explosion-proof defined by 4-6-1/3.9
iii) Pressurized defined by 4-6-1/3.43
iv) Increased safety defined by 4-6-1/3.17
v) Other equipment with special protection recognized as safe for use in explosive gas
atmospheres by a national or other appropriate authority.

Electrical equipment installed in way of areas on open deck within 1m of inlet and exhaust
ventilation openings or within 3 m of exhaust outlets with mechanical ventilation is to be suitable
for zone 2, as per IEC Publication 60092-502.

9.5.2 Open Area Near Ventilation Openings

In the areas on open deck within 1 m (3.3 ft.) of ventilation inlet or within 1 m (3.3 ft.) (if natural)
or 3 m (10 ft.) (if mechanical) of exhaust outlet, electrical equipment and cables where permitted
by 4-6-3/9.1.1 are to be in accordance with 4-6-3/9.1.2, 4-6-3/9.1.3 and 4-6-3/9.3.1.

9.5.3 Enclosed Access Spaces (1 July 2022)

The enclosed spaces giving access to the paint store may be considered as non-hazardous,
provided that:

i) The door to the paint store is gastight with self-closing devices without holding back
arrangements,

Commentary:
A watertight door may be considered as being gastight.

End of Commentary

ii) The paint store is provided with an acceptable, independent, natural ventilation system
ventilated from a safe area, and
iii) Warning notices are fitted adjacent to the paint store entrance stating that the store
contains flammable liquids.

9.7 Non-sparking Fans

9.7.1 Design Criteria
9.7.1(a) Air Gap. The air gap between the impeller and the casing is to be not less than 10% of the
shaft diameter in way of the impeller bearing but not less than 2 mm (0.08 in.). It need not be
more than 13 mm (0.5 in.).

9.7.1(b) Protection Screen. Protection screens of not more than 13 mm (0.5 in.) square mesh are to
be fitted in the inlet and outlet of ventilation openings on the open deck to prevent the entrance of
object into the fan casing.

9.7.2 Materials
9.7.2(a) Impeller and its Housing. Except as indicated in 4-6-3/9.7.2(c) below, the impeller and
the housing in way of the impeller are to be made of alloys which are recognized as being spark
proof by appropriate test.

9.7.2(b) Electrostatic Charges. Electrostatic charges both in the rotating body and the casing are to
be prevented by the use of antistatic materials. Furthermore, the installation on board of the
ventilation units is to be such as to ensure the safe bonding to the hull of the units themselves.

9.7.2(c) Acceptable Combination of Materials. Tests referred to in 4-6-3/9.7.2(a) above are not
required for fans having the following combinations:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 297
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

i) Impellers and/or housings of nonmetallic material, due regard being paid to the
elimination of static electricity;
ii) Impellers and housings of non-ferrous materials;
iii) Impellers of aluminum alloys or magnesium alloys and a ferrous (including austenitic
stainless steel) housing on which a ring of suitable thickness of non-ferrous materials is
fitted in way of the impeller;
iv) Any combination of ferrous (including austenitic stainless steel) impellers and housings
with not less than 13 mm (0.5 in.) tip design clearance.

9.7.2(d) Unacceptable Combination of Materials. The following impellers and housings are
considered as sparking-producing and are not permitted:

i) Impellers of an aluminum alloy or magnesium alloy and a ferrous housing, regardless of

tip clearance;
ii) Housing made of an aluminum alloy or a magnesium alloy and a ferrous impeller,
regardless of tip clearance;
iii) Any combination of ferrous impeller and housing with less than 13 mm (0.5 in.) design
tip clearance.
9.7.3 Type Test
Type tests on the finished product are to be carried out using an acceptable national or
international standard. Such type test reports are to be made available when requested by the
Surveyor.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 298
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

TABLE 1
Minimum Degree of Protection [See 4-6-3/3.1.1] (2020)

Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control

Centers & Controllers (See 4-6-3/3.9 to 4-6-3/3.13)

Generators (See 4-6-3/3.3)

Motors (See 4-6-3/3.5)

Transformers, Converters
Example Condition
of of Lighting Fixtures (See
Location Location 4-6-3/3.17)

Heating Appliances
(See 4-6-3/3.19)

Accessories
(3)

Dry accommodation space Danger of touching IP20 - IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
live parts only
Dry control rooms(4) IP20 - IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Control rooms Danger of dripping IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
liquid and/or
Machinery spaces above floor IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
moderate
plates (5)
mechanical damage
Steering gear rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44

Refrigerating machinery rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44

Emergency machinery rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44

General store rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22

Pantries IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44

Provision rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22

Bathrooms & Showers Increased danger of - - - - IP34 IP44 IP55(7)

liquid and/or
Machinery spaces below floor - - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55 (2)
mechanical damage
plates

Closed fuel oil or lubricating IP44 - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55 (2)
oil separator rooms

Ballast pump rooms Increased danger of IP44 - IP44 IP44 IP34 IP44 IP55
liquid and
Refrigerated rooms - - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55
mechanical damage
Galleys and Laundries IP44 - IP44 IP44 IP34 IP44 IP44 (6)

Shaft or pipe tunnels in double Danger of liquid IP55 - IP55 IP55 IP55 IP55 IP56
bottom spray presence of
cargo dust, serious
Holds for general cargo - - - - IP55 - IP55
mechanical damage,
and/or aggressive
fumes

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 299
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control

Centers & Controllers (See 4-6-3/3.9 to 4-6-3/3.13)

Generators (See 4-6-3/3.3)

Motors (See 4-6-3/3.5)

Transformers, Converters
Example Condition
of of Lighting Fixtures (See
Location Location 4-6-3/3.17)

Heating Appliances
(See 4-6-3/3.19)

Accessories
(3)

Open decks Exposure to heavy IP56 - IP56 - IP55 IP56 IP56

seas

Bilge wells Exposure to - - - - IPX8 - IPX8

submersion

(For high voltage equipment see 4-6-5/1 TABLE 1)

Notes:

1 Empty spaces shown with “-” indicate installation of electrical equipment is not recommended.

2 (2018) Socket outlets are not to be installed in machinery spaces below the floor plates, enclosed fuel
and lubricating oil separator rooms. Plugs and sockets that are present in a hazardous area are to be
certified for use in the particular zone.

3 “Accessories” include switches, detectors, junction boxes, etc. Accessories which are acceptable for
use in hazardous areas are limited by the condition of the areas. Specific requirements are given the
Rules. See 4-6-3/3.23.

4 For the purpose of this Table, the wheelhouse may be categorized as a “dry control room” and
consequently, the installation of IP20 equipment would suffice therein provided that: (a) the
equipment is located as to preclude being exposed to steam, or dripping/spraying liquids emanating
from pipe flanges, valves, ventilation ducts and outlets, etc., installed in its vicinity, and (b) the
equipment is placed to precludethe possibility of being exposed to sea or rain.

5 See 4-6-3/3.1.1(b) where the equipment is located within areas protected by local fixed pressure
water-spraying or water-mist fire extinguishing system and its adjacent areas.

6 (2014) Socket outlets in galleys and laundries are to maintain their protection against splashed water
when not in use.

7 lower degree of protection may be accepted provided the equipment is not directly exposed to water
splash.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 300
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

TABLE 2
Minimum Bending Radii of Cables [See 4-6-3/5.9.2]

Cable construction Over all diameter, D Minimum Internal

Bending Radius
Insulation Outer covering

Thermoplastic or Unarmored or unbraided D ≤ 25 mm (1 in.) 4D

thermosetting with
D > 25 mm 6D
circular copper
conductor Metal braid screened or armored Any 6D

Metal wire or metal-tapearmored or metal- Any 6D

sheathed

Composite polyester/metal laminate tape Any 8D

screened units or collective tape screening

Thermoplastic or Any Any 8D

thermosetting with
shaped copper
conductor

Mineral Hard metal-sheathed Any 6D

TABLE 3
Size of Earth-continuity Conductors and Earthing Connections
[See4-6-3/7.5]

Cross-sectional area, A, of
Minimum cross-sectional area of
Type of earthing connection associated current carrying
copper earthing connection
conductor

A1 A ≤ 16 mm2 A
Earth-continuity conductor in 2 2
A2 16 mm < A ≤ 32 mm 16 mm2
flexible cable or flexible cord
A3 A > 32 mm2 A
/2

For cables having an insulated earth-continuity conductor

B1a A ≤ 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2

B1b 1.5 mm2 < A ≤ 16 mm2 A

Earth-continuity conductor B1c 16 mm2 < A ≤ 32 mm2 16 mm2

incorporated in fixed cable B1d A > 32 mm2 A
/2

For cables with bare earth wire in direct contact with the lead sheath

B2a A ≤ 2.5 mm2 1 mm2

B2b 2.5 mm2 < A ≤ 6 mm2 1.5 mm2

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 301
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3

Cross-sectional area, A, of
Minimum cross-sectional area of
Type of earthing connection associated current carrying
copper earthing connection
conductor

C1a Stranded earthing connection:

1.5 mm2 for A ≤ 1.5 mm2
A ≤ 3 mm2 A for A > 1.5 mm2

C1b Unstranded earthing connection:

Separate fixed earthing
3 mm2
conductor
C2 3 mm2 < A ≤ 6 mm2 3 mm2

C3 6 mm2 < A ≤ 125 mm2 A

/2

C4 A > 125 mm2 64 mm2 (see Note 1)

Notes:

1 For earthed distribution systems, the size of earthing conductor is not to be less than A /2.

2 Conversion Table for mm2 to circular mils:

mm2 circ. mm2 circ. mm2 circ. mm2 circ.

mils mils mils mils

1 1,973 2.5 4,933 6 11,841 70 138,147

1.5 2,960 4 7,894 16 31,576 120 236,823

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 302
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 4
Machinery and Equipment

1 Plans and Data to Be Submitted

1.1 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Over

For rotating machines of 100 kW and over intended for essential services (primary and secondary) or for
services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11, drawings showing the following particulars are to be
submitted: assembly, seating arrangements, terminal arrangements, shafts, coupling, coupling bolts, stator
and rotor details together with data for complete rating, class of insulation, designed ambient temperature,
temperature rise, degree of protection for enclosures, weights and speeds for rotating parts. Plans to be
submitted for generator prime movers are given in 4-2-3/1.5, 4-2-4/1.5 and 4-2-1/1.5 of the Marine Vessel
Rules.

1.3 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Below

Complete rating, class of insulation, and degree of enclosure.

1.5 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc.

For switchboards, distribution boards, battery charger units, uninterruptible power system (UPS) units,
motor control centers, and motor controllers intended for essential services (primary and secondary) or for
services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11, drawings showing arrangements and details, front view, and
installation arrangements are to be submitted for review together with data for protective device rating and
setting, type of internal wiring, and size and rated current carrying capacity (together with short-circuit
current data) of bus bars and internal wiring for power circuit. In addition, a schematic or logic diagram
with a written description giving the sequence of events and system operating procedures for electrical
power supply management on switchboards and sequential or automatic change-over of the motors are also
to be submitted for review.

1.7 Semiconductor Converters for Adjustable Speed Motor Drives (2023)

For semiconductor converters that are used to control motor drives having a rated power of 100 kW
(135hp) and over intended for essential services (see definition in 4-6-1/3.7) or for services indicated in
4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 4 and TABLE 5, plans showing the following particulars are to be submitted: front
view, degree of protection for enclosure, schematic diagram, current rating of running protection of motor,
type and size of internal wiring, and cooling arrangement.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 303
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

3 Rotating Machines

3.1 General
3.1.1 Applications (2019)
All rotating electrical machines of 100 kW and over intended for essential services (see 4-6-1/3.7)
or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to be designed, constructed and tested in
accordance with the requirements of 4-6-4/3.

Furthermore, their design and construction is to withstand all loads (e.g., mechanical, electrical,
thermal, cyclic, etc.) that would be imposed during the intended operation.

For squirrel cage electric motors serving essential services, special attention is also to be given to
the method of attachment of the rotor bars to the rotor so that the overall operational integrity of
the motor will not be affected during service. The common arrangement is with the shorting ring
in full contact, via brazing or welding, with the ends of the rotor bars. A less common arrangement
is with the shorting ring only in partial contact with the ends of the rotor bars. For these less
common arrangements, calculations, analyses, tests and/or operational service history data may be
required in this regard substantiating the design and construction of the rotating machine for its
intended application and service.

All other rotating electrical machines are to be designed, constructed and tested in accordance
with established industrial practices and manufacturer’s specifications. Manufacturer’s tests for
rotating electric machines less than 100 kW for essential services or for services indicated in
4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to include at least the tests described in 4-6-4/3.3.1(b), regardless of the
standard of construction The test certificates are to be made available when requested by the
Surveyor. Acceptance of machines will be based on satisfactory performance test after installation.

3.1.2 Certification on Basis of an Approved Quality Assurance Program

See 4-1-1/3.

3.1.3 References
3.1.3(a) Inclination. For the requirements covering inclination for design condition, see 4-1-1/17.

3.1.3(b) Insulation Material. For the requirements covering insulation material, see 4-6-1/13.

3.1.3(c) Capacity of Generators. For requirements covering main generator capacity, see
4-6-2/3.1.2 and 4-6-2/3.5. For requirements covering emergency generator capacity, see
4-6-2/5.3.1.

3.1.3(d) Power Supply by Generators. For requirements covering power supply by main or
emergency generator, see 4-6-2/3.1.2 and 4-6-2/5.5.2 respectively.

3.1.3(e) Protection for Generator Circuits. For requirements covering protection for generator, see
4-6-2/9.3, 4-6-2/9.5 and 4-6-2/9.7.

3.1.3(f) Protection for Motor Circuits. For requirements covering protection for motor branch
circuit, see 4-6-2/9.13.

3.1.3(g) Installation. For requirements covering installation, see 4-6-3/3.3 for generators and
4-6-3/3.5 for motors.

3.1.3(h) Protection Enclosures and its Selection. For requirements covering degree of the
protection and the selection of equipment, see 4-6-1/15 and 4-6-3/3.1 respectively.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 304
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

3.3 Testing and Inspection

3.3.1 Applications
3.3.1(a) Machines of 100 kW and Over (1 July 2021)
All rotating machines of 100 kW and over intended for essential services (see 4-6-1/3.7) or for
services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to be tested in accordance with 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE
1 in the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of the manufacturer.

Shafting material to be used for propulsion application, material tests are to be tested in the
presence of a Surveyor in accordance with the provisions of 4-6-4/3.13.2(b). Shafting material to
be used for non-propulsion application, will be accepted on the basis of the manufacturer's
certified material test reports and a satisfactory surface inspection and hardness check witnessed
by the Surveyor.

3.3.1(b) Machines Below 100 kW

All rotating machines of less than 100 kW intended for essential services or for services indicated
in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to be tested in accordance with 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 1 (item 2 through
item 10 and item 12). The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests
will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.

3.3.1(c) Other Machines

For machines not intended for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11,
the tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is
to be submitted upon request from ABS.

3.3.2 Special Testing Arrangements

In cases where all of the required tests are not carried out at the plant of the manufacturer, the
Surveyor is to be notified and arrangements are to be made so that the remaining tests will be
witnessed.

3.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement

The resistance is to be measured before the commencement of the testing and after completion of the
testing for all circuits. Circuits or groups of circuits of different voltages above earth are to be tested
separately. This test is to be made with at least 500 volts D.C. and the insulation resistance in megohms of
the circuits while at their operating temperatures is to be normally at least equal to:
Rated Voltage of the Machine
Rating in kVA/100 + 1000

The minimum insulation resistance of the fields of machines separately excited with voltage less than the
rated voltage of the machine is to be of the order of one-half to one megohm.

3.7 Overload and Overcurrent Capability

3.7.1 AC Generators
AC generators are to be capable of withstanding a current equal to 1.5 times the rated current for
not less than 30 seconds. The test may be performed in conjunction with the short circuit testing,
provided the electrical input energy to the machine is not less than that required for the above
overload capability.

3.7.2 A.C. Motors

3.7.2(a) Overcurrent Capacity. Three phase motors, except for commutator motors, having rated
outputs not exceeding 315 kW and rated voltages not exceeding 1 kV are to be capable of
withstanding a current equal to 1.5 times the rated current for not less than 2 minutes. For three-
phase and single phase motors having rated outputs above 315 kW the overcurrent capacity is to

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 305
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

be in accordance with the manufacturer's specification. The test may be performed at a reduced
speed.

3.7.2(b) Overload Capacity. Three-phase induction motors are to be capable of withstanding for
15 seconds, without stalling or abrupt change in speed, an excess torque of 60% of their rated
torque, the voltage and frequency being maintained at their rated values.

3.7.2(c) Overload Capacity for Synchronous Motors. Three phase synchronous motors are to be
capable of withstanding an excess torque as specified below for 15 seconds without falling out of
synchronism, the excitation being maintained at the value corresponding to the rated load.

Synchronous (wound rotor) induction motors: 35% excess torque

Synchronous (cylindrical rotor) motors: 35% excess torque

Synchronous (salient pole) motors: 50% excess torque

When automatic excitation is used, the limit of torque values are to be the same as with the
excitation equipment operating under normal conditions.

3.9 Dielectric Strength of Insulation

3.9.1 Application
The dielectric test voltage is to be successively applied between each electric circuit and all other
electric circuits and metal parts earthed and for direct-current (DC) rotating machines between
brush rings of opposite polarity. Interconnected polyphase windings are to be considered as one
circuit. All windings except that under test are to be connected to earth.

3.9.2 Standard Voltage Test

The insulation of all rotating machines is to be tested with the parts completely assembled and not
with the individual parts. The dielectric strength of the insulation is to be tested by the continuous
application for 60 seconds of an alternating voltage having a frequency of 25 to 60 Hz and voltage
in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 2. The requirements in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 2 apply to those machines other
than high voltage systems covered by 4-6-5/1.11.1(e).

3.9.3 Direct Current Test

A standard voltage test using a direct current source equal to 1.7 times the required alternating-
current voltage will be acceptable.

3.11 Temperature Ratings

3.11.1 Temperature Rises
3.11.1(a) Continuous Rating Machines. After the machine has been run continuously under a rated
load until steady temperature condition has been reached, the temperature rises are not to exceed
those given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3.

3.11.1(b) Short-time Rating Machines. After the machine has been run at a rated load during the
rated time, followed by a rest and de-energized period of sufficient duration to re-establish the
machine temperatures within 2°C (3.6°F) of the coolant, the temperature rises are not to exceed
those given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3. At the beginning of the temperature measurement,
temperature of the machine is to be within 5°C (8°F) of the temperature of the coolant.

3.11.1(c) Periodic Duty Rating Machines. The machine has been run at a rated load for the
designed load cycle to be applied and continued until obtaining the practically identical
temperature cycle. At the middle of the period causing the greatest heating in the last cycle of the
operation, the temperature rises are not to exceed those given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 306
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

3.11.1(d) Non-periodic Duty Rating Machines. After the machine has been run continuously or
intermittently under the designed variations of the load and speed within the permissible operating
range until reaching the steady temperature condition, the temperature rises are not to exceed
those given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3.

3.11.1(e) Insulation Material Above 180°C (356°F). Temperature rises for insulation materials
above 180°C (356°F) will be considered in accordance with 4-6-1/13.11.

3.11.2 Ambient Temperature

These final temperatures are based on an ambient temperature of 50°C (122°F), for machines
located within boiler and engine rooms in accordance with 4-6-1/17. Where provision is made for
ensuring the ambient temperature of the space is being maintained at 40°C (104°F) or less, as by
air cooling or by locating the machine outside of the boiler and engine rooms, the temperature
rises of the windings may be 5°C (9°F) higher. The ambient temperature is to be taken in at least
two places within 1.83 m (6 ft) of the machine under test and by thermometers having their bulbs
immersed in oil contained in an open cup.

3.13 Construction and Assemblies

3.13.1 Enclosure, Frame and Pedestals
Magnet frames and pedestals may be separate but are to be secured to a common foundation.

3.13.2 Shafts and Couplings

3.13.2(a) Rotors of Non-integrated Auxiliary Machinery
The design of the following specified rotating shafts and components, when not integral with the
propulsion shafting, are to comply with the following:

• Rotor shaft: 4-2-4/5.3.1 * and 4-2-4/5.3.2*

• Hollow shaft: 4-3-1/7.3

• Key: 4-3-1/9 and 4-2-4/5.3.2*

• Coupling flanges and bolts: 4-2-1/17 and 4-3-1/19

Note: *Rules for Building and Classing Marine Vessels

3.13.2(b) Rotors of Integrated Auxiliary Machinery (1 July 2021)

Shaft motors and shaft generators, which are an integral part of the line shafting, shall be
evaluated for maximum combined load (steady and dynamic torque and bending) acting within
operating range of installation. Accordingly, the shaft diameter design criteria per 4-2-4/5.3.1 and
4-2-4/5.3.2 of the Marine Vessel Rules is to be evaluated for maximum torsional moment acting
within the operating speeds, instead of torsional moment T at rated speed.

The shaft diameter of the motors and generators, that are an integral part of the line shafting, may
also be designed per 4-3-1/7 and are to be evaluated based on engineering analysis.

The following components intended for propulsion installations are to be tested in the presence of
a Surveyor per 4-3-1/5:

Thrust shafts, line shafts, propeller shafts, shafting for propulsion generators and motors, coupling
bolts, and in the case of direct-connected turbine-driven propulsion generators, fan shrouds,
centering and retaining rings. Major castings or built-up parts such as frames, spiders and end
shields are to be surface inspected and the welding is to be in accordance with the requirements of
Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 307
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

3.13.3 Circulating Currents

Means are to be provided to prevent circulating currents from passing between the journals and
the bearings, where the design and arrangement of the machine is such that damaging current may
be expected. Where such protection is required, a warning plate is to be provided in a visible place
cautioning against the removal of such protection.

3.13.4 Rotating Exciters

Rotating exciters are to conform to all applicable requirements for generators.

3.13.5 Insulation of Windings

Armature and field coils are to be treated to resist oil and water.

3.13.6 Protection Against Cooling Water

Where water cooling is used, the cooler is to be so arranged to avoid entry of water into the
machine, whether through leakage or from condensation in the heat exchanger.

3.13.7 Moisture Condensation Prevention (2014)

All generators, and each motor rated 50 kW and over, are to be provided with a means to prevent
moisture condensation in the machine when idle.

Where steam-heating coils are installed for this purpose, there are to be no pipe joints inside the
casings. See item 7 in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 7 for space heater pilot lamp for alternating-current
generators.

3.13.8 Terminal Arrangements

Terminals are to be provided at an accessible position and protected against mechanical damage
and accidental contact for earthing, short-circuit or touching. Terminal leads are to be secured to
the frame and the designation of each terminal lead are to be clearly marked. The ends of terminal
leads are to be fitted with connectors. Cable glands or similar are to be provided where cable
penetrations may compromise the protection property of terminal enclosures.

3.13.9 Nameplates
Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an accessible position of the
machine and are to indicate at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 4a.

3.15 Lubrication
Rotating machines are to have continuous lubrication at all running speeds and all normal working bearing
temperatures, with the vessel's inclinations specified in 4-1-1/17. Unless otherwise approved, where forced
lubrication is employed, the machines are to be provided with means to shut down their prime movers
automatically upon failure of the lubricating system. Each self-lubricating sleeve bearing is to be fitted
with an inspection lid and means for visual indication of oil level or an oil gauge.

3.17 Turbines for Generators

Gas-turbine prime movers driving generators are to meet the applicable requirements in Section 4-2-3 of
the Marine Vessel Rules and in addition are to comply with the following requirements.

3.17.1 Operating Governor

An effective operating governor is to be fitted on prime movers driving main or emergency
electric generators and is to be capable of automatically maintaining the speed within the
following limits. Special consideration will be given when an installation requires different
characteristics.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 308
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

3.17.1(a) Transient Frequency Variations. The transient frequency variations in the electrical
network, when running at the indicate loads below, are to be within ±10% of the rated frequency
when:

i) Running at full load (equal to rated output) of the generator and the maximum electrical
step load is suddenly thrown off,

In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of a generator is thrown off, a
transient frequency variation in excess of 10% of the rated frequency may be acceptable,
provided the overspeed protective device, fitted in addition to the governor, as required by
4-6-4/3.17.2, is not activated.
ii) Running at no load and 50% of the full load of the generator is suddenly thrown on
followed by the remaining 50% load after an interval sufficient to restore the frequency to
steady state.

In all instances, the frequency is to return to within ±1% of the final steady state condition
in no more than five seconds.

3.17.1(b) Frequency Variations in Steady State. The permanent frequency variation is to be within
±5% of the rated frequency at any loads between no load and full load.

3.17.1(c) Emergency Generator Prime Movers. For gas turbines driving emergency generators, the
requirements of 4-6-4/3.17.1(a) and 4-6-4/3.17.1(b) are to be met. However, for the purpose of
4-6-4/3.17.1(a).ii, where the sum of all loads that can be automatically connected is larger than
50% of the full load of the emergency generator, the sum of these loads is to be used as the first
applied load.

3.17.2 Overspeed Governor

In addition to the normal operating governor, an overspeed governor is to be fitted which will trip
the turbine throttle when the rated speed is exceeded by more than 15%. Provision is to be made
for hand tripping. See 4-6-4/3.15 for pressure-lubricated machines.

3.17.3 Power Output of Gas Turbines

To satisfy the requirements of 4-6-2/3.1, the required power output of gas turbine prime movers
for ship's service generator sets is to be based on the maximum expected inlet air temperature.

3.19 Diesel Engines for Generators

Diesel-engine prime movers are to meet the applicable requirements in Part 4, Chapter 2 and in addition
are to comply with the following requirements.

3.19.1 Operating Governor

An effective operating governor is to be fitted on prime movers driving main or emergency
electric generators and is to be capable of automatically maintaining the speed within the
following limits. Special consideration will be given when an installation requires different
characteristics.

3.19.1(a) Transient Frequency Variations . The transient frequency variations in the electrical
network, when running at the indicated loads below, are to be within ±10% of the rated frequency
with a recovery time within ±1% of the final steady state condition in not more than 5 seconds
when:

i) Running at full load (equal to rated output) of the generator and the maximum electrical
step load is suddenly thrown off,

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 309
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of a generator is thrown off, a
transient frequency variation in excess of 10% of the rated frequency may be acceptable,
provided the overspeed protective device, fitted in addition to the governor, as required by
4-6-4/3.19.2, is not activated.
ii) Running at no load and 50% of the full load of the generator is suddenly thrown on
followed by the remaining 50% load after an interval sufficient to restore the frequency to
steady state.

3.19.1(b) Power Management System. Where the electrical power system is fitted with a power
management system and sequential starting arrangements, the application of loads in multiple
steps of less than 50% of rated load in 4-6-4/3.19.1(a).ii above may be permitted, provided it is in
accordance with 4-6-4/3.19.1(b) FIGURE 1. The details of the power management system and
sequential starting arrangements are to be submitted and its satisfactory operation is to be
demonstrated to the Surveyor.

FIGURE 1
Limiting Curves for Loading 4-stroke Diesel Engines
Step by Step from No-load to Rated Power as Function
of the Brake Mean Effective Pressure

3.19.1(c) Frequency Variations in Steady State. The permanent frequency variation is to be within
±5% of the rated frequency at all loads between no load and full load.

3.19.1(d) Emergency Generator Prime Movers. For prime movers driving emergency generators,
the requirements of 4-6-4/3.19.1(a).i and 4-6-4/3.19.1(c) above are to be met even when:

i) Their total consumer load is applied suddenly, or

ii) Their total consumer load is applied in steps, subject to:

● The total load is supplied within 45 seconds since power failure on the main
switchboard
● The maximum step load is declared and demonstrated
● The power distribution system is designed such that the declared maximum step
loading is not exceeded

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 310
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

● The compliance of time delays and loading sequence with the above is to be
demonstrated at ship’s trials.
3.19.2 Overspeed Governor
In addition to the normal operating governor each auxiliary diesel engine having a maximum
continuous output of 220 kW and over is to be fitted with a separate overspeed device so adjusted
that the speed cannot exceed the maximum rated speed by more than 15%. Provision is to be made
for hand tripping. See 4-6-4/3.15 for pressure-lubricated machines.

3.21 Alternating-current (AC) Generators

3.21.1 Control and Excitation of Generators
Excitation current for generators is to be provided by attached rotating exciters or by static
exciters deriving their source of power from the machine being excited.

3.21.2 Voltage Regulation

3.21.2(a) Voltage Regulators. A separate regulator is to be supplied for each AC generator. When
it is intended that two or more generators will be operated in parallel, reactive-droop
compensating means are to be provided to divide the reactive power properly between the
generators.

3.21.2(b) Variation from Rated Voltage – Steady Conditions. Each AC generator for ship's service
driven by its prime mover having governor characteristics complying with 4-6-4/3.17.1 or
4-6-4/3.19.1 is to be provided with an excitation system capable of maintaining the voltage under
steady conditions within plus or minus 2.5% of the rated voltage for all loads between zero and
rated load at rated power factor. These limits may be increased to plus or minus 3.5% for
emergency sets.

3.21.2(c) Variation from Rated Voltage – Transient Conditions (2017) . Momentary voltage
variations are to be within the range of minus 15% to plus 20% of the rated voltage, and the
voltage is to be restored to within plus or minus 3% of the rated voltage in not more than 1.5
seconds when:

● A load equal to the starting current of the largest motor or a group of motors, but in any case,
at least 60% of the rated current of the generator, and power factor of 0.4 lagging or less, is
suddenly thrown on with the generator running at no load; and
● A load equal to the above is suddenly thrown off.

Subject to ABS approval, such voltage regulation during transient conditions may be calculated
values based on the previous type test records, and need not to be tested during factory testing of a
generator.

Consideration can be given to performing the test required by 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 1, Item 4
according to precise information concerning the maximum values of the sudden loads instead of
the values indicated above, provided precise information is available. The precise information
concerning the maximum values of the sudden loads is to be based on the power management
system arrangements and starting arrangements provided for the electrical system.

3.21.2(d) Short Circuit Conditions (2017) . Under steady-state short-circuit conditions, the
generator together with its excitation system is to be capable of maintaining a steady-state short-
circuit current of not less than three times its rated full load current for a period of two seconds or
of such magnitude and duration as required to properly actuate the associated electrical protective
devices. In order to provide sufficient information for determining the discrimination settings in
the distribution system where the generator is going to be used, the generator manufacturer is to
provide documentation showing the transient behavior of the short circuit current upon a sudden
short-circuit occurring when excited, and running at nominal speed. The influence of the

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 311
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

automatic voltage regulator is to be taken into account, and the setting parameters for the voltage
regulator are to be noted together with the decrement curve. Such a decrement curve is to be
available when the setting of the distribution system’s short-circuit protection is calculated. The
decrement curve need not be based on physical testing. The manufacturer’s simulation model for
the generator and the voltage regulator may be used where this has been validated through the
previous type test on the same model.

3.21.3 Parallel Operation

For AC generating sets operating in parallel, the following requirements are to be complied with.
See also 4-6-2/9.5.2 for protection of A.C. generators in parallel operation.

3.21.3(a) Reactive Load Sharing. The reactive loads of the individual generating sets are not to
differ from their proportionate share of the combined reactive load by more than 10% of the rated
reactive output of the largest generator, or 25% of the rated reactive output of the smallest
generator, whichever is the less.

3.21.3(b) Load Sharing. For any load between 20% and 100% of the sum of the rated output
(aggregate output) of all generators, the load on any generator is not to differ more than 15% of
the rated output in kilowatt of the largest generator or 25% of the rated output in kilowatt of the
individual generator in question, whichever is the less, from its proportionate share of the
combined load for any steady state condition. The starting point for the determination of the
foregoing load-distribution requirements is to be at 75% of the aggregate output with each
generator carrying its proportionate share.

3.21.3(c) Facilities for Load Adjustment. Facilities are to be provided to adjust the governor
sufficiently fine to permit an adjustment of load not exceeding 5% of the aggregate output at
normal frequency.

3.23 Direct-current (DC) Generators

3.23.1 Control and Excitation of Generators
3.23.1(a) Field Regulations. Means are to be provided at the switchboard to enable the voltage of
each generator to be adjusted separately. This equipment is to be capable of adjusting the voltage
of the DC generator to within 0.5% of the rated voltage at all loads between no-load and full-load.

3.23.1(b) Polarity of Series Windings. The series windings of each generator for two wire DC
system are to be connected to negative terminal of each machine.

3.23.1(c) Equalizer Connections. See 4-6-4/7.15.3.

3.23.2 Voltage Regulation

3.23.2(a) Shunt or Stabilized Shunt-wound Generator. When the voltage has been set at full-load
to its rated value, the removal of the load is not to cause a permanent increase of the voltage
greater than 15% of the rated voltage. When the voltage has been set either at full-load or at no-
load, the voltage obtained at any value of the load is not to exceed the no-load voltage.

3.23.2(b) Compound-wound Generator. Compound-wound generators are to be so designed in

relation to the governing characteristics of prime mover, that with the generator at full-load
operating temperature and starting at 20% load with voltage within 1% of rated voltage, it gives at
full-load a voltage within 1.5% of rated voltage. The average of ascending and descending voltage
regulation curves between 20% load and full-load is not to vary more than 3% from rated voltage.

3.23.2(c) Automatic Voltage Regulators. Ship's service generators which are of shunt type are to
be provided with automatic voltage regulators. However, if the load fluctuation does not interfere
with the operation of essential auxiliaries, shunt-wound generators without voltage regulators or
stabilized shunt-wound machines may be used. An automatic voltage regulators will not be

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 312
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

required for the ship's service generators of approximately flat-compounded type. Automatic
voltage regulators are to be provided for all service generators driven by variable speed engines
used also for propulsion purposes, whether these generators are of the shunt, stabilized shunt or
compound-wound type.

3.23.3 Parallel Operation

For DC generating sets operating in parallel, the following requirements are to be complied with.
See also 4-6-2/9.7.2 for protection of DC generators in parallel operation.

3.23.3(a) Stability. The generating sets are to be stable in operation at all loads from no-load to
full-load.

3.23.3(b) Load Sharing. For any load between 20% and 100% of the sum of the rated output
(aggregate output) of all generators, the load on any generator is not to differ more than 12% of
the rated output in kilowatt of the largest generator or 25% of the rated output in kilowatt of the
individual generator in question, whichever is the less, from its proportionate share of the
combined load for any steady state condition. The starting point for the determination of the
foregoing load-distribution requirements is to be at 75% of the aggregate output with each
generator carrying its proportionate share.

3.23.3(c) Tripping of Circuit Breaker. DC generators which operate in parallel are to be provided
with a switch which will trip the generator circuit breaker upon functioning of the overspeed
device.

5 Accumulator Batteries

5.1 General
5.1.1 Application
All accumulator batteries for engine starting, essential or emergency services are to be constructed
and installed in accordance with the following requirements. Accumulator batteries for services
other than the above are to be constructed and equipped in accordance with good commercial
practice. All accumulator batteries will be accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test
conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor after installation.

5.1.2 Sealed Type Batteries

Where arrangements are made for releasing gas through a relief valve following an overcharge
condition, calculations demonstrating compliance with the criteria in 4-6-3/3.7.3 under the
expected rate of hydrogen generation are to be submitted together with the details of installation
and mechanical ventilation arrangements.

5.1.3 References
5.1.3(a) Emergency Services. For requirements covering emergency services and transitional
source of power, see 4-6-2/5.5.3 and 4-6-2/5.7 respectively.

5.1.3(b) Protection of Batteries. For requirements covering protection of batteries, see 4-6-2/5.9.

5.1.3(c) Battery Installation. For requirements covering battery installation, ventilation of the
battery location and protection from corrosion, see 4-6-3/3.7.

5.1.3(d) Cable Installation. For requirements covering cable installation in battery room, see
4-6-3/5.23.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 313
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

5.3 Construction and Assembly

5.3.1 Cells and Filling Plugs
The cells are to be so constructed as to prevent spilling of electrolyte due to an inclination of 40
deg. from normal. The filling plugs are to be so constructed as to prevent spilling of electrolyte
due to ship's movements such as rolling and pitching.

5.3.2 Crates and Trays

The cells are to be grouped in crates or trays of rigid construction equipped with handles to
facilitate handling. For protection from corrosion, see 4-6-3/3.7.4. The mass of crates or trays are
not to exceed 100 kg (220.5 lb).

5.3.3 Nameplate
Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an accessible position of each
crate or tray and are to indicate at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 4b.

5.5 Engine-starting Battery

Battery systems for engine-starting purposes may be of the one-wire type and the earth lead is to be carried
to the engine frame. See also 4-2-1/13.9 and 4-6-2/5.15 for main engine starting and starting arrangement
of emergency generator, respectively.

5.7 VRLA and AGM Batteries Used for Engine Starting (1 July 2022)
Where Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) batteries are installed for
engine starting, temperature compensating battery chargers are to be provided. Additionally, the battery
float charging voltage is to be between 2.25 and 2.3 Volts Per Cell (VPC) unless specified otherwise by the
battery manufacturer.

Commentary:

Engine starting batteries are typically arranged and used with float charging in order to maintain a full charge state of the
batteries over long periods of time. VRLA and AGM batteries have advantages over traditional lead acid batteries, such as
producing less hydrogen gas emissions. VRLA and AGM batteries do not tolerate overcharging, particularly in long periods
of float charging.

IEC 62485-2, 7.2, Table 1 specifies 2.27 VPC for charging of VRLA and AGM batteries.

End of Commentary

7 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc.

7.1 General
7.1.1 Applications
Switchboards are to provide adequate control of the generation and distribution of electric power.
The following equipment is to be constructed and tested in accordance with the following
requirements to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

7.1.1(a) Switchboards. Switchboards for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7
TABLE 11.

7.1.1(b) Motor Controllers. Motor Controllers of 100 kW and over intended for essential services
or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11.

7.1.1(c) Motor Control Centers. Motor control centers with aggregate loads of 100 kW or more
intended for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 314
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

7.1.1(d) Battery Charger Units and Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) Units. Battery charger
units of 25 kW and over and uninterruptible power system (UPS) units of 50 kVA intended for
essential services, services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11, emergency source of power or
transitional source of power.

7.1.1(e) Distribution Boards. Distribution boards associated with the charging or discharging of
the battery system or uninterruptible power system (UPS) in 4-6-4/7.1.1(d).

Switchboard, distribution board, battery charger units, uninterruptible power system (UPS) units,
motor control centers and motor controllers not covered by the above paragraph are to be
constructed and equipped in accordance with good commercial practice, and will be accepted
subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted after installation to the satisfaction of the
Surveyor.

7.1.2 References
7.1.2(a) Inclination. For requirements covering inclination for design condition, see 4-1-1/17.

7.1.2(b) Emergency Switchboard. For requirements covering emergency switchboard, see

4-6-3/5.9.

7.1.2(c) Circuit Breakers. For requirements covering generator circuit breakers, see 4-6-4/11.1.

7.1.2(d) Feeder Protection. For requirements covering feeder protection, see 4-6-2/9.3 to
4-6-2/9.17, 4-6-2/11.3, 4-6-2/13.1.4, and 4-6-2/13.3.3

7.1.2(e) Hull Return and Earthed Distribution System. For requirements covering hull return
system and earthed distribution system, see 4-6-2/7.3 and 4-6-2/7.5 respectively

7.1.2(f) Earthing. For requirements covering earthing connections, see 4-6-3/7.

7.1.2(g) Installation. For requirements covering installation, see 4-6-3/3.9 for switchboard,
4-6-3/3.11 for distribution boards, and 4-6-3/3.13 for motor controllers and control centers.

7.1.2(h) Protection Enclosures and its Selection. For requirements covering degree of the
protection and the selection of equipment, see 4-6-1/15 and 4-6-3/3.1 respectively.

7.3 Testing and Inspection

7.3.1 Applications
7.3.1(a) Switchboards. All switchboards intended for essential services or for services indicated in
4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11, are to be tested in the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor,
preferably at the plant of the manufacturer. For other switchboards, the tests may be carried out by
the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request
from ABS.

7.3.1(b) Motor Controllers. All motor controllers of 100 kW and over intended for essential
services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to be tested in the presence of and
inspected by the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of the manufacturer. For other motor controllers,
the tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is
to be submitted upon request from ABS.

7.3.1(c) Motor Control Centers. All motor control centers with aggregate loads of 100 kW and
over intended for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to be
tested in the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of the
manufacturer. For other motor control centers, the tests may be carried out by the manufacturer
whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 315
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

7.3.1(d) Battery Charger Units, Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) Units and Distribution
Boards. Battery charger units of 25 kW and over, uninterruptible power system (UPS) units of 50
kW and over and distribution boards (associated with the charging ordischarging of the battery
system or uninterruptible power system (UPS)) are used for essential services (see 4-6-1/3.7),
services indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11, emergency source of power (see 4-6-2/5) and
transitional source of power (see 4-6-2/5.7), are to be tested in the presence of and inspected by
the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of the manufacturer. For all other battery charger units,
uninterruptible power system (UPS) units and distribution boards, the tests may be carried out by
the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request
from ABS.

7.3.1(e) Test Items. Tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements in 4-6-4/13.7
TABLE 5.

7.3.2 Special Testing Arrangements

In cases where all of the required tests are not carried out at the plant of the manufacturer, the
Surveyor is to be notified and arrangements are to be made so that the remaining tests may be
witnessed.

7.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement

The insulation resistance between current-carrying parts (connected together for this purpose of this test)
and earth and between current-carrying parts of opposite polarity is to be measured at a D.C. voltage of not
less than 500 volts before and after the dielectric strength tests. The insulation resistance measurement,
after the dielectric strength tests, is to be carried out before components which have been disconnected for
the dielectric tests are reconnected and the insulation resistance is not to be less than 1 megohm.

7.7 Dielectric Strength of Insulation

The dielectric strength of the insulation is to be tested for 60 seconds by an alternating voltage applied in
accordance with 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 5 between:

i) All live parts and the interconnected exposed conductive parts, and
ii) Each phase and all other phases connected for this test to the interconnected exposed conductive
parts of the unit.

The test voltage at the moment of application is not to exceed 50% of the values given in 4-6-4/13.7
TABLE 5. It is to be increased steadily within a few seconds to the required test voltage and maintained for
60 seconds. Test voltage is to have a sinusoidal waveform and a frequency between 45 Hz and 60 Hz.

7.7.1 Production-line Apparatus

Standard apparatus produced in large quantities for which the standard test voltage is 2500 volts or
less, may be tested for one second with a test voltage 20% higher than the one-minute test voltage.

7.7.2 Devices with Low Insulation Strength

Certain devices such as potential transformers, having inherently lower insulation strength are to
be disconnected during the test.

7.9 Construction and Assembly

7.9.1 Enclosures and Assemblies (1 July 2021)
Enclosures and assemblies are to be constructed of steel or other suitable incombustible, moisture-
resistant materials and reinforced as necessary to withstand the mechanical, electrical (magnetic)
and thermal stresses likely to be encountered in service under both normal and short circuit fault
conditions, and are to be protected against corrosion. No wood is to be used, except for hardwood

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 316
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

for nonconducting hand rails. Insulating materials are to be flame retardant and moisture resistant.
The supporting framework is to be of rigid construction.

Enclosures are to be of the closed type. The degree of the protection is to be in accordance with
4-6-3/9 TABLE 1. All wearing parts are to be accessible for inspection and be readily renewable.
Equipment manufacturer is to identify the wearing parts, and this is to be agreed upon by ABS.

7.9.2 Dead Front

The dead-front type is to be used. Live-front type is not acceptable regardless of the voltage
ratings.

7.9.3 Mechanical Strength

All levers, handles, hand wheels, interlocks and their connecting links, shafts and bearings for the
operation of switches and contactors are to be of such proportions that they will not be broken or
distorted by manual operation.

7.9.4 Mechanical Protection

The sides and the rear and, where necessary, the front of switchboards are to be suitably guarded.
Exposed live parts having voltages to earth exceeding a voltage of 55 volts DC or 55 volts AC rms
between conductors are not to be installed on the front of such switchboards. Unless the
switchboard is installed on an electrically insulated floor, non-conducting mats or gratings are to
be provided at the front and rear of the switchboard. Where the floor on which the switchboard is
installed is of electrically insulated construction, the insulation level of the floor to the earth is to
be at least 50 MΩ. A notice plate is to be posted at the entrance to the switchboard room or on the
switchboard front panel to state that the floor in the room is of electrically insulated construction.
Drip covers are to be provided over switchboards when subject to damage by leaks or falling
objects.

7.11 Bus Bars, Wiring and Contacts

7.11.1 Design
Copper bar is to be used for main and generator bus in the switchboard. Other materials and
combination of materials will be specially considered. Generator bus bars are to be designed on a
basis of maximum generator rating. All other bus bars and bus-bar connections are to be designed
for at least 75% of the combined full-load rated currents of all apparatus they supply, except that
when they supply one unit or any group of units in continuous operation, they are to be designed
for full load.

7.11.2 Operating Temperature of Bus Bars

Bus bars are to be proportioned to avoid temperature which will affect the normal operation of
electrical devices mounted on the board.

7.11.3 Short Circuit Rating

Circuit breakers and bus bars are to be mounted, braced and located so as to withstand the thermal
effects and mechanical forces resulting from the maximum prospective short circuit current.
Switchboard instruments, controls, etc. are to be located with respect to circuit breakers so as to
minimize the thermal effects due to short circuit currents.

7.11.4 Internal Wiring

Instrument and control wiring is to be of the stranded type and is to have heat-resisting and flame-
retarding insulation. Wiring from hinged panels is to be of the extra-flexible type.

7.11.5 Arrangement
7.11.5(a) Accessibility (1 July 2021)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 317
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

The arrangement of bus bars, connection bars and switchboard wiring are to be such that
accessibility is provided for cable connections. Equipment manufacturer in conjunction with the
system integrator (shipyard) is to provide equipment arrangement drawing and details of the cable
connections to verify accessibility for maintenace and overhauls.

7.11.5(b) Bracing of Bus Bars (1 July 2021)

Bus bars and circuit breakers are to be mounted, braced and located so as to withstand thermal
effects and magnetic forces resulting from the maximum prospective short circuit current.

7.11.5(c) Locking of Connections

All nuts and connections are to be fitted with locking devices to prevent loosening due to
vibration. Bolted bus bar connections are to be suitably treated (e.g., silver plating) to avoid
deterioration of electrical conductivity over time.

7.11.5(d) Soldered Connections

Soldered connections are not to be used for connecting or terminating any wire or cable of
nominal cross-sectional area of greater than 2.5 mm2 (4,933 circ. mils). Soldered connections,
where used, are to have a solder contact length at least 1.5 times the diameter of the conductor.

7.11.5(e) Bus Bar Connections (1 July 2021)

Demonstration of proper alignment, fastening, connecting, and torque of the bus bar connections
are to be witnessed by the attending Surveyor.

7.11.6 Clearances and Creepage Distances

7.11.6(a) General. Bare main bus bars, but not including the conductors between the main bus
bars and the supply side of outgoing units, are to have minimum clearances (in air) and creepage
distances (across surfaces) in accordance with 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 6.

7.11.6(b) Alternative (2014). Alternatively, reduced creepage and clearance distances may be used
provided:

i) The equipment is not installed in ‘Machinery Spaces of Category A’ or in areas affected

by a Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing
System.
ii) The minimum clearance distance shall not be less than 8mm.
iii) The minimum creepage distance shall not be less than 16mm.
iv) The equipment complies with IEC 61439-1.
v) In applying IEC 61439-1 the equipment is considered to be:

● Of overvoltage Category III,

● Installed in an environment of pollution degree 3
● Having insulating material of type IIIa, and
● Installed in inhomogeneous field conditions
vi) The temperature dependent criteria in IEC 61439-1 are derated to meet the ambient
temperatures found on marine installations. Refer to 4-1-1/39 TABLE 2.
vii) The equipment is subject to an impulse voltage test with test voltage values shown in
Table below. Where intermediate values of rated operational voltage are used, the next
higher rated impulse withstand test voltage is to be used. The impulse voltage test reports
are to be submitted to ABS for review.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 318
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Rated Operational Voltage Rated Impulse Withstand Test Voltage

V kV

50 0.8

100 1.5

150 2.5

300 4

600 6

1000 8

7.11.7 Terminals
Terminals or terminal rows for systems of different voltage are to be clearly separated each other.
The rated voltage is to be clearly indicated at least once for each group of terminals which have
been separated from the terminals with other voltage ratings. Terminals with different voltage
ratings, each not exceeding 50 V DC or 50 V AC may be grouped together. Each terminal is to
have a nameplate indicating the circuit designation.

7.13 Control and Protective Devices

7.13.1 Circuit-disconnecting Devices
7.13.1(a) Systems Exceeding 50 Volts (2016). Distribution boards, chargers or controllers for
distribution to motors, appliances, and lighting or other branch circuits are to be fitted with
multipole circuit breakers or a multipole switch-fuse combination in each unearthed conductor.

7.13.1(b) System of 50 Volts and Less (2016). For distribution boards, chargers or controllers
where voltage to earth or between poles does not exceed 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms, the
fuses may be provided without switches.

7.13.1(c) Disconnect Device. The rating of the disconnecting device is to he coordinated with the
voltage and current requirements of the load. The disconnect device is to indicate by position of
the handle, or otherwise, whether it is open or closed.

7.13.2 Arrangement of Equipment

7.13.2(a) Air Circuit Breakers. Air circuit breaker contacts are to be kept at least 305 mm (12 in.)
from the ship's structure unless insulation barriers are installed.

7.13.2(b) Voltage Regulators. Voltage regulator elements are to be provided with enclosing cases
to protect them from damage.

7.13.2(c) Equipment Operated in High Temperature. Where rheostats or other devices that may
operate at high temperatures are mounted on the switchboard, they are to be naturally ventilated
and so located or isolated by barriers as to prevent excessive temperature of adjacent devices.
When this cannot be accomplished, the rheostat or other device is to be mounted separately from
the switchboard.

7.13.2(d) Accessibility to Fuses. All fuses, except for instrument and control circuits, are to be
mounted on or be accessible from the front of the switchboard.

7.13.2(e) Protective Device for Instrumentation. All wiring on the boards for instrumentation is to
be protected by fuses or current limiting devices, see 4-6-2/9.17.

7.13.2(f) Wearing Parts. All wearing parts are to be accessible for inspection and readily
renewable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 319
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

7.13.3 Markings
Identification plates are to be provided for each piece of apparatus to indicate clearly its service.
Identification plates for feeders and branch circuits are to include the circuit designation and the
rating of the fuse or circuit-breaker trip setting required by the circuit.

7.15 Switchboards
In addition to 4-6-4/7.1 to 4-6-4/7.13 as applicable, the switchboards for essential or emergency services
are to comply with the following requirements.

7.15.1 Handrails
Insulated handrail or insulated handles are to be provided on the front of the switchboard.
Similarly, where access to the rear is required, insulated handrail or insulated handles are also to
be fitted on the rear of the switchboard.

7.15.2 Main Bus Bar Subdivision (2014)

Vessels with the keel laid or in similar stage of construction on or after 1 July 1998 are to meet the
following requirements. Where the main source of electrical power is necessary for propulsion of
the vessel, the main bus bar is to be subdivided into at least two sections which are to be normally
connected by circuit breaker or other approved means. As far as practicable, the connection of
generating sets and any other duplicated equipment is to be equally divided between the sections.

If the arrangement is such that the main switchboard is divided into separate sections which are
interconnected by cable, the cable is to be protected at each end against faults.

7.15.3 Equalizer Circuit for Direct-current (D.C.) Generators

7.15.3(a) Equalizer Main Circuit. The current rating of the equalizer main circuit for direct-
current (DC) generators is not to be less than half of the rated full-load current of the generator.

7.15.3(b) Equalizer Bus Bars. The current rating of the equalizer bus bars is not to be less than
half of the rated full-load current of the largest generator in the group.

7.15.4 Equipment and Instrumentation

Equipment and instrumentation are to be provided in accordance with 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 7. They
are to be suitable for starting, stopping, synchronizing and paralleling each generator set from the
main switchboard. They may be mounted on the centralized control console, if the main
switchboard is located in the centralized control station.

7.17 Motor Controllers and Control Centers

In addition to 4-6-4/7.1 to 4-6-4/7.13 as applicable, the motor controllers and control centers for essential
or emergency services are to comply with the following requirements.

7.17.1 Enclosures and Assemblies

The following materials are acceptable for the enclosures.

● Cast metal, other than die-cast metal, at least 3 mm (1/8 in.) thick at every point.
● Nonmetallic materials which have ample strength, are noncombustible and nonabsorptive
(e.g., laminated phenolic material).
● Sheet metal of adequate strength.

Motor control centers are to be constructed so that they are secured to a solid foundation, be self-
supported, or be braced to the bulkhead.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 320
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

7.17.2 Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers

Means are to be provided for the disconnection of the full load from all live poles of supply of
every motor rated at 0.5 kW or above and its controlgear. Where the controlgear is mounted on or
adjacent to a main or auxiliary distribution switchboard, a disconnecting switch in the switchboard
may be used for this purpose. Otherwise, a disconnecting switch within the control gear enclosure
or a separate enclosed disconnecting switch is to be provided. Disconnect switches and circuit
breakers are to be operated without opening the enclosures in which they are installed.

7.17.3 Auto-starters
Alternating-current (AC) motor manual auto-starters with self-contained auto-transformers are to
be provided with switches of the quick-make-and-break type, and the starter is to be arranged so
that it will be impossible to throw to the running position without having first thrown to the
starting position. Switches are to be preferably of the contactor or air-break-type.

7.19 Battery Systems and Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)

In addition to 4-6-4/7.1 to 4-6-4/7.13 as applicable, equipment for essential, emergency and transitional
sources of power services is to comply with the following requirements. Such equipment would include
the battery charger unit, uninterruptible power system (UPS) unit, and the distribution boards associated
with the charging or dischargingof the battery system or uninterruptible power system (UPS).

7.19.1 Definitions
Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) - combination of converters, switches and energy storage
means, for example batteries, constituting a power system for maintaining continuity of load
power in case of input power failure.

Off-line UPS unit - a UPS unit where under normal operation the output load is powered from the
bypass line (raw mains) and only transferred to the inverter if the bypass supply fails or goes
outside preset limits. This transition will invariably result in a brief (typically 2 to 10 ms) break in
the load supply.

Line interactive UPS unit - an off-line UPS unit where the bypass line switch to stored energy
power when the input power goes outside the preset voltage and frequency limits.

On-line UPS unit - a UPS unit where under normal operation the output load is powered from the
inverter, and will therefore continue to operate without break in the event of the supply input
failing or going outside preset limits.

DC UPS unit - a UPS unit where the output is in DC (direct current).

7.19.2 Battery Charging Rate

Except when a different charging rate is necessary and is specified for a particular application, the
charging facilities are to be such that the completely discharged battery can be recharged to 80%
capacity in not more than 10 hours. See also 4-6-4/7.19.6(c).

7.19.3 Discharge Protection

An acceptable means, such as reverse current protection, is to be provided for preventing a failed
component in the battery charger unit or uninterruptible power system (UPS) unit from
discharging the battery.

7.19.4 Design and Construction

7.19.4(a) Construction.
Battery charger units and uninterruptible power system (UPS) units are to be constructed in
accordance with the IEC 62040 Series, or an acceptable and relevant national or international
standard.

7.19.4(b) Operation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 321
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

The operation of the UPS is not to depend upon external services.

7.19.4(c) Type.
The type of UPS unit employed, whether off-line, line interactive or online, is to be appropriate to
the power supply requirements of the connected loadequipment.

7.19.4(d) Continuity of Supply. (2019)

An external bypass is to be provided to account for a failure within the uninterruptible power
system (UPS). For battery charger units and DC UPS units, see 4-6-2/7.1.6(c). A UPS with an
integral Maintenance Bypass Switch allowing for battery replacement or repair of the inverter
converter is acceptable as an alternative to an external bypass.

7.19.4(e) Monitoring and Alarming.

The battery charger unit or uninterruptible powersystem (UPS) unit is to be monitored and audible
and visual alarm is to be given in a normally attended location for the following.

● Power supply failure (voltage and frequency) to the connected load

● Earth fault,
● Operation of battery protective device,
● When the battery is being discharged, and
● When the bypass is in operation for on-line UPS units. When changeover occurs, for battery
charger units and DC UPS units required to comply with 4-6-2/7.1.6(c).
7.19.5 Location
7.19.5(a) Location. The UPS unit is to be suitably located for use in an emergency. The UPS unit
is to be located as near as practical to the equipment being supplied, providedthe arrangements
comply with all other Rules, such as 4-6-3/3.7, 4-6-3/3.9, 4-6-3/3.11 and 4-6-3/3.13 for location of
electrical equipment.

7.19.5(b) Ventilation. UPS units utilizing valve regulated sealed batteries may be located in
compartments with normal electrical equipment, provided the ventilation arrangements are in
accordance with the requirements of 4-6-3/3.7. Since valve regulated sealed batteries are
considered low-hydrogen-emission batteries, calculations are to be submittedin accordance with
4-6-3/3.7.2(d) to establish the gas emission performance of the valve regulated batteries compared
to the standard lead acid batteries. Arrangements are to be provided to allow any possible gas
emission to be led to the weather, unless the gasemission performance of the valve regulated
batteries does not exceed that of standardlead acid batteries connected to a charging device of 0.2
kW.

7.19.5(c) Battery Installation. For battery installation arrangements, see 4-6-3/3.7.

7.19.6 Performance
7.19.6(a) Duration. The output power is to be maintained for the duration required for the
connected equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.3 for emergency services and 4-6-2/5.7 of transitional
source of power, as applicable.

7.19.6(b) Battery capacity. No additional circuits are to be connected to the battery charger unit or
UPS unit without verification that the batteries have adequate capacity. The battery capacity is, at
all times, to be capable of supplying the designated loads for the time specified in 4-6-4/7.19.6(a).

7.19.6(c) Recharging. On restoration of the input power, the rating of the charging facilities are to
be sufficient to recharge the batteries while maintaining the output supply to the load equipment.
See also 4-6-4/7.19.2.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 322
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

7.19.7 Testing and Survey

7.19.7(a) Surveys. Equipment units are to be surveyed during manufacturing and testing in
accordance with 4-6-4/7.3.1.

7.19.7(b) Testing. Appropriate testing is to be carried out to demonstrate that the batterycharger
units and uninterruptible power system (UPS) units are suitable for the intended environment. This
is expected to include as a minimum the following tests:

● Functionality, including operation of alarms;

● Temperature rise;
● Ventilation rate;
● Battery capacity

7.19.7(c) Test upon power input failure. Where the supply is to be maintained without a break
following a power input failure, this is to be verified after installation by practicaltest.

9 Transformers

9.1 General
9.1.1 Applications
All transformers which serve for essential or emergency electrical supply are to be constructed,
tested and installed in accordance with the following requirements. Transformers other than the
above services, auto-transformers for starting motors or isolation transformers are to be
constructed and equipped in accordance with good commercial practice. All transformers are to be
of the dry and air cooled type. The use of liquid immersed type transformers will be subject to
special consideration. Transformers other than for essential or emergency services will be
accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted after installation to the satisfaction
of the Surveyor.

9.1.2 References
9.1.2(a) Power Supply Arrangement. For requirements covering arrangement of power supply
through transformers to ship's service systems, see 4-6-2/7.1.6.

9.1.2(b) Protection. For requirements covering protection of transformers, see 4-6-2/9.15.

9.1.2(c) Protection Enclosures and its Selection. For requirements covering selection of the
protection enclosures for location conditions, see 4-6-3/3.1.1.

9.1.3 Forced Cooling Arrangement (Air or Liquid)

Where forced cooling medium is used to preclude the transformer from exceeding temperatures
outside its rated range, monitoring and alarm means are to be provided and arranged so that an
alarm activates when pre-set temperature conditions are exceeded. Manual or automatic
arrangements are to be made to reduce the transformer load to a level corresponding to the cooling
available.

9.3 Temperature Rise (2014)

The maximum temperature rise of the transformer insulated windings, based on an ambient temperature of
45°C (113°F), is not to exceed the values listed in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 8.

9.5 Construction and Assembly

9.5.1 Windings
All transformer windings are to be treated to resist moisture, sea atmosphere and oil vapors.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 323
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

9.5.2 Terminals
Terminals are to be provided in an accessible position. The circuit designation is to be clearly
marked on each terminal connection. The terminals are to be so spaced or shielded that they
cannot be accidentally earthed, short-circuited or touched.

9.5.3 Nameplate
Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an accessible position of the
transformer and are to indicate at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 4c.

9.5.4 Prevention of the Accumulation of Moisture

Transformers of 10 kVA/phase and over are to be provided with effective means to prevent
accumulation of moisture and condensation within the transformer enclosure where the
transformer is disconnected from the switchboard during standby (cold standby). Where it is
arranged that the transformer is retained in an energized condition throughout a period of standby
(hot standby), the exciting current to the primary winding may be considered as ameans to meet
the above purpose. In case of hot standby, a warning plate is to be posted at or near the
disconnecting device for the primary side feeder to the transformer.

9.7 Testing
For single-phase transformers rated 1 kVA and above or three-phase transformers rated 5 kVA and above
intended for essential or emergency services, the following tests are to be carried out by the transformer's
manufacturer in accordance with a recognized standard, whose certificate of test is to be submitted for
review upon request.

i) Measurement of winding resistance, voltage ratio, impedance voltage, short circuit impedance,
insulation resistance, load loss, no load loss and excitation current, phase relation and polarity.
ii) Dielectric strength.
iii) Temperature rise (required for one transformer of each size and type). See 4-6-4/9.3.

10 Semiconductor Converters for Adjustable Speed Motor Drives (2014)

10.1 Application
All semiconductor converters that are used to control motor drives having a rated power of 100 kW (135
hp) and over intended for essential services (see definition in 4-6-1/3.7) or for services indicated in
4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with the requirements of
4-6-4/10.

Manufacturer’s tests for semiconductor converters that are used to control motor drives having a rated
power less than 100 kW (135 hp) for essential services (see definition in 4-6-1/3.7) or for services
indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 11 are to include at least the tests described in 4-6-4/10.7. All other
semiconductor converters used to control motor drives are to be designed, constructed and tested in
accordance with established industrial practices and manufacturer’s specifications.

The required tests may be carried out at the manufacturer facility whose certificates of tests will be
acceptable and are to be submitted upon request to ABS. All semiconductor converters will only be
accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor
after installation.

10.3 Standards of Compliance

The design of semiconductor converters for adjustable speed motor drives, unless otherwise contradicted
by ABS Rules, shall be in compliance with the requirements of IEC Publication 61800-5-1:2007 (titled
‘Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems : Safety Requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy’)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 324
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

and 60146-1-1:2009 (titled ‘Semiconductor converters – General requirements and line commutated
converters – Specification of basic requirements). For convenience, the following requirements are listed.

10.5 Design, Construction and Assembly Requirements

10.5.1 Rating
Semiconductor converters are to be rated for continuous load conditions and if required by the
application, are to have specified overload capabilities.

The operation of the semiconductor converter equipment, including any associated transformers,
reactors, capacitors and filter circuits, shall not cause harmonic distortion and voltage and
frequency variations in excess of the values mentioned in 4-6-2/7.9 and 4-6-1/21.3 TABLE 1,
respectively.

The semiconductor converter circuits shall be able to withstand voltage and current transients that
the system may be subject to for certain applications.

The semiconductor converters are to be suitable for environmental conditions found in marine
installations such as those mentioned in 4-1-1/39 TABLE 1 and 4-1-1/39 TABLE 2.

10.5.2 Enclosures
Enclosures and assemblies are to be constructed of steel or other suitable incombustible, moisture-
resistant materials and reinforced as necessary to withstand the mechanical, electro-magnetic and
thermal stresses which may be encountered under both normal and fault conditions.

Enclosures are to be of the closed type. The degree of protection of the enclosure is to be in
accordance with 4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 1. For HV converters, the enclosure is to satisfy the
requirements in 4-6-5/1 TABLE 1.

All wearing parts are to be accessible for inspection and be readily replaceable.

10.5.3 Nameplate Data

A nameplate made of corrosion resistant material is to be provided on the semiconductor assembly
and is to indicate at least the following:

i) Manufacturer’s name amd identification reference/equipment serial number

ii) Number of input and output phases
iii) Rated input voltage and current
iv) Rated output voltage and current
v) Rated input and output frequency, if any
vi) Range of output frequency
vii) Maximum permissible prospective symmetrical rms short-circuit current of the power
source
viii) Cooling methods
ix) Degree of protection
10.5.4 Warning Labels
Appropriate warning labels informing the user of the dangers with working with the different parts
of the converter assembly is to be placed at all appropriate places of the assembly.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 325
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

10.5.5 Hand Rails

Insulated handrails or insulated handles are to be provided for each front panel of the assembly.
Where access to the rear is also required, insulated handrails or insulated handles are to be fitted to
the rear of the assembly as well.

10.5.6 Accessibility
All components of the semiconductor converter assembly are to be mounted in such a manner that
they can be removed from the assembly for repair or replacement without having to dismantle the
complete unit.

10.5.7 Capacitor Discharge

Capacitors within a semiconductor converter assembly shall be discharged to a voltage less than
60 V, or to a residual charge less than 50 µC, within 5 seconds after the removal of power. If this
requirement cannot be met, appropriate warning labels shall be placed on the assembly.

10.5.8 Cooling Arrangements (2017)

Design of cooling systems is to be based on an ambient air temperature of 45°C (113°F) indicated
in 4-1-1/39 and 4-1-1/39 TABLE 2.

Semiconductor converter assemblies are to be installed away from sources of radiant energy in
locations where the circulation of air is not restricted to and from the assembly and where the
temperature of the inlet air to air-cooled converters will not exceed that for which the converter
has been designed.

Where arrangements for forced cooling have been provided, the equipment is, unless otherwise
specifically required, to be designed such that power cannot be applied to, or retained on, the
semiconductor circuits, unless effective cooling is maintained. Other effective means of protection
against equipment over-temperature such as reduction in the driven load may also be acceptable.

Semiconductor assemblies with forced cooling are to be provided with a means of monitoring the
temperature of the cooling medium. Over-temperature of the cooling medium is to be alarmed
locally and at a continuously manned location and the equipment shutdown when temperature
exceeds the manufacturer specified value.

Semiconductor assemblies with liquid cooling are to be provided with a means to detect leakage.
In case of leakage, an audible and visible alarm is to be initiated locally and remotely at a
continuously manned location. Means to contain any leakage are to be provided so that the liquid
does not cause a failure of the semiconductor assembly or any other electrical equipment located
near the converter. Where the cooling liquid is required to be non-conducting, the conductivity of
the cooling liquid is to be monitored and an alarm given both locally and remotely in a
continuously manned location if the conductivity exceeds the manufacturer specified value.

In case of failure of the cooling system, an alarm is to be given both locally and remotely at a
continuously manned location and the output current is to be reduced automatically.

Cooling liquids which are in contact with live unearthed parts of the assembly are to be non-
conductive and non-flammable.

10.5.9 Emergency Stop

When required, semiconductor converter assemblies shall be provided with an emergency stop
function. The emergency stop circuit is to be hard-wired and independent of any control system
signal.

10.5.10 Electrical Protection (2016)

10.5.10(a) Overvoltage Protection.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 326
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Means are to be provided to prevent excessive overvoltage in a supply system to which

semiconductor converters are connected and to prevent the application of voltages in excess of the
rating of semiconductor devices.

10.5.10(b) Overcurrent Protection.

Arrangements are to be made so that the permissible current of semiconductor converters or
semiconductor devices associated with the semiconductor converter cannot be exceeded during
operation.

10.5.10(c) Short Circuit Protection.

Semiconductor converters and the associated semiconductor devices are to be protected against
short circuit.

10.5.10(d) Filter Circuits.

Filter circuits are to be protected against overvoltage, overcurrent and short circuit.

10.5.10(e) Alarms.
Visual and audible alarms are to be provided at the control station in the event of operation of the
protection system.

10.5.11 Clearance and Creepage Distances

Clearance and creepage distances used in standard production (COTS) semi-conductor converter
assemblies are to be in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1 and suitable for overvoltage category III,
pollution degree 3 and insulating material group IIIa. The relevant values are reproduced in the
Table below for convenience.

System Voltage (V) Minimum Clearance Distance (mm)

≤ 50 0.8

100 0.8

150 1.5

300 3.0

600 5.5

1000 8.0

3600 25

7200 60

12000 90

15000 120

Note: Interpolation is permitted.

Working Voltage (rms) (V) Minimum Creepage Distance (mm)

50 1.9

100 2.2

125 2.4

160 2.5

200 3.2

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 327
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Working Voltage (rms) (V) Minimum Creepage Distance (mm)

250 4.0

320 5.0

400 6.3

500 8.0

630 10.0

800 12.5

1000 16

1250 20

1600 25

2000 32

2500 40

3200 50

4000 63

5000 80

6300 100

8000 125

10000 160

Note: Interpolation is permitted.

10.5.12 Protection and Monitoring Requirements

Semiconductor assemblies, as a minimum, shall have alarm functions for the following
parameters:

i) Overcurrent
ii) Overload
iii) Overvoltage
iv) Ground fault
v) Loss of cooling
vi) Increase in resistivity of cooling medium (for liquid cooled converters)
vii) Over-temperature
viii) Loss of communication to process control
ix) Loss of motor speed feedback

If harmonic filters are used in conjunction with semiconductor converter assemblies, refer to
4-6-2/9.19 for additional protection requirements.

For vessels with electric propulsion, refer to 4-7-3/23 TABLE 5A.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 328
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

10.5.13 Load-Sharing
When semiconductor converters have multiple parallel/series circuits, load sharing between the
multiple circuits is to be distributed uniformly, as far as practicable.

10.5.14 EMC Emission Requirements

If requested by the customer, EM immunity and EM emissions testing of the semiconductor
assembly shall be done as an optional test in accordance with IEC 61800-3 (titled ‘Adjustable
speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods’).

Note:

Radiated and conducted emissions/immunity does not depend on the equipment alone but also on the interaction
between the semiconductor converter assembly and the rest of the power system. There shall be communication
between the manufacturer and the customer as to what installation guidelines may need to be followed to satisfy
the different EM emission/immunity requirements, such as cable routing, types of interconnect cables used, cable
shielding, etc.

10.5.15 Harmonic Filter Requirements

If harmonic filter circuits are used in association with semiconductor converter assemblies to
reduce the harmonics and transients in the system, they are to comply with the requirements in
4-6-2/9.19.

10.5.16 Performance
The converter control system shall be able to control the motor by speed ramp, torque or power, as
per customer specification.

Upon loss of the reference signal, the converter shall either decelerate the driven motor to
minimum speed/torque/power or down to standstill as per customer specification for the required
application.

When, during normal operation, the motor is decelerated to standstill, it shall be possible to de-
energize the motor by blocking the control signals to the power semiconductors, while leaving the
converter input circuit energized.

When automatic restart is specified, the converter shall be capable of catching an already spinning
motor.

10.7 Inspection and Testing

(2016) Semiconductor assemblies for motor drives shall undergo Type tests, Routine tests and Optional
tests, if any specifically required by the Owner, at manufacturer’s production facility as per the Table
below. The Type tests, Routine tests and Optional tests shall be conducted in the presence of and witnessed
by an ABS Surveyor. Type tests shall be carried out one prototype of a converter or the first of a batch of
identical converters. Routine tests shall be carried on each assembly. A summary of the required type tests
and routine tests are given in the table below:

No. Tests Type Test Routine ABS Reference IEC Test Reference
(see 4-6-4/10.7) Test

1 Visual inspection X X 4-6-4/10.7.1 61800-5-1/5.2.1

2 Insulation test (AC or DC voltage test) X X 4-6-4/10.7.2 61800-5-1/5.2.3.2

3 Insulation resistance test X X 4-6-4/10.7.4 60146-1-1/7.2.3.1

4 Impulse voltage test X 4-6-4/10.7.3 61800-5-1/5.2.3.1

5 Cooling system test X X 4-6-4/10.7.5 61800-5-1/5.2.4.5

6 Breakdown of components test X 4-6-4/10.7.6 61800-5-1/5.2.3.6.4

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 329
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

No. Tests Type Test Routine ABS Reference IEC Test Reference
(see 4-6-4/10.7) Test

7 Light load and functional test X X 4-6-4/10.7.7 60146-1-1/7.3.1

8 Rated current test X 4-6-4/10.7.8 60146-1-1/7.3.2

9 Temperature rise test X 4-6-4/10.7.9 61800-5-1/5.2.3.8

10 Capacitor discharge test X 4-6-4/10.7.10 61800-5-1/5.2.3.7

10.7.1 Visual Inspection

Semiconductor assemblies are subject to visual inspection for the following aspects:

i) Verify enclosure integrity, alignment of different cabinets in the assembly as per system
drawings.
ii) Verify if nameplate is present as per 4-6-4/10.5.3.
iii) Check if adequate and visible warning and safety labels are present.
iv) General hardware and electrical point-to-point wire check.
v) Verify correct routing and connections of fiber optic cables and ethernet cables.
vi) Verify correct connection of grounding wires on the assembly.
vii) Point-to-point inspection of cooling system, if applicable. For drive assemblies with
liquid cooling, verification of proper installation of piping and hoses, correct orientation
of flow restrictors and related coolant liquid monitoring instrumentation.
viii) Door interlocks, if any
10.7.2 Insulation Test (AC or DC Voltage Test) (2017)
Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to insulation tests to ensure adequate dielectric strength
of insulation of its components and to verify that clearance distances have not been compromised
during manufacturing operations. The test voltages are given in Table X. The insulation test is to
be performed with the appropriate AC or DC voltage (equal to the peak value of the specified AC
rms voltage) mentioned in Table 21/Table 22/Table 23 of IEC 61800-5-1(2007). The AC test
voltage is to be voltage of sinusoidal wave form and a frequency of 50 Hz/60 Hz and .The
duration of the test is to be at least 5 sec for the Type Test and 1 sec for the Routine Test. All main
power, control power and logic circuits have to be subject to the insulation test.

10.7.3 Impulse Voltage Test

Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to an Impulse voltage test to simulate the impact of
impulse transient over voltages generated in the mains supply or those caused by switching of
equipment. The impulse voltage test is to be done as per 5.2.3.1 of IEC 61800-5-1(2007). For
purposes of selection of test voltages, the semiconductor assembly shall be treated as belonging to
overvoltage category III.

Impulse voltage tests shall be done as a routine test on assemblies that do not satisfy the clearance
and creepage distance requirements of 4-6-4/10.5.11.

10.7.4 Insulation Resistance Test

One minute after the insulation test, insulation resistance shall be measured by applying a direct
voltage of at least 500 V.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 330
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

10.7.5 Cooling System Test

Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to cooling system tests that test for failure of the
cooling system and the associated response of the semiconductor assembly to these cooling
system failures as per 5.2.4.5 of IEC 61800-5-1 (2007).

In addition, for liquid cooled semiconductor assemblies, the cooling piping system shall be subject
to a coolant leak pressure test. The cooling system piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5
times the design pressure for a period of 30 minutes. The pressure relief mechanism shall also be
checked for proper calibration and operation. The cooling system shall be verified as having no
leakage by monitoring the pressure and by visual inspection.

The instrumentation critical to the operation of the cooling system such as valve positions,
programming of level switch sensors, flow sensors, pressure sensors, temperature sensors,
pressure relief valve operation, coolant conductivity sensor, etc., shall be checked to ensure correct
calibration and functionality.

10.7.6 Breakdown of Components Test

Components which have been identified by circuit analysis could result in a thermal or electric
shock hazard are to be subject to a breakdown test as per 5.2.3.6.4 of IEC 61800-5-1.

10.7.7 Light Load and Functional Test

Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to a light load and functional test to ensure that all parts
of the electrical circuit and the cooling system work properly together and that the assembly meets
the required proof of performance as per customer requirements. The main things to be checked
include, but are not limited to:

i) Verify that the control equipment, auxiliaries, protection equipment and main circuit are
operating properly together.
ii) Check power supplies to different power and control circuits of the assembly and
associated communication control interfaces.
iii) Check pre-charge circuit settings.
iv) Verify the various software parameters.
v) Check for voltage/current sharing in the semiconductor devices used in the arms of the
converter.
vi) Testing of the converter for scenarios like, but not limited to, emergency trip of the
assembly, input fault protection, loss of cooling, local and remote control operation, etc.
vii) Testing of the converter for any specific customer defined scenario like output power
ramp- down on loss of input power, ability of the converter to catch a spinning motor
after recovering from a trip or from automatic restart, etc.
10.7.8 Rated Current Test
The test is carried out to verify that the equipment will operate satisfactorily at rated current. The
DC terminals shall be short-circuited directly or with a reactor and an alternating voltage of
sufficient value, to cause at least the rated continuous direct current to flow, shall be connected to
the AC terminals of the converter and operation of the assembly shall be checked.

10.7.9 Temperature Rise Test

The test is carried out to verify that parts and accessible surfaces of the semiconductor assembly
do not exceed temperature limits specified below and the manufacturer’s temperature limits of
safety-relevant parts. The temperature rise test is to be conducted is to at worst-case conditions of
rated power and rated output current.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 331
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Materials and Components Thermometer Method (°C) Resistance Method (°C)

Rubber/Thermoplastic-insulated 55 –
conductors

User terminals Note 1 –

Copper bus bars and connecting 120 –

straps

Winding Insulation

Class A 95 105

Class E 100 115

Class B 105 125

Class F 115 135

Class H 135 155

Class N 175 195

Phenolic composition 145 –

Bare resistor material 395 –

Capacitor Note 2 –

Power switching semiconductors Note 2 –

Printed wiring boards (PWB’s) Note 2 –

Liquid cooling medium Note 2 –

Notes:

1 Maximum terminal temperature shall not exceed 15°C more than the insulation temperature rating of
the conductor or cable specified by the manufacturer.

2 Maximum temperature shall be as specified by the manufacturer.

10.7.10 Capacitor Discharge Test

Verification of the capacitor discharge time as required in 4-6-4/10.7.7 is required to be done by a
test and/or by calculation.

10.9 Integration Requirements

10.9.1 Integration
In cases where the semiconductor converters are integrated into larger assemblies that have other
components (i.e., transformers, reactors, motors, etc.), the individual tests of the other components
shall be done in accordance with relevant portions of the ABS Rules.

Installation requirements such as earthing of equipment, selection of cable and acceptable cable
lengths, etc., should be as per manufacturer installation guidelines.

10.9.2 Reactors and Transformers for Semiconductor Converters

10.9.2(a) Voltage Regulation. Means to regulate transformer output voltage are to be provided to
take care of increase in converter forward resistance and, in addition, to obtain the necessary
performance characteristics of the converter unit in which the transformer is used.

10.9.2(b) High Temperature Alarm. Interphase reactors and transformers used with the
semiconductor converters for main and auxiliary propulsion systems are to be provided with a

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 332
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

high temperature alarm at the switchboard or the propulsion control station. The setting value of
the alarm is to be determined by their specific insulation class and is not to exceed the temperature
corresponding to the limit listed in 4-6-4/9.3.

10.9.3 Critical Speeds

The semiconductor converter supplier, the driven equipment supplier and the Owner should come
to an agreement on the calculations of the resulting critical lateral speeds of the whole mechanical
string with special attention being paid to the following:

i) Take into account the influence of the stiffness of the bearing arrangement and the
foundation.
ii) Avoid any continuous running with insufficient damping close to lateral critical speeds (±
20%).

11 Other Electric and Electronics Devices

11.1 Circuit Breakers

11.1.1 General
Circuit breakers are to be constructed and tested to comply with IEC Publication 60947-2 or other
recognized standard. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests
will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS. Circuit breakers of the thermal
type are to be calibrated for an ambient-air temperature as provided in 4-6-1/17.

Note: Where thermal-type breakers are mounted within enclosures, it is pointed out that the temperature within
the enclosure may exceed the designated ambient-air temperature.
11.1.2 Mechanical Property
Arc-rupturing and main contacts of all open frame circuit breakers are to be self-cleaning.

11.1.3 Isolation
The electrical system is to be arranged so that portions may be isolated to remove circuit breakers
while maintaining services necessary for propulsion and safety of the vessel, or circuit breakers
are to be mounted or arranged in such a manner that the breaker may be removed from the front
without disconnecting the copper or cable connections or without de-energizing the supply to the
breaker.

11.3 Fuses
Fuses are to be constructed and tested to comply with IEC Publication 60269 or other recognized standard.
The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be
submitted upon request from ABS. All components of the fuse are to be resistant to heat, mechanical
stresses and corrosive influences which may occur in normal use.

11.5 Semiconductor Converters

11.5.1 General
The requirements in this subsection are applicable to static converters for essential and emergency
services using semiconductor rectifying elements such as diodes, reverse blocking triodes
thyristors, etc. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be
acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS. All semiconductor converters will be
accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor
after installation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 333
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

11.5.2 Cooling Arrangements

Semiconductor converters are preferably to be of a dry and air cooled type. Where semiconductor
converters are of a liquid-immersed type, a liquid over-temperature alarm and gas over-pressure
protection devices are to be provided. If provision is made for breathing, a dehydrator is to be
provided. Where arrangement for the forced cooling is provided, the circuit is to be designed that
power cannot be applied to, or retained, on converter stacks unless effective cooling is maintained.

11.5.3 Accessibility
Semiconductor converter stacks or semiconductor components are to be mounted in such a
manner that they can he removed from equipment without dismantling the complete unit.

11.5.4 Nameplate
A nameplate or identification is to be provided on the semiconductor converter and is to indicate
at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 4.

11.7 Cable Junction Boxes

11.7.1 General
The design and construction of the junction boxes are to be in compliance with 4-6-4/11.7.2 or
other recognized standard. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of
tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.

11.7.2 Design and Construction

Live parts are to be mounted on durable flame-retardant moisture-resistant material, of
permanently high dielectric strength and high resistance. The live parts are to be so arranged by
suitable spacing or shielding with flame-retardant insulating material, that short-circuit cannot
readily occur between conductors of different polarity or between conductors and earthed metal.
Junction boxes are to be made of flame-retardant material, junction boxes are to be clearly
identified defining their function and voltage.

13 Cables and Wires

13.1 Cable Construction

13.1.1 General (1 July 2017)
Electric cables are to have conductors, insulation and moisture-resistant jackets, in accordance
with IEC Publication 60092-350, 60092-352, 60092-353, 60092-354, 60092-360, 60092-370,
60092-376, or IEEE Std. 45. Other recognized marine standards of an equivalent or higher safety
level, will also be considered. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate
of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS. Network cables are to
comply with a recognized industry standard. Cables such as flexible cable, fiber-optic cable, etc.,
used for special purposes may be accepted provided they are manufactured and tested in
accordance with recognized standards accepted by ABS. Conductors are to be of copper and
stranded in all sizes. Conductors are not to be less than the following in cross sectional size:

● 1.0 mm2 (1,973.5 circ. mils) for power and lighting,

● 0.5 mm2 (986.8 circ. mils) for control cables,
● 0.5 mm2 (986.8 circ. mils) for essential or emergency signaling and communications cables
except for those assembled by the equipment manufacturer, and
● 0.35 mm2 (690.8 circ. mils) for telephone cables for non-essential communication services
except for those assembled by the equipment manufacturer.

See 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10 for current carrying capacity for insulated copper wires and cables.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 334
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

For electric cables in hazardous areas, the electric cable construction and the cable glands are to
achieve the appropriate seal, such that gas cannot migrate through the cable.

Note:

See clause 3.16 and clause 4.6 of IEC 60092-350 concerning the provision of an extruded impervious inner sheath
that will prevent the migration of gas through the cable.

13.1.2 Flame Retardant Property

13.1.2(a) Standards. All electric cables are to be at least of a flame retardant type complying with
the following:

● (2016) Depending on the intended installation. cables constructed to IEC Publication 60092
standards are to comply with the flammability criteria of IEC Publication 60332-3-22 or
60332-3-21, category A or A F/R, or
● Cables constructed to IEEE Std. 45 are to comply with the flammability criteria of that
standard, or
● (2016) Cables constructed to another recognized marine standard, where specially approved,
are to comply with the flammability criteria of IEC Publication 60332-3-22 or 60332-3-21,
Category A or A F/R (depending on the intended installation) or other acceptable standards.

Consideration will be given to the special types of cables such as radio frequency cable, which do
not comply with the above requirements.

13.1.2(b) Alternative Arrangement. Flame-retardant marine cables, including network cables,

which have not passed the above-mentioned bunched cable flammability criteria may be
considered, provided that the cable is treated with approved flame-retardant material or the
installation is provided with approved fire stop arrangements. Special consideration may be given
to the flame retardancy of special types of cables, such as radio frequency cables. When
specifically approved, bus duct may be used in lieu of cable.

13.1.3 Fire Resistant Property (2016)

Where electrical cables are required to be fire resistant, they are to comply with the requirements
of IEC Standard 60331-1 for cables greater than 20 mm overall in diameter, otherwise they are to
comply with the IEC Standard 60331-2 for cable diameters 20 mm or less. For special cables,
requirements in the following standards may be used:

● IEC Standard 60331-23: Procedures and requirements – Electric data cables

● IEC Standard 60331-25: Procedures and requirements – Optical fiber cables

Cables complying with alternative national standards suitable for use in a marine environment
may be considered. Fire resistant type cables are to be easily distinguishable. See also 4-6-3/3.29
and 4-6-3/5.17.

13.1.4 Insulation Material

All electrical cables for power, lighting, communication, control and electronic circuits are to have
insulation suitable for a conductor temperature of not less than 60°C (140°F). See 4-6-4/13.7
TABLE 9 for types of cable insulation.

13.1.5 Armor for Single-conductor Cables

The armor is to be nonmagnetic for single-conductor alternating-current cables.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 335
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

13.1.6 Fiber Optic Cables

Fiber optic cables are to be constructed and tested to a recognized fiber optic cable construction
standard acceptable to ABS. The requirements of flame retardancy for the electrical cables is
applicable to the fiber optic cables. The construction of the fiber optic cable which may pass
through or enter a hazardous area is to be such that escape of gases to a safe area is not possible
through the cable.

13.3 Portable and Flexing Electric Cables

Unless otherwise required in the Rules, cables for portable equipment and cables subject to flexing service
need not be armored.

13.5 Mineral-insulated Metal-sheathed Cable

Mineral-insulated cable provided with approved fittings for terminating and connecting to boxes, outlets
and other equipment may be used for any service up to 600 volts and may be used for feeders and branch
circuits in both exposed and concealed work, in dry or wet locations. The moisture-resisting jacket (sheath)
of mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable exposed to corrosive conditions is to be made of or protected by
materials suitable for those conditions.

13.7 Cable Connectors (1 July 2021)

Cable (wiring) connectors may be accepted in shipboard cabling systems. Other than normal (main source
of power) lighting, cable connectors shall not be used in shipboard cabling serving essential services.
Electrical connectors used within equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed according to
appropriate industry standards.

Cable connectors used in shipboard cabling systems are to be constructed of material as described in
4-6-1/11. Live parts within the connector are to be provided with suitable clearances and creepage
distances, or with shielding by flame retarding insulation material. Cable connectors are to have a locking
arrangement so that the connector is not easily disconnected during installation and under operating
condition. Cables within the connector are to be well supported so as not to put stress on the cable contacts.
Cable connectors are not to be used for high voltage cables having a rated voltage exceeding 1 kV. Cable
connectors are to be rated for the voltage, current, and short circuit current expected in the system at the
connection points.

In general, cable connector is to be type tested and at least Tier 2 level (PDA) approved (see 1-1-A2/1 and
1-1-A3/1/Tier 2 of the ABS Rules for Conditions of Classification - Light and High-Speed Craft (Part 1)),
unless it complies with a recognized standard. The type test is to contain at least the following tests.

● Electrical property tests for insulation resistance test, high voltage withstanding test, IP rating (see
4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 1);
● Flame retardant test as equivalent to the flame retardant cables;
● In case of power service, short circuit current capacity test to verify if the connector is capable of
withstanding for the short circuit current at the location where it is installed;
● Vibration test in 13.7/accordance with item 5 “Vibration” of 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 , and
● Salt mist test in accordance with item 10 “Salt Mist” of 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 , where the connector is
installed on open deck space.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 336
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

TABLE 1
Factory Test Schedule for Generators and Motors ≥ 100 kW (135 hp)
[See 4-6-4/3.3.1(a)]

AC generators AC motors DC machines

Tests Type test (1)
Routine Type test (1)
Routine Type test (1) Routine
test (2) test (2) test (2)

1 Visual inspection. x x x x x x

2 Insulation resistance x x x x x x
measurement.

3 Winding resistance x x x x x x
measurement.

4 Verification of voltage regulation x x(3)

system.

5 Rated load test and temperature x x x

rise measurement.

6 Overload/over-current test. x x(4) x x(4) x x(4)

7 Verification of steady short x

circuit condition. (5)

8 Over-speed test. x x x(6) x(6) x(6) x(6)

9 Dielectric strength test. x x x x x x

10 Running balance test. (7) x x x x x x

11 Verification of degree of x x x
protection.

12 Bearing check after test. x x x x x x

13 Air gap measurement. x x x x

14 Commutation check. x

Notes:

1 Type tests apply to prototype machines or to at least the first of a batch of machines.

2 Machines to be routine tested are to have reference to the machine of the same type that has passed a type test.
Reports of routine tested machines are to contain manufacturers' serial numbers of the type tested machines
and the test results.

3 Only functional test of voltage regulator system.

4 Applicable only to generators and motors ≥ 100 kW (135 hp) for essential services.

5 Verification at steady short circuit condition applies to synchronous generators only.

6 Where so specified and agreed upon between purchaser and manufacturer. Not required for squirrel cage
motors.

7 Static balance (machine rated 500 rpm or less) or dynamic balance (over 500 rpm) will be accepted in lieu of
the specified test on machines to be close-coupled to engines and supplied without shaft and/or bearings, or
with incomplete set of bearings.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 337
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

TABLE 2
Dielectric Strength Test for Rotating Machines [See 4-6-4/3.9]

Item Machine or Part Test Voltage (AC rms)

1 Insulated windings of rotated machines having rated 500 V + twice the rated voltage.
output less than 1 kVA, and of rated voltage less than
100 V with the exception of those in items 4 to 8.

2 Insulated windings of rotating machines having rated 1,000 V + twice the rated voltage with minimum of
output less than 10,000 kVA with the exception of 1,500 V (See Note 1).
those in items 1 and 4 to 8 (See Note 2).

3 (1999) Insulated windings of rotating machines 1,000 V + twice the rated voltage.
having rated output 10,000 kVA or more, and of rated
voltage (see Note 1) up to 24,000 V with the
exception of those in items 4 to 8 (see Note 2).

4 Separately-excited field windings of D.C. machines. 1,000 V + twice the maximum rated circuit voltage
with minimum of 1,500 V (See Note 1).

5 Field windings of synchronous generators and

synchronous motors.

a) Field windings of synchronous generators Ten times the rated excitation voltage with a
minimum of 1,500 V and a maximum of 3,500 V.

b) When the machine is intended to be started with the Ten times the rated excitation voltage with a
field winding short-circuited or connected across a minimum of 1,500 V and a maximum of 3,500 V.
resistance of value less than ten times the resistance of
winding.

c) When the machine will be started either with: 1,000 V + twice the maximum value of the voltage
–the field winding connected across resistance or with a minimum of 1,500 V
more than ten times the field winding resistance, or –between the terminals of the field winding,
–the field windings on open circuit or without a field or
dividing switch. –between the terminals of any section for a
sectionalized field winding,
which will be occurred under the specified starting
conditions (see Note 3).

6 Secondary (usually rotor) windings of induction

motors or synchronous induction motors if not
permanently short-circuited (e.g., if intended for
rheostatic starting)

a) For non-reversing motors or motors reversible from 1,000 V + twice the open-circuit standstill voltage as
standstill only. measured between slip-rings or secondary terminals
with rated voltage applied to the primary windings.

b) For motors to be reversed or braked by reversing the 1,000 V + four times the open-circuit standstill
primary supply while the motor is running. secondary voltage as defined in item 6.a. above.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 338
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Item Machine or Part Test Voltage (AC rms)

7 Exciters (except as listed below) As for windings to which they are connected. 1,000 V
Exception 1 —Exciters of synchronous motors + twice the rated exciter voltage with a minimum of
(including synchronous induction motors) if 1,500 V.
connected to earth or disconnected from the field
winding during starting
Exception 2 — Separately excited field windings of
exciters (see Item 4 above).

8 Assembled group of machines and apparatus. A repetition of the tests in items 1 to 7 above is to be
avoided if possible. But, if a test on an assembled
group of several pieces of new apparatus, each one is
made, the test voltage to be applied to such assembled
group is to be 80% of the lowest test voltage
appropriate for any part of the group (see Note 4).

Notes:

1 For two-phase windings having one terminal in common, the rated voltage for the purpose of calculating the
test voltage is to be taken as 1.4 times the voltage of each separate phase.

2 High-voltage tests on machines having graded insulation is to be subject to special consideration.

3 The voltage, which is occurred between the terminals of field windings or sections thereof under the specified
starting conditions, may be measured at any convenient reduced supply voltage. The voltage so measured is to
be increased in the ratio of the specified starting supply voltage to the test supply voltage.

4 For windings of one or more machines connected together electrically, the voltage to be considered is the
maximum voltage that occurs in relation to earth.

TABLE 3
Limits of Temperature Rise for Air-Cooled Rotating Machines
[See 4-6-4/3.11.1] (2015)

Ambient Temperature = 45°C

Item Part of Machine Temperature Limit of temperature rise, °C

No. Measuring for class of insulation
Method
A E B F H

A.C. windings of machines having rated output of Resistance 55 - 75 95 120

a) 5,000 kW (or kVA) or more
Embedded temp. 60 - 80 100 125
detector

A.C. windings of machines having rated output Resistance 55 70 75 100 120

1
b) above 200 kW (or kVA) but less than 5,000 kW (or
Embedded temp. 60 - 85 105 125
kVA)
detector.

A.C. windings of machines having rated outputs of Resistance 55 70 75 100 120

c)
200 kW (or kVA) or less(1)

Windings of armatures having commutators Thermometer 45 60 65 80 100

2
Resistance 55 70 75 100 120

Field windings of A.C. and D.C. machines having Thermometer 45 60 65 80 100

3 D.C. excitation, other than those in item 4
Resistance 55 70 75 100 120

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 339
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Item Part of Machine Temperature Limit of temperature rise, °C

No. Measuring for class of insulation
Method
A E B F H

Field winding of synchronous machines with Resistance - - 85 105 130

cylindrical rotors having D.C. excitation winding
a)
embedded in slots, except synchronous induction
motors

Stationary field windings of A.C. machines having Thermometer 45 60 65 80 100

more than one layer
Resistance 55 70 75 100 120
b)
Embedded temp. - - 85 105 130
4 detector.

Low resistance field winding of A.C. and D.C. Thermometer 55 70 75 95 120

c) machines and compensating windings of D.C.
Resistance 55 70 75 95 120
machines having more than one layer

Single-layer windings of A.C. and D.C. machines Thermometer 60 75 85 105 130

with exposed bare or varnished metal surfaces and
d) Resistance 60 75 85 105 130
single layer compensating windings of D.C.
machines (2)

5 Permanently short-circuited windings

The temperature rise of any parts is not to be
Magnetic cores and all structural components, detrimental to the insulating of that part or to any other
6 whether or not in direct contact with insulation part adjacent to it.
(excluding bearings)

The temperature rise of any parts is not to be

detrimental to the insulating of that part or to any other
part adjacent to it.
Commutators, slip-rings and their brushes and
7 Additionally, the temperature is not to exceed that at
brushing
which the combination of brush grade and
commutator/slip-ring materials can handle the current
over the entire operating range.

Notes

1 With application of the superposition test method to windings of machines rated 200 kW (or kVA) or less with
insulation classes A, E, B or F, the limits of temperature rise given for the resistance method may be increased
by 5°C.

2 Also includes multiple layer windings provided that the under layers are each in contact with the circulating
coolant.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 340
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

TABLE 4
Nameplates

a. Rotating Machines [See 4-6-4/3.13.9] b. Accumulator Battery [See 4-6-4/5.3.3]

The manufacturer's name The manufacturer's name
The manufacturer's serial number (or identification mark) The type designation
The year of manufacture The rated voltage
Type of Machine (Generator or motor, etc.) The ampere-hour rating at a specific rate of discharge
Degree of protection enclosures (by IP code) The specific gravity of the electrolyte
Class of rating or duty type (in the case of a lead-acid battery, the specific gravity when
The rated output the battery is fully charged).
The rated voltage c. Transformer [See 4-6-4/9.5.3]
The rated current and type of current (AC or DC) The manufacturer's name
The rated speed (rpm) or speed range The manufacturer's serial number (or identification mark)
The class of insulation or permissible temperature rise The year of manufacture
The ambient temperature The number of phases
Number of phase (for AC machines) The rated power
The rated frequency (for AC machines) The rated frequency
Power factor (for AC machines) The rated voltage in primary and secondary sides
Type of winding (for DC machines) The rated current in primary and secondary sides
Exciter voltage (for synchronous machines or The class of insulation or permissible temperature rise
DC machines with separate excitation) The ambient temperature
Exciter current at rating (for synchronous machines or DC d. Semiconductor Converter [See 4-6-4/11.5.4]
machines with separate excitation) The manufacturer's name
Open-circuit voltage between slip-rings and the slip-ring The identification number of the equipment
current for rated conditions (for wounded-rotor induction
machines)

TABLE 5
Factory Testing Schedule for Switchboards, Chargers, Motor Control Centers,
and
Controllers [See 4-6-4/7.3.1] (2016)

1) Insulation resistance measurements in accordance with 4-6-4/7.5.

2) Dielectric strength test in accordance with 4-6-4/7.7 and the Table below.
3) (1998) Protective device tripping test, such as overcurrent tripping, emergency tripping, preferential tripping, etc.
4) Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and, if necessary, electrical operation test.
Standard Test Voltage for Dielectric Strength Test

Dielectric Test
Rated Insulation Voltage Voltage AC rms

Up to and including 12 V 250 V

over 12 V to 60 V inclusive 500 V

over 60 V to 300 V inclusive 2000 V

over 300 V to 690 V inclusive 2500 V

over 690 V to 800 V inclusive 3000 V

over 800 V to 1000 V inclusive 3500 V

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 341
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Dielectric Test
Rated Insulation Voltage Voltage AC rms

over 1000 V to 1500 V inclusive* 3500 V

Note: *For Direct-current (DC) only

TABLE 6
Clearance and Creepage Distance for Switchboards, Distribution Boards,
Chargers, Motor
Control Centers and Controllers (1) [See 4-6-4/7.11.6] (2018)

Rated insulation voltage (V) Minimum clearances mm (in) Minimum creepage distances mm (in)

Up to 250 15 (19/32) 20 (25/32)

From 251 to 690 20 (25/32) 25 (1)

(2)
Above 690 25 (1) 35 (13/8)

Notes:

1 The values in this table apply to clearances and creepage distances between live parts as well as between live
parts and exposed conductive parts, including earthing.

2 For 1 kV to 15 kV systems, see 4-6-5/1.1.3.

TABLE 7
Equipment and Instrumentation for Switchboard [See 4-6-4/7.15.4] (2018)

Instrumentation and
Equipment Alternating-current (AC) Switchboard Direct-current (DC) Switchboard

1. Pilot Lamp A pilot lamp for each generator connected A pilot lamp for each generator connected
between generator and circuit breaker. (3) between generator and circuit breaker.

2. Generator A generator switch or disconnecting links in A generator switch, or disconnecting links, in

Disconnect series with the generator circuit breaker which series with the circuit breaker which will open
is to disconnect completely all leads of the positive, negative, neutral and equalizer leads,
generator and the circuit breaker from the buses except that for 3-wire generators equalizer poles
except the earth lead. (1) may be provided on the circuit breaker. For 3-
wire generators the circuit breakers are to
protect against a short circuit on the equalizer
buses. (1)

3. Field Rheostat A field rheostat for each generator and each A field rheostat for each generator. (2)
exciter. (2)

4. Insulation A means for continuously monitoring the A means for continuously monitoring the
Monitor and electrical insulation level to earth, and an electrical insulation level to earth, and an
Alarm audible or visual alarm for abnormally low audible or visual alarm for abnormally low
insulation values. (3) (5) insulation values. For 3-wire generators see
4-6-5/5.3. (3)

5. Ammeter An ammeter for each generator with a selector An ammeter for each 2-wire generator. For each
switch to read the current of each phase. (3) 3-wire generator an ammeter for each positive
and negative lead and a center-zero ammeter in
the earth connection at the generator
switchboard. Ammeters are to be so located in
the circuit as to indicate total generator current.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 342
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Instrumentation and
Equipment Alternating-current (AC) Switchboard Direct-current (DC) Switchboard

6. Voltmeter A voltmeter for each generator, with a selector A voltmeter for each generator with voltmeter
switch to each phase of the generator and to one switch for connecting the voltmeter to indicate
phase of the bus. (3) generator voltage and bus voltage. For each 3-
wire generator, a voltmeter with voltmeter
switch for connecting the voltmeter to indicate
generator voltage, positive to negative, positive
to neutral, and neutral to negative. Where
permanent provisions for shore connections are
fitted, one voltmeter switch to provide also for
reading shore-connection voltage, positive to
negative.

7. Space Heater Where electric heaters are provided for Where electric heaters are provided for
Pilot Lamp generators, a heater pilot lamp is to be fitted for generators, a heater pilot lamp is to be fitted for
each generator. each generator.

8. Synchroscope or A synchroscope or synchronizing lamps with Not applicable.

Lamps selector switch for paralleling in any
combination. (3)

9. Prime mover Control for prime mover speed for paralleling. Not applicable.
(3)
Speed Control

10. Wattmeter Where generators are arranged for parallel Not applicable.
operation, an indicating wattmeter is to be fitted
for each generator. (3)

11. Frequency A frequency meter with selector switch to Not applicable.

Meter connect to any generator.(3)

12. Field Switch A double-pole field switch with discharge clips Not applicable.
and resistor for each generator. (2)

13. Voltage A voltage regulator. (3) Not applicable.

Regulator

14. Stator Winding For alternating current propulsion generator For direct current propulsion generator above
Temperature above 500 kW, a stator winding temperature 500 kW, an interpole winding temperature
Indicator indicator is to be fitted for each generator indicator is to be fitted for each generator
control panel. (3, 4) control panel. See (3, 4)

Notes:

1 The switch or links may be omitted when draw-out or plug-in mounted generator breakers are furnished.

2 For generators with variable voltage exciters or rotary amplifier exciters, each controlled by voltage-regulator
unit acting on the exciter field, the field switch, the discharge resistor and generator field rheostat may be
omitted.

3 (2005) Where vessels have centralized control systems in accordance with Part 4, Chapter 7 and the generators
can be paralleled from the centralized control station, and the switchboard is located in the centralized control
station, this equipment may be mounted on the control console. See 4-6-4/7.15.4.

4 For high voltage systems, see also 4-6-5/1.11.1(c).

5 (2018). For high voltage systems, see 4-6-5/1.3.5.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 343
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

TABLE 8
Temperature Rise for Transformers (1, 2) (2014)

Insulation Class Average Winding-temperature Rise Limits at Rated

Current, °C (°F)

A (105) 55 (99)

E (120) 70 (126)

B (130) 75 (135)

F (155) 95 (171)

H (180) 120 (216)

200 130 (234)

220 145 (261)

Notes:

1 Metallic parts in contact with or adjacent to insulation are not to attain a temperature in excess of that allowed
for the hottest-spot copper temperature adjacent to that insulation.

2 (2014) Temperature rises are based on an ambient temperature of 45°C (113°F). See 4-6-4/9.3.

TABLE 9
Types of Cable Insulation [See 4-6-4/13.1.4] (2013)

Insulation Type Designation Insulation Materials Maximum Conductor Temperature

V75, PVC Polyvinyl Chloride – Heat resisting 75°C (167°F) *

R85, XLPE Cross-linked Polyethylene 85°C (185°F) *

E85, EPR Ethylene Propylene Rubber 85°C (185°F) *

R90, XLPE Cross-linked Polyethylene 90°C (194°F) *

E90, EPR Ethylene Propylene Rubber 90°C (194°F) *

M95 Mineral (MI) 95°C (203°F) *

S95 Silicone Rubber 95°C (203°F) *

* A maximum conductor temperature of 250°C (482°F) is permissible for special applications and standard end fittings
may be used provided the temperature does not exceed 85°C (185°F) at the end of fittings. However, when the
temperature at the end of the fittings is higher than 85°C (185°F), special consideration will be given to an appropriate
end fitting.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 344
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

TABLE 10
Maximum Current Carrying Capacity for insulated copper wires and Cables
(2014)

Conductor Maximum Current in Amperes (see 4-6-4/13.1.1)

Size 45°C (113°F) Ambient; 750 V and Less, AC or DC; see
Notes

mm2 103 1-core 2-core 3- or 4-core

circ
V75 R85 R90 M95 V75 R85 R90 M95 V75 R85 R90 M95
mils
XLPE XLPE S95 XLPE XLPE S95 XLPE XLPE S95
E85 E90 E85 E90 E85 E90
EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR

1.0 13 16 20 11 14 17 9 11 14

1.25 15 18 23 13 15 20 11 13 16

1.5 17 21 23 26 14 18 20 22 12 15 16 18

4.11 21 25 32 18 21 27 15 18 22

2.5 24 28 30 32 20 24 26 27 17 20 21 22

6.53 28 34 38 24 29 32 20 24 27

4 32 38 40 43 27 32 34 37 22 27 28 30

10.4 38 45 51 32 38 43 27 32 36

6 41 49 52 55 35 42 44 47 29 34 36 39

16.5 51 60 68 43 51 58 36 42 48

10 57 67 72 76 48 57 61 65 40 47 50 53

20.8 59 70 78 50 60 66 41 49 55

26.3 68 81 91 58 69 77 48 57 64

16 76 91 96 102 65 77 82 87 53 64 67 71

33.1 79 93 105 67 79 89 55 65 74

41.7 91 108 121 77 92 103 64 76 76 85

25 101 120 127 135 86 102 108 115 71 84 89 95

52.6 105 124 140 89 105 119 74 87 98

66.4 121 144 162 103 122 138 85 101 113

35 125 148 157 166 106 126 133 141 88 104 110 116

83.7 140 166 187 119 141 159 98 116 131

50 156 184 196 208 133 156 167 177 109 129 137 146

106 163 193 217 139 164 184 114 135 152

133 188 222 250 160 189 213 132 155 175

70 192 228 242 256 163 194 206 218 134 160 169 179

168 217 257 289 184 218 246 152 180 202

95 232 276 293 310 197 235 249 264 162 193 205 217

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 345
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

Conductor Maximum Current in Amperes (see 4-6-4/13.1.1)

Size 45°C (113°F) Ambient; 750 V and Less, AC or DC; see
Notes

mm2 103 1-core 2-core 3- or 4-core

circ
V75 R85 R90 M95 V75 R85 R90 M95 V75 R85 R90 M95
mils
XLPE XLPE S95 XLPE XLPE S95 XLPE XLPE S95
E85 E90 E85 E90 E85 E90
EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR

212 251 297 335 213 252 285 176 208 235

120 269 319 339 359 229 271 288 305 188 223 237 251

250 278 330 371 236 281 315 195 231 260

150 309 367 389 412 263 312 331 350 216 257 272 288

300 312 370 416 265 315 354 218 259 291

350 343 407 458 292 346 389 240 285 321

185 353 418 444 470 300 355 377 400 247 293 311 329

400 373 442 498 317 376 423 261 309 349

450 402 476 536 342 405 456 281 333 375

240 415 492 522 553 353 418 444 470 291 344 365 387

500 429 509 572 365 433 486 300 356 400

550 455 540 607 387 459 516 319 379 425

300 477 565 601 636 405 480 511 541 334 396 421 445

600 481 570 641 409 485 545 337 399 449

650 506 599 674 430 509 573 354 419 472

700 529 628 706 450 534 600 370 440 494

750 553 655 737 470 557 626 387 459 516

400 571 677 690 761 485 575 587 647 400 474 483 533

800 576 682 767 490 580 652 403 477 540

850 598 709 797 508 603 677 419 496 558

900 620 734 826 527 624 702 434 514 578

950 641 760 854 545 646 726 449 532 598

500 656 778 780 875 558 661 663 744 459 545 546 613

1000 662 784 882 563 666 750 463 549 617

600 736 872 981 626 741 834 515 610 687

625 755 894 1006 642 760 855 529 626 704

Notes:

1 The values given above have been calculated for an ambient of 45°C (113°F) and assume that a conductor
temperature equal to the maximum rated temperature of the insulation is reached and maintained continuously
in the case of a group of four cables bunched together and laid in free air.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 346
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4

2 The current rating values given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10 (and those derived therefrom) may be considered
applicable, without correction factors, for cables double banked on cable trays, in cable conduits or cable
pipes, except as noted in Note 3.

3 For bunched cables, see 4-6-3/5.11.1.

4 These current ratings are applicable for both armored and unarmored cables.

5 If ambient temperature differs from 45°C (113°F), the values in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10 are to be multiplied by
the following factors.

Maximum Ambient Correction Factor

Conductor
40°C (104°F) 50°C (122°F) 55°C (131°F) 60°C (140°F) 65°C (149°F) 70°C (158°F)
Temperature

75°C (167°F) 1.08 0.91 0.82 0.71 0.58 —

85°C (185°F) 1.06 0.94 0.87 0.79 0.71 0.61

90°C (194°F) 1.05 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.74 0.67

95°C (203°F) 1.05 0.95 0.89 0.84 0.77 0.71

6 Where the number of conductors in a cable exceeds 4, as in control cables, the maximum current carrying
capacity of each conductor is to be reduced as in the following table:

No. of Conductors % of 3–4/C TYPE Values in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10

5–6 80

7–24 70

25–42 60

43 and above 50

7 When a mineral-insulated cable is installed in such a location that its copper sheath is liable to be touched
when in service, the current rating is to be multiplied by the correction factor 0.80 in order that the sheath
temperature does not exceed 70°C (158°F).

8 Cables being accepted based on approved alternate standard may have current carrying capacity of that
standard provided the cables are in full compliance with that standard.

TABLE 11
Additional Services Requiring Electrical Equipment to be Designed,
Constructed and Tested to the Requirements in 4-6-4
[See 4-6-4/1, 4-6-4/3.1.1, 4-6-4/3.3.1, 4-6-4/7.1.1 and 4-6-4/7.3.1]

(a) Equipment necessary for specific class notations (Such as refrigerated cargo notations, dynamic positioning
systems, etc.). See Note.

(b) Cargo Pump Motors (oil carriers, gas carriers, chemical carriers, liquefied gas carriers, etc.)

(c) Motors for hydraulic power unit for hydraulically driven cargo pump motors

(d) High duty gas compressors on liquefied gas carriers

Note: See 6-2-1/7 of the Marine Vessel Rules for refrigerated cargo notations and the ABS Guide for Dynamic
Positioning Systems for dynamic positioning notations.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 347
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 5
Specialized Installations

1 High Voltage Systems

1.1 General
1.1.1 Application
The following requirements in this Subsection are applicable to AC systems with nominal voltage
(phase to phase) exceeding 1 kV. Unless stated otherwise, high voltage equipment and systems are
to comply with the other parts in Part 4, Chapter 6 for low voltage equipment and systems as well.

1.1.2 Standard Voltages

The nominal standard voltage is not to exceed 15 kV. A higher voltage may be considered for
special application.

1.1.3 Air Clearance and Creepage Distance (1 July 2016 )

1.1.3(a) Air Clearance. Phase-to-phase air clearances and phase-to-earth air clearances between
non-insulated parts are to be not less than the minimum as specified below.

Nominal Voltage Minimum Air Clearance

in kV in mm (in.)

3 – 3.3 55 (2.2)

6 – 6.6 90 (3.6)

10 – 11 120 (4.8)

15 160 (6.3)

Where intermediate values of nominal voltages are accepted, the next higher air clearance is to be
observed.

1.1.3(b) Reduction. Alternatively, reduced clearance distances may be used provided:

i) The equipment is not installed in ‘Machinery Spaces of Category A’ or in areas affected

by a Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing
System.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 348
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

ii) The equipment is subject to an impulse voltage test with test voltage values shown in
Table below. Where intermediate values of rated operational voltage are used, the next
higher rated impulse withstand test voltage is to be used. The impulse voltage test reports
are to be submitted to ABS for review.

Rated Voltage Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage

kV kV (peak value)

3.6 40

7.2 60

12 75

15 95

1.1.3(c) Insulating Material. Any insulating material that is used to cover live parts of equipment
used to comply with clearance distance requirements are to be suitable for the application. The
equipment manufacturer is to submit documentation which demonstrates the suitability of such
insulation material.

1.1.3(d) Creepage Distances (1 July 2016). Creepage distances between live parts and between
live parts and earthed metal parts are to be in accordance with IEC 60092-503 for the nominal
voltage of the system, the nature of the insulation material, and the transient overvoltage
developed by switch and fault conditions.

i) The minimum creepage distances for main switchboards and generators are given in the
Table below:
Nominal Minimum Creepage Distance for Proof Tracking Index
Voltage mm (in.)
V
300 V 375 V 500 V > 600 V

1000 - 1100 26 (1.02)(1) 24 (0.94)(1) 22 (0.87)(1) 20 (0.79)(1)

< 3300 63 (2.48) 59 (2.32) 53 (2.09) 48 (1.89)

< 6600 113 (4.45) 108 (4.25) 99 (3.9) 90 (3.54)

(2)
≤ 11000 183 (7.20) 175 (6.89) 162 (6.38) 150 (5.91)

Notes:

1 A distance of 35 mm is required for busbars and other bare conductors in main

switchboards.

2 Creepage distances for equipment with nominal voltage above 11 kV shall be subject to
consideration.

ii) The minimum creepage distances for equipment other than main switchboards and
generators are given in the Table below:

Nominal Minimum Creepage Distance for Proof Tracking Index

Voltage mm (in.)
V
300 V 375 V 500 V > 600 V

1000 - 1100 18 (0.71) 17 (0.67) 15 (0.59) 14 (0.55)

< 3300 42 (1.65) 41 (1.61) 38 (1.50) 26 (1.02)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 349
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

Nominal Minimum Creepage Distance for Proof Tracking Index

Voltage mm (in.)
V
300 V 375 V 500 V > 600 V

< 6600 83 (3.27) 80 (3.15) 75 (2.95) 70 (2.76)

≤ 11000* 146 (5.75) 140 (5.51) 130 (5.11) 120 (4.72)

*Note: Creepage distances for equipment with nominal voltage above 11 kV shall be subject to
consideration.

1.3 System Design

1.3.1 Selective Coordination
Selective coordination is to be in accordance with 4-6-2/9.1.5, regardless of the system neutral
earthing arrangement.

1.3.2 Earthed Neutral Systems

1.3.2(a) Neutral earthing. The current in the earth fault condition is to be not in excess of full load
current of the largest generator on the switchboard or relevant switchboard section and in no case
less than three times the minimum current required for operation of any device in the earth fault
condition.

At least one source neutral to ground connection is to be available whenever the system is in the
energized mode.

1.3.2(b) Equipment. Electrical equipment in directly earthed neutral or other neutral earthed
systems is to be able to withstand the current due to a single phase fault against earth for a period
necessary to trip the protection device.

1.3.3 Neutral Disconnection

Each generator neutral is to be provided with means for disconnection.

1.3.4 Hull Connection of Earthing Impedance

All earthing impedances are to be connected to the hull. The connection to the hull is to be so
arranged that any circulating currents in the earth connections will not interfere with radio, radar,
communication and control equipment circuits. In systems with neutral earthed, connection of the
neutral to the hull is to be provided for each generator switchboard section.

1.3.5 Earth Fault Detection and Indication (2018)

i) In unearthed or high impedance earthed systems an earth fault is to be indicated by visual
and audible means at the centralized control station.
ii) In low impedance or direct earthed systems, provision is to be made to automatically
disconnect the faulty circuits. Audible and visual indication is to be provided at the
centralized control station to indicate that a ground fault had occurred and has been
cleared by ground fault protection. An audible alarm is to be provided if the ground fault
was not successfully cleared.
iii) In high impedance earthed systems where outgoing feeders will not be isolated in case of
an earth fault, the insulation of the equipment is to be designed for the phase to phase
voltage.
1.3.6 Number and Capacity of Transformers (2014)
Requirements for the number and capacity of transformers are given in 4-6-2/7.1.6(a).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 350
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

For transformers with a high voltage winding over 1000 V, the following would not be accepted as
complying with the above requirement:

i) The provision of a spare single phase transformer to substitute a failed transformer.

ii) The operation of two single phase transformers in an open delta (V-V) connection.

1.5 Circuit Breakers and Switches - Auxiliary Circuit Power Supply Systems
1.5.1 Source and Capacity of Power Supply
Where electrical energy or mechanical energy is required for the operation of circuit breakers and
switches, a means of storing such energy is to be provided with a capacity at least sufficient for
two on/off operation cycles of all the components. However, the tripping due to overload or short-
circuit, and under-voltage is to be independent of any stored electrical energy sources. This does
not preclude the use of stored energy for shunt tripping provided alarms are activated upon loss of
continuity in the release circuits and power supply failures. The stored energy may be supplied
from within the circuit in which the circuit breakers or switches are located.

1.5.2 Number of External Sources of Stored Energy

Where the stored energy is supplied from a source external to the circuit, such supply is to be from
at least two sources so arranged that a failure or loss of one source will not cause the loss of more
than one set of generators and/or essential services. Where it will be necessary to have the source
of supply available for dead craft startup, the source of supply is to be provided from the
emergency source of electrical power.

1.7 Circuit Protection

1.7.1 Protection of Generator
Protection against phase-to-phase fault in the cables connecting the generators to the switchboard
and against inter-winding faults within the generator is to be provided. This is to trip the generator
circuit breaker and automatically de-excite the generator. In distribution systems with a low
impedance earthed neutral, phase to earth faults are to be likewise treated.

1.7.2 Protection of Power Transformers (2014)

Power transformers are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection. Each high-
voltage transformer intended to supply power to the low-voltage ship service switchboard is to be
protected in accordance with 4-6-2/9.15. In addition, the following means for protecting the
transformers or the electric distribution system are to be provided:

1.7.2(a) Coordinated Trips of Protective Devices. Discriminative tripping is to be provided for the
following. See 4-6-2/9.1.5.

i) Between the primary side protective device of the transformer and the feeder protective
devices on the low-voltage ship service switchboard, or
ii) Between the secondary side protective device of the transformer, if fitted, and the feeder
protective devices on the low-voltage ship service switchboard.

1.7.2(b) Load Shedding Arrangement. Where the power is supplied through a single set of three-
phase transformers to a low-voltage ship service switchboard, automatic load shedding
arrangements are to be provided when the total load connected to the low voltage ship service
switchboard exceeds the rated capacity of the transformer. See 4-6-2/1.7 and 4-6-2/9.3.3.

1.7.2(c) Protection from Electrical Disturbance. Means or arrangements are to be provided for
protecting the transformers from voltage transients generated within the system due to circuit
conditions, such as high-frequency current interruption and current suppression (chopping) as the
result of switching, vacuum cartridge circuit breaker operation or thyristor-switching.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 351
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

An analysis or data for the estimated voltage transients is to be submitted to show that the
insulation of the transformer is capable of withstanding the estimated voltage transients. See
4-6-5/1.11.3(b).

1.7.2(d) Protection from Earth-faults. Where a Y-neutral of three-phase transformer windings is

earthed, means for detecting an earth fault are to be provided. The detection of the earth fault is to
activate an alarm at the manned control station or to automatically disconnect the transformer
from the high-voltage power distribution network.

1.7.2(e) Transformers Arranged in Parallel (2014). Refer to 4-6-2/9.15.2 for requirements.

1.7.3 Voltage Transformers for Control and Instrumentation

Voltage transformers are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection on the
secondary side.

1.7.4 Fuses
Fuses are not to be used for overload protection.

1.7.5 Over Voltage Protection

Lower voltage systems supplied through transformers from high voltage systems are to be
protected against overvoltages. This may be achieved by:

i) Direct earthing of the lower voltage system,

ii) Appropriate neutral voltage limiters, or
iii) Earthed screen between primary and secondary winding of transformers

1.9 Equipment Installation and Arrangement

1.9.1 Degree of Protection
The degree of equipment protection is to be in accordance with 4-6-5/1 TABLE 1.

1.9.2 Protective Arrangements

1.9.2(a) Interlocking Arrangements. Where high-voltage equipment is not contained in an
enclosure but a room forms the enclosure of the equipment, the access doors are to be so
interlocked that they cannot be opened until the supply is isolated and the equipment earthed
down.

1.9.2(b) Warning Plate (1 July 2016). At the entrance of such spaces, a suitable marking is to be
placed which indicates danger of high-voltage and the maximum voltage inside the space. For
high-voltage electrical equipment installed outside these spaces, a similar marking is to be
provided. An adequate, unobstructed working space is to be left in the vicinity of high voltage
equipment for preventing potential severe injuries to personnel performing maintenance activities.
In addition, the clearance between the switchboard and the ceiling/deckhead above is to meet the
requirements of the Internal Arc Classification according to IEC 62271-200.

1.9.2(c) Exposure of HV Equipment to Damaging Environments (2014). Consideration should be

given to designing the arrangement of the installation to avoid exposure of high voltage equipment
to contaminants, such as oil or dust, as might be found in machinery spaces or close to ventilation
air inlets to the space, or to water spray from water-mist systems and local fire hose connections.

1.9.3 Cables
1.9.3(a) Runs of Cables.
In accommodation spaces, high voltage cables are to be run in enclosed cable transit systems.

1.9.3(b) Segregation.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 352
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

High voltage cables of different voltage ratings are not to be installed in the same cable bunch,
duct, pipe or box. Where high voltage cables of different voltage ratings are installed on the same
cable tray, the air clearance between cables is not to be less than the minimum air clearance for the
higher voltage side in 4-6-5/1.1.3(a). However, high voltage cables are not to be installed on the
same cable tray for the cables operating at the nominal system voltage of 1 kV or less.

Higher voltage equipment is not to be combined with lower voltage equipment in the same
enclosure, unless segregation or other suitable measures are taken to ensure safe access to lower
voltage equipment

1.9.3(c) Installation Arrangements.

High voltage cables are to be installed on cable trays or equivalent when they are provided with a
continuous metallic sheath or armor which is effectively bonded to earth. Otherwise, they are to be
installed for their entire length in metallic casings effectively bonded to earth.

1.9.3(d) Termination and Splices (2014).

Terminations in all conductors of high voltage cables are to be, as far as practicable, effectively
covered with suitable insulating material. In terminal boxes, if conductors are not insulated, phases
are to be separated from earth and from each other by substantial barriers of suitable insulating
materials. High voltage cables of the radial field type (i.e., having a conductive layer to control the
electric field within the insulation) are to have terminations which provide electric stress control.

Terminations are to be of a type compatible with the insulation and jacket material of the cable
and are to be provided with means to ground all metallic shielding components (i.e., tapes, wires,
etc.).

Splices and joints are not permitted in propulsion cables. For purposes of this Rule, propulsion
cables are those cables whose service is related only to propulsion.

1.9.3(e) Cable Rating. (2019)

The rated phase to earth voltage (Uo) of high voltage cables shall not be less than shown in the
Table below:

Nominal System Voltage Highest System Voltage Minimum Rated Voltage of Cable (Uo /U )
(Un) (Um) (kV)
(kV) (kV)
Systems with Automatic Systems without
Disconnection Upon Automatic Disconnection
Detection of an Earth Upon Detection of an
Fault Earth Fault

3.0/3.3 3.6 1.8/3.0 3.6/6.0

6.0/6.6 7.2 3.6/6.0 6.0/10.0

10.0/11.0 12.0 6.0/10.0 8.7/15.0

15.0/16.5 17.5 8.7/15.0 12.0/20.0

20.0/22.0 24.0 12.0/20.0 18.0/30.0

30.0/33.0 36.0 18.0/30.0 ---

Notes:
1 Nominal System Voltage (Un) in 50 Hz and 60 Hz.

2 Cables being accepted based on approved alternate standard may have voltage ratings of that standard
provided the cables are in full compliance with that standard.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 353
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

1.9.3(f) Cable Current Carrying Capacities. (2019)

The maximum current carrying capacity of high voltage cables is to be in accordance with
4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 10.

1.9.3(g) Marking.
High voltage cables are to be readily identifiable by suitable marking.

1.9.3(h) Cable Test after Installation (1 July 2016).

A voltage withstand test is to be carried out on each completed cable and its accessories before a
new high voltage installation, including additions to an existing installation, is put into service.

An insulation resistance test is to be carried out prior to the voltage withstand test being
conducted.

For cables with rated voltage(Uo /U) above 1.8/3 kV (Um= 3.6 kV) an AC voltage withstand test
may be carried out upon advice from high voltage cable manufacturer. One of the following test
methods to be used:

i) An AC test voltage for 5 min with the phase‐to‐phase voltage of the system applied
between the conductor and the metallic screen/sheath.
ii) An AC voltage test for 24 h with the normal operating voltage of the system.
iii) A DC test voltage equal to 4Uomay be applied for 15 minutes.

For cables with rated voltage (Uo /U) up to 1.8/3 kV (Um= 3.6 kV), a DC voltage equal to 4Uo
shall be applied for 15 minutes.

After completion of the test, the conductors are to be connected to earth for a sufficient period in
order to remove any trapped electric charge.

The insulation resistance test is then repeated.

The above tests are for newly installed cables. If due to repairs or modifications, cables which
have been in use are to be tested, lower voltages and shorter durations should be considered.

1.9.4 High Voltage Shore Connection (2014)

Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity at high voltage from onshore, and
designed to allow the shipboard generators to be shut down while in port, the requirements given
in Part 6, Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel Rules.

1.11 Machinery and Equipment

1.11.1 Rotating Machines
1.11.1(a) Protection (2014). Refer to 4-6-5/1 TABLE 1 for ingress protection (IP) requirements.

1.11.1(b) Windings . Generator stator windings are to have all phase ends brought out for the
installation of the differential protection.

1.11.1(c) Temperature Detectors. Rotating machines are to be provided with temperature detectors
in their stator windings to actuate a visual and audible alarm in a normally attended position
whenever the temperature exceeds the permissible limit. If embedded temperature detectors are
used, means are to be provided to protect the circuit against over-voltage.

1.11.1(d) Space Heater. Effective means are to be provided to prevent the accumulation of
moisture and condensation within the machines when they are idle.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 354
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

1.11.1(e) Tests (2014). Each design of HV generator and motor is to be assessed by testing in
accordance with the "type tests" schedule indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 1. Each subsequent
production unit of and accepted design is to be tested in accordance with the "routine tests"
schedule also indicated in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 1.

i) Inter-turn Insulation Test. In addition to the tests normally required for rotating
machinery, a high frequency, high voltage test, in accordance with IEC Publication
60034-15, is to be carried out on the individual coils in order to demonstrate a satisfactory
withstand level of the inter-turn insulation to steep fronted switching surges.
ii) Immediately after the high voltage test the insulation resistance is to be measured using a
direct current insulation test meter between:

a) All current carrying parts connected together and earth

b) All current carrying parts of different polarity or phase where both the ends of
each polarity or phase are individually accessible.

The minimum values of test voltage and corresponding insulation resistance are
given in the table below. The insulation resistance is to be measured close to the
operating temperature. If this is not possible then an approved method of
calculation is to be used.

Rated Voltage (Un) Minimum Test Voltage Minimum Insulation

(V) (V) Resistance
(MΩ)

1000 < Un ≤ 7200 1000 Un /1000 + 1

7200 < Un ≤ 15000 5000 Un /1000 + 1

1.11.2 Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies (2014)

Switchgear and control gear assemblies are to be constructed according to the IEC Publication
62271-200 and the following additional requirements:

1.11.2(a) Mechanical Construction and Configuration (2016).

i) Switchgear is to be of metal-enclosed type in accordance with IEC Publication 62271-200

or of the insulation-enclosed type in accordance with IEC Publication 62271-201.
ii) Refer to 4-6-4/7.15.2 for requirements for the division of main bus bars.
1.11.2(b) Clearance and Creepage Distances.
For clearance and creepage distances, see 4-6-5/1.1.3.

1.11.2(c) Locking Facilities

Withdrawable circuit breakers and switches are to be provided with mechanical locking facilities
in both service and disconnected positions. For maintenance purposes, key locking of
withdrawable circuit breakers, switches and fixed disconnectors is to be possible. Withdrawable
circuit breakers, when in the service position, are to have no relative motion between fixed and
moving parts.

1.11.2(d) Shutters (1 July 2016)

The fixed contacts of withdrawable circuit breakers and switches are to be so arranged that in the
withdrawn position, the live contacts of the bus bars are automatically covered. Shutters are to be
clearly marked for incoming and outgoing circuits. This may be achieved with the use of colors or
labels.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 355
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

1.11.2(e) Earthing and Short-circuiting Facilities

For maintenance purposes, an adequate number of earthing and short circuiting facilities are to be
provided to enable equipment and cables to be earthed or short-circuited to earth before being
worked upon.

1.11.2(f) Arc Flash and Associated Installation Requirements (1 July 2016 ).

i) Internal Arc Classification (IAC). Switchgear and control gear assemblies are to be
Internal Arc Classified (IAC). Where switchgear and control gear are accessible by
authorized personnel only accessibility Type A is sufficient (IEC 62271-200; Annex AA;
AA 2.2). Accessibility Type B is required if accessible by non-authorized personnel.
Installation and location of the switchgear and control gear is to correspond with its
internal arc classification and classified sides (F, L and R).
ii) Calculations, in accordance with the applicable parts of Standard IEEE 1584 or other
recognized standard, are to be made to establish;

● The maximum current that can flow in the case of an arc fault
● The maximum time and current that could flow if arc protection techniques are
adopted.
● The distance, from the location of the arc flash, at which the arc flash energy would
be 1.2 calories per cm2 if the enclosure is open
iii) In addition to the marking required by the equipment design standard, arc flash data
consistent with the Design Operating Philosophy and the required PPE is also to be
indicated at each location where work on the HV equipment could be conducted.
1.11.2(g) Tests (2014)
A power frequency voltage test is to be carried out on high voltage switchgear and control-gear
assemblies with test voltages shown in the Table below. The test procedure is to be in accordance
with IEC Publication 62271-200.

Rated Voltage Rated Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (kV)

(kV)

3.6 10

7.2 20

12 28

15 38

Where intermediate values of switchgear rated voltages are used, the next higher power frequency
withstand test voltage is to be used.

1.11.3 Transformers
1.11.3(a) Application. (1 July 2016 ) Provisions of 4-6-5/1.11.3 are applicable to power
transformers for essential services. See also 4-6-4/9. Items 4-6-5/1.11.3(c) and 4-6-5/1.11.3(d) are
applicable to transformers of the dry type only. These requirements are not applicable to
transformers intended intended for the following services:

● Instrument transformers.
● Transformers for static converters.
● Starting transformers.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 356
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

Dry type transformers are to comply with the applicable Parts of the IEC Publication 60076-11.
Liquid filled transformers are to comply with the applicable Parts of the IEC 60076 Series. Oil
immersed transformers are to be provided with the following alarms and protections:

● liquid level (Low) – alarm

● liquid temperature (High) – alarm
● liquid level (Low) – trip or load reduction
● liquid temperature (High) – trip or load reduction
● gas pressure relay (High) – trip

1.11.3(b) Plans. In addition to the details required in 4-6-4/9, the applicable standard of
construction and the rated withstanding voltage of the insulation are also to be submitted for
review.

1.11.3(c) Enclosure. Transformers are to have a degree of protection in accordance with 4-6-1/21.3
TABLE 2, but not less than IP23. However, when installed in spaces accessible to unqualified
personnel, the degree of protection is to be increased to IP44. For transformers not contained in
enclosures, see 4-6-5/1.9.1.

1.11.3(d) Space heater. Effective means to prevent accumulation of moisture and condensation
within the transformers (when de-energized) is to be provided.

1.11.3(e) Testing. Three-phase transformers or three-phase bank transformers of 100 kVA and
above are to be tested in the presence of the Surveyor. The test items are to be in accordance with
the standard applicable to the transformer. The tests are also to be carried out in the presence of
the Surveyor for each individual transformer. Transformers of less than 100 kVA will be accepted
subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor after
installation.

Specific requirements are applicable for the following tests:

i) In the dielectric strength test, the short duration power frequency withstand voltage to be
applied is to follow the standard applicable to the transformer but not less than the
estimated voltage transient generated within the system. If the short duration power
frequency withstand voltage is not specified in the applicable standard, IEC 60076-3 is to
be referred to. For the voltage transient, see 4-6-5/1.7.2(c).
ii) The induced over-voltage withstand test (layer test) is also to be carried out in accordance
with the standard applicable to the transformers in the presence of the Surveyor. This test
is intended to verify the power-frequency withstand strength along the winding under test
and between its phase (strength between turns and between layers in the windings). If the
induced over-voltage withstand test is not specified in the applicable standard, IEC
60076-3 is to be referred to.

1.11.3(f) Nameplate. In addition to the requirements in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 4c, the following
information is also to be indicated on the nameplate:

● Applicable standard
● Short duration power frequency withstand voltage for verification of insulation level of each
winding
1.11.4 Cables
1.11.4(a) Standards. Cables are to be constructed to IEC Publication 60092-353, 60092-354 or
other equivalent recognized standard. See also 4-6-4/13.1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 357
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

TABLE 1
High Voltage Equipment Locations and Minimum Degree of Protection (2014)

Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control

Centers and Controllers

Generators
Example Condition Motors
of of
Location Location Transformers, Converters

Junction/ Connection
Boxes

Dry control rooms Danger of touching live IP32 N/A N/A IP23 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only parts only

Dry control rooms IP42 N/A N/A IP44 IP44

Control rooms Danger of dripping IP32 N/A N/A IP23 IP44

Authorized Personnel Only liquid and/or moderate
mechanical damage
Control rooms IP42 N/A N/A IP44 IP44

Above floor plates in machinery IP32 IP23 IP23 IP23 IP44

spaces
Authorized Personnel Only (1)

Above floor plates in machinery IP42 IP23 IP43 IP44 IP44

spaces (1)

Emergency machinery rooms IP32 IP23 IP23 IP23 IP44

Authorized Personnel Only

Emergency machinery rooms IP42 IP23 IP43 IP44 IP44

Below floor plates in machinery Increased danger of N/A N/A * * IP44

spaces liquid and/or
Authorized Personnel Only mechanical damage

Below floor plates in machinery N/A N/A * N/A IP44

spaces

Ballast pump rooms Increased danger of IP44 N/A IP44 IP44 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only liquid and mechanical
damage
Ballast pump rooms IP44 N/A IP44 IP44 IP44

Holds for general cargo Danger of liquid spray * * * * IP55

presence of cargo dust,
serious mechanical
damage, and/or
aggressive fumes

Open decks (2) Not exposed to seas N/A IP56 IP56 IP56 IP56
(2)
Open decks Exposed to seas N/A N/A * * *

"*" indicates that equipment in excess of 1000 V is not normally permitted in these locations

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 358
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

Notes:

1 See 4-6-3/3.1.1 where the equipment is located within areas affected by local fixed pressure water-spraying or
water-mist fire extinguishing systems.

2 For High Voltage Shore Connections (HVSC) see the requirements in Part 6, Chapter 4 of the Marine Vessel
Rules.

3 Where the IP rating of the high voltage electrical equipment has been selected on the basis that it is only
accessible to authorized personnel, the entrance doors to the spaces in which such equipment is located, are to
be marked accordingly.

1.13 Design Operating Philosophy (2014)

1.13.1 Objective
While this section covers the specific ABS requirements for High Voltage (HV) systems, it is
recognized that system design and equipment construction are only parts of an overall approach
that are required to allow HV systems to be operated safely. Other aspects that contribute towards
HV safety include maintenance procedures, vessel and equipment operating procedures, permit to
work procedures, company safety policy, personal protective equipment (PPE) and training, most
of which are beyond the role of Classification. However, in order to assist ABS in its review of the
design and construction of the vessel and its equipment it is necessary for ABS to be assured that
the design is part of a larger overall approach or plan.

The High Voltage Design Principles document is to outline the concepts that are the basis of the
design. It should identify risks and document the strategies that are used to mitigate each of the
risks (e.g., remote switching, arc flash energy reduction equipment).

1.13.2 HV System Failures

The design should take into account each reasonably foreseeable failure type and address what
actions will be expected of the crew for each failure. Due to the limited availability of specialist
tools, equipment and spare parts on board and recognizing the additional dangers associated with
space limitations, the remoteness of specialized medical help and facilities in the event of
emergencies, it is desirable that, as far as practicable, the crew is not exposed to dangers that could
be avoided. For these reasons it is preferable that the vessel’s HV electrical system be designed
such that the crew can safely isolate any damaged distribution equipment and switch to alternative
supplies without the need to open the HV equipment.

1.13.3 Activities
For all HV switchboards and distribution boards, each type of operation or activity is to be
identified and the means of undertaking the operation or activity safely is to be established. The
operations and activities to be considered are to include the following:

i) Taking readings
ii) Normal operational switching
iii) Isolation and making safe
iv) Maintenance
v) Fault finding
vi) Inspection
vii) Class Surveys

Where switchgear design calls for circuit breakers to be inspected prior to being put back into
service following operation on overcurrent, this should also be covered.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 359
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

1.13.4 Accessibility (1 July 2021)

An adequate, unobstructed working space of at least 2 m (6 ft) is to be left in the vicinity of high
voltage equipment for preventing potential severe injuries to personal performing maintenance
activities. Where the clear space around a location where activity is taking place is less than 2 m
(6 ft), then the activities are to be covered in sufficient detail to take into account the work
involved and the possible need to have clear and safe access for emergency medical evacuation.
Where recommended by the switchgear manufacturer, the working space may be reduced to a
minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) at the front/side and 1 m (3.3 ft) at the rear due to special considerations
such as the use of arc resistant switchgear.

Activities that do not require operation at the switchboard (e.g., telephones or manual call points)
should not require the operator to be within 2 m (6 ft) of the switchboard.

1.13.5 Modifications
No modifications are to be made to HV switchgear without the plans being approved and the
drawings being made available to the ABS Surveyor in advance of the work taking place. Testing
of approved modifications is to be conducted in the presence of the ABS Surveyor. Temporary
repairs are to be in full compliance with the requirements of these Rules.

1.13.6 HV Systems with Enhanced Operating Redundancy

Where the HV electrical system is designed with sufficient redundancy to allow switching and
isolation along the principles in 4-6-5/1.13.2 and still meet the requirements of 4-6-2/3.1.2 with
one generator in reserve, then the activity associated with that failure is not required to be
included.

1.15 Preliminary Operations Manual (2014)

1.15.1 Objective
The preliminary operations manual contains the shipyard’s description of operations affecting the
vessel’s HV equipment. The description ‘preliminary’ is used to capture the fact that it may not be
the final document used by the vessel’s Owner.

The manual is to be complete and sufficiently detailed to capture each piece of HV equipment and
how the activities associated with that equipment can be achieved consistently with the Design
Operating Philosophy. This manual is to be made available to the Owner by the shipyard.

The Owner will need the information contained in the preliminary operations manual to
understand how the shipyard designed the HV equipment to be operated safely. It is likely that the
Owner will modify some aspects of the manual to bring it in line with their own company policies,
organizational responsibilities and legal duties.

The preliminary operations manual is to include for each piece of HV equipment:

i) Details of the tasks (operations and activities) associated with that piece of equipment
ii) Details of the ‘Authorization’ needed to perform each of the tasks
iii) Details of the tools required to perform each of the tasks
iv) Details of PPE and safety equipment (locks, barriers, tags, rescue hooks, etc.)
v) Identify the tasks for which a ‘permit to work’ system is to be used.
1.15.2 Details of Authorization
For each operation or task involving HV switchgear and for access to the HV switchgear rooms,
the appropriate authorizations are to be determined before delivery.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 360
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

1.15.3 Training Requirements for Authorization

Part of the basis of establishing any level of authorization is training. It is not expected that the
shipyard will stipulate what training qualifications are required; however, a description of the
subjects that would need to be covered in the training for each level of authorization should be
included.

The Owner can be guided by the above information in making decisions regarding the crew
training requirements.

1.15.4 Test, Maintenance Tools and PPE

Where tasks require the use of PPE, the required protection clothing rating should be identifiable
in the preliminary operations manual and on a label on the HV equipment where that task will take
place. The level of protection offered by the PPE is to be readily identified on the PPE itself in the
same terms or units as used on the labels.

Some PPE for general use is not suitable for High Voltage or arc flash hazards, mostly through
inappropriate fire performance; such PPE is to be excluded from high voltage switchgear rooms.
Information alerting the crew of the need to be able to recognize and use the right PPE is to be
included in the manual.

1.15.5 Inspection and Maintenance of Test Equipment Tools and PPE

Where PPE or test equipment is provided by the shipyard the means for its proper use, inspection,
calibration and maintenance is to be made available. The instructions or directions regarding
where they are kept are to be contained in the Preliminary Operations Manual.

Where the PPE is not provided by the shipyard a description or specification regarding the
required tools and PPE should be provided in the Preliminary Operations Manual.

3 Electric Propulsion System

3.1 General
3.1.1 Application
The following requirements in this subsection are applicable to electric propulsion systems.
Electric propulsion systems complying with other recognized standards will also be considered,
provided it can be shown, through either satisfactory service experience or a systematic analysis
based on sound engineering principles, to meet the overall safety standards of these Rules. Unless
stated otherwise, electric propulsion equipment and systems are to comply with the applicable
requirements in other parts of Part 4, Chapter 6 as well.

3.1.2 Plans and Data to be Submitted

In addition to the plans and data to be submitted in accordance with 4-6-2/1, 4-6-3/1 and 4-6-4/1,
the following plans and data are to be submitted for review.

● One line diagrams of propulsion control system for power supply, circuit protection, alarm,
monitoring, safety and emergency shutdown systems including list of alarm and monitoring
points.
● Plans showing the location of propulsion controls and its monitoring stations.
● Arrangements and details of the propulsion control console or panel, including schematic
diagram of the system therein.
● Arrangements and details of electric coupling.
● Arrangements and details of the semiconductor converters enclosure for the propulsion
system, including data for the semiconductor converter and cooling system with its
interlocking arrangement.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 361
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.3 System Design

3.3.1 General (2016)
For the purposes of the electric propulsion system requirements, an electric propulsion system is
one in which the main propulsion of the vessel is provided by at least one electric motor. A vessel
may have more than one electrical propulsion system.

An integrated electric propulsion system is a system where a common set of generators supply
power to the vessel service loads as well as the propulsion loads.

In the case of an integrated electrical propulsion system, the electrical drive train is considered to
consist of the equipment connected to the electrical network such as a drive (frequency converter)
and the propulsion motor(s).

All electrical equipment that is part of the electric propulsion drive train is to be built with
redundancy such that a single failure will not completely disable the propulsion of the vessel.
Where electric motors are to provide the sole means of propulsion for a vessel, a single propulsion
motor with dual windings does not meet this requirement.

3.3.2 Generating Capacity

For vessels with an integrated electric propulsion system, under normal sea-going conditions,
when one generator is out of service, the remaining generator capacity is to be sufficient to carry
all of the vessel services (essential services, normal services and for minimum comfortable
conditions of habitability) and an effective level of propulsion.

3.3.3 Power Management System (2014)

For vessels with an integrated electric propulsion system, a power management system is to be
provided. The power management system is to control load sharing between generators, prevent
blackouts, maintain power to the essential service loads and maintain power to the propulsion
loads.

The system is to account for the following operating scenarios.

● All generators in operation, then the loss of one generator

● When at least one generator is not in operation and there is an increase in the propulsion loads
or a loss of one of the generators, that would result in the need to start a generator that was not
in operation.
● Upon failure of the power management system, there is to be no change in the available
electrical power. Failure of the power management system is to be alarmed at a manned
control station.

Further, the system is to prevent overloading the generators, by reducing the propulsion load or
load shedding of non-essential loads. In general, the system is to limit power to the propulsion
loads to maintain power to the vessel’s essential service loads. However, the system is to shed
non-essential loads to maintain power to the propulsion loads.

An audible and visible alarm is to be installed at each propulsion control location and is to be
activated when the system is limiting the propulsion power in order to maintain power to the other
essential service loads.

When at least one generator is not in operation, consideration should be given to keeping one
generator in standby mode, so that it can be brought on line within 45 seconds, upon failure of one
of the running generators.

Operation with only one generator on line should only be considered, when another generator can
be brought on line within 45 seconds of failure of the running generator.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 362
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.3.4 Regenerative Power (2014)

For systems where regenerative power may be developed, the regenerative power is not to cause
overspeeding of the prime mover or variations in the system voltage and frequency which exceeds
the limits of 4-6-1/9. See also 4-6-5/3.17.4(a) and 4-6-5/3.17.4(e).

3.3.5 Harmonics (2014)

A harmonic distortion calculation is to be submitted for review for all vessels with electric
propulsion. The calculation is to indicate that the harmonic distortion levels at all locations
throughout the power distribution system (main generation switchboard, downstream power
distribution switchboards, etc.) are within the limits of 4-6-2/7.9. The harmonic distortion levels at
dedicated propulsion buses are also to be within the limits of 4-6-2/7.9, otherwise documentation
from the manufacturer is to be submitted indicating that the equipment is designed for operation at
a higher level of distortion.

Where higher values of harmonic distortion are expected, any other possible effects, such as
additional heat losses in machines, network resonances, errors in control and monitoring systems
are to be considered.

Means of monitoring voltage harmonic distortion shall be provided, including alarms at the main
generation switchboard and at continuously manned stations when to notify of an increase in total
or individual harmonic distortion levels above the maximum allowable levels.

Harmonic filters, if used, are to comply with requirements mentioned in 4-6-2/9.19.

3.5 Propulsion Power Supply Systems (2014)

3.5.1 Propulsion Generators
3.5.1(a) Power Supply. The power for the propulsion equipment may be derived from a single
generator. If a ship service generator is also used for propulsion purposes other than for boosting
the propulsion power, such generator and power supply circuits to propulsion systems are also to
comply with the applicable requirements in this subsection. See also 4-6-2/3.1.4.

3.5.1(b) Single System. If a propulsion system contains only one generator and one motor and
cannot be connected to another propulsion system, more than one exciter set is to be provided for
each machine. However, this is not necessary for self-excited generators or for multi-propeller
propulsion vessels where any additional exciter set may be common for the vessel.

3.5.1(c) Multiple Systems. Systems having two or more propulsion generators, two or more
semiconductor converters or two or more motors on one propeller shaft are to be so arranged that
any unit may be taken out of service and disconnected electrically without preventing the
operation of the remaining units.

3.5.1(d) Excitation Systems. Arrangements for electric propulsion generators are to be such that
propulsion can be maintained in case of failure of an excitation system or failure of a power
supply for an excitation system. Propulsion may be at reduced power under such conditions where
two or more propulsion generators are installed, provided such reduced power is sufficient to
provide for a speed of not less than 7 knots or 1/2 of design speed, whichever is the lesser.

3.5.1(e) Features for Other Services. If the propulsion generator is used for other purposes than
for propulsion, such as dredging, cargo oil pumps and other special services, overload protection
in the auxiliary circuit and means for making voltage adjustments are to be provided at the control
board. When propulsion alternating-current generators are used for other services for operation in
port, the port excitation control is to be provided with a device that is to operate just below normal
idling speed of the generator to remove excitation automatically.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 363
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.5.2 Propulsion Excitation

3.5.2(a) Excitation Circuits. Every exciter set is to be supplied by a separate feeder. Excitation
circuits are not to be fitted with overload circuit-interrupting devices, except those intended to
function in connection with the protection for the propulsion generator. In such cases, the field
circuit breaker is to be provided with a discharge resistor, unless a permanent discharge resistor is
provided.

3.5.2(b) Field Circuits. Field circuits are to be provided with means for suppressing voltage rise
when a field switch is opened. Where fuses are used for excitation circuit protection, it is essential
that they do not interrupt the field discharge resistor circuit upon rupturing.

3.5.2(c) Ship's Service Generator Connection. Where the excitation supply is obtained from the
ship’s service generators, the connection is to be made to the generator side of the generator circuit
breaker with the excitation supply passing through the overload current device of the breaker.

3.7 Circuit Protection (2016)

3.7.1 Setting
Overcurrent protective devices, if any, in the main circuits are to be set sufficiently high so as not
to operate on overcurrents caused by maneuvering or normal operation in heavy seas or in floating
broken ice.

3.7.2 Direct-current (DC) Propulsion Circuits

3.7.2(a) Circuit Protection. Direct-current propulsion circuits are not to have fuses. Each circuit is
to be protected by overload relays to open the field circuits or by remote-controlled main-circuit
interrupting devices. Provision is to be made for closing circuit breakers promptly after opening.

3.7.2(b) Protection for Reversal of the Rotation. Where separately driven DC generators are
connected electrically in series, means shall be provided to prevent reversal of the rotation of a
generator upon failure of the driving power of its prime mover.

3.7.3 Excitation Circuits

An overload protection is not to be provided for opening of the excitation circuit.

3.7.4 Reduction of Magnetic Fluxes

Means are to be provided for selective tripping or rapid reduction of the magnetic fluxes of the
generators and motors so that overcurrents do not reach values which may endanger the plant.

3.7.5 Direct-current (DC) Propulsion Motors supplied by Semiconductor Converters

The protection features of the semiconductor converters are to be arranged to avoid a damaging
flashover in the DC propulsion motor. A possible cause of a damaging flashover would be
removal of the field current. The protection features of the semiconductor converters are to take
into account the increase in armature current created by the removal of the field current, due to
accidental loss of the field, or activation of a protection feature intended to protect the field.

To verify compliance with the above, the maximum time-current characteristics that can be
commutated by the motor as well as the time-current characteristics of the protective features of
the semiconductor converters are to be submitted for review. To avoid a damaging flashover, the
maximum time-current characteristics of the motor is to be provided by the motor manufacturer
and is to be used by the semiconductor converter manufacturer to determine the appropriate set
points for the protection features of the semiconductor converters.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 364
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.9 Protection for Earth Leakage

3.9.1 Main Propulsion Circuits
Means for earth leakage detection are to be provided for the main propulsion circuit and be
arranged to operate an alarm upon the occurrence of an earth fault. When the fault current flowing
is liable to cause damage, arrangements for opening the main propulsion circuit are also to be
provided.

3.9.2 Excitation Circuits

Means are to be provided for earth leakage detection in excitation circuits of propulsion machines
but may be omitted in circuits of brushless excitation systems and of machines rated up to 500
kW.

3.9.3 Alternating-current (AC) Systems

Alternating current propulsion circuits are to be provided with an earthing detector alarm or
indicator. If the neutral is earthed for this purpose, it is to be through an arrangement which will
limit the current at full-rated voltage so that it will not exceed approximately 20 amperes upon a
fault to earth in the propulsion system. An unbalance relay is to be provided which is to open the
generator and motor-field circuits upon the occurrence of an appreciable unbalanced fault.

3.9.4 Direct-current (DC) Systems

The earthing detector may consist of a voltmeter or lights. Provision is to be made for protection
against severe overloads, excessive currents and electrical faults likely to result in damage to the
plant. Protective equipment is to be capable of being so set as not to operate on the overloads or
overcurrents experienced in a heavy seaway or when maneuvering.

3.11 Electric Propulsion Control

3.11.1 General
Failure of a control signal is not to cause an excessive increase in propeller speed. The reference
value transmitters in the control stations and the control equipment are to be so designed that any
defect in the desired value transmitters or in the cables between the control station and the
propulsion system will not cause a substantial increase in the propeller speed.

3.11.2 Automatic and Remote Control Systems

Where two or more control stations are provided outside of the engine room, or where automatic
control of the propulsion machinery is provided, Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-8, as applicable, are
to be complied with. See 4-7-1/3 for propulsion class symbols.

3.11.3 Testing and Inspection

Controls for electric propulsion equipment are to be inspected when finished and dielectric
strength tests and insulation resistance measurements made on the various circuits in the presence
of the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of manufacture. The satisfactory tripping and operation of
all relays, contactors and the various safety devices are also to be demonstrated.

3.11.4 Initiation of Control

The control of the propulsion system can be activated only when the delegated control lever is in
zero position and the system is ready for operation.

3.11.5 Emergency Stop

Each control station shall have an emergency stop device which is independent of the control
lever.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 365
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.11.6 Prime Mover Control

Where required by the system of control, means are to be provided at the control assembly for
controlling the prime mover speed and for mechanically tripping the throttle valve.

3.11.7 Control Power Failure

If failure of the power supply occurs in systems with power-aided control (e.g., with electric,
pneumatic or hydraulic aid), it is to be possible to restore control in a short time.

3.11.8 Protection
Arrangements are to be made so that opening of the control system assemblies or compartments
will not cause inadvertent or automatic loss of propulsion. Where oil gauges are mounted on the
main-control assembly, provision is to be made so that the oil will not come in contact with the
energized parts in case of leakage.

3.11.9 Interlocks
All levers for operating contactors, line switches, field switches and similar devices are to be
interlocked to prevent their improper operation. Interlocks are to be provided with the field lever
to prevent the opening of any main circuit without first reducing the field excitation to zero,
except that when the generators simultaneously supply power to an auxiliary load apart from the
propulsion, the field excitation need only be reduced to a low value.

3.13 Instrumentation at the Control Station

3.13.1 Indication, Display and Alarms
The necessary instruments to indicate existing conditions at all times are to be provided and
mounted on the control panel convenient to the operating levers and switches. Instruments and
other devices mounted on the switchboard are to be labeled and the instruments provided with a
distinguishing mark to indicate full-load conditions. Metallic cases of all permanently installed
instruments are to be permanently earthed. The following instruments, where applicable, are to be
provided.

3.13.1(a) For AC Systems. Ammeter, voltmeter, indicating wattmeter and field ammeter (*) for
each propulsion generator and for each synchronous motor. See also 4-7-3/23 TABLE 5A.

Note:

* Field ammeter is not required for brushless generators

3.13.1(b) For DC Systems. An ammeter for each main circuit and one or more voltmeters with
selector switches for reading voltage on each propulsion generator and motor. See also 4-7-3/Table
5A and 4-7-3/Table 5B.

3.13.1(c) For Electric Slip Couplings. An ammeter for the coupling excitation circuit.

3.13.2 Indication of Propulsion System Status

The control stations of the propulsion systems are to have at least the following indications for
each propeller.

3.13.2(a) “Ready for Operation”. Power circuits and necessary auxiliaries are in operation.

3.13.2(b) “Faulty”. Propeller is not controllable.

3.13.2(c) “Power Limitation”. In case of disturbance, for example, in the ventilators for
propulsion motors, in the converters, cooling water supply or load limitation of the generators.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 366
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.15 Equipment Installation and Arrangement (2014)

3.15.1 General
The arrangement of bus bars and wiring on the back of propulsion-control assemblies is to be such
that all parts, including the connections, are accessible. All nuts and connections are to be fitted
with locking devices to prevent loosening due to vibration. Clearance and creepage distance are to
be provided between parts of opposite polarity and between live parts and earth to prevent arcing.
See 4-6-1/19, 4-6-4/7.11.6, and 4-6-5/1.11.2(b).

3.15.2 Accessibility and Facilities for Repairs

3.15.2(a) Accessibility. For purposes of inspection and repair, provision is to be made for access to
the stator and rotor coils, and for the withdrawal and replacement of field coils. Adequate access is
to be provided to permit resurfacing of commutators and slip-rings, as well as the renewal and
bedding of brushes.

3.15.2(b) Facility for Supporting. Facilities shall be provided for supporting the shaft to permit
inspection and withdrawal of bearings.

3.15.2(c) Slip-couplings. Slip-couplings are to be designed to permit removal as a unit without

axial displacement of the driving and driven shaft, and without removing the poles.

3.15.3 Propulsion Cables

Propulsion cables are not to have splices or joints, except terminal joints, and all cable terminals
are to be sealed against the admission of moisture or air. Similar precautions are to be taken during
installation by sealing all cable ends until the terminals are permanently attached. Cable supports
are to be designed to withstand short-circuited conditions. They are to be spaced less than 915 mm
(36 in.) apart and are to be arranged to prevent chafing of the cable. See 4-6-3/5.9.1.

3.17 Machinery and Equipment (2014)

3.17.1 Material Tests
The following materials intended for main propulsion installation are to be tested in accordance
with the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2): thrust shafts, line shafts, propeller shafts,
shafting for propulsion generators and motors, coupling bolts, and in the case of direct-connected
turbine-driven propulsion generators, fan shrouds, centering and retaining rings. Major castings or
built-up parts such as frames, spiders and end shields are to be surface inspected and the welding
is to be in accordance with the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

3.17.2 Temperature Rating

When generators, motors or slip-couplings for electric propulsion are fitted with an integral fan
and will be operated at speeds below the rated speed with full-load torque, full-load current or
full-load excitation temperature rise limits according to 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3 are not to be
exceeded.

3.17.3 Protection Against Moisture Condensation

4-6-4/3.13.7 is applicable for rotating machines and converters, regardless of the weight of the
machines.

3.17.4 Prime Movers

3.17.4(a) Capability. The prime mover rated output is to have adequate overloading and build-up
capacity for supplying the power which is necessary during transitional changes in operating
conditions of the electrical equipment. When maneuvering from full propeller speed ahead to full
propeller speed astern with the vessel making full way ahead, the prime mover is be capable of
absorbing a proportion of the regenerated power without tripping due to overspeed.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 367
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.17.4(b) Speed Control. Prime movers of any type are to be provided with a governor capable of
maintaining the preset steady speed within a range not exceeding 5% of the rated full-load speed
for load changes from full-load to no-load.

3.17.4(c) Manual Controls. Where the speed control of the propeller requires speed variation of
the prime mover, the governor is to be provided with means for local manual control, as well as
for remote control. For turbines driving AC propulsion generators, where required by the system
of control, the governor is to be provided with means for local hand control, as well as remote
adjustment from the control station.

3.17.4(d) Parallel Operation. In case of parallel operation of generators, the governing system is
to permit stable operation to be maintained over the entire operational speed range of the prime
movers.

3.17.4(e) Protection for Regenerated Power. Braking resistors or ballast consumers are to be
provided to absorb excess amounts of regenerated energy and to reduce the speed of rotation of
the propulsion motor. These braking resistors or ballast consumers are to be located external to the
mechanical and electric rotating machines. Alternatively, the amount of regenerated power may be
limited by the action of the control system.

3.17.5 Rotating Machines for Propulsion

The following requirements are applicable to propulsion generators and propulsion motors.

3.17.5(a) Ventilation and Protection. Electric rotating machines for propulsion are to be enclosed
ventilated or be provided with substantial wire or mesh screen to prevent personnel injury or
entrance of foreign matter. Dampers are to be provided in ventilating air ducts, except when re-
circulating systems are used.

3.17.5(b) Fire-extinguishing Systems. Electric rotating machines for propulsion which are
enclosed or in which the air gap is not directly exposed are to be fitted with fire-extinguishing
systems suitable for fires in electrical equipment. This will not be required where it can be
established that the machinery and insulation is self-extinguishing.

3.17.5(c) Air Coolers. Air cooling systems for propulsion generators are to be in accordance with
4-2-1/11.3 and 4-2-1/11.7. Water-air heat exchangers of rotating propulsion machines for single
systems (single generator and single motor), as specified in 4-6-5/3.5.1(b), are to have double wall
tubes and be fitted with a leak detector feature to monitor for any water leakage. A visual and
audible alarm is to be provided at a normally manned location to indicate such water leakage.

3.17.5(d) Temperature Sensors. Stator windings of AC machines and interpole windings of DC

machines rated above 500 kW are to be provided with temperature sensors. See 4-7-3/23 TABLE
5A.

3.17.5(e) Generator Excitation (2014). Excitation current for propulsion generators may be
derived from attached rotating exciters, static exciters, excitation motor-generator sets or special
purpose generating units. Power for these exciters may be derived from the machine being excited
or from any ship service, emergency or special purpose generating units.

3.17.5(f) Propulsion Motors (2014). Propulsion motors are to be designed to be capable of

withstanding the mechanical and thermal effects of a short-circuit at its terminals.

3.17.6 Direct-current (DC) Propulsion Motors

3.17.6(a) Rotors. The rotors of DC propulsion motors are to be capable of withstanding
overspeeding up to the limit reached in accordance with the characteristics of the overspeed
protection device at its normal operational setting.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 368
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

3.17.6(b) Overspeed Protection. An overspeed protection device is to be provided to prevent

excessive overspeeding of the propulsion motors due to light loads, loss of propeller, etc.

3.17.7 Electric Couplings

3.17.7(a) General. Couplings are to be enclosed ventilated or be provided with wire or mesh
screen to prevent personnel injury or the entrance of foreign material. All windings are to be
specially treated to resist moisture, oil and salt air.

3.17.7(b) Accessibility for Repairs. The coupling is to be designed to permit removal as a unit
without moving the engine. See also 4-6-5/3.15.2.

3.17.7(c) Temperature Rating. The limits of temperature rise are to be the same as for alternating-
current generators given in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3, except that when a squirrel-cage element is used,
the temperature of this element may reach such values as are not injurious. Depending upon the
cooling arrangements, the maximum temperature rise may occur at other than full-load rating so
that heat runs will require special consideration. For this purpose, when an integral fan is fitted,
the coupling temperatures are not to exceed the limits in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 3 when operated
continuously at 70% of full-load rpm, full excitation and rated torque. Temperature rises for
insulation materials above 180°C (356°F) will be considered in accordance with 4-6-1/13.11.

3.17.7(d) Excitation. Excitation is to be provided as required for propulsion generators. See

4-6-4/3.21.1, 4-6-4/3.23.1, and 4-6-5/3.17.5(e).

3.17.7(e) Control Equipment. Electric-coupling control equipment is to be combined with the

prime mover speed and reversing control and is to include a two-pole disconnect switch, short-
circuit protection only, ammeter for reading coupling current, discharge resistor and interlocking
to prevent energizing the coupling when the prime mover control levers are in an inappropriate
position.

3.17.7(f) Nameplates. Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an

accessible position of the electric coupling and are to contain the following typical details:

● Manufacturer's name, serial number and frame designation

● Rated output and type of rating
● Ambient temperature range
● Rated voltage, speed and temperature rise
● Rated exciter voltage and current
3.17.8 Semiconductor Converters for Propulsion (2014)
Semiconductor converters are to comply with the requirements in 4-6-4/10.

3.17.9 Reactors and Transformers for Semiconductor Converters

3.17.9(a) General. Interphase reactors and transformers used with semiconductor converters are to
conform with the requirements of 4-6-4/9.1.1, 4-6-4/9.1.2(c), 4-6-4/9.3,4-6-4/9.5.1 and
4-6-4/9.5.2, and the following.

3.17.9(b) Voltage Regulation. Means to regulate transformer output voltage are to be provided to
take care of increase in converter forward resistance and, in addition, to obtain the necessary
performance characteristics of the converter unit in which the transformer is used.

3.17.9(c) High Temperature Alarm. Interphase reactors and transformers used with the
semiconductor converters for main and auxiliary propulsion systems are to be provided with high
temperature alarm at the switchboard or the propulsion control station. The setting value of the

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 369
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

alarm is to be determined by their specific insulation class and is not to exceed the temperature
corresponding to the limit listed in 4-6-4/13.7 TABLE 8.

3.17.10 Switches
3.17.10(a) General Design. All switches are to be arranged for manual operation and so designed
that they will not open under ordinary shock or vibration. Contactors, however, may be operated
pneumatically, by solenoids or other means in addition to the manual method which is to be
provided, unless otherwise approved.

3.17.10(b) Generator and Motor Switches. Switches for generators and motors are preferably to be
of the air-break type, but for alternating-current systems, where they are to be designed to open
full-load current at full voltage, oil-break switches using nonflammable liquid may be used if
provided with leak-proof, non-spilling tanks.

3.17.10(c) Field Switches. Where necessary, field switches are to be arranged for discharge
resistors unless discharge resistors are permanently connected across the field. For alternating-
current systems, means are to be provided for de-energizing the excitation circuits by the
unbalance relay and ground relay.

3.17.11 Propulsion Cables

3.17.11(a) Conductors.
The conductors of cables external to the components of the propulsion plant, other than cables and
interconnecting wiring for computers, data loggers or other automation equipment requiring
currents of very small value, are to consist of not less than seven strands and have a cross-
sectional area of not less than 1.5 mm2 (2,960 circ. mils).

3.17.11(b) Insulation Materials. (2019)

Ethylene-propylene rubber, cross-linked polyethylene or silicone rubber insulated cables are to be
used for propulsion power cables, except that polyvinyl chloride insulated cables. PVC insulated
cables are not acceptable as per IEC 60092-360.

3.17.11(c) Braided Metallic Armor and Impervious Metallic Sheaths.

Propulsion cables need not have braided metallic armor nor impervious metallic sheaths. Where
metallic sheaths are provided, they are not to be used with single alternating current cables.

3.17.11(d) Inner Wiring.

The insulation of internal wiring in main control gear, including switchboard wiring, shall be of
flame-retardant quality.

3.17.11(e) Testing.
All propulsion cables, other than internal wiring in control gears and switchboards, are to be
subjected to dielectric and insulation tests in the presence of the Surveyor.

3.19 Dock and Sea Trials (2014)

Complete tests of the entire electric propulsion system are to be carried out during sea-trials including the
following:

i) Duration runs with the ship at full propulsion load.

ii) Maneuvering tests which should include a reversal of the vessel from full speed ahead to full
speed astern during which important measurements such as system currents, voltages, speed, etc.
shall be recorded.
iii) Tests to check for operation of all protective devices, safety functions, alarms, indicators, control
modes and stability tests for control.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 370
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

All tests necessary to demonstrate that major components of the electric propulsion plant and the system as
a whole are satisfactory for duty are to be performed. Immediately prior to trials, the insulation resistance
is to be measured and recorded.

5 Three-wire Dual-voltage DC System

5.1 Three-wire DC Ship's Generators

Separate circuit-breaker poles are to be provided for the positive, negative, neutral and also for the
equalizer leads, unless protection is provided by the main poles. When equalizer poles are provided for the
three-wire generators, the overload trips are to be of the algebraic type. No overload trip is to be provided
for the neutral pole, but it is to operate simultaneously with the main poles. A neutral overcurrent relay and
alarm system is to be provided and set to function at a current value equal to the neutral rating.

5.3 Neutral Earthing

5.3.1 Main Switchboard
The neutral of three-wire dual-voltage direct-current systems is to be solidly earthed at the
generator switchboard with a zero-center ammeter in the earthing connection. The zero-center
ammeter is to have a full-scale reading of 150% of the neutral-current rating of the largest
generator and be marked to indicate the polarity of earth. The earth connection is to be made in
such a manner that it will not prevent checking the insulation resistance of the generator to earth
before the generator is connected to the bus. The neutrals of three-wire DC emergency power
systems are to be earthed at all times when they are supplied from the emergency generator or
storage battery. The earthed neutral conductor of a three-wire feeder is to be provided with a
means for disconnecting and is to be arranged so that the earthed conductor cannot be opened
without simultaneously opening the unearthed conductors.

5.3.2 Emergency Switchboard

No direct earth connection is to be provided at the emergency switchboard. The neutral bus or
buses are to be solidly and permanently connected to the neutral bus of the main switchboard. No
interrupting device is to be provided in the neutral conductor of the bus-tie feeder connecting the
two switchboards.

5.5 Size of Neutral Conductor

The capacity of the neutral conductor of a dual-voltage feeder is to be 100% of the capacity of the
unearthed conductors.

7 Electrical Plants of Less Than 75 kW

7.1 General
Electrical plants having an aggregate capacity of less than 75 kWare to comply with the following
requirements and the requirements in this Part 4, Chapter 6, as applicable –except 4-6-1/17, 4-6-2/1.3,
4-6-2/1.5, 4-6-2/3,4-6-2/5, 4-6-2/7.1.6(b), 4-6-2/9.1.5, 4-6-2/11.5, 4-6-2/11.7, 4-6-2/13.3, 4-6-2/15,
4-6-2/17.1, 4-6-2/17.3, 4-6-2/19.3,4-6-3/1.1, 4-6-3/3.9, 4-6-4/7.15.2, 4-6-4/13 and 4-6-5/1.

7.3 Standard Details

Standard wiring practices and details, including such items as cable supports, earthing details, bulkhead
and deck penetrations, cable joints and sealing, cable splicing, watertight and explosion-proof connections
to equipment, earthing and bonding connections, etc., as applicable, are to be indicated on the submitted
plans or may be submitted in a booklet format.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 371
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

7.5 Calculations of Short-circuit Currents

In the absence of precise data, the following short circuit currents at the machine terminals are to be
assumed:

7.5.1 Direct Current System

Ten times the full load current for generators normally connected (including spare) for each
generator capable of being simultaneously connected.

Six times full load current for motors simultaneously in service.

7.5.2 Alternating Current System

Ten times the full load current for generators normally connected (including spare) for each
generator capable of being simultaneously connected-symmetrical rms.

Three times full load current of motors simultaneously in service.

7.7 Lightning Protection

For lighting protection systems, see 4-6-2/21 and 4-6-3/7.11.

7.9 Temperature Ratings

In the requirements contained in 4-6-5/7, an ambient temperature of 40°C (140°F) has been assumed for all
locations. Where the ambient temperature is in excess of this value, the total temperature specified is not to
be exceeded. Where equipment has been rated on ambient temperature less than that contemplated,
consideration will be given to the use of such equipment, provided the total temperature for which the
equipment is rated will not be exceeded.

7.11 Generators
Craft using electricity for propulsion auxiliaries or preservation of cargo are to be provided with at least
two generators. These generators are not to be driven by the same engine. The capacity of the generating
sets is to be sufficient to carry the necessary load essential for the propulsion and safety of the craft and
preservation of the cargo (if applicable) with any one generator set in reserve. Craft having only one
generator are to be provided with a battery source to supply sufficient lighting for safety.

7.13 Emergency Source of Power

7.13.1 Capacity
The emergency source of electrical power is to have adequate capacity to provide emergency
lighting for a period of at least six hours.

7.13.2 Sources
The emergency power source may be any of the following:

i) An automatically connected or manually controlled storage battery; or

ii) An automatically or manually started generator; or
iii) Relay-controlled, battery-operated lanterns.
7.13.3 Battery Sources
Where the source of electrical power is a battery connected to a charging device with an output of
more than 2 kW, the battery is to be located as near as practicable to but not in the same space as,
the emergency switchboard, distribution board or panel.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 372
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5

7.15 Cable Construction

Cables are to have copper conductors constructed in accordance with a recognized standard and are to be
of the stranded type, except sizes not exceeding 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) may have solid conductors.

7.17 Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Panels

7.17.1 Installation (2020)
Switchboards, distribution boards and panels are to be installed in dry accessible, and well-
ventilated areas. Not less than 610 mm (24 in.) clearance is to be provided in front of
switchboards, distribution boards and panels. When located at the helm or other area adjacent to or
part of an open cockpit or weather deck, they are to be protected by a watertight enclosure.

7.17.2 Instrumentation
A voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, and voltage regulator are to be provided for each
generator installed. Control equipment and measuring instruments are to be provided as necessary
to insure satisfactory operation of the generator or generators.

7.19 Navigation Lights (2020)

Mast head, port, starboard, and stern lights when required are to be controlled by a running light indicator
panel. A fused-feeder disconnect switch is to be provided; the rating of the fuses is to be at least twice that
of the largest branch fuse and greater than the maximum panel load.

9 Energy Storage Systems (2019)

9.1 Lithium-ion Batteries

For vessels installed with lithium-ion batteries, see the requirements in the ABS Requirements for Use of
Lithium-ion Batteries in the Marine and Offshore Industries.

9.3 Supercapacitors
For vessels installed with supercapacitors, see the requirements in the ABS Requirements for Use of
Supercapacitors in the Marine and Offshore Industries.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 373
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 6
Specialized Craft and Services

1 Installations in Special-Category Spaces

1.1 Application
In addition to the foregoing requirements in this Section, the following requirements are applicable for
installations in special-category spaces.

Special category spaces are those enclosed spaces intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in
their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such vehicles can be driven, and to which
passengers have access, including spaces intended for the carriage of cargo vehicles.

1.3 Ventilation System

1.3.1 Arrangement
The ventilating system for special-category spaces is to be independent from other ventilation
systems and is to be capable of being controlled from a position outside the space.

1.3.2 Capacity
An effective power ventilation system of sufficient capacity to give at least 10 air changes per
hour while navigating and 20 air changes per hour at the quayside during vehicle loading and
unload operations is to be provided.

1.3.3 Fans
Exhaust fans are to be of non-sparking construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7.

1.3.4 Material and Arrangement of Ducts

Ventilation ducts, including dampers, are to be of steel. Ducts serving spaces capable of being
sealed are to be separated for such space.

1.3.5 Exhaust Inlet and Outlet

Inlet for exhaust ducts are to be located within 450 mm (17.75 in.) above the vehicle deck. The
outlet is to be sited in a safe position, having regard to the source of ignition near the outlet.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 374
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
Section 6 Specialized Craft and Services 4-6-6

1.3.6 Emergency Shutdown

Arrangements are to be provided to permit a rapid shutdown and effective closure of the
ventilation system in case of fire, taking into account the weather and sea conditions. See also
4-6-6/1.3.1.

1.3.7 Operating Compartment Indication

Means are to be provided on the operating compartment or other appropriate locations to indicate
any loss of the ventilating capacity.

1.5 Location and Type of Equipment

1.5.1 Certified Safe Type Equipment
Except as provided for in 4-6-6/1.5.2 below, electrical equipment and wiring within the enclosed
vehicle spaces referred to in 4-6-6/1.3.1 are to be increased-safety, explosion-proof or
intrinsically-safe type.

1.5.2 Arrangements
Except for a distance within 450 mm (17.75 in.) above the platform that does not have openings of
sufficient size permitting penetrations of petroleum gases downward, electrical equipment of a
type so enclosed and protected as to prevent the escape of sparks, e.g., protection degree of IP55
of equivalent

1.5.3 Equipment in Ducts from Vehicle Space

Electrical equipment and wiring installed within an exhaust duct are to be increased-safety,
explosion-proof or intrinsically-safe type.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 375
 PART 4
CHAPTER 6
Electrical Installations

SECTION 7
Craft Less Than 24 Meters (79 feet) in Length

1 General
Electrical systems are to comply with a recognized standard acceptable to ABS. Examples of acceptable
standards are given below:

● ISO 10133Small Craft – Electrical Systems – Extra-low-voltage DC installations

● ISO 13297Small Craft – Electrical Systems – Alternating current installations
● ABYC, Section E-11 (AC and DC)AC and DC Electrical Systems on Boats

3 Interior Communication Systems and Manually Operated Alarms

Interior communication and Alarms systems complying with 4-6-2/15 and 4-6-2/17 are required except as
modified below:

● Craft which do not have below deck spaces are not required to have interior communication systems.
● Craft which have below deck spaces which are not normally occupied while in operations are not
required to have interior communication systems.
● Alternatives to the requirements of 4-6-2/15 and 4-6-2/17 will be considered provided they are shown
to be no less effective than the requirements of that Section.

5 Battery Starting Systems

Craft are to comply with 4-2-1/13.9. Alternatively where the propulsion engines can be started manually,
only one battery (battery bank) will be required.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 376
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General Provisions.......................................................................... 384
1 Application ................................................................................. 384
1.1 Scope.............................................................................384
1.3 Propulsion and Maneuvering......................................... 384
3 Class Notations ..........................................................................385
3.1 Craft Greater Than 500 GT............................................385
3.3 Periodical Survey...........................................................385
5 Definitions .................................................................................. 385
5.1 General Definitions........................................................ 385
5.3 Definitions for Computerized Systems...........................387
7 Plans and Data .......................................................................... 388
7.1 Specifications.................................................................388
7.3 System Design Plans.....................................................388
7.5 Control Console Plans................................................... 391
7.7 Installation Plans............................................................391
9 Conceptual Requirements for System Design ...........................391
9.1 Fail-safe......................................................................... 391
9.3 System Independence................................................... 391
9.5 Local Control..................................................................391
9.7 Monitoring Systems....................................................... 391
9.9 Safety Systems..............................................................392
9.11 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA).....................392
11 Power Supply .............................................................................392
11.1 General.......................................................................... 392
11.3 Electric........................................................................... 393
11.5 Hydraulic........................................................................393
11.7 Pneumatic......................................................................393
13 Automatic Safety Shutdown .......................................................393

SECTION 2 Remote Propulsion Control ........................................................... 395

1 Application ................................................................................. 395

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 377
 3 System Requirements ............................................................... 395
3.1 General.......................................................................... 395
3.3 System Design...............................................................395
3.5 System Power Supply....................................................395
5 Remote Propulsion Control on Navigation Bridge...................... 396
5.1 General.......................................................................... 396
5.3 Propeller Control............................................................396
5.5 Ordered Speed and Direction........................................ 396
5.7 Emergency Shutdown....................................................396
5.9 Starting of Propulsion Machinery...................................396
5.11 Transfer Between Remote Control Stations.................. 397
5.13 Failure of Propulsion Control or Failure of Control
Transfer..........................................................................397
5.15 Critical Speeds of Propulsion Drives............................. 397
5.17 Automatic Propulsion Controls...................................... 397
5.19 Local Manual Control.....................................................398
5.21 Communications Systems............................................. 398
5.23 Station in Operating Compartment on Navigation
Bridge............................................................................ 398
7 Remote Propulsion Control Station Other than Navigation
Bridge ........................................................................................ 398
7.1 General.......................................................................... 398
7.3 Propulsion Machinery Space......................................... 399
9 Propulsion and Associated Machinery Start-up..........................399
11 Arrangement and Monitoring of Machinery Space..................... 399
11.1 Bilges............................................................................. 399
11.3 Fire Prevention.............................................................. 399
11.5 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems................................ 400
11.7 Fire Alarm Call Points.................................................... 400
13 Safety System ............................................................................400
13.1 General.......................................................................... 400
13.3 Safety System Alarms................................................... 400
13.5 Override of Safety System Functions............................ 400
13.7 Restart of Propulsion Machinery....................................401
15 Equipment ..................................................................................401
15.1 Electrical Equipment...................................................... 401
15.3 Computer Based Equipment..........................................401
15.5 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Equipment.............................401
15.7 Acceptance Tests...........................................................401

TABLE 1 Instrumentation and Controllers on Remote Propulsion

Control Stations .................................................................402

SECTION 3 ACCU Notation................................................................................. 405

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 378
 1 Application ................................................................................. 405
3 System Requirements ............................................................... 405
3.1 General.......................................................................... 405
3.3 System Design...............................................................405
3.5 System Power Supply....................................................406
3.7 Supply and Arrangement............................................... 406
5 Location of Centralized Control Station ..................................... 406
7 Remote Controls from Centralized Control Station ....................406
9 Monitoring in Centralized Control Station................................... 406
9.1 Instrumentation.............................................................. 406
9.3 Operator Interface..........................................................407
9.5 Engineer’s Alarm........................................................... 407
11 Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge ..........................407
13 Monitoring Station in the Engineers’ Quarters ........................... 407
13.1 Engineers’ Public Space and Engineers’ Cabins...........407
13.3 Muting the Audible Alarms.............................................407
13.5 Communication..............................................................407
15 Safety Systems ..........................................................................408
15.1 General.......................................................................... 408
15.3 System Design...............................................................408
15.5 Automatic Start and Changeover...................................408
15.7 Automatic Slowdown..................................................... 408
15.9 Automatic Shutdown......................................................408
17 Specific Requirements for Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery 408
17.1 Propulsion Diesel Engines.............................................408
17.3 Propulsion Gas Turbines............................................... 408
17.5 Automatic Starting of Propulsion Auxiliaries.................. 409
17.7 Electric Propulsion......................................................... 409
17.9 Generators and Electrical Systems............................... 409
17.11 Propulsion Auxiliaries.................................................... 409
19 Propulsion Machinery Space ..................................................... 409
19.1 Fuel Oil System Arrangements......................................409
19.3 Bilge Level Monitoring................................................... 410
21 Fire Safety ................................................................................. 410
21.1 Fire Fighting Station.......................................................410
21.3 Fire Main System...........................................................410
21.5 Controls at Fire Fighting Station.................................... 411
21.7 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems................................ 411
23 Equipment...................................................................................412

TABLE 2 Instrumentation and Controllers in Centralized Control

Station – All Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery...............413

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 379
 TABLE 3 Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Medium and High Speed
(Trunk Piston) Diesel Engines............................................415
TABLE 4 Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Propulsion Gas Turbines.....417
TABLE 5A Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Electric Propulsion.............. 419
TABLE 5B Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Generator Prime Mover
for Electric Propulsion........................................................ 421
TABLE 6 Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Auxiliary Turbines and
Diesel Engines................................................................... 424
TABLE 7 Monitoring of Auxiliary Prime-movers and Electrical
Generators (See also 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2).......................... 426

SECTION 4 Craft Classed with ABCU Notation.................................................428

1 General....................................................................................... 428
3 Station in the Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge ....428
5 Centralized Monitoring Station ...................................................428
7 Communications......................................................................... 428
9 Sea Trials....................................................................................428

SECTION 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 24

meters (79 feet)................................................................................ 429
1 General....................................................................................... 429
3 Definitions................................................................................... 429
5 Required Plans and Data............................................................429
7 Electrical Cables and Console Wiring.........................................429
9 Alarms.........................................................................................430
11 Safety System.............................................................................430
13 Propulsion...................................................................................430
15 Propulsion-machinery Spaces.................................................... 430
15.1 Fire Protection............................................................... 430
15.3 Protection Against Flooding...........................................431
17 Operating Compartment ............................................................ 431

TABLE 8 Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment

(Applicable to craft complying with 4-7-5/17 ).................... 431

SECTION 6 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length.............................. 433

1 General....................................................................................... 433
3 Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment................. 433
5 Start in Gear Protection.............................................................. 433

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 380
 SECTION 7 Installation, Tests and Trials .......................................................... 434
1 General ...................................................................................... 434
3 Equipment Locations ................................................................. 434
3.1 Electromagnetic Avoidance........................................... 434
3.3 Moisture Condensation..................................................434
3.5 Signal Cables Installation.............................................. 434
5 Sea Trials ...................................................................................434
5.1 Propulsion Remote Control............................................434
5.3 Local Manual Control.....................................................435
5.5 Craft Receiving ACCU or ABCU Notation..................... 435

SECTION 8 Computer-based Systems ..............................................................436

1 Application ................................................................................. 436
3 Systems Requirements ..............................................................436
3.1 System Security (2017)................................................. 436
3.3 Program and Memory Data........................................... 436
3.5 Start-up After Power Failure.......................................... 436
3.7 Self-Monitoring...............................................................436
3.9 Power Supply.................................................................436
3.11 System Independence................................................... 436
3.13 Response Time..............................................................437
3.15 Fail-safe......................................................................... 437
3.17 Modifications..................................................................437
3.19 Recommendations on Cyber Resilience........................437
3.21 ABS Cybersecurity.........................................................438
5 Additional Requirements for Integrated Systems ...................... 438
5.1 General.......................................................................... 438
5.3 Component Independence............................................ 438
5.5 Data Communication..................................................... 438
7 Hardware ................................................................................... 439
7.1 Design for Ease of Maintenance....................................439
7.3 User Interface and Input Devices.................................. 439
7.5 Visual Display Unit.........................................................440
7.7 Graphical Display...........................................................440
7.9 Wireless Data Communication...................................... 440
9 Tests and Evidence.....................................................................442
9.1 System Categories........................................................ 442
9.3 Tests.............................................................................. 442

TABLE 1 Assignment to System Categories by Effects of Failure ... 443

TABLE 2 Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance .........................443

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 381
 SECTION 8 Appendix 1 - Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and
Evidence of Quality Assurance in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2................ 445
1 Evidence of Quality System .......................................................445
1.1 Quality Plan for Software............................................... 445
1.3 Inspection of Components (Only Hardware) from
Sub-suppliers.................................................................445
1.5 Quality Control in Production......................................... 445
1.7 Final Test Reports..........................................................445
1.9 Traceability of Software................................................. 445
3 Hardware and Software Description .......................................... 445
3.1 Software Description......................................................445
3.3 Hardware Description.................................................... 446
3.5 Failure Analysis for Safety Related Functions Only
(For Example FMEA)..................................................... 446
5 Evidence of Software Testing .................................................... 446
5.1 Evidence of Software Testing According to Quality
Plan................................................................................446
5.3 Analysis Regarding Existence and Fulfillment of
Programming Procedures for Safety Related
Functions....................................................................... 446
7 Hardware Tests ..........................................................................446
7.1 Type Tests......................................................................446
9 Software Tests ........................................................................... 447
9.1 Module Tests..................................................................447
9.3 Subsystem Tests............................................................447
9.5 System Tests................................................................. 447
11 Performance Tests .....................................................................447
11.1 Integration Tests............................................................ 447
11.3 Fault Simulation............................................................. 447
11.5 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)......................................447
13 On-board Tests .......................................................................... 447
13.1 Complete System Test...................................................447
13.3 Integration Tests............................................................ 447
13.5 Wireless Data Communication Tests............................. 447
15 Modifications ..............................................................................448
15.1 Tests After Modifications................................................448

SECTION 9 Equipment........................................................................................ 449

1 Application.................................................................................. 449
3 Environmental Test Conditions................................................... 449
5 Environmentally Controlled Space..............................................449
7 Electric and Electronic Equipment.............................................. 449
9 Hydraulic Equipment...................................................................449
11 Pneumatic Equipment.................................................................449
13 Installations.................................................................................450

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 382
 13.1 General.......................................................................... 450
13.3 Ranges in Ambient Temperatures................................. 450
13.5 Electromagnetic and Conducted Interference............... 450
13.7 Shielded Cables.............................................................450
13.9 Electrical Grounding...................................................... 450
13.11 Condensation.................................................................450
13.13 Cold Environment.......................................................... 450
13.15 Protection Against Falling Liquids or Leakage of
Fluid Medium................................................................. 450
13.17 Measuring and Sensing Devices................................... 451
13.19 Marking.......................................................................... 451
15 Equipment Tests ........................................................................ 451
15.1 Prototype Environmental Testing................................... 451
15.3 Production Unit Certification.......................................... 451
15.5 Type Approval Program................................................. 451

TABLE 9 Type Tests for Control, Monitoring and Safety Equipment. 452
TABLE 10 Tests for Unit Certification of Control, Monitoring and
Safety Equipment (2016)................................................... 463

FIGURE 1 Test Set-up for Conducted Low Frequency Test (See

Test No. 13 of 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9)................................... 462

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 383
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 1
General Provisions

1 Application

1.1 Scope
The installation of machinery and monitoring of the propulsion-machinery space in high-speed craft is to
be so arranged to permit the normal operation of the craft with the propulsion machinery space unattended.

The requirements contained in this Chapter are in addition to those in other Chapters of these Rules.

The following table indicates the applicability of the relevant requirements:

Craft's Length (L) Gross Tonnage (GT) Gross Tonnage (GT)

Under 500 500 or over

L < 24 m (79 ft) Use Section 4-7-6 N/A

24 m (79 ft) ≤ L ≤ m (150 ft) Use Section 4-7-5 Use Sections 4-7-1 through. 4-7-4 as
applicable

L > 46 m (150 ft) Use Section 4-7-5 Use Part 4, Chapter 9 of the Marine
Vessel Rules

Consideration will be given to craft of special design, such as surface effect craft, air cushion craft, etc.,
upon submission of manufacturer’s specification and drawings.

1.3 Propulsion and Maneuvering

Provisions of this Section are applicable:

i) Where it is intended that the propulsion machinery space be periodically unmanned and where it is
intended that the propulsion machinery be directly controlled from the operating compartment on
the navigation bridge or from any remote propulsion control station adjacent to or outside the
propulsion machinery space; or
ii) Where, in lieu of manning the propulsion machinery space locally, it is intended to monitor it and
to control and monitor the propulsion and auxiliary machinery from a continuously manned
centralized control station.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 384
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

3 Class Notations
Control and monitoring systems for propulsion, and monitoring systems for propulsion-machinery space
that comply with the relevant requirements of this Chapter will be distinguished in the Record as follows.
A certificate indicating the degree of automation, particulars and operating limitations, if any, will be
issued. A notation preceded by ✠ (Maltese cross) signifies that the installations have been assembled and
installed under survey by the Surveyor. A notation without ✠ (Maltese cross) signifies that pertinent
control and monitoring systems have not been assembled and installed under survey, but have subsequently
been surveyed and satisfactorily reported upon by the Surveyor.

3.1 Craft Greater Than 500 GT

3.1.1 ACCU Notation
Control and monitoring systems complying with Section 4-7-3 will be distinguished in the Record
by the notation ACCU.

3.1.2 ABCU Notation

Control and monitoring systems complying with Section 4-7-4 will be distinguished in the Record
by the notation ABCU.

Note:

ACCU or ABCU notation may be granted to craft of less than 500 GT, provided that the applicable requirements
in Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-4 of this Chapter are met.

3.3 Periodical Survey

The continuance of validity of these notations is subject to periodical survey of the propulsion remote
control and automation systems as outlined in Section 7-8-2 of the ABS Rules for Survey After
Construction (Part 7).

5 Definitions

5.1 General Definitions

5.1.1 Alarm
Visual and audible signals indicating an abnormal condition of a monitored parameter.

5.1.2 Control
The process of conveying a command or order to enable the desired action to be effected.

5.1.3 Control System

An assembly of devices interconnected or otherwise coordinated to convey the command or order.

5.1.4 Automatic Control

A means of control that conveys predetermined orders without action by an operator.

5.1.5 Instrumentation
A system designed to measure and to display the state of a monitored parameter and which may
include one or more of sensors, read-outs, displays, alarms and means of signal transmission.

5.1.6 Local Control

A device or array of devices located on or adjacent to a machine to enable it to be operated within
sight of the operator.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 385
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

5.1.7 Remote Control

A device or array of devices connected to a machine by mechanical, electrical, pneumatic,
hydraulic or other means and by which the machine may be operated remote from, and not
necessarily within sight of, the operator.

5.1.8 Remote Control Station

A location fitted with means of remote control and monitoring.

5.1.9 Monitoring System

A system designed to supervise the operational status of machinery or systems by means of
instrumentation, which provides displays of operational parameters and alarms indicating
abnormal operating conditions.

5.1.10 Safety System

An automatic control system designed to automatically lead machinery being controlled to a
predetermined less critical condition in response to a fault which may endanger the machinery or
the safety of personnel and which may develop too fast to allow manual intervention.

To protect an operating machine in the event of a detected fault, the automatic control system may
be designed to automatically:

i) Slow down the machine or to reduce its demand;

ii) Start a standby support service so that the machine may resume normal operation; or
iii) Shut down the machine.

For the purposes of this Chapter, automatic shutdown, automatic slowdown and automatic start of
standby pump are all safety system functions. Where “safety system” is stated hereinafter, it
means any or all three automatic control systems.

5.1.11 Emergency Shutdown Systems

Systems intended for manual activation in an emergency to stop a particular system’s function or
machinery operation.

5.1.12 Fail-safe
A designed failure state which has the least critical consequence. A system or a machine is fail-
safe when, upon the failure of a component or subsystem or its functions, the system or the
machine automatically reverts to a designed state of least critical consequence.

5.1.13 Systems Independence

Systems are considered independent where they do not share components such that a single failure
in any one component in a system will not render the other systems inoperative.

5.1.14 Propulsion Machinery

Propulsion machinery includes the propulsion prime mover, reduction gear, clutch, and
controllable pitch propellers, as applicable.

5.1.15 Unmanned Propulsion Machinery Space

Propulsion machinery space which can be operated without continuous attendance by the crew
locally in the machinery space and in the centralized control station.

5.1.16 Centralized Control Station

A propulsion control station fitted with instrumentation, control systems and actuators to enable
propulsion and auxiliary machinery be controlled and monitored, and the state of propulsion

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 386
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

machinery space to be monitored, without the need for regular local attendance in the propulsion
machinery space.

5.1.17 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

A failure analysis methodology used during design to postulate every failure mode and the
corresponding effect or consequences. Generally, the analysis is to begin by selecting the lowest
level of interest (part, circuit, or module level). The various failure modes that can occur for each
item at this level are identified and enumerated. The effect for each failure mode, taken singly and
in turn, is to be interpreted as a failure mode for the next higher functional level. Successive
interpretations will result in the identification of the effect at the highest function level, or the final
consequence. A tabular format is normally used to record the results of such a study.

5.1.18 Vital Auxiliary Pumps

Vital auxiliary pumps are that directly related to and necessary for maintaining the operation of
propulsion machinery. For diesel propulsion engines, fuel oil pump, lubricating oil pump, cooling
water pumps are examples of vital auxiliary pumps.

5.1.19 Summary-alarm
A common alarm activated by any abnormal condition of the monitored machinery or system.

5.1.20 Operating Compartment

The enclosed area from which the navigation and control of the craft is exercised.

5.1.21 Integrated Propulsion Machinery

A propulsion machinery having its auxiliaries (fuel oil pumps, cooling water pumps, etc.),
necessary for normal operation driven by the engine, the reduction gear or the propulsion shaft.

5.1.22 Data Communication Link (2017)

A data communication link is a connection between one location to another for the purpose of
transmitting and receiving data which can be further segmented into several communication
layers, according to international standards such as IEC 61158, ISO/IEC 7498-1 and IEC 61784.

5.3 Definitions for Computerized Systems

5.3.1 Programmable Electronic System (PES) (2017)
A Programmable Electronic System is a system based on one or more programmable electronic
devices, connected to (and including) input devices (e.g., sensors) and/or output devices/final
elements (e.g., actuators), for the purposes of control, protection or monitoring. The term “PES”
includes all elements in the system, including power supplies, extending from sensors or other
input devices, via data highways or other communicating paths, to the actuators, or other output
devices, associated software, peripherals and interfaces.

5.3.2 Integrated System

A combination of computer based systems, which are interconnected in order to allow
communication between computer systems; between computer systems and monitoring, control,
and craft management systems; and to allow centralized access to information and/or command/
control. For example, an integrated system may consist of systems capable of performing passage
execution (e.g., steering, speed control, traffic surveillance, voyage planning); machinery
management and control (e.g., power management, machinery monitoring, fuel oil/lubrication oil
transfer); cargo operations (e.g., cargo monitoring, inert gas generation, loading/discharging); etc.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 387
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

5.3.3 Interface
A transfer point at which information is exchanged. Examples of interfaces include: input/output
interface (for interconnection with sensors and actuators); communications interface (to enable
serial communications/networking with other computers or peripherals).

5.3.4 Peripheral
A device performing an auxiliary function in the system, e.g. printer, data storage device.

5.3.5 Worst Case Execution Time (WCET) (2018)

The WCET of a computational task is the maximum length of time the task could take to execute
on a specific hardware platform.

5.3.6 Worst Case Response Time (WCRT) (2018)

The WCRT is the maximum time taken from the input to the sensor (or input device), to the output
device (final element) completing its required action. This time period includes the time taken for
the Programmable Electronic System to carry out any software processing under WCET and
communicate with the sensors and final elements.

7 Plans and Data

The following plans and data are to be submitted for review, as applicable.

7.1 Specifications
A general description of the operation of the system is to be given. This is to include a list of monitoring
points, their alarm settings and their normal ranges.

7.3 System Design Plans

7.3.1 Propulsion Remote Control System
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for the following items:

● Propulsion control (e.g., from operating compartment on navigation bridge, centralized

control station, etc.)
● Control transfer
● Independent local manual control
● Starting of propulsion machinery
● Critical speeds
● Shaft turning gear
● Propulsion manual emergency shutdown
● Operating compartment/Navigation bridge instrumentation
● Communications systems
7.3.2 Propulsion Machinery Control from the Centralized Control Station
Operational descriptions for the following items:

● Propulsion gas turbines

● Propulsion diesel engines
● Electric propulsion
7.3.3 Propulsion Machinery Safety System
Operational descriptions for the following items:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 388
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

● Initiation of automatic shutdown

● Initiation of automatic slowdown
● Initiation of automatic starting of standby units
● Override of automatic shutdown
● Override of automatic slowdown
● Re-start of propulsion machinery
7.3.4 Propulsion Machinery Monitoring System
Description of monitoring systems including a list of alarms and displays including preset
parameters for the following items:

● Centralized control station alarm and instrumentation

● Operating compartment/Navigation bridge instrumentation
● Monitoring station in the engineer’s accommodation
7.3.5 Generator Prime Mover Remote Control Systems
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for remote control, monitoring and safety
systems of generator prime movers including, but not limited to, the a list of alarms and displays,
initiation of automatic shutdown, automatic changeover of prime mover auxiliaries, preset
parameter, etc., at each of the following control stations, as applicable:

● Centralized control station

● Operating compartment/Navigation bridg
● Monitoring station in engineer’s accommodation
7.3.6 Electrical Power Generating System
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for remote control and monitoring and displays
at each of the control stations indicated in 4-7-1/7.3.5, as applicable, along with a description of
the power management systems.

7.3.7 Remote Auxiliary Machinery Control Systems

Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for the following auxiliary machinery controls:

● Controls from centralized control station

● Control of electric generators, including automatic starting of electric generator and electric
power management system
● Control of auxiliary machinery
● Automatic starting of vital auxiliary pumps
7.3.8 Failure Modes and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
Information containing at least the following is to be submitted for review:

● System block diagrams showing system breakdown and components of interests.

● A tabulation of the following:
– A tabulation of the following:
– Systems and components of interests
– Potential failures
– Failure detection
– Responses of the system to the failures

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 389
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

– Possible consequences of failure

– Conclusions, comments or recommendations
7.3.9 Fire Safety Arrangements
Schematic diagrams and descriptions of the fire detection and alarm systems, fire precautions, fire
extinguishing equipment, and fire fighting station arrangements.

7.3.10 Communication Systems

Schematic diagrams and arrangements of internal communication systems.

7.3.11 Power Supply Arrangements

Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions of power supply to the control, monitoring and
safety systems.

7.3.12 Programmable Electronic System (PES) (2018)

The following are to be submitted as appropriate:

● Block diagram showing system configuration including user interface, description of

hardware specifications, hardware FMEA, fail-safe features, security arrangements, power
supply, systems (control, monitoring and safety shutdown) independence.
● Software logic flow chart, description of software functions, self-test feature, and
documentation on quality standard of software development and testing.
● Calculations and/or methods used to determine the Worst Case Response Time (WCRT) for
4-9-3/7.1 TABLE 1 of the Marine Vessel Rules Category III Systems’ alarms with respect to
design data volume and CPU(s) capability including: data communication protocol(s) and the
Worst Case Execution Time (WCET) of the alarm processing task(s). This requirement is also
applicable to Category III Systems reduced to Category II, due to independent effective back
up or other means of averting danger for the control functions (such as mitigation of alarms
missing deadlines).
7.3.13 Wireless Data Communication Equipment
The following documentation is to be submitted for wireless data communication equipment.

i) Documentation which demonstrates that the wireless data communication equipment

provides an improvement in the safety of the vessel, compared to wired data
communication. See 4-7-8/7.9.3.
ii) General details of the wireless system and equipment.
iii) Risk analysis. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(a).
iv) Evidence of type testing. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(b).
v) On-board test schedule. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(c).
vi) Details of manufacturers recommended installation and maintenance practices. Network
plan with arrangement and type of antennas and identification of location. Details of the
wireless data communication network. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(d).
vii) Specification of wireless communication system protocols and management functions.
See 4-7-8/7.9.3(e).
viii) Details of radio-frequency and power levels. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(f).
ix) For functions that are provided with an alternative means of control, a description of the
functions and a description of the alternative means of control. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(g).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 390
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

7.5 Control Console Plans

Schematic diagrams, parts list (including manufacturer’s names and model names), function descriptions,
construction plans and outline view of the following equipment:

● Operating compartment/Navigation bridge console

● Centralized control and monitoring console

7.7 Installation Plans

7.7.1 Installation Arrangements
Locations of centralized control station (if provided) and remote control stations in the operating
compartment on the navigation bridge; arrangements of the centralized control station containing
control consoles and other equipment, including glass windows, doors, and ventilation fitting, as
applicable.

7.7.2 Electrical One-line Diagrams

Type, size and protection of cables between control and monitoring equipment.

9 Conceptual Requirements for System Design

The following are conceptual requirements for control system design in general and are to be complied
with except where specially exempted.

9.1 Fail-safe
Fail-safe concept is to be applied to the design of all remote control systems, manual emergency control
systems and safety systems. In consideration of its application, due regard is to be given to safety of
individual machinery, the system of which the machinery forms a part, and the craft as a whole.

9.3 System Independence (2020)

Systems performing different functions (e.g., monitoring systems, control systems and safety systems) are
to be, as much as practicable, independent of each other such that a single failure in one will not render the
others inoperative. Specifically, the shutdown function of the safety system is to be independent of control
and monitoring systems. Common sensors will be acceptable for any functions other than shutdown
functions and automatic start/ changeover of the required pumps as listed in 4-7-3/Table 2 through 4-7-3/
Table 5B.

9.5 Local Control

In general, local manual controls are to be fitted to enable safe operation during commissioning and
maintenance, and to allow for effective control in the event of an emergency or failure of remote control.
The fitting of remote controls is not to compromise the level of safety and operability of the local controls

9.7 Monitoring Systems

Monitoring systems are to have the following detail features.

9.7.1 Independence of Visual and Audible Alarm Circuits

As much as practicable, a fault in the visual alarm circuits is not to affect the operation of the
audible alarm circuits.

9.7.2 Audible Alarms (2018)

Audible alarms associated with machinery are to be distinct from other alarms, such as fire alarm,
general alarm, gas detection alarm, etc., and are to be of sufficient loudness to attract the attention
of duty personnel. For spaces of unusual high noise level, a beacon light or similar, installed in a
conspicuous place is to supplement the audible alarm in such spaces; however, red light beacons
are only to be used for fire alarms.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 391
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

9.7.3 Visual Alarms

Visual alarms are to be a flashing signal when first activated. The flashing display is to change to a
steady display upon acknowledgment. The steady display is to remain activated, either
individually or in the summarized fashion, until the fault condition is rectified. Other
arrangements capable of attracting the operator’s attention to an alarm condition in an effective
manner will be considered.

9.7.4 Acknowledgment of Alarms

Newly activated alarms are to be acknowledged by manual means. This means is to mute the
audible signal and change the flashing visual display to steady display. Other alarm conditions,
occurring during the process of acknowledgment, are to be alarmed and displayed. The latter
alarm is not to be suppressed by the acknowledgment of the former alarm.

The acknowledgment of the alarm at an associated remote control station is not to mute and steady
the same alarm signals at the centralized control station.

9.7.5 Temporarily Disconnecting Alarms

Alarm circuits may be temporarily disabled, for example for maintenance purposes, provided that
such action is clearly indicated at the associated station in control and at the centralized control
station, if fitted. For ACCU fire alarm systems, see 4-7-3/21.7.

9.7.6 Built-in Alarm Testing

Audible alarms and visual alarm indicating lamps are to be provided with means of testing that
can be operated without disrupting the normal operation of the monitoring systems.

9.7.7 Self-Monitoring
Monitoring system is to include a self-monitoring mechanism such that a fault (e.g., power failure,
sensor failure, etc.) may be detected and alarmed.

9.9 Safety Systems

In addition to complying with 4-7-1/9.1 through 4-7-1/9.7, safety systems are also to comply with the
following:

i) Means are to be provided to indicate the cause of the safety action.

ii) Alarms are to be given in the operating compartment on the navigation bridge, at the centralized
control station and at the local manual control position, as applicable, upon the activation of safety
system.
iii) Propulsion machinery shutdown by safety system is not to be designed to restart automatically,
unless first actuated by a manual reset.
iv) Safety system for the protection of one machine unit is to be independent of that of the other units.

9.11 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

Failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA) may be carried out during system design to investigate if any
single failure in control systems would lead to undesirable consequences such as loss of propulsion, loss of
propulsion control, etc. The analysis may be qualitative or quantitative.

11 Power Supply

11.1 General
Power source for control, monitoring and safety systems may be electric, hydraulic or pneumatic or a
combination thereof. Each power supply is to be monitored and its failure is to be alarmed.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 392
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

11.3 Electric
Where the power supply is electric, each of the control, monitoring and safety systems is to be supplied by
a separate circuit. Each of these circuits is to be protected for short circuit and monitored for voltage
failure.

11.5 Hydraulic
Where the power supply is hydraulic, hydraulic pumps are to be fitted in duplicate. The reservoir is to be
of sufficient capacity to contain all the fluid when drained from the system, maintain the fluid level at an
effective working level and allow air and foreign matter to separate out. The pump suctions are to be sized
and positioned to prevent cavitation or starvation of pump. A duplex filter, which can be cleaned without
interrupting the oil supply, is to be fitted on the discharge side of pumps. The hydraulic fluid is to be
suitable for its intended operation. Hydraulic supplies to safety and control systems may be derived from
the same source but are to be by means of separate lines.

11.7 Pneumatic
Compressed air for control and monitoring systems is to be supplied from at least two air compressors. The
starting air system, where consisting of two air compressors, may be used for this purpose. The system is
to be arranged such that a single failure will not result in the loss of air supply. The required air pressure is
to be automatically maintained.

Means are to be provided to assure that the compressed air for control and monitoring systems is clean, dry
and oil-free to a specification compatible with the control and monitoring equipment. In this regard, the
compressors, cooling equipment, filters and dryers are to be selected and arranged as necessary to ensure
the quality of the air supplied will comply with the standards or criteria identified by the manufacturers of
the pneumatic equipment being installed in the system (e.g., max. solid particle size/density, max. dew
point, max. oil content, etc.).

Air supplies to safety systems and control systems may be derived from the same source, but are to be by
separate lines incorporating shutoff valves.

13 Automatic Safety Shutdown

To avert rapid deterioration of propulsion and auxiliary machinery, the following automatic shutdowns are
to be provided, regardless of the mode of control: manual, remote or automatic. These shutdowns are not
to be fitted with manual override.

i) For all diesel engines:

● Overspeed
ii) For all gas turbines (see 4-2-3/7.7.5 TABLE 1 of the Marine Vessel Rules):

● Failure of lubricating oil system

● Failure of flame or ignition
● High exhaust gas temperature
● High compressor vacuum
● Overspeed
● Excessive vibration
● Excessive axial displacement of rotors
iii) For propulsion reduction gears:

● Shutdown prime movers upon failure of reduction gear lubricating oil system.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 393
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1

iv) For generators:

● For generators fitted with forced lubrication system only: shutdown prime movers upon
failure of generator lubricating oil system (see 4-6-4/3.15).
v) For propulsion DC motor

● Overspeed

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 394
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 2
Remote Propulsion Control

1 Application
The requirements in this Section apply to craft capable of operating the craft from the operating
compartment on the navigation bridge but because of their compact propulsion-machinery space design are
not fitted with the means to control the propulsion and its associated machinery from a centralized location
within or adjacent to the propulsion-machinery space. Where the propulsion machinery space is
continuously manned, these requirements may be varied in accordance with the requirements of the Flag
Administration.

3 System Requirements

3.1 General
The remote propulsion control station within the operating compartment is to be:

i) As effective as local control;

ii) Provided with control of speed and direction of thrust of the propeller; and
iii) Provided with instrumentation sufficient to provide the operator with information about the state
of the propulsion machinery and the control system itself.

3.3 System Design

In general, conceptual requirements in 4-7-1/9 are to be applied. Further requirements are provided in
4-7-2/5 through 4-7-2/9 hereunder.

Note:

The notation ABCU may be assigned to a craft which complies with the requirements in Section 4-7-4 in addition to 4-7-2/5
through 4-7-2/9.

3.5 System Power Supply

3.5.1 General
Power supply requirements provided in 4-7-1/11, as applicable, are to be complied with. If
electric, the power supply to each of the control, monitoring and safety systems is to be
individually monitored.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 395
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

3.5.2 Power Supply Failure

In the event of failure of the power supply the following are to be effected:

● Operate an alarm at the operating compartment on navigation bridge and at the local manual
station or the centralized control station, if fitted; and
● The propulsion prime movers are to continue to operate at the last ordered speed and the
propellers at the last ordered direction of thrust until local control is in operation or control
power is safely resumed.

5 Remote Propulsion Control on Navigation Bridge

5.1 General
Where propulsion machinery is to be controlled from the operating compartment on the navigation bridge,
means for control and monitoring are to be as provided in 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1. The following control and
monitoring features are also to be provided. These requirements do not apply to bridge wing propulsion
control stations.

5.3 Propeller Control

The speed, direction of thrust and, where applicable, the pitch of the propeller, are to be fully controllable
from the operating compartment on the navigation bridge under all sailing conditions, including
maneuvering. The control is to be performed by a single control device for each independent propeller,
with automatic performance of all associated services, including, where necessary, means of preventing
overload of the propulsion machinery. Where multiple propellers are designed to operate simultaneously,
they may be controlled by one control device.

5.5 Ordered Speed and Direction

When under navigation bridge control, ordered speed and direction of propulsion machinery, including
pitch of propellers, where applicable, are to be indicated at the local propulsion machinery control position,
and at the centralized control station if fitted.

5.7 Emergency Shutdown

A manually operated emergency-stopping device for the propulsion machinery is to be provided on the
navigation bridge. This device is to be independent of the remote propulsion control system. The shutdown
may only be activated by the deliberate action of the operator and is to be so arranged as to prevent its
inadvertent operation.

5.9 Starting of Propulsion Machinery

Where it is necessary to restart the propulsion machinery in order to reverse it to go astern, means to start
the propulsion machinery is to be provided on the navigation bridge. In such cases, and in other cases
where propulsion machinery can be started from a remote control station, the following are to be provided:

i) An alarm to indicate a low level starting medium energy condition, e.g., a low starting air
pressure, which is to be set at a level to permit further starting operation.
ii) A display to indicate starting medium energy level, e.g., starting air pressure.
iii) Where automatic starting of the propulsion machinery is fitted, the number of consecutive
automatic attempts is to be limited in order to safeguard sufficient capacity for local manual
starting.
iv) Starting of the propulsion machinery is to be automatically inhibited where conditions exist which
may damage the propulsion machinery (e.g., shaft-turning gear engaged, insufficient lubricating
oil pressure, etc.). The activation of such inhibition is to be alarmed at the remote control station.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 396
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

5.11 Transfer Between Remote Control Stations (2019)

Remote control of the propulsion machinery is to be possible only from one location at a time. At each
location there is to be an indicator showing which location is in control of the propulsion machinery. The
following protocol is to be observed for transfer of control between stations:

i) The transfer of propulsion control between stations is to take effect only with acknowledgment by
the receiving station. This, however, does not apply to transfer of control between the centralized
control station and the local manual control.
ii) The transfer of propulsion control between the operating compartment on the navigation bridge
and the propulsion machinery space is to be possible only in the propulsion machinery space (i.e.,
at either the centralized control station or the local manual control position).
iii) The centralized control station as required for ACC per 4-7-3/3.1 or engine room remote
propulsion control station, if fitted, is to be capable of assuming propulsion control at any time or
blocking orders from other remote control stations. However, where special operating
requirements of the craft prevail, override control over the centralized control station will be
considered.

Notes:
Special consideration upon submittal of proposal should address where engine room takeover is not desired taking
into account the following, as applicable:
● Mission deck over the side operations
● Azimuth drives providing both propulsion and steering control
● Itemized alarms in the navigation bridge instead of the required summary alarm for ACCU per Line D1 of
4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1
● DPS class notation where all thruster controls are to be available to the DP operator at all times
● ACCU unattended machinery spaces
● Proximity of distance between the remote control station and local controls
● The proposal may subject to flag State acceptance with respect to the requirements of the governmental
authority whose flag the craft flies.
iv) Transfer of control between stations should be accomplished smoothly and control of the
controlled equipment is to be maintained during the transfer.

5.13 Failure of Propulsion Control or Failure of Control Transfer

In the event of failure of the propulsion control system or failure of control transfer, the propulsion units
are to continue to operate at the last ordered speed and direction of thrust of the propellers until local
control is in operation or control power is safely resumed. However, considerations will be given to special
cases, where due to the intended craft’s propulsion design and operational requirements, it may be
necessary to automatically bring the craft to slow speed without hazarding passengers or the craft.

5.15 Critical Speeds of Propulsion Drives

Adequate means are to be provided at the remote propulsion control station to alert the station operator of
operation of the propulsion drives within barred speed ranges.

5.17 Automatic Propulsion Controls

Automatic propulsion control systems are to be designed to maintain the controlled machinery within
preset parameters and to ensure the machinery operation in the correct sequence and time intervals.
Deviation from these preset conditions is to force the sequential controls to a safe sequence stage that will
not be detrimental to the propulsion machinery and overall safety of the craft. Additionally, the automatic
propulsion control system is to be designed and arranged so that a failure in the system is not to
compromise the integrity nor the manual operation of the propulsion machinery.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 397
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

5.19 Local Manual Control

Means are to be provided for local manual control so that satisfactory operation of the propulsion
machinery can be exercised in the event of the failure of the remote propulsion control system. For this
purpose, indicators for propeller speed and direction of rotation (for fixed pitch propellers) or pitch
position (for controllable pitch propellers) are to be provided at this local manual control station. The
means of communication, as required by 4-6-2/15, is to be fitted at this manual control station.

It is also to be possible to control auxiliary machinery, which are essential for propulsion and safety of the
craft, at or near the machinery concerned.

5.21 Communications Systems

For communication systems associated with propulsion control stations, the requirements in 4-6-2/15 are
applicable.

5.23 Station in Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge

Effective control of the propulsion machinery from the operating compartment, is to be performed with
automatic performance of all associated functions, including, where necessary, means of preventing
overload of the propulsion machinery. The required means for automatic control to operate the propulsion
machinery is to be capable of meeting load demands from standby to full system rated load under all
operating conditions, without the need for manual adjustment or manipulation.

The operating compartment control station is to include the controls, displays and alarms as required in
4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1. In addition, the following controls arranged for easy reach of the crew member for
use in an emergency are to be provided at the operating compartment:

i) Stopping the main propulsion and auxiliary machinery. The stopping device for the main
propulsion is to be independent of the navigation bridge control system.
ii) Disconnecting all electrical power sources from the normal power distribution system (the
operating control is be so arranged to preclude its inadvertent or careless operation).
iii) Stopping the machinery-space ventilation blowers and closing of openings.
iv) Stopping all fuel-oil pumps and forced-draft blowers.
v) If provided, closing machinery-space skylights.
vi) Closing machinery-space watertight and fire resistant doors.
vii) Closing propulsion-machinery space fuel oil tanks suction valves.
viii) Starting the emergency generator or connecting a source of emergency power, unless automatic
operation is provided.
ix) Means for starting any one of the fire pumps (inclusive of the one located outside the propulsion
machinery space) including associated valves necessary to deliver required capacity to the fire
main.
x) Releasing of the fire-fighting media for the propulsion-machinery space. This release is to be
manual and not initiated automatically by signals from the fire-detecting system.

7 Remote Propulsion Control Station Other than Navigation Bridge

7.1 General
Where a remote propulsion control station is provided at a location other than the navigation bridge, such
station is to comply with requirements applicable to that at the navigation bridge, with the exception of the
provision of a telegraph.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 398
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

7.3 Propulsion Machinery Space

Where a remote propulsion control station is provided in or in the vicinity of the propulsion machinery
space to supplement the operation of a locally manned propulsion machinery space, such a station is to be
fitted with:

● Remote propulsion control station as in 4-7-2/7.1;

● Alarms, displays and controls as required in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2; and
● Alarms and displays of 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 6, as applicable.

9 Propulsion and Associated Machinery Start-up

Starting of the propulsion and associated machinery or preparing the engines for sea may be performed
manually, but if done automatically this is to be programmed that the propulsion machinery cannot be
started until all engine auxiliaries are functioning correctly.

11 Arrangement and Monitoring of Machinery Space

11.1 Bilges
11.1.1 General (1 July 2021)
The propulsion-machinery space is to be provided with a bilge water-level system to detect
excessive water influx or rise in the propulsion-machinery space bilges, at the various angles of
craft’s heel and trim; during and following any single fault to a sensor, wire, or control and
monitoring system component. The bilge wells are to be large enough to accommodate the normal
drainage. Excessive water influx or rise in the bilge wells is to be alarmed at the centralized
control and monitoring station (if fitted) and the operating compartment on navigation bridge. See
also 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1 and 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2 for alarms and displays.

For a machinery space with one bilge well port, one bilge well center, and one bilge well
starboard, two bilge level sensors are required in each bilge well such that a fault in one sensor,
wire, or control and monitoring system component does not prevent detection and alarm of high
bilge level at various angles of craft’s heel and trim. However, if two bilge level sensors cannot be
installed in a bilge well due to a compact design of the bilge well, just one additional
representative level sensor may be accepted provided the additional level sensor is installed to
back-up the level sensor in port, starboard and center at various angles of vessel's heel and trim.

For vessels less than 150 ft (46 meters) in length, the propulsion-machinery space may be
provided with a single bilge water-level alarm system for each bilge well to detect excessive water
influx or rise in the propulsion-machinery space bilge levels. Sufficient number of bilge wells are
to be provided so that rise in the propulsion-machinery space bilge levels is detected at various
angles of vessel’s heel and trim during and following any single fault to a sensor, wire, or control
and monitoring system component. The bilge wells are to be large enough to accommodate the
normal drainage. High water level in the bilge wells is to be alarmed at the centralized control
station.

11.1.2 Excessive Automatic Starting of Bilge Pumps

Means are to be provided to indicate, at the centralized control and monitoring station (if fitted),
and the operating compartment on navigation bridge when the influx of liquid is greater than the
pump capacity or when the pump is operating more frequently than would normally be expected.
Additionally, special attention is to be given to oil pollution prevention requirements.

11.3 Fire Prevention

To minimize the outbreak of fire,the following is to be provided:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 399
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

i) In high pressure fuel-oil piping (see 4-2-1/7.3), an oil leakage condition is to be alarmed at the
operating compartment on the navigation bridge and at the centralized control and monitoring
station (if fitted).
ii) Drip trays for collecting oil as required in 4-4-1/9.23 are to be of suitable height and provided with
suitable drainage to a collecting tank incorporating a high level alarm audible at the centralized
control and monitoring station (if fitted).
iii) Fuel oil pumps and filters are to be shielded, or grouped in a special room or location ventilated by
suction.

11.5 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

Propulsion machinery space is to be provided with a fixed fire detection and alarm system complying with
4-5-1/13. This fixed fire detection and alarm system may be combined with other fire detection and alarm
systems required on board the craft. The fire control panel is to be located on the navigation bridge or in
the fire fighting station, if fitted. If located in the fire fighting station, a repeater panel is to be fitted on the
navigation bridge. Propulsion machinery space fire is to be alarmed in the centralized control station.

11.7 Fire Alarm Call Points

Manually operated fire alarm call points are to be provided in, and in the passageways leading to, the
propulsion-machinery space.

13 Safety System

13.1 General
In all cases, the automatic safety shutdowns in 4-7-1/13 are to be provided. Other safety system functions,
such as automatic startup of standby pump or automatic slowdown, as appropriate, may be provided.

13.3 Safety System Alarms

13.3.1 Threshold Warning for Safety System Activations
Where the propulsion machinery is capable of remote control from the navigation bridge
regardless of manned or unmanned machinery space, automation systems are to be designed in a
manner such that a threshold warning of impending or imminent slowdown or shutdown of the
propulsion system is given to the officer in charge of the navigational watch in time to assess
navigational circumstances in an emergency.

In particular, the systems are to control, monitor, report, alert and take safety action to slow down
or shut down propulsion while providing the officer in charge of the navigational watch an
opportunity to manually intervene (override), except for those cases where manual intervention
will result in total failure of the engine and/or propulsion equipment within a short time, for
example in the case of over speed.

13.3.2 Alarms for Safety System Activations

Activation of the safety system to automatic slowdown or automatic shutdown of propulsion
machinery is each to be arranged with an individual alarm at the remote propulsion control station.
The audible alarm may be silenced at the control station, however the visual alarm is to remain
activated until it is acknowledged in the machinery space.

13.5 Override of Safety System Functions (2021)

Automatic slowdowns and automatic shutdowns indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5 may be
provided with override, except those specified in 4-7-1/13. Automatic slowdowns and automatic
shutdowns where provided in excess of those indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5 are to be
provided with override. Overrides are to be as follows:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 400
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

i) The activation of the override is to be alarmed and clearly identifiable at the remote propulsion
control station and is to be so designed that it cannot be left activated.
ii) Overrides fitted on the navigation bridge are to be operable only when the propulsion control is
from the operating compartment on navigation bridge.
iii) The override actuator is to be arranged to preclude inadvertent operation.

Note: For multi-engine propulsion or power generating plants, override of automatic shutdowns and automatic
slowdowns, where provided in excess of those indicated in 4-7-3/TABLE 2 through 4-7-3/TABLE 7 may
be not required if maneuverability and operation of the craft is maintained after activation of shutdown
or slowdown on one of the engines. A risk analysis, or equivalent, demonstrating the safety system
design is to be submitted. Alternatively, it may be demonstrated by testing that propulsion and
maneuverability is maintained following a safety function (shutdown) on one of the propulsion plants in
the presence of an ABS Surveyor.

13.7 Restart of Propulsion Machinery

Propulsion machinery shutdown by safety system is not to resume operation until it is reset manually.

15 Equipment
Remote propulsion controls fitted on craft not receiving ACCU or ABCU notations are to be in
accordance with the following requirements.

15.1 Electrical Equipment

Requirements in 4-7-9/7 are applicable.

15.3 Computer Based Equipment

Requirements in Section 4-7-8 are applicable. Equipment type tests in 4-7-8/7.9, duplication of equipment
and duplication of data links in integrated systems in 4-7-8/5 and duplication of monitor in centralized
control station (if fitted) in 4-7-8/7.5 are not applicable.

15.5 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Equipment

The requirements of 4-7-9/9 and 4-7-9/11 are applicable in general. However, flash point limitation on
hydraulic fluids is applicable only to craft to be assigned with ACCU or ABCU notations.

15.7 Acceptance Tests

All equipment is to be performance tested in the presence of a Surveyor in accordance with 4-7-9/15.5
TABLE 10 either in the shop or after installation. All installations are to be functionally tested to the
satisfaction of the surveyor on board and during sea trials, see Section 4-7-7.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 401
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

TABLE 1
Instrumentation and Controllers on Remote Propulsion Control Stations

Notes
[ A = Alarm; D = Display;
System Monitored/Controlled Parameter A D C
C = Controller/Actuator ]
[ x = applies ]

Propulsion A1 Propeller speed x x

control &
A2 Propeller direction x x
monitoring
A3 Propeller pitch x x As applicable

A4 Telegraph x x Applicable to operating compartment

only

A5 Emergency shutdown of propulsion x To be protected from accidental tripping

engine

A6 Starting of propulsion engine x For reversible engines only

A7 Stored starting energy level – low x x For reversible engines and engines fitted
with means of starting at remote control
station

A8 Inhibition of starting of propulsion x Where remote engine starting is fitted

engine

A9 Automatic shutdown activated x

A10 Automatic slowdown activated x If provided

A11 Safety system override x x x If fitted (see 4-7-2/13.5). To be of a

design that cannot be left activated

A12 Shaft turning gear engaged x To automatically inhibit starting of

engine

A13 Operating in barred speed range x

A14 Main engine, overspeed x

A15 Threshold warning for safety system x For navigation bridge only (see
activations 4-7-2/13.3.2).

System B1 Power source – fails x

monitoring
B2 Individual power supply to control, x x Alarm may be common.
monitoring and safety systems – fails \See 4-2-1/7.3.3 Marine Vessel Rules) for
main power supply failure alarm for
governor control system (no display is
required)

B3 Alarm system – disconnected x

B4 Integrated computerized system: data x Alarm is to be activated before critical

highway abnormal conditions data overload.

B5 Integrated computerized system: x

duplicated data link – failure of one link

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 402
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

Notes
[ A = Alarm; D = Display;
System Monitored/Controlled Parameter A D C
C = Controller/Actuator ]
[ x = applies ]

Others C1 Control station transfer x x Display: to indicate the station in control.

Control: to provide 1) transfer switch &
2) acknowledgment switch.

C2 Normal power supply to the powered x Distinct from other alarms

directional or trim control devices,
failure

C3 Any permanently installed nickel- x Associated with propulsion, steering and

cadmium battery, thermal runway trim related machinery

C4 Compass system, failure x Distinct from other alarms

C5 Side, masthead or stern navigation x Distinct from other alarms

lights, extinction

C6 Air conditioning system – fails x If necessary for equipment environment

control

Additional requirements for Navigation Bridge for craft assigned with ACCU or ABCU

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 403
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2

Notes
[ A = Alarm; D = Display;
System Monitored/Controlled Parameter A D C
C = Controller/Actuator ]
[ x = applies ]

ACCU/ D1 Summary alarms – activated by alarm x Distinct from other alarms

ABCU conditions in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2 and
4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 6 as
applicable.

D2 High voltage rotating machine – x 4-6-5/1.11.1(c)

Stationary windings temperature – high

D3 Controllable pitch propeller hydraulic x x If standby unit is provided with automatic

power unit run/start/stop starting, such starting is to be alarmed.

D4 Vital auxiliary pumps, start/stop and x For ABCU craft with non-integrated
transfer switches machinery, it may be combined with
emergency controls

D5 FO settling and service tanks, level low/ x Distinct from other alarms
high

D6 FO tank, heater temperature high x

D7 FO and LO collect. Tank, level high or x Distinct from other alarms

overflow

D8 High pressure FO system, leakage x Distinct from other alarms

D9 Essential fluid reservoirs, level low x Contents of which are essential for
normal craft operation

D10 Ventilation system, failure x For ventilating spaces in which

inflammable vapors may accumulate

D11 System power source: main and x x

emergency feeder – status and failure

D12 Propulsion machinery space – fire x

detected

D13 Start main fire pump and pressurize fire x x

main

D14 Propulsion machinery space – bilge x

level high

D15 Bilge pump operation, automatic x Distinct from other alarms

operation

D16 Emergency controls x

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 404
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 3
ACCU Notation

1 Application
Where, in lieu of manning the propulsion machinery space locally, it is intended to monitor the propulsion
machinery space and to control and monitor the craft’s propulsion and auxiliary machinery, steering and
trim related machinery from a centralized control station and from the navigation bridge during
periodically unattended propulsion machinery space, the provisions of Section 4-7-1 and Section 4-7-2 and
this Section are to be complied with. These provisions cover propulsion machinery during start-up,
navigating and maneuvering, and do not cover operations in port or at mooring or anchorage.

The notation ACCU will be assigned upon verification of compliance and upon satisfactory tests and trails
carried out in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-7-7 in the presence of a Surveyor.

3 System Requirements

3.1 General
In general, the craft is to be fitted with:

i) A remote propulsion control station on the navigation bridge complying with 4-7-3/1 with
capability to monitor the propulsion machinery space and the machinery plant;
ii) A centralized control station complying with 4-7-3/5 through 4-7-3/9, which is to be further
provided with safety system functions capable of taking automated corrective actions in the event
of a fault in the machinery plant; such a station may be periodically unattended;
iii) A monitoring station in the engineers’ quarters capable of alarming any undesirable state of the
propulsion machinery space and of the machinery plant; and
iv) A fire fighting station with means to effect rapid response to control fire in the propulsion
machinery space.

3.3 System Design

In general, conceptual requirements in 4-7-1/9 are applicable. Specific details are provided in 4-7-3/7
through 4-7-3/21. FMEA (4-7-1/9.11) is to be conducted to demonstrate that control, monitoring and safety
systems are so designed that any single failure will not result in the loss of propulsion control, the loss of
propulsion or other undesirable consequences. The FMEA report is to be submitted for review.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 405
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

3.5 System Power Supply

3.5.1 Power Source
Electrical power supply is to meet the requirements of 4-7-2/3.5. In addition, power for control,
monitoring and safety systems is to be fed from two feeders, one from the main switchboard or
other suitable distribution board, and the other from the emergency switchboard or an emergency
distribution board. The supply status of these feeders is to be displayed and their failure is to be
alarmed at the centralized control station and the navigation bridge.

3.5.2 Power Transfer

The two feeders are to be connected to a transfer switch in the centralized control station. Power
supply to controls, monitoring and safety systems may be commonly connected to the transfer
switch. The transfer between the power supplies is to be effected automatically upon failure of a
supply and by manual means at the centralized control station. Power transfer is to be achieved
without a break in power supply.

3.7 Supply and Arrangement

3.7.1 Continuity of Power
Provision is to be made for automatic starting and connecting to the main switchboard of a
standby generator of sufficient capacity to permit propulsion and steering and to ensure the safety
of the craft with automatic re-starting of the essential auxiliaries including, where necessary,
sequential operations. This standby electric power to be available in no more than 45 seconds. To
satisfy the aforementioned requirement, the operation of propulsion machinery and vital services
may be at reduced power.

5 Location of Centralized Control Station

The centralized control station is to be located within, or adjacent to, the propulsion machinery space.
Consideration will be given to this station being located away from the propulsion machinery space,
provided its operation and monitoring of the propulsion machinery and propulsion machinery space is to
be as effective as if it is located either within or adjacent to the propulsion machinery space.

Where this station is in an enclosure located in or adjacent to machinery space, at least two means of
access, separated as remote from each other as practicable, are to be provided. Where fitted, glass windows
forming parts of the boundaries, are to be of shatter-resistance type (e.g., laminated glass or wire mesh
embedded glass).

7 Remote Controls from Centralized Control Station

Necessary controls to operate the propulsion machinery and its associated auxiliary systems are to be
provided in the centralized control station. This includes the following control functions.

i) Remote propulsion control as provided in Section 4-7-2.

ii) Put on-line a standby generator as described in 4-7-3/17.9.1.
iii) Start, stop and transfer auxiliaries necessary for the operation of propulsion and power generation
machinery as described in 4-7-3/17.11.

All required controls are shown in the “C” column of 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2.

9 Monitoring in Centralized Control Station

9.1 Instrumentation
Alarms and displays for monitoring propulsion and auxiliary machinery and for propulsion machinery
space are to be provided in the centralized control station as specified in columns “A” and “D” of 4-7-3/

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 406
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Table 2 through 4-7-3/Table 6, as applicable. Alternative monitored parameters, which may provide equal
effectiveness, will be considered.

9.3 Operator Interface

Where a computer is used as the operator interface to display monitoring information, the centralized
control station is to be provided with at least two computers, including keyboards and monitors, unless
other means of display are provided capable of displaying the same information.

9.5 Engineer’s Alarm

Where alarms are not acknowledged at the centralized control station in a pre-set period of time (e.g.,
2 minutes), the system is to activate the engineers’ alarm audible in the engineers’ accommodations (see
also 4-7-3/13.3).

11 Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge

Remote propulsion control is to be provided on the navigation bridge. The required controls and associated
alarms and displays are to comply with 4-7-2/5 and 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1. Additional alarms, displays and
controls as specified at the lower half of 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1 are also to be provided.

13 Monitoring Station in the Engineers’ Quarters

13.1 Engineers’ Public Space and Engineers’ Cabins

At least one alarm monitoring station is to be provided in the engineers’ public space, such as the officers’
lounge or officers’ mess room. Where the engineer on-duty is assigned to work in a specific space, such as
the ship’s office or engineers’ office, then such a space is also to be provided with an alarm monitoring
station. In addition, an alarm monitoring station is to be provided in each engineer’s cabin through a
selector switch so arranged as to ensure connection to at least one of these cabins. Each station is to be
provided with:

● An alarm for fire in the propulsion machinery space;

● An alarm for high bilge water level in the propulsion machinery space; and
● A summary-alarm to be activated by any of the alarm conditions listed in 4-7-3/Tables 2 through 6.

The fire alarm is to have a separate visual display and a distinct sound from the summary alarm, and other
alarms where fitted. A selector switch is not to be provided for fire alarm.

13.3 Muting the Audible Alarms

All alarms in 4-7-3/13.1 are to be silenced only at the centralized control station. Alternatively,
arrangements may be made to silence the summary and the bilge alarms at the alarm monitoring stations in
the engineers’ public space or at a selected engineer’s cabin, provided the associated visual alarm is not
extinguished. The arrangements are to be such that if the audible alarm is not also silenced manually at the
centralized control station in a preset period of time (e.g., 2 minutes), the system is to activate the
engineer’s alarm (see 4-6-2/17.3).

13.5 Communication
The communication system required by 4-6-2/15 is to include the engineer’s accommodation area.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 407
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

15 Safety Systems

15.1 General
To allow for unattended operation, the centralized control station is to be provided with safety system
functions specified in “Auto start”, “Auto slowdown” and “Auto shutdown” columns of 4-7-3/Tables 3
through 6 as applicable. The following features are also applicable.

15.3 System Design

In addition to complying with 4-7-1/9.9, the following are applicable in order to safeguard continued
operation of machinery:

i) Safety system is to be designed to take the least drastic action first in response to a fault, and when
this fails to avert the situation, to intervene sequentially with more drastic actions. The system is to
incorporate ability to automatically start a standby pump, or automatic slowdown or automatic
shutdown of propulsion machinery, as applicable.
ii) For propulsion machinery (4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5), automatic start/changeover,
automatic slowdown and automatic shutdown systems are to be independent of monitoring and
control systems. However, common sensors as specifically indicated in these tables may be
allowed.
iii) In lieu of automatic slowdown, illuminated warning sign “reduced power” with audible alarm may
be provided on the navigation bridge to allow manual slowdown to be effected.
iv) Overrides for safety system actions are to comply with 4-7-2/13.5.

15.5 Automatic Start and Changeover

In the event of detecting low or the loss of system pressure as specified in 4-7-3/Tables 3 through 4 (in
“Auto start” column), automatic startup of and changeover to the standby pumps, which are essential to
maintain the running of the propulsion machinery, are to be provided.

15.7 Automatic Slowdown

Automatic slowdown, where indicated in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 3 is to be provided in order to maintain the
continuous operation of the propulsion machinery in the event of specified alarm conditions.

15.9 Automatic Shutdown

Automatic shutdowns are to be provided, where indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5, to
protect the propulsion machinery from serious damage. Where automatic shutdown is indicated in these
tables as a requirement along with 4-7-3/15.5 or 4-7-3/15.7 or both, the intent is that either 4-7-3/15.5 or
4-7-3/15.7 or both is to be activated first; and if the state of the propulsion machinery does not improve,
then 4-7-3/15.9 is to be activated.

17 Specific Requirements for Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery

The following are requirements for control, monitoring and safety systems applicable to individual
propulsion and auxiliary machinery plant supplemental to those of 4-7-3/7 through 4-7-3/15 above.

17.1 Propulsion Diesel Engines

Alarms and displays (A and D columns) in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 3 are applicable.

17.3 Propulsion Gas Turbines

Alarms and displays (A and D columns) in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 4 are applicable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 408
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

17.5 Automatic Starting of Propulsion Auxiliaries

Where power is automatically restored following a blackout as per 4-6-2/3.1.6, auxiliaries that are essential
for propulsion and maneuvering are to be automatically started. In order not to overload the generator
while the motors are starting, means such as sequential starting are to be provided where necessary.

17.7 Electric Propulsion

Alarms and displays (A and D columns) in 4-7-3/Table 5 are applicable.

17.9 Generators and Electrical Systems

Alarms and displays (A and D columns) in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2 and 4-7-3/23 TABLE 6 are applicable. The
following are also to be complied with.

17.9.1 Starting of Generators

In addition to complying with 4-6-2/3.1.6 for automatically restoring power to equipment
necessary for propulsion, steering and safety, arrangements are to be provided to enable manually
starting and placing in service any generator from a single location. This location may be at the
main switchboard or in the centralized control station.

17.9.2 Monitoring of Generators

Where the main switchboard is not located in the centralized control station alarms and displays
for monitoring the generators and main switchboard, as indicated in 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2, are to be
provided in the centralized control station.

17.11 Propulsion Auxiliaries

The centralized control station is to be provided with means to remotely start and stop auxiliary pumps
associated with the operation of the following:

● Propulsion engine
● Electrical power generators
● Controllable pitch propellers
● Fuel oil transfer system

Automatic transferring of vital auxiliary pumps, where fitted, is to be alarmed at the centralized control
station.

19 Propulsion Machinery Space

19.1 Fuel Oil System Arrangements

19.1.1 Fuel Oil Settling and Service Tanks
Low level conditions of fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to be alarmed at the centralized
control station. Where automatic filling is provided, the arrangements are to include automatic
pump shutdown and start-up at predetermined high and low levels respectively. In such cases, fuel
oil high level alarm is also to be provided.

19.1.2 Fuel Oil Overflow and Drain Tanks

Fuel oil overflow tanks and fuel oil drain tank receiving fuel oil from drip pans, spill trays and
other leakage containment facilities are to be fitted with a high level alarm at the centralized
control station.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 409
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

19.1.3 Fuel Oil Heating

Fuel oil tanks provided with heating arrangements and fuel oil heaters are to be fitted with the
following alarms at the centralized control station.

i) High temperature alarm and temperature display for the heated fuel oil in the settling and
service tanks.
ii) Fuel oil high temperature (or low viscosity) alarm, or a low flow alarm at the heater
outlet.

This alarm may be omitted if a fuel oil high temperature alarm required by 4-7-3/Tables 3
through 6, monitors the fuel oil high temperature for the heaters also.
iii) High temperature alarm for the fluid heating medium (steam, thermal oil, etc.) for fuel oil
tanks or fuel oil heater, where the maximum temperature of the heating medium would
exceed 220°C (428°F).
19.1.4 Fuel Oil Filling Arrangements
Where automatic filling is provided, the fuel oil settling or service tanks are to be of a capacity
sufficient for at least 8 hours operation at normal power.

Where automatic filling is not provided, the capacities of these tanks are to be sufficient for at
least 24 hours operation at normal power. Otherwise, a time limitation will be noted in the
classification record.

19.3 Bilge Level Monitoring

19.3.1 Bilge Level
The propulsion machinery space is to be provided with two independent systems to detect
excessive rise of bilge water in the bilges or bilge wells. The arrangements including the number
of sensors and locations are to be such that accumulation of bilge water may be detected at the
various angles of craft’s heel and trim. The alarm is to be given in the centralized control station.

19.3.2 Bilge Pump

Where the bilge pumps are arranged for automatic operation, means are to be provided to indicate,
at the centralized control station, when the pump is operating more frequently than would
normally be expected, or when the pump is operating for an excessive length of time.
Additionally, attention is to be given to oil pollution prevention requirements.

21 Fire Safety

21.1 Fire Fighting Station

A fire-fighting station is to be provided and to be located outside the propulsion machinery space.
However, consideration may be given to the installation of the fire-fighting control station within the room
housing the centralized control station provided that the room’s boundary common with the propulsion
machinery space, including glass windows and doors, is insulated to A-60 standard. The doors opening
into the propulsion machinery space are to be self-closing. The ventilation system to the room is to be
separate from other systems serving the propulsion machinery space and the ventilation inlet is to be taken
from a safe space outside the propulsion machinery space. There is to be a protected access, insulated to
A-60 standard, from the room to the open deck.

21.3 Fire Main System

In order to provide immediate water delivery from the fire main system at a suitable pressure, provisions
are to be made for remotely starting one of the main fire pumps at the navigation bridge, unless the fire
main is permanently pressurized.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 410
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

21.5 Controls at Fire Fighting Station

The fire-fighting station is to be provided with remote manual controls for the operations detailed in the
following list:

i) Shutdown of ventilation fans serving the machinery space. See 4-6-2/9.1.1.

ii) Shutdown of fuel oil, lubricating oil and thermal oil system pumps. See 4-6-2/19.1.2.
iii) Shutdown of inert gas generators and incinerators, and of auxiliary blowers of propulsion diesel
engines. See 4-6-2/19.1.2.
iv) Closing of propulsion machinery space fuel oil tanks suction valves.
v) Shutdown of fixed local application fire fighting systems, see 4-5-2/9.1, before activation of a
high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system, see 4-5-2/11.5.1, to avoid adverse water action on
the foam.
vi) Closing of propulsion machinery space skylights, openings in funnels, ventilator dampers, and
other openings.
vii) (2018) Closing of propulsion machinery space watertight, weathertight, and fire-resistant doors.
Self-closing doors with no hold back arrangements may be excluded. Where the propulsion
machinery space is protected by a high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system complying with
4-5-2/11.5.1, the remote control of the doors fitted on machinery casings which are exposed to
weather decks is not required, provided the lower edge of the door is located 1 meter (3.3 ft) above
the highest point of any fire risk objects.
viii) Starting of emergency generator where it is not arranged for automatic starting.
ix) Starting of a fire pump located outside the propulsion machinery space, including operation of all
necessary valves, to pressurize the fire main. However, valves located near the pump need not be
provided with remote operation from the fire fighting station, if they are kept locked open (LO), or
closed (LC), as appropriate, to provide immediate water supply to the fire main. The position of
the valves (open or closed) is to be clearly marked. Where the sea chest valve is located in the
same compartment as the fire pump and the sea chest valve is kept locked open, a high-level bilge
alarm is to be fitted in the fire pump space. If the sea chest is located in a different space than the
compartment containing the fire pump, then a high-level bilge alarm is to be fitted in the fire pump
space, as well as the compartment containing the sea chest, in order to detect possible flooding in
each of these spaces. The high-level bilge alarm is to sound in the centralized control station.
Starting of one of the main fire pumps is also to be provided on the navigation bridge (see
4-7-3/21.3).
x) Actuation of the fixed fire extinguishing system for the propulsion machinery space.

21.7 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

21.7.1 General
i) The propulsion-machinery space is to be provided with a fixed fire detection and alarm
system complying with 4-5-1/13. This fixed fire detection and alarm system may be
combined with other fire detection and alarm systems required onboard the vessel. The
fire control panel is to be located on the navigation bridge or in the fire fighting station. If
located in the fire fighting station, a repeater panel is to be fitted on the navigation bridge.
Propulsion machinery space fire is to be alarmed in the centralized control station.
ii) Emergency generator spaces (2018). Where the emergency diesel generator space has an
engine that is not less than 375 kW (500hp), it is to be treated as a category A machinery
space in accordance with 4-1-1/13.1, and as a control station in accordance with
4-7-1/11.21 of the Marine Vessel Rules.
a) For installations with diesel engine of not less than 375 kW (500 hp), the space is
to be provided with a fire detection system complying with the FSS Code
Chapter 9/ 2.4.1.2 (i.e. the fire detection loop serving the EDG space cannot be

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 411
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

combined with that of another Category A machinery space or another control

station or a service space or an accommodation space). However, connection
with the section of a machinery space other than Category A may be considered
provided all other requirements of 4-5-1/13, as applicable, are met.
b) For installations with diesel engine with a power rating below 375 kW (500 hp),
the space is considered a control station and the fire detectors may be on the
same loop as the accommodation and/or service spaces provided all other
requirements of 4-5-1/13, as applicable, are satisfied.
21.7.2 Temporarily Disconnecting Alarms
A fire detector loop or detector(s) covering the unattended machinery space may be temporarily
disabled, for example, for maintenance purposes, provided that such action is to be clearly
indicated at the fire control panel and at the centralized control station described in 4-7-3/21.7.1.
Disabled loop or detectors are to be reactivated automatically after a preset time period.

21.7.3 Fire Alarm Call Points

Manually operated fire alarm call points are to be provided at the following locations:

● Centralized control station

● Passageways leading to, the propulsion machinery spaces
● Navigation bridge

23 Equipment
Components, equipment, subsystems, etc. used in control, monitoring and safety systems of propulsion
machinery and vital auxiliary pumps are to be designed and tested in accordance with the provisions in
Section 4-7-9.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 412
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

TABLE 2
Instrumentation and Controllers in Centralized Control Station –
All Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery

Notes
[ A = Alarm; D = Display;
System Monitored/Controlled Parameter A D C
C = Controller/Actuator ]
[ x = applies ]

Propulsion A1 As in 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1 items A1 x x x Following items of 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1

control and through C6, with following additional are to be modified:
monitoring features - Item A4: additional telegraph is not
required for centralized control station.
- Item A6: starting of propulsion engine
is required for all engine types
- Item C1: acknowledgement switch for
transfer of control station is not required
in centralized control station

A2 System power supply main and x x x

emergency feeders: failure, status and
transfer

A3 Propulsion engine auxiliaries – status x x Automatic start/stop, if fitted, is to be

and start/stop alarmed.

A4 Controllable pitch propeller (CPP) x x

hydraulic power unit start/stop

A5 CPP hydraulic oil pressure – low and x High-pressure alarm is required only if
high required by design. See 4-3-2/5.11.4(b)

A6 CPP hydraulic oil temperature – high x If it is a system design feature

A7 CPP hydraulic oil tank level – low x

Electric B1 Starting, paralleling & putting generator x

Power on line
Generating
B2 Generator running x
Plant Not required if main switchboard is
B3 Voltage – high and low x x located in the centralized control station

B4 Current – high x x

B5 Frequency – high and low x x

B6 Failure of on-line generator x

B7 Generator engine auxiliaries start/stop x x Automatic start/stop, if fitted, is to be

alarmed

B8 Bearing lube oil inlet pressure – low x x Automatic shutdown prime mover.
4-6-4/3.15

B9 Generator cooling inlet pump or fan x 4-6-4/3.13.6

motor – fails

B10 Generator cooling medium temp. – high x x 4-6-4/3.13.6

High voltage C1 Stationary windings temperature – high x 4-6-5/1.11.1(c)

rotating
machine

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 413
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Notes
[ A = Alarm; D = Display;
System Monitored/Controlled Parameter A D C
C = Controller/Actuator ]
[ x = applies ]

Fuel oil D1 Settling and service tank level – low and x High level alarm required only if
system high automatic filling is provided

D2 Overflow tank and drain tank level – x

high

D3 Transfer pump start/stop x x Start/stop may be automatic.

D4 Heated fuel oil in settling and service x x 4-7-3/19.1.3.i

tank, fuel oil temperature – high

D5 Fuel oil tank heating medium x 4-7-3/19.1.3.iii

temperature – high

D6 Fuel oil heater, fuel oil temperature – x 4-7-3/19.1.3.ii

high (or viscosity – low) or flow – low

D7 Fuel oil heater, heating medium x 4-7-3/19.1.3.iii

temperature – high

Stern tube E1 Tank level – low x

lube oil

Propulsion F1 Bilge level – high x

machinery
F2 Bilge pump status x x Alarm applicable to automatically
space
started bilge pump that starts/stops
excessively or running unduly long

F3 Fire detected x

F4 Air condition system – fails x If necessary for equipment

environmental control

Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to
provide indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or
status indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information concerning the
monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent effectiveness, may be
considered.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 414
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

TABLE 3
Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in Centralized Control Station –
Medium and High Speed (Trunk Piston) Diesel Engines (2023)

Auto Auto Auto Notes

Systems Monitored Parameters A D Slow Start Shut [ A = Alarm. D = Display. x
down down = apply. ]

Sensors Common or separate c c c s s c = common; s = separate

Fuel oil A1 Fuel oil after filter (engine x x x

inlet), pressure – low

A2 Fuel oil before injection x For residual fuel oil burning

pumps, temp. – high (or engines only.
viscosity – low)

A3 Fuel oil before injection x For residual fuel oil burning

pumps, temp. – low (or engines only.
viscosity – high)

A4 Leakage from high pressure x

pipes

A5 Fuel oil service tank, level – x High level alarm is also

low required if without suitable
overflow arrangements.

A6 Common rail fuel oil pressure x

– low

Lubricating B1 Lube oil to main bearing and x x x x

oil (Diesel thrust bearing, pressure – low
engine)
B2 Lube oil filter differential, x x
pressure – high

B3 Lube oil inlet, temp. – high x x

B4 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x x For engines having a power of

concentration – high; or 2250 kW (3000 hp) and above
Engine main and crank or having a cylinder bore of
bearing temperature – high or more than 300 mm (11.8 in.).
Alternative arrangements Single sensor (for each engine)
(engine main and crank having two independent
bearing oil outlet temperature outputs for initiating alarm and
– high) for shutdown will satisfy
independence of alarm and
shutdown.
See 4-2-1/7.2.2 of the Marine
Vessel Rules

B5 Each cylinder lubricator, flow x x If necessary for the safe

rate – low operation of the engine.

B6 Common rail servo oil x

pressure – low

Lubricating B7 Reduction gear lube oil inlet x x x x x Shutdown is to affect all

oil (other than pressure – low power input to gear
diesel engine)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 415
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Auto Auto Notes

Systems Monitored Parameters A D Slow Start Shut [ A = Alarm. D = Display. x
down down = apply. ]

Sea water C1 Sea water cooling system x x x

cooling pressure – low

Cylinder fresh D1 Water inlet, pressure – low or x x x x

water cooling flow – low

D2 Water outlet (general), temp. – x x x Two separate sensors are

high required for alarm and
slowdown.

D3 Cooling water expansion tank, x

level – low

Compressed E1 Starting air before shutoff x x

air valve, pressure – low

E2 Control air pressure – low x x

Scavenge air F1 Scavenge air receiver temp. – x

high

Exhaust gas G1 Exhaust gas after each x x x For engine power > 500 kW/
cylinder, temp. – high cylinder

G2 Exhaust gas after each x For engine power > 500 kW/
cylinder, deviation from cylinder
average, temp. – high

Engine H1 Speed x

H2 Overspeed x x

Power J1 Control, alarm or safety x

system, power supply failure

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 416
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Auto Auto Notes

Systems Monitored Parameters A D Slow Start Shut [ A = Alarm. D = Display. x
down down = apply. ]

Turbocharger K1 Turbocharger lube oil inlet x Unless provided with a self-

pressure – low contained lubricating oil
system integrated with the
turbocharger

K2 (2013) Turbocharger lube oil x Where outlet temperature from

outlet temp., each bearing – each bearing cannot be
high monitored due to the engine/
turbocharger design,
alternative arrangements may
be accepted. Continuous
monitoring of inlet pressure
and inlet temperature in
combination with specific
intervals for bearing
inspection in accordance with
the turbocharger
manufacturer’s instructions
may be accepted as an
alternative.

K3 Speed of turbocharger x x (1 July 2017) Alarm

Activation for High Speed
only required for
turbochargers of categories B
and C

Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to
provide indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM,
etc.) or status indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information
concerning the monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent
effectiveness, may be considered.

Auto Slowdown = automatic slowdown of diesel engine, along with activation of suitable alarm.

Auto Start = automatic starting of a standby pump, along with activation of suitable alarm.

Auto Shutdown = automatic stopping of the diesel engines, along with activation of suitable alarm.

TABLE 4
Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in Centralized Control Station –
Propulsion Gas Turbines (2023)

Auto Auto Notes (see also bottom of table)

System Monitored Parameter A D Start Shut [ A = Alarm; D = Display, x =
down apply ]

Sensors Common/separate c c s s c = common sensor; s = separate

sensor

Fuel oil A1 Pressure or flow – low x x

A2 Temperature – high and low (or x x For residual fuel oil.

viscosity –low and high)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 417
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Auto Notes (see also bottom of table)

System Monitored Parameter A D Start Shut [ A = Alarm; D = Display, x =
down apply ]

Lubricating B1 Inlet pressure – low x x x x For turbines, reduction gears and

oil thrust bearings

B2 Inlet temperature – high x x For turbines, reduction gears and

thrust bearings

B3 Main bearing temp. or main x x For turbines, reduction gears and

bearing oil outlet temp. – high thrust bearings

B4 Filter differential pressure – high x

B5 Tank level – low x x

Cooling C1 (2013) Pressure or flow – low x x

medium
C2 Temperature – high x

Starting D1 Stored starting energy level – x

low

D2 (2013) Ignition failure x x

Combustion E1 Combustion or flame failure x x

Exhaust gas F1 Temperature – high x x x

Turbine G1 Vibration level – high x x

G2 Rotor axial displacement – large x x Auto shutdown may be omitted for

rotors fitted with roller bearings

G3 Overspeed x x

G4 Vacuum at x x

Control H1 Control, alarm or safety system, x

System power supply failure

Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to
provide indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM,
etc.) or status indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information
concerning the monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent
effectiveness, may be considered.

Auto start = automatic starting of standby pump in the system, with activation of suitable alarm.

Auto shutdown = automatic closing of main fuel valve, with activation of suitable alarm.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 418
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

TABLE 5A
Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in Centralized Control Station –
Electric Propulsion

Auto Notes
System Monitored Parameter A D Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply]

Propulsion A1 Bearing lube oil inlet pressure – low x x x Prime mover automatic shutdown
Generator
A2 Voltage – off-limits x x To read all phases and at least one bus

A3 Frequency – off-limits x x

A4 Current x To read all phases

A5 Stationary windings temperature – x x To read all phases; for generators >

high 500kW

A6 Main generator circuit breakers – x

open/close

A7 Generator running x

A8 Failure of on-line generator x

A9 Transfer of standby generator x

A10 Generator cooling medium x x If applicable

temperature – high

A11 Failure of generator cooling pump or x If applicable

fan motor

A12 Field voltage and current x For DC generator

A13 Inter-pole winding temperature – high x x For DC generator

Propulsion B1 Bearing, lube oil inlet pressure – low x x x

Motor - AC
B2 Armature voltage – off-limits x x To read all phases and at least one bus

B3 Field voltage x

B4 Frequency – off-limits x x

B5 Armature current x To read all phases

B6 Field current x For synchronous motors

B7 Ground lights or similar x

B8 Stationary windings temperature – x x To read all phases; for motors >

high 500kW

B9 Motor circuit breakers – open/close x

B10 Motor running x

B11 Failure of on-line motor x

B12 Transfer of standby motor x

B13 Motor cooling medium temperature – x x If applicable

high

B14 Failure of cooling pump or fan motor x If applicable

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 419
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Notes
System Monitored Parameter A D Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply]

Propulsion C1 Bearing lube oil inlet pressure – low x x x

Motor - DC
C2 Armature voltage – off-limits x x

C3 Field voltage x

C4 Armature current x

C5 Field current x

C6 Ground lights or similar x

C7 Motor circuit breakers – open/close x

C8 Motor running x

C9 Motor overspeed x x

C10 Failure of on-line motor x

C11 Transfer of standby motor x

C12 Motor cooling medium temperature – x x If applicable

high

C13 Failure of cooling pump or fan motor x If applicable

Propulsion D1 Voltage x
SCR
D2 Current x

D3 Overload (high current) x Alarms before protective device is

activated

D4 Open/close position for assignment x

switches

D5 SCR cooling medium temperature – x x If applicable

high

D6 Failure of SCR cooling pump or fan x If applicable

motor

D7 Inter-phase reactor temperature – high x x

Transformer E1 Transformer winding temperature – x x For each phase

high

Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to
provide indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or
status indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information concerning the
monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent effectiveness, may be
considered.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 420
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

TABLE 5B
Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in Centralized Control Station –
Generator Prime Mover for Electric Propulsion (2023)

Auto Auto Notes

Systems Monitored Parameters A D Start Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply]

Trunk Piston Type Diesel Engines

Fuel oil F1 Fuel oil after filter (engine inlet), x x x

Pressure – low

F2 Fuel oil before injection pumps, x For residual fuel oil burning engines
temp. – high (or viscosity – low) only.

F3 Fuel oil before injection pumps, x For residual fuel oil burning engines
temp. – low (or viscosity – high) only.

F4 Leakage from high pressure x

pipes

F5 Fuel oil service tank, level – low x High level alarm is also required if
without suitable overflow
arrangements.

F6 Common rail fuel oil pressure – x

low

Lubricating G1 Lube oil to main bearing, x x x x

oil pressure – low

G2 Lube oil filter differential, x x

pressure – high

G3 Lube oil inlet, temp. – high x x

G4 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x x For engines having a power of 2250

concentration – high; or kW (3000 hp) and above or cylinder
Engine main and crank bearing bore of more than 300 mm (11.8
temperature – high; or in.).
Alternative arrangements Single sensor (for each engine)
(engine main and crank bearing having two independent outputs for
oil outlet temperature – high) initiating alarm and for shutdown
will satisfy independence of alarm
and shutdown.
See 4-2-1/7.2.2 of the Marine Vessel
Rules

G5 Each cylinder lubricator, flow x If necessary for the safe operation of

rate – low the engine.

G6 Common rail servo oil pressure x

– low

Sea cooling H1 Sea water cooling system x x x

water pressure – low

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 421
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Auto Notes

Systems Monitored Parameters A D Start Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply]

Cylinder fresh J1 Water inlet, pressure – low or x x x

water cooling flow – low

J2 Water outlet (general), temp. – x x

high

J3 Cooling water expansion tank, x

level – low

Compressed K1 Starting air before shut-off x x

air valve, pressure – low

K2 Control air pressure – low x x

Exhaust gas L1 Exhaust gas after each cylinder, x x For engine power > 500 kW/
temp. – high cylinder

Turbocharger M1 Turbocharger oil inlet pressure - x Unless provided with a self-

low contained lubricating oil system
integrated with the turbocharger

M2 (2013) Turbocharger oil outlet Where outlet temperature from each

temp., each bearing – high bearing cannot be monitored due to
the engine/ turbocharger design,
alternative arrangements may be
accepted. Continuous monitoring of
inlet pressure and inlet temperature
in combination with specific
intervals for bearing inspection in
accordance with the turbocharger
manufacturer’s instructions may be
accepted as an alternative.

M3 (1 July 2017) Speed of x Alarm Activation for High Speed

turbocharger only required for turbochargers of
categories B and C.

Engine N1 Over speed x x

Power Supply P1 Main x x

P2 Emergency x

Gas Turbines

Fuel oil Q1 Pressure or flow – low x x

Q2 Temperature – high and low (or x x For residual fuel oil.

viscosity – low and high)

Lubricating R1 Inlet pressure – low x x x x

oil
R2 Inlet temperature – high x x

R3 Bearing temp. or bearing oil x x

outlet temp. – high

R4 Filter differential pressure – high x

R5 Tank level – low x x

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 422
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Auto Notes

Systems Monitored Parameters A D Start Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply]

Cooling S1 Pressure or flow – low x x

medium
S2 Temperature – high x

Starting T1 Stored starting energy level – x

low

T2 Ignition failure x x

Combustion U1 Combustion or flame failure x x

Exhaust gas V1 Temperature – high x x x

Turbine W1 Vibration level – high x x

W2 Rotor axial displacement – large x x Auto shutdown may be omitted for

rotors fitted with roller bearings

W3 Overspeed x x

W4 Vacuum at compressor inlet – x x

high

Power Supply Z1 Main x x

Z2 Emergency x

Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to
provide indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM,
etc.) or status indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information
concerning the monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent
effectiveness, may be considered.

Auto Start = automatic starting of a standby pump, along with activation of suitable alarm.

Auto Shutdown = automatic stopping of the diesel engines and gas turbine, along with activation of suitable alarm.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 423
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

TABLE 6
Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in Centralized Control Station –
Auxiliary Turbines and Diesel Engines (2023)

Auto Notes
Engine Monitored System & Parameter A D Shut [ A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply ]

Diesel Lubricating A1 Bearing oil inlet pressure x x x

Engine oil – low

A2 Bearing inlet oil x x

temperature – high

A3 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x x For engines having a power of 2250

concentration – high; or kW (3000 hp) and above or having a
Engine main and crank cylinder bore more than 300 mm
bearing temperature – (11.8 in.).
high; or Single sensor (for each engine)
Alternative arrangements having two independent outputs for
(engine main and crank initiating alarm and for initiating
bearing oil outlet alarm and for shutdown will satisfy
temperature – high) independence of alarm and
shutdown.
See 4-2-1/7.2.2 of the Marine Vessel
Rules

A4 Common rail servo oil x

pressure – low

Cooling A5 Pressure or flow – low x x

medium
A6 Temperature at outlet – x x
high

A7 Expansion tank level – x

low

Fuel oil A8 Fuel oil leakage from x

injection pipe

A9 Fuel oil temp. – high and x For residual fuel oil only
low (or viscosity – low
and high)

A10 Service tank level – low x

A11 Common rail fuel oil x

pressure – low

Starting A12 Energy level – low x x

medium

Exhaust A13 Exhaust gas temperature x For engines having a power of more
after each cylinder – high than 500 kW/cyl.

Speed A14 Overspeed x x

A15 Engine speed x Computer based monitoring system

can utilize the speed signal as an “on
line” signal.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 424
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

Auto Notes
Engine Monitored System & Parameter A D Shut [ A = Alarm; D = Display; x =
down apply ]

Turbocharger A16 (1 July 2017) High speed x Alarm Activation for High Speed
only required for turbochargers of
categories B and C

Gas Lubricating B1 Inlet pressure inlet – low x x x

Turbine oil
B2 Inlet temperature – high x x

B3 Bearing temp. or oil outlet x x

temp. – high

B4 Filter differential pressure x

Cooling B5 Pressure or flow – low x x

medium
B6 Temperature – high x

Fuel oil B7 Pressure, inlet – low x x

B8 Temp. – high and low (or x For residual fuel oil only
viscosity – low and high)

Exhaust gas B9 Temperature – high x

Combustion B10 Combustion or flame x x

failure

Starting B11 Ignition failure x x

B12 Stored starting energy x

level – low

Turbine B13 Vibration level – high x x

B14 Axial displacement – high x x Auto shutdown may be omitted for

rotors fitted with roller bearings

B15 Overspeed x x

B16 Vacuum at compressor x x

inlet – high

Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to
provide indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or
status indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information concerning the
monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent effectiveness, may be
considered.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 425
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

TABLE 7
Monitoring of Auxiliary Prime-movers and Electrical Generators
(See also 4-7-3/23 TABLE 2)

Item Alarm Display (4) Remarks

(1)

A1 Pressure, lube oil inlet – low x Pressure Automatic engine shutdown

A2 Temperature, inlet – high x Temperatu

Lube Oil re

A3 Common rail servo oil pressure – x

low

B1 Pressure or flow – low x Pressure,

or flow
Cooling
Medium B2 Temperature, outlet – high x

B3 Level, expansion tank – low x If separate from main system

C1 Fuel oil leakage from pressure x

pipe
Diesel
Engine C2 Level, in fuel oil daily service x See also 4-7-3/19
Fuel Oil
tank – low

C3 Common rail fuel oil pressure – x

low

D1 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x Automatic engine shutdown (2)

concentration – high; or
Crankcase
Bearing temperature – high; or
Alternative arrangements

Starting E1 Pressure or level – low x Pressure,

Medium or level

F1 Device activated x Automatic shutdown. See

Overspeed 4-2-1/7.5.3 and 4-2-1/7.3 of the
Marine Vessel Rules

G1 Pressure, bearing, lube oil inlet – x Pressure Prime mover automatic shutdown
low

G2 Voltage – off-limits x Voltage To read all phases and at least one

bus (3)
Electrical Generator
G3 Frequency – off-limits x Frequency

G4 Current – high x Current To read all phases (3)

G5 Transfer of standby generator x

Notes:

1 Required alarm is denoted by a (x).

2 For engines having a power of 2250 kW (3000 hp) and above or having a cylinder bore of more than 300
mm (11.8 in.). Single sensor having two independent outputs for initiating alarm and for initiating alarm
and for shutdown will satisfy independence of alarm and shutdown. See 4-2-1/7.2 of the Marine Vessel
Rules.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 426
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3

3 For D.C. generation. Additionally, field voltmeters and ammeters are to be included.

4 Display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to provide
indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or status
indication. The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information concerning the
monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent effectiveness, may be
considered.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 427
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 4
Craft Classed with ABCU Notation

1 General
The requirements in this Section apply to craft capable of operating as ACCU classed craft but because of
their compact propulsion-machinery space design are not fitted with the means to control the propulsion
and its associated machinery from a centralized location within the propulsion-machinery space or adjacent
to the machinery space. Except as noted herein, the requirements in Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-3, as
applicable, are to be complied with.

3 Station in the Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge

Controls, alarms and displays as listed in 4-7-2/5.23 are to be provided on the station in the operating
compartment. See 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1. For craft having nonintegrated propulsion machinery, the means
for starting, stopping and transferring vital auxiliary pumps (see 4-7-3/17.11) are to be fitted at the station
in the operating compartment and may also be fitted in the centralized station. See 4-7-1/5.1.21 for
definition of integrated propulsion machinery.

5 Centralized Monitoring Station

The requirements in 4-7-3/9 are applicable except that the centralized station need not be provided with
propulsion controls but is to include displays and alarms needed for the monitoring of the propulsion
machinery and associated ship service systems, electrical power generating machinery, and monitoring of
propulsion-machinery space. The monitoring system is to provide the same degree of equivalency as if the
propulsion-machinery space was manned. See 4-7-3/Tables 2 through 6 for required alarms and displays to
be fitted at this station.

7 Communications
Communications as required in 4-7-3/13.5 is also to include the centralized monitoring station in the
propulsion-machinery space.

9 Sea Trials
In addition to the trials per 4-7-7/5, successful operation of the propulsion machinery is to be demonstrated
with the propulsion-machinery space unattended for a period of at least 12 hours.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 428
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 5
Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 24 meters (79 feet)

1 General
The requirements contained in this Section are intended for craft less than 500 GT having a length greater
than 24 m (79 ft). The installation of machinery and monitoring of the propulsion machinery space in such
craft is to be so arranged to permit the normal operation of the craft with the propulsion-machinery space
unattended. For craft having a length equal or less than 24 m (79 ft), see Section 4-7-6.

Note: ACCU or ABCU class notation may be granted to craft of < 500 GT and a length greater than 24 meters (79 ft),
provided that the applicable requirements in Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-4 of this Chapter are met.

3 Definitions
See 4-7-1/5.

5 Required Plans and Data

Plans and specifications are to be submitted in accordance with Section 4-1-1 for approval and are to
include the following information.

i) Machinery arrangement plans showing location of control stations in relation to controlled units;
ii) Arrangements and details of control consoles including front views, installation arrangements
together with schematic diagrams for all power, control and monitoring systems including their
functions; and a list of alarms/displays as required in 4-7-5/17;
iii) Type and size of all electrical cables and wiring associated with the control systems including
voltage rating, service voltage and currents together with overload and short-circuit protection;
iv) Description of all alarm and emergency tripping arrangements; functional sketches or description
of all special valves, actuators, sensors and relays;
v) Schematic plans and supporting data of fire protection and extinguishing systems, including fire
detection and alarm systems and bilge high water alarms,
vi) Schematic plans of hydraulic or pneumatic control systems.

7 Electrical Cables and Console Wiring

In general, cables are to be used external to the consoles and they are to be of the marine type in
accordance with the applicable parts of Section 4-6-4. Cables in accordance with other standards which are

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 429
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 24 meters (79 feet) 4-7-5

not less effective will be considered. Cables and console wiring for control and monitoring are to be of the
flame-retarding type and are to be stranded except that solid conductors may be used in low-energy circuits
where they are properly supported and not subject to undue vibration or movements.

9 Alarms
The alarm system is to be able to indicate more than one fault at the same time and is to be so arranged that
acceptance of one fault is not to inhibit another alarm. Audible alarms are to be maintained until they are
acknowledged, and visual indication is to remain until the fault is corrected.

11 Safety System
Safety systems are to be of the fail-safe type and are to respond automatically to fault conditions that may
endanger the machinery or safety of the crew. This automatic action is to cause the machinery to take the
least drastic action first, as appropriate, by reducing its normal operating output or switching to a stand-by
machinery and last, by stopping it, i.e., disrupting source of fuel or power supply, etc. However, the
propulsion machinery is to automatically shut down upon a loss of lubricating oil or an overspeed
condition, and such conditions are to be alarmed. Where arrangements for overriding the shutdown of the
main propelling machinery are fitted, these are to be such as to preclude inadvertent activation. Visual
means shall be provided to show whether or not it has been activated.

13 Propulsion
The requirements in 4-7-2/5.3, 4-7-2/5.5, 4-7-2/5.11, 4-7-2/5.13 and 4-7-2/5.15 are applicable.
Additionally, it is to be possible to control the propelling machinery locally in the case of failure in any
part of the control systems.

15 Propulsion-machinery Spaces

15.1 Fire Protection

15.1.1 Fire Prevention
15.1.1(a) Piping for high pressure fuel injection and return piping on main and auxiliary engines is
to be effectively shielded and secured to prevent fuel or fuel mist from reaching a source of
ignition on the engine or its surroundings. Leakages from such piping are to be collected in a
suitable drain tank provided with high level alarm audible at the operating compartment.

15.1.1(b) Drip trays for collecting fuel and lubricating oil are to be fitted below pumps, heaters,
burners, tanks not forming part of the craft’s structure, etc., with connections to a suitable drain
tank with high level alarm audible at the operating compartment.

15.1.1(c) Where daily service fuel oil tanks are filled automatically or by remote control, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillages. Similar consideration is to be given to other
equipment which treat flammable liquids automatically (e.g., fuel oil purifiers), which whenever
practicable shall be installed in a special space reserved for purifiers and their heaters.

15.1.1(d) Where fuel oil daily service tanks or settling tanks are fitted with heating arrangements,
a high temperature alarm, audible at the operating compartment, is to be provided if the flashpoint
of the fuel oil can be exceeded.

15.1.2 Fire Detection

A fire detection system is to be provided for the machinery spaces.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 430
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 24 meters (79 feet) 4-7-5

15.3 Protection Against Flooding

Bilges in machinery spaces are to be provided with a high level alarm in such a way that the accumulation
of liquids is detected at normal angles of trim and heel. The detection system is to initiate an audible and
visual alarm in the operating compartment.

17 Operating Compartment
In addition to other instrumentation which may be required for the satisfactory operation of the propulsion
machinery and navigation of the craft, the following controls, alarms and displays are to be provided at the
operating compartment in accordance with 4-7-5/17 TABLE 8.

TABLE 8
Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment
(Applicable to craft complying with 4-7-5/17 )

Items Display Alarm

1 Propeller Speed RPM

2 Propeller Ahead

3 Direction or Astern

4 Pitch Pitch

5 Generator voltage Volt (1)

6 Generator current Amps (1)

The following alarms giving distinctive indication of conditions requiring immediate action and in full view of the crew

7 Main engines Overspeed

8 Normal electrical supply Loss

9 Control power Available Failure

10 Any permanently installed nickel-cadmium battery associated with systems for Thermal
the control and monitor of the craft’s propulsion, steering and trim related runaway
machinery and propulsion-machinery space

11 Activation of a fire-detection system Light Fire

12 Bilge level High

With the exception of items 15 and 21, the following alarms are to be distinct from those referred in items 7 through 12 and
are to indicate conditions requiring actions to prevent degradation to an unsafe condition

13 L.O. Pressure to main engine & reduction gear Pressure Low

14 Engine coolant Temperature High

15 Starting air (if applicable) pressure Low

16 Normal power supply to the powered directional or trim control devices Failure

17 Compass system Failure

18 Side, masthead or stern navigation lights Extinction

19 Fuel oil tank level Low

20 Oil collecting tank [see 4-7-5/15.1.1(b)] High or

Overflow

21 Fuel oil day tank heater temperature [see 4-7-5/15.1.1(d)] High

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 431
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 24 meters (79 feet) 4-7-5

Items Display Alarm

22 Level of contents of any fluid reservoir the contents of which are essential for Low
normal craft operation

23 High pressure fuel line [see 4-7-5/15.1.1(a)] Leakage

24 Any ventilation fan installed for ventilating spaces in which inflammable Failure
vapors may accumulate

25 Any automatic bilge pump Operation

Emergency Controls to be Fitted at the Operating Compartment and Arranged for Easy Reach of the Crew
Members

Items Provision of
Device

26 Stops for main propulsion and auxiliary machinery x

27 Means to disconnect electrical power sources from the normal power distribution system x

28 Stops for the machinery-space ventilation blowers and means for closing of openings as per x
4-7-1/5

29 Stops for all fuel-oil pumps and forced-draft blowers x

30 Means for starting any one of the fire pumps (inclusive of the one located outside the propulsion- x
machinery space) including associated valves necessary to deliver required capacity to the fire
main

31 Releasing of the fire-fighting media for the propulsion-machinery space. This release is to be x
manual and not initiated automatically by signals from the fire-detecting system.

Note:

1 As an alternative, these displays may be provided locally.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 432
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 6
Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length

1 General
Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in length may receive the ✠ ACCU or ✠ ABCU notations provided
they meet the requirements of Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-4, as applicable.

3 Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment

In general, suitable displays and alarms as recommended by the engine manufacturer should be provided to
ensure the proper operation of the propulsion plant. The following displays are suggested but not required:

● Engine RPM
● Engine coolant temperature.
● Generator output
● Alternator output
● Status of batteries (when used for essential or emergency services)
● Out-drive trim angle (for outboard and inboard/outboard propulsion systems)
● Fuel level
● Automatic bilge pump operation
● Activation of Fire Detection System

5 Start in Gear Protection

Craft are to be fitted with a means to prevent the motor from being started in gear.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 433
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 7
Installation, Tests and Trials

1 General
Control equipment and instrumentation are to be so placed or protected as to minimize the likelihood of
sustaining damage from the accumulation of dust, oil vapors, steam or dripping liquids, or from activities
around their location.

3 Equipment Locations

3.1 Electromagnetic Avoidance

In general, the installation of equipment in areas of unusual electromagnetic sources is to be avoided.

3.3 Moisture Condensation

Installation of equipment in locations where ambient temperature fluctuations can lead to accumulation of
moisture condensation inside equipment enclosure is to be avoided unless the equipment is protected by,
for instance, space heaters, or such equipment is to be designed and constructed to function in this
environment.

3.5 Signal Cables Installation

To avoid electromagnetic noise caused by circulating currents, the conductive shield and cable armor are to
be grounded only at one end of the cable.

To avoid possible signal interference, signal cables occupying the same cable tray, trunk or conduit with
power cables are to be effectively shielded.

5 Sea Trials
During sea trial the following tests, as appropriate, are to be carried out to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.

5.1 Propulsion Remote Control

5.1.1 Control Functions
The ability to effectively control the propulsion from the remote propulsion control station is to be
demonstrated during sea trials, or at dockside. These trials are to include:

● Propulsion control transfer

● Propulsion starting

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 434
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 7 Installation, Tests and Trials 4-7-7

● Verification of propulsion control responses

● Response to propulsion control power failure
● Automatic propulsion shutdown
● Automatic propulsion slowdown
● Actuation of propulsion emergency stop devices
● For turbine-driven craft, actuation of the shaft turning device.
5.1.2 Throttle Response
Response of propulsion machinery to throttle control demands is to be tested to demonstrate
during sea-trial that no part of the plant or engine is jeopardized by the rate at which the throttle is
moved from one extreme position to the other.

5.3 Local Manual Control

5.3.1 Propulsion Machinery
Independent manual local control of the propulsion machinery is to be demonstrated during trials.
This is to include demonstration of independent manual control through the full maneuvering
range and transfer from automatic control.

5.5 Craft Receiving ACCU or ABCU Notation

In addition to the tests required in 4-7-7/5.1 and 4-7-7/5.3, craft intended to be operated with periodically
unattended machinery space are to be tested as follows.

5.5.1 Loss of Generator Tests

The loss of electric power (see 4-7-3/17.5) is to be simulated with the main engine running and
simulated loss of generator to test:

● Automatic restoration of electric power by standby generator(s);

● Automatic starting of vital auxiliaries; and
● Starting and restoration of control of propulsion prime mover from the centralized control
station or the navigation bridge, as appropriate.
5.5.2 Fire Fighting Control Function Tests
All controls provided at the fire fighting station (4-7-3/21.5) are to be functionally tested.

5.5.3 Full Functional Test

After the propulsion machinery has been running for at least 2 hours, the machinery is to be
operated over its full range of power to demonstrate the adequacy of all control systems. The
propulsion machinery is to be run for at least 4 more hours; in total a minimum duration of
6 hours. During this period, the ability to control the machinery functions correctly for all loads
and engine maneuvers without any manual intervention in the propulsion machinery space for 4
hours is to be demonstrated.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 435
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 8
Computer-based Systems

1 Application
Computer based systems where used for control, monitoring and safety systems are to comply with the
provisions of this Section, and are subject to the classification requirements regardless of ACCU notation,
see 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 1 for examples. See 4-7-1/7.3.12 for plans and data to be submitted for review.

3 Systems Requirements

3.1 System Security (2017)

Programmable electronic systems are to be provided with effective physical and/or logical security
arrangements to prevent unintentional or unauthorized access to functions or alteration of configuration,
programs or data by unauthorized personnel.

3.3 Program and Memory Data

To preclude the possible loss or corruption of data as a result of power disruption, programs and associated
memory data considered to be essential for the operation of the specific system are to be stored in non-
volatile memory.

3.5 Start-up After Power Failure

The system’s software and hardware is to be designed so that upon restoration of power supply, after
power failure, automatic or remote control and monitoring capabilities can immediately be available after
the pre-established computer control access (sign-in) procedure has been completed.

3.7 Self-Monitoring
Computer based systems are to be self-monitoring and any incorrect operation or abnormal condition is to
be alarmed at the computer work station.

3.9 Power Supply

The power supply is to be monitored for voltage failure and protected for short circuit. Where redundant
computer systems are provided to satisfy 4-7-8/3.11, they are to be separately fed.

3.11 System Independence

Control, monitoring and safety systems are to be arranged such that a single failure or malfunction of the
computer equipment will not affect more than one of these system functions. This is to be achieved by

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 436
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

dedicated equipment for each of these functions within a single system, or by the provision of redundancy,
or by other suitable means considered not less effective.

3.13 Response Time

The computer system’s memory is to be of sufficient capacity to handle the operation of all computer
programs as configured in the computer system. The time response for processing and transmitting data is
to be such that undesirable chain of events may not arise as a result of unacceptable data delay or response
time during the computer system’s worst data overload operating condition. For propulsion-related system
applications, the time limit on response delays for safety and alarm displays is not to exceed 2 seconds.
(The response delay is to be taken as the time between detection of an alarm or safety critical condition and
the display of the alarm or actuation of the safety system.)

3.15 Fail-safe
A computer-based system is to be designed such that failure of any of the system’s components will not
cause unsafe operation of the process or the equipment it controls. FMEA is to be used to determine that
any component failure will not result in the complete loss of control, the shutdown of the process or
equipment, or other undesirable consequences.

3.17 Modifications
Any significant modification to the software or hardware for system category II and III is to be submitted
for approval. In addition, modifications of parameters for system Category III by the manufacturer are to
be approved by ABS. Any modifications made after a performance test witnessed by the Surveyor as per
item 6 of 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2 are to be documented and traceable. See also 4-7-8/3.1.

Note:

A significant modification is a modification which influences the functionality and/or safety of the system.

3.19 Recommendations on Cyber Resilience (1 July 2022)

Cyber resilience is capability to reduce the occurrence and mitigating the effects of incidents arising from
the disruption or impairment of operational technology (OT) used for the safe operation of a ship, which
potentially lead to dangerous situations for human safety, safety of the vessel and/or threat to the
environment.

All stakeholders are advised to refer to IACS Recommendation 166 "Recommendation on Cyber
Resilience" for guidance.

3.19.1
The purpose of the IACS Recommendation 166 is to provide technical guidance to stakeholders
which would lead to delivery of cyber resilient ships, whose resilience can be maintained
throughout their service life.

3.19.2
It is intended that the recommendation provides guidance for mitigating the risk related to events
affecting onboard computer-based systems, recognizing that, if no measures are implemented,
such events could potentially affect the human safety, safety of vessel and/or the threat to the
marine environment.

Commentary:

For additional information regarding Cyber Resilience, in April 2022, the International Association of Classification
Societies (IACS) released two new Unified Requirements (URs) relating to the Cyber Resilience on board marine vessels:

IACS UR E26 – Cyber Resilience of Ships

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 437
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

IACS UR E27 – Cyber Resilience of On-Board Systems and Equipment

UR E26 and UE E27 have an entry into force date for new construction vessels that have a contract signing on or after 1
January 2024.

End of Commentary

3.21 ABS Cybersecurity (1 July 2021)

ABS supports the marine and offshore communities by compiling best practices, deriving new methods,
and developing the standard for marine and offshore cybersecurity in a commitment to safety and security
of life and property and preservation of the environment. ABS offers optional notations based on the level
of cyber security provided. Additional information and requirements for the optional notations can be
found in the publications listed below that are available on the ABS website:
®
● Guide for Cybersecurity Implementation for the Marine and Offshore Industries – ABS CyberSafety
Volume 2 (Publication 251)
® ®
● Guide for ABS CyberSafety for Equipment Manufacturers – ABS CyberSafety Volume 7 (Publication
256)

5 Additional Requirements for Integrated Systems

5.1 General
Common hardware in an integrated system serving many subsystems (e.g., monitor, keyboard,
microprocessor, etc.) is to be duplicated or otherwise provided with a means of backup.

5.3 Component Independence

Failure of one part (individual module, equipment or subsystem) of the integrated system is not to affect
the functionality of other parts, except for those functions directly dependent upon information from the
defective part.

5.5 Data Communication

5.5.1 Data Communication Network
5.5.1(a) General.
The requirements in 4-7-8/5.5 are applicable to the system of Category II and III using shared data
communication network to transfer data between distributed programmable electronic equipment
or systems.

5.5.1(b) Monitoring of the Network.

The data communication network is to be continuously monitored to detect failures on the
communication network itself and data communication failure on nodes connected to the network.
Any detected abnormal condition is to be alarmed at the centralized control station and on the
navigation bridge.

5.5.1(c) Prevention of Overloading.

Safeguards are to be provided to prevent unacceptable data transmission delays (overloading of
network). Alarm is to be activated prior to a critical data overload condition.

5.5.1(d) Integrity of Data.

Means are to be provided to ensure the integrity of data and provide timely recovery of corrupted
or invalid data.

5.5.2 Duplicated Data Communication Network

5.5.2(a) Duplication of the Network.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 438
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

When the same data communication network is used for two or more essential functions (e.g.,
propulsion control and generator control), this network is to be duplicated, and each is to be routed
as far apart from the other as practical. The duplicate network is for standby purpose only and not
to be used to reduce traffic in the online network.

5.5.2(b) Monitoring of the Network.

Duplicated data communication network is to be arranged so that upon the failure of the online
network, the standby network is automatically connected to the system. Switching between
duplicated networks is not to disturb data communication or continuous functioning of the system.
The failure of one network is to be alarmed at the centralized control station and on the navigation
bridge.

5.5.3 Connection Failure

A complete failure in connectivity between component systems and the data highway is not to
affect individual functionality of the component systems.

Where a single component failure results in loss of data communication, means are to be provided
to automatically restore data communication.

Loss of a data communication network is not to affect the ability to operate essential services by
alternate means.

7 Hardware

7.1 Design for Ease of Maintenance

The design and layout of the hardware is to ensure ease of access to interchangeable parts for repairs and
maintenance. Each replaceable part is to be simple to replace and is to be constructed for easy and safe
handling. All replaceable parts are to be so designed that it is not possible to connect them incorrectly or to
use incorrect replacements. Where this is not practicable, the replaceable parts, their mounting location,
including their means of electrical connection, are to be clearly marked.

7.3 User Interface and Input Devices

7.3.1 General
Input devices are to have clearly marked functions and, as far as practicable, are to be arranged to
avoid conceivable inadvertent errors in their operations.

7.3.2 Security
Input devices, such as keyboard, which can be used to effect changes to equipment or processes
under control, are to be provided with security arrangement, such as password, so as to limit
access to authorized personnel only.

Where a single action of, for example, pressing of a key is able to cause dangerous operating
conditions or malfunctions, measures are to be taken to prevent execution by a single action such
as use of two or more keys.

7.3.3 Control Status

Where control action can be effected from more than one station, conflicting control station
actions are to be prevented by means of interlock or warning. Control status is to be indicated at
all stations.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 439
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

7.5 Visual Display Unit

7.5.1 General
The size, color and density of text and graphic information displayed on a visual display unit are
to be such that it may be easily read from the normal operator position under all operational
lighting conditions. The brightness and contrast are to be capable of being adjusted.

7.5.2 Alarm Display

Where alarms are displayed by means of visual display unit, they are to appear in the sequence as
the incoming signals are received. Alarming of the incoming fault signals is to appear on the
screen regardless of the mode the computer or the visual display unit is in.

7.5.3 Propulsion Monitoring

Where a computer is used as the operator interface to display monitoring parameters, the
centralized control station is to be provided with at least two computers, including keyboards and
monitors, unless other means of display are provided capable of displaying the same information.

7.5.4 Color Monitor

The failure of a primary color is not to prevent an alarm to be distinctly indicated.

7.7 Graphical Display

7.7.1 General
Information is to be presented clearly and intelligibly according to its functional relations. Display
presentations are to be restricted to the data which is directly relevant for the user.

7.7.2 Alarms
Alarms are to be clearly distinguishable from other information and are to be visually and audibly
presented with priority over other information regardless of the mode the computer or the visual
display unit is in.

7.9 Wireless Data Communication

Wireless data communication will be specially considered depending upon the purpose.

7.9.1 Non-essential and Recreational Purposes, Entirely Within the Living Accommodations
Wireless data communication used for non-essential and recreational purposes, entirely within the
living accommodations, will be specially considered provided it is demonstrated that there is no
detrimental effect on essential services. Further documentation is to be submitted for review which
demonstrates compliance with 4-7-8/7.9.3(c), 4-7-8/7.9.3(e) and 4-7-8/7.9.3(f).

7.9.2 Non-essential and Recreational Purposes

Wireless data communication used for non-essential and recreational purposes, within the living
accommodations and outside of the living accommodations, will be specially considered provided
there is no detrimental effect on essential services. Further documentation is to be submitted for
review which demonstrates compliance with 4-7-8/7.9.3(a) through 4-7-8/7.9.3(f).

7.9.3 Vessel Services (Non-Recreational Purposes)

Wireless data communication used for vessel services (such as essential services, category I
systems, category II systems, category III systems, etc.) will be specially considered provided the
use of the wireless data communications results in an improvement in the safety of the vessel,
compared to wired data communication. Documentation which demonstrates an improvement in
safety is to be submitted for review. Further documentation is to be submitted for review which
demonstrates compliance with 4-7-8/7.9.3(a) through 4-7-8/7.9.3(g).

Note:

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 440
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

For assignment of system categories, see 4-7-8/9.1. Since a failure of a category I system should not lead to a
dangerous situation and failure of a category II system could eventually lead to a dangerous situation, an
improvement in the safety of the vessel will be more difficult to demonstrate for wireless data communication used
in category II system, compared to category I systems. Since a failure of a category III system may immediately
lead to an accident with catastrophic severity, wireless systems and equipment are unlikely to be permitted in
category III systems.

7.9.3(a) Risk Analysis.

A suitable risk analysis (such as an Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA)) is to be
performed which demonstrates that an interruption or failure in the wireless data communication
will not lead to a hazardous situation.

Note:

Consideration is to be given to the possibility of corrupted data and intermittent failures with comparatively long
recovery times between interruptions.

7.9.3(b) Type Testing.

The wireless equipment is to meet the environmental type testing requirements of 4-7-9/13.1 and
4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 based on the proposed location of installation.

7.9.3(c) Wireless Data Communication Tests.

The wireless data communication is to not cause interference with any vessel systems. This is
applicable to all wireless data communication equipment (even wireless data communication
equipment for non-essential services). See the tests required by 4-7-8-A1/13.5.

7.9.3(d) Wireless Data Communication Network.

The wireless data communication network is to meeting the requirements of 4-7-8/5.3,
4-7-8/5.5.1, 4-7-8/5.5.2 and 4-7-8/5.5.3.

7.9.3(e) Wireless System Protocols.

Wireless data communication is to follow recognized international wireless system protocols that
incorporate the following.

i) Message integrity. Fault prevention, detection, diagnosis and correction so that the
received message is not corrupted or altered when compared to the transmitted message.
ii) Configuration and device authentication. Only devices that are included in the wireless
system are to permitted to connect to the wireless system.
iii) Message encryption. Protection of the confidentiality and criticality of the data content.
iv) Security management. Protection of network assets, prevention of unauthorized access to
network assets.
7.9.3(f) Radio-Frequency and Power Level.
The wireless system is to comply with the radio-frequency and power level requirements of the
International Telecommunications Union and flag state requirements.

Note:

Consideration is to be given to system operation in the event of port state and local requirements that pertain to the
use of radio-frequency transmission prohibiting the operation of a wireless data communication system due to
radio-frequency and power level restrictions.

7.9.3(g) Alternative Means of Control

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 441
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

Functions that are required to operate continuously to provide essential services dependent on
wireless data communication are to be provided with an alternative means of control that can be
brought into action within an acceptable period of time.

9 Tests and Evidence

9.1 System Categories (2020)

Computer-based systems subject to classification requirements are to be assigned into the appropriate
system category (I, II or III) according to the possible extent of the damage that may be caused by a single
failure within the computer-based systems, as shown in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 1.

Examples of assignment to system categories are shown in the right column of 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 1 but
are not exhaustive.

Note: System Categories are defined as per IACS E22. Rev.2.

9.3 Tests
9.3.1 Test Program
Tests are to be carried out, and the evidence of quality assurance is to be maintained in accordance
with 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2.

Where the Surveyor’s witness is required in accordance with 4-7-8/9.3.2 and 4-7-8/9.3.3, the test
procedure for hardware test and performance test for computer-based system of Category II and
III is to be submitted for review. For these computer-based systems, the test procedure is to
include the tests in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 10 and the required functions in Section 4-7-8 for
verification.

9.3.2 Hardware Test

All computer hardware of module, sub-system or system level in Category II or III subject to
classification requirements are to be qualified in accordance with Section 4-7-9, except for printer,
data recording, logging device or similar.

Type tests according to 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 and Surveyor’s witness for the tests in 4-7-9/15.1i),
ii) and iii) are to be carried out for the computer hardware associated with ACCU notation.

Surveyor’s witness in 4-7-9/15 is not required for the computer hardware that is not associated
with a specific class notation (e.g., ACCU, etc.). In this case, the test report witnessed and
approved by another IACS Member Society for compliance with 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 (or IACS
UR E10) is acceptable.

9.3.3 Performance Test

For computer-based system of Category II and III associated with a specific class notation (e.g.,
ACCU, etc.), a performance test is to be witnessed by the Surveyor in accordance with item 6 of
4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2.

The performance test is not required to be witnessed by the Surveyor for computer-based systems
of Category II, which are not associated with a specific class notation. However, the performance
test is to be witnessed by the Surveyor for computer-based systems of Category III. The
manufacturer is required to submit the performance test report to ABS regardless of the system
category, when requested.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 442
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

TABLE 1
Assignment to System Categories by Effects of Failure

System Effects of Failure Examples

Category

Failure will not lead to dangerous situations for Non-essential systems

I human safety, safety of the vessel and/or threat Maintenance support systems
to the environment. Information and diagnostic systems

Failure could eventually lead to dangerous Alarm and monitoring equipment

situations for human safety, safety of the vessel Cargo tank gauging system
and/or threat to the environment. Control systems for auxiliary machinery
Main propulsion remote control systems (e.g.,
the control system from navigation bridge, etc.)
II Fire detection systems or gas detection systems
Bilge systems
Governors
Power management system and synchronizing
units for switchboard
Machinery safety protection systems

Failure could immediately lead to dangerous Safety system/equipment for main propulsion
situations for human safety, safety of the vessel and electric power generating system
and/or threat to the environment. associated with propulsion
Burner control and safety systems
III
Control system for propulsion machinery or
steering gear (e.g., the control system from
centralized control station, control system for
common rail main diesel engine, etc.)

Notes:
1 Consideration is to be given to the extent of the damage directly caused by a failure, but not to any
consequential damage. However, the identical redundancy for the safety system will not be taken into
account for the assignment of a system category.
2 The assignment of a computer-based system to the appropriate system category is to be made according
to the greatest likely extent of direct damage.
3 Where independent effective backup or other means of averting danger for the control functions is
provided, the system Category III may be decreased to Category II. Regardless of the effective backup,
Category II systems are not allowed to be decreased to Category I.

TABLE 2
Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance

Item Tests and Evidence System Category

No.
I II III

1. Evidence of quality system

1.1 Quality plan for software M M

1.2 Inspection of components (only Hardware) from sub-suppliers M M

1.3 Quality control in production M M

1.4 Final test reports M M S

1.5 Traceability of software M M S

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 443
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8

Item Tests and Evidence System Category

No.
I II III

2. Hardware and software description

2.1 Software description M S

2.2 Hardware description M S

2.3 Failure analysis for safety related functions only S

3. Evidence of software testing

3.1 Evidence of software testing according to quality plan M S

3.2 Analysis regarding existence and fulfillment of programming procedures for S

safety related functions

4. Hardware tests

4.1 Type tests according to 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 W W

5. Software tests

5.1 Module tests M S

5.2 Subsystem tests M S

5.3 System test M S

6. Performance tests

6.1 Integration test M W

6.2 Fault simulation W W

6.3 Factory Acceptance Test M W W

7. On-board test

7.1 Complete system test M W W

7.2 Integration test W W

7.3 Wireless Data Communication Test W W W

8. Modifications

8.1 Tests after modifications M S/W S/W

Notes:
1 M = Evidence kept by manufacturer and upon request checked by ABS.
2 S = Evidence to be checked by ABS.
3 W = To be witnessed by the Surveyor.
4 All evidence may be subject to review and therefore, upon request, is to be submitted for review.
5 Definitions and notes relating to 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2 are given in Appendix 4-7-8-A1.
6 System categories are defined in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 1.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 444
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 8
Appendix 1 - Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of
Quality Assurance in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2

1 Evidence of Quality System

1.1 Quality Plan for Software

A plan for software lifecycle activities is to be produced which defines relevant procedures, responsibilities
and system documentation, including configuration management.

1.3 Inspection of Components (Only Hardware) from Sub-suppliers

Proof that components and/or sub-assemblies conform to specification.

1.5 Quality Control in Production

Evidence of quality assurance measures on production.

1.7 Final Test Reports

Reports from testing of the finished product and documentation of the test results.

1.9 Traceability of Software

Modification of program contents and data, as well as change of version, has to be carried out in
accordance with a procedure and is to be documented.

3 Hardware and Software Description

3.1 Software Description

Software is to be described:

● Description of the basic and communication software installed in each hardware unit
● Description of application software (not program listings)
● Description of functions, performance, constraints and dependencies between modules or other
components

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 445
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Appendix 1 - Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of Quality 4-7-8A1
Assurance in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2

3.3 Hardware Description

Hardware is to be described.

● System block diagram, showing the arrangement, input and output devices and interconnections
● Connection diagrams
● Details of input and output devices
● Details of power supplies

3.5 Failure Analysis for Safety Related Functions Only (For Example FMEA)
The analysis is to be carried out using appropriate means:

● Fault tree analysis

● Risk analysis
● Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA) or Failure Mode, Effects and Criticality Analysis
(FMECA)

The purpose is to demonstrate that for single failures, systems will fail to safety and that systems in
operation will not be lost or degraded beyond acceptable performance for system Category III.

In addition to the above for the FMEA or FMECA requirements of the safety related functions of computer
based systems, see additional FMEA or FMECA requirements of 4-7-1/7.3.8 for ACCU notation.

5 Evidence of Software Testing

5.1 Evidence of Software Testing According to Quality Plan

Procedures for verification and validation activities are to be established:

● Methods of testing
● Test programs producing
● Simulation

5.3 Analysis Regarding Existence and Fulfillment of Programming Procedures for Safety
Related Functions
Specific assurance methods are to be planned for verification and validation of satisfaction of
requirements:

● Diverse programs
● Program analysis and testing to detect formal errors and discrepancies to the description
● Simple structure

7 Hardware Tests

7.1 Type Tests

Type tests according to 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 10.

Special consideration may be given to tests witnessed and approved by another IACS member society. See
4-7-8/9.3.2.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 446
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Appendix 1 - Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of Quality 4-7-8A1
Assurance in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2

9 Software Tests

9.1 Module Tests

Software module tests are to provide evidence that each module performs its intended function and does
not perform unintended functions.

9.3 Subsystem Tests

Subsystem testing is to verify that modules interact correctly to perform the intended functions and do not
perform unintended functions.

9.5 System Tests

System testing is to verify that subsystems interact correctly to perform the functions in accordance with
specified requirements and do not perform unintended functions.

11 Performance Tests

11.1 Integration Tests

Integration testing for computer-based systems is to be carried out using satisfactorily tested system
software, and as far as practicable intended system components.

11.3 Fault Simulation

Faults are to be simulated as realistically as possible to demonstrate appropriate system fault detection and
system response. The results of any required failure analysis are to be observed.

11.5 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)

Factory acceptance testing is be carried out in accordance with a test program. Testing is to be based on
demonstrating that the computer-based system fulfills the requirements specified in Section 4-7-8.

13 On-board Tests

13.1 Complete System Test

Testing is to be performed on the completed system comprising actual hardware components with the final
application software, in accordance with an approved test program.

13.3 Integration Tests

On board testing is to verify that correct functionality has been achieved with all systems integrated.

13.5 Wireless Data Communication Tests

Tests during harbor and sea trials are to be conducted to demonstrate that radio-frequency transmission
from wireless data communication equipment does not cause failure of any equipment and does not cause
the wireless data communication equipment itself to fail as a result of electromagnetic interference during
expected operating conditions.

Notes:
1 Where electromagnetic interference caused by wireless data communication equipment is found to be causing
failure of equipment or systems, the layout and/or equipment is to be changed to prevent further failures from
occurring.
2 In the unlikely case when wireless data communication is permitted in systems of category III, the level of
witnessing will be determined during review. The scope of the testing for systems of category III will be more
extensive than for systems of category II.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 447
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 8 Appendix 1 - Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of Quality 4-7-8A1
Assurance in 4-7-8/9.3.3 TABLE 2

15 Modifications

15.1 Tests After Modifications

Modifications to approved systems are to be notified in advance.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 448
 PART 4
CHAPTER 7
Remote Propulsion Control and Automation

SECTION 9
Equipment

1 Application
Requirements of this Section apply to equipment that are components of the control, monitoring and safety
systems of propulsion machinery, vital auxiliary pumps and the electrical power generating plant including
its prime mover for craft to be assigned with ACCU or ABCU notation.

3 Environmental Test Conditions

Control, safety and monitoring equipment is to be designed such that it will successfully withstand the test
conditions stipulated in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9, as applicable.

Upon request by the manufacturer, equipment designed to environmental conditions in excess of those in
4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 may be tested to such conditions and certified accordingly.

5 Environmentally Controlled Space

Where equipment is designed to operate only in a temperature regulated environment the temperature
regulating system (such as air-conditioner) is to be backed up by a stand-by unit. Failure of the system is to
be alarmed.

7 Electric and Electronic Equipment

Equipment is to be constructed of robust, durable and flame-retardant material. It is to be designed to
incorporate the degree of enclosure protection as required by 4-6-3/9.7.3 TABLE 1. Wiring and cables are
to meet the requirements contained in 4-6-4/7.11.5 and 4-6-4/13 respectively.

Non-current carrying metal parts are to effectively earthed.

9 Hydraulic Equipment
Hydraulic equipment is to be suitable for the intended service, compatible with the working fluid and is to
be in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-4-6. The hydraulic fluid is to be non-flammable or have
a flash point above 157°C (315°F).

11 Pneumatic Equipment
Pneumatic equipment is to be suitable for the intended service and is to be in accordance with the
provisions of Section 4-4-6.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 449
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

13 Installations

13.1 General
The installation of equipment associated with automatic or remote control and monitoring systems is to be
carried out taking into consideration adverse effects that may be introduced by their exposure to
unintended temperatures, weather, vibration conditions, falling objects or liquid, electromagnetic
interference, high voltage systems, electric noise, etc. Additionally, the installation is to facilitate the
checking, adjustment and replacement of components, including filters and sensing devices, without
disrupting the normal operation of the system, as far as practicable.

13.3 Ranges in Ambient Temperatures (2020)

For the selection and installation of electronic equipment associated with control and monitoring systems,
a temperature range of 5°C (41°F) to 55°C (131°F) is to be considered for machinery space, control rooms,
accommodations and navigation bridge. When equipment is located inside panels or cubicles,
consideration is to be given to the temperature rise inside those panels due to the dissipation of heat from
its own components. See also 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9, Note 1.

Where compliance with the above temperature ranges cannot be met, consideration will be given to the
installation of equipment per 4-7-9/13.13.

13.5 Electromagnetic and Conducted Interference

In general, the installation of equipment associated with automatic or remote control and monitoring
systems in areas of unusual electromagnetic systems in areas of unusual electromagnetic sources is to be
avoided. Where the values per 4-7-2/15.7 TABLE 1 may be exceeded, appropriate measures are to be
implemented to reduce the effects of electromagnetic and conducted interference. To avoid electromagnetic
noise caused by circulating currents, the conductive shield and cable armor is to be earthed only at one end
of the cable. Description of the preventive measures to be followed is to be submitted for review.

13.7 Shielded Cables

To avoid possible signal interference, cables for automatic or remote control and monitoring systems
occupying the same cable tray, trunk or conduit with power cables are to be of the shielded type.

13.9 Electrical Grounding

Automatic or remote control and monitoring systems are not to have common earth conductors with
systems of higher voltage level.

13.11 Condensation
Electrical equipment liable to be exposed to ambient temperature fluctuations is to be provided with means
to prevent accumulation of moisture inside of the component’s enclosure (i.e., by the provisions of space
heaters that automatically energize upon shutdown or disconnection of the electrical component).

13.13 Cold Environment

Electrical equipment which may be adversely affected by the exposure to temperatures lower than those
for which they are designed are to be provided with suitable heating arrangements so that they may be
readily operated when needed. See 4-7-2/13.3.

13.15 Protection Against Falling Liquids or Leakage of Fluid Medium

Electrical equipment is not to be installed in the same compartment or cabinet containing equipment or
pipes carrying water, oil or steam unless effective measures are taken in order to protect the electrical
equipment from possible fluid leakage (i.e., welded connections, physical isolation together with suitable
draining arrangements, etc.).

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 450
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

13.17 Measuring and Sensing Devices

The installation of measuring and sensing elements is to permit their easy access for functional testing or
replacement.

13.19 Marking
All units, controllers, actuators, displays, terminal strips, cable and test points, etc., are to be clearly and
permanently marked. Their systems and system’s functions are to be included so that they can be easily
identified in associated drawings and instrument lists.

15 Equipment Tests

15.1 Prototype Environmental Testing

The following tests are to be carried out as a prototype testing in the presence of the Surveyor:

i) Power supply variation test (item 1 in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9)

ii) Vibration test (item 5 in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9)
iii) Inclination test (item 6 in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9)

Other prototype environmental tests specified in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9 are to be conducted by the
manufacturers; acceptance will be based on review of manufacturer’s certified test reports by ABS.
Omission of certain tests may be considered taking into consideration of the location of installation,
functionality, contained devices, etc. of the equipment.

In general, field sensors (e.g., pressure transmitters) and field devices (e.g., solenoid valves), circuit
breakers and cables may be exempted from tests specified in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9.

For computer based systems, the equipment to be tested includes microprocessors, storage devices, power
supply units, signal conditioners, analog/digital converters, computer monitors (visual display units),
keyboards, etc., but may exclude printer, data recording or logging device not required in this section.

15.3 Production Unit Certification

After assembled to a complete assembly unit or subassembly unit, each production unit of equipment used
in control, monitoring and safety systems is to be tested at the manufacturer’s shop in the presence of the
Surveyor to verify the tests in 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 10.

15.5 Type Approval Program

At the request of the manufacturer, equipment, subassemblies, or complete assemblies of control,
monitoring and safety systems may be considered for Type Approval in accordance with the provisions of
1-1-A2/5.3 (RQS) or 1-1-A2/5.5 (PQA). Where qualified, they may be listed on the ABS website as Type
Approved Products.

Those products type-approved under 1-1-A2/5.3 (RQS) will be acceptable, subject to renewal and updating
of the certificates, for the purposes of Part 4, Chapter 7 without the need for the Surveyor’s attendance at
the tests and inspections specified in 4-7-9/13.3 and the production unit certification specified in
4-7-9/13.3 and as described in 1-1-A2/5.7.1(a). For those products type-approved under 1-1-A2/5.3 (RQS),
the production unit certification for complete assembly or subassembly units is to be carried out in the
presence of the Surveyor as specified in 4-7-9/13.3 and as described in 1-1-A2/5.7.1(b).

For the updating or renewal of type approval, please refer to 1-1-A2/5.7.2 and 1-1-A2/5.7.4.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 451
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

TABLE 9
Type Tests for Control, Monitoring and Safety Equipment (1 July 2021)

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

1. Power supply --- AC Supply

variations
Combination Voltage Frequency
(a) electric
variation variation
permanent permanent
(%) (%)

1 +6 +5

2 +6 –5

3 – 10 –5

4 – 10 +5

Combination Voltage Frequency

transient transient
1.5 s (%) 5 s (%)

5 + 20 + 10

6 – 20 – 10

DC Supply

Voltage tolerance continuous ± 10%

Voltage cyclic variation 5%

Voltage ripple 10 %

Electric battery supply:

+ 30% to – 25% for equipment connected to
charging battery or as determined by the
charging / discharging characteristics,
including ripple voltage from the charging
device;
+ 20% to – 25% for equipment not connected
to the battery during charging

2. Power supply --- Pressure: ± 20%

variations Duration: 15 minutes
(Continued)
(b) Pneumatic
and hydraulic

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 452
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

3. Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature: 55°C (131°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) Equipment operating during
[see note 1], Test Bb for non- Duration: 16 hours conditioning and testing;
[see note 10] heat dissipating Or Functional test during the last
equipment Temperature: 70°C (158°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) hour at the test temperature.
Duration: 16 hours For equipment specified for
increased temperature the dry
heat test is to be conducted at
the agreed test temperature
and duration.

IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature: 55°C (131°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) Equipment operating during
Test Be for heat Duration: 16 hours conditioning and testing with
dissipating Or cooling system on if
equipment Temperature: 70°C (158°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) provided;
Duration: 16 hours Functional test during the last
hour at the test temperature;
For equipment specified for
increased temperature the dry
heat test is to be conducted at
the agreed test temperature
and duration.

3A. Dry heat – IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature: 70°C (158°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) Equipment operating during
Higher Temp Duration: 16 hours conditioning and testing;
(see Note 8) [See Note 8] Functional test during the last
(Optional hour at the test temperature;
Test) (2015)

4. Damp heat IEC 60068-2-30 - Temperature: 55°C (131°F) Measurement of insulation

(2016) Test Db Humidity: 95% resistance before test;
Duration: 2 cycles 2 x (12 + 12 hours) The test shall start with 25°C
± 3°C and at least 95%
humidity;
Equipment operating during
the complete first cycle and
switched off during second
cycle, except for functional
test;
Functional test during the first
2 hours of the first cycle at
the test temperature and
during the last 2 hours of the
second cycle at the test
temperature. Duration of the
second cycle can be extended
due to more convenient
handling of the functional
test.
Recovery at standard
atmosphere conditions;
Insulation resistance
measurements and
performance test.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 453
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

5. Vibration IEC 60068-2-6, 2.0 (+3/-0) Hz to 13.2 Hz – amplitude ±1 mm Duration: 90 minutes at 30 Hz

(2016) Test Fc (0.039 in.) in case of no resonance
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz – acceleration ±0.7 g conditions;
For severe vibration conditions, e.g., on diesel Duration: 90 minutes for each
engines, air compressors, etc.: resonance frequency at which
2.0 Hz to 25 Hz – amplitude ±1.6 mm (0.063 Q ≥ 2 is recorded;
in.) During the vibration test,
25.0 Hz to 100 Hz – acceleration ±4.0 g functional tests are to be
Note: carried out;
More severe conditions may exist for example Tests to be carried out in three
on exhaust manifolds or fuel oil injection mutually perpendicular
systems of diesel engines. For equipment planes;
specified for increased vibration levels, the It is recommended as
vibration test is to be conducted at the agreed guidance that Q does not
vibration level, frequency range and duration. exceed 5;
Values may be required to be in these cases 40 Where sweep test is to be
Hz to 2000 Hz – acceleration ± 10.0g at 600 carried out instead of the
°C duration 90 min. discrete frequency test and a
number of resonant
frequencies are detected close
to each other duration of the
test is to be 120 min. Sweep
over a restricted frequency
range between 0.8 and 1.2
times the critical frequencies
can be used where
appropriate. Note: Critical
frequency is a frequency at
which the equipment being
tested may exhibit:
● malfunction and/or
performance
deterioration
● mechanical resonances
and/or other response
effects occur, for
example, chatter

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 454
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

6. Inclination IEC 60092-504 Static 22.5° a) Inclined at an angle

of at least 22.5° to
the vertical;
b) Inclined to at an
angle of at least
22.5° on the other
side of the vertical
and in the same
plane as in (a);
c) Inclined to at an
angle of at least
22.5° to the vertical
and in plane at right
angles to that used
in (a);
d) Inclined to at an
angle of at least
22.5° on the other
side of the vertical
and in the same
plane as in (c)
Note: The duration of testing
in each position should be
sufficient to fully evaluate the
behavior of the equipment.

Dynamic 22.5° Using the directions defined

in a) to d) above, the
equipment is to be rolled to an
angle of 22.5° each side of the
vertical with a period of 10
seconds.
The test in each direction is to
be carried out for not less than
15 minutes
Note: These inclination tests
are normally not required for
equipment with no moving
parts.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 455
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

7. Insulation --- Rated Test Min. Insulation Insulation resistance test is to

resistance supply voltage Resistance be carried out before and
(2016) voltage (DC after: damp heat test, cold
Before After test
(V) voltage) test, salt mist test, and high
test (MΩ)
(V) voltage test;
(MΩ)
● between all phases and
Un ≤ 65 2 ×Un 10 1.0 earth;
(min. 24
● and where appropriate
V) between the phases.
Un is the rated (nominal)
voltage.

Un > 65 500 100 10 Note: Certain components,

e.g., for EMC protection, may
be required to be
disconnected for this test. For
high voltage equipment
reference is made to 4-6-5/1.

8. High voltage --- Rated Test voltage [AC voltage 50 or 60 Separate circuits are to be
voltage Hz] (V) tested against each other and
Un (V) all circuits connected with
each other tested against
Up to 65 2 ×Un + 500
earth;
66 to 250 1500 Printed circuits with
electronic components may
251 to 2000 be removed during the test;
500 Period of application of the
501 to 2500 test voltage: 1 minute
690

9. Cold IEC 60068-2-1 Temperature: +5°C (41°F) ± 3°C (5.4°F) Initial measurement of
Duration: 2 hours insulation resistance;
Or Equipment not operating
Temperature: -25°C (-13°F) ± 3°C (5.4°F) during conditioning and
Duration: 2 hours testing, except for functional
[See Note 2] test;
Functional test during the last
hour at the test temperature;
Insulation resistance
measurement and the
functional test after recovery.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 456
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

10. Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Four spraying periods with a storage of 7 days Initial measurement of
(2016) Test Kb after each. insulation resistance and
initial functional test;
Equipment not operating
during conditioning of the test
specimen;
Functional test on the 7th day
of each storage period;
Insulation resistance
measurement and
performance test: 4 to 6 hours
after recovery [See Note 3]
On completion of exposure,
the equipment shall be
examined to verify that
deterioration or corrosion (if
any) is superficial in nature.

11. Electrostatic IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 6 kV To simulate electrostatic

discharge Air discharge: 2 kV, 4 kV, 8 kV discharge as may occur when
(2016) Interval between single discharges: 1 sec. persons touch the appliance;
Number of pulses: 10 per polarity The test is to be confined to
According to test level 3. the points and surfaces that
can normally be reached by
the operator;
Performance Criterion B
[See Note 4].

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 457
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

12. Electro- IEC 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 MHz to 6 GHz To simulate electromagnetic
magnetic Modulation*: 80% AM at 1000 Hz fields radiated by different
field Field strength: 10 V/m transmitters;
Frequency sweep rate: ≤ 1.5 × 10-3 The test is to be confined to
decades/s (or 1% / 3 sec) the appliances exposed to
According to test level 3. direct radiation by
transmitters at their place of
installation.
Performance criterion A [See
Note 5]
* If for tests of equipment, an
input signal with a
modulation frequency of 1000
Hz is necessary, a modulation
frequency of 400 Hz may be
chosen.
If an equipment is intended to
receive radio signals for the
purpose of radio
communication (e.g. Wi-Fi
router, remote radio
controller), then the immunity
limits at its communication
frequency do not apply,
subject to the requirements in
4-7-8/7.9. [see Note 10].

13. Conducted AC: To simulate distortions in the

Low Frequency range: rated frequency to 200th power supply system
Frequency harmonic; generated, for instance, by
(2016) Test voltage (rms): 10% of supply to 15th electronic consumers and
harmonic reducing to 1% at 100th harmonic and coupled in as harmonics;
maintain this level to the 200th harmonic, Performance criterion A [See
minimum 3 V (rms), maximum 2 W Note 5]
DC: See 4-7-9/15.5 FIGURE 1 for
Frequency range: 50 Hz – 10 kHz; test set-up.
Test voltage (rms): 10% of supply, maximum 2 For keeping max. 2 W, the
W voltage of the test signal may
be lower.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 458
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

14. Conducted IEC 61000-4-6 AC, DC, I/O ports and signal/control lines: Equipment design and the
Radio Frequency range: 150 kHz – 80 MHz choice of materials are to
Frequency Amplitude: 3 V rms [See Note 6] simulate electromagnetic
(2016) Modulation ** : 80% AM at 1000 Hz fields coupled as high
Frequency sweep range: ≤ 1.5 × 10-3 decades/ frequency into the test
sec. (or 1% / 3 sec.) specimen via the connecting
According to test level 2. lines.
Performance criterion A [See
Note 5].
** If for tests of equipment,
an input signal with a
modulation frequency of 1000
Hz is necessary, a modulation
frequency of 400 Hz should be
chosen.

15. Electrical IEC 61000-4-4 Single pulse rise time: 5ns (between 10% and Arcs generated when
Fast 90% value) actuating electrical contacts;
Transients/ Single pulse width: 50 ns (50% value) Interface effect occurring on
Burst (2016) Amplitude (peak): 2 kV line on power supply the power supply, as well as at
port/earth; the external wiring of the test
1kV on I/O data control and communication specimen;
ports (coupling clamp); Performance criterion B
Pulse period: 300 ms; [See Note 4].
Burst duration: 15 ms;
Duration/polarity: 5 min
According to test level 3.

16. Surge (2016) IEC 61000-4-5 Test applicable to AC and DC power ports Interference generated for
Open-circuit voltage: instance, by switching “ON”
Pulse rise time: 1.2 μs (front time) or “OFF” high power
Pulse width: 50 μs (time to half value) inductive consumers;
Amplitude (peak): 1 kV line/earth; Test procedure in accordance
0.5 kV line/line with figure 10 of the standard
Short-circuit current: for equipment where power
Pulse rise time: 8 μs (front time) and signal lines are identical;
Pulse width: 20 μs (time to half value) Performance criterion B
Repetition rate: ≥ 1 pulse/min [See Note 4].
Number of pulses: 5 per polarity
Application: continuous
According to test level 2.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 459
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

17. Radiated CISPR 16-2-3 Limit below 1000 MHz Procedure in accordance with
Emission IEC 60945 for For equipment installed in the bridge and the standard but distance 3 m
[see Note 10] 156 - 165 MHz deck zone: (10 ft) between equipment
and antenna
Frequency range: Quasi peak Limits:
For the frequency band 156
0.15 – 0.3 MHz 80 – 52 dBμV/m MHz to 165 MHz the
measurement shall be
0.3 – 30 MHz 52 – 34 dBμV/m
recorded with a receiver
30 – 1000 MHz 54 dBμV/m bandwidth of 9 kHz (as per
IEC 60945)
except for:
Alternatively, the radiation
156 – 165 MHz 24 dBμV/m limit at a distance of 3 m from
the enclosure port over the
For equipment installed in the general
frequency 156 MHz to 165
power distribution zone:
MHz shall be 30 dB micro-
Frequency range: Quasi peak Limits: V/m peak.

0.15 – 30 MHz 80 – 50 dBμV/m

30 – 100 MHz 60 – 54 dBμV/m

100 – 1000 MHz 54 dBμV/m

except for:

156 – 165 MHz 24 dBμV/m

Limit above 1000 MHz Procedure in accordance with

the standard (distance 3 m
Frequency range: Average limit:
between equipment and
1000 - 6000 MHz 54 dBμV/m antenna)
Equipment intended to
transmit radio signals for the
purpose of radio
communication (e.g. Wi-Fi
router, remote radio
controller) may be exempted
from limit, within its
communication frequency
range, subject to the
requirements in 4-7-8/7.9.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 460
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note 7]

18. Conducted CISPR 16-2-1 Test applicable to AC and DC power ports

Emission
For equipment installed in the bridge and
(2016)
deck zone:

Frequency range: Limits:

10 – 150kHz 96 – 50 dBμV

150 – 350 kHz 60 – 50 dBμV

350 kHz – 30 MHz 50 dBμV

For equipment installed in the general

power distribution zone:

Frequency range: Limits:

10 – 150 kHz 120 – 69 dBμV

150 – 500 kHz 79 dBμV

0.5 – 30 MHz 73 dBμV

19. Flame IEC 60092-101 Flame application: 5 times 15 sec each. Interval The burnt out or damaged
retardant or IEC between each application: 15 sec. or 1 time 30 part of the specimen by not
60695-11-5 sec. more than 60 mm long.
Test criteria based upon application. No flame, no incandescence
The test is performed with the Equipment or in the event of a flame or
Under Test (EUT) or housing of the EUT incandescence being present,
applying needle-flame test method. it shall extinguish itself within
30 sec. of the removal of the
needle flame without full
combustion of the test
specimen.
Any dripping material shall
extinguish itself in such a way
as not to ignite a wrapping
tissue. The drip height is 200
mm ± 5 mm.

Notes:

1 Dry heat at 70°C is to be carried out to automation, control and instrumentation equipment subject to high
degree of heat, for example mounted in consoles, mounted in consoles, housings, etc., together with other heat
dissipating power equipment.

2 For equipment installed in non-weather protected locations or cold locations test is to be carried out at -25°C
(-13°F).

3 Salt mist test is to be carried out for equipment installed in weather exposed areas.

4 Performance criterion B (for transient phenomena): The equipment under test is to continue to operate as
intended after the tests. No degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed as defined in the
technical specification published by the manufacturer. During the test, degradation or loss of function or
performance which is self-recoverable is however allowed but no change of actual operating state or stored
data is allowed.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 461
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

5 Performance criterion A (for continuous phenomena): The equipment under test is to continue to operate as
intended during and after test. No degradation of performance or loss is allowed as defined in relevant
equipment standard and the technical specification published by the manufacturer.

6 For equipment installed on the bridge and deck zone, the test levels are to be increased to 10 V rms for spot
frequencies in accordance with IEC 60945 at 2, 3, 4, 6.2, 8.2, 12.6, 16.5, 18.8, 22, 25 MHz.

7 Alternative equivalent testing procedures may be accepted provided the requirements in the other columns are
complied with.

8 (2015) When requested, equipment which has undergone the higher temperature and duration test will be
recognized accordingly in the PDA certificate (see Appendix 1-1-A3 of the ABS Rules for Conditions of
Classification – Light and High-Speed Craft (Part 1)). The purpose of introducing the optional 3HT test is for
the convenience of equipment manufacturers should their clients request evidence that the equipment has been
tested to the higher temperature requirements noted in Item 3A of the Table.

9 (2016) As used in this document, and in contrast to a complete performance test, a functional test is a
simplified test sufficient to verify that the EUT has not suffered any deterioration caused by the individual
environmental tests.

10 Equipment for which the date of application for type approval certification is dated on or after 1 January 2020
or intended to be installed on ships contracted for construction on or after 1 January 2022. For equipment of
earlier dates (as applicable), the corresponding dry heat, electromagnetic field and radiated emission tests of
the 2019 edition of the Rules apply.

FIGURE 1
Test Set-up for Conducted Low Frequency Test
(See Test No. 13 of 4-7-9/15.5 TABLE 9)

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 462
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

TABLE 10
Tests for Unit Certification of Control, Monitoring and Safety Equipment (2016)

PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
TO: [See Note]

1. Visual - - Conformance to drawings,

inspection design data
Quality of workmanship and
construction

2. Performance Manufacturer’s Standard atmosphere conditions Confirmation that operation is in

test (2016) performance test Temperature: 25°C (77°F) ± 10°C (18°F) accordance with the
program based Relative humidity: 60% ± 30% requirements specified for
upon specification Air pressure: 96 kPa (0.98 kgf/cm2, 13.92 particular systems or equipment;
and relevant Rule psi) ± 10 kPa (0.10 kgf/cm2, 1.45 psi) Checking of self-monitoring
requirements. features;
When the EUT is Checking of specified protection
required to comply against an access to the memory;
with an Checking against effect of
international unerroneous use of control
performance elements in the case of computer
standard (e.g., systems.
protection relays),
verification of
requirements in the
standard are to be
part of the
performance
testing required in
this initial test and
subsequent
performance tests
after
environmental
testing where
required by
4-7-9/15.5 TABLE
9.

3. External --- 3 interruptions during 5 minutes; The time of 5 minutes may be

Power supply switching-off time 30 s each case exceeded if the equipment under
failure test (EUT) needs a longer time
for start up, for example, booting
sequence.
For equipment which requires
booting, one additional power
supply interruption during
booting is to be performed.
Verification of:
the specified action of
equipment upon loss and
restoration of supply;
possible corruption of program
or data held in programmable
electronic systems, where
applicable.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 463
Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9

Note: Alternative equivalent testing procedures may be accepted provided the requirements in the other columns are
complied with.

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH SPEED CRAFT • 2023 464